2013
ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code
AN INTERNATIONAL CODE
IX
Welding, Brazing, and
Fusing Qualifications
Qualification Standard for Welding,
Brazing, and Fusing Procedures;
Welders; Brazers; and Welding,
Brazing, and Fusing Operators
27. 2013 ASME FINAL Covers_IX Qual Std MECH 5.9.indd 1
5/15/13 5:10 PM
AN INTERNATIONAL CODE
2013 ASME Boiler &
Pressure Vessel Code
2013 Edition
July 1, 2013
IX
Qualification Standard for
Welding, Brazing, and Fusing
Procedures; Welders; Brazers;
and Welding, Brazing, and
Fusing Operators
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
on Welding, Brazing, and Fusing
Two Park Avenue • New York, NY • 10016 USA
Date of Issuance: July 1, 2013
This international code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National Standards and it is an American National Standard. The Standards Committee that approved the code
or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests have had an opportunity to participate. The proposed code or standard was made available for public review and comment that provides an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the publicat-large.
ASME does not “approve,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any
items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for
infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such
rights, is entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as
government or industry endorsement of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
The endnotes in this document (if any) are part of this American National Standard.
ASME collective membership mark
Certification Mark
The above ASME symbol is registered in the U.S. Patent Office.
“ASME” is the trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic retrieval
system or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 56-3934
Printed in the United States of America
Adopted by the Council of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1914; latest edition 2013.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Two Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990
Copyright © 2013 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statement of Policy on the Use of the Certification Mark and Code Authorization in Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statement of Policy on the Use of ASME Marking to Identify Manufactured Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Changes in BC Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross-Referencing and Stylistic Changes in the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part QG
x
xii
xiv
xiv
xv
xvii
xxxii
xxxv
xxxix
xlii
General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
4
Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
Article I
QW-100
QW-110
QW-120
QW-130
QW-140
QW-150
QW-160
QW-170
QW-180
QW-190
Welding General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weld Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Positions for Groove Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Positions for Fillet Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types and Purposes of Tests and Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guided‐Bend Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notch‐Toughness Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet‐Weld Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Tests and Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
14
14
14
15
15
16
17
18
18
19
Article II
QW-200
QW-210
QW-220
QW-250
QW-290
Welding Procedure Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation of Test Coupon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid Laser-GMAW Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temper Bead Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
27
30
31
32
70
Article III
QW-300
QW-310
QW-320
QW-350
QW-360
QW-380
Welding Performance Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification Test Coupons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retests and Renewal of Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables for Welders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables for Welding Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
74
76
76
77
79
80
Article IV
QW-400
QW-410
QW-420
QW-430
QW-440
QW-450
Welding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base Metal Groupings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F‐Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weld Metal Chemical Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
82
92
96
166
176
177
QG-100
QG-109
Part QW
iii
QW-460
QW-470
QW-490
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Etching — Processes and Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
redesignated as QG-109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
228
229
Article V
QW-500
QW-510
QW-520
QW-530
QW-540
Standard Welding Procedure Specifications (SWPSs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adoption of SWPSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of SWPSs Without Discrete Demonstration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Production Use of SWPSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
230
230
230
231
231
Brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
Article XI
QB-100
QB-110
QB-120
QB-140
QB-150
QB-160
QB-170
QB-180
Brazing General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braze Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Positions for Lap, Butt, Scarf, or Rabbet Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types and Purposes of Tests and Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guided‐Bend Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peel Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sectioning Tests and Workmanship Coupons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
232
232
232
233
233
234
235
235
Article XII
QB-200
QB-210
QB-250
Brazing Procedure Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation of Test Coupon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brazing Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
236
236
237
238
Article XIII
QB-300
QB-310
QB-320
QB-350
Brazing Performance Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification Test Coupons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retests and Renewal of Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brazing Variables for Brazers and Brazing Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
242
242
243
243
243
Article XIV
QB-400
QB-410
QB-420
QB-430
QB-450
QB-460
Brazing Data
Variables . . . .
Technique . . .
P‐Numbers . .
F‐Numbers . .
Specimens . .
Graphics . . . .
...........................................
...........................................
...........................................
...........................................
...........................................
...........................................
...........................................
244
244
245
245
245
248
252
Plastic Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
Article XXI
QF-100
QF-110
QF-120
QF-130
QF-140
Plastic Fusing General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fused Joint Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Acquisition and Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examinations and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
271
271
271
271
272
Article XXII
QF-200
QF-220
QF-250
Fusing Procedure Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Fusing Procedure Specification (SFPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fusing Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
274
274
275
277
Plastic Fusing Performance Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type of Test Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limits of Qualified Positions and Diameters (See QF-461) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
279
279
279
279
279
Part QB
Part QF
Article XXIII
QF-300
QF-301
QF-302
QF-303
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
iv
QF-305
QF-310
QF-311
QF-320
QF-321
QF-322
QF-360
Fusing Machine Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qualification Test Coupons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Coupons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retests and Renewal of Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expiration and Renewal of Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Essential Variables for Performance Qualification of Fusing Machine Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
279
280
280
280
280
280
Article XXIV
QF-400
QF-401
QF-402
QF-403
QF-404
QF-405
QF-406
QF-407
QF-420
QF-450
QF-460
QF-461
QF-480
QF-490
QF-491
QF-492
Plastic Fusing Data .
Variables . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Material . . . . . . . . . . .
Position . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Conditions . .
Equipment . . . . . . . . .
Technique . . . . . . . . . .
Material Groupings . .
Pipe Fusing Limits . . .
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . .
Positions . . . . . . . . . . .
Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions . . . . . . . . .
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
..............................................
281
281
281
281
281
281
281
281
281
281
282
282
282
289
293
293
293
Nonmandatory Appendix B
Welding and Brazing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
Nonmandatory Appendix D
P‐Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
Mandatory Appendix E
Permitted SWPSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
Mandatory Appendix F
Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
327
Nonmandatory Appendix G
Guidance for the Use of U.S. Customary and SI Units in the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
328
Nonmandatory Appendix H
Waveform Controlled Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
Mandatory Appendix J
Guideline for Requesting P-Number Assignments for Base Metals not
Listed in Table QW/QB-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
333
Guidance on Invoking Section IX Requirements in Other Codes, Standards, Specifications, and Contract Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
334
Typical Single and Multibead Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Single Bead Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rounded Indication Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positions of Welds — Groove Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positions of Welds — Fillet Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groove Welds in Plate — Test Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groove Welds in Pipe — Test Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet Welds in Plate — Test Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet Welds in Pipe — Test Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stud Welds — Test Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stud Welds — Welding Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating Tool Design Characteristics (FSW) Referenced in QW-410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension — Reduced Section — Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13
21
183
184
185
185
186
187
188
188
190
191
QF-361
Nonmandatory Appendix K
FIGURES
QG-109.2.1
QG-109.2.2
QW-191.1.2.2(b)(4)
QW-461.1
QW-461.2
QW-461.3
QW-461.4
QW-461.5
QW-461.6
QW-461.7
QW-461.8
QW-461.10
QW-462.1(a)
v
280
280
QW-462.1(b)
QW-462.1(c)
QW-462.1(d)
QW-462.1(e)
QW-462.2
QW-462.3(a)
QW-462.3(b)
QW-462.4(a)
QW-462.4(b)
QW-462.4(c)
QW-462.4(d)
QW-462.5(a)
QW-462.5(b)
QW-462.5(c)
QW-462.5(d)
QW-462.5(e)
QW-462.7.1
QW-462.7.2
QW-462.7.3
QW-462.8.1
QW-462.8.2
QW-462.9
QW-462.12
QW-462.13
QW-463.1(a)
QW-463.1(b)
QW-463.1(c)
QW-463.1(d)
QW-463.1(e)
QW-463.1(f)
QW-463.2(a)
QW-463.2(b)
QW--463.2(c)
QW-463.2(d)
QW-463.2(e)
QW-463.2(f)
QW-463.2(g)
QW-463.2(h)
QW-464.1
QW-464.2
QW-466.1
QW-466.2
QW-466.3
QW-466.4
QW-466.5
QW-466.6
QW-469.1
QW-469.2
QB-461.1
QB-461.2
QB-462.1(a)
Tension — Reduced Section — Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension — Reduced Section Alternate for Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension — Reduced Section — Turned Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension — Full Section — Small Diameter Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face and Root Bends — Transverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face and Root Bends — Longitudinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet Welds in Plate — Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet Welds in Plate — Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet Welds in Pipe — Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet Welds in Pipe — Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chemical Analysis and Hardness Specimen Corrosion‐Resistant and Hard‐Facing Weld
Metal Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chemical Analysis Specimen, Hard‐Facing Overlay Hardness, and Macro Test Location
(s) for Corrosion‐Resistant and Hard‐Facing Weld Metal Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe Bend Specimen — Corrosion‐Resistant Weld Metal Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plate Bend Specimens — Corrosion‐Resistant Weld Metal Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plate Macro, Hardness, and Chemical Analysis Specimens — Corrosion‐Resistant and
Hard‐Facing Weld Metal Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resistance Seam Weld Test Coupon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seam Weld Section Specimen Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resistance Weld Nugget Section Test Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spot Welds in Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seam Weld Peel Test Specimen and Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spot Welds in Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nomenclature for Temper Bead Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement of Temper Bead Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates — Less Than 3/4 in. (19 mm) Thickness Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates — 3/4 in. (19 mm) and Over Thickness and Alternate From 3/8 in. (10 mm) but
Less Than 3/4 in. (19 mm) Thickness Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates — Longitudinal Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notch‐Toughness Test Specimen Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates — Less Than 3/4 in. (19 mm) Thickness Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates — 3/4 in. (19 mm) and Over Thickness and Alternate From 3/8 in. (10 mm) but
Less Than 3/4 in. (19 mm) Thickness Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates — Longitudinal Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe — NPS 10 (DN 250) Assembly Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NPS 6 (DN 150) or NPS 8 (DN 200) Assembly Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure Qualification Test Coupon and Test Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Qualification Test Coupons and Test Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Jig Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guided‐Bend Roller Jig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guided‐Bend Wrap Around Jig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stud‐Weld Bend Jig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque Testing Arrangement for Stud Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suggested Type Tensile Test Figure for Stud Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Butt Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternative Butt Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Flow Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension — Reduced Section for Butt and Scarf Joints — Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
191
192
192
193
194
195
196
196
197
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
203
204
204
205
206
207
211
212
212
212
213
213
214
214
215
215
216
216
217
217
218
219
220
221
222
224
224
225
226
227
227
227
252
253
254
QB-462.1(b)
QB-462.1(c)
QB-462.1(e)
QB-462.1(f)
QB-462.2(a)
QB-462.2(b)
QB-462.3
QB-462.4
QB-462.5
QB-463.1(a)
QB-463.1(b)
QB-463.1(c)
QB-463.1(d)
QB-463.1(e)
QB-463.2(a)
QB-463.2(b)
QB-463.2(c)
QB-466.1
QB-466.2
QB-466.3
QF-221.1
QF-461.1
QF-461.2
QF-462
QF-463
QF-464
QF-465
TABLES
QW-252
QW-252.1
QW-253
QW-253.1
QW-254
QW-254.1
QW-255
QW-255.1
QW-256
QW-256.1
QW-257
QW-257.1
QW-258
QW-258.1
QW-259
QW-260
QW-261
QW-262
QW-263
QW-264
QW-264.1
QW-265
QW-266
QW-267
Tension — Reduced Section for Butt, Lap, and Scarf Joints — Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension — Reduced Section for Lap and Rabbet Joints — Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension — Full Section for Lap, Scarf, and Butt Joints — Small Diameter Pipe . . . . . . .
Support Fixture for Reduced‐Section Tension Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transverse First and Second Surface Bends — Plate and Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Longitudinal First and Second Surface Bends — Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap Joint Peel Specimen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap Joint Section Specimen (see QB-181) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Workmanship Coupons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe — Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plates Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guided‐Bend Jig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guided‐Bend Roller Jig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guided‐Bend Wrap Around Jig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Minimum Melt Bead Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fusing Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fusing Test Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross Section of Upset Beads for Butt-Fused PE Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bend Test Specimen Removal, Configuration, and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HSTIT Specimen Configuration and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HSTIT Specimen Failure Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
255
256
257
258
259
259
260
260
261
262
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
270
276
282
283
284
285
287
288
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Oxyfuel Gas Welding (OFW) . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Oxyfuel Gas Welding (OFW) . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Shielded Metal‐Arc Welding (SMAW)
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Shielded Metal‐Arc Welding (SMAW)
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Submerged‐Arc Welding (SAW) . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Submerged‐Arc Welding (SAW) . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Metal‐Arc Welding (GMAW and
FCAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Metal‐Arc Welding (GMAW and
FCAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Tungsten‐Arc Welding (GTAW)
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Tungsten‐Arc Welding (GTAW)
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Plasma‐Arc Welding (PAW) . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Plasma‐Arc Welding (PAW) . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electroslag Welding (ESW) . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electroslag Welding (ESW) . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electrogas Welding (EGW) . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electron Beam Welding (EBW) . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Stud Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Inertia and Continuous Drive Friction
Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Resistance Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Laser Beam Welding (LBW) . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Laser Beam Welding (LBW) . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Flash Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Diffusion Welding (DFW) . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications — Friction Stir Welding (FSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
34
35
36
37
39
vii
40
42
43
45
46
48
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
QW-268
QW-269
QW-269.1
QW-290.4
QW-352
QW-353
QW-354
QW-355
QW-356
QW-357
QW-416
QW/QB-422
QW-432
QW-442
QW-451.1
QW-451.2
QW-451.3
QW-451.4
QW-452.1(a)
QW-452.1(b)
QW-452.3
QW-452.4
QW-452.5
QW-452.6
QW-453
QW-461.9
QW-462.10(a)
QW-462.10(b)
QW-462.10(c)
QW-473.3-1
QB-252
QB-253
QB-254
QB-255
QB-256
QB-257
QB-432
QB-451.1
QB-451.2
QB-451.3
QB-451.4
QB-451.5
QB-452.1
QB-452.2
QF-144.2
QF-221.2
QF-254
QF-362
QF-422
QF-452.3
F-100
FORMS
QF-482
QF-483
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Hybrid Laser-GMAW . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Hybrid Plasma-GMAW . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Hybrid Plasma-GMAW . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables for Temper Bead Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oxyfuel Gas Welding (OFW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shielded Metal‐Arc Welding (SMAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Semiautomatic Submerged‐Arc Welding (SAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Semiautomatic Gas Metal‐Arc Welding (GMAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual and Semiautomatic Gas Tungsten‐Arc Welding (GTAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual and Semiautomatic Plasma‐Arc Welding (PAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F‐Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A‐Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groove‐Weld Tension Tests and Transverse‐Bend Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groove‐Weld Tension Tests and Longitudinal‐Bend Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet‐Weld Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet Welds Qualified by Groove‐Weld Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Groove‐Weld Diameter Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Small Diameter Fillet‐Weld Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet‐Weld Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fillet Qualification by Groove‐Weld Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure/Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hard‐Facing
(Wear‐Resistant) and Corrosion‐Resistant Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Qualification — Position and Diameter Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shear Strength Requirements for Spot or Projection Weld Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shear Strength Requirements for Spot or Projection Weld Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shear Strength Requirements for Spot or Projection Weld Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Makeup of Equations for Aqua Regia and Lepito’s Etch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torch Brazing (TB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Furnace Brazing (FB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Induction Brazing (IB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resistance Brazing (RB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dip Brazing — Salt or Flux Bath (DB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dip Brazing — Molten Metal Bath (DB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F‐Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension Tests and Transverse‐Bend Tests — Butt and Scarf Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension Tests and Longitudinal Bend Tests — Butt and Scarf Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension Tests and Peel Tests — LAP Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tension Tests and Section Tests — Rabbet Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section Tests — Workmanship Coupon Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peel or Section Tests — Butt, Scarf, Lap, Rabbet Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section Tests — Workmanship Specimen Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing Speed Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Heater Plate Removal Time for Pipe-to-Pipe Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fusing Variables Procedure Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Essential Variables Applicable to Fusing Machine Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Material Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe Fusing Diameter Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
64
66
71
78
78
78
78
78
79
95
97
167
176
177
178
178
178
179
179
180
180
180
181
.................................................................................
.................................................................................
289
290
viii
181
189
208
209
210
228
238
239
239
240
240
241
246
248
248
249
249
250
251
251
273
277
278
280
281
282
327
QF-483
QF-484
QF-485
QW-482
QW-483
QW-484A
QW-484B
QW-485
QB-482
QB-483
QB-484
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
291
292
293
296
298
300
301
302
303
304
305
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
336
ix
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
LIST OF SECTIONS
ð13Þ
SECTIONS
I
Rules for Construction of Power Boilers
II
Materials
• Part A — Ferrous Material Specifications
• Part B — Nonferrous Material Specifications
• Part C — Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals
• Part D — Properties (Customary)
• Part D — Properties (Metric)
III
Rules for Construction of Nuclear Facility Components
• Subsection NCA — General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2
• Appendices
• Division 1
– Subsection NB — Class 1 Components
– Subsection NC — Class 2 Components
– Subsection ND — Class 3 Components
– Subsection NE — Class MC Components
– Subsection NF — Supports
– Subsection NG — Core Support Structures
– Subsection NH — Class 1 Components in Elevated Temperature Service
• Division 2 — Code for Concrete Containments
• Division 3 — Containments for Transportation and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High Level Radioactive
Material and Waste
• Division 5 — High Temperature Reactors
IV
Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers
V
Nondestructive Examination
VI
Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers
VII
Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers
VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels
• Division 1
• Division 2 — Alternative Rules
• Division 3 — Alternative Rules for Construction of High Pressure Vessels
IX
Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications
X
Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels
XI
Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components
XII
Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks
x
INTERPRETATIONS
ASME issues written replies to inquiries concerning interpretation of technical aspects of the Code.
Interpretations of the Code are posted in January and July at http://cstools.asme.org/interpretations.cfm. Any Interpretations issued during the previous two calendar years are included with the publication of the applicable Section of the
Code. Interpretations of Section III, Divisions 1 and 2 and Section III Appendices are included with Subsection NCA.
CODE CASES
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code committees meet regularly to consider proposed additions and revisions to the
Code and to formulate Cases to clarify the intent of existing requirements or provide, when the need is urgent, rules
for materials or constructions not covered by existing Code rules. Those Cases that have been adopted will appear in
the appropriate 2013 Code Cases book: “Boilers and Pressure Vessels” or “Nuclear Components.” Supplements will be
sent automatically to the purchasers of the Code Cases books up to the publication of the 2015 Code.
xi
ð13Þ
FOREWORD
(This Foreword is provided as an aid to the user and is not part of the rules of this Code.)
In 1911, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers established the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee to formulate standard rules for the construction of steam boilers and other pressure vessels. In 2009, the Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Committee was superseded by the following committees:
(a) Committee on Power Boilers (I)
(b) Committee on Materials (II)
(c) Committee on Construction of Nuclear Facility Components (III)
(d) Committee on Heating Boilers (IV)
(e) Committee on Nondestructive Examination (V)
(f) Committee on Pressure Vessels (VIII)
(g) Committee on Welding, Brazing, and Fusing (IX)
(h) Committee on Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels (X)
(i) Committee on Nuclear Inservice Inspection (XI)
(j) Committee on Transport Tanks (XII)
Where reference is made to “the Committee” in this Foreword, each of these committees is included individually and
collectively.
The Committee's function is to establish rules of safety relating only to pressure integrity, which govern the
construction* of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks, and nuclear components, and the inservice inspection of nuclear components and transport tanks. The Committee also interprets these rules when questions arise regarding their
intent. This Code does not address other safety issues relating to the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, transport
tanks, or nuclear components, or the inservice inspection of nuclear components or transport tanks. Users of the Code
should refer to the pertinent codes, standards, laws, regulations, or other relevant documents for safety issues other than
those relating to pressure integrity. Except for Sections XI and XII, and with a few other exceptions, the rules do not, of
practical necessity, reflect the likelihood and consequences of deterioration in service related to specific service fluids or
external operating environments. In formulating the rules, the Committee considers the needs of users, manufacturers,
and inspectors of pressure vessels. The objective of the rules is to afford reasonably certain protection of life and property, and to provide a margin for deterioration in service to give a reasonably long, safe period of usefulness. Advancements in design and materials and evidence of experience have been recognized.
This Code contains mandatory requirements, specific prohibitions, and nonmandatory guidance for construction activities and inservice inspection and testing activities. The Code does not address all aspects of these activities and those
aspects that are not specifically addressed should not be considered prohibited. The Code is not a handbook and cannot
replace education, experience, and the use of engineering judgment. The phrase engineering judgement refers to technical
judgments made by knowledgeable engineers experienced in the application of the Code. Engineering judgments must be
consistent with Code philosophy, and such judgments must never be used to overrule mandatory requirements or specific
prohibitions of the Code.
The Committee recognizes that tools and techniques used for design and analysis change as technology progresses and
expects engineers to use good judgment in the application of these tools. The designer is responsible for complying with
Code rules and demonstrating compliance with Code equations when such equations are mandatory. The Code neither
requires nor prohibits the use of computers for the design or analysis of components constructed to the requirements
of the Code. However, designers and engineers using computer programs for design or analysis are cautioned that they
are responsible for all technical assumptions inherent in the programs they use and the application of these programs to
their design.
*
Construction, as used in this Foreword, is an all-inclusive term comprising materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, testing, certification, and pressure relief.
xii
The rules established by the Committee are not to be interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing any proprietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the manufacturer's freedom to choose any method of design or any
form of construction that conforms to the Code rules.
The Committee meets regularly to consider revisions of the rules, new rules as dictated by technological development,
Code Cases, and requests for interpretations. Only the Committee has the authority to provide official interpretations of
this Code. Requests for revisions, new rules, Code Cases, or interpretations shall be addressed to the Secretary in writing
and shall give full particulars in order to receive consideration and action (see Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees). Proposed revisions to the Code resulting from inquiries will be presented to the Committee for appropriate action. The action of the Committee becomes effective only after confirmation by
ballot of the Committee and approval by ASME. Proposed revisions to the Code approved by the Committee are submitted
to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and published at http://cstools.asme.org/csconnect/public/index.cfm?PublicReview=Revisions to invite comments from all interested persons. After public review and final approval
by ASME, revisions are published at regular intervals in Editions of the Code.
The Committee does not rule on whether a component shall or shall not be constructed to the provisions of the Code.
The scope of each Section has been established to identify the components and parameters considered by the Committee
in formulating the Code rules.
Questions or issues regarding compliance of a specific component with the Code rules are to be directed to the ASME
Certificate Holder (Manufacturer). Inquiries concerning the interpretation of the Code are to be directed to the Committee. ASME is to be notified should questions arise concerning improper use of an ASME Certification Mark.
When required by context in this Section, the singular shall be interpreted as the plural, and vice versa, and the feminine, masculine, or neuter gender shall be treated as such other gender as appropriate.
xiii
STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF THE CERTIFICATION
MARK AND CODE AUTHORIZATION IN ADVERTISING
ASME has established procedures to authorize qualified organizations to perform various activities in accordance with
the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. It is the aim of the Society to provide recognition of organizations so authorized. An organization holding authorization to perform various activities in accordance with the requirements of the Code may state this capability in its advertising literature.
Organizations that are authorized to use the Certification Mark for marking items or constructions that have been constructed and inspected in compliance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are issued Certificates of Authorization. It is the aim of the Society to maintain the standing of the Certification Mark for the benefit of the users, the
enforcement jurisdictions, and the holders of the Certification Mark who comply with all requirements.
Based on these objectives, the following policy has been established on the usage in advertising of facsimiles of the
Certification Mark, Certificates of Authorization, and reference to Code construction. The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, or activity and there shall be no statements or implications that might so indicate. An organization holding the Certification Mark and/or a Certificate of
Authorization may state in advertising literature that items, constructions, or activities “are built (produced or performed) or activities conducted in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,”
or “meet the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.” An ASME corporate logo shall not be used
by any organization other than ASME.
The Certification Mark shall be used only for stamping and nameplates as specifically provided in the Code. However,
facsimiles may be used for the purpose of fostering the use of such construction. Such usage may be by an association or a
society, or by a holder of the Certification Mark who may also use the facsimile in advertising to show that clearly
specified items will carry the Certification Mark. General usage is permitted only when all of a manufacturer’s items
are constructed under the rules.
STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF ASME MARKING TO
IDENTIFY MANUFACTURED ITEMS
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code provides rules for the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, and nuclear
components. This includes requirements for materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, and stamping. Items
constructed in accordance with all of the applicable rules of the Code are identified with the official Certification Mark
described in the governing Section of the Code.
Markings such as “ASME,” “ASME Standard,” or any other marking including “ASME” or the Certification Mark shall not
be used on any item that is not constructed in accordance with all of the applicable requirements of the Code.
Items shall not be described on ASME Data Report Forms nor on similar forms referring to ASME that tend to imply that
all Code requirements have been met when, in fact, they have not been. Data Report Forms covering items not fully
complying with ASME requirements should not refer to ASME or they should clearly identify all exceptions to the ASME
requirements.
xiv
ð13Þ
SUBMITTAL OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES TO THE BOILER AND
PRESSURE VESSEL STANDARDS COMMITTEES
1
INTRODUCTION
(a) The following information provides guidance to Code users for submitting technical inquiries to the committees. See
Guideline on the Approval of New Materials Under the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code in Section II, Parts C and D
for additional requirements for requests involving adding new materials to the Code. Technical inquiries include requests
for revisions or additions to the Code rules, requests for Code Cases, and requests for Code Interpretations, as described
below.
(1) Code Revisions. Code revisions are considered to accommodate technological developments, address administrative requirements, incorporate Code Cases, or to clarify Code intent.
(2) Code Cases. Code Cases represent alternatives or additions to existing Code rules. Code Cases are written as a
question and reply, and are usually intended to be incorporated into the Code at a later date. When used, Code Cases
prescribe mandatory requirements in the same sense as the text of the Code. However, users are cautioned that not
all jurisdictions or owners automatically accept Code Cases. The most common applications for Code Cases are:
(-a) to permit early implementation of an approved Code revision based on an urgent need
(-b) to permit the use of a new material for Code construction
(-c) to gain experience with new materials or alternative rules prior to incorporation directly into the Code
(3) Code Interpretations. Code Interpretations provide clarification of the meaning of existing rules in the Code, and
are also presented in question and reply format. Interpretations do not introduce new requirements. In cases where
existing Code text does not fully convey the meaning that was intended, and revision of the rules is required to support
an interpretation, an Intent Interpretation will be issued and the Code will be revised.
(b) The Code rules, Code Cases, and Code Interpretations established by the committees are not to be considered as
approving, recommending, certifying, or endorsing any proprietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the freedom of manufacturers, constructors, or owners to choose any method of design or any form of construction that conforms
to the Code rules.
(c) Inquiries that do not comply with these provisions or that do not provide sufficient information for a committee’s
full understanding may result in the request being returned to the inquirer with no action.
2
INQUIRY FORMAT
Submittals to a committee shall include:
(a) Purpose. Specify one of the following:
(1) revision of present Code rules
(2) new or additional Code rules
(3) Code Case
(4) Code Interpretation
(b) Background. Provide the information needed for the committee’s understanding of the inquiry, being sure to
include reference to the applicable Code Section, Division, Edition, Addenda (if applicable), paragraphs, figures, and
tables. Preferably, provide a copy of the specific referenced portions of the Code.
(c) Presentations. The inquirer may desire or be asked to attend a meeting of the committee to make a formal presentation or to answer questions from the committee members with regard to the inquiry. Attendance at a committee meeting
shall be at the expense of the inquirer. The inquirer’s attendance or lack of attendance at a meeting shall not be a basis for
acceptance or rejection of the inquiry by the committee.
xv
3
CODE REVISIONS OR ADDITIONS
Requests for Code revisions or additions shall provide the following:
(a) Proposed Revisions or Additions. For revisions, identify the rules of the Code that require revision and submit a copy
of the appropriate rules as they appear in the Code, marked up with the proposed revision. For additions, provide the
recommended wording referenced to the existing Code rules.
(b) Statement of Need. Provide a brief explanation of the need for the revision or addition.
(c) Background Information. Provide background information to support the revision or addition, including any data or
changes in technology that form the basis for the request that will allow the committee to adequately evaluate the
proposed revision or addition. Sketches, tables, figures, and graphs should be submitted as appropriate. When applicable,
identify any pertinent paragraph in the Code that would be affected by the revision or addition and identify paragraphs in
the Code that reference the paragraphs that are to be revised or added.
4
CODE CASES
Requests for Code Cases shall provide a Statement of Need and Background Information similar to that defined in 3(b)
and 3(c), respectively, for Code revisions or additions. The urgency of the Code Case (e.g., project underway or imminent,
new procedure, etc.) must be defined and it must be confirmed that the request is in connection with equipment that will
bear the Certification Mark, with the exception of Section XI applications. The proposed Code Case should identify the
Code Section and Division, and be written as a Question and a Reply in the same format as existing Code Cases. Requests
for Code Cases should also indicate the applicable Code Editions and Addenda (if applicable) to which the proposed Code
Case applies.
5
CODE INTERPRETATIONS
(a) Requests for Code Interpretations shall provide the following:
(1) Inquiry. Provide a condensed and precise question, omitting superfluous background information and, when possible, composed in such a way that a “yes” or a “no” Reply, with brief provisos if needed, is acceptable. The question should
be technically and editorially correct.
(2) Reply. Provide a proposed Reply that will clearly and concisely answer the Inquiry question. Preferably, the Reply
should be “yes” or “no,” with brief provisos if needed.
(3) Background Information. Provide any background information that will assist the committee in understanding
the proposed Inquiry and Reply.
(b) Requests for Code Interpretations must be limited to an interpretation of a particular requirement in the Code or a
Code Case. The committee cannot consider consulting type requests such as the following:
(1) a review of calculations, design drawings, welding qualifications, or descriptions of equipment or parts to determine compliance with Code requirements;
(2) a request for assistance in performing any Code-prescribed functions relating to, but not limited to, material selection, designs, calculations, fabrication, inspection, pressure testing, or installation;
(3) a request seeking the rationale for Code requirements.
6
SUBMITTALS
Submittals to and responses from the committees shall meet the following:
(a) Submittal. Inquiries from Code users shall be in English and preferably be submitted in typewritten form; however,
legible handwritten inquiries will also be considered. They shall include the name, address, telephone number, fax number, and e-mail address, if available, of the inquirer and be mailed to the following address:
Secretary
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Two Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
As an alternative, inquiries may be submitted via e-mail to: SecretaryBPV@asme.org.
(b) Response. The Secretary of the appropriate committee shall acknowledge receipt of each properly prepared inquiry
and shall provide a written response to the inquirer upon completion of the requested action by the committee.
xvi
ð13Þ
PERSONNEL
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees,
Subgroups, and Working Groups
January 1, 2013
MARINE CONFERENCE GROUP
TECHNICAL OVERSIGHT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE (TOMC)
J. G. Feldstein, Chair
T. P. Pastor, Vice Chair
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary
R. W. Barnes
R. J. Basile
J. E. Batey
T. L. Bedeaux
D. L. Berger
D. A. Canonico
A. Chaudouet
R. P. Deubler
D. A. Douin
R. E. Gimple
M. Gold
T. E. Hansen
H. N. Patel, Chair
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary
J. G. Hungerbuhler, Jr.
J. F. Henry
G. G. Karcher
W. M. Lundy
J. R. Mackay
U. R. Miller
W. E. Norris
G. C. Park
M. D. Rana
B. W. Roberts
S. C. Roberts
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
A. Selz
B. F. Shelley
W. J. Sperko
R. W. Swayne
CONFERENCE COMMITTEE
D. A. Douin — Ohio, Secretary
J. T. Amato — Minnesota
B. P. Anthony — Rhode Island
R. D. Austin — Arizona
G. Baumgardner — Michigan
W. K. Brigham — New Hampshire
C. W. Bryan — Tennessee
M. A. Burns — Florida
J. H. Burpee — Maine
C. B. Cantrell — Nebraska
D. C. Cook — California
B. J. Crawford — Georgia
E. L. Creaser — New Brunswick,
Canada
W. E. Crider, Jr. — Vermont
P. L. Dodge — Nova Scotia, Canada
S. Donovan — Northwest
Territories, Canada
D. Eastman — Newfoundland and
Labrador, Canada
B. Fierheller — Manitoba, Canada
C. Fulton — Alaska
G. M. Given, Jr. — North Carolina
M. Graham — Oregon
R. J. Handy — Kentucky
D. R. Hannon — Arkansas
E. G. Hilton — Virginia
I. M. Hinkle — South Dakota
E. Hurd — British Colombia,
Canada
D. T. Jagger — Ohio
D. J. Jenkins — Kansas
A. P. Jones — Texas
L. R. Kline — Pennsylvania
M. R. Klosterman — Iowa
K. J. Kraft — Maryland
HONORARY MEMBERS (MAIN COMMITTEE)
M. H. Jawad
A. J. Justin
W. G. Knecht
J. LeCoff
T. G. McCarty
G. C. Millman
R. A. Moen
R. F. Reedy, Sr.
F. P. Barton
R. J. Cepluch
T. M. Cullen
W. D. Doty
J. R. Farr
G. E. Feigel
R. C. Griffin
O. F. Hedden
G. Nair
J. D. Reynolds
K. T. Lau — Alberta, Canada
B. E. Logan — Massachusetts
W. McGivney — New York
S. V. Nelson — Colorado
C. C. Novak — Illinois
T. Oda — Washington
W. R. Owens — Louisiana
R. P. Pate — Alabama
R. L. Perry — Nevada
J. F. Porcella — West Virginia
D. C. Price — Yukon Territories,
Canada
D. Pringnitz — Oklahoma
R. S. Pucek — Wisconsin
R. D. Reetz — North Dakota
C. F. Reyes — California
T. W. Rieger — Manitoba, Canada
K. A. Rudolph — Hawaii
M. J. Ryan — Illinois
M. H. Sansone — New York
T. S. Scholl — Ontario, Canada
G. Scribner — Missouri
C. S. Selinger — Saskatchewan,
Canada
R. Spiker — North Carolina
T. Stewart — Montana
R. K. Sturm — Utah
S. R. Townsend — Prince Edward
Island, Canada
W. Vallance — Michigan
M. J. Verhagen — Wisconsin
M. Washington — New Jersey
K. L. Watson — Mississippi
R. W. Whitman, Jr. — Delaware
D. J. Willis — Indiana
ADMINISTRATIVE COMMITTEE
J. G. Feldstein, Chair
T. P. Pastor, Vice Chair
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary
R. W. Barnes
J. E. Batey
T. L. Bedeaux
D. L. Berger
J. F. Henry
INTERNATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW GROUP
U. R. Miller
V. Felix
Y.-G. Kim
S. H. Leong
W. Lin
O. F. Manafa
G. C. Park
M. D. Rana
B. F. Shelley
W. J. Sperko
xvii
C. Minu
T. S. G. Narayannen
Y.-W. Park
R. Reynaga
P. Williamson
PROJECT TEAM ON HYDROGEN TANKS
A. P. Amato, Staff Secretary
F. L. Brown
D. A. Canonico
D. C. Cook
J. Coursen
J. W. Felbaum
N. L. Newhouse
A. S. Olivares
G. B. Rawls, Jr.
B. F. Shelley
J. R. Sims, Jr.
N. Sirosh
J. H. Smith
S. Staniszewski
T. Tahara
D. W. Treadwell
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV I)
E. Upitis
C. T. I. Webster
W. Yoru
R. C. Biel, Contributing Member
M. Duncan, Contributing Member
D. R. Frikken, Contributing Member
L. E. Hayden, Jr., Contributing
Member
K. T. Lau, Contributing Member
K. Nibur, Contributing Member
K. Oyamada, Contributing Member
C. H. Rivkin, Contributing Member
C. San Marchi, Contributing
Member
B. Somerday, Contributing Member
R. E. McLaughlin, Chair
T. E. Hansen, Vice Chair
F. Massi, Secretary
P. D. Edwards
W. L. Lowry
E. M. Ortman
J. T. Pillow
D. Tompkins
S. V. Torkildson
D. E. Tuttle
M. Wadkinson
R. V. Wielgoszinski
D. J. Willis
C. F. Jeerings, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Heat Recovery Steam Generators (BPV I)
T. E. Hansen, Chair
S. V. Torkildson, Secretary
J. L. Arnold
J. P. Bell
B. G. Carson
L. R. Douglas
J. Gertz
G. B. Komora
C. T. McDaris
B. W. Moore
Y. Oishi
E. M. Ortman
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
D. Tompkins
B. C. Turczynski
COMMITTEE ON POWER BOILERS (BPV I)
D. L. Berger, Chair
R. E. McLaughlin, Vice Chair
U. D'Urso, Staff Secretary
J. L. Arnold
S. W. Cameron
D. A. Canonico
K. K. Coleman
P. D. Edwards
P. Fallouey
J. G. Feldstein
G. W. Galanes
T. E. Hansen
J. F. Henry
J. S. Hunter
W. L. Lowry
J. R. MacKay
F. Massi
P. A. Molvie
Y. Oishi
E. M. Ortman
J. T. Pillow
B. W. Roberts
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
J. M. Tanzosh
D. E. Tuttle
R. V. Wielgoszinski
D. J. Willis
G. Ardizzoia, Delegate
H. Michael, Delegate
D. N. French, Honorary Member
T. C. McGough, Honorary Member
R. L. Williams, Honorary Member
Subgroup on Locomotive Boilers (BPV I)
L. Moedinger, Chair
S. M. Butler, Secretary
P. Boschan
J. Braun
R. C. Franzen, Jr.
D. W. Griner
S. D. Jackson
M. A. Janssen
S. A. Lee
Subgroup on Materials (BPV I)
G. W. Galanes, Chair
K. K. Coleman, Vice Chair
J. S. Hunter, Secretary
S. H. Bowes
D. A. Canonico
P. Fallouey
K. L. Hayes
J. F. Henry
Subgroup on Design (BPV I)
P. A. Molvie, Chair
J. Vattappilly, Secretary
D. I. Anderson
P. Dhorajia
J. P. Glaspie
G. B. Komora
J. C. Light
G. M. Ray
J. E. Rimmasch
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
R. B. Stone
M. W. Westland
W. L. Withuhn
R. Yuill
R. D. Reetz, Contributing Member
B. W. Moore
D. A. Olson
O. X. Li
J. R. MacKay
F. Masuyama
D. W. Rahoi
B. W. Roberts
J. M. Tanzosh
J. Vattappilly
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
S. V. Torkildson
M. Wadkinson
Subgroup on Piping (BPV I)
C. F. Jeerings, Contributing Member
D. Tompkins, Chair
B. Mollitor, Secretary
D. L. Berger
J. A. Byers
P. D. Edwards
G. W. Galanes
T. E. Hansen
T. G. Kosmatka
W. L. Lowry
F. Massi
Subgroup on Fabrication and Examination (BPV I)
J. T. Pillow, Chair
J. L. Arnold, Secretary
G. W. Galanes, Secretary
D. L. Berger
S. W. Cameron
K. Craver
G. T. Dunker
P. F. Gilston
J. Hainsworth
T. E. Hansen
C. T. McDaris
R. E. McLaughlin
R. J. Newell
Y. Oishi
R. V. Wielgoszinski
Subgroup on Solar Boilers (BPV I)
J. S. Hunter, Chair
S. V. Torkildson, Secretary
G. W. Galanes
R. E. Hearne
D. J. Koza
xviii
J. C. Light
Y. Magen
F. Massi
M. J. Slater
J. T. Trimble, Jr.
Subgroup on International Material Specifications (BPV II)
Task Group on Modernization of BPVC Section I
D. I. Anderson, Chair
U. D’Urso, Staff Secretary
J. L. Arnold
S. W. Cameron
G. W. Galanes
J. P. Glaspie
J. F. Henry
A. Chaudouet, Chair
O. X. Li, Vice Chair
T. F. Miskell, Secretary
S. W. Cameron
D. A. Canonico
P. Fallouey
A. F. Garbolevsky
D. O. Henry
R. E. McLaughlin
P. A. Molvie
E. M. Ortman
J. T. Pillow
B. W. Roberts
D. E. Tuttle
M. Ishikawa
W. M. Lundy
A. R. Nywening
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
E. Upitis
O. Oldani, Delegate
H. Lorenz, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Nonferrous Alloys (BPV II)
R. C. Sutherlin, Chair
H. Anada
J. Calland
D. Denis
M. H. Gilkey
J. F. Grubb
A. Heino
M. Katcher
J. Kissell
T. M. Malota
J. A. McMaster
COMMITTEE ON MATERIALS (BPV II)
J. F. Henry, Chair
D. W. Rahoi, Vice Chair
N. Lobo, Staff Secretary
F. Abe
A. Appleton
J. Cameron
D. A. Canonico
A. Chaudouet
P. Fallouey
J. R. Foulds
D. W. Gandy
M. H. Gilkey
M. Gold
J. F. Grubb
J. A. Hall
M. Katcher
F. Masuyama
R. K. Nanstad
B. W. Roberts
E. Shapiro
M. H. Skillingberg
M. J. Slater
R. C. Sutherlin
R. W. Swindeman
J. M. Tanzosh
D. Tyler
D. Kwon, Delegate
O. Oldani, Delegate
W. R. Apblett, Jr., Contributing
Member
H. D. Bushfield, Contributing
Member
M. L. Nayyar, Contributing Member
E. G. Nisbett, Contributing Member
E. Upitis, Contributing Member
T. M. Cullen, Honorary Member
W. D. Doty, Honorary Member
W. D. Edsall, Honorary Member
G. C. Hsu, Honorary Member
R. A. Moen, Honorary Member
C. E. Spaeder, Jr., Honorary Member
A. W. Zeuthen, Honorary Member
Subgroup on Physical Properties (BPV II)
J. F. Grubb, Chair
H. D. Bushfield
D. Denis
J. M. Tanzosh, Chair
M. J. Slater, Secretary
F. Abe
H. Anada
D. A. Canonico
A. Di Rienzo
P. Fallouey
J. R. Foulds
M. Gold
J. A. Hall
J. F. Henry
M. H. Jawad
C. R. Thomas
M. Wadkinson
K. Kimura
F. Masuyama
D. W. Rahoi
B. W. Roberts
J. P. Shingledecker
R. W. Swindeman
T. P. Vassallo, Jr.
W. R. Apblett, Jr., Contributing
Member
H. Murakami, Contributing Member
M. Katcher, Contributing Member
C. H. Sturgeon, Contributing
Member
Subgroup on Strength of Weldments (BPV II & BPV IX)
W. F. Newell, Jr., Chair
S. H. Bowes
K. K. Coleman
P. D. Flenner
J. R. Foulds
D. W. Gandy
M. Gold
K. L. Hayes
Subgroup on Ferrous Specifications (BPV II)
A. Appleton, Chair
S. Hochreiter, Secretary
B. M. Dingman
M. J. Dosdourian
P. Fallouey
J. D. Fritz
T. Graham
J. M. Grocki
J. F. Grubb
K. M. Hottle
D. S. Janikowski
L. J. Lavezzi
P. Fallouey
E. Shapiro
Subgroup on Strength, Ferrous Alloys (BPV II)
Subgroup on External Pressure (BPV II)
R. W. Mikitka, Chair
D. L. Kurle, Vice Chair
J. A. A. Morrow, Secretary
L. F. Campbell
D. S. Griffin
J. F. Grubb
J. R. Harris III
L. Paul
D. W. Rahoi
W. Ren
E. Shapiro
M. H. Skillingberg
D. Tyler
R. Zawierucha
W. R. Apblett, Jr., Contributing
Member
H. D. Bushfield, Contributing
Member
W. C. Mack
J. K. Mahaney
A. S. Melilli
E. G. Nisbett
K. E. Orie
J. Shick
E. Upitis
J. D. Wilson
P. Wittenbach
R. Zawierucha
R. M. Davison, Contributing
Member
J. F. Henry
D. W. Rahoi
B. W. Roberts
J. P. Shingledecker
W. J. Sperko
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
J. M. Tanzosh
Working Group on Materials Database (BPV II)
R. W. Swindeman, Chair
N. Lobo, Staff Secretary
F. Abe
J. R. Foulds
M. Gold
J. F. Henry
M. Katcher
xix
B. W. Roberts
R. C. Sutherlin
D. Andrei, Contributing Member
W. Hoffelner, Contributing Member
T. Lazar, Contributing Member
D. T. Peters, Contributing Member
W. Ren, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Component Design (BPV III)
China International Working Group (BPV II)
T. Xu, Secretary
W. Fang
S. Huo
S. Li
M. Lu
B. Shou
S. Tan
C. Wang
X. Wang
Z. Wu
F. Yang
G. Yang
R. Ye
L. Yin
H. Zhang
X.-H Zhang
Yingkai Zhang
Yong Zhang
Q. Zhao
S. Zhao
R. Zhou
J. Zou
R. S. Hill III, Chair
T. M. Adams, Vice Chair
S. Pellet, Secretary
G. A. Antaki
S. Asada
C. W. Bruny
J. R. Cole
A. A. Dermenjian
R. P. Deubler
P. Hirschberg
R. I. Jetter
R. B. Keating
H. Kobayashi
R. A. Ladefian
K. A. Manoly
R. J. Masterson
D. E. Matthews
W. N. McLean
J. C. Minichiello
T. Nagata
A. N. Nguyen
E. L. Pleins
I. Saito
G. C. Slagis
J. D. Stevenson
J. P. Tucker
K. R. Wichman
C. Wilson
J. Yang
D. F. Landers, Contributing Member
Working Group on Supports (SG-D) (BPV III)
COMMITTEE ON CONSTRUCTION OF NUCLEAR FACILITY
COMPONENTS (III)
R. W. Barnes, Chair
J. R. Cole, Vice Chair
A. Byk, Staff Secretary
T. Adams
A. Appleton
W. H. Borter
T. D. Burchell
R. P. Deubler
A. C. Eberhardt
B. A. Erler
G. M. Foster
R. S. Hill III
W. Hoffelner
R. M. Jessee
R. I. Jetter
R. B. Keating
G. H. Koo
V. Kostarev
W. C. LaRochelle
K. A. Manoly
D. E. Matthews
W. N. McLean
J. C. Minichiello
R. J. Masterson, Chair
U. S. Bandyopadhyay, Secretary
K. Avrithi
T. H. Baker
F. J. Birch
R. P. Deubler
M. N. Mitchell
M. Morishita
D. K. Morton
T. Nagata
R. F. Reedy, Sr.
I. Saito
C. T. Smith
W. K. Sowder, Jr.
W. J. Sperko
J. D. Stevenson
K. R. Wichman
C. S. Withers
Y. H. Choi, Delegate
T. Ius, Delegate
H.-T. Wang, Delegate
C. C. Kim, Contributing Member
E. B. Branch, Honorary Member
G. D. Cooper, Honorary Member
W. D. Doty, Honorary Member
D. F. Landers, Honorary Member
R. A. Moen, Honorary Member
C. J. Pieper, Honorary Member
A. N. Nguyen
I. Saito
J. R. Stinson
T. G. Terryah
G. Z. Tokarski
C.-I. Wu
Working Group on Core Support Structures (SG-D) (BPV III)
J. Yang, Chair
J. F. Kielb, Secretary
F. G. Al-Chammas
D. Keck
H. S. Mehta
M. D. Snyder
A. Tsirigotis
J. T. Land, Contributing Member
Working Group on Design Methodology (SG-D) (BPV III)
R. B. Keating, Chair
S. D. Snow, Secretary
K. Avrithi
R. D. Blevins
M. R. Breach
D. L. Caldwell
H. T. Harrison III
P. Hirschberg
M. Kassar
J. Kim
H. Kobayashi
J. F. McCabe
A. N. Nguyen
W. D. Reinhardt
D. H. Roarty
E. A. Rodriguez
P. K. Shah
J. D. Stevenson
A. Tsirigotis
S. Wang
T. M. Wiger
K. Wright
J. Yang
M. K. Au-Yang, Contributing
Member
D. F. Landers, Contributing Member
W. S. Lapay, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Containment Systems for Spent Fuel and High-Level
Waste Transport Packagings (BPV III)
G. M. Foster, Chair
G. J. Solovey, Vice Chair
D. K. Morton, Secretary
G. Abramczyk
D. J. Ammerman
G. Bjorkman
W. H. Borter
G. R. Cannell
R. S. Hill III
S. Horowitz
D. W. Lewis
P. E. McConnell
A. B. Meichler
R. E. Nickell
E. L. Pleins
T. Saegusa
N. M. Simpson
R. H. Smith
J. D. Stevenson
C. J. Temus
Working Group on Design of Division 3 Containments
(SG-D) (BPV III)
E. L. Pleins, Chair
D. J. Ammerman
G. Bjorkman
S. Horowitz
D. W. Lewis
J. C. Minichiello
xx
D. K. Morton
C. J. Temus
I. D. McInnes, Contributing Member
R. E. Nickell, Contributing Member
H. P. Shrivastava, Contributing
Member
Special Working Group on Environmental Effects (SG-D) (BPV III)
Working Group on Piping (SG-D) (BPV III)
G. A. Antaki, Chair
G. Z. Tokarski, Secretary
T. M. Adams
C. Basavaraju
J. Catalano
F. Claeys
J. R. Cole
R. G. Gilada
M. A. Gray
R. W. Haupt
P. Hirschberg
M. Kassar
J. Kawahata
R. B. Keating
V. Kostarev
Y. Liu
W. Culp, Chair
B. D. Frew, Secretary
K. Avrithi
W. J. Heilker
R. S. Hill III
J. F. McCabe
J. C. Minichiello
I.-K. Nam
E. R. Nelson
A. N. Nguyen
M. S. Sills
G. C. Slagis
N. C. Sutherland
E. A. Wais
C.-I. Wu
D. F. Landers, Contributing Member
J. J. Martinez, Contributing Member
R. D. Patel, Contributing Member
N. J. Shah, Contributing Member
E. C. Rodabaugh, Honorary Member
J. E. Nestell
W. Z. Novak
M. S. Shelton
Y. H. Choi, Delegate
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV III & 3C)
R. P. McIntyre, Chair
L. M. Plante, Secretary
V. Apostolescu
A. Appleton
J. R. Berry
J. V. Gardiner
G. Gratti
J. W. Highlands
G. L. Hollinger
G. V. Imbro
K. A. Kavanagh
W. C. LaRochelle
M. R. Minick
E. C. Renaud
D. J. Roszman
C. T. Smith
W. K. Sowder, Jr.
G. E. Szabatura
T. G. Terryah
D. M. Vickery
C. S. Withers
H. Michael, Delegate
Working Group on Probabilistic Methods in Design (SG-D) (BPV III)
R. S. Hill III, Chair
N. A. Palm, Secretary
T. Asayama
K. Avrithi
B. M. Ayyub
M. R. Graybeal
D. O. Henry
S. D. Kulat
A. McNeill III
M. Morishita
P. J. O'Regan
I. Saito
A. Tsirigotis
R. M. Wilson
D. Hofer, Contributing Member
Working Group on Duties and Responsibilities (SG-GR) (BPV III)
J. V. Gardiner, Chair
G. L. Hollinger, Secretary
J. R. Berry
Y. Diaz-Castillo
E. L. Farrow
G. Gratti
C. T. Smith, Chair
C. S. Withers, Secretary
V. Apostolescu
A. Appleton
S. Bell
B. K. Bobo
S. M. Goodwin
J. W. Highlands
R. P. McIntyre
M. Higuchi
J. W. Leavitt
S. Mauvais
R. A. Patrick
J. Sulley
R. Udo
A. G. Washburn
Working Group on Valves (SG-D) (BPV III)
J. P. Tucker, Chair
J. O'Callaghan, Secretary
G. A. Jolly
J. Klein
W. N. McLean
T. A. McMahon
L. M. Plante
D. J. Roszman
S. Scardigno
T. G. Terryah
Working Group on Quality Assurance, Certification, and Stamping
(SG-GR) (BPV III)
Working Group on Pumps (SG-D) (BPV III)
R. A. Ladefian, Chair
P. W. Behnke
R. E. Cornman, Jr.
M. D. Eftychiou
A. Fraser
M. A. Gaydon
R. Ghanbari
K. A. Kavanagh
M. R. Minick
R. B. Patel
E. C. Renaud
J. Rogers
W. K. Sowder, Jr.
J. F. Strunk
M. F. Sullivan
G. E. Szabatura
D. M. Vickery
Special Working Group on Regulatory Interface (BPV III)
C. A. Mizer
G. V. Imbro, Chair
S. Bell, Secretary
A. Cardillo
A. A. Dermenjian
K. Matsunaga
D. E. Matthews
K. E. Reid II
S. N. Shields
H. R. Sonderegger
P. Vock
J. A. Schulz
R. R. Stevenson
D. Terao
M. L. Wilson
R. A. Yonekawa
Subgroup on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (BPV III)
Working Group on Vessels (SG-D) (BPV III)
D. E. Matthews, Chair
R. M. Wilson, Secretary
C. Basavaraju
C. W. Bruny
J. V. Gregg, Jr.
W. J. Heilker
W. T. Jessup, Jr.
A. Kalnins
R. B. Keating
R. M. Jessee, Chair
S. Hunter, Secretary
W. H. Borter
G. R. Cannell
R. H. Davis
G. M. Foster
B. D. Frew
G. B. Georgiev
S. E. Gingrich
C. C. Kim
D. Keck
O.-S. Kim
K. Matsunaga
P. K. Shah
C. Turylo
D. Vlaicu
W. F. Weitze
T. Yamazaki
xxi
M. Lau
H. Murakami
J. Ossmann
C. Pearce
N. M. Simpson
W. J. Sperko
J. R. Stinson
J. F. Strunk
K. B. Stuckey
H. Michael, Delegate
Special Working Group for New Advanced Light Water Reactor Plant
Construction Issues (BPV III)
Subgroup on Pressure Relief (BPV III)
J. F. Ball, Chair
A. L. Szeglin
D. G. Thibault
E. L. Pleins, Chair
M. C. Scott, Secretary
A. Cardillo
B. Gilligan
J. Honcharik
G. V. Imbro
Y. Katsura
O.–S Kim
M. Kris
Executive Committee on Strategy and Project Management
(BPV III, Divisions 1 and 2)
J. R. Cole, Chair
C. A. Sanna, Staff Secretary
T. Adams
R. W. Barnes
B. K. Bobo
N. Broom
B. A. Erler
C. M. Faidy
R. S. Hill III
E. V. Imbro
R. M. Jessee
R. B. Keating
G. H. Koo
K. A. Manoly
D. K. Morton
J. Ramirez
R. F. Reedy, Sr.
C. T. Smith
W. K. Sowder, Jr.
Y. Urabe
C. S. Withers
C. Yan
M. F. Sullivan, Contributing
Member
J. C. Minichiello
D. W. Sandusky
C. A. Sanna
R. R. Stevenson
E. R. Willis
M. L. Wilson
J. Yan
J. A. Schulz, Contributing Member
Subgroup on Editing and Review (BPV III)
D. K. Morton, Chair
R. L. Bratton
R. P. Deubler
A. C. Eberhardt
R. I. Jetter
J. C. Minichiello
L. M. Plante
R. F. Reedy, Sr.
W. K. Sowder, Jr.
J. D. Stevenson
C. Wilson
Subgroup on Management Resources (BPV III)
R. M. Jessee, Chair
J. F. Bernardo
L. C. Cadwallader
J. B. Carr
M. Cusick
H. S. Farrow
S. Fincher
J. Fink
L. Hartless
M. A. Hayes, Jr.
M. Hokazono
B. N. Juarez
Y. S. Kim
China International Working Group (BPV III)
J. Yan, Chair
W. Tang, Vice Chair
C. A. Sanna, Staff Secretary
Y. He, Secretary
H. Ge
Z. Han
J. Jian
Y. Jing
F. Kai
D. Kang
Y. Lee
X. Li
B. Liang
H. Lin
S. Lin
J. Liu
S. Liu
W. Liu
K. Mao
G. Sun
G. Tang
Y. Tu
Y. Wang
H. Wu
X. Wu
Z. Wu
S. Xue
Z. Yan
C. Ye
Z. Yin
S. Zaozhan
G. Zhang
K. Zhang
W. Zhang
G. Zhao
W. Zhao
Y. Zhong
Z. Zhong
J. M. Lyons
B. McGlone
A. A. Mostala
M. Osterfoss
J. D. Pasek
C. Pearce
J. Rogers
B. S. Sandhu
V. Suri
Z. Taylor
J. Webb, Jr.
R. A. West
R. Z. Ziegler
Working Group on International Meetings (BPV III)
R. S. Hill III, Chair
A. Byk, Staff Secretary
T. D. Burchell
J. R. Cole
R. L. Crane
G. M. Foster
M. N. Mitchell
R. F. Reedy, Sr.
C. A. Sanna
C. T. Smith
Subgroup on Polyethylene Pipe (BPV III)
Korea International Working Group (BPV III)
G. H. Koo, Chair
H. S. Byun
J.-Y. Hong
N.-S. Huh
S. S. Hwang
C. Jang
I. I. Jeong
H. J. Kim
J. Kim
O.-S. Kim
Y.-B. Kim
D. Kwon
T. M. Adams, Chair
D. Burwell, Secretary
W. I. Adams
C. Basavaraju
S. J. Boros
J. M. Craig
E. L. Farrow
E. M. Focht
M. Golliet
A. N. Haddad
P. Krishnaswamy
M. Lashley
E. Lever
B. Lee
D. Lee
S. Lee
D. J. Lim
I.-K. Nam
B. Noh
C.-K. Oh
C. Park
J.-S. Park
S. Song
O. Yoo
xxii
K. Lively
M. Martin
E. W. McElroy
D. P. Munson
T. M. Musto
J. E. O’Sullivan
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
H. E. Svetlik
M. Troughton
D. M. Vickery
Z. J. Zhou
L. J. Petroff, Alternate
S. Sandstrum, Alternate
Subgroup on Fusion Energy Devices (BPV III)
Working Group on Research and Development
A. N. Haddad, Chair
W. I. Adams
A. Amato
S. J. Boros
J. M. Craig
E. M. Focht
R. M. Jessee
D. Keller
M. Lamborn
S. Lefler
E. Lever
W. K. Sowder, Jr., Chair
D. Andrei, Staff Secretary
D. J. Roszman, Secretary
R. W. Barnes
M. Higuchi
G. Holtmeier
K. A. Kavanagh
H. J. Kim
K. Lively
K. A. Manoly
L. Mizell
D. P. Munson
T. M. Musto
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
M. Troughton
Z. J. Zhou
L. J. Petroff, Alternate
S. Sandstrum, Alternate
Subgroup on High-Temperature Reactors (BPV III)
M. Morishita, Chair
R. I. Jetter, Vice Chair
T.-L. Sham, Secretary
N. Broom
T. D. Burchell
Working Group on Nondestructive Examination and Fusion of HDPE
(BPV III)
M. Lashley, Chair
W. H. Borter
J. M. Craig
N. Y. Faransso
N. A. Finney
J. F. Halley
R. M. Jessee
M. D. Moles
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
J. C. Spanner, Jr.
Z. J. Zhou
D. K. Zimmerman
T.-L. Sham, Chair
T. Asayama, Secretary
R. W. Barnes
P. Carter
C. M. Faidy
W. Hoffelner
A. B. Hull
T. R. Lupold
S. N. Malik
D. L. Marriott
D. K. Morton
T.-L. Sham
Y. Tachibana
T. Yuhara
R. I. Jetter
G. H. Koo
M. Li
S. Majumdar
M. Morishita
J. E. Nestell
D. K. Williams
Subgroup on Elevated Temperature Design (BPV III)
R. I. Jetter, Chair
T.-L. Sham, Secretary
J. J. Abou-Hanna
T. Asayama
C. Becht IV
F. W. Brust
P. Carter
J. F. Cervenka
D. S. Griffin
B. F. Hantz
W. Hoffelner
Subgroup on Graphite Core Components (BPV III)
T. D. Burchell, Chair
M. N. Mitchell, Vice Chair
C. A. Sanna, Staff Secretary
R. L. Bratton, Secretary
T. Albers
A. Appleton
S.-H. Chi
A. Covac
M. W. Davies
S. W. Doms
S. F. Duffy
B. D. Frew
O. Gelineau
W. Hoffelner
G. H. Koo
D. K. Morton
J. E. Nestell
N. N. Ray
Working Group on High Temperature Liquid-Cooled Reactors (BPV
III)
Working Group on High Temperature Gas-Cooled Reactors (BPV III)
J. E. Nestell, Chair
N. Broom
T. D. Burchell
R. S. Hill III
W. Hoffelner
E. V. Imbro
R. I. Jetter
Y. W. Kim
S. Lee
G. Li
X. Li
P. Mokaria
S. J. Salvador
M. Trosen
I. J. Zatz
S. T. Gonczy
M. P. Hindley
Y. Katoh
N. N. Nemeth
T. Oku
J. Ossmann
M. Roemmler
N. Salstrom
T. Shibata
M. Srinivasan
A. G. Steer
S. Wendel
S. Yu
A. B. Hull
M. H. Jawad
G. H. Koo
W. J. Koves
M. Li
S. Majumdar
D. L. Marriott
T. E. McGreevy
J. E. Nestell
W. J. O'Donnell
R. W. Swindeman
Working Group on High Temperature Flaw Evaluation (BPV III)
F. W. Brust, Chair
N. Broom
P. Carter
W. Hoffelner
S. N. Malik
D. L. Rudland
P. J. Rush
D.-J. Shim
S. X. Xu
Working Group on Allowable Stress Criteria (BPV III)
Subgroup on Industry Experience for New Plants (BPV III & BPV XI)
G. M. Foster, Chair
J. T. Lindberg, Chair
H. L. Gustin, Secretary
V. L. Armentrout
T. L. Chan
D. R. Graham
P. J. Hennessey
D. O. Henry
J. Honcharik
E. V. Imbro
C. G. Kim
R. W. Swindeman, Chair
M. Li, Secretary
J. R. Foulds
K. Kimura
S. N. Malik
O.-S. Kim
K. Matsunaga
D. E. Matthews
R. E. McLaughlin
J. Ossmann
E. L. Pleins
D. W. Sandusky
D. M. Swann
T. Tsuruta
E. R. Willis
S. M. Yee
J. E. Nestel
W. Ren
B. W. Roberts
T.-I Sham
Working Group on Analysis Methods (BPV III)
P. Carter, Chair
M. R. Beach
R. I. Jetter
xxiii
S. Krishnamurthy
T.-I Sham
D. K. Williams
Subgroup on Elevated Temperature Construction (BPV III)
Working Group on Creep-Fatigue and Negligible Creep (BPV III)
T. Asayama, Chair
M. Li, Secretary
F. W. Brust
R. I. Jetter
M. H. Jawad, Chair
B. Mollitor, Secretary
D. I. Anderson
R. G. Brown
J. P. Glaspie
B. F. Hantz
G. H. Koo
S. N. Malik
T.-I Sham
R. I. Jetter
S. Krishnamurthy
D. L. Marriott
M. N. Mitchell
D. K. Morton
C. Nadarajah
Subgroup on Fatigue Strength (BPV III)
W. J. O'Donnell, Chair
S. A. Adams
G. S. Chakrabarti
T. M. Damiani
P. R. Donavin
S. R. Gosselin
R. J. Gurdal
C. F. Heberling II
C. E. Hinnant
D. P. Jones
G. Kharshafdjian
S. Majumdar
S. N. Malik
R. Nayal
D. H. Roarty
M. S. Shelton
G. Taxacher
A. Tsirigotis
K. Wright
H. H. Ziada
Subcommittee on General Requirements (BPV III)
W. C. LaRochelle, Chair
A. Appleton, Secretary
J. V. Gardiner
R. P. McIntyre
JOINT ACI-ASME COMMITTEE ON CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR
NUCLEAR SERVICE (BPV 3C)
A. C. Eberhardt, Chair
C. T. Smith, Vice Chair
A. Byk, Staff Secretary
N. Alchaar
J. F. Artuso
C. J. Bang
F. Farzam
P. S. Ghosal
M. F. Hessheimer
B. D. Hovis
T. C. Inman
O. Jovall
N.-H. Lee
J. McLean
J. Munshi
Working Group on Environmental Fatigue Evaluation Methods
(BPV III)
H. S. Mehta
J.-S. Park
V. S. Ready
D. H. Roarty
I. Saito
D. Vlaicu
W. F. Weitze
K. Wright
T. M. Adams
S. Asada
K. Avrithi
J. R. Cole
C. M. Faidy
T. D. Gilman
S. R. Gosselin
M. A. Gray
Y. He
L. M. Plante
C. T. Smith
D. M. Vickery
N. Orbovic
B. B. Scott
J. D. Stevenson
J. F. Strunk
T. Tonyan
T. J. Ahl, Contributing Member
T. D. Al-Shawaf, Contributing
Member
B. A. Erler, Contributing Member
J. Gutierrez, Contributing Member
T. E. Johnson, Contributing Member
T. Muraki, Contributing Member
M. R. Senecal, Contributing Member
M. K. Thumm, Contributing
Member
Subcommittee on Design (BPV III)
R. P. Deubler, Chair
G. L. Hollinger, Secretary
T. M. Adams
G. A. Antaki
R. L. Bratton
R. S. Hill III
P. Hirschberg
M. H. Jawad
R. I. Jetter
R. B. Keating
R. A. Ladefian
K. A. Manoly
R. J. Masterson
D. E. Matthews
M. N. Mitchell
W. J. O’Donnell
E. L. Pleins
J. P. Tucker
J. Yang
Working Group on Design (BPV 3C)
J. Munshi, Chair
N. Alchaar
S. Bae
L. J. Colarusso
J. Colinares
A. C. Eberhardt
F. Farzam
P. S. Ghosal
M. F. Hessheimer
B. D. Hovis
Special Working Group on HDPE Design of Components (BPV III)
T. M. Adams, Chair
T. M. Musto, Secretary
W. I. Adams
T. A. Bacon
C. Basavaraju
D. Burwell
P. Krishnaswamy
M. Martin
E. W. McElroy
J. C. Minichiello
D. P. Munson
J. Ossmann
L. J. Petroff
H. E. Svetlik
K. Lively
L. Mizell
Working Group on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (BPV 3C)
J. F. Artuso, Chair
P. S. Ghosal, Vice Chair
M. Allam
A. C. Eberhardt
J. Gutierrez
B. B. Scott
C. T. Smith
J. F. Strunk
T. Tonyan
Working Group on Modernization (BPV 3C)
Special Working Group on Computational Modeling for Explicit
Dynamics (BPV III)
G. Bjorkman, Chair
D. J. Ammerman, Secretary
G. Broz
J. Jordan
D. Molitoris
J. Piotter
T. C. Inman
O. Jovall
N.-H Lee
J. D. Stevenson
T. E. Johnson, Contributing Member
B. R. Laskewitz, Contributing
Member
M. K. Thumm, Contributing
Member
O. Jovall, Chair
J. McLean, Secretary
A. Adediran
N. Alchaar
J. F. Artuso
J. J. Braun
J. Colinares
P. Y.-K. Shih
S. D. Snow
C.-F Tso
M. C. Yaksh
U. Zencker
xxiv
J.-B Domage
N. Orbovic
C. T. Smith
M. A. Ugalde
S. Wang
U. Ricklefs, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (BPV V)
COMMITTEE ON HEATING BOILERS (BPV IV)
T. L. Bedeaux, Chair
J. A. Hall, Vice Chair
G. Moino, Staff Secretary
J. Calland
J. P. Chicoine
C. M. Dove
B. G. French
A. Heino
B. J. Iske
D. J. Jenkins
M. R. Klosterman
K. M. McTague
J. E. Batey, Chair
F. B. Kovacs, Vice Chair
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary
S. J. Akrin
C. A. Anderson
A. S. Birks
P. L. Brown
M. A. Burns
B. Caccamise
N. Y. Faransso
N. A. Finney
A. F. Garbolevsky
G. W. Hembree
J. W. Houf
P. A. Molvie
B. W. Moore
R. E. Olson
T. M. Parks
M. Wadkinson
R. V. Wielgoszinski
H. Michael, Delegate
D. Picart, Delegate
J. L. Kleiss, Alternate
M. T. Roby, Alternate
W. L. Haag, Jr., Honorary Member
Subgroup on General Requirements/Personnel Qualifications and
Inquiries (BPV V)
Subgroup on Care and Operation of Heating Boilers (BPV IV)
M. Wadkinson, Chair
T. L. Bedeaux
J. Calland
J. A. Hall
R. W. Kruzic
J. R. McGimpsey
M. D. Moles
A. B. Nagel
T. L. Plasek
F. J. Sattler
G. M. Gatti, Delegate
X. Guiping, Delegate
B. D. Laite, Alternate
H. C. Graber, Honorary Member
O. F. Hedden, Honorary Member
J. R. MacKay, Honorary Member
T. G. McCarty, Honorary Member
F. B. Kovacs, Chair
S. J. Akrin
C. A. Anderson
J. E. Batey
A. S. Birks
N. Y. Faransso
M. R. Klosterman
P. A. Molvie
B. W. Moore
T. M. Parks
N. A. Finney
G. W. Hembree
J. W. Houf
J. P. Swezy, Jr., Contributing
Member
Subgroup on Surface Examination Methods (BPV V)
Subgroup on Cast Iron Boilers (BPV IV)
K. M. McTague, Chair
T. L. Bedeaux, Vice Chair
J. P. Chicoine
C. M. Dove
J. M. Downs
S. J. Akrin, Chair
A. S. Birks
P. L. Brown
B. Caccamise
N. Y. Faransso
N. Farenbaugh
N. A. Finney
G. W. Hembree
B. G. French
J. A. Hall
J. L. Kleiss
M. R. Klosterman
M. T. Roby, Alternate
S. Johnson
R. W. Kruzic
B. D. Laite
L. E. Mullins
A. B. Nagel
F. J. Sattler
G. M. Gatti, Delegate
Subgroup on Volumetric Methods (BPV V)
G. W. Hembree, Chair
S. J. Akrin
J. E. Batey
P. L. Brown
B. Caccamise
N. Y. Faransso
N. A. Finney
A. F. Garbolevsky
J. F. Halley
R. W. Hardy
Subgroup on Materials (BPV IV)
J. A. Hall, Chair
M. Wadkinson, Vice Chair
J. Calland
J. M. Downs
B. J. Iske
J. L. Kleiss
E. Rightmier
S. Johnson
F. B. Kovacs
R. W. Kruzic
J. R. McGimpsey
M. D. Moles
L. E. Mullins
A. B. Nagel
T. L. Plasek
F. J. Sattler
G. M. Gatti, Delegate
Subgroup on Water Heaters (BPV IV)
J. Calland, Chair
J. P. Chicoine
B. G. French
B. J. Iske
Working Group on Acoustic Emissions (SG-VM) (BPV V)
K. M. McTague
R. E. Olson
T. E. Trant
M. T. Roby, Alternate
N. Y. Faransso, Chair
J. E. Batey, Vice Chair
S. R. Doctor
R. K. Miller
Working Group on Radiography (SG-VM) (BPV V)
F. B. Kovacs, Chair
S. J. Akrin
J. E. Batey
P. L. Brown
B. Caccamise
N. Y. Faransso
A. F. Garbolevsky
R. W. Hardy
G. W. Hembree
Subgroup on Welded Boilers (BPV IV)
J. Calland, Chair
T. L. Bedeaux
B. G. French
J. L. Kleiss
M. R. Klosterman
P. A. Molvie
R. E. Olson
M. Wadkinson
R. V. Wielgoszinski
J.-M. Andre, Contributing Member
xxv
S. Johnson
R. W. Kruzic
B. D. Laite
S. Mango
J. R. McGimpsey
R. J. Mills
A. B. Nagel
T. L. Plasek
Working Group on Design-By-Analysis (BPV III)
Working Group on Ultrasonics (SG-VM) (BPV V)
N. A. Finney, Chair
J. F. Halley, Vice Chair
B. Caccamise
K. J. Chizen
N. Y. Faransso
O. F. Hedden
S. Johnson
B. F. Hantz, Chair
T. W. Norton, Secretary
R. G. Brown
R. D. Dixon
C. E. Hinnant
M. H. Jawad
S. Krishnamurthy
R. W. Kruzic
B. D. Laite
M. D. Moles
L. E. Mullins
A. B. Nagel
F. J. Sattler
A. Mann
G. A. Miller
C. Nadarajah
M. D. Rana
T. G. Seipp
S. Terada
Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (BPV VIII)
Working Group on Guided Wave Ultrasonic Testing (SG-VM) (BPV V)
N. Y. Faransso, Chair
J. E. Batey, Vice Chair
D. Alleyne
J. F. Halley
S. Johnson
C. D. Rodery, Chair
J. P. Swezy, Jr., Vice Chair
B. R. Morelock, Secretary
J. L. Arnold
L. F. Campbell
H. E. Gordon
D. I. Morris
M. J. Pischke
M. J. Rice
B. F. Shelley
G. M. Light
M. D. Moles
P. Mudge
M. J. Quarry
J. Vanvelsor
P. L. Sturgill
T. Tahara
E. A. Whittle
K. Oyamada, Delegate
R. Uebel, Delegate
W. J. Bees, Corresponding Member
E. Upitis, Corresponding Member
W. S. Jacobs, Contributing Member
J. Lee, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON PRESSURE VESSELS (VIII)
U. R. Miller, Chair
R. J. Basile, Vice Chair
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary
T. Schellens, Staff Secretary
V. Bogosian
J. Cameron
A. Chaudouet
D. B. DeMichael
J. P. Glaspie
M. Gold
J. F. Grubb
L. E. Hayden, Jr.
G. G. Karcher
K T. Lau
R. Mahadeen
R. W. Mikitka
K. Mokhtarian
C. C. Neely
T. W. Norton
T. P. Pastor
D. T. Peters
M. J. Pischke
M. D. Rana
G. B. Rawls, Jr.
F. L. Richter
S. C. Roberts
C. D. Rodery
A. Selz
J. R. Sims, Jr.
E. Soltow
D. A. Swanson
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
S. Terada
E. Upitis
P. A. McGowan, Delegate
H. Michael, Delegate
K. Oyamada, Delegate
M. E. Papponetti, Delegate
D. Rui, Delegate
T. Tahara, Delegate
W. S. Jacobs, Contributing Member
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV VIII)
S. C. Roberts, Chair
D. B. DeMichael, Vice Chair
F. L. Richter, Secretary
R. J. Basile
V. Bogosian
D. T. Davis
J. P. Glaspie
L. E. Hayden, Jr.
K. T. Lau
M. D. Lower
C. C. Neely
A. S. Olivares
J. C. Sowinski
P. Speranza
D. B. Stewart
D. A. Swanson
R. Uebel
A. H. Gibbs, Delegate
K. Oyamada, Delegate
Taskgroup on U-2(g) (BPV VIII)
S. R. Babka
R. J. Basile
D. K. Chandiramani
R. Mahadeen
U. R. Miller
T. W. Norton
T. P. Pastor
R. F. Reedy, Sr.
S. C. Roberts
J. R. Sims, Jr.
D. Srnic
D. A. Swanson
R. Uebel
K. K. Tam
Subgroup on Design (BPV VIII)
R. J. Basile, Chair
J. C. Sowinski, Vice Chair
M. D. Lower, Secretary
O. A. Barsky
M. R. Breach
F. L. Brown
J. R. Farr
B. F. Hantz
C. E. Hinnant
M. H. Jawad
D. L. Kurle
R. W. Mikitka
U. R. Miller
K. Mokhtarian
T. P. Pastor
M. D. Rana
G. B. Rawls, Jr.
S. C. Roberts
C. D. Rodery
S. C. Shah
D. A. Swanson
J. Vattappilly
R. A. Whipple
A. A. Gibbs, Delegate
K. Oyamada, Delegate
M. E. Papponetti, Delegate
M. Faulkner, Corresponding
Member
C. S. Hinson, Corresponding
Member
W. S. Jacobs, Corresponding
Member
A. Selz, Corresponding Member
K. K. Tam, Corresponding Member
Subgroup on Heat Transfer Equipment (BPV VIII)
R. Mahadeen, Chair
G. Aurioles, Sr., Vice Chair
F. E. Jehrio, Secretary
S. R. Babka
J. H. Barbee
O. A. Barsky
I. G. Campbell
A. Chaudouet
M. D. Clark
J. I. Gordon
M. J. Holtz
G. G. Karcher
D. L. Kurle
B. J. Lerch
xxvi
P. Matkovics
S. Mayeux
U. R. Miller
T. W. Norton
K. Oyamada
D. Srnic
A. M. Voytko
R. P. Wiberg
F. Osweiller, Corresponding
Member
S. Yokell, Corresponding Member
R. Tiwari, Contributing Member
S. M. Caldwell, Honorary Member
Task Group on Design (BPV VIII)
Subgroup on High Pressure Vessels (BPV VIII)
D. T. Peters, Chair
R. T. Hallman, Vice Chair
A. P. Maslowski, Staff Secretary
L. P. Antalffy
R. C. Biel
P. N. Chaku
R. Cordes
R. D. Dixon
L. Fridlund
D. M. Fryer
A. H. Honza
M. M. James
J. A. Kapp
J. Keltjens
A. K. Khare
S. C. Mordre
G. T. Nelson
E. A. Rodriguez
E. D. Roll
J. R. Sims, Jr.
D. L. Stang
F. W. Tatar
S. Terada
J. L. Traud
R. Wink
K. J. Young
K. Oyamada, Delegate
R. M. Hoshman, Contributing
Member
G. J. Mraz, Contributing Member
D. J. Burns, Honorary Member
E. H. Perez, Honorary Member
J. Keltjens, Chair
R. C. Biel
D. J. Burns
R. Cordes
R. D. Dixon
L. Fridlund
D. M. Fryer
R. T. Hallman
S. C. Mordre
G. T. Nelson
E. H. Perez
D. T. Peters
E. D. Roll
K. C. Simpson
J. R. Sims, Jr.
D. L. Stang
S. Terada
J. L. Traud
R. Wink
Task Group on Materials (BPV VIII)
F. W. Tatar, Chair
L. P. Antalffy
P. N. Chaku
M. M. James
J. A. Kapp
A. K. Khare
Task Group on Impulsively Loaded Vessels (BPV VIII)
Subgroup on Materials (BPV VIII)
J. F. Grubb, Chair
J. Cameron, Vice Chair
P. G. Wittenbach, Secretary
A. Di Rienzo
J. D. Fritz
M. Gold
M. Katcher
W. M. Lundy
D. W. Rahoi
R. C. Sutherlin
E. Upitis
K. Xu
K. Oyamada, Delegate
E. G. Nisbett, Corresponding
Member
G. S. Dixit, Contributing Member
J. A. McMaster, Contributing
Member
E. A. Rodriguez, Chair
P. O. Leslie, Secretary
G. A. Antaki
J. K. Asahina
D. D. Barker
D. W. Bowman
A. M. Clayton
J. E. Didlake, Jr.
T. A. Duffey
B. L. Haroldsen
H. L. Heaton
D. Hilding
K. W. King
R. Kitamura
R. A. Leishear
R. E. Nickell
F. Ohlson
C. Romero
N. Rushton
J. E. Shepherd
Q. Dong, Corresponding Member
M. Yip, Corresponding Member
C. R. Vaught, Alternate
COMMITTEE ON WELDING, BRAZING, AND FUSING (BPV IX)
Subgroup on Toughness (BPV II & BPV VIII)
D. A. Swanson, Chair
J. P. Swezy, Jr., Vice Chair
J. L. Arnold
R. J. Basile
J. Cameron
H. E. Gordon
W. S. Jacobs
D. L. Kurle
K. Mokhtarian
C. C. Neely
M. D. Rana
F. L. Richter
E. Upitis
J. Vattappilly
K. Xu
K. Oyamada, Delegate
W. J. Sperko, Chair
D. A. Bowers, Vice Chair
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary
M. Bernasek
R. K. Brown, Jr.
M. L. Carpenter
J. G. Feldstein
P. D. Flenner
R. M. Jessee
J. S. Lee
W. M. Lundy
T. Melfi
W. F. Newell, Jr.
B. R. Newmark
A. S. Olivares
M. J. Pischke
M. J. Rice
M. B. Sims
M. J. Stanko
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
P. L. Van Fosson
R. R. Young
A. Roza, Delegate
M. Consonni, Contributing Member
S. A. Jones, Contributing Member
W. D. Doty, Honorary Member
S. D. Reynolds, Jr., Honorary
Member
Special Working Group on Graphite Pressure Equipment (BPV VIII)
E. Soltow, Chair
G. C. Becherer
T. F. Bonn
F. L. Brown
R. W. Dickerson
S. Malone
M. R. Minick
A. A. Stupica
Subgroup on Brazing (BPV IX)
M. J. Pischke, Chair
E. W. Beckman
L. F. Campbell
M. L. Carpenter
A. F. Garbolevsky
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV IX)
Special Working Group on Bolted Flanged Joints (BPV VIII)
R. W. Mikitka, Chair
G. D. Bibel
W. Brown
W. J. Koves
M. Morishita
J. R. Payne
G. B. Rawls, Jr.
M. S. Shelton
B. R. Newmark, Chair
E. W. Beckman
G. Chandler
P. R. Evans
A. Howard
R. M. Jessee
A. S. Olivares
xxvii
D. K. Peetz
H. B. Porter
P. L. Sturgill
K. R. Willens
E. W. Woelfel
E. Molina, Delegate
COMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR INSERVICE INSPECTION (BPV XI)
Subgroup on Materials (BPV IX)
M. Bernasek, Chair
T. Anderson
J. L. Arnold
M. L. Carpenter
E. Cutlip
S. S. Fiore
S. E. Gingrich
R. M. Jessee
C. C. Kim
T. Melfi
M. J. Pischke
C. E. Sainz
W. J. Sperko
M. J. Stanko
P. L. Sturgill
R. R. Young
V. G. V. Giunto, Delegate
Subgroup on Performance Qualification (BPV IX)
D. A. Bowers, Chair
M. J. Rice, Secretary
V. A. Bell
M. A. Boring
R. B. Corbit
P. D. Flenner
K. L. Hayes
J. S. Lee
W. M. Lundy
E. G. Reichelt
M. B. Sims
G. C. Park, Chair
R. W. Swayne, Vice Chair
R. A. Yonekawa, Vice Chair
R. L. Crane, Staff Secretary
J. M. Agold
V. L. Armentrout
W. H. Bamford
T. L. Chan
R. C. Cipolla
D. D. Davis
G. H. DeBoo
R. L. Dyle
E. V. Farrell, Jr.
E. L. Farrow
E. B. Gerlach
R. E. Gimple
T. J. Griesbach
K. Hasegawa
D. O. Henry
R. D. Kerr
S. D. Kulat
G. L. Lagleder
D. W. Lamond
G. A. Lofthus
J. E. O’Sullivan
R. K. Rhyne
D. A. Scarth
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
J. C. Spanner, Jr.
G. L. Stevens
D. E. Waskey
J. G. Weicks
C. J. Wirtz
T. Yuhara
H. D. Chung, Delegate
C. Ye, Delegate
R. A. West, Contributing Member
J. Hakii, Alternate
J. T. Lindberg, Alternate
W. E. Norris, Alternate
C. D. Cowfer, Honorary Member
F. E. Gregor, Honorary Member
O. F. Hedden, Honorary Member
P. C. Riccardella, Honorary Member
Executive Committee (BPV XI)
Subgroup on Plastic Fusing (BPV IX)
M. L. Carpenter, Chair
D. Burwell
J. M. Craig
A. N. Haddad
K. L. Hayes
R. M. Jessee
E. Lever
E. W. McElroy
J. E. O’Sullivan
E. G. Reichelt
M. J. Rice
P. L. Sturgill
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
E. W. Woelfel
J. C. Minichiello
C. W. Rowley
Subgroup on Procedure Qualification (BPV IX)
D. A. Bowers, Chair
M. J. Rice, Secretary
M. Bernasek
M. A. Boring
R. K. Brown, Jr.
W. M. Lundy
J. R. McGimpsey
W. F. Newell, Jr.
A. S. Olivares
S. Raghunathan
M. B. Sims
W. J. Sperko
S. A. Sprague
J. P. Swezy, Jr.
P. L. Van Fosson
T. C. Wiesner
R. A. Yonekawa, Chair
G. C. Park, Vice Chair
R. L. Crane, Staff Secretary
W. H. Bamford
R. L. Dyle
M. J. Ferlisi
E. B. Gerlach
R. E. Gimple
S. D. Kulat
J. T. Lindberg
W. E. Norris
R. K. Rhyne
J. C. Spanner, Jr.
G. L. Stevens
R. W. Swayne
Subgroup on Evaluation Standards (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
W. H. Bamford, Chair
G. L. Stevens, Secretary
H. D. Chung
R. C. Cipolla
G. H. DeBoo
R. L. Dyle
B. R. Ganta
T. J. Griesbach
K. Hasegawa
K. Hojo
D. N. Hopkins
K. Koyama
D. R. Lee
R. O. McGill
H. S. Mehta
M. A. Mitchell
K. Miyazaki
R. Pace
S. Ranganath
D. A. Scarth
T. V. Vo
K. R. Wichman
S. X. Xu
Working Group on Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
COMMITTEE ON FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS
(BPV X)
D. Eisberg, Chair
P. D. Stumpf, Staff Secretary
F. L. Brown
J. L. Bustillos
T. W. Cowley
I. L. Dinovo
T. J. Fowler
M. R. Gorman
D. H. Hodgkinson
L. E. Hunt
D. L. Keeler
B. M. Linnemann
N. L. Newhouse
D. J. Painter
G. Ramirez
J. R. Richter
B. F. Shelley
F. W. Van Name
D. O. Yancey, Jr.
P. H. Ziehl
R. C. Cipolla, Chair
S. X. Xu, Secretary
W. H. Bamford
B. Bezensek
H. D. Chung
G. H. DeBoo
B. R. Ganta
R. G. Gilada
H. L. Gustin
F. D. Hayes
P. H. Hoang
K. Hojo
D. N. Hopkins
K. Koyama
D. R. Lee
xxviii
H. S. Mehta
G. A. Miessi
K. Miyazaki
R. K. Qashu
S. Ranganath
H. Rathbun
P. J. Rush
D. A. Scarth
W. L. Server
N. J. Shah
T. V. Vo
K. R. Wichman
G. M. Wilkowski
D. L. Rudland, Alternate
Subgroup on Repair/Replacement Activities (SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
Working Group on Operating Plant Criteria (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
T. J. Griesbach, Chair
D. V. Sommerville, Secretary
W. H. Bamford
H. Behnke
T. L. Dickson
R. L. Dyle
S. R. Gosselin
M. Hayashi
H. S. Mehta
M. A. Mitchell
R. Pace
N. A. Palm
S. Ranganath
W. L. Server
D. P. Weakland
T. Hardin, Alternate
E. B. Gerlach, Chair
E. V. Farrell, Jr., Secretary
S. B. Brown
R. E. Cantrell
G. G. Elder
P. D. Fisher
J. M. Gamber
R. E. Gimple
D. R. Graham
R. A. Hermann
K. J. Karwoski
R. D. Kerr
S. L. McCracken
B. R. Newton
J. E. O'Sullivan
R. R. Stevenson
R. W. Swayne
D. L. Tilly
D. E. Waskey
J. G. Weicks
R. A. Yonekawa
E. G. Reichelt, Alternate
Working Group on Pipe Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
D. A. Scarth, Chair
G. M. Wilkowski, Secretary
T. A. Bacon
W. H. Bamford
B. Bezensek
H. D. Chung
R. C. Cipolla
N. G. Cofie
J. M. Davis
G. H. DeBoo
B. R. Ganta
L. F. Goyette
K. Hasegawa
P. H. Hoang
K. Hojo
D. N. Hopkins
E. J. Houston
K. Kashima
R. O. McGill
H. S. Mehta
G. A. A. Miessi
K. Miyazaki
D. L. Rudland
P. J. Rush
D.-J. Shim
T. V. Vo
B. Wasiluk
S. X. Xu
H. Rathbun, Alternate
Working Group on Welding and Special Repair Processes (SG-RRA)
(BPV XI)
D. E. Waskey, Chair
D. J. Tilly, Secretary
R. E. Cantrell
S. J. Findlan
P. D. Fisher
M. L. Hall
R. A. Hermann
K. J. Karwoski
Working Group on Nonmetals Repair/Replacement Activities
(SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
J. E. O'Sullivan, Chair
S. Schuessler, Secretary
E. W. McElroy
T. M. Musto
Subgroup on Nondestructive Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI)
J. C. Spanner, Jr., Chair
G. A. Lofthus, Secretary
T. L. Chan
C. B. Cheezem
D. R. Cordes
F. E. Dohmen
M. E. Gothard
D. O. Henry
J. T. Lindberg
T. R. Lupold
G. R. Perkins
S. A. Sabo
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
R. V. Swain
G. Tang
C. J. Wirtz
J. E. O'Sullivan, Chair
M. Golliet
E. W. McElroy
B. B. Raji
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
Working Group on Design and Programs (SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
G. G. Elder, Chair
S. B. Brown, Secretary
O. Bhatty
R. Clow
J. W. Collins
R. R. Croft
E. V. Farrell, Jr.
S. K. Fisher
J. M. Gamber
J. C. Spanner, Jr.
J. T. Timm
M. C. Weatherly
M. L. Whytsell
C. J. Wirtz
Working Group on Procedure Qualification and Volumetric
Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI)
G. A. Lofthus, Chair
G. R. Perkins, Secretary
M. T. Anderson
M. Briley
C. B. Cheezem
A. D. Chockie
M. Dennis
S. R. Doctor
F. E. Dohmen
M. E. Gothard
B. B. Raji
E. G. Reichelt
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
Z. J. Zhou
Task Group on Repair by Carbon Fiber Composites
(WGN-MRR) (BPV XI)
Working Group on Personnel Qualification and Surface Visual and
Eddy Current Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI)
J. T. Lindberg, Chair
D. R. Cordes, Secretary
S. E. Cumblidge
N. Farenbaugh
D. O. Henry
J. W. Houf
C. C. Kim
M. Lau
S. L. McCracken
D. B. Meredith
B. R. Newton
J. E. O'Sullivan
R. E. Smith
J. G. Weicks
E. B. Gerlach
D. R. Graham
G. F. Harttraft
T. E. Hiss
H. Malikowski
M. A. Pyne
R. R. Stevenson
R. W. Swayne
R. A. Yonekawa
Subgroup on Water-Cooled Systems (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
S. D. Kulat, Chair
N. A. Palm, Secretary
J. M. Agold
V. L. Armentrout
J. M. Boughman
S. T. Chesworth
D. D. Davis
H. Q. Do
E. L. Farrow
M. J. Ferlisi
K. J. Hacker
D. B. King
D. A. Kull
C. A. Nove
S. A. Sabo
R. V. Swain
B. A. Thigpen
S. J. Todd
D. K. Zimmerman
xxix
P. J. Hennessey
D. W. Lamond
A. McNeill III
T. Nomura
W. E. Norris
G. C. Park
J. E. Staffiera
H. M. Stephens, Jr.
R. Turner
H. L. Graves III, Alternate
Special Working Group on Editing and Review (BPV XI)
Task Group on High Strength Nickel Alloys Issues (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
V. L. Armentrout, Chair
B. L. Montgomery, Secretary
W. H. Bamford
P. R. Donavin
R. L. Dyle
G. G. Elder
R. E. Gimple
R. Hardies
K. Koyama
M. Lashley
G. C. Park
J. M. Shuping
J. C. Spanner, Jr.
K. B. Stuckey
E. J. Sullivan, Jr.
D. P. Weakland
R. W. Swayne, Chair
C. E. Moyer
K. R. Rao
Special Working Group on Nuclear Plant Aging Management (BPV XI)
T. A. Meyer, Chair
B. R. Snyder, Secretary
S. Asada
D. V. Burgess
Y.-K. Chung
D. D. Davis
R. L. Dyle
A. L. Hiser , Jr.
Working Group on Containment (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
J. E. Staffiera, Chair
H. M. Stephens, Jr., Secretary
P. S. Ghosal
D. H. Goche
H. L. Graves III
H. T. Hill
R. D. Hough
C. N. Krishnaswamy
J. E. Staffiera
D. J. Tilly
C. J. Wirtz
D. J. Naus
F. Poteet III
A. A. Reyes-Cruz
E. A. Rodriguez
G. Thomas
S. G. Brown, Alternate
W. E. Norris, Alternate
A. B. Meichler
R. E. Nickell
K. Sakamoto
W. L. Server
R. L. Turner
G. G. Young
Z. Zhong
C. E. Carpenter, Alternate
Working Group on General Requirements (BPV XI)
R. K. Rhyne, Chair
E. J. Maloney, Secretary
T. L. Chan
E. L. Farrow
R. Fox
P. J. Hennessey
Working Group on Inspection of Systems and Components
(SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
J. M. Agold, Chair
H. Q. Do, Secretary
V. L. Armentrout
C. Cueto-Felgueroso
R. E. Day
M. J. Ferlisi
R. Fougerousse
K. W. Hall
K. M. Hoffman
S. D. Kulat
T. Nomura
J. C. Nygaard
R. Rishel
C. M. Ross
F. J. Schaaf, Jr., Chair
M. A. Lockwood, Secretary
N. Broom
S. R. Doctor
J. Fletcher
M. R. Graybeal
J. Grimm
A. B. Hull
T. R. Lupold
J. K. McClanahan
B. L. Montgomery
S. A. Norman
P. N. Passalugo
J. A. Stevenson
Task Group on Buried Components Inspection and Testing
(WG-PT) (BPV XI)
D. W. Lamond, Chair
J. M. Boughman, Secretary
C. Blackwelder
B. Clark III
G. C. Coker
R. E. Day
R. Hardies
T. Ivy
R. K. Mattu
C. E. Moyer
D. J. Potter
R. L. Williams
Special Working Group on Reliability and Integrity Management
Program (BPV XI)
Working Group on Pressure Testing (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
D. W. Lamond, Chair
J. M. Boughman, Secretary
Y.-K. Chung
T. Coste
J. A. Doughty
R. E. Hall
K. M. Herman
D. R. Lee
R. K. Miller
P. M. Mills
M. N. Mitchell
A. T. Roberts III
T. Roney
R. W. Swayne
COMMITTEE ON TRANSPORT TANKS (BPV XII)
M. D. Rana, Chair
N. J. Paulick, Vice Chair
T. Schellens, Staff Secretary
A. N. Antoniou
J. A. Byers
W. L. Garfield
C. H. Hochman
G. G. Karcher
A. Lee
E. J. Maloney
M. Moenssens
J. Ossmann
P. N. Passalugo
J. H. Riley
D. M. Swann
J. R. McGimpsey
M. Pitts
T. A. Rogers
A. Selz
S. Staniszewski
A. P. Varghese
M. R. Ward
M. D. Pham, Contributing Member
Working Group on Risk-Informed Activities (SGW-CS) (BPV XI)
M. A. Pyne, Chair
S. T. Chesworth, Secretary
J. M. Agold
C. Cueto-Felgueroso
H. Q. Do
R. Fougerousse
M. R. Graybeal
R. Haessler
J. Hakii
Subgroup on Design and Materials (BPV XII)
K. W. Hall
S. D. Kulat
D. W. Lamond
R. K. Mattu
A. McNeill III
P. J. O’Regan
N. A. Palm
D. Vetter
J. C. Younger
A. P. Varghese, Chair
R. C. Sallash, Secretary
D. K. Chandiramani
P. Chilukuri
T. Hitchcock
G. G. Karcher
T. P. Lokey
S. L. McWilliams
xxx
N. J. Paulick
M. D. Rana
T. A. Rogers
A. Selz
M. R. Ward
K. Xu
J. Zheng, Corresponding Member
M. D. Pham, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR CERTIFICATION (CNC)
Subgroup on Fabrication, Inspection, and Continued Service
(BPV XII)
M. Pitts, Chair
P. Chilukuri, Secretary
S. E. Benet
J. A. Byers
W. L. Garfield
T. P. Lokey
W. C. LaRochelle, Chair
R. R. Stevenson, Vice Chair
E. Suarez, Staff Secretary
J. DeKleine
G. Gobbi
S. M. Goodwin
J. W. Highlands
K. A. Huber
J. C. Krane
R. P. McIntyre
M. R. Minick
L. M. Plante
H. B. Prasse
T. E. Quaka
C. T. Smith
D. M. Vickery
C. S. Withers
S. Yang
K. Mansker
J. R. McGimpsey
A. S. Olivares
R. C. Sallash
S. Staniszewski
L. H. Strouse, Contributing Member
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV XII)
W. L. Garfield, Chair
S. E. Benet, Secretary
T. W. Alexander
A. N. Antoniou
J. L. Freiler
C. H. Hochman
J. R. McGimpsey
M. Pitts
T. Rummel
M. F. Sullivan, Contributing
Member
S. Andrews, Alternate
V. Bogosian, Alternate
P. D. Edwards, Alternate
D. P. Gobbi, Alternate
K. M. Hottle, Alternate
K. A. Kavanagh, Alternate
B. G. Kovarik, Alternate
M. A. Lockwood, Alternate
R. J. Luymes, Alternate
J. Oyler, Alternate
M. Paris, Alternate
D. W. Stepp, Alternate
A. Torosyan, Alternate
E. A. Whittle, Alternate
H. L. Wiger, Alternate
R. C. Sallash
S. Staniszewski
K. L. Gilmore, Contributing Member
COMMITTEE ON SAFETY VALVE REQUIREMENTS (BPV-SVR)
L. H. Strouse, Contributing Member
J. A. West, Chair
D. B. DeMichael, Vice Chair
C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary
J. F. Ball
S. Cammeresi
J. A. Cox
R. D. Danzy
R. J. Doelling
J. P. Glaspie
S. F. Harrison, Jr.
W. F. Hart
D. Miller
T. Patel
Z. Wang
Subgroup on Nonmandatory Appendices (BPV XII)
T. A. Rogers, Chair
S. Staniszewski, Secretary
S. E. Benet
P. Chilukuri
R. Hayworth
K. Mansker
S. L. McWilliams
N. J. Paulick
M. Pitts
R. C. Sallash
D. G. Shelton
M. R. Ward
D. D. Brusewitz, Contributing
Member
J. L. Conley, Contributing Member
T. Eubanks, Contributing Member
T. Hitchcock, Contributing Member
A. Selz, Contributing Member
A. P. Varghese, Contributing
Member
Subgroup on Design (BPV-SVR)
R. D. Danzy, Chair
C. E. Beair
J. A. Conley
R. J. Doelling
D. Miller
T. Patel
J. A. West
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV-SVR)
D. B. DeMichael, Chair
J. F. Ball
G. Brazier
J. Burgess
Subgroup on Testing (BPV-SVR)
COMMITTEE ON BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CONFORMITY
ASSESSMENT (CBPVCA)
P. D. Edwards, Chair
K. I. Baron, Staff Secretary
S. W. Cameron
M. A. DeVries
T. E. Hansen
D. J. Jenkins
K. T. Lau
L. E. McDonald
K. M. McTague
D. Miller
B. R. Morelock
J. D. O'Leary
T. M. Parks
B. C. Turczynski
D. E. Tuttle
E. A. Whittle
S. T. French
J. P. Glaspie
J. W. Richardson
D. E. Tuttle
J. A. Cox, Chair
J. E. Britt
S. Cammeresi
J. W. Dickson
G. D. Goodson
R. V. Wielgoszinski
S. F. Harrison, Jr., Contributing
Member
V. Bogosian, Alternate
D. C. Cook, Alternate
D. W. King, Alternate
B. L. Krasiun, Alternate
W. C. LaRochelle, Alternate
P. F. Martin, Alternate
K. McPhie, Alternate
M. R. Minick, Alternate
I. Powell, Alternate
R. Pulliam, Alternate
M. T. Roby, Alternate
J. A. West, Alternate
A. J. Spencer, Honorary Member
W. F. Hart
B. K. Nutter
C. Sharpe
Z. Wang
A. Wilson
U.S. Technical Advisory Group ISO/TC 185 Safety Relief Valves
T. J. Bevilacqua, Chair
C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary
J. F. Ball
G. Brazier
xxxi
D. B. DeMichael
D. Miller
B. K. Nutter
J. A. West
INTRODUCTION
ð13Þ
The following is provided as a brief introduction to Section IX, and cannot be considered as a substitute for the actual
review of the document. However, this introduction is intended to give the reader a better understanding of the purpose
and organization of Section IX.
Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code relates to the qualification of welders, welding operators, brazers, brazing operators, and fusing machine operators, and the procedures employed in welding, brazing, or plastic fusing
in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and the ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping. As such, this is
an active document subject to constant review, interpretation, and improvement to recognize new developments and research data. Section IX is a document referenced for the qualification of material joining processes by various construction
codes such as Section I, III, IV, VIII, XII, etc. These particular construction codes apply to specific types of fabrication and
may impose additional requirements or exemptions to Section IX qualifications. Qualification in accordance with Section
IX is not a guarantee that procedures and performance qualifications will be acceptable to a particular construction code.
Section IX does not contain rules for production joining, nor does it contain rules to cover all factors affecting production material joining properties under all circumstances. Where such factors are determined by the organization to affect
material joining properties, the organization shall address those factors in the Procedure Specification to ensure that the
required properties are achieved in the production material joining process.
The purpose of the Procedure Specification and the Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) is to ensure the material joining process proposed for construction is capable of producing joints having the required mechanical properties for the
intended application. Personnel performing the material joining procedure qualification test shall be sufficiently skilled.
The purpose of the procedure qualification test is to establish the mechanical properties of the joint produced by the material joining process and not the skill of the personnel using the material joining process. In addition, special consideration is given when toughness testing is required by other Sections of the Code. The toughness supplementary essential
variables do not apply unless referenced by the construction codes.
The purpose of Performance Qualification is to determine the ability of the person using a material joining process to
produce a sound joint. In Operator Performance Qualification, the basic criterion is to determine the ability of the operator
to properly operate the equipment to produce a sound joint.
In developing Section IX, each material joining process that is included was reviewed with regard to those factors
(called variables) which have an effect upon the material joining operations as applied to procedure or performance
criteria.
The user of Section IX should be aware of how Section IX is organized. It is divided into four Parts: general requirements, welding, brazing, and plastic fusing. Each Part addressing a material joining process is then divided into Articles.
The Articles for each material joining process deal with the following:
(a) general requirements specifically applicable to the material joining process (Article I Welding, Article XI Brazing,
and Article XXI Plastic Fusing)
(b) procedure qualifications (Article II Welding, Article XII Brazing, and Article XXII Plastic Fusing)
(c) performance qualifications (Article III Welding, Article XIII Brazing, and Article XXIII Plastic Fusing)
(d) data (Article IV Welding, Article XIV Brazing, and Article XXIV Plastic Fusing)
(e) standard welding procedure specifications (Article V Welding)
These articles contain general references and guides that apply to procedure and performance qualifications such as
positions, type and purpose of various mechanical tests, acceptance criteria, and the applicability of Section IX, which
previously appeared in the Preamble of the 1980 Edition of Section IX (the Preamble has since been deleted). The general
requirement articles reference the data articles for specific details of the testing equipment and removal of the mechanical
test specimens.
PROCEDURE QUALIFICATIONS
Each material joining process that has been evaluated and adopted by Section IX is listed separately with the essential
and nonessential variables as they apply to that particular process. In general, the Procedure Specifications are required
to list all essential and nonessential variables for each process that is included under that particular procedure specification. When an essential variable must be changed beyond the range qualified and the change is not an editorial revision to
xxxii
correct an error, requalification of the procedure specification is required. If a change is made in a nonessential variable,
the procedure need only be revised or amended to address the nonessential variable change. When toughness testing is
required for Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) qualification by the construction code, the supplementary essential
variables become additional essential variables, and a change in these variables requires requalification of the procedure
specification.
In addition to covering various processes, there are also rules for procedure qualification of corrosion-resistant weld
metal overlay and hard-facing weld metal overlay.
Beginning with the 2000 Addenda, the use of Standard Welding Procedure Specifications (SWPSs) was permitted.
Article V provides the requirements and limitations that govern the use of these documents. The SWPSs approved for
use are listed in Mandatory Appendix E.
In the 2004 Edition, rules for temper bead welding were added.
With the incorporation of the new Creep-Strength Enhanced Ferritic (CSEF) alloys in the 1986 Edition, using the existing P-Number groupings to specify PWHT parameters can lead to variations in heat treatments that may significantly degrade the mechanical properties of these alloys. CSEF alloys are a family of ferritic steels whose creep strength is
enhanced by the creation of a precise condition of microstructure, specifically martensite or bainite, which is stabilized
during tempering by controlled precipitation of temper-resistant carbides, carbo-nitrides, or other stable phases.
In the 2007 Edition of the Code, only P-No. 5B, Group 2 base metals met this definition and were approved for Code
construction. Looking forward, a number of CSEF alloys are already in use in Code Cases and drawing near to incorporation. To facilitate addressing their special requirements, P-No. 15A through P-No. 15F have been established for CSEF
alloys.
In the 2013 Edition, Part QG General Requirements and Part QF Plastic Fusing were added.
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATIONS
These articles list separately the various processes with the essential variables that apply to the performance qualifications of each process. The performance qualifications are limited by essential variables.
The performance qualification articles have numerous paragraphs describing general applicable variables for all processes. QW-350, QB-350, and QF-360 list additional essential variables that are applicable for specific processes. The
QW-350 variables do not apply to welding operators. QW-360 lists the additional essential variables for welding
operators.
Generally, a welder or welding operator may be qualified by mechanical bending tests, or volumetric NDE of a test coupon, or the initial production weld. Brazers or brazing operators and fusing machine operators may not be qualified by
volumetric NDE.
WELDING, BRAZING, AND FUSING DATA
The data articles include the variables grouped into categories such as joints, base materials and filler materials, positions, preheat/postweld heat treatment, gas, electrical characteristics, and technique. They are referenced from other articles as they apply to each process.
These articles are frequently misused by selecting variables that do not apply to a particular process. Variables only
apply as referenced for the applicable process in Article II or III for welding, Article XII or XIII for brazing, and
Article XXII or XXIII for plastic fusing. The user of Section IX should not apply any variable that is not referenced for that
process.
These articles also include assignments of welding and brazing P-Numbers to particular base materials and F-Numbers
to filler materials. Article IV also includes A-Number tables for reference by the Code user.
Beginning with the 1994 Addenda, welding P-Numbers, brazing P-Numbers, and nonmandatory S-Numbers were consolidated into one table identified as QW/QB-422. Both the QB-422 table (brazing P-Numbers) and Appendix C table
(S-Numbers) were deleted. The new Table QW/QB-422 was divided into ferrous and nonferrous sections. Metals were
listed in numerical order by material specification number to aid users in locating the appropriate grouping number.
An abbreviated listing of metals grouped by P-Numbers, Nonmandatory Appendix D, has been included for users still
wishing to locate groupings of metals by welding P-Number.
In the 2009 Addenda, S-Number base metals listed in the QW/QB-422 table were reassigned as P-Numbers and the
S-Number listings and references were deleted.
The QW-451 and QB-451 tables for procedure qualification thickness requirements and the QW-452 and QB-452 tables
for performance qualification thickness are given and may be used only as referenced by other paragraphs. Generally, the
appropriate essential variables reference these tables.
xxxiii
Revisions to the 1980 Edition of Section IX introduced new definitions for position and added a fillet-weld orientation
sketch to complement the groove-weld orientation sketch. The new revision to position indicates that a welder qualifies in
the 1G, 2G, 3G, etc., position and is then qualified to weld, in production, in the F, V, H, or O positions as appropriate.
QW-461.9 is a revised table that summarizes these new qualifications.
The data articles also give sketches of coupon orientations, removal of test specimens, and test jig dimensions. These
are referenced by Articles I, XI, and XXI.
QW-470 describes etching processes and reagents.
Within Part QG is a list of general definitions applicable to Section IX–adopted material joining processes. These may
differ slightly from other welding documents.
Nonmandatory Forms for documenting procedure and performance qualifications are provided for the aid of those who
do not wish to design their own forms. Any form(s) that address all applicable requirements of Section IX may be used.
xxxiv
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
The 2013 Edition of this Code contains revisions in addition to the 2010 Edition with 2011 Addenda.
After publication of the 2013 Edition, Errata to the BPV Code may be posted on the ASME Web site to provide corrections
to incorrectly published items, or to correct typographical or grammatical errors in the BPV Code. Such Errata shall be
used on the date posted.
Information regarding Special Notices and Errata is published on the ASME Web site under the BPVC Resources page at
http://www.asme.org/kb/standards/publications/bpvc-resources.
Changes given below are identified on the pages by a margin note, (13), placed next to the affected area.
The Record Numbers listed below are explained in more detail in “List of Changes in Record Number Order” following this
Summary of Changes.
Page
Location
Change (Record Number)
Cover and Title Page
Section title and subtitle revised (12-1134)
x
List of Sections
Revised (12-749)
xii
Foreword
Revised in its entirety (09-760)
xv
Submittal of Technical
Inquiries to the Boiler
and P ressure Vessel
Standards Committees
Revised (12-1641)
xvii
Personnel
Updated
xxxii
Introduction
Revised in its entirety (12-383)
xlii
Cross-Referencing and
Stylistic Changes in the
B o i l e r an d P r e s s u r e
Vessel Code
Added
1
Part QG
Added (12-383, 12-1956)
14
QW-100
Revised (12-159, 12-383)
20
QW-191.1.2.2
(1) Subparagraph (b)(3) revised (11-1697)
(2) Figure QW-192.2.2.2(b)(4) added (formerly, in Appendix I)
21
QW-191.2.1
Subparagraph (b) revised (12-383)
22
QW-191.2.2
Subparagraph (a) revised (12-383)
23
QW-193.1
Revised (11-2142)
24
QW-194
Revised (11-1145)
26
Appendix I
Illustration designated as Figure QW-191.1.2.2(b)(4) and placed
after QW-191.1.2.2(b)(3) (11-1697)
27
QW-200.1
First paragraph, second paragraph of subpara. (b), and subpara. (d)
revised (12-383)
27
QW-200.2
Revised (12-383)
28
QW-201
Revised in its entirety (12-383)
xxxv
Page
Location
Change (Record Number)
29
QW-202.1
Fifth paragraph revised (12-383)
31
QW-220
Added (09-298)
31
QW-221
Added (11-996)
54
Table QW-261
Rows for QW-403 revised (11-507)
57
Table QW-264
Revised (12-404, 11-2028)
58
Table QW-264.1
Revised (11-2028)
61
Table QW-267
Added (08-265)
62
Table QW-268
Added (09-298)
64
Table QW-269
Added (11-996)
66
Table QW-269.1
Added (11-996)
72
QW-290.5
Subparagraph (c) revised (10-33, 11-2062)
74
QW-300
(1) QW-300.2 and QW-300.3 redesignated as QG-106.2 and
QG-106.3, respectively (12-383)
(2) In QW-301.2, first sentence revised and last paragraph deleted
(12-383)
(3) QW-301.3 revised (12-383)
(4) In QW-302.2, seventh line revised (11-1008)
(5) In QW-303.3, first line revised (12-383)
(6) QW-304.1(b) and QW-305.1(b) revised (11-1008)
76
QW-310
In QW-310.2 and QW-310.3, “manufacturer” revised to read
“organization” (12-383, 12-1903)
77
QW-321.3
(1) Third line of subpara. (a) revised (11-1008)
(2) In suparas. (b) and (c), “manufacturer” revised to read
“organization” (12-383, 12-1903)
77
QW-322.1
Subparagraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) revised (12-383, 12-1903)
78
Table QW-356
Entry for “Brief of Variables” revised for QW-404.23 and Legend
added editorially (12-338)
79
Table QW-357
Entry for “Brief of Variables” revised for QW-404.23 (12-338)
79
QW-361
(1) QW-361.1(d) revised (09-298)
(2) QW-361.2(h) revised (11-996)
79
QW-362
Title revised (09-298)
82
QW-402
QW-402.27 through QW-402.30 added (08-265, 09-298)
85
QW-403.30
Added (08-265)
85
QW-403.31
Added (09-298)
87
QW-404.23
Revised (10-1589)
87
QW-404.30
Revised (11-1469)
88
QW-404.54
Added (09-298)
88
QW-405.4
First line of subpara. (b) revised (12-383)
90
QW-408.13
Deleted (11-2028)
90
QW-408.26
Added (08-265)
xxxvi
Page
Location
Change (Record Number)
92
QW-410
(1) QW-410.69
(2) QW-410.73
(3) QW-410.77
(4) QW-410.81
95
Table QW-416
Entry under “Brief of Variables” revised for QW-404.23 (12-338)
96
QW-420
Seventh paragraph revised (12-1794)
Table QW/QB-422
(1) Revised (09-237, 09-1775, 10-1926, 11-191, 11-622, 11-653,
11-677, 11-876, 11-998, 11-999, 11-1122, 11-1151, 11-1275,
11-1572, 11-1943, 11-2027, 12-481, 12-713, 12-740, 12-1367,
12-1393, 12-1774, 12-1954, 12-1955)
(2) Corrected by errata (11-130, 11-729, 12-1305, 12-1506, 12-2090)
166
QW-423.1
In-text table revised (12-2167)
166
QW-424.2
Added (10-1463)
167
Table QW-432
(1) F-No. 23, SFA-5.10, rows for AWS Classification ER4943 UNS No.
A94943 and AWS Classification R4943 UNS No. A94943 added
(12-1352)
(2) For F-No. 43, SFA-5.14, AWS Classification ERNiCrFe-14 UNS
N06043 row added (12-152)
176
Table QW-442
Revised (10-1741)
177
Table QW-451.1
Note (6) added (11-1146)
178
Table QW-451.4
General Note added (12-65)
190
Figure QW-461.10
Added (08-265)
190
QW-462
First sentence revised (12-383)
192
Figure QW-462.1(d)
General Note (e) added (12-224)
208
Table QW-462.10(a)
Revised (10-1774)
209
Table QW-462.10(b)
Revised (10-1774)
210
Table QW-462.10(c)
Revised (10-1774)
222
Figure QW-466.1
For both Customary and SI Units tables, second row of Material
column revised (10-2021)
228
QW-471
Revised (12-1569)
229
QW-490
(1) Redesignated as QG-109 (12-383)
(2) Definitions for control method (FSW); control method, force
(FSW); control method, position (FSW); control method, travel
(FSW); metal transfer mode (gas metal-arc welding);
organization; welding, hybrid; welding, hybrid, process
separation; and welding, hybrid, process sequence added
(08-265, 09-298, 10-2104, 11-2031, 12-383)
(3) Figures QW/QB-492.1 and QW/QB-492.2 redesignated as
QG-109.2.1 and QG-109.2.2, respectively (12-383)
230
QW-510
Revised (12-383)
231
QW-540
Revised (12-383)
232
QB-100
Revised in its entirety (12-159, 12-383)
233
QB-141.4
Revised (11-1175)
xxxvii
deleted (11-2028)
through QW-410.76 added (08-265)
through QW-410.80 added (09-298)
through QW-410.84 added (11-996)
Page
Location
Change (Record Number)
236
QB-200
(1) In QB-200.1 and QB-200.2, “manufacturer or contractor” revised
to read “organization” (12-383)
(2) First line of QB-200.2 revised (12-383)
(3) QB-201 revised in its entirety (12-383)
(4) In QB-202.1, last sentence of last paragraph revised (12-383)
242
QB-300
(1) QB-300.2 and QB-300.3 deleted (12-383)
(2) QB-301.2, QB-301.3, and QB-303.4 revised (12-383)
245
QB-410.5
Revised (11-1537)
260
Figure QB-462.4
General Note revised (11-1175)
271
Part QF
Added (11-568, 11-569, 11-570, 11-571, 12-159, 12-383, 12-1904,
12-2292)
294
Mandatory Appendix A
Deleted (12-1643)
296
Form QW-482
Revised (12-383, 11-1469)
298
Form QW-483
Revised (12-383)
300
Form QW-484A
Revised (12-383)
301
Form QW-484B
Revised (12-383)
302
Form QW-485
Revised (12-383)
304
Form QB-483
Revised (12-383)
305
Form QB-484
Revised (12-383)
306
Nonmandatory Appendix
D
(1) Revised (09-237, 09-1775, 10-1926, 11-191, 11-622, 11-677,
11-876, 11-998, 11-999, 11-1122, 11-1151, 11-1275, 11-1572,
11-1943, 11-2027, 12-481, 12-713, 12-1367, 12-1393, 12-1506,
12-1774, 12-1954)
(2) Corrected by errata (11-2201, 12-1506)
324
Mandatory Appendix E
WPS replaced with SWPS throughout (11-1249)
332
H-500
First paragraph revised (12-383)
334
Nonmandatory Appendix
K
Added (12-564)
NOTE: Volume 62 of the Interpretations to Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code follows the last page of
Section IX.
xxxviii
LIST OF CHANGES IN BC ORDER
Record Number
08-265
09-237
09-298
09-760
09-1775
10-33
10-1463
10-1589
10-1741
10-1774
10-1926
10-2021
10-2104
11-130
11-191
11-507
11-568
11-569
11-570
11-571
11-622
11-653
11-677
11-729
11-876
11-996
11-998
11-999
Change
Added new Table QW-266 and paras. QW-402.27, QW-402.28, QW-402.29, QW-403.30,
QW-410.73, QW-410.74, QW-410.75, and QW-410.76; added new definitions for control method
(FSW), control method, force (FSW), control method, position (FSW), control method, travel (FSW),
and welding, friction stir (FSW) in QW-492.
Added SA-387 9Cr-1Mo plate as Grade 9 Cl. 1 and Grade 9 Cl. 2 to Table QW/QB 422 and Appendix D.
Added QW-220, QW-267, and QW-360 to incorporate hybrid laser welding.
Added an introductory subtitle clarifying the purpose and limitations of the Foreword. Revised
history paragraph to recognize the realignment of the BPV into several BPV’s. Deleted the paragraph on tolerances. Made editorial changes to recognize the new committee structure. Deleted
words addressing governing code editions. Deleted paragraph concerning materials. Deleted the
paragraph dealing with what the committee considers in the formulation of these rules.
Revised QW/QB-422 and Nonmandatory Appendix D.
Revised QW-290.5 and figures in QW-462.12.
Revised QW-424 to add a new para. QW-424.2 as shown in the proposal.
Revised QW-404.23 to add clarification.
Replaced ellipses with numeric values. Reduced significant figures to three for most elements,
and to two for Si. Added Note (2) to clarify intent of nonlisted elements.
Revised Tables QW-462.10(a), (b), and (c) to change the units from “kg” to “N.”
Revised SA/CSA-G40.21 Grades 44W and 50W material in QW/QB-422 and Appendix D.
Revised Table QW-466.1 to update P-Numbers.
Added the definition of “transfer mode” for GMAW to QW-492.
Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
Assigned P-Numbers to SA-494 in QW/QB-422 and Appendix D.
Revised QW-409.8 and QW-409.10.
Incorporated new Article QF-100.
Incorporated new Article QF-200.
Incorporated new Article QF-300. Revised proposal includes QF-300 - Article redesignated from
QX to QF, rewrote QF-300.2 to be the same as QW-300.2 (welding requirements), revised
QF-302.2(a)(1) - changed QX-463 to QF-463(a), revised QF-302.2(a)(2) - changed QX-46X to
QF-463(b), revised QF-302.2 - deleted QF-302.2(b) and removed FTT. Added QF-403.1 (2nd Column) and Ø Pipe Material (3rd Column) in Table QF-360.
Incorporated new Article QF-400.
Assigned welding and brazing P-Numbers (P-8, Grp. 4 and 102) along with ISO 15608 Group
(8.2) (QW/QB-422 and Appendix D) to (10) of the specifications referenced by Table 3 of the
Code Case. P-Numbers were not assigned for SA-193 (Bolting) and SA-194 (Nuts).
Deleted current reference to SA-240 UNS 31050 Type 310MoLN from QW/QB 422 as shown in
the proposal file and added the dual reference for SA-240 UNS 31050 Type 310MoLN with ultimate tensile strengths of 78 and 84 ksi to QW/QB 422 as shown in the proposal file.
Assigned welding and brazing P-Numbers (P-10H, Grp. 1, and 102) along with ISO 15608 Group
(10.1) (QW/QB-422 and Appendix D) to the (6) specifications referenced by the Code Case.
Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
Deleted SA-695 from Table QW/QB-422 and Appendix D.
Added QW-221 and Table QW-468 to incorporate hybrid plasma GMAW. Revised text and tables
to incorporate ballot comments and input from Nashville 2012 meetings.Observed that paragraph QW-251.1 should be revised (see Project Manager notes, below).
Revised QW/QB-422 and Nonmandatory Appendix D.
Assigned proposed Welding and brazing P-Numbers (P-10H, Grp. 1 and 102) along with ISO
15608 Group (10.1) (QW/QB-422 and Appendix D) to the (3) specifications referenced by the
Code Case.
xxxix
Record Number
11-1008
11-1122
11-1145
11-1146
11-1151
11-1175
11-1249
11-1275
11-1469
11-1537
11-1572
11-1697
11-1943
11-2027
11-2028
11-2031
11-2062
11-2142
11-2201
12-65
12-152
12-159
12-224
12-338
12-383
12-404
12-481
12-564
12-713
12-740
12-1134
12-1305
12-1352
12-1367
12-1393
12-1506
12-1569
12-1643
12-1774
Change
Revised QW-302.2, QW-304.1, QW-305.1, and QW-321.3(a) to improve consistency and apply
more logical requirements for volumetric examination when used for welder and welding operator performance qualification.
Added GB 713 Grades Q370R and 15CrMoR to QW/QB-422 and Appendix D.
Proposed additional acceptance criteria for visual examination of performance coupons.
Revised QW-451.1.
Revised A-213 and A-312 tube and pipe alloys P-numbers in Table QW/QB-422 and Appendix D.
Revised QB-141.4 and Figure QB-462.4.
Revised Appendix E to updated references.
Modified Table QW/QB-422 and Nonmandatory Appendix D.
Revised QW-404.30 and QW-482.
Revised QB-410.5.
Revised Table QW/QB-422 and Nonmandatory Appendix D.
Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
Added ASTM A859 as SA-859 and assigned a P-No. to Table QW/QB-422 and Appendix D.
Added SA/NF A 36-215 Grade P440 NJ4 to QW/QB-422 and Appendix D.
Revised QW-264 and QW-264.1, and deleted QW-408.13 and QW-410.69.
Added definitions to QW/QB-492.
Added paragraph to QW-209.5(c).
Revised QW-193.1.
Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
Added General Note to Table QW-451.4.
Added ERNiCrFe-14 to QW-432.
Revised Scope paragraphs QW-101, QB-101, and QF-101.
Added Note (e) to QW-462.1(d).
Revised QW-356, QW-357, and QW-416.
Added Part QG, General Requirements. Revised the Introduction, Part QW, and Part QB to eliminate redundancy with Part QG. Added a definition for the term organization. Globally revised
Section IX to replace the terms manufacturer, contractor, assembler, installer, and fabricator with
the term organization.
Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
Added SA 533 Type E Cl 1 & 2 to Appendix D, and added SA 533 Type E Cl 1 & 2 to Table QW/
QB-422.
Added Nonmandatory Appendix on Guidance on Invoking SC IX Requirements.
Revised Table QW/QB-422 and Appendix D to include a number of ASTM specifications. The
changes to be voted on in the recirculation ballot are as follows:
• changed “N08637” to “N08367” on pages 10, 12, 16, 17, 23, 24, and 35
• changed “pipe” to “tube” for A789 S32205 on page 21
• deleted the addition of “10H. . . .1. . . .A182. . . .S32205” on page 32 because it is already listed
as F60
Added ISO 15608 Group numbers for SA/GB713 Q370R and SA/GB713 15CrMoR materials to
Table QW/QB-422
Added “Fusing” to title of Section IX Code Book.
Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details..
Adopted AWS A5.10/A5.10M:2012 (ISO 18273:2004 MOD) in Modification to QW-432 to add
alloys to the F-number table.
Added and revised API 5L grades in QW/QB-422 and Appendix D.
Revised entire Table QW/QB-422 and Appendix D. Replaced all “SA-” with “A/SA-” and all “SB-”
with “B/SB-”. Deleted redundant ASTM A and B spec no.’s. Replaced ASTM A and B spec no’s with
“A/SA-” and “B/SB-” for materials listed in Section II Part A and Part B.
Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
Revised QW-471.
Deleted Appendix A and added the requirements to the front matter.
Added A/SA 350 LF6 Cl 2 material to Table QW/QB-422 and Appendix D as a P-No 1 Group 3
material.
xl
Record Number
12-1794
12-1903
12-1904
12-1954
12-1955
12-1956
12-2090
12-2167
12-2292
Change
Revised 7th paragraph of QW-420.
Revised QW-322.1(a)(1) and (a)(2).
Revised Part QF to incorporate Part QG.
Added UNS numbers in Table QW/QB 422 to SA-53 Type F, SA-134 (SA283GrA) and
(SA283GrB), SA-135 A and B, A139 A, SA-178 D, SA-182 F3VCb and F92, SA-336 F3VCb,
A351 CE20N, SA-369 FP92, A451 CPE20N, SA-508 3VCb, SA-541 3VCb, SA-542 E, Cl. 4a, B361
WP Alclad 3003, and B547 Alclad 3003. Deleted and replaced material grades with UNS numbers in Appendix D for B361 and B547.
Revised Table QW/QB-422 by deleting tensile strengths from A519.
Revise QG-106.3 and QG-106.3(f).
Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
xli
ð13Þ
CROSS-REFERENCING AND STYLISTIC CHANGES IN THE BOILER
AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
There have been structural and stylistic changes to BPVC, starting with the 2011 Addenda, that should be noted to aid
navigating the contents. The following is an overview of the changes:
Subparagraph Breakdowns/Nested Lists Hierarchy
•
•
•
•
•
•
First-level breakdowns are designated as (a), (b), (c), etc., as in the past.
Second-level breakdowns are designated as (1), (2), (3), etc., as in the past.
Third-level breakdowns are now designated as (-a), (-b), (-c), etc.
Fourth-level breakdowns are now designated as (-1), (-2), (-3), etc.
Fifth-level breakdowns are now designated as (+a), (+b), (+c), etc.
Sixth-level breakdowns are now designated as (+1), (+2), etc.
Footnotes
With the exception of those included in the front matter (roman-numbered pages), all footnotes are treated as endnotes. The endnotes are referenced in numeric order and appear at the end of each BPVC section/subsection.
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees has been moved to the front
matter. This information now appears in all Boiler Code Sections (except for Code Case books).
Cross-References
It is our intention to establish cross-reference link functionality in the current edition and moving forward. To facilitate
this, cross-reference style has changed. Cross-references within a subsection or subarticle will not include the designator/
identifier of that subsection/subarticle. Examples follow:
• (Sub-)Paragraph Cross-References. The cross-references to subparagraph breakdowns will follow the hierarchy of the
designators under which the breakdown appears.
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) and is referenced in X.1(c)(1), it will be referenced as (-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.1(c)(2), it will be referenced as (1)(-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.1(e)(1), it will be referenced as (c)(1)(-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.2(c)(2), it will be referenced as X.1(c)(1)(-a).
• Equation Cross-References. The cross-references to equations will follow the same logic. For example, if eq. (1)
appears in X.1(a)(1) but is referenced in X.1(b), it will be referenced as eq. (a)(1)(1). If eq. (1) appears in X.1(a)
(1) but is referenced in a different subsection/subarticle/paragraph, it will be referenced as eq. X.1(a)(1)(1).
xlii
2013 SECTION IX
PART QG
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ð13Þ
QG-100
SCOPE
the material joining procedure, the applicable supplementary essential variables shall also be addressed in the
procedure specification.
(a) This Section contains requirements for the qualification of welders, welding operators, brazers, brazing operators, plastic fusing machine operators, and the material
joining processes they use during welding, brazing, and
fusing operations for the construction of components under the rules of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
the ASME B31 Codes for Pressure Piping, and other Codes,
standards, and specifications that reference this Section.
This Section is divided into four parts.
(1) Part QG contains general requirements for all
material-joining processes.
(2) Part QW contains requirements for welding.
(3) Part QB contains requirements for brazing.
(4) Part QF contains requirements for plastic fusing.
(b) Whenever the referencing Code, standard, or specification imposes requirements different than those given
in this Section, the requirements of the referencing Code,
standard, or specification shall take precedence over the
requirements of this Section.
(c) Some of the more common terms relating to material joining processes are defined in QG-109. Whenever
the word “pipe” is used, “tube” shall also be applicable.
QG-101
Procedure specifications written and qualified in accordance with the rules of this Section and personnel whose
performance has been qualified to use the procedure
specification in accordance with these rules may be used
to construct components that comply with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or
the ASME B31 Codes for Pressure Piping.
However, other Sections of the Code state the rules under which Section IX requirements are mandatory, in
whole or in part, and may give additional requirements.
The reader is advised to take these provisions into consideration when using this Section.
QG-102
PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD
The purpose of qualifying the procedure specification is
to demonstrate that the joining process proposed for construction is capable of producing joints having the required mechanical properties for the intended
application. Qualification of the procedure specification
demonstrates the mechanical properties of the joint made
using a joining process, and not the skill of the person
using the joining process.
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
A procedure specification is a written document providing direction to the person applying the material joining
process. Details for the preparation and qualification of
procedure specifications for welding (WPS), brazing
(BPS), and fusing (FPS) are given in the respective Parts
addressing those processes. Procedure specifications used
by an organization (see QG-109.2) having responsibility
for operational control of material joining processes shall
have been qualified by that organization, or shall be a standard procedure specification acceptable under the rules of
the applicable Part for the joining process to be used.
Procedure specifications address the conditions (including ranges, if any) under which the material joining
process must be performed. These conditions are referred
to in this Section as “variables.” When a procedure specification is prepared by the organization, it shall address, as
a minimum, the specific essential and nonessential variables that are applicable to the material joining process
to be used in production. When the referencing Code, standard, or specification requires toughness qualification of
The procedure qualification record (PQR) documents
what occurred during the production of a procedure qualification test coupon and the results of testing that coupon. As a minimum, the PQR shall document the
essential procedure qualification test variables applied
during production of the test joint, and the results of the
required tests. When toughness testing is required for
qualification of the procedure specification, the applicable
supplementary essential variables shall be recorded for
each process. The organization shall certify the PQR by a
signature or other means as described in the organization’s Quality Control System. The PQR shall be accessible
to the Authorized Inspector. A procedure specification
may be supported by one or more PQR(s), and one
PQR may be used to support one or more procedure
specification(s).
1
2013 SECTION IX
QG-103
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION
only the applicable special process variables shall apply.
A change in these process variables shall require requalification of the procedure specification.
The purpose of qualifying the person who will use a
joining process is to demonstrate that person’s ability to
produce a sound joint when using a procedure
specification.
QG-104
QG-105.5 Applicability. The applicable essential,
supplementary essential, nonessential, and special
process variables for a specific joining process are given
in the Part addressing that joining process.
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION
RECORD
QG-106
The performance qualification record documents what
occurred during the production of a test coupon by a person using one or more joining processes following an
organization’s procedure specification. As a minimum,
the record shall document the essential variables for each
process used to produce the test coupon, the ranges of
variables qualified, and the results of the required testing
and/or nondestructive examinations. The organization
shall certify a performance qualification record by a signature or other means as described in the organization’s
Quality Control System and shall make the performance
qualification record accessible to the Authorized
Inspector.
QG-105
ORGANIZATIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
QG-106.1 Procedure Qualifications. Each organization is responsible for conducting the tests required by
this Section to qualify the procedures that are used in
the construction of components under the rules of the
Codes, standards, and specifications that reference this
Section.
(a) Each organization is responsible for the supervision
and control of persons using material-joining processes
for the production of test joints for procedure qualification. The persons producing test joints for the qualification
of procedures shall be either direct employees or shall be
personally engaged by contract for material-joining
services.
(b) Production of qualification test joints under the
supervision and control of another organization is not permitted. However, it is permitted to subcontract any or all
of the work necessary for preparing the materials to be
joined, the subsequent work for preparing test specimens
from the completed test joint, and the performance of nondestructive examination and mechanical tests, provided
the organization accepts full responsibility for any such
work.
(c) If the effective operational control of procedure qualifications for two or more companies of different names
exists under the same corporate ownership, the companies involved shall describe in their Quality Control System/Quality Assurance Program the operational control
of procedure qualifications. In this case, separate procedure qualifications are not required, provided all other
requirements of this Section are met.
VARIABLES
QG-105.1 Essential Variables. Essential variables are
conditions in which a change, as described in the specific
variables, is considered to affect the mechanical properties
of the joint. Before using a procedure specification whose
essential variables have been revised and fall outside their
qualified range, the procedure specification must be
requalified. Procedure qualification records may be changed when a procedure qualification test supporting the
change has been completed, or when an editorial revision
is necessary to correct an error, as permitted by the rules
of the Part applicable to the material-joining process.
QG-105.2 Supplementary Essential Variables. Supplementary essential variables are conditions in which a
change will affect the toughness properties of the joint,
heat-affected zone, or base material. Supplementary
essential variables become additional essential variables
in situations where procedure qualifications require
toughness testing. When procedure qualification does
not require the addition of toughness testing, supplementary essential variables are not applicable. See QW-401.3.
QG-106.2 Performance Qualifications. Each organization is responsible for the supervision and control of
material joining performed by persons for whom they
have operational responsibility and control. The organization shall conduct the tests required by this Section to
qualify the performance of those persons with each joining
process they will use for the construction of components
under the rules of the Codes, standards, and specifications
that reference this Section. This responsibility cannot be
delegated to another organization.
(a) Each organization is responsible for the supervision
and control of persons using material-joining processes
for the production of test joints for performance
qualification.
(b) The performance qualification test shall be
performed following either a qualified procedure specification or a standard procedure specification acceptable
QG-105.3 Nonessential Variables. Nonessential variables are conditions in which a change, as described in the
specific variables, is not considered to affect the mechanical properties of the joint. A procedure specification
may be editorially revised to change a nonessential variable to fall outside of its previously listed range, but does
not require requalification of the procedure specification.
QG-105.4 Special Process Variables. Special process
variables are conditions that apply only to special
processes that are described in the Part that addresses
those processes. When these special processes are used,
2
2013 SECTION IX
for the joining method, whose acceptable range of variables is consistent with those to be followed during the
performance qualification. When a single procedure specification is to be followed, each participating organization
shall review and accept that procedure specification.
(c) Each participating organization’s representative
shall positively identify the person whose performance
is to be tested, and shall verify the markings on the test
coupon correspond to the person’s identification; and
shall also verify that the positional orientation markings
on the test coupon reflect the test position of the coupon
as required to identify the location of test specimen
removal.
(d) Each organization’s representative shall perform a
visual examination of each completed test coupon and
each test specimen to determine its acceptability. Alternatively, after visual examination, when the test coupon(s) is
prepared and tested by an independent laboratory, that laboratory’s report may be used as the basis for accepting
the test results. When the test coupon(s) is examined by
volumetric examination, the examining organization’s report may be used as the basis for acceptance of the test
coupon.
(e) Each organizational representative shall prepare
and certify a performance qualification record for each
person qualified.
(f) When the person changes employers between participating organizations, the employing organization shall
verify the continuity of the person’s qualifications has
been maintained by previous employers since his qualification date, as required by the applicable Part for the joining method. Evidence of activities supporting performance
qualification continuity may be obtained from any
member of the association, even if the member was not
a participant in the simultaneous welder qualifications.
(g) If a person has had their performance qualification
withdrawn for specific reasons, the employing organization shall notify all other participating organizations that
the person’s qualification(s) has been revoked. The remaining participating organizations shall determine
whether or not they will uphold or withdraw the performance qualifications for that person in accordance with
this Section.
(h) When a person’s performance qualifications are renewed in accordance with the provisions of the applicable
Part for the joining method, the testing procedures shall
follow the rules of this paragraph. Each renewing organization shall be represented by an employee with designated responsibility for performance qualification.
under the rules of the applicable Part for the joining process. The Part addressing any specific joining process may
exempt a portion of the procedure specification from
being followed during production of the performance qualification test coupon.
(c) Production of test joints under the supervision and
control of another organization is not permitted. It is permitted to subcontract any or all of the work necessary for
preparing the materials to be joined in the test joint, and
the subsequent work for preparing test specimens from
the completed test joint, and the performance of nondestructive examination and mechanical tests, provided the
organization accepts full responsibility for any such work.
(d) The performance qualification test may be terminated at any stage, whenever it becomes apparent to the
supervisor conducting the tests that the person being
tested does not have the required skill to produce satisfactory results.
(e) When a procedure qualification test coupon has
been tested and found acceptable, the person who prepared the test coupon is also qualified for the joining
process used, within the ranges specified for performance
qualification for the applicable process(es).
(f) Persons who are successfully qualified shall be
assigned an identifying number, letter, or symbol by the
organization, which shall be used to identify their work.
(g) If effective operational control of performance qualifications for two or more companies of different names
exists under the same corporate ownership, the companies involved shall describe in their Quality Control
System/Quality Assurance Program, the operational control of performance qualifications. In this case, requalification of persons working within the companies of such an
organization are not required, provided all other requirements of this Section are met.
QG-106.3 Simultaneous Performance Qualifications. Organizations may participate in an association to
collectively qualify the performance of one or more
persons for material-joining processes simultaneously.
When simultaneous performance qualifications are conducted, each participating organization shall be represented during the preparation of the joint test by an
employee with designated responsibility for performance
qualifications.
(a) The procedure specifications to be followed during
simultaneous performance qualifications shall be compared by the participating organizations, and shall be
identical for all the essential variables, except as otherwise
provided in the Part addressing the specific joining method. The qualified thickness ranges need not be identical
but shall be adequate to permit the completion of the test.
(b) Alternatively, the participating organizations shall
agree upon the use of a single procedure specification,
for which each participating organization has a supporting
PQR or has accepted responsibility for using a standard
procedure specification in accordance with applicable Part
QG-107
OWNERSHIP TRANSFERS
Organizations may maintain effective operational control of PQRs, procedure specifications, and performance
qualification records under different ownership than existed during the original procedure qualification. When
an organization or some part thereof is acquired by a
new owner(s), the PQRs, procedure specifications, and
3
2013 SECTION IX
performance qualification records may remain valid for
use by the new owner(s) without requalification; and
the new owner(s) PQRs, procedure specifications, and
performance qualification records become valid for use
by the acquired organization, provided all of the following
requirements have been met:
(a) The new owner(s) takes responsibility for the procedure specifications and performance qualification records.
(b) The procedure specifications and performance qualification records have been revised to reflect the name of
the new owner(s).
(c) The Quality Control System/Quality Assurance
Program documents the original source of the PQRs,
procedure specifications, and performance qualification
records as being from the original qualifying organization.
QG-108
arc strike: any inadvertent discontinuity resulting from an
arc, consisting o f any localiz ed r emelted metal,
heat‐affected metal, or change in the surface profile of
any metal object. The arc may be caused by arc welding
electrodes, magnetic inspection prods, or frayed electrical
cable.
arc welding: a group of welding processes wherein coalescence is produced by heating with an arc or arcs, with or
without the application of pressure, and with or without
the use of filler metal.
as‐brazed: adj. pertaining to the condition of brazements
after brazing, prior to any subsequent thermal, mechanical, or chemical treatments.
as‐welded: adj. pertaining to the condition of weld metal,
welded joints, and weldments after welding but prior to
any subsequent thermal, mechanical, or chemical
treatments.
QUALIFICATIONS MADE TO PREVIOUS
EDITIONS
Joining procedures, procedure qualifications, and performance qualifications that were made in accordance
with Editions and Addenda of this Section as far back as
the 1962 Edition may be used in any construction for
which the current Edition has been specified.
Joining procedures, procedure qualifications, and performance qualifications that were made in accordance
with Editions and Addenda of this Section prior to the
1962 Edition may be used in any construction for which
the current Edition has been specified provided the
requirements of the 1962 Edition or any later edition have
been met.
Procedure specifications, PQRs, and performance qualification records meeting the above requirements do not
require amendment to include any variables required by
later Editions and Addenda, except as specified in
QW-420. Qualification of new procedure specifications
for joining processes, and performance qualifications for
persons applying them, shall be in accordance with the
current Edition of Section IX.
QG-109
QG-109.1
backgouging: the removal of weld metal and base metal
from the weld root side of a welded joint to facilitate complete fusion and complete joint penetration upon subsequent welding from that side.
backhand welding: a welding technique in which the welding torch or gun is directed opposite to the progress of
welding.
backing: a material placed at the root of a weld joint for the
purpose of supporting molten weld metal so as to facilitate
complete joint penetration. The material may or may not
fuse into the joint. See also retainer.
backing gas: a gas, such as argon, helium, nitrogen, or
reactive gas, which is employed to exclude oxygen from
the root side (opposite from the welding side) of weld
joints.
base metal: the metal or alloy that is welded, brazed, or
cut.
bead-up cycle: part of the butt-fusing process to ensure
complete contact between the heater surface and the pipe
ends. The bead-up cycle begins when initial contact of the
pipe ends to the heater is made at butt-fusing pressure
until an indication of melt is observed around the pipe
circumference.
DEFINITIONS
GENERAL
Definitions of the more common terms relating to
material-joining processes are defined in QG-109.2. There
are terms listed that are specific to ASME Section IX and
are not presently defined in AWS A3.0. Several definitions
have been modified slightly from AWS A3.0 so as to better
define the context/intent as used in ASME Section IX.
QG-109.2
bond line (brazing and thermal spraying): the cross section
of the interface between a braze or thermal spray deposit
and the substrate.
braze: a joint produced by heating an assembly to suitable
temperatures and by using a filler metal having a liquidus
above 840°F (450°C) and below the solidus of the base
materials. The filler metal is distributed between the
closely fitted surfaces of the joint by capillary action.
DEFINITIONS
arc seam weld: a seam weld made by an arc welding
process.
brazer: one who performs a manual or semiautomatic
brazing operation.
arc spot weld: a spot weld made by an arc welding process.
4
2013 SECTION IX
integrity. This build‐up may be with a chemistry different
from the base metal chemistry which has been qualified
via a standard butt welded test coupon. Also, may be
called base metal repair or buildup.
brazing: a group of metal joining processes which produces coalescence of materials by heating them to a suitable temperature, and by using a filler metal having a
liquidus above 840°F (450°C) and below the solidus of
the base materials. The filler metal is distributed between
the closely fitted surfaces of the joint by capillary action.
butt joint: a joint between two members aligned approximately in the same plane.
brazing operator: one who operates machine or automatic
brazing equipment.
butt-fusing cycle: pressure–time diagram for a defined
fusing temperature, representing the entire butt-fusing
operation.
brazing temperature: the temperature to which the base
metal(s) is heated to enable the filler metal to wet the base
metal(s) and form a brazed joint.
brazing temperature range: the temperature range within
which brazing can be conducted.
butt-fusing pressure: the sum of the theoretical butt-fusing
pressure plus the drag pressure. This is the gauge pressure used by the butt-fusing operator on the butt-fusing
machine to join the pipe ends.
brazing, automatic: brazing with equipment which
performs the brazing operation without constant observation and adjustment by a brazing operator. The equipment
may or may not perform the loading and unloading of the
work.
buttering: the addition of material, by welding, on one or
both faces of a joint, prior to the preparation of the joint
for final welding, for the purpose of providing a suitable
transition weld deposit for the subsequent completion of
the joint.
brazing, block (BB): a brazing process that uses heat from
heated blocks applied to the joint. This is an obsolete or
seldom used process.
clad brazing sheet: a metal sheet on which one or both
sides are clad with brazing filler metal.
coalescence: the growing together or growth into one body
of the materials being joined.
brazing, dip (DB): a brazing process in which the heat
required is furnished by a molten chemical or metal bath.
When a molten chemical bath is used, the bath may act as a
flux; when a molten metal bath is used, the bath provides
the filler metal.
complete fusion: fusion which has occurred over the entire
base material surfaces intended for welding, and between
all layers and beads.
composite: a material consisting of two or more discrete
materials with each material retaining its physical
identity.
brazing, furnace (FB): a brazing process in which the
workpieces are placed in a furnace and heated to the
brazing temperature.
consumable insert: filler metal that is placed at the joint
root before welding, and is intended to be completely
fused into the root to become part of the weld.
brazing, induction (IB): a brazing process that uses heat
from the resistance of the workpieces to induced electric
current.
contact tube: a device which transfers current to a continuous electrode.
brazing, machine: brazing with equipment which performs
the brazing operation under the constant observation and
control of a brazing operator. The equipment may or may
not perform the loading and unloading of the work.
control method (FSW): the manner of monitoring and
controlling the position of the rotating tool with respect
to the weld joint during the friction stir welding process.
brazing, manual: a brazing operation performed and controlled completely by hand. See also automatic brazing
and machine brazing.
control method, force (FSW): a control method that uses a
force set point, such as plunge force or travel force, to
control the tool position. Under the force control method,
the plunge depth or travel speed can vary, within a specified range, during welding.
brazing, resistance (RB): a brazing process that uses heat
from the resistance to electric current flow in a circuit of
which the workpieces are a part.
control method, position (FSW): a control method that uses
a set plunge position relative to the plate surface to control
the tool position. Under the position control method, the
plunge force can vary, within a specified range, during
welding.
brazing, semiautomatic: brazing with equipment which
controls only the brazing filler metal feed. The advance
of the brazing is manually controlled.
brazing, torch (TB): a brazing process that uses heat from
a fuel gas flame.
control method, travel (FSW): a control method that uses a
set travel speed to control the tool position. Under the
travel control method, the travel force can vary, within a
specified range, during welding.
build‐up of base metal/restoration of base metal thickness:
this is the application of a weld material to a base metal so
as to restore the design thickness and/or structural
5
2013 SECTION IX
drag pressure: the pressure required to overcome the drag
resistance and frictional resistance in the butt-fusing
machine and keep the carriage moving at its slowest
speed.
control specimen: a section from the base material tested
to determine its tensile strength for the purpose of
comparing to the tensile strength of the butt-fused joint.
cool time at butt-fusing pressure: the minimum time that
the butt-fusing pressure shall be maintained between
the pipe faces while the pipe joint cools. This is a function
of the wall thickness.
drag resistance: force-opposing movement of the movable
clamp due to the weight of the pipe.
dwell: the time during which the energy source pauses at
any point in each oscillation.
corner joint: a joint between two members located
approximately at right angles to each other in the form
of an L.
electrode, arc welding: a component of the welding circuit
through which current is conducted.
coupon: see test coupon.
electrode, bare: a filler metal electrode that has been produced as a wire, strip, or bar with no coating or covering
other than that incidental to its manufacture or
preservation.
crack: a fracture‐type discontinuity characterized by a
sharp tip and high ratio of length and width to opening
displacement.
electrode, carbon: a nonfiller material electrode used in arc
welding and cutting, consisting of a carbon or graphite
rod, which may be coated with copper or other materials.
creep strength enhanced ferritic alloys (CSEF’s): a family of
ferritic steels whose creep temperature strength is
enhanced by the creation of a precise condition of microstructure, specifically martensite or bainite, which is stabilized during tempering by controlled precipitation of
temper‐resistant carbides, carbo‐nitrides, or other stable
and/or meta‐stable phases.
electrode, composite: a generic term of multicomponent filler metal electrodes in various physical forms, such as
stranded wires, tubes, and covered electrodes.
electrode, covered: a composite filler metal electrode consisting of a core of a bare electrode or metal‐cored electrode to which a covering sufficient to provide a slag
layer on the weld metal has been applied. The covering
may contain materials providing such functions as shielding from the atmosphere, deoxidation, and arc stabilization, and can serve as a source of metallic additions to
the weld.
data acquisition record: a detailed, permanent record of
the times and pressures used in the fusing process along
with the heater surface temperature, employee information, fusing machine information, pipe information, date,
and time for each joint made.
defect: a discontinuity or discontinuities that by nature or
accumulated effect (for example, total crack length) render a part or product unable to meet minimum applicable
acceptance standards or specifications. This term designates rejectability. See also discontinuity and f l a w .
electrode, electroslag welding: a filler metal component of
the welding circuit through which current is conducted
between the electrode guiding member and the molten
slag.
direct current electrode negative (DCEN): the arrangement
of direct current arc welding leads in which the electrode
is the negative pole and the workpiece is the positive pole
of the welding arc.
NOTE: Bare electrodes and composite electrodes as defined under arc
welding electrode are used for electroslag welding. A consumable
guide may also be used as part of the electroslag welding electrode
system.
direct current electrode positive (DCEP): the arrangement
of direct current arc welding leads in which the electrode
is the positive pole and the workpiece is the negative pole
of the welding arc.
electrode, emissive: a filler metal electrode consisting of a
core of a bare electrode or a composite electrode to which
a very light coating has been applied to produce a stable
arc.
discontinuity: an interruption of the typical structure of a
material, such as a lack of homogeneity in its mechanical,
metallurgical, or physical characteristics. A discontinuity
is not necessarily a defect. See also defect and fl aw.
double‐welded joint: a joint that is welded from both sides.
electrode, flux‐cored: a composite filler metal electrode
consisting of a metal tube or other hollow configuration
containing ingredients to provide such functions as shielding atmosphere, deoxidation, arc stabilization, and slag
formation. Alloying materials may be included in the core.
External shielding may or may not be used.
double‐welded lap joint: a lap joint in which the overlapped
edges of the members to be joined are welded along the
edges of both members.
electrode, lightly coated: a filler metal electrode consisting
of a metal wire with a light coating applied subsequent to
the drawing operation, primarily for stabilizing the arc.
6
2013 SECTION IX
flux (welding/brazing): a material used to dissolve, prevent, or facilitate the removal of oxides or other undesirable surface substances. It may act to stabilize the arc,
shield the molten pool, and may or may not evolve shielding gas by decomposition.
electrode, metal: a filler or nonfiller metal electrode used
in arc welding and cutting that consists of a metal wire
or rod that has been manufactured by any method and
that is either bare or covered.
electrode, metal‐cored: a composite filler metal electrode
consisting of a metal tube or other hollow configuration
containing alloying ingredients. Minor amounts of ingredients providing such functions as arc stabilization and fluxing of oxides may be included. External shielding gas may
or may not be used.
flux cover: metal bath dip brazing and dip soldering.
A layer of molten flux over the molten filler metal bath.
flux, active (SAW): a flux from which the amount of elements deposited in the weld metal is dependent upon
the welding parameters, primarily arc voltage.
electrode, resistance welding: the part of a resistance welding machine through which the welding current and, in
most cases, force are applied directly to the workpiece.
The electrode may be in the form of a rotating wheel, rotating roll, bar, cylinder, plate, clamp, chuck, or modification thereof.
flux, alloy (SAW): a flux which provides alloying elements
in the weld metal deposit.
flux, neutral (SAW): a flux which will not cause a significant
change in the weld metal composition when there is a
large change in the arc voltage.
forehand welding: a welding technique in which the welding torch or gun is directed toward the progress of
welding.
electrode, stranded: a composite filler metal electrode consisting of stranded wires which may mechanically enclose
materials to improve properties, stabilize the arc, or provide shielding.
frequency: the completed number of cycles which the oscillating head makes in 1 min or other specified time
increment.
electrode, tungsten: a nonfiller metal electrode used in arc
welding, arc cutting, and plasma spraying, made principally of tungsten.
frictional resistance in the butt-fusing m achine :
force-opposing movement due to friction in the mechanism of the fusing machine.
face feed: the application of filler metal to the face side of a
joint.
fuel gas: a gas such as acetylene, natural gas, hydrogen,
propane, stabilized methylacetylene propadiene, and
other fuels normally used with oxygen in one of the oxyfuel processes and for heating.
ferrite number: an arbitrary, standardized value designating the ferrite content of an austenitic stainless steel weld
metal. It should be used in place of percent ferrite or volume percent ferrite on a direct one‐to‐one replacement
basis. See the latest edition of AWS A4.2, Standard Procedures for Calibrating Magnetic Instruments to Measure
the Delta Ferrite Content of Austenitic Stainless Steel Weld
Metal.
fused spray deposit (thermal spraying): a self‐fluxing thermal spray deposit which is subsequently heated to coalescence within itself and with the substrate.
fusing: the coalescence of two plastic members by the
combination of controlled heating and the application of
pressure approximately normal to the interface between
them.
filler metal: the metal or alloy to be added in making a
welded, brazed, or soldered joint.
fusing gauge pressure: the hydraulic gauge pressure to be
observed by the fusing machine operator when fusing PE
pipe ends. This is the sum of the theoretical fusing pressure plus the drag pressure.
filler metal, brazing: the metal or alloy used as a filler metal in brazing, which has a liquidus above 840°F (450°C)
and below the solidus of the base metal.
filler metal, powder: filler metal in particle form.
fusing machine operator: person trained and qualified to
carry out fusing of polyethylene (PE) pipes and/or fittings
using a fusing procedure.
filler metal, supplemental: in electroslag welding or in a
welding process in which there is an arc between one or
more consumable electrodes and the workpiece, a powder, solid, or composite material that is introduced into
the weld other than the consumable electrode(s).
fusing procedure: a document providing in detail the required variables for the butt-fusing process to assure repeatability in the butt-fusing procedure (FPS or SFPS).
fillet weld: a weld of approximately triangular cross section joining two surfaces approximately at right angles
to each other in a lap joint, tee joint, or corner joint.
fusion (fusion welding): the melting together of filler metal
and base metal, or of base metal only, to produce a weld.
fusion face: a surface of the base metal that will be melted
during welding.
flaw: an undesirable discontinuity. See also defect.
7
2013 SECTION IX
[example: 60 psi to 90 psi (400 kPa to 600 kPa)], and
the common practice is to use the mid-range [example:
75 psi (505 kPa) when making these calculations.
fusion line: a non‐standard term for weld interface.
gas backing: see backing gas.
globular transfer (arc welding): a type of metal transfer in
which molten filler metal is transferred across the arc in
large droplets.
interpass temperature: the highest temperature in the
weld joint immediately prior to welding, or in the case
of multiple pass welds, the highest temperature in the section of the previously deposited weld metal, immediately
before the next pass is started.
groove weld: a weld made in a groove formed within a single member or in the groove between two members to be
joined. The standard types of groove weld are as follows:
(a) square groove weld
(b) single‐Vee groove weld
(c) single‐bevel groove weld
(d) single‐U groove weld
(e) single‐J groove weld
(f) single‐flare‐bevel groove weld
(g) single‐flare‐Vee groove weld
(h) double‐Vee groove weld
(i) double‐bevel groove weld
(j) double‐U groove weld
(k) double‐J groove weld
(l) double‐flare‐bevel groove weld
(m) double‐flare‐Vee groove weld
joint: the junction of members or the edges of members
which are to be joined or have been joined.
joint penetration: the distance the weld metal extends
from the weld face into a joint, exclusive of weld
reinforcement.
keyhole welding: a technique in which a concentrated heat
source penetrates partially or completely through a workpiece, forming a hole (keyhole) at the leading edge of the
weld pool. As the heat source progresses, the molten metal
fills in behind the hole to form the weld bead.
lap joint: a joint between two overlapping members in parallel planes.
lap or overlap: the distance measured between the edges
of two plates when overlapping to form the joint.
heat soak cycle: the portion of the procedure where heat is
allowed to soak into the pipes or fittings after the bead-up
cycle is complete. The heat soak cycle begins by reducing
the pressure to that required to maintain contact with the
heater surfaces without force. The pipe ends continue
heating until the minimum heat soak time is completed
for the pipe wall being joined and the minimum bead size
is attained per the standard procedure.
layer: a stratum of weld metal consisting of one or more
beads. See Figures QG-109.2.1 and QG-109.2.2.
lower transformation temperature: the temperature at
which austenite begins to form during heating.
heat soak time: the time required to complete the heat
soak cycle.
macro‐examination: the process of observing a specimen
cross‐section by the unaided eye, or at a specified low
magnification, with or without the use of smoothing and
etching.
heater removal (dwell) time: period of time from the
separation of the pipe or fitting ends from the heater surface, removal of the heater, and closure of the carriage to
bring the molten pipe or fitting ends together.
melt bead size: the width of a bead formed at the interface
between the pipe end and the heater surface during the
heating cycle.
heater temperature: measured temperature on the surface
of the heater where the pipe or fitting cross section makes
contact.
melt‐in: a technique of welding in which the intensity of a
concentrated heat source is so adjusted that a weld pass
can be produced from filler metal added to the leading
edge of the molten weld metal.
heat‐affected zone: that portion of the base metal which
has not been melted, but whose mechanical properties
or microstructures have been altered by the heat of welding or cutting.
metal transfer mode (gas metal-arc welding): the manner
in which molten metal travels from the end of a consumable electrode to the workpiece. See also short-circuiting
transfer (gas metal‐arc welding); pulsed power welding;
globular transfer (arc welding); pulsed spray welding;
and spray transfer (arc welding).
Instantaneous power or energy: As used for waveform
controlled welding, the determination of power or energy
using the product of current and voltage measurements
made at rapid intervals which capture brief changes in
the welding waveform.
nugget: the volume of weld metal formed in a spot, seam,
or projection weld.
organization: as used in this Section, an organization is a
manufacturer, contractor, assembler, installer, or some
other single or combined entity having responsibility for
operational control of the material-joining methods used
interfacial pressure: the amount of force per pipe joint area
required to make an approved butt-fusing joint. This is
used to calculate the fusing machine gauge pressure. The
interfacial pressure is often expressed as a range
8
2013 SECTION IX
polyethylene (PE): a polyolefin composed of polymers of
ethylene.
in the construction of components in accordance with the
codes, standards, and specifications which reference this
Section.
postbraze heat treatment: any heat treatment subsequent
to brazing.
oscillation: for a machine or automatic process, an alternating motion relative to the direction of travel of welding,
brazing, or thermal spray device. See also weave bead.
postheating: the application of heat to an assembly after
welding, brazing, soldering, thermal spraying, or thermal
cutting.
overlay: a non‐standard term, used in Section IX, for surfacing. See also hard‐facing and corrosion‐resistant overlay.
postweld heat treatment: any heat treatment subsequent
to welding.
overlay, corrosion‐resistant weld metal: deposition of one
or more layers of weld metal to the surface of a base material in an effort to improve the corrosion resistance
properties of the surface. This would be applied at a level
above the minimum design thickness as a nonstructural
component of the overall wall thickness.
postweld hydrogen bakeout: holding a completed or partially completed weld at elevated temperature below
800°F (425°C) for the purpose of allowing hydrogen diffusion from the weld.
overlay, hard‐facing weld metal: deposition of one or more
layers of weld metal to the surface of a material in an effort
to improve the wear resistance properties of the surface.
This would be applied at a level above the minimum
design thickness as a nonstructural component of the
overall wall thickness.
powder: see filler metal, powder.
preheat current: an impulse or series of impulses that
occurs prior to and is separated from the welding current.
preheat maintenance: practice of maintaining the minimum specified preheat temperature, or some specified
higher temperature for some required time interval after
welding or thermal spraying is finished or until post weld
heat treatment is initiated.
pass: a single progression of a welding or surfacing operation along a joint, weld deposit, or substrate. The result of
a pass is a weld bead or layer.
pass, cover: a final or cap pass(es) on the face of a weld.
preheat temperature: the minimum temperature in the
weld joint preparation immediately prior to the welding;
or in the case of multiple pass welds, the minimum temperature in the section of the previously deposited weld
metal, immediately prior to welding.
pass, wash: pass to correct minor surface aberrations and/
or prepare the surface for nondestructive testing.
peel test: a destructive method of testing that mechanically
separates a lap joint by peeling.
preheating: the application of heat to the base metal immediately before a welding or cutting operation to achieve a
specified minimum preheat temperature.
peening: the mechanical working of metals using impact
blows.
performance qualification: the demonstration of a welder’s
or welding operator’s ability to produce welds meeting
prescribed standards.
pulsed power welding: an arc welding process variation in
which the welding power source is programmed to cycle
between low and high power levels.
plastics:: those materials listed in Table QF-422.
plug weld: a weld made in a circular, or other geometrically shaped hole (like a slot weld) in one member of a
lap or tee joint, joining that member to the other. The walls
of the hole may or may not be parallel, and the hole may be
partially or completely filled with weld metal. (A fillet‐
welded hole or spot weld should not be construed as conforming to this definition.)
rabbet joint: typical design is indicated in
Figures QB-462.1(c), QB-462.4, QB-463.1(c), and
QB-463.2(a).
polarity, reverse: the arrangement of direct current arc
welding leads with the work as the negative pole and
the electrode as the positive pole of the welding arc; a synonym for direct current electrode positive.
seal weld: any weld designed primarily to provide a specific degree of tightness against leakage.
retainer: nonconsumable material, metallic or nonmetallic,
which is used to contain or shape molten weld metal. See
also backing.
seam weld: a continuous weld made between or upon
overlapping members in which coalescence may start
and occur on the faying surfaces, or may have proceeded
from the surface of one member. The continuous weld
may consist of a single weld bead or a series of overlapping spot welds. See also resistance welding.
polarity, straight: the arrangement of direct current arc
welding leads in which the work is the positive pole and
the electrode is the negative pole of the welding arc; a synonym for direct current electrode negative.
9
2013 SECTION IX
short‐circuiting transfer (gas metal‐arc welding): metal
transfer in which molten metal from a consumable electrode is deposited during repeated short circuits. See also
globular transfer and spray transfer.
test coupon: a weld or braze assembly for procedure or
performance qualification testing. The coupon may be
any product from plate, pipe, tube, etc., and may be a fillet
weld, overlay, deposited weld metal, etc.
single‐welded joint: a joint welded from one side only.
test coupon, fusing: a butt-fused plastic test joint that is
made to qualify a butt-fusing procedure or operator.
single‐welded lap joint: a lap joint in which the overlapped
edges of the members to be joined are welded along the
edge of one member only.
test specimen: a sample of a test coupon for specific test.
The specimen may be a bend test, tension test, impact test,
chemical analysis, macrotest, etc. A specimen may be a
complete test coupon, for example, in radiographic testing
or small diameter pipe tension testing.
slag inclusion: nonmetallic solid material entrapped in
weld metal or between weld metal and base metal.
specimen: see test specimen.
theoretical fusing pressure: the pipe area multiplied by the
interfacial pressure and divided by the total effective
piston area of the butt-fusing machine.
spot weld: a weld made between or upon overlapping
members in which coalescence may start and occur on
the faying surfaces or may proceed from the outer surface
of one member. The weld cross section (plan view) is
approximately circular.
thermal cutting (TC): a group of cutting processes that severs or removes metal by localized melting, burning, or
vaporizing of the workpieces.
spray transfer (arc welding): metal transfer in which molten metal from a consumable electrode is propelled axially
across the arc in small droplets.
throat, actual (of fillet): the shortest distance from the root
of a fillet weld to its face.
spray‐fuse: a thermal spraying technique in which the deposit is reheated to fuse the particles and form a metallurgical bond with the substrate.
throat, effective (of fillet): the minimum distance from the
fillet face, minus any convexity, to the weld root. In the
case of fillet welds combined with a groove weld, the weld
root of the groove weld shall be used.
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS): a welding procedure specification, published by the American
Welding Society, that is made available for production
welding by companies or individuals without further qualification, and that may be used in Code applications in accordance with the restrictions and limitations of Article V.
throat, theoretical (of fillet): the distance from the beginning of the joint root perpendicular to the hypotenuse of
the largest right triangle that can be inscribed within the
cross‐section of a fillet weld. This dimension is based on
the assumption that the root opening is equal to zero.
stringer bead: a weld bead formed without appreciable
weaving.
undercut: a groove melted into the base metal adjacent to
the weld toe or weld root and left unfilled by weld metal.
surface temper bead reinforcing layer: a subset of temper
bead welding in which one or more layers of weld metal
are applied on or above the surface layers of a component
and are used to modify the properties of previously deposited weld metal or the heat‐affected zone. Surface layer
may cover a surface or only the perimeter of the weld.
upper transformation temperature: the temperature at
which transformation of the ferrite to austenite is completed during heating.
usability: a measure of the relative ease of application of a
filler metal to make a sound weld or braze joint.
waveform controlled welding: A welding process modification of the voltage and/or current wave shape to control
characteristics such as droplet shape, penetration, wetting, bead shape or transfer mode(s).
surfacing: the application by welding, brazing, or thermal
spraying of a layer(s) of material to a surface to obtain desired properties or dimensions, as opposed to making a
joint.
weave bead: for a manual or semiautomatic process, a
weld bead formed using weaving. See also oscillation.
tee joint (T): a joint between two members located approximately at right angles to each other in the form of a T.
weaving: a welding technique in which the energy source
is oscillated transversely as it progresses along the weld
path.
temper bead welding: a weld bead placed at a specific location in or at the surface of a weld for the purpose of affecting the metallurgical properties of the heat‐affected zone
or previously deposited weld metal. The bead may be
above, flush with, or below the surrounding base metal
surface. If above the base metal surface, the beads may
cover all or only part of the weld deposit and may or
may not be removed following welding.
weld: a localized coalescence of metals or nonmetals produced either by heating the materials to the welding temperature, with or without the application of pressure, or
by the application of pressure alone and with or without
the use of filler material.
10
2013 SECTION IX
welding, electrogas (EGW): an arc welding process that
uses an arc between a continuous filler metal electrode
and the weld pool, employing approximately vertical
welding progression with retainers to confine the weld
metal. The process is used with or without an externally
supplied shielding gas and without the application of pressure. Shielding for use with solid or metal‐cored electrodes is obtained from a gas or gas mixture. Shielding for
use with flux‐cored electrodes may or may not be obtained
from an externally supplied gas or gas mixture.
weld bead: a weld deposit resulting from a pass. See also
stringer bead and weave bead.
weld face: the exposed surface of a weld on the side from
which welding was done.
weld interface: the interface between the weld metal and
base metal in a fusion weld.
weld metal: metal in a fusion weld consisting of that portion of the base metal and filler metal melted during
welding.
welding, electron beam (EBW): a welding process that
produces coalescence with a concentrated beam composed primarily of high velocity electrons, impinging on
the joint. The process is used without shielding gas and
without the application of pressure.
weld reinforcement: weld metal on the face or root of a
groove weld in excess of the metal necessary for the
specified weld size.
weld size: for equal leg fillet welds: the leg lengths of the
largest isosceles right triangle which can be inscribed
within the fillet weld cross section.
welding, electroslag (ESW): a welding process producing
coalescence of metals with molten slag which melts the filler metal and the surfaces of the work to be welded. The
molten weld pool is shielded by this slag which moves
along the full cross section of the joint as welding progresses. The process is initiated by an arc which heats
the slag. The arc is then extinguished and the conductive
slag is maintained in a molten condition by its resistance
to electric current passing between the electrode and
the work. See electroslag welding electrode and consumable guide electroslag welding.
weld size: for unequal leg fillet welds: the leg lengths of the
largest right triangle which can be inscribed within the
fillet weld cross section.
weld size: groove welds: the depth of chamfering plus any
penetration beyond the chamfering, resulting in the
strength carrying dimension of the weld.
weld, autogenous: a fusion weld made without filler metal.
welder: one who performs manual or semiautomatic
welding.
welding, flux‐cored arc (FCAW): a gas metal‐arc welding
process that uses an arc between a continuous filler metal
electrode and the weld pool. The process is used with
shielding gas from a flux contained within the tubular electrode, with or without additional shielding from an externally supplied gas, and without the application of
pressure.
welding operator: one who operates machine or automatic
welding equipment.
welding, arc stud (SW): an arc welding process that uses an
arc between a metal stud, or similar part, and the other
workpiece. The process is used without filler metal, with
or without shielding gas or flux, with or without partial
shielding from a ceramic or graphite ferrule surrounding
the stud, and with the application of pressure after the faying surfaces are sufficiently heated.
welding, friction (FRW): a solid state welding process that
produces a weld under compressive force contact of workpieces rotating or moving relative to one another to produce heat and plastically displace material from the
faying surfaces.
welding, automatic: welding with equipment which performs the welding operation without adjustment of the
controls by a welding operator. The equipment may or
may not perform the loading and unloading of the work.
See also machine welding.
welding, friction stir (FSW): a variation of friction welding
producing a weld by the friction heating and plastic material displacement caused by a rapidly rotating tool traversing the weld joint.
welding, consumable guide electroslag: an electroslag
welding process variation in which filler metal is supplied
by an electrode and its guiding member.
welding, friction, inertia and continuous drive: processes
and types of friction welding (solid state welding process)
wherein coalescence is produced after heating is obtained
from mechanically induced sliding motion between rubbing surfaces held together under pressure. Inertia welding utilizes all of the kinetic energy stored in a revolving
flywheel spindle system. Continuous drive friction welding utilizes the energy provided by a continuous drive
source such as an electric or hydraulic motor.
welding, diffusion (DFW): a solid-state welding process
producing a weld between multiple layers of sheet or plate
by the application of mechanical pressure at elevated temperature with no macroscopic deformation or relative motion of the work pieces. A solid filler metal may be inserted
between the faying surfaces.
11
2013 SECTION IX
welding, plasma‐arc (PAW): an arc welding process which
produces coalescence of metals by heating them with a
constricted arc between an electrode and the workpiece
(transferred arc), or the electrode and the constricting
nozzle (nontransferred arc). Shielding is obtained from
the hot, ionized gas issuing from the torch orifice which
may be supplemented by an auxiliary source of shielding
gas. Shielding gas may be an inert gas or a mixture of
gases. Pressure may or may not be used, and filler metal
may or may not be supplied.
welding, gas metal‐arc (GMAW): an arc welding process
that uses an arc between a continuous filler metal electrode and the weld pool. The process is used with shielding from an externally supplied gas and without the
application of pressure.
welding, gas metal‐arc, pulsed spray (GMAW‐P): a variation
of the gas metal‐arc welding process in which the power is
pulsed resulting in transfer of the metal across the arc in
spray mode. See also pulsed power welding.
welding, gas metal‐arc, short‐circuiting arc (GMAW‐S): a
variation of the gas metal‐arc welding process in which
the consumable electrode is deposited during repeated
short circuits. See also short‐circuiting transfer.
welding, projection (PW): a resistance welding process
that produces coalescence by the heat obtained from the
resistance of the flow of welding current. The resulting
welds are localized at predetermined points by projections, embossments, or intersections. The metals to be
joined lap over each other.
welding, gas tungsten‐arc (GTAW): an arc welding process
which produces coalescence of metals by heating them
with an arc between a tungsten (nonconsumable) electrode and the work. Shielding is obtained from a gas or
gas mixture. Pressure may or may not be used and filler
metal may or may not be used. (This process has sometimes been called TIG welding, a nonpreferred term.)
welding, resistance (RW): a group of welding processes
that produces coalescence of the faying surfaces with the
heat obtained from resistance of the workpieces to the
flow of the welding current in a circuit of which the workpieces are a part, and by the application of pressure.
welding, gas tungsten‐arc, pulsed arc (GTAW‐P): a variation
of the gas tungsten‐arc welding process in which the current is pulsed. See also pulsed power welding.
welding, resistance seam (RSEW): a resistance welding
process that produces a weld at the faying surfaces of
overlapped parts progressively along a length of a joint.
The weld may be made with overlapping weld nuggets, a
continuous weld nugget, or by forging the joint as it is
heated to the welding temperature by resistance to the
flow of the welding current.
welding, hybrid: welding in which two or more welding
processes are used in the same weld pool.
welding, hybrid, process separation: the distance between
each welding process as specified in the WPS.
welding, resistance spot (RSW): a resistance welding process that produces a weld at the faying surfaces of a joint
by the heat obtained from resistance to the flow of welding
current through the workpieces from electrodes that serve
to concentrate the welding current and pressure at the
weld area.
welding, hybrid, process sequence: the order of each welding process with respect to the direction of travel.
welding, induction (IW): a welding process that produces
coalescence of metals by the heat obtained from resistance
of the workpieces to the flow of induced high frequency
welding current with or without the application of pressure. The effect of the high‐frequency welding current is
to concentrate the welding heat at the desired location.
welding, resistance stud: a resistance welding process
wherein coalescence is produced by the heat obtained
from resistance to electric current at the interface between the stud and the workpiece, until the surfaces to
be joined are properly heated, when they are brought together under pressure.
welding, laser beam (LBW): a welding process which
produces coalescence of materials with the heat obtained
from the application of a concentrated coherent light beam
impinging upon the members to be joined.
welding, semiautomatic arc: arc welding with equipment
which controls only the filler metal feed. The advance of
the welding is manually controlled.
welding, machine: welding with equipment that has controls that can be adjusted by the welding operator, or adjusted under the welding operator’s direction, in response
to changes in the welding conditions. The torch, gun, or
electrode holder is held by a mechanical device. See also
welding, automatic.
welding, manual: welding wherein the entire welding operation is performed and controlled by hand.
welding, shielded metal‐arc (SMAW): an arc welding
process with an arc between a covered electrode and
the weld pool. The process is used with shielding from
the decomposition of the electrode covering, without the
application of pressure, and with filler metal from the
electrode.
welding, oxyfuel gas (OFW): a group of welding processes
which produces coalescence by heating materials with an
oxyfuel gas flame or flames, with or without the application of pressure, and with or without the use of filler metal.
welding, stud: a general term for the joining of a metal stud
or similar part to a workpiece. Welding may be accomplished by arc, resistance, friction, or other suitable process with or without external gas shielding.
12
2013 SECTION IX
welding, submerged‐arc (SAW): an arc welding process
that uses an arc or arcs between a bare metal electrode
or electrodes and the weld pool. The arc and molten metal
are shielded by a blanket of granular flux on the workpieces. The process is used without pressure and with filler metal from the electrode and sometimes from a
supplemental source (welding rod, flux, or metal
granules).
Figure QG-109.2.2
Typical Single Bead Layers
Cover bead
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
weldment: an assembly whose constituent parts are joined
by welding, or parts which contain weld metal overlay.
Figure QG-109.2.1
Typical Single and Multibead Layers
Layers
Cover beads
11
10
8
6
4
2
9
7
5
3
1
Layers
13
2013 SECTION IX
PART QW
WELDING
ARTICLE I
WELDING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ð13Þ
QW-100
QW-103
SCOPE
RESPONSIBILITY
QW-103.1 Welding. Each organization shall conduct
the tests required in this Section to qualify the welding
procedures used in the construction of the weldments
built under this Code and the performance of welders
and welding operators who apply these procedures.
The rules in this Part apply to the preparation of
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and the qualification of welding procedures, welders, and welding operators for all types of manual and machine welding
processes permitted in this Part. These rules may also
be applied, insofar as they are applicable, to other manual
or machine welding processes permitted in other Sections.
Q W- 10 3 . 2 R e c o rd s. E a c h o r g a n i z a t i o n s h a l l
maintain a record of the results obtained in welding
procedure and welder and welding operator performance
q u a l i fi ca t i o n s . R e f e r t o r e c o m m e n d e d F o r m s in
Nonmandatory Appendix B.
QW-101
A WPS used by an organization that will have responsible operational control of production welding shall be
a WPS that has been qualified by that organization in
accordance with Article II, or it shall be an AWS Standard
Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) listed in
Mandatory Appendix E and adopted by that organization
in accordance with Article V.
Both WPSs and SWPSs specify the variables (including
ranges, if any) under which welding must be performed.
These conditions include the base metals that are permitted, the filler metals that must be used (if any), preheat
and postweld heat treatment requirements, etc.
When a WPS is to be prepared by the organization, it
must address, as a minimum, the specific variables, both
essential and nonessential, as provided in Article II for
each process to be used in production welding. In addition,
when other Sections of the Code require notch toughness
qualification of the WPS, the supplementary essential variables must be addressed in the WPS.
QW-110
WELD ORIENTATION
The orientations of welds are illustrated in Figure
QW-461.1 or Figure QW-461.2.
QW-120
TEST POSITIONS FOR GROOVE
WELDS
Groove welds may be made in test coupons oriented in
any of the positions in Figure QW-461.3 or Figure
QW-461.4 and as described in the following paragraphs,
except that an angular deviation of ±15 deg from the specified horizontal and vertical planes, and an angular deviation of ±5 deg from the specified inclined plane are
permitted during welding.
QW-121
PLATE POSITIONS
QW-121.1 Flat Position 1G. Plate in a horizontal plane
with the weld metal deposited from above. Refer to
Figure QW-461.3, illustration (a).
QW-102
QW-121.2 Horizontal Position 2G. Plate in a vertical
plane with the axis of the weld horizontal. Refer to
Figure QW-461.3, illustration (b).
In performance qualification, the basic criterion established for welder qualification is to determine the welder’s
ability to deposit sound weld metal. The purpose of the
performance qualification test for the welding operator
is to determine the welding operator’s mechanical ability
to operate the welding equipment.
QW-121.3 Vertical Position 3G. Plate in a vertical
plane with the axis of the weld vertical. Refer to
Figure QW-461.3, illustration (c).
14
2013 SECTION IX
QW-131.4 Overhead Position 4F. Plates so placed
that the weld is deposited with its axis horizontal on the
underside of the horizontal surface and against the vertical surface. Refer to Figure QW-461.5, illustration (d).
QW-121.4 Overhead Position 4G. Plate in a horizontal
plane with the weld metal deposited from underneath. Refer to Figure QW-461.3, illustration (d).
QW-122
PIPE POSITIONS
QW-132
QW-122.1 Flat Position 1G. Pipe with its axis horizontal and rolled during welding so that the weld metal is deposited from above. Refer to Figure QW-461.4, illustration
(a).
QW-132.1 Flat Position 1F. Pipe with its axis inclined
at 45 deg to horizontal and rotated during welding so that
the weld metal is deposited from above and at the point of
deposition the axis of the weld is horizontal and the throat
vertical. Refer to Figure QW-461.6, illustration (a).
QW-122.2 Horizontal Position 2G. Pipe with its axis
vertical and the axis of the weld in a horizontal plane.
Pipe shall not be rotated during welding. Refer to
Figure QW-461.4, illustration (b).
QW-132.2 Horizontal Positions 2F and 2FR.
(a) Position 2F. Pipe with its axis vertical so that the
weld is deposited on the upper side of the horizontal surface and against the vertical surface. The axis of the weld
will be horizontal and the pipe is not to be rotated during
welding. Refer to Figure QW-461.6, illustration (b).
(b) Position 2FR. Pipe with its axis horizontal and the
axis of the deposited weld in the vertical plane. The pipe
is rotated during welding. Refer to Figure QW-461.6, illustration (c).
QW-122.3 Multiple Position 5G. Pipe with its axis
horizontal and with the welding groove in a vertical plane.
Welding shall be done without rotating the pipe. Refer to
Figure QW-461.4, illustration (c).
QW-122.4 Multiple Position 6G. Pipe with its axis inclined at 45 deg to horizontal. Welding shall be done without rotating the pipe. Refer to Figure QW-461.4,
illustration (d).
QW-123
QW-132.3 Overhead Position 4F. Pipe with its axis
vertical so that the weld is deposited on the underside
of the horizontal surface and against the vertical
surface. The axis of the weld will be horizontal and the
pipe is not to be rotated during welding. Refer to
Figure QW-461.6, illustration (d).
TEST POSITIONS FOR STUD WELDS
QW-123.1 Stud Welding. Stud welds may be made in
test coupons oriented in any of the positions as described
in QW-121 for plate and QW-122 for pipe (excluding
QW-122.1). In all cases, the stud shall be perpendicular
to the surface of the plate or pipe. See Figures QW-461.7
and QW-461.8.
QW-130
QW-132.4 Multiple Position 5F. Pipe with its axis
horizontal and the axis of the deposited weld in the vertical plane. The pipe is not to be rotated during welding. Refer to Figure QW-461.6, illustration (e).
TEST POSITIONS FOR FILLET
WELDS
QW-140
Fillet welds may be made in test coupons oriented in
any of the positions of Figure QW-461.5 or Figure
QW-461.6, and as described in the following paragraphs,
except that an angular deviation of ±15 deg from the specified horizontal and vertical planes is permitted during
welding.
QW-131
PIPE POSITIONS
QW-141
TYPES AND PURPOSES OF TESTS
AND EXAMINATIONS
MECHANICAL TESTS
Mechanical tests used in procedure or performance
qualification are specified in QW-141.1 through
QW-141.5.
QW-141.1 Tension Tests. Tension tests as described
in QW-150 are used to determine the ultimate strength
of groove‐weld joints.
PLATE POSITIONS
QW-131.1 Flat Position 1F. Plates so placed that the
weld is deposited with its axis horizontal and its throat
vertical. Refer to Figure QW-461.5, illustration (a).
QW-141.2 Guided‐Bend Tests. Guided‐bend tests as
described in QW-160 are used to determine the degree
of soundness and ductility of groove‐weld joints.
QW-131.2 Horizontal Position 2F. Plates so placed
that the weld is deposited with its axis horizontal on the
upper side of the horizontal surface and against the vertical surface. Refer to Figure QW-461.5, illustration (b).
QW-141.3 Fillet‐Weld Tests. Tests as described in
QW-180 are used to determine the size, contour, and degree of soundness of fillet welds.
QW-131.3 Vertical Position 3F. Plates so placed that
the weld is deposited with its axis vertical. Refer to
Figure QW-461.5, illustration (c).
QW-141.4 Notch‐Toughness Tests. Tests as described in QW-171 and QW-172 are used to determine
the notch toughness of the weldment.
15
2013 SECTION IX
QW-151.2 Reduced Section — Pipe. Reduced‐section
specimens conforming to the requirements given in
Figure QW-462.1(b) may be used for tension tests on all
thicknesses of pipe having an outside diameter greater
than 3 in. (75 mm).
(a) For thicknesses up to and including 1 in. (25 mm), a
full thickness specimen shall be used for each required
tension test.
(b) For pipe thicknesses greater than 1 in. (25 mm), full
thickness specimens or multiple specimens may be used,
provided (c) and (d) are complied with.
(c) When multiple specimens are used, in lieu of full
thickness specimens, each set shall represent a single tension test of the full pipe thickness. Collectively, all of the
specimens required to represent the full thickness of the
weld at one location shall comprise a set.
(d) When multiple specimens are necessary, the entire
thickness shall be mechanically cut into a minimum number of approximately equal strips of a size that can be
tested in the available equipment. Each specimen of the
set shall be tested and meet the requirements of QW-153.
For pipe having an outside diameter of 3 in. (75 mm) or
less, reduced‐section specimens conforming to the requirements given in Figure QW-462.1(c) may be used
for tension tests.
QW-141.5 Stud‐Weld Test. Deflection bend,
hammering, torque, or tension tests as shown in
Figures QW-466.4, QW-466.5, and QW-466.6, and a
macro‐examination performed in accordance with
QW-202.5, respectively, are used to determine acceptability of stud welds.
QW-142
SPECIAL EXAMINATIONS FOR WELDERS
Radiographic or Ultrasonic examination per QW-191
may be substituted for mechanical testing of QW-141 for
groove‐weld performance qualification as permitted in
QW-304 to prove the ability of welders to make sound
welds.
QW-143
EXAMINATION FOR WELDING
OPERATORS
Radiographic or Ultrasonic examination per QW-191
may be substituted for mechanical testing of QW-141 for
groove weld performance qualification as permitted in
QW-305 to prove the ability of welding operators to make
sound welds.
QW-144
VISUAL EXAMINATION
Visual examination as described in QW-194 is used to
determine that the final weld surfaces meet specified
quality standards.
QW-150
QW-151
QW-151.3 Turned Specimens. Turned specimens conforming to the requirements given in Figure QW-462.1(d)
may be used for tension tests.
(a) For thicknesses up to and including 1 in. (25 mm), a
single turned specimen may be used for each required tension test, which shall be a specimen of the largest diameter
D of Figure QW-462.1(d) possible for test coupon thickness [per Note (a) of Figure QW-462.1(d)].
(b) For thicknesses over 1 in. (25 mm), multiple specimens shall be cut through the full thickness of the weld
with their centers parallel to the metal surface and not
over 1 in. (25 mm) apart. The centers of the specimens adjacent to the metal surfaces shall not exceed 5/8 in.
(16 mm) from the surface.
(c) When multiple specimens are used, each set shall
represent a single required tension test. Collectively, all
the specimens required to represent the full thickness of
the weld at one location shall comprise a set.
(d) Each specimen of the set shall be tested and meet
the requirements of QW-153.
TENSION TESTS
SPECIMENS
Tension test specimens shall conform to one of the
types illustrated in Figures QW-462.1(a) through
QW-462.1(e) and shall meet the requirements of QW-153.
QW-151.1 Reduced Section — Plate. Reduced‐section
specimens conforming to the requirements given in
Figure QW-462.1(a) may be used for tension tests on all
thicknesses of plate.
(a) For thicknesses up to and including 1 in. (25 mm), a
full thickness specimen shall be used for each required
tension test.
(b) For plate thickness greater than 1 in. (25 mm), full
thickness specimens or multiple specimens may be used,
provided (c) and (d) are complied with.
(c) When multiple specimens are used, in lieu of full
thickness specimens, each set shall represent a single tension test of the full plate thickness. Collectively, all of the
specimens required to represent the full thickness of the
weld at one location shall comprise a set.
(d) When multiple specimens are necessary, the entire
thickness shall be mechanically cut into a minimum number of approximately equal strips of a size that can be
tested in the available equipment. Each specimen of the
set shall be tested and meet the requirements of QW-153.
QW-151.4 Full‐Section Specimens for Pipe. Tension
specimens conforming to the dimensions given in
Figure QW-462.1(e) may be used for testing pipe with
an outside diameter of 3 in. (75 mm) or less.
QW-152
TENSION TEST PROCEDURE
The tension test specimen shall be ruptured under tensile load. The tensile strength shall be computed by dividing the ultimate total load by the least cross‐sectional area
of the specimen as calculated from actual measurements
made before the load is applied.
16
2013 SECTION IX
QW-153
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA — TENSION
TESTS
width of the weld is so large that a bend specimen cannot
be bent so that the entire weld and heat affected zones are
within the bent portion, multiple specimens across the
entire weld and heat affected zones shall be used.
If multiple specimens are used in either situation above,
one complete set shall be made for each required test.
Each specimen shall be tested and meet the requirements
in QW-163.
QW-153.1 Tensile Strength. Minimum values for
procedure qualification are provided under the
column heading “Minimum Specified Tensile, ksi” of
Table QW/QB-422. In order to pass the tension test, the
specimen shall have a tensile strength that is not less than
(a) the minimum specified tensile strength of the base
metal; or
(b) the minimum specified tensile strength of the weaker of the two, if base metals of different minimum tensile
strengths are used; or
(c) the minimum specified tensile strength of the weld
metal when the applicable Section provides for the use of
weld metal having lower room temperature strength than
the base metal;
(d) if the specimen breaks in the base metal outside of
the weld or weld interface, the test shall be accepted as
meeting the requirements, provided the strength is not
more than 5% below the minimum specified tensile
strength of the base metal.
(e) the specified minimum tensile strength is for full
thickness specimens including cladding for Aluminum Alclad materials (P‐No. 21 through P‐No. 23) less than 1/2 in.
(13 mm). For Aluminum Alclad materials 1/2 in. (13 mm)
and greater, the specified minimum tensile strength is
for both full thickness specimens that include cladding
and specimens taken from the core.
QW-160
QW-161
QW-161.2 Transverse Face Bend. The weld is transverse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is
bent so that the face surface becomes the convex surface
of the bent specimen. Transverse face‐bend test specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown in
Figure QW-462.3(a). For subsize transverse face bends,
see QW-161.4.
QW-161.3 Transverse Root Bend. The weld is transverse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is
bent so that the root surface becomes the convex surface
of the bent specimen. Transverse root‐bend test specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown in
Figure QW-462.3(a). For subsize transverse root bends,
see QW-161.4.
QW-161.4 Subsize Transverse Face and Root Bends.
Bend specimens taken from small diameter pipe coupons
may be subsized in accordance with General Note (b) of
Figure QW-462.3(a).
QW-161.5 Longitudinal‐Bend Tests. Longitudinal‐
bend tests may be used in lieu of the transverse side‐bend,
face‐bend, and root‐bend tests for testing weld metal or
base metal combinations, which differ markedly in bending properties between
(a) the two base metals, or
(b) the weld metal and the base metal
GUIDED‐BEND TESTS
SPECIMENS
Guided‐bend test specimens shall be prepared by
cutting the test plate or pipe to form specimens of
approximately rectangular cross section. The cut surfaces
shall be designated the sides of the specimen. The other
two surfaces shall be called the face and root surfaces,
the face surface having the greater width of weld. The
specimen thickness and bend radius are shown in
Figures QW-466.1, QW-466.2, and QW-466.3.
Guided‐bend specimens are of five types, depending on
whether the axis of the weld is transverse or parallel to
the longitudinal axis of the specimen, and which surface
(side, face, or root) is on the convex (outer) side of bent
specimen. The five types are defined as follows.
QW-161.6 Longitudinal Face Bend. The weld is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is
bent so that the face surface becomes the convex
surface of the bent specimen. Longitudinal face‐bend test
specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown in
Figure QW-462.3(b).
QW-161.7 Longitudinal Root Bend. The weld is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is
bent so that the root surface becomes the convex side
of the bent specimen. Longitudinal root‐bend test
specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown in
Figure QW-462.3(b).
QW-161.1 Transverse Side Bend. The weld is transverse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is
bent so that one of the side surfaces becomes the convex
surface of the bent specimen. Transverse side‐bend test
specimens shall conform to the dimensions shown in
Figure QW-462.2.
Specimens of base metal thickness equal to or greater
than 11/2 in. (38 mm) may be cut into approximately equal
strips between 3/4 in. (19 mm) and 11/2 in. (38 mm) wide
for testing, or the specimens may be bent at full width
(see requirements on jig width in QW‐466). When the
QW-162
GUIDED‐BEND TEST PROCEDURE
QW-162.1 Jigs. Guided‐bend specimens shall be bent
in test jigs that are in substantial accordance with
QW‐466. When using the jigs illustrated in Figure
QW-466.1 or Figure QW-466.2, the side of the specimen
turned toward the gap of the jig shall be the face for face‐
bend specimens, the root for root‐bend specimens, and the
side with the greater discontinuities, if any, for side‐bend
specimens. The specimen shall be forced into the die by
17
2013 SECTION IX
QW-172
applying load on the plunger until the curvature of the
specimen is such that a 1/8 in. (3 mm) diameter wire cannot
be inserted between the specimen and the die of
Figure QW-466.1, or the specimen is bottom ejected if
the roller type of jig (Figure QW-466.2) is used.
When using the wrap around jig (Figure QW-466.3), the
side of the specimen turned toward the roller shall be the
face for face‐bend specimens, the root for root‐bend specimens, and the side with the greater discontinuities, if any,
for side‐bend specimens.
When specimens wider than 11/2 in. (38 mm) are to be
bent as permitted in Figure QW-462.2, the test jig mandrel
must be at least 1/4 in. (6 mm) wider than the specimen
width.
QW-163
QW-172.1 General. Drop weight tests shall be made
when required by other Sections.
Test procedures and apparatus shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM Specification E208.
QW-172.2 Acceptance. The acceptance criteria shall
be in accordance with that Section requiring drop weight
tests.
QW-172.3 Location and Orientation of Test Specimen. The drop weight test specimen, the crack starter
location, and the orientation shall be as given in the
Section requiring such tests.
When qualifying pipe in the 5G or 6G position, the
notch‐toughness specimens shall be removed from the
shaded portion of Figure QW-463.1(f).
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA — BEND TESTS
The weld and heat‐affected zone of a transverse weld‐
bend specimen shall be completely within the bent portion
of the specimen after testing.
The guided‐bend specimens shall have no open discontinuity in the weld or heat‐affected zone exceeding 1/8 in.
(3 mm), measured in any direction on the convex surface
of the specimen after bending. Open discontinuities occurring on the corners of the specimen during testing shall
not be considered unless there is definite evidence that
they result from lack of fusion, slag inclusions, or other internal discontinuities. For corrosion‐resistant weld overlay cladding, no open discontinuity exceeding 1/16 in.
(1.5 mm), measured in any direction, shall be permitted
in the cladding, and no open discontinuity exceeding
1
/8 in. (3 mm) shall be permitted along the approximate
weld interface.
QW-170
QW-171
NOTCH‐TOUGHNESS TESTS — DROP
WEIGHT
QW-180
QW-181
FILLET‐WELD TESTS
PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE
QUALIFICATION SPECIMENS
QW-181.1 Procedure. The dimensions and preparation of the fillet‐weld test coupon for procedure qualification as required in QW-202 shall conform to the
requirements in Figure QW-462.4(a) or Figure
QW-462.4(d). The test coupon for plate‐to‐plate shall be
cut transversely to provide five test specimen sections,
each approximately 2 in. (50 mm) long. For pipe‐to‐plate
or pipe‐to‐pipe, the test coupon shall be cut transversely
to provide four approximately equal test specimen
sections. The test specimens shall be macro‐examined to
the requirements of QW-183.
QW-181.1.1 Production Assembly Mockups . Production assembly mockups may be used in lieu of
QW-181.1. The mockups for plate‐to‐shape shall be cut
transversely to provide five approximately equal test specimens not to exceed approximately 2 in. (50 mm) in
length. For pipe‐to‐shape mockups, the mockup shall be
cut transversely to provide four approximately equal test
specimens. For small mockups, multiple mockups may be
required to obtain the required number of test specimens.
The test specimens shall be macro‐examined to the requirements of QW-183.
NOTCH‐TOUGHNESS TESTS
NOTCH‐TOUGHNESS TESTS — CHARPY
V‐NOTCH
QW-171.1 General. Charpy V‐notch impact tests shall
be made when required by other Sections.
Test procedures and apparatus shall conform to the
requirements of SA-370.
QW-181.2 Performance. The dimensions and the
preparation of the fillet‐weld test coupon for performance
qualification shall conform to the requirements in Figure
QW-462.4(b) or Figure QW-462.4(c). The test coupon for
plate‐to‐plate shall be cut transversely to provide a center
section approximately 4 in. (100 mm) long and two end
sections, each approximately 1 in. (25 mm) long. For
pipe‐to‐plate or pipe‐to‐pipe, the test coupon shall be
cut to provide two quarter sections test specimens opposite to each other. One of the test specimens shall be fracture tested in accordance with QW-182 and the other
macro‐examined to the requirements of QW-184. When
QW-171.2 Acceptance. The acceptance criteria shall
be in accordance with that Section specifying impact
requirements.
QW-171.3 Location and Orientation of Test Specimen. The impact test specimen and notch location and
orientation shall be as given in the Section requiring such
tests.
When qualifying pipe in the 5G or 6G position, the
notch‐toughness specimens shall be removed from the
shaded portion of Figure QW-463.1(f).
18
2013 SECTION IX
QW-184
qualifying pipe‐to‐plate or pipe‐to‐pipe in the 5F position,
the test specimens shall be removed as indicated in
Figure QW-463.2(h).
The cut end of one of the end plate sections, approximately 1 in. (25 mm) long, in Figure QW-462.4(b) or
the cut end of one of the pipe quarter sections in
Figure QW-462.4(c), as applicable, shall be smoothed
and etched with a suitable etchant (see QW-470) to give
a clear definition of the weld metal and heat affected zone.
In order to pass the test
(a) visual examination of the cross section of the weld
metal and heat‐affected zone shall show complete fusion
and freedom from cracks, except that linear indications
at the root not exceeding 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) shall be
acceptable
(b) the weld shall not have a concavity or convexity
greater than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm)
(c) there shall be not more than 1/8 in. (3 mm) difference in the lengths of the legs of the fillet
QW-181.2.1 Production Assembly Mockups . Production assembly mockups may be used in lieu of the
fillet‐weld test coupon requirements of QW-181.2.
(a) Plate‐to‐Shape
(1) The mockup for plate‐to‐shape shall be cut transversely to provide three approximately equal test specimens not to exceed approximately 2 in. (50 mm) in
length. The test specimen that contains the start and stop
of the weld shall be fracture tested in accordance with
QW-182. A cut end of one of the remaining test specimens
shall be macro‐examined in accordance with QW-184.
(b) Pipe‐to‐Shape
(1) The mockup for pipe‐to‐shape shall be cut transversely to provide two quarter sections approximately opposite to each other. The test specimen that contains the
start and stop of the weld shall be fracture tested in accordance with QW-182. A cut end of the other quarter section
shall be macro‐examined in accordance with QW-184.
When qualifying pipe‐to‐shape in the 5F position, the fracture specimen shall be removed from the lower 90 deg
section of the mockup.
QW-182
QW-185
DIFFUSION WELDING — PROCEDURE
AND PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION
SPECIMENS
QW-185.1 The test block shall be a minimum of 8 in. x
8 in. (200 mm x 200 mm) and of a thickness such that
there are at least 50 interface planes being welded.
FRACTURE TESTS
QW-185.2 A minimum of three tension test specimens
in accordance with the requirements of SA-370 shall be taken perpendicular to the interface planes and three parallel to the interface planes. The tension test results shall
comply with QW-153.
The stem of the 4 in. (100 mm) performance specimen
center section in Figure QW-462.4(b) or the stem of the
quarter section in Figure QW-462.4(c), as applicable, shall
be loaded laterally in such a way that the root of the weld
is in tension. The load shall be steadily increased until the
specimen fractures or bends flat upon itself.
If the specimen fractures, the fractured surface shall
show no evidence of cracks or incomplete root fusion,
and the sum of the lengths of inclusions and porosity visible on the fractured surface shall not exceed 3/8 in.
(10 mm) in Figure QW-462.4(b) or 10% of the quarter section in Figure QW-462.4(c).
QW-183
MACRO‐EXAMINATION —
PERFORMANCE SPECIMENS
QW-185.3 Microstructural evaluation shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E3
on a minimum of three cross-sections, one each from the
top, center, and bottom one-third of the test coupon. The
samples shall be polished, etched, and shall be free from
cracks and shall show no incomplete bond or porosity
on or adjacent to the bond lines. Size of each sample shall
be that which can be mounted and polished to allow examination with an optical microscope at 50x to 100x
magnification.
MACRO‐EXAMINATION — PROCEDURE
SPECIMENS
One face of each cross section of the five test specimens
in Figure QW-462.4(a) or four test specimens in
Figure QW-462.4(d), as applicable shall be smoothed
and etched with a suitable etchant (see QW-470) to give
a clear definition to the weld metal and heat affected zone.
The examination of the cross sections shall include only
one side of the test specimen at the area where the plate
or pipe is divided into sections i.e., adjacent faces at the
cut shall not be used. In order to pass the test
(a) visual examination of the cross sections of the weld
metal and heat‐affected zone shall show complete fusion
and freedom from cracks
(b) there shall be not more than 1/8 in. (3 mm) difference in the length of the legs of the fillet
QW-190
OTHER TESTS AND EXAMINATIONS
QW-191 VOLUMETRIC NDE
QW-191.1 Radiographic Examination
QW-191.1.1
Method
The radiographic examination in QW-142 for welders
and in QW-143 for welding operators shall meet the requirements of Article 2, Section V, except as follows:
(a) A written radiographic examination procedure is
not required. Demonstration of density and image quality
requirements on production or technique radiographs
shall be considered satisfactory evidence of compliance
with Article 2 of Section V.
19
2013 SECTION IX
(-b) 1/3 t for t over 3/8 in. (10 mm) to 2 1/4 in.
(57 mm), inclusive
(b) Final acceptance of radiographs shall be based on
the ability to see the prescribed image and the specified
hole of a hole‐type image quality indicator (IQI) or the designated wire of a wire‐type IQI. The acceptance standards
of QW-191.1.2 shall be met.
(-c)
/4 in. (19 mm) for t over 21/4 in. (57 mm)
(3) any group of slag inclusions in line that have an
aggregate length greater than t in a length of 12t, except
when the distance between the successive imperfections
exceeds 6L where L is the length of the longest imperfection in the group
QW-191.1.2 Acceptance Criteria.
QW-191.1.2.1 Terminology.
(a) Linear Indications. Cracks, incomplete fusion, inadequate penetration, and slag are represented on the radiograph as linear indications in which the length is more
than three times the width.
(b) Rounded Indications. Porosity and inclusions such
as slag or tungsten are represented on the radiograph as
rounded indications with a length three times the width
or less. These indications may be circular, elliptical, or irregular in shape; may have tails; and may vary in density.
ð13Þ
3
(b) Rounded Indications
(1) The maximum permissible dimension for
rounded indications shall be 20% of t or 1/8 in. (3 mm),
whichever is smaller.
(2) For welds in material less than 1/8 in. (3 mm) in
thickness, the maximum number of acceptable rounded
indications shall not exceed 12 in a 6 in. (150 mm) length
of weld. A proportionately fewer number of rounded indications shall be permitted in welds less than 6 in.
(150 mm) in length.
QW-191.1.2.2 Qualification Test Welds. Welder
and welding operator performance tests by radiography
of welds in test assemblies shall be judged unacceptable
when the radiograph exhibits any imperfections in excess
of the limits specified below
(a) Linear Indications
(1) any type of crack or zone of incomplete fusion or
penetration
(2) any elongated slag inclusion which has a length
greater than
(-a) 1/8 in. (3 mm) for t up to 3/8 in. (10 mm),
inclusive
(3) For welds in material 1/8 in. (3 mm) or greater in
thickness, the charts in Figure QW-191.1.2.2(b)(4) represent the maximum acceptable types of rounded indications illustrated in typically clustered, assorted, and
randomly dispersed configurations. Rounded indications
less than 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) in maximum diameter shall
not be considered in the radiographic acceptance tests of
welders and welding operators in these ranges of material
thicknesses.
20
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-191.1.2.2(b)(4)
Rounded Indication Charts
Typical Quantity and Size Permitted
in 6 in. (150 mm) Length of Weld
1/ in. (3 mm) to 1/ in. (6 mm)
8
4
Thickness
Typical Quantity and Size Permitted
in 6 in. (150 mm) Length of Weld
Over 1/4 in. (6 mm) to 1/2 in. (13 mm)
Thickness
Typical Quantity and Size Permitted
in 6 in. (150 mm) Length of Weld
Over 1/2 in. (13 mm) to 1 in. (25 mm)
Thickness
Typical Quantity and Size Permitted
in 6 in. (150 mm) Length of Weld
Over 1 in. (25 mm) Thickness
QW-191.1.2.3 Production Welds. The acceptance
criteria for welders or welding operators who qualify on
production welds by radiography as permitted in
QW-304.1 or QW-305.1 shall be per QW-191.1.2.2
ð13Þ
QW-191.2
Ultrasonic Examination
QW-191.2.1
Method
(b) Ultrasonic examinations shall be performed using a
written procedure in compliance with paragraph T-150,
Article 1, Section V and the requirements of Article 4, Section V for methods, procedures, and qualifications.
(c) Ultrasonic examination personnel shall meet the requirements of QW-191.2.2.
(a) The ultrasonic examination in QW-142 for welders
and in QW-143 for welding operators may be conducted
on test welds in material 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick or greater.
21
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
QW-191.2.2 Personnel Qualifications and Certifications.
(a) All personnel performing ultrasonic examinations
for welder and welding operator qualifications shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with their employer’s
written practice.
(b) The employer’s written practice for qualification
and certification of examination personnel shall meet all
applicable requirements of SNT-TC-1A1 for the examination method and technique.
(c) Alternatively, the ASNT Central Certification Program (ACCP) or CP-1891 may be used to fulfill the examination and demonstration requirements of SNT-TC-1A
and the employer’s written practice.
(d) Provisions for the training, experience, qualification,
and certification of NDE personnel shall be described in
the Manufacturer’s Quality Control System.
Every other welding stud (five joints) shall be tested
either by hammering over until one‐fourth of its length
is flat on the test piece, or by bending the stud to an angle
of at least 15 deg and returning it to its original position
using a test jig and an adapter location dimension that
are in accordance with Figure QW-466.4.
The remaining five welded stud joints shall be tested in
torque using a torque testing arrangement that is substantially in accordance with Figure QW-466.5. Alternatively,
where torquing is not feasible, tensile testing may be used,
and the fixture for tensile testing shall be similar to that
shown in Figure QW-466.6, except that studs without
heads may be gripped on the unwelded end in the jaws
of the tensile testing machine.
QW-192.1.2 Acceptance Criteria — Bend and
Hammer Tests. In order to pass the test(s), each of the five
stud welds and heat‐affected zones shall be free of visible
separation or fracture after bending and return bending or
after hammering.
QW-191.2.3 Acceptance Criteria for Qualification
Test Welds. Indications shall be sized using the applicable
technique(s) provided in the written procedure for the examination method. Indications shall be evaluated for acceptance as follows:
(a) All indications characterized as cracks, lack of fusion, or incomplete penetration are unacceptable regardless of length.
(b) Indications exceeding 1/8 in. (3 mm) in length are
considered relevant, and are unacceptable when their
lengths exceed
(1) 1/8 in. (3 mm) for t up to 3/8 in. (10 mm).
(2) 1/3t for t from 3/8 in. to 21/4 in. (10 mm to 57 mm).
(3) 3/4 in. (19 mm) for t over 21/4 in. (57 mm), where t
is the thickness of the weld excluding any allowable reinforcement. For a butt weld joining two members having
different thicknesses at the weld, t is the thinner of these
two thicknesses. If a full penetration weld includes a fillet
weld, the thickness of the throat of the fillet shall be included in t .
QW-192.1.3 Acceptance Criteria — Torque Tests.
In order to pass the test(s), each of the five stud welds
shall be subjected to the required torque shown in the following table before failure occurs.
Required Torque for Testing Threaded Carbon Steel Studs
Nominal Diameter
of Studs, in. (mm)
Testing Torque,
ft‐lb (J)
28 UNF
20 UNC
5.0 (6.8)
4.2 (5.7)
/16 (7.9)
/16 (7.9)
24 UNF
18 UNC
9.5 (12.9)
8.6 (11.7)
3
/8 (9.5)
/8 (9.5)
24 UNF
16 UNC
17 (23.0)
15 (20.3)
/16 (11.1)
/16 (11.1)
20 UNF
14 UNC
27 (36.6)
24 (32.5)
1
20 UNF
13 UNC
42 (57.0)
37 (50.2)
/16 (14.3)
/16 (14.3)
18 UNF
12 UNC
60 (81.4)
54 (73.2)
5
/8 (15.9)
/8 (15.9)
18 UNF
11 UNC
84 (114.0)
74 (100.0)
3
/4 (19.0)
/4 (19.0)
16 UNF
10 UNC
147 (200.0)
132 (180.0)
7
7
/8 (22.2)
/8 (22.2)
14 UNF
9 UNC
234 (320.0)
212 (285.0)
1 (25.4)
1 (25.4)
12 UNF
8 UNC
348 (470.0)
318 (430.0)
1
/4 (6.4)
/4 (6.4)
1
5
5
3
7
7
/2 (12.7)
/2 (12.7)
QW-191.2.4 Acceptance Criteria for Production
Welds. The acceptance criteria for welders or welding operators who qualify on production welds by ultrasonic examination as permitted in QW-304.1 or QW-305.1 shall be
per QW-191.2.3.
1
9
9
5
QW-191.3 Record of Tests. The results of welder and
welding operator performance tests evaluated by volumetric NDE shall be recorded in accordance with
QW-301.4.
QW-192
Threads/in. and
Series Designated
3
STUD‐WELD TESTS
QW-192.1 Procedure Qualification Specimens.
QW-192.1.1 Required Tests. Ten stud‐weld tests
are required to qualify each procedure. The equipment
used for stud welding shall be completely automatic except for manual starting.
22
2013 SECTION IX
15 deg and returning it to its original position using a test
jig and an adapter location dimension that are in accordance with Figure QW-466.4.
Required Torque for Testing Threaded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Studs
Nominal Diameter
of Studs, in. (mm)
1
/4 (6.4)
1
/4 (6.4)
Threads/in. and
Series Designated
Testing Torque,
ft‐lb (J)
28 UNF
20 UNC
4.5 (6.1)
4.0 (5.4)
/16 (7.9)
/16 (7.9)
24 UNF
18 UNC
9.0 (12.2)
8.0 (10.8)
3
/8 (9.5)
/8 (9.5)
24 UNF
16 UNC
16.5 (22.4)
14.5 (19.7)
/16 (11.1)
/16 (11.1)
20 UNF
14 UNC
26.0 (35.3)
23.0 (31.2)
1
/2 (12.7)
/2 (12.7)
20 UNF
13 UNC
40.0 (54.2)
35.5 (48.1)
5
/8 (15.9)
/8 (15.9)
18 UNF
11 UNC
80.00 (108.5)
71.00 (96.3)
3
/4 (19.0)
/4 (19.0)
16 UNF
10 UNC
140.00 (189.8)
125.00 (169.5)
7
7
/8 (22.2)
/8 (22.2)
14 UNF
9 UNC
223.00 (302.3)
202.00 (273.9)
1 (25.4)
1 (25.4)
14 UNF
8 UNC
339.00 (459.6)
303.00 (410.8)
5
5
3
7
7
1
5
3
QW-192.2.2 Acceptance Criteria — Bend and
Hammer Tests. In order to pass the test(s), each of the five
stud welds and heat affected zones shall be free of visible
separation or fracture after bending and return bending or
after hammering.
QW-193
TUBE‐TO‐TUBESHEET TESTS
When the applicable Code Section requires the use of
this paragraph for tube‐to‐tubesheet demonstration
mockup qualification, QW-193.1 through QW-193.1.3 shall
apply.
QW-193.1 Procedure Qualification Specimens. Ten ð13Þ
mockup welds are required to qualify each procedure.
The mockup assembly shall essentially duplicate the
tube hole configuration and tube-to-tubesheet joint design
within the limits of the essential variables of QW-288. The
thickness of the tubesheet in the mockup test assembly
shall be at least as thick as the production tubesheet, except it is not required to be thicker than 2 in. (50 mm).
The cladding may be represented by the base material of
essentially equivalent chemical composition to the cladding composition. The mockup welds shall be submitted
to the following tests sequentially and must meet the applicable acceptance criteria.
Alternatively, where torquing to destruction is not feasible, tensile testing may be used. For carbon and austenitic stainless steel studs, the failure strength shall be
not less than 35,000 psi (240 MPa) and 30,000 psi
(210 MPa), respectively. For other metals, the failure
strength shall not be less than half of the minimum specified tensile strength of the stud material. The failure
strength shall be based on the minor diameter of the
threaded section of externally threaded studs, except
where the shank diameter is less than the minor diameter,
or on the original cross‐sectional area where failure occurs
in a nonthreaded, internally threaded, or reduced‐
diameter stud.
QW-193.1.1 Acceptance Criteria — Visual Examination. The accessible surfaces of the welds shall be examined visually with no magnification required. The welds
shall show complete fusion and no evidence of burning
through the tube wall, and shall be free from cracking or
porosity.
QW-193.1.2 Acceptance Criteria — Liquid Penetrant. The liquid penetrant examination shall meet the requirements of Section V, Article 6. The weld surfaces shall
meet the requirements of QW-195.2.
QW-193.1.3 Acceptance Criteria — Macro‐
Examination. The mockup welds shall be sectioned
through the center of the tube for macro‐examination.
The four exposed surfaces shall be smoothed and etched
with a suitable etchant (see QW-470) to give a clear definition of the weld and heat‐affected zone. Using a magnification of 10X to 20X, the exposed cross sections of the
weld shall confirm
(a) minimum leak path dimension required by the
design
(b) no cracking
(c) complete fusion of the weld deposit into the tube‐
sheet and tube wall face
(d) complete penetration of the weld deposit to within
1
/64 in. (0.4 mm) of the root of the joint
(e) porosity shall not reduce the weld throat below the
required minimum leak path thickness
QW-192.1.4 Acceptance Criteria — Macro‐
Examination. In order to pass the macro‐examination,
each of five sectioned stud welds and the heat‐affected
zone shall be free of cracks when examined at 10X magnification, which is required by QW-202.5 when studs are
welded to metals other than P‐No. 1.
QW-192.2 Performance Qualification Specimens.
QW-192.2.1 Required Tests. Five stud‐weld tests
are required to qualify each stud‐welding operator. The
equipment used for stud welding shall be completely automatic except for manual starting. The performance test
shall be welded in accordance with a qualified WPS per
QW-301.2.
Each stud (five joints) shall be tested either by hammering over until one‐fourth of its length is flat on the test
piece or by bending the stud to an angle of at least
23
2013 SECTION IX
QW-193.2 Performance Qualification Specimens.
Five mockup welds are required to qualify each welder
or welding operator. The same rules as that for procedure
qualification (QW-193.1) shall be followed. Only one
mockup weld is required to renew a welder’s or welding
operator’s qualification when that qualification has expired or been revoked per the requirements of QW-322.1.
ð13Þ
QW-194
Material Thickness, in. (mm)
< 0.010
≥ 0.010
≥ 0.020
≥ 0.040
≥ 0.069
≥ 0.100
≥ 0.118
≥ 0.157
VISUAL EXAMINATION —
PERFORMANCE
Performance test coupons shall show no cracks and
complete joint penetration with complete fusion of weld
metal and base metal.
QW-195
< 0.020
< 0.040
< 0.069
< 0.100
< 0.118
< 0.157
(0.50)
(1.00)
(1.75)
(2.54)
(3.00)
(4.00)
6t
5t
4t
3t
2.50t
2.25t
2t
1.80t
The weld depth (extent of fusion) shall be a minimum of
20% of the thickness of the thinner ply (in each member)
and a maximum of 80% of the total thickness of all plies.
LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION
QW-195.1 The liquid penetrant examination in
QW-214 for corrosion‐resistant weld metal overlay shall
meet the requirements of Section V, Article 6. The acceptance standards of QW-195.2 shall be met.
QW-196.1.3 For projection welds, the width of the
nugget shall be not less than 80% of the width of the
projection.
QW-196.2 Mechanical Testing.
QW-196.2.1 Shear test specimens shall be prepared
as shown on Figure QW-462.9. For spot and projection
welds, each test specimen shall equal or exceed the minimum strength, and the average strength specified in
Tables QW-462.10(a) through QW-462.10(c) for the appropriate material. Further, for each set, 90% shall have
shear strength values between 0.9 and 1.1 times the set
average value. The remaining 10% shall lie between 0.8
and 1.2 times the set average value.
QW-195.2 Liquid Penetrant Acceptance Criteria.
QW-195.2.1 Terminology.
relevant indications: indications with major dimensions
greater than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm)
linear indications: an indication having a length greater
than three times the width.
rounded indications: an indication of circular or elliptical
shape with the length equal to or less than three times
the width.
QW-196.2.2 Peel test specimens shall be prepared
as shown in Figure QW-462.8.1 for spot and projection
welding and per Figure QW-462.8.2 for seam welding.
The specimens shall be peeled or separated mechanically,
and fracture shall occur in the base metal by tearing out of
the weld in order for the specimen to be acceptable.
QW-195.2.2 Acceptance Standards. Procedure and
performance tests examined by liquid penetrant techniques shall be judged unacceptable when the examination
exhibits any indication in excess of the limits specified in
the following:
(a) relevant linear indications
(b) relevant rounded indications greater than 3/16 in.
(5 mm)
(c) four or more relevant rounded indications in a line
separated by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) or less (edge‐to‐edge)
QW-196
(0.25)
(0.25) and
(0.50) and
(1.00) and
(1.75) and
(2.54) and
(3.00) and
(4.00)
Weld Nugget
Width
QW-197
LASER BEAM WELDING (LBW) LAP JOINT
TESTS
QW-197.1 Procedure Qualification Specimens.
QW-197.1.1 Required Tests. Six tension shear
specimens and eight macro specimens are required to
qualify each procedure. The qualification test coupon shall
be prepared in accordance with Figure QW-464.1. The
tension shear specimens shall conform to the dimensions
indicated in the table of Figure QW-464.1. The longitudinal
and transverse sections indicated in Figure QW-464.1
shall be cross‐sectioned as closely as possible through
the centerline of the weld. A minimum of 1 in. (25 mm)
shall be provided for examination of each longitudinal
specimen. The transverse specimens shall be of sufficient
length to include weld, the heat‐affected zone, and portions of the unaffected base material. Cross‐sections shall
be smoothed and etched with a suitable etchant (see
QW-470), and examined at a minimum magnification of
25X. The dimensions of the fusion zone and penetration
of each weld of the transverse specimens shall be measured to the nearest hundredth of an inch and recorded.
RESISTANCE WELD TESTING
QW-196.1 Macro‐Examination.
QW-196.1.1 Welds shall be cross‐sectioned,
polished, and etched to reveal the weld metal. The
section shall be examined at 10X magnification. Seam
welding specimens shall be prepared as shown in
Figure QW-462.7.3. The sectioned weldment shall be free
of cracks, incomplete penetration, expulsions, and inclusions. Porosity shall not exceed one void in the transverse
cross section or three voids in the longitudinal cross section of a specimen. The maximum dimension of any void
shall not exceed 10% of the thickness of the weld bead.
QW-196.1.2 For spot and seam welds, the minimum width of the weld nugget shall be as follows in relation to thickness, t, of the thinner member.
24
2013 SECTION IX
QW-197.1.2 Acceptance Criteria — Tension Shear
Tests. In order to pass the tension shear test(s), the requirements of QW-153 shall apply.
Figure QW-462.1(b) or Figure QW-462.1(c) from one coupon. For nontubular cross sections, two reduced section
tension specimens shall be prepared in accordance with
Figure QW-462.1(a) or Figure QW-462.1(d) from two of
the coupons. The specimens shall be tested in accordance
with QW-150.
QW-197.1.3 Acceptance Criteria — Macro‐
Examination. In order to pass the macro‐examination,
each of the eight specimens shall meet the following
criteria:
(a) The outline of the fusion zone shall be generally
consistent in size and regular in shape and uniformity of
penetration.
(b) The examination of the weld area shall reveal sound
weld metal, complete fusion along the bond line, and complete freedom from cracks in the weld metal and
heat‐affected zone.
QW-199.1.3 Section and Bend Testing. The entire
circumference of each remaining pipe coupon shall be
cut along the axis of the pipe into an even number of strips
of a length sufficient to perform bend tests. The maximum
width of each strip shall be 11/2 in. (38 mm) and the minimum width
QW-197.2 Performance Qualification Specimens.
QW-197.2.1 Required Tests. A peel test specimen
at least 6 in. (150 mm) long shall be prepared as shown
in Figure QW-464.2 illustration (a) and macro specimens
as shown in Figure QW-464.2 illustration (b). The peel test
specimens shall be peeled apart to destruction and the fusion zone and penetration measured to the nearest hundredth of an inch. The end of each strip of the macro
coupon shall be polished and etched to clearly reveal the
weld metal. The width and depth of penetration of each
weld shall be measured to the nearest hundredth of an
inch. Each specimen shall be examined in accordance with
QW-197.1.
where
D = OD of the tube
t = nominal wall thickness
w = width of the specimen
One edge of one strip from each coupon shall be
polished to a 600 grit finish with the final grinding parallel
to the long axis of the strip. The polished surface shall be
examined at 5X magnification. No incomplete fusion or
other open flaws on the polished surface are acceptable.
Defects occurring in the base metal not associated with
the weld may be disregarded. For nontubular cross
sections, four side‐bend specimens shall be prepared
from the two remaining coupons as specified in
Figure QW-462.2 and polished for examination.
All flash shall be removed from the strips and the welds
shall be visually examined per QW-194. Half of the strips
from each pipe specimen shall then be prepared as root
bend specimens and the remaining strips shall be
prepared as face bend specimens in accordance with
QW-160. The specimens shall be tested in accordance with
QW-160, except for the following:
(a) For P‐No. 1, Groups 2 through 4 materials, the minimum bend radius (dimension B in Figure QW-466.1) shall
be three times the thickness of the specimen.
(b) In lieu of QW-163, the sum of lengths of individual
open flaws on the convex surface of all the bend test specimens taken from each pipe individually shall not exceed
5% of the outside circumference of that test pipe.
QW-197.2.2 Acceptance Criteria — Peel Test and
Macro‐Examination. In order to pass the peel test and
macro‐examination, the dimensions of the fusion zone
(averaged) and the penetration (averaged) shall be within
the range of dimensions of those specified on the WPS that
was used to make the test coupon.
QW-199
FLASH WELDING
QW-199.1 Procedure Qualification Test Coupons
and Testing.
QW-199.1.1 Test Coupon Preparation. For coupons
NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller, four test welds shall be made,
and for pipes over NPS 1 (DN 25), three test coupons shall
be made using one set of welding parameters (i.e., the
same equipment, base metals, joint preparation, and other
essential variables to be utilized for production welding.)
These variables shall be recorded on the qualification
record.
QW-199.1.2 Tensile Tests. For pipes NPS 1 (DN 25)
and smaller, and nontubular cross sections, two
full‐section tensile specimens shall be prepared in
accordance with Figure QW-462.1(e). For pipes greater
than NPS 1 (DN 25), two reduced section tension
specimens shall be prepared in accordance with
QW-199.2 Flash Welding — Performance Qualification Test Coupons and Testing. One test coupon shall be
welded, cut into strips, visually examined, and bend tested
in accordance with QW-199.1.3. Polishing and examination of a cross‐section is not required.
25
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
APPENDIX I
ROUNDED INDICATION CHARTS
Illustration that appeared in this Appendix in the previous edition and addenda has been designated as
QW-191.1.2.2(b)(4) and follows QW-191.1.2.2(b)(3).
26
2013 SECTION IX
ARTICLE II
WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATIONS
QW-200
ð13Þ
GENERAL
(e) Availability of the WPS. A WPS used for Code production welding shall be available for reference and
review by the Authorized Inspector (AI) at the fabrication
site.
QW-200.1 Each organization shall prepare written
Welding Procedure Specifications that are defined as
follows:
(a) Welding Procedure Specification (WPS). A WPS is a
written qualified welding procedure prepared to provide
direction for making production welds to Code requirements. The WPS or other documents may be used to
provide direction to the welder or welding operator to assure compliance with the Code requirements.
(b) Contents of the WPS. The completed WPS shall describe all of the essential, nonessential, and, when
required, supplementary essential variables for each
welding process used in the WPS. These variables are
listed in QW-250 through QW‐280 and are defined in
Article IV, Welding Data.
The WPS shall reference the supporting Procedure Qualification Record(s) (PQR) described in QW-200.2. The organization may include any other information in the WPS
that may be helpful in making a Code weldment.
(c) Changes to the WPS. Changes may be made in the
nonessential variables of a WPS to suit production requirements without requalification provided such changes
are documented with respect to the essential, nonessential, and, when required, supplementary essential variables for each process. This may be by amendment to
the WPS or by use of a new WPS.
Changes in essential or supplementary essential (when
required) variables require requalification of the WPS
(new or additional PQRs to support the change in essential
or supplementary essential variables).
(d) Format of the WPS. The information required to be
in the WPS may be in any format, written or tabular, to fit
the needs of each organization, as long as every essential,
nonessential, and, when required, supplementary essential variables outlined in QW-250 through QW‐280 is included or referenced.
Form QW-482 (see Nonmandatory Appendix B) has
been provided as a guide for the WPS. This Form includes
the required data for the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, and GTAW
processes. It is only a guide and does not list all required
data for other processes. It also lists some variables that
do not apply to all processes (e.g., listing shielding gas
which is not required for SAW). The guide does not easily
lend itself to multiple process procedure specification
(e.g., GTAW root with SMAW fill).
QW-200.2 Each organization shall be required to ð13Þ
prepare a procedure qualification record which is defined
as follows:
(a) Procedure Qualification Record (PQR). The PQR is a
record of variables recorded during the welding of the test
coupons. It also contains the test results of the tested specimens. Recorded variables normally fall within a small
range of the actual variables that will be used in production welding.
(b) Contents of the PQR. The completed PQR shall
document all essential and, when required, supplementary essential variables of QW-250 through QW‐280 for
each welding process used during the welding of the test
coupon. Nonessential or other variables used during the
welding of the test coupon may be recorded at the organization's option. All variables, if recorded, shall be the
actual variables (including ranges) used during the welding of the test coupon. If variables are not monitored during welding, they shall not be recorded. It is not intended
that the full range or the extreme of a given range of variables to be used in production be used during qualification
unless required due to a specific essential or, when
required, supplementary essential variable.
The PQR shall be certified accurate by the organization.
The organization may not subcontract the certification
function. This certification is intended to be the organization's verification that the information in the PQR is a true
record of the variables that were used during the welding
of the test coupon and that the resulting tensile, bend, or
macro (as required) test results are in compliance with
Section IX.
One or more combinations of welding processes, filler
metal, and other variables may be used when welding a
test coupon. The approximate thickness of weld metal
deposited shall be recorded for each set of essential and,
when required, supplementary essential variables. Weld
metal deposited using each set of variables shall be
included in the tension, bend, notch toughness, and other
mechanical test specimens that are required.
(c) Changes to the PQR. Changes to the PQR are not permitted except as described below. Editorial corrections or
addenda to the PQR are permitted. An example of an editorial correction is an incorrect P‐Number, F‐Number, or
A‐Number that was assigned to a particular base metal
27
2013 SECTION IX
consideration of the compatibility from the standpoint of
metallurgical properties, postweld heat treatment, design,
mechanical properties, and service requirements. Where
notch toughness is a consideration, it is presupposed that
the base metals meet the specific requirements.
or filler metal. An example of an addendum would be a
change resulting from a Code change. For example, Section
IX may assign a new F‐Number to a filler metal or adopt a
new filler metal under an established F‐Number. This may
permit, depending on the particular construction Code
requirements, an organization to use other filler metals
that fall within that particular F‐Number where, prior to
the Code revision, the organization was limited to the particular electrode classification that was used during qualification. Additional information can be incorporated into a
PQR at a later date provided the information is substantiated as having been part of the original qualification
condition by lab record or similar data.
All changes to a PQR require recertification (including
date) by the organization.
(d) F o r m a t o f t h e P Q R . F o r m Q W - 4 8 3 ( s e e
Nonmandatory Appendix B) has been provided as a guide
for the PQR. The information required to be in the PQR
may be in any format to fit the needs of each organization,
as long as every essential and, when required, supplementary essential variable, required by QW-250 through
QW‐280, is included. Also the type of tests, number of
tests, and test results shall be listed in the PQR.
Form QW-483 does not easily lend itself to cover combinations of welding processes or more than one
F‐Number filler metal in one test coupon. Additional
sketches or information may be attached or referenced
to record the required variables.
(e) Availability of the PQR. PQRs used to support WPSs
shall be available, upon request, for review by the Authorized Inspector (AI). The PQR need not be available to the
welder or welding operator.
(f) Multiple WPSs With One PQR/Multiple PQRs With
One WPS. Several WPSs may be prepared from the data
on a single PQR (e.g., a 1G plate PQR may support WPSs
for the F, V, H, and O positions on plate or pipe within
all other essential variables). A single WPS may cover several sets of essential variable ranges as long as a supporting PQR exists for each essential and, when required,
supplementary essential variable [e.g., a single WPS may
cover a thickness range from 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) through
1 1/4 in. (32 mm) if PQRs exist for both the 1/1 6 in.
(1.5 mm) through 3/16 in. (5 mm) and 3/16 in. (5 mm)
through 11/4 in. (32 mm) thickness ranges].
In general, notch‐toughness requirements are mandatory for all P‐No. 11 quenched and tempered metals, for
low temperature applications of other metals as applied
to Section VIII, and for various classes of construction required by Section III. Acceptance criteria for the notch‐
toughness tests are as established in the other Sections
of the Code.
QW-200.4
Combination of Welding Procedures.
(a) More than one WPS having different essential,
supplementary essential, or nonessential variables may
be used in a single production joint. Each WPS may include
one or a combination of processes, filler metals, or other
variables.
Where more than one WPS specifying different processes, filler metals, or other essential or supplementary
essential variables is used in a joint, QW-451 shall be used
to determine the range of base metal thickness and maximum weld metal thickness qualified for each process, filler
metal, or set of variables, and those limits shall be observed. Alternatively, qualification of WPSs for root deposits only may be made in accordance with (b).
When following a WPS that has more than one welding
process, filler metal, or set of variables, each process, filler
metal, or set of variables may be used individually or in
different combinations, provided
(1) the essential, nonessential, and required supplementary essential variables associated with the process,
filler metal, or set of variables are applied
(2) the base metal and deposited weld metal thickness limits of QW-451 for each process, filler metal, or
set of variables are applied
(b) For GTAW, SMAW, GMAW, PAW, and SAW, or combinations of these processes, a PQR for a process recording
a test coupon that was at least 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick may be
combined with one or more other PQRs recording another
welding process and any greater base metal thickness. In
this case, the process recorded on the first PQR may be
used to deposit the root layers using the process(es) recorded on that PQR up to 2t (for short‐circuiting type of
GMAW, see QW-404.32) in thickness on base metal of
the maximum thickness qualified by the other PQR(s)
used to support the WPS. The requirements of Note (1)
of Tables QW-451.1 and QW-451.2 shall apply.
QW-200.3 To reduce the number of welding procedure qualifications required, P‐Numbers are assigned to
base metals dependent on characteristics such as composition, weldability, and mechanical properties, where this
can logically be done; and for steel and steel alloys
(Table QW/QB-422) Group Numbers are assigned additionally to P‐Numbers. These Group Numbers classify
the metals within P‐Numbers for the purpose of procedure
qualification where notch‐toughness requirements are
specified. The assignments do not imply that base metals
may be indiscriminately substituted for a base metal
which was used in the qualification test without
QW-201
Organizational Responsibility
The organization shall certify that they have qualified
each Welding Procedure Specification, performed the procedure qualification test, and documented it with the necessary Procedure Qualification Record (PQR).
28
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
QW-202
ð13Þ
TYPE OF TESTS REQUIRED
(c) Qualification for Fillet Welds. WPS qualification for
fillet welds may be made on groove‐weld test coupons
using test specimens specified in (a) or (b). Fillet‐weld
procedures so qualified may be used for welding all
thicknesses of base metal for all sizes of fillet welds,
and all diameters of pipe or tube in accordance with
Table QW-451.4. Nonpressure‐retaining fillet welds, as defined in other Sections of the Code, may as an alternate be
qualified with fillet welds only. Tests shall be made in accordance with QW-180. Limits of qualification shall be in
accordance with Table QW-451.3.
QW-202.1 Mechanical Tests. The type and number of
test specimens that shall be tested to qualify a groove weld
procedure are given in QW-451, and shall be removed in a
manner similar to that shown in QW‐463. If any test specimen required by QW-451 fails to meet the applicable acceptance criteria, the test coupon shall be considered as
failed.
When it can be determined that the cause of failure is
not related to welding parameters, another test coupon
may be welded using identical welding parameters.
Alternatively, if adequate material of the original test
coupon exists, additional test specimens may be removed
as close as practicable to the original specimen location to
replace the failed test specimens.
When it has been determined that the test failure was
caused by an essential or supplementary essential variable, a new test coupon may be welded with appropriate
changes to the variable(s) that was determined to cause
the test failure. If the new test passes, the essential and
supplementary variables shall be documented on the PQR.
When it is determined that the test failure was caused
by one or more welding related factors other than essential or supplementary essential variables, a new test coupon may be welded with the appropriate changes to the
welding related factors that were determined to cause
the test failure. If the new test passes, the welding related
factors that were determined to cause the previous test
failure shall be addressed by the organization to ensure
that the required properties are achieved in the production weldment.
Where qualification is for fillet welds only, the requirements are given in QW-202.2(c); and where qualification
is for stud welds only, the requirements are given in
QW-202.5.
QW-202.2
QW-202.3 Weld Repair and Buildup. WPS qualified
on groove welds shall be applicable for weld repairs to
groove and fillet welds and for weld buildup under the following provisions:
(a) There is no limitation on the thickness of base metal
or deposited weld metal for fillet welds.
(b) For other than fillet welds, the thickness range for
base metal and deposited weld metal for each welding
process shall be in accordance with QW-451, except there
need be no upper limit on the base metal thickness provided qualification was made on base metal having a thickness of 11/2 in. (38 mm) or more.
QW-202.4 Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses. WPS
qualified on groove welds shall be applicable for production welds between dissimilar base metal thicknesses
provided:
(a) the thickness of the thinner member shall be within
the range permitted by QW-451
(b) the thickness of the thicker member shall be as
follows:
(1) For P‐No. 8, P‐No. 41, P‐No. 42, P‐No. 43, P‐No. 44,
P‐No. 45, P‐No. 46, P‐No. 49, P‐No. 51, P‐No. 52, P‐No. 53,
P‐No. 61, and P‐No. 62 metal, there shall be no limitation
on the maximum thickness of the thicker production member in joints of similar P‐Number materials provided qualification was made on base metal having a thickness of
1
/4 in. (6 mm) or greater.
(2) For all other metal, the thickness of the thicker
member shall be within the range permitted by QW-451,
except there need be no limitation on the maximum thickness of the thicker production member provided qualification was made on base metal having a thickness of 11/2 in.
(38 mm) or more.
More than one procedure qualification may be required
to qualify for some dissimilar thickness combinations.
Groove and Fillet Welds
(a) Qualification for Groove Full Penetration Welds.
Groove‐weld test coupons shall qualify the thickness
ranges of both base metal and deposited weld metal to
be used in production. Limits of qualification shall be in accordance with QW-451. WPS qualification for groove
welds shall be made on groove welds using tension and
guided‐bend specimens. Notch‐toughness tests shall be
made when required by other Section(s) of the Code.
The WPS shall be qualified for use with groove welds within the range of essential variables listed.
(b) Qualification for Partial Penetration Groove Welds.
Partial penetration groove welds shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of QW-451 for both base
metal and deposited weld metal thickness, except there
need be no upper limit on the base metal thickness provided qualification was made on base metal having a thickness of 11/2 in. (38 mm) or more.
QW-202.5 Stud Welding. Procedure qualification
tests for stud welds shall be made in accordance with
QW-192. The procedure qualification tests shall qualify
the welding procedures for use within the range of the essential variables of QW‐261. For studs welded to other
than P‐No. 1 metals, five additional welds shall be made
and subjected to a macro‐test, except that this is not required for studs used for extended heating surfaces.
29
2013 SECTION IX
QW-215.2 The mechanical testing requirements of
QW-451 shall apply.
QW-202.6 Tube‐to‐Tubesheet Qualification. When
the applicable Code Section requires the use of QW-193
for tube‐to‐tubesheet demonstration mockup qualification
tests, QW-193.1 shall apply. If specific qualification test requirements are not specified by the applicable Code Section, tube‐to‐tubesheet welds shall be qualified with one
of the following methods:
(a) groove welds per the requirements of QW-202.2
and QW-202.4
(b) a demonstration mockup per the requirements of
QW-193.1
(c) fillet welds per the requirements of QW-202.2(c)
(for nonpressure retaining tube‐to‐tubesheet welds only)
QW-203
QW-215.3 Essential variables shall be as specified in
Tables QW-260 and QW-264 for the applicable welding
process.
QW-216
Hard‐Facing Weld Metal Overlay refers to weld deposits
made, using a variety of processes, to deter the effects of
wear and/or abrasion. The requirements specified in
QW-216.1 through QW-216.4 apply regardless of which
hard‐facing process is used.
QW-216.1 The size of test coupons, limits of qualification, required examinations and tests, and test specimens
shall be as specified in Table QW-453.
LIMITS OF QUALIFIED POSITIONS FOR
PROCEDURES
Unless specifically required otherwise by the welding
variables (QW-250), a qualification in any position qualifies the procedure for all positions. The welding process
and electrodes must be suitable for use in the positions
permitted by the WPS. A welder or welding operator making and passing the WPS qualification test is qualified for
the position tested. see QW-301.2.
QW-210
QW-211
QW-216.2 Welding variables shall be as specified in
QW-250 for the applicable process.
QW-216.3 Where Spray Fuse methods of hard‐facing
(e.g., Oxyfuel and Plasma Arc) are to be used, the coupons
for these methods shall be prepared and welding variables
applied in accordance with QW-216.1 and QW-216.2,
respectively.
PREPARATION OF TEST COUPON
QW-216.4 If a weld deposit is to be used under a
hard‐facing weld metal overlay, a base metal with an assigned P‐Number and a chemical analysis nominally
matching the weld deposit chemical analysis may be substituted to qualify the PQR.
BASE METAL
The base metals may consist of either plate, pipe, or
other product forms. Qualification in plate also qualifies
for pipe welding and vice versa. The dimensions of the test
coupon shall be sufficient to provide the required test
specimens.
QW-212
QW-217
CORROSION‐RESISTANT WELD METAL
OVERLAY
QW-214.1 The size of test coupons, limits of qualification, required examinations and tests, and test specimens
shall be as specified in Table QW-453.
QW-214.2 Essential variables shall be as specified in
QW-250 for the applicable welding process.
QW-215
JOINING OF COMPOSITE (CLAD METALS)
The WPS for groove welds in clad metal shall be qualified as provided in (a) when any part of the cladding thickness, as permitted by the referencing Code Section, is
included in the design calculations. Either (a) or (b) may
be used when the cladding thickness is not included in
the design calculations.
(a) The essential and nonessential variables of QW-250
shall apply for each welding process used in production.
The procedure qualification test coupon shall be made
using the same P‐Number base metal, cladding, and
welding process, and filler metal combination to be used
in production welding. For metal not included in
Table QW/QB-422, the metal used in the composite test
plate shall be within the range of chemical composition
of that to be used in production. The qualified thickness
range for the base metal and filler metal(s) shall be based
on the actual test coupon thickness for each as applied to
QW-451, except that the minimum thickness of filler metal
joining the cladding portion of the weldment shall be
based on a chemical analysis performed in accordance
with Table QW-453. Tensile and bend tests required in
QW-451 for groove welds shall be made, and they shall
contain the full thickness of cladding through the reduced
section of the specimen. The bond line between the
TYPE AND DIMENSIONS OF GROOVE
WELDS
Except as otherwise provided in QW-250, the type and
dimensions of the welding groove are not essential
variables.
QW-214
HARD‐FACING WELD METAL OVERLAY
ELECTRON BEAM WELDING AND LASER
BEAM WELDING
QW-215.1 The WPS qualification test coupon shall be
prepared with the joint geometry duplicating that to be
used in production. If the production weld is to include
a lap‐over (completing the weld by rewelding over the
starting area of the weld, as for a girth weld), such lap‐over
shall be included in the WPS qualification test coupon.
30
2013 SECTION IX
the WPS for two variables, the first variable with a tolerance shall be set at the midpoint of its tolerance and two
test coupons shall be welded with each of the upper and
lower extremes of the tolerance for the second variable
(i.e., four coupons must be welded). These coupons shall
be examined and tested in accordance with QW-199.1.3.
If it is desired to provide tolerance for a third variable,
the first two variables shall be set at the midpoint of their
tolerance, and two test coupons shall be welded with each
of the upper and lower extremes of the new tolerances for
the third variable (i.e., four coupons must be welded).
These coupons shall be examined and tested in accordance
with QW-199.1.3.
No more than three essential variables on a WPS may
show tolerances.
Production tests conducted in accordance with the requirements of other Sections may be used to satisfy this
requirement.
original cladding and the base metal may be disregarded
when evaluating side‐bend tests if the cladding was applied by a process other than fusion welding.
(b) The essential and nonessential variables of QW-250
shall apply for each welding process used in production
for joining the base metal portion of the weldment. The
PQRs that support this portion of the WPS need not be
based on test coupons made with clad metal. For the
corrosion‐resistant overlay portion of the weld, the essential variables of QW-251.4 shall apply and the test coupon
and testing shall be in accordance with Table QW-453.
The WPS shall limit the depth of the groove, which will receive the corrosion‐resistant overlay in order to ensure
development of the full strength of the underlying weld
in the base metal.
QW-218
APPLIED LININGS
QW-218.1 WPSs for attaching applied linings shall be
qualified in accordance with QW-202.2(a), QW-202.2(b),
or QW-202.2(c).
QW-220
QW-218.2 As an alternative to the above, each process
to be used in attaching applied linings to base metal shall
be qualified on a test coupon welded into the form and
arrangement to be used in construction using materials
that are within the range of chemical composition of the
metal to be used for the base plate, the lining, and the
weld metal. The welding variables of QW-250 shall apply
except for those regarding base metal or weld metal thickness. Qualification tests shall be made for each position to
be used in production welding in accordance with
Table QW-461.9, except that qualification in the vertical
position, uphill progression shall qualify for all positions.
One cross‐section for each position tested shall be sectioned, polished, and etched to clearly show the demarcation between the base metal and the weld metal. In order
to be acceptable, each specimen shall exhibit complete fusion of the weld metal with the base metal and freedom
from cracks.
ð13Þ
Hybrid laser-GMAW is limited to the combination of
automatic LBW and automatic GMAW. The GMAW process
shall not be applied using the short-circuiting arc transfer
mode.
All hybrid laser-GMAW procedures for welding groove
and fillet welds shall be qualified in accordance with the
rules in QW-202. Table QW-268 lists the essential, supplementary essential, and nonessential variables that apply
for hybrid laser-GMAW qualification.
QW-221
HYBRID PLASMA-GMAW
When the applicable Code Section specifies the use of
this paragraph for utilizing the hybrid plasma-GMAW process, QW-221.1 through QW-221.3 shall apply.
QW-221.1 Qualification. All hybrid plasma-GMAW
procedures for groove and fillet welds shall be qualified
in accordance with the rules outlined in QW-202. All hybrid plasma-GMAW procedures for corrosion-resistant
overlay shall be qualified in accordance with the rules outlined in QW-214. All hybrid plasma-GMAW procedures for
hard-facing overlay shall be qualified in accordance with
the rules outlined in QW-216.
QW-218.3 When chemical analysis of the weld deposit
for any elements is required, a chemical analysis shall be
performed per Table QW-453, Note 9 for those elements.
QW-219
HYBRID LASER-GMAW WELDING
FLASH WELDING
Flash welding shall be limited to automatic electrical resistance flash welding. Procedure qualification tests shall
be conducted in accordance with QW-199.1.
QW-221.2 Welding Process Restriction. Hybrid
plasma-GMAW is limited to the combination of PAW and
GMAW. The hybrid process is limited to machine welding
only.
QW-219.1 Tolerances on Variables . Flash welding
variables that may require adjustment during production
welding are synergistically related. Accordingly, even
though the variables shown in Table QW-265 provide tolerances on many welding variables, the WPS shall specify
the same specific variables shown on the PQR with tolerance shown for no more than one variable (e.g., if it is desired to provide a tolerance on the upset current, all other
variables shown on the WPS must be the same as they are
shown on the PQR). If it is desired to provide tolerances in
QW-221.3 Variables for Hybrid Plasma-GMAW.
Table QW-269 lists the essential, supplementary essential,
and nonessential variables that apply when hybrid
plasma-GMAW qualification is required for groove and fillet welds. Table QW-269.1 lists the special process essential and nonessential variables associated with hardfacing
and corrosion resistant overlay (CRO).
31
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
QW-250
QW-251
WELDING VARIABLES
QW-251.3 Nonessential Variables. Nonessential
variables are those in which a change, as described in
the specific variables, may be made in the WPS without
requalification.
GENERAL
QW-251.1 Types of Variables for Welding Procedure
Specifications (WPS). These variables (listed for each
welding process in Tables QW-252 through QW-266) are
subdivided into essential variables, supplementary essential variables, and nonessential variables (QW-401). The
“Brief of Variables” listed in the tables are for reference
only. See the complete variable in Welding Data of
Article IV.
QW-251.4 Special Processes.
(a) The special process essential variables for
corrosion‐resistant and hard‐surfacing weld metal
overlays are as indicated in the following tables for the
specified process. Only the variables specified for
special processes shall apply. A change in the corrosion‐
resistant or hard‐surfacing welding process shall require
requalification.
(b) WPS qualified for corrosion‐resistant and hard‐
surfacing overlay welding, in accordance with other Sections when such qualification rules were included in those
Sections, may be used with the same provisions as
provided in QG-101.
QW-251.2 Essential Variables. Essential variables
are those in which a change, as described in the specific
variables, is considered to affect the mechanical properties
of the weldment, and shall require requalification of the
WPS.
Supplementary essential variables are required for metals for which other Sections specify notch‐toughness tests
and are in addition to the essential variables for each
welding process.
32
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-252
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Oxyfuel Gas Welding (OFW)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
Brief of Variables
Essential
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
.1
ϕ Groove design
X
.2
± Backing
X
.3
ϕ Backing comp.
X
.10
ϕ Root spacing
X
.1
ϕ P‐Number
.2
X
Max. T Qualified
X
.3
ϕ Size
.4
ϕ F‐Number
.5
ϕ A‐Number
X
.12
ϕ Classification
X
QW-405
Positions
.1
+
QW-406
Preheat
.1
QW-407
PWHT
.1
ϕ PWHT
X
QW-408
Gas
.7
ϕ Type fuel gas
X
.1
ϕ String/weave
X
.2
ϕ Flame characteristics
X
.4
ϕ
X
.5
ϕ Method cleaning
X
.26
±
X
QW-404
Filler Metals
QW-410
Technique
.64
X
X
Position
X
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
X
Technique
Peening
Use of thermal processes
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
33
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-252.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Oxyfuel Gas Welding (OFW)
Special Process Essential Variables
Paragraph
Hard‐Facing Overlay (QW-216)
QW-402
Joint
.16
QW-403
Base Metals
.20
ϕ P‐Number
.23
ϕ
.12
ϕ Classification
QW-404
Filler Metals
QW-405
Positions
> Finished t
ϕ P‐Number
ϕ T Qualified
T Qualified
ϕ T Qualified
ϕ Classification
.42
> 5% Particle size range
.46
ϕ Powder feed rate
.4
.4
QW-407
PWHT
.6
+
Position
+
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
Position
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
ϕ Preheat maint.
.5
ϕ PWHT
ϕ PWHT
ϕ PWHT after fusing
.7
.7
ϕ Type of fuel gas
.14
ϕ Oxyfuel gas pressure
ϕ > 5% Gas feed rate
.16
ϕ Plasma/feed gas comp.
.19
QW-410
Technique
Hard‐Facing Spray Fuse
(QW-216)
Finished t
.17
QW-406
Preheat
QW-408
Gas
<
Corrosion‐Resistant Overlay
(QW-214)
.38
ϕ Multiple to single layer
.39
ϕ Torch type, tip sizer
ϕ Multiple to single layer
.44
ϕ > 15% Torch to workpiece
.45
ϕ Surface prep.
.46
ϕ Spray torch
.47
ϕ > 10% Fusing temp. or
method
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
34
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-253
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Shielded Metal‐Arc Welding (SMAW)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
Brief of Variables
QW-405
Positions
− Backing
X
.10
ϕ Root spacing
X
.11
±
.5
ϕ Group Number
.8
QW-410
Technique
X
X
X
X
t Pass > 1/2 in. (13 mm)
X
.11
ϕ P‐No. qualified
X
.4
ϕ F‐Number
X
.5
ϕ A‐Number
X
.6
ϕ Diameter
.7
ϕ Diameter > 1/4 in. (6 mm)
.12
ϕ Classification
.30
ϕ t
.33
ϕ Classification
.1
+
.2
ϕ Position
.3
ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
.2
X
X
X
X
X
Position
X
X
X
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
X
ϕ Preheat maint.
X
Increase > 100°F (55°C) (IP)
.1
ϕ PWHT
.2
ϕ PWHT (T & T range)
.4
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
Retainers
T Limits impact
.3
QW-407
PWHT
X
ϕ T Qualified
.1
QW-406
Preheat
X
X
X
T Limits
X
.1
>
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
.8
ϕ I & E range
X
.1
ϕ String/weave
X
Heat input
X
X
X
.5
ϕ Method cleaning
X
.6
ϕ Method back gouge
X
.9
ϕ Multiple to single pass/side
.25
ϕ Manual or automatic
.26
±
.64
X
X
Use of thermal processes
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
X
X
Peening
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
Nonessential
.4
.9
QW-404
Filler Metals
Supplementary Essential
ϕ Groove design
.6
QW-403
Base Metals
Essential
.1
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
35
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-253.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Shielded Metal‐Arc Welding (SMAW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Hard‐Facing Overlay (HFO)
(QW-216)
Corrosion‐Resistant Overlay
(CRO) (QW-214)
.16
<
<
.20
ϕ P‐Number
ϕ P‐Number
.23
ϕ T Qualified
ϕ T Qualified
.12
ϕ Classification
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
QW-404
Filler Metals
Finished t
Finished t
ϕ A‐Number
.37
ϕ Diameter (1st layer)
.38
QW-405
Positions
.4
QW-406
Preheat
.4
QW-407
PWHT
.6
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
.4
QW-410
Technique
+
Position
+
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
Position
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
ϕ PWHT
ϕ PWHT
.9
.22
Nonessential Variables for
HFO and CRO
ϕ Current or polarity
ϕ Current or polarity
Inc. > 10% 1st layer
Inc. > 10% 1st layer
.1
ϕ String/weave
.5
ϕ Method of cleaning
.26
± Peening
.38
ϕ Multiple to single layer
ϕ Multiple to single layer
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
36
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-254
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Submerged‐Arc Welding (SAW)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
Brief of Variables
.1
ϕ Groove design
X
−
Backing
X
X
.10
ϕ Root spacing
.11
±
.5
ϕ Group Number
T Limits
.8
ϕ T Qualified
X
X
X
X
t Pass 1/2 in. (13 mm)
X
.11
ϕ P‐No. qualified
X
.4
ϕ F‐Number
X
.5
ϕ A‐Number
X
.6
ϕ Diameter
.9
ϕ Flux/wire class.
X
.10
ϕ Alloy flux
X
.24
± Supplemental
ϕ
X
.27
ϕ Alloy elements
X
.29
ϕ Flux designation
.30
ϕ t
.33
ϕ Classification
.34
ϕ Flux type
.35
ϕ Flux/wire class.
QW-405
Positions
.1
QW-406
Preheat
.1
.2
X
X
X
X
X
X
Recrushed slag
X
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
X
ϕ Preheat maint.
X
Increase > 100°F (55°C) (IP)
.1
ϕ PWHT
.2
ϕ PWHT (T & T range)
.4
>
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
.8
ϕ I & E range
X
X
X
T Limits
.1
X
X
+ Position
.3
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
Retainers
.6
.36
QW-407
PWHT
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
.4
.9
QW-404
Filler Metals
Essential
X
Heat input
X
X
X
X
37
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-254
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Submerged‐Arc Welding (SAW) (Cont'd)
Paragraph
QW-410
Technique
Brief of Variables
Essential
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
.1
ϕ String/weave
X
.5
ϕ Method cleaning
X
.6
ϕ Method back gouge
X
.7
ϕ Oscillation
X
.8
ϕ Tube‐work distance
X
.9
ϕ Multi to single pass/side
X
X
.10
ϕ Single to multi electrodes
X
X
.15
ϕ Electrode spacing
X
.25
ϕ Manual or automatic
X
.26
±
.64
Peening
X
Use of thermal processes
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
38
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-254.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Submerged‐Arc Welding (SAW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Hard‐Facing Overlay (HFO)
(QW-216)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
.16
<
Finished t
Corrosion‐Resistant Overlay (CRO) Nonessential Variables for
(QW-214)
HFO and CRO
<
Finished t
.20
ϕ P‐Number
ϕ P‐Number
.23
ϕ T Qualified
ϕ T Qualified
ϕ Nominal size of electrode
.6
.12
QW-404
Filler Metals
.24
.27
ϕ Classification
±
or ϕ > 10% in supplemental
filler metal
±
or ϕ > 10% in supplemental
filler metal
ϕ Alloy elements
ϕ A‐Number
.37
.39
ϕ Nominal flux comp.
ϕ Nominal flux comp.
QW-405
Positions
.4
+ Position
+ Position
QW-406
Preheat
.4
QW-407
PWHT
.6
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
.4
QW-410
Technique
Dec. > 100°F (55°C)
preheat > Interpass
ϕ PWHT
ϕ PWHT
.9
.26
Dec. > 100°F (55°C)
preheat > Interpass
ϕ Current or polarity
ϕ Current or polarity
1st layer — Heat input > 10%
1st layer — Heat input > 10%
.1
ϕ String/weave
.5
ϕ Method of cleaning
.7
ϕ Oscillation
.8
ϕ Tube to work distance
.15
ϕ Electrode spacing
.25
ϕ Manual or automatic
.26
±
.38
ϕ Multiple to single layer
ϕ Multiple to single layer
ϕ No. of electrodes
ϕ No. of electrodes
− Supplemental device
.40
.50
Peening
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
39
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-255
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Metal‐Arc Welding (GMAW and FCAW)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
QW-404
Filler Metals
Brief of Variables
X
.4
−
Backing
X
.10
ϕ Root spacing
X
.11
±
X
.5
ϕ Group Number
T Limits
.8
ϕ T Qualified
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
X
X
X
.9
t Pass > 1/2 in. (13 mm)
X
.10
T limits (S. cir. arc)
X
.11
ϕ P‐No. qualified
X
.4
ϕ F‐Number
X
.5
ϕ A‐Number
X
.6
ϕ Diameter
.12
ϕ Classification
X
X
.23
ϕ Filler metal product form
.24
±
.27
ϕ Alloy elements
X
.30
ϕ t
X
.33
ϕ Classification
.1
+
.2
ϕ Position
.3
ϕ ↑ ↓ Vertical welding
.2
X
or ϕ Supplemental
X
t Limits (S. cir. arc)
X
X
Position
X
X
X
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
X
ϕ Preheat maint.
X
Increase > 100°F (55°C) (IP)
.1
ϕ PWHT
.2
ϕ PWHT (T & T range)
.4
QW-408
Gas
Retainers
.6
.3
QW-407
PWHT
Nonessential
ϕ Groove design
.1
QW-406
Preheat
Supplementary
Essential
.1
.32
QW-405
Positions
Essential
X
X
X
T Limits
X
Trail or ϕ comp.
.1
±
.2
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
.3
ϕ Flow rate
.5
±
or ϕ Backing flow
X
X
X
X
.9
−
Backing or ϕ comp.
X
.10
ϕ Shielding or trailing
X
.1
> Heat input
.2
ϕ Transfer mode
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
.8
ϕ I & E range
X
X
X
X
X
40
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-255
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Metal‐Arc Welding (GMAW and FCAW)
(Cont'd)
Paragraph
QW-410
Technique
Brief of Variables
Essential
Supplementary
Essential
ϕ String/weave
X
.3
ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle size
X
.5
ϕ Method cleaning
X
.6
ϕ Method back gouge
X
.7
ϕ Oscillation
X
.8
ϕ Tube‐work distance
.9
ϕ Multiple to single pass/side
X
X
.10
ϕ Single to multiple electrodes
X
X
.15
ϕ Electrode spacing
X
.25
ϕ Manual or automatic
X
.26
± Peening
.64
X
X
Use of thermal processes
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
Nonessential
.1
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
41
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-255.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Metal‐Arc Welding (GMAW and FCAW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Paragraph
Hard‐Facing Overlay (HFO)
(QW-216)
Corrosion‐Resistant Overlay
(CRO) (QW-214)
<
QW-402
Joints
.16
<
Finished t
QW-403
Base Metals
.20
ϕ P‐Number
ϕ P‐Number
.23
ϕ T Qualified
ϕ T Qualified
Finished t
ϕ Nominal size of electrode
.6
QW-404
Filler Metals
.12
ϕ Classification
.23
ϕ Filler metal product form
.24
±
.27
ϕ Alloy elements
.4
QW-406
Preheat
.4
QW-407
PWHT
.6
QW-408
Gas
.2
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
.4
QW-410
Technique
ϕ Filler metal product form
or ϕ > 10% in supplemental ±
filler metal
or ϕ > 10% in supplemental
filler metal
ϕ A‐Number
.37
QW-405
Positions
+
Position
+
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
Position
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
ϕ PWHT
ϕ PWHT
.9
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
ϕ Current or polarity
ϕ Current or polarity
ϕ Flow rate
.3
.26
Nonessential Variables for
HFO and CRO
1st layer — Heat input
> 10%
1st layer — Heat input
> 10%
.1
ϕ String/weave
.3
ϕ Orifice/cup or nozzle
size
.5
ϕ Method of cleaning
.7
ϕ Oscillation
.8
ϕ Tube to work distance
.25
ϕ Manual or automatic
.26
±
.38
ϕ Multiple to single layer
ϕ Multiple to single layer
.50
ϕ No. of electrodes
ϕ No. of electrodes
Peening
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
42
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-256
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Tungsten‐Arc Welding (GTAW)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
QW-404
Filler Metals
QW-405
Positions
Brief of Variables
.1
ϕ Groove design
+
Backing
X
.10
ϕ Root spacing
X
.11
±
X
.5
ϕ Group Number
X
Retainers
X
.6
T Limits
.8
T Qualified
X
X
X
.11
ϕ P‐No. qualified
.3
ϕ Size
.4
ϕ F‐Number
X
.5
ϕ A‐Number
X
.12
ϕ Classification
.14
±
Filler
.22
±
Consum. insert
.23
ϕ Filler metal product form
X
.30
ϕ t
X
.33
ϕ Classification
X
.50
±
Flux
X
.1
+
Position
X
.2
ϕ Position
.3
ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
.1
QW-407
PWHT
.1
ϕ PWHT
.2
ϕ PWHT (T &T range)
X
X
X
X
X
X
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
.3
X
Increase > 100°F (55°C) (IP)
.4
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
.5
QW-406
Preheat
QW-408
Gas
Essential
X
X
X
T Limits
X
Trail or ϕ comp.
.1
±
.2
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
.3
ϕ Flow rate
.5
±
X
X
X
or ϕ Backing flow
X
.9
− Backing or ϕ comp.
X
.10
ϕ Shielding or trailing
X
.1
> Heat input
.3
±
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
X
Pulsing I
X
X
X
.8
ϕ I & E range
X
.12
ϕ Tungsten electrode
X
43
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-256
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Tungsten‐Arc Welding (GTAW) (Cont'd)
Paragraph
QW-410
Technique
Brief of Variables
Essential
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
.1
ϕ String/weave
X
.3
ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle size
X
.5
ϕ Method cleaning
X
.6
ϕ Method back gouge
X
.7
ϕ Oscillation
.9
ϕ Multi to single pass/side
.10
ϕ Single to multi electrodes
.11
ϕ Closed to out chamber
X
X
X
X
X
X
.15
ϕ Electrode spacing
X
.25
ϕ Manual or automatic
X
.26
±
X
.64
Peening
Use of thermal processes
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
44
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-256.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Gas Tungsten‐Arc Welding (GTAW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
Hard‐Facing Overlay (HFO) (QW-216)
.16
<
Finished t
Corrosion‐Resistant Overlay (CRO)
(QW-214)
<
Finished t
.20
ϕ P‐Number
ϕ P‐Number
.23
ϕ T Qualified
ϕ T Qualified
ϕ Wire size
.3
.12
QW-404
Filler Metals
ϕ Classification
.14
±
.23
ϕ Filler metal product form
Filler metal
.4
QW-406
Preheat
.4
QW-407
PWHT
.6
QW-408
Gas
.2
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
QW-410
Technique
±
Filler metal
ϕ Filler metal product form
ϕ A‐Number
.37
QW-405
Positions
+ Position
+ Position
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
ϕ PWHT
ϕ PWHT
.9
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
ϕ Flow rate
.3
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
ϕ Current or polarity
ϕ Tungsten electrode
.12
.26
Nonessential Variables for HFO
and CRO
1st layer — Heat input > 10%
1st layer — Heat input > 10%
.1
ϕ String/weave
.3
ϕ Orifice/cup or nozzle size
.5
ϕ Method of cleaning
.7
ϕ Oscillation
.15
ϕ Electrode spacing
.25
ϕ Manual or automatic
.26
± Peening
.38
ϕ Multiple to single layer
ϕ Multiple to single layer
.50
ϕ No. of electrodes
ϕ No. of electrodes
ϕ Filler metal delivery
.52
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
45
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-257
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Plasma‐Arc Welding (PAW)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
QW-404
Filler Metals
QW-405
Positions
QW-406
Preheat
QW-407
PWHT
QW-408
Gas
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
Brief of Variables
Essential
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
.1
ϕ Groove design
.5
+
Backing
X
.10
ϕ Root spacing
X
.11
± Retainers
X
.5
ϕ Group Number
X
X
.6
T Limits
.8
ϕ T Qualified
X
X
X
.12
ϕ P‐Number/melt‐in
.3
ϕ Size
.4
ϕ F‐Number
X
X
X
.5
ϕ A‐Number
.12
ϕ Classification
.14
±
Filler metal
.22
±
Consum. insert
.23
ϕ Filler metal product form
X
X
X
X
.27
ϕ Alloy elements
X
.30
ϕ t
X
.33
ϕ Classification
X
.1
+
X
.2
ϕ Position
.3
ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
.1
Position
X
X
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
.3
X
Increase > 100°F (55°C) (IP)
.1
ϕ PWHT
.2
ϕ PWHT (T & T range)
.4
ϕ Limits
.1
±
X
X
X
X
Trail or ϕ comp.
X
.4
ϕ Composition
.5
±
Or ϕ backing flow
.9
−
Backing or ϕ comp.
X
X
X
X
.10
ϕ Shielding or trailing
.21
ϕ Flow rate
.1
>
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
.8
ϕ I & E range
X
.12
ϕ Tungsten electrode
X
X
Heat input
X
X
46
X
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-257
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Plasma‐Arc Welding (PAW) (Cont'd)
Paragraph
QW-410
Technique
Brief of Variables
Essential
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
.1
ϕ String/weave
X
.3
ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle size
X
.5
ϕ Method cleaning
X
.6
ϕ Method back gouge
X
.7
ϕ Oscillation
.9
ϕ Multiple to single pass/side
X
X
.10
ϕ Single to multiple electrodes
X
X
.11
ϕ Closed to out chamber
.12
ϕ Melt‐in to keyhole
.15
ϕ Electrode spacing
X
.26
±
X
.64
X
X
X
Peening
Use of thermal processes
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
47
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-257.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Plasma‐Arc Welding (PAW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Hard‐Facing Overlay (HFO)
(QW-216)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
.16
<
Finished t
< Finished t
.17
>
.20
ϕ P‐Number
ϕ P‐Number
.23
ϕ T Qualified
ϕ T Qualified
.12
ϕ Classification
.14
± Filler metal
ϕ Classification
ϕ > 10% Powder feed rate
.43
ϕ Particle size
ϕ Particle size
.44
ϕ Powder type
ϕ Powder type
.45
ϕ Filler metal form
ϕ Filler metal form
+
+
ϕ > 5% Particle size
.42
ϕ Powder feed rate
.46
QW-405
Positions
.4
QW-406
Preheat
.4
Position
Dec. > 100°F (55°C)
preheat > Interpass
Position
+
Dec. > 100°F (55°C)
preheat > Interpass
.6
ϕ PWHT
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
Dec. > 100°F (55°C)
preheat > Interpass
ϕ PWHT
ϕ PWHT after fusing
.7
ϕ PWHT
.9
QW-408
Gas
Position
ϕ Preheat maintenance
.5
QW-407
PWHT
ϕ P‐Number
± Filler metal
ϕ > 10% Powder feed rate
.41
Finished t
ϕ A‐Number
.37
QW-404
Filler Metals
Corrosion‐Resistant Overlay Hard‐Facing Spray Fuse (HFSF) Nonessential Variables
(CRO) (QW-214)
(QW-216)
for HFO, CRO, and HFSF
.1
±
.16
ϕ > 5% Arc or metal feed gas ϕ > 5% Arc or metal feed gas ϕ > 5% Arc or metal feed gas
.17
ϕ Type or mixture
ϕ Type or mixture
.18
ϕ > 10% Mix. comp.
ϕ > 10% Mix. comp.
.19
ϕ Plasma/feed gas comp.
.20
ϕ Plasma gas flow‐rate range
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
ϕ Current or polarity
ϕ Type or size of electrode
.12
ϕ > 10% I & E
.23
.24
ϕ > 10% Filler wire watt.
ϕ > 10% Filler wire watt.
.25
ϕ > 10% I & E
ϕ > 10% I & E
48
Trail or π comp.
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-257.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Plasma‐Arc Welding (PAW) (Cont'd)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Hard‐Facing Overlay (HFO)
(QW-216)
Paragraph
QW-410
Technique
Corrosion‐Resistant Overlay Hard‐Facing Spray Fuse (HFSF) Nonessential Variables
(CRO) (QW-214)
(QW-216)
for HFO, CRO, and HFSF
.1
ϕ String/weave (HFO
and CRO only)
.3
ϕ Orifice/cup or
nozzle size
.5
ϕ Method of cleaning
.7
ϕ Oscillation
.25
ϕ Manual or
automatic
.26
±
.38
ϕ Multiple to single layer
ϕ Multiple to single layer
.41
ϕ > 15% Travel speed
ϕ > 15% Travel speed
ϕ Multiple to single layer
.43
ϕ > 10% Travel speed range
.44
ϕ > 15% Torch to workplace
.45
ϕ Surface preparation
.46
ϕ Spray torch
.47
ϕ > 10% Fusing temp. or
method
.48
ϕ Transfer mode
ϕ Transfer mode
.49
ϕ Torch orifice diameter
ϕ Torch orifice diameter
.52
ϕ Filler metal del.
ϕ Filler metal del.
ϕ Transfer mode
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
49
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
Peening
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-258
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electroslag Welding (ESW)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
Brief of Variables
.1
ϕ Groove design
.10
ϕ Root spacing
.11
±
Retainers
X
.1
ϕ P‐Number
X
.4
ϕ Group Number
QW-407
PWHT
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
QW-410
Technique
X
X
X
.4
ϕ F‐Number
X
.5
ϕ A‐Number
X
.6
ϕ Diameter
.12
ϕ Classification
.17
ϕ Flux type or comp.
X
.18
ϕ Wire to plate
X
.19
ϕ Consum. guide
X
.33
ϕ Classification
.1
ϕ PWHT
.2
ϕ PWHT (T & T range)
.4
X
X
X
X
X
T Limits
.5
ϕ ± 15% I & E range
X
X
.5
ϕ Method cleaning
.7
ϕ Oscillation
X
.10
ϕ Single to multiple electrodes
X
.15
ϕ Electrode spacing
.26
±
.64
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
X
t Pass > 1/2 in. (13 mm)
.9
QW-404
Filler Metals
Essential
X
X
Peening
X
Use of thermal processes
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
50
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-258.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electroslag Welding (ESW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Paragraph
Hard‐Facing Overlay (HFO) (QW-216)
Finished t
Corrosion‐Resistant Overlay (CRO)
(QW-214)
QW-402
Joints
.16
<
<
QW-403
Base Metals
.20
ϕ P‐Number
ϕ P‐Number
.23
ϕ T Qualified
ϕ T Qualified
Finished t
ϕ Nominal size of electrode
.6
QW-404
Filler Metals
.12
ϕ Classification
.24
±
or ϕ > 10% in supplemental filler ±
metal
QW-406
Preheat
.4
QW-407
PWHT
.6
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
.4
QW-410
Technique
or ϕ > 10% in supplemental filler
metal
ϕ A‐Number
.37
.39
Nonessential Variables for HFO
and CRO
ϕ Nominal flux comp.
ϕ Nominal flux comp.
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
ϕ PWHT
ϕ PWHT
.9
ϕ Current or polarity
ϕ Current or polarity
1st layer — Heat input > 10%
.26
1st layer — Heat input > 10%
.5
ϕ Method of cleaning
.7
ϕ Oscillation (CRO only)
.38
ϕ Multiple to single layer
.40
−
.50
ϕ No. of electrodes
Supplemental device
ϕ Multiple to single layer
−
Supplemental device
ϕ No. of electrodes
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
51
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-259
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electrogas Welding (EGW)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
Brief of Variables
.1
ϕ Groove design
.10
ϕ Root spacing
.11
±
Retainers
X
.1
ϕ P‐Number
X
.5
ϕ Group Number
.6
T Limits
.8
ϕ T Qualified
QW-406
Preheat
QW-407
PWHT
X
X
X
X
X
.4
ϕ F‐Number
X
.5
ϕ A‐Number
X
.6
ϕ Diameter
.12
ϕ Classification
.23
ϕ Filler metal product form
.33
ϕ Classification
.1
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
X
t Pass > 1/2 in. (13 mm)
.9
QW-404
Filler Metals
Essential
X
X
X
X
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
.1
ϕ PWHT
.2
ϕ PWHT (T & T range)
.4
X
X
X
T Limits
X
QW-408
Gas
.2
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
.3
ϕ Flow rate
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
.1
>
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
.8
ϕ I & E range
X
QW-410
Technique
X
X
Heat input
X
X
X
.5
ϕ Method cleaning
X
.7
ϕ Oscillation
X
.8
ϕ Tube‐work distance
.9
ϕ Multiple to single pass/side
.10
ϕ Single to multiple electrodes
.15
ϕ Electrode spacing
.26
±
.64
X
X
X
X
X
Peening
X
Use of thermal processes
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
← Forehand
→ Backhand
GENERAL NOTE: Automated vertical gas metal‐arc welding for vertical position only.
52
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-260
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Electron Beam Welding (EBW)
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
.1
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
QW-404
Filler Metals
Essential
ϕ Groove design
X
X
.2
− Backing
.6
>
.1
ϕ P‐Number
.3
ϕ Penetration
X
.15
ϕ P‐Number
X
X
Fit‐up gap
X
.1
ϕ Cross section or speed
.2
< t or ϕ comp.
X
.8
± or ϕ Chem. comp.
X
.14
± Filler
X
.20
ϕ Method of addition
X
.21
ϕ Analysis
X
.33
ϕ Classification
X
.1
QW-407
PWHT
.1
ϕ PWHT
X
QW-408
Gas
.6
ϕ Environment
X
QW-410
Technique
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
X
.6
ϕ I, E, speed, distance, osc.
X
.7
ϕ Pulsing frequency
X
.5
ϕ Method cleansing
.7
ϕ Oscillation
X
.14
ϕ Angle of beam axis
X
.17
ϕ Type equip.
X
.18
> Pressure of vacuum
X
.19
ϕ Filament type, size, etc.
X
.20
+
X
X
Wash pass
.21
1 vs. 2 side welding
X
.64
Use of thermal processes
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
Nonessential
X
QW-406
Preheat
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
Supplementary
Essential
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
53
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
Table QW-261
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Stud Welding
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
Essential
ϕ Stud shape size
X
.9
− Flux or ferrule
X
.17
ϕ Base metal or stud metal P‐No.
X
QW-405
Positions
.1
+
X
QW-406
Preheat
.1
QW-407
PWHT
.1
ϕ PWHT
X
QW-408
Gas
.2
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
X
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
X
.9
ϕ Arc timing
X
.10
ϕ Amperage
X
.11
ϕ Power source
X
.22
ϕ Gun model or lift
X
QW-402
Joints
.8
QW-403
Base Metal
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
QW-410
Technique
.64
Position
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
Supplementary
Essential
X
Use of thermal processes
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
54
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
Nonessential
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-262
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Inertia and Continuous Drive Friction Welding
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
.12
QW-402
Joints
Essential
ϕ ± 10 deg
X
ϕ Cross section > 10%
X
ϕ O.D. > ± 10%
X
ϕ Solid‐to‐tube
X
QW-403
Base Metals
.19
ϕ Base metal
X
QW-406
Preheat
.1
ϕ Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
X
QW-407
PWHT
.1
ϕ PWHT
X
QW-408
Gas
.6
ϕ Environment
X
QW-410
Technique
.27
ϕ Spp. > ± 10%
X
.28
ϕ Load > ± 10%
X
.29
ϕ Energy > ± 10%
X
.30
ϕ Upset > ± 10%
X
.64
Use of thermal processes
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
55
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-263
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Resistance Welding
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
Essential
.13
ϕ Spot, projection, seam
X
.14
ϕ Overlap, spacing
X
.15
ϕ Projection, shape, size
X
.1
ϕ P‐No.
X
.21
±
X
.22
± T
X
QW-407
PWHT
.1
ϕ PWHT
X
QW-408
Gas
.23
−
X
.13
ϕ RWMA class
X
.14
± ϕ Slope
X
.15
ϕ Pressure, current, time
X
.17
ϕ Power supply
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
QW-409
Electrical
QW-410
Technique
Coating, plating
Gases
X
.18
Tip cleaning
.31
ϕ Cleaning method
X
.32
ϕ Pressure, time
X
.33
ϕ Equipment
X
.34
ϕ Cooling medium
.35
ϕ Throat
.64
Nonessential
X
X
X
Use of thermal processes
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
56
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-264
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Laser Beam Welding (LBW)
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
QW-403
Base Metals
QW-404
Filler Metals
Brief of Variables
Essential
.2
±
Backing
X
.6
>
Fit‐up gap
X
.18
ϕ Lap joint config.
X
.25
ϕ Lap to groove
X
.26
< Bevel angle > 5 deg
X
.1
ϕ P‐Number
X
.3
ϕ Penetration
X
.1
ϕ Cross section or speed
X
.2
< t or ϕ comp.
X
.4
ϕ F-No.
X
.5
ϕ A-No.
X
.8
±
or ϕ chem. comp.
X
.14
±
Filler metal
X
.20
ϕ Method of addition
X
QW-406
Preheat
.1
QW-407
PWHT
.1
ϕ PWHT
X
.2
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
X
.6
ϕ Environment
X
.11
±
X
QW-408
Gas
.12
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
QW-410
Technique
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
X
Gases
Decrease > 10% flow rate
X
.19
ϕ Pulse
X
.20
ϕ Mode, energy
X
.21
Decrease > 10% power
X
.5
ϕ Method cleaning
.7
ϕ Oscillation
X
.14
ϕ Angle of beam axis
X
.20
+ Wash pass
X
X
.21
1 vs. 2 side welding
X
.37
ϕ Single to multiple pass
X
.64
.66
Supplementary
Essential
Nonessential
Use of thermal processes
X
ϕ Travel, Beam factors
X
.67
ϕ Optical technique
X
.68
ϕ Type of equipment
X
.77
ϕ Wavelength
X
.80
ϕ Spot size
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
57
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
Table QW-264.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Laser Beam Welding (LBW)
Special Process Variables
Essential Variables
Paragraph
Hard‐Facing Overlay (HFO) (QW-216)
Corrosion‐Resistant Overlay (CRO)
(QW-214)
QW-402
Joints
.16
<
Finished t
< Finished t
QW-403
Base Metals
.20
ϕ P‐Number
ϕ P‐Number
QW-404
Filler Metals
.12
ϕ Classification
ϕ Classification
.27
ϕ Alloy elements
ϕ Alloy elements
.44
ϕ Particle type
ϕ Particle type
.47
ϕ Filler/powder metal size
ϕ Filler/powder metal size
.48
ϕ Powder metal density
ϕ Powder metal density
.49
ϕ Filler metal powder feed rate
ϕ Filler metal powder feed rate
QW-405
Positions
.1
+
+
QW-406
Preheat
.4
QW-407
PWHT
.6
QW-408
Gas
.2
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
.6
ϕ Environment
ϕ Environment
.11
±
±
QW-410
Technique
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
Position
Dec. > 100°F (55°C) preheat
> Interpass
ϕ PWHT
ϕ PWHT
.9
.12
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
Position
Gases
Decrease > 10% flow rate
Gases
Decrease > 10% flow rate
.19
ϕ Pulse
ϕ Pulse
.20
ϕ Mode, energy
ϕ Mode, energy
.21
Nonessential Variables for HFO
and CRO
Decrease > 10% power
Decrease > 10% power
ϕ Method of cleaning
.5
.7
ϕ Oscillation
ϕ Oscillation
.14
ϕ Angle of beam axis
ϕ Angle of beam axis
.17
ϕ Type/model of equipment
ϕ Type/model of equipment
.38
ϕ Multiple to single layer
ϕ Multiple to single layer
.45
ϕ Method of surface prep.
ϕ Method of surface prep.
.52
ϕ Filler metal delivery
ϕ Filler metal delivery
.53
ϕ Overlap, spacing
ϕ Overlap, spacing
.77
ϕ Wavelength
ϕ Wavelength
.80
ϕ Spot size
ϕ Spot size
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
58
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-265
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Flash Welding
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
Essential
.19
ϕ Diameter or thickness
X
.20
ϕ Joint configuration
X
.21
ϕ Method or equip. used to minimize ID flash
X
.22
ϕ End preparation method
X
QW-403
Base Metals
.24
ϕ Spec., type, or grade
X
QW-406
Preheat
.7
ϕ > 10% Amperage or number of preheat cycles,
or method, or > 25°F temperature
X
QW-407
PWHT
.8
ϕ PWHT, PWHT cycles, or separate PWHT time or
temperature
X
QW-408
Gas
.22
ϕ Shielding gas composition, pressure, or purge
time
X
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
.27
ϕ > 10% Flashing time
X
.28
ϕ > 10% Upset current time
X
.17
ϕ Type/model of equipment
X
.54
ϕ > 10% Upset length or force
X
.55
ϕ > 10% Distance between clamping dies or
preparation of clamping area
X
.56
ϕ Clamping force
X
.57
ϕ 10% Forward or reverse speed
X
QW-402
Joints
QW-410
Technique
.64
Use of thermal processes
Supplementary
Essential
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
59
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
Nonessential
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-266
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Diffusion Welding (DFW)
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
Essential
QW-403
Base Metals
.28
.29
ϕ Surface finish
X
QW-404
Filler Metal
.53
± Filler metal and composition
X
QW-407
PWHT
.10
± PWHT temperature, time, cooling rate
X
QW-408
Gas
.25
ϕ Furnace Atmosphere
X
.70
ϕ Preassembly Cleaning
X
.71
< Block Compression
X
.72
< Welding time or temperature
X
QW-410
Technique
Base metal grade
Supplementary
Essential
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
60
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
Nonessential
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
Table QW-267
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications — Friction Stir Welding (FSW)
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
Essential
.27
ϕ Fixed backing
X
.28
ϕ Joint design
X
.29
ϕ Joint spacing > 10%
X
QW-403
Base Metals
.19
ϕ Type/grade
X
.30
ϕ T qualified > 20%
X
QW-407
PWHT
.1
ϕ PWHT
X
QW-408
Gas
.26
ϕ Shielding gas
X
QW-410
Technique
.21
QW-402
Joints
1-side vs. 2-side welding
Supplementary
Essential
X
.73
ϕ Joint restraint
X
.74
ϕ Control method
X
.75
ϕ Tool design
X
.76
ϕ Tool operation
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
61
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
Nonessential
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
Table QW-268
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Hybrid Laser-GMAW
GMAW
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
Supplementary
Essential Essential
QW-402
Joints
.30
ϕ Weld joint design
X
QW-403
Base
Materials
.1
ϕ P-No.
X
.5
ϕ Group number
.31
ϕ T
X
QW-404
Filler Metals
.4
ϕ F-Number
X
.5
ϕ A-Number
X
.6
ϕ Diameter
X
.33
ϕ Classification
X
.54
> t
X
.1
+ Position
X
.3
ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
X
QW-405
Positions
QW-406
Preheat
.1
Decrease > 100°F
.2
ϕ Preheat maintenance
.3
Increase > 100°F (IP)
QW-407
PWHT
.1
ϕ PWHT
.2
ϕ PWHT (T & T range)
QW-408
Gas
.2
ϕ Single, mixture, or %
.3
ϕ Flow rate
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
LBW
Supplementary
Nonessential Essential Essential
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
.9
– Backing or ϕ composition
X
X
.10
ϕ Shielding or trailing
X
X
.12
ϕ > 5% gases
.1
> Heat input
.2
ϕ Transfer mode
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
.8
ϕ I & E range
.19
ϕ Pulse
X
.20
ϕ Mode, energy
X
.21
ϕ Power, speed, d/fl, distance
X
X
X
X
X
X
62
Nonessential
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-268
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Hybrid Laser-GMAW (Cont'd)
GMAW
Paragraph
QW-410
Technique
Brief of Variables
Supplementary
Essential Essential
LBW
Supplementary
Nonessential Essential Essential
.3
ϕ Orifice, cup, or nozzle size
X
.5
ϕ Method of cleaning
X
.6
ϕ Method of back gouging
X
.7
ϕ Oscillation
.8
ϕ Tube-to-work distance
.10
ϕ Single or multiple electrodes
.14
ϕ Angle or beam axis
.15
ϕ Electrode spacing
.21
1-side vs. 2-side welding
.26
± Peening
.37
ϕ Single to multiple pass
.64
.66
Use of thermal processes
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ϕ Travel, beam factors
X
X
.67
ϕ Optical technique
.68
ϕ Type/model of equipment
X
.77
ϕ Wavelength
X
.78
ϕ Process sequence
X
X
.79
ϕ Process separation
X
X
.80
ϕ Spot size
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
63
← Forehand
→ Backhand
Nonessential
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
Table QW-269
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Hybrid Plasma-GMAW
PAW
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
Brief of Variables
.1
.5
.10
.11
QW-403
Base Metals
QW-404
Filler Metals
Groove design
X
+ Backing
Root spacing
± Retainers
.5
Group number
X
.6
T limits
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
.8
T qualified
X
X
T pass > 1/2 in. (13 mm)
X
X
.11
P-No. qualified
.12
P-Number/melt-in
.3
Size
.4
F-Number
X
.5
A-Number
X
.6
Diameter
± Filler metal
.22
± Consum. insert
.23
.24
.27
Filler metal form
Alloy elements
.30
t
Classification
QW-405
Positions
.1
+ Position
.2
Position
.3
Vertical welding
QW-406
Preheat
.1
Decrease > 100°F (55°C)
.2
Preheat maint.
.3
Increase > 100°F (55°C)
QW-407
PWHT
.1
PWHT
.2
PWHT (T & T range)
QW-408
Gas
.1
T limits
Single, mixture, or %
.3
Flow rate
.4
Composition
.5
+ Or backing flow
.9
– Backing or comp.
.21
.1
X
X
X
Shielding or trailing
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Flow rate
> Heat input
X
X
+ Trail or comp.
.2
.10
X
± Supplemental
.33
.4
X
X
Classification
.14
Nonessential
X
.9
.12
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
SuppleEssential mentary
GMAW
Supplementary
Nonessential Essential Essential
X
X
X
.4
Current or polarity
X
.8
I&E
X
X
.12
Tungsten electrode
X
64
X
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-269
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Hybrid Plasma-GMAW (Cont'd)
PAW
Paragraph
QW-410
Technique
Brief of Variables
SuppleEssential mentary
GMAW
Supplementary
Nonessential Essential Essential
Stinger/weave
X
X
.3
Orifice, cup, or nozzle size
X
X
.5
Method of cleaning
X
X
.6
Method of backgouge
X
X
.7
Oscillation
X
X
.8
Tube-to-work distance
.9
Single to multiple pass/side
.10
Single to multiple electrodes
.11
Closed to out chamber
.12
Melt-in to keyhole
.15
Electrode spacing
X
.26
Peening
X
.64
Use of thermal processes
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
.77
ϕ Orientation or #
X
X
.78
ϕ Process spacing
X
X
.79
ϕ Height differential
X
X
.80
ϕ Angle of plasma
X
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
Nonessential
.1
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
65
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
Table QW-269.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Hybrid Plasma-GMAW
Special Process Variables
Corrosion Resistant
Overlay (CRO)
Hardfacing
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
Essential
Nonessential
Essential
QW-402
Joints
.16
< Finished t
X
X
QW-403
Base Metals
.20
P Number
X
X
.23
T qualified
X
QW-404
Filler Metals
.6
Nominal size of electrode
.12
Classification
.14
X
X
X
X
X
.23
Product form
X
X
.24
Supplemental filler
X
X
.27
Alloy elements
X
.37
A Number
.41
Powder feed rate
X
X
.43
Particle size
X
X
.44
Powder type
X
X
X
X
X
X
QW-405
Positions
.4
QW-406
Preheat
.4
Decrease > 100°F (55°C) in preheat/
increase of interpass
X
QW-407
PWHT
.6
Change in PWHT
X
.9
Change in PWHT
QW-408
Gas
.2
Single, mixture, or %
.3
.16
QW-409
Electrical
Characteristics
X
X
± Filler metal
+ Position
X
X
Flow rate
X
X
> 5% arc or metal feed gas
X
X
Type or mixture
X
.18
> 10% mix comp.
X
X
X
.24
> 10% change in filler wire watts
X
X
.25
> 10% I & E
X
X
X
X
.26
Current or polarity
X
X
.17
.4
Nonessential
1st layer heat input > 10%
66
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-269.1
Welding Variables Procedure Specifications (WPS) — Hybrid Plasma-GMAW (Cont'd)
Special Process Variables
Corrosion Resistant
Overlay (CRO)
Hardfacing
Paragraph
QW-410
Technique
Brief of Variables
Essential
Nonessential
Essential
Nonessential
.1
Stinger/weave
X
X
.3
Orifice/cup or nozzle size
X
X
.5
Method of cleaning
X
X
.7
Oscillation
X
X
.8
Contact tip to work dist.
.15
Electrode spacing
.26
Peening
.38
Multiple or single layer
.41
X
X
X
X
X
> 15% travel speed
X
X
X
X
X
.48
Transfer mode
X
X
.49
Torch orifice diameter
X
X
.50
No. of electrodes
X
X
.52
Method of filler delivery
X
X
X
.77
ϕ Orientation or #
X
.78
ϕ Process spacing
X
X
.79
ϕ Height differential
X
X
.80
ϕ Angle of plasma
X
X
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
67
← Forehand
→ Backhand
ϕ Change
2013 SECTION IX
QW-283
WELDS WITH BUTTERING
QW-284
QW-283.1 Scope. This paragraph only applies when
the essential variables for the buttering process are different than the essential variables for the process used for
subsequent completion of the joint. Common examples are
RESISTANCE WELDING MACHINE
QUALIFICATION
Each resistance welding machine shall be tested to
determine its ability to make welds consistently and
reproducibly. A machine shall be requalified whenever it
is rebuilt, moved to a new location requiring a change in
power supply, when the power supply is changed, or
any other significant change is made to the equipment.
Spot and projection welding machine qualification testing
shall consist of making a set of 100 consecutive welds.
Every fifth of these welds shall be subjected to mechanical
shear tests. Five welds, which shall include one of the first
five and one of the last five of the set shall be metallographically examined. Seam welding machine qualification
testing shall be the same as procedure qualification testing
required per QW-286. Maintenance or adjustment of the
welding machine shall not be permitted during welding
of a set of test welds. Qualification testing on any P‐No.
21 through P‐No. 26 aluminum alloy shall qualify the
machine for all materials. Qualification on P‐No. 1 through
P‐No. 15F iron‐base alloys and any P‐No. 41 through
P‐No. 49 nickel‐base alloys shall qualify the machine for
all P‐No. 1 through P‐No. 15F and P‐No. 41 through
P‐No. 49 metals. Qualification testing of the machine using
base metals assigned to P‐No. 51 through P‐No. 53,
P‐No. 61, or P‐No. 62 qualifies the welding machine to
weld all base metals assigned to P‐No. 51 through
P‐No. 53, P‐No. 61, and P‐No. 62. Testing and acceptance
criteria shall be in accordance with QW-196.
(a) the buttered member is heat treated and the completed weld is not heat treated after welding
(b) the filler metal used for buttering has a different
F‐Number from that used for the subsequent completion
of the weld
QW-283.2 Tests Required. The procedure shall be
qualified by buttering the test coupon (including heat
treating of the buttered member when this will be done
in production welding) and then making the subsequent
weld joining the members. The variables for the buttering
and for the subsequent weld shall be in accordance with
QW-250, except that QW-409.1 shall be an essential
variable for the welding process(es) used to complete
the weld when the minimum buttering thickness is less
than 3/16 in. (5 mm). Mechanical testing of the completed
weldment shall be in accordance with QW-202.2(a).
If the buttering is done with filler metal of the same
composition as the filler metal used to complete the weld,
one weld test coupon may be used to qualify the dissimilar
metal joint by welding the first member directly to the second member in accordance with Section IX.
QW-283.3 Buttering Thickness. The thickness of buttering which shall remain on the production buttered
member after all machining and grinding is completed
and before subsequent completion of the joint shall be
required by the WPS. When this thickness is less than
3
/16 in. (5 mm), the thickness of buttering on the test coupon shall be measured before the buttered member is
welded to the second member. This thickness shall
become the minimum qualified thickness of buttering.
QW-285
RESISTANCE SPOT AND PROJECTION
WELD PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
Procedure qualification testing for spot or projection
welds shall be done following a Welding Procedure Specification, and it shall consist of making a set of ten consecutive welds. Five of these welds shall be subjected to
mechanical shear tests and five to metallographic examination. Examination, testing, and acceptance criteria shall
be in accordance with QW-196.
QW-283.4 Qualification Alternative. When an essential variable is changed in the portion of the weld to be
made after buttering or when a different organization is
performing the portion of the weld to be made after buttering, a new qualification shall be performed in accordance with one of the following methods:
QW-286
RESISTANCE SEAM WELD PROCEDURE
QUALIFICATION
QW-286.1 Test coupons described below shall consist
of the same number of members, orientation, material
grades/types, and thicknesses to be used in production
welding.
(a) Qualify in a cc ordance with QW-283.2 and
QW-283.3. When the original qualification buttering thickness is less than 3/16 in. (5 mm), the buttering thickness
shall not be greater, nor the heat input higher than was
used on the original qualification.
QW-286.2
A test coupon as shown in
Figure QW-462.7.1 shall be prepared by drilling a hole
in the center of one of the outer coupon members. In the
case of a test coupon containing more than two members,
a hole shall be drilled in each member except for one of the
outer members. A pipe nipple shall be welded or brazed to
the outer member at the hole. The test coupon shall then
be welded around the edges, sealing the space between
the members as shown in Figure QW-462.7.1. The coupon
(b) When the original qualification buttering thickness
is 3/16 in. (5 mm) or greater, qualify the portion of the weld
to be made after buttering using any P‐Number material
that nominally matches the chemical analysis of the buttering weld metal for the buttered base metal of the test
coupon.
68
2013 SECTION IX
(i) A change in the P‐No. of the tube or tubesheet material (if the tubesheet material is part of the weld), a
change in the P‐No. or A‐No. of the tubesheet cladding material (if the cladding material is part of the weld), or a
change in a material not assigned a P‐No. or A‐No.
(j) If filler metal is added, a change in the A‐No. of the
weld deposit or a change in the nominal composition of
the weld deposit if there is no A‐No.
(k) A decrease of more than 100°F (55°C) in the preheat temperature or an increase of more than 100°F
(55°C) in the interpass temperature from that qualified.
(l) The addition or deletion of PWHT.
(m) A change of more than 10% in the current level
from that qualified.
(n) A change in the polarity or current type (AC or DC)
from that qualified.
(o) A change between manual, semiautomatic, machine,
or automatic methods of application.
(p) The addition of tube expansion prior to welding.
(q) A change in the method of cleaning prior to welding.
shall be pressurized hydrostatically until failure occurs.
The procedure qualification is acceptable if failure occurs
in the base metal.
QW-286.3 A test coupon at least 10 in. (250 mm) long
shall be made per Figure QW-462.7.2. This test coupon
shall be cut transverse to the length of the weld into ten
pieces, each approximately 1 in. (25 mm) long. Four transverse weld specimens and four longitudinal weld cross
section specimens shall be cut and prepared as detailed
in Figure QW-462.7.2. The specimens shall be metallographically examined for compliance with the requirements
of QW-196.
QW-287
VARIATION OF SETTINGS FOR ELECTRIC
RESISTANCE WELDING
Settings for preheating cycles, electrode pressure, welding current, welding time cycle, or postheating cycles may
be varied by ±5% from the values recorded on the PQR, or
by ±10% when only one of the above settings is changed.
QW-288
TUBE‐TO‐TUBESHEET QUALIFICATION
ESSENTIAL VARIABLES
QW-288.2 Shielded Metal Arc Welding.
(a) An increase in the electrode diameter.
(b) A change in the F‐No. of the electrode.
The following shall be considered essential variables for
tube‐to‐tubesheet welding qualifications in accordance
with QW-193.
QW-288.3 Gas Tungsten Arc, Plasma Arc, and Gas
Metal Arc Welding.
(a) A change in the size or shape of preplaced metal
inserts.
(b) A change from one shielding gas to another shielding gas or to a mixture of shielding gases.
(c) When using a mixed shielding gas, a change
of ±25% or 5 ft3/hr (2.5 L/min), whichever is the larger,
in the rate of flow of the minor gas constituent.
(d) For GTAW or PAW, the addition or deletion of filler
metal.
(e) For GTAW or PAW, a change in the nominal diameter of the filler metal or electrode.
(f) The elimination of an auxiliary gas shield system if
used during qualification.
(g) A change in the F‐No. of the electrode or filler metal.
QW-288.1 All Processes.
(a) A change in the welding process used.
(b) A change in the weld joint configuration (beyond
the manufacturing tolerance) such as the addition or deletion of preplaced filler metal, an increase in the depth of
the groove, a decrease in the groove angle, or a change
in the groove type.
(c) For tubes of specified wall thickness of 0.100 in.
(2.5 mm) or less, an increase or decrease of 10% of the
specified wall thickness. For tubes of specified wall thickness greater than 0.100 in. (2.5 mm), only one qualification test is required.
(d) For tubes of specified diameter of 2 in. (50 mm) or
less and a specified wall thickness of 0.100 in. (2.5 mm) or
less, a decrease greater than 10% of the specified tube diameter. For tubes of specified diameter greater than 2 in.
(50 mm), the minimum diameter qualified is 2 in.
(50 mm). For tubes of specified wall thickness greater
than 0.100 in. (2.5 mm), diameter is not an essential
variable.
(e) A decrease of 10% or more in the specified width of
the ligament between tube holes when the specified width
of the ligament is less than the greater of 3/8 in. (10 mm) or
3 times the specified tube wall thickness.
(f) A change from multiple passes to a single pass or
vice versa.
(g) A change in the welding position of the tube‐to‐
tubesheet joint from that qualified (see QW-461.1).
(h) A change in the progression of a vertical position
weld from that qualified.
QW-288.4 Explosion Welding.
(a) A 10% change in the specified tube wall thickness
or diameter for all diameters and wall thicknesses.
(b) A change in the method of pressure application.
(c) A change in the type of explosive or a change in the
energy content of ±10%.
(d) A change of ±10% in the distance between the
charge and the tubesheet face.
(e) A change of ±10% in the specified clearance between the tube and the tubesheet.
NOTE: QW-288.1 (f), (h), (j), (k), (m), (n), and (o) do not apply for this
process.
69
2013 SECTION IX
QW-290
TEMPER BEAD WELDING
QW-290.2 Welding Process Restrictions. Temper
bead welding is limited to SMAW, GTAW, SAW, GMAW (including FCAW), and PAW. Manual and semiautomatic
GTAW and PAW are prohibited, except for the root pass
of groove welds made from one side and as described
for making repairs to temper bead welds in QW-290.6.
The essential variables listed in Table QW-290.4 apply in
addition to the variables applicable for the process(es)
qualified as given in QW-250. When impact testing is the
basis for acceptance, the supplementary essential variables of QW-250 applicable to the process being qualified
shall apply. When these variables conflict with or provide
more stringent limitations than those of QW-250, these
variables shall govern.
When the applicable Code Section specifies the use of
this paragraph for temper bead welding, QW-290.1
through QW-290.6 shall apply.
QW-290.1 Basic Qualification and Upgrading Existing WPSs. All WPSs for temper bead welding of groove
and fillet weld shall be qualified for groove welding in accordance with the rules in QW-202 for qualification by
groove welding or the rules in QW-283 for welds with buttering. WPSs for overlay shall be qualified in accordance
with QW-214 or QW-216. Once these requirements and
any additional qualification requirements of the applicable
construction code have been satisfied, then it is necessary
only to prepare an additional test coupon using the same
procedure with the same essential and, if applicable, the
supplementary essential variables with the coupon long
enough to obtain the required temper bead test specimens. Qualification for groove welding, welding with buttering or cladding, and temper bead welding may also be
done in a single test coupon.
When a procedure has been previously qualified to satisfy all requirements including temper bead welding,
but one or more temper bead welding variables is changed, then it is necessary only to prepare an additional test
coupon using the same procedure with the same essential
and, if applicable, the supplementary essential variables
and the new temper bead welding essential variable(s)
with the coupon long enough to obtain the required test
specimens.
QW-290.3 Variables for Temper Bead Welding Qualifications. Table QW-290.4 lists the essential and nonessential variables that apply when temper bead
qualification is required. The column “Hardness Test Essential Variables” shall apply, except that when the applicable Construction Code or Design Specification specifies
acceptance based on impact testing, the column “Impact
Test Essential Variables” shall apply. The column “Nonessential Variables” applies in all cases.
70
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-290.4
Welding Variables for Temper Bead Procedure Qualification
Paragraph
QW-402
QW-403
QW-404
QW-406
Hardness Test
Essential Variables
Brief of Variables
.23
+
Fluid backing
.24
+
Fluid backing
.25
ϕ P‐No. or Gr. No.
.26
>
.27
> T
Storage
.52
Diffusible hydrogen
.8
>
.9
<
Nonessential
Variables
X
X
X
Carbon equivalent
.51
Impact Test Essential
Variables
X
X
X
X
Interpass temperature
X
Preheat temperature
X
.10
Preheat soak time
X
.11
Postweld bakeout
X
QW-408
.24
Gas moisture
X
QW-409
.29
ϕ Heat input ratio
X
.10
ϕ Single to multiple electrode
X
X
.58
−
X
X
.59
ϕ Type of welding
X
X
.60
+
X
X
X
X
QW-410
Surface temper beads
Thermal preparation
.61
Surface bead placement
.62
Surface bead removal method
.63
.65
X
Bead overlap
±
Grinding
Legend:
+ Addition
− Deletion
> Increase/greater than
< Decrease/less than
X
ϕ Change
71
X
X
X
X
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
QW-290.5 Test Coupon Preparation and Testing.
(a) The test coupon may be any geometry that is suitable for removal of the required specimens. It shall consist
of a groove weld, a cavity in a plate, overlay, or other suitable geometry. The distance from each edge of the weld
preparation to the edge of the test coupon shall be at least
3 in. measured transverse to the direction of welding. The
depth of preparation shall be such that at least two layers
of weld metal are deposited, one of which may be the surface temper bead layer and deep enough to remove the required test specimens.
(b) The test coupon shall be bend‐tested in accordance
with QW-451.
(c) When hardness testing is specified by a Construction Code or Design Specification or no specific testing is
required, measurements shall be taken across the weld
metal, heat‐affected zone, and base metal using the Vickers
method with a 10-kg load. Increments between measurements shall be as specified in ASTM E384. As an alternative to the Vickers method, Instrumented Indentation
Testing in accordance with ASTM E2546 may be used with
test forces in the macro range of 2.2 lbf to 265 lbf (1 kgf
to 120 kgf) and increments between measurements as determined in accordance with ASTM E2546.
(1) Measurements shall be taken along a line at approximately mid-plane of the thickness of the test coupon
weld metal. Along this line, there shall be
(-a) a minimum of two measurements in the weld
metal fill layers.
(-b) at least one measurement on each: the weld
beads against base metal, first-layer tempering beads,
and the second-layer tempering beads.
(-c) a minimum of three measurements in the
heat-affected zone. These measurements may be taken
in a line approximately parallel to the HAZ when spacing
between impressions does not allow for three measurements to be taken in a single line transverse to the HAZ.
(-d) a minimum of two measurements in the unaffected base metal.
(2) Additional measurements shall be taken along a
line approximately 0.04 in. (1 mm) below the original base
metal surface. Along this line, there shall be
(-a) a minimum of two measurements in the weld
metal fill layers
(-b) at least one measurement on each: the weld
beads against base metal, first-layer tempering beads,
and the second-layer tempering beads
(-c) one measurement located immediately below
the toe of the weld bead and at least one measurement
on each side of that impression
(3) When the coupon is a full-penetration groove
weld made from one side, additional measurements shall
be taken along a line approximately 0.04 in. (1 mm) above
the root side surface. Along this line, there shall be a minimum of two measurements in the weld metal, two in the
heat-affected zone, and two in the unaffected base metal.
Full‐penetration groove weld test coupons qualify full
and partial penetration groove welds, fillet welds, and
weld build‐up. Partial penetration groove weld test coupons only qualify partial penetration groove welds, fillet
welds, and build‐up. Overlay test coupons only qualify
overlay welds.
Hardness readings shall not exceed the hardness limits
specified by the Construction Code or Design Specification.
Where hardness is not specified, the data shall be
reported.
(d) When specified by the applicable Construction Code
or Design Specification, the test coupon shall be Charpy
V‐notch impact tested. The extent of testing (i.e., weld metal, HAZ, unaffected base metal), the testing temperature,
and the acceptance criteria shall be as provided in the applicable Construction Code or Design Specification. Impact
test specimens shall be removed from the coupon in the
weld metal and HAZ as near as practical to a depth of one‐
half the thickness of the weld metal for each process. For
HAZ specimens, the specimen shall be oriented so as to
include as much of the HAZ as possible at the notch. The
impact specimens and testing shall be in accordance with
SA-370 using the largest size specimen that can be
removed from the test coupon with the notch cut approximately normal to the test coupon surface. More than one
set of impact test specimens shall be removed and tested
when weld metal and heat‐affected zone material from
each process or set of variables cannot be included in a
single set of test specimens.
QW-290.6 In‐Process Repair Welding.
(a) In‐process repairs to welds made using temper
bead welding are permitted. In‐process repairs are defined as repairs in which a flaw is mechanically removed
and a repair weld is made before welding of a joint is presented for final visual inspection. Examples of such repairs
are areas of removal of porosity, incomplete fusion, etc.,
where sufficient metal has been mechanically removed
that localized addition of weld metal is necessary in order
to make the surface geometry suitable for continuation of
normal welding.
(b) Surfaces to be repaired shall be prepared by
mechanical removal of flaws and preparation of the surface to a suitable geometry.
(c) For processes other than manual and semiautomatic GTAW and PAW, repairs shall be made using the
parameters given in the WPS for production temper bead
welding. The approximate location of beads to be deposited relative to the original base metal surface shall be
identified, and the applicable parameters shall be used
for the layers to be deposited as specified by the WPS.
(d) When it is necessary to make repairs using manual
or semiautomatic GTAW or PAW, a WPS shall be prepared
based on PQRs developed for temper bead welding using
machine or automatic GTAW or PAW, respectively. This
WPS shall describe the size of the beads to be deposited
and the volts, amps, and travel speed to be used for the
72
2013 SECTION IX
shall be 4 in. (100 mm). The heat input used by the welder
shall be measured for each pass, and the size of each weld
bead shall be measured for each pass, and they shall be as
required by the WPS. The following essential variables
shall apply for this demonstration:
(1) a change from one welding procedure to another
(2) a change from manual to semiautomatic welding
and vice versa
(3) a change in position based on a groove weld in
either plate or pipe as shown in Table QW-461.9
(4) continuity of qualification in accordance with
QW-322 shall be based on following the WPS that was
demonstrated in addition to using the process as required
by QW-322
beads against the base metal, for each temper bead layer
and for the fill and surface temper bead layers corresponding to the locations where repair welding is to be
done. These shall be within the equivalent power ratio
for machine or automatic welding for the respective layers
given in QW-409.29.
(e) Welders who will use manual and semiautomatic
GTAW or PAW shall be qualified to use these welding
processes as required by QW-300. In addition, each
welder shall complete a proficiency demonstration. For
this demonstration, each welder shall deposit two or more
weld beads using WPS parameters for each deposit layer.
The test coupon size shall be sufficiently large to make the
required weld bead passes. The minimum pass length
73
2013 SECTION IX
ARTICLE III
WELDING PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATIONS
ð13Þ
QW-300
GENERAL
QW-301.4 Record of Tests. The record of Welder/
Welding Operator Performance Qualification (WPQ) tests
shall include the essential variables ( QW-350 or
QW-360), the type of test and test results, and the
ranges qualified in accordance with QW-452 for each
welder and welding operator. Suggested forms for these
records are given in Forms QW-484A/QW-484B (see
Nonmandatory Appendix B).
QW-300.1 This Article lists the welding processes
separately, with the essential variables that apply to
welder and welding operator performance qualifications.
The welder qualification is limited by the essential variables given for each welding process. These variables are
listed in QW-350, and are defined in Article IV Welding
Data. The welding operator qualification is limited by
the essential variables given in QW-360 for each type of
weld.
A welder or welding operator may be qualified by volumetric NDE of a test coupon or their initial production
welding within the limitations of QW-304 and QW-305
or by bend tests taken from a test coupon.
QW-301
QW-302
TYPE OF TEST REQUIRED
QW-302.1 Mechanical Tests. Except as may be specified for special processes (QW-380), the type and number
of test specimens required for mechanical testing shall be
in accordance with QW-452. Groove weld test specimens
shall be removed in a manner similar to that shown in Figures QW-463.2(a) through QW-463.2(g). Fillet weld test
specimens shall be removed in a manner similar to that
shown in Figures QW-462.4(a) through QW-462.4(d)
and Figure QW-463.2(h).
All mechanical tests shall meet the requirements prescribed in QW-160 or QW-180, as applicable.
TESTS
QW-301.1 Intent of Tests. The performance qualification tests are intended to determine the ability of welders
and welding operators to make sound welds.
QW-301.2 Qualification Tests. Each organization
shall qualify each welder or welding operator for each
welding process to be used in production welding. The
performance qualification test shall be welded in accordance with qualified Welding Procedure Specifications
(WPS), or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications
(SWPS) listed in Mandatory Appendix E, except that when
performance qualification is done in accordance with a
WPS or SWPS that requires a preheat or postweld heat
treatment, these may be omitted. Changes beyond which
requalification is required are given in QW-350 for
welders and in QW-360 for welding operators. Allowable
visual, mechanical, and radiographic examination requirements are described in QW-304 and QW-305. Retests and
renewal of qualification are given in QW-320.
The welder or welding operator who prepares the WPS
qualification test coupons meeting the requirements of
QW-200 is also qualified within the limits of the performance qualifications, listed in QW-304 for welders and
in QW-305 for welding operators. He is qualified only
within the limits for positions specified in QW-303.
QW-302.2 Volumetric NDE. When the welder or
welding operator is qualified by volumetric NDE, as permitted in QW-304 for welders and QW-305 for welding
operators, the minimum length of coupon(s) to be examined shall be 6 in. (150 mm) and shall include the entire
weld circumference for pipe(s), except that for small diameter pipe, multiple coupons of the same diameter pipe
may be required, but the number need not exceed four
consecutively made test coupons. The examination technique and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with
QW-191.
QW-302.3 Test Coupons in Pipe. For test coupons
made on pipe in position 1G or 2G of Figure QW-461.4,
two specimens shall be removed as shown for bend specimens in Figure QW-463.2(d) or Figure QW-463.2(e), omitting the specimens in the upper‐right and lower‐left
quadrants, and replacing the root‐bend specimen in the
upper‐left quadrant of Figure QW-463.2(d) with a face‐
bend specimen. For test coupons made on pipe in position
5G or 6G of Figure QW-461.4, specimens shall be removed
in accordance with Figure QW-463.2(d) or Figure
QW-463.2(e) and all four specimens shall pass the test.
For test coupons made in both positions 2G and 5G on a
single pipe test coupon, specimens shall be removed
in accordance with Figure QW-463.2(f) or Figure
QW-463.2(g).
QW-301.3 Identification of Welders and Welding Operators. Each qualified welder and welding operator shall
be assigned an identifying number, letter, or symbol by the
organization, which shall be used to identify the work of
that welder or welding operator.
74
2013 SECTION IX
QW-304
QW-302.4 Visual Examination. For plate coupons all
surfaces (except areas designated “discard”) shall be examined visually per QW-194 before cutting of bend specimens. Pipe coupons shall be visually examined per
QW-194 over the entire circumference, inside and outside.
QW-303
WELDERS
Except for the special requirements of QW-380, each
welder who welds under the rules of the Code shall have
passed the mechanical and visual examinations prescribed
in QW-302.1 and QW-302.4 respectively. Alternatively,
welders may be qualified by volumetric NDE per
QW-191 When making a groove weld using SMAW, SAW,
GTAW, PAW, and GMAW (except short‐circuiting mode
for radiographic examination) or a combination of these
processes, except for P‐No. 21 through P‐No. 26, P‐No.
51 through P‐No. 53, and P‐No. 61 through P‐No. 62 metals. Welders making groove welds in P‐No. 21 through
P‐No. 26 and P‐No. 51 through P‐No. 53 metals with the
GTAW process may also be qualified by volumetric NDE
per QW-191. The Volumetric NDE shall be in accordance
with QW-302.2.
A welder qualified to weld in accordance with one
qualified WPS is also qualified to weld in accordance with
other qualified WPSs, using the same welding process,
within the limits of the essential variables of QW-350.
LIMITS OF QUALIFIED POSITIONS AND
DIAMETERS (SEE QW-461)
QW-303.1 Groove Welds — General. Welders and
welding operators who pass the required tests for groove
welds in the test positions of Table QW-461.9 shall be qualified for the positions of groove welds and fillet welds
shown in Table QW-461.9. In addition, welders and welding operators who pass the required tests for groove
welds shall also be qualified to make fillet welds in all
thicknesses and pipe diameters of any size within the limits of the welding variables of QW-350 or QW-360, as
applicable.
QW-303.2 Fillet Welds — General. Welders and
welding operators who pass the required tests for fillet
welds in the test positions of Table QW-461.9 shall be qualified for the p os it ions of fillet w elds shown in
Table QW-461.9. Welders and welding operators who pass
the tests for fillet welds shall be qualified to make fillet
welds only in the thicknesses of material, sizes of fillet
welds, and diameters of pipe and tube 27/8 in. (73 mm)
O.D. and over, as shown in Table QW-452.5, within the
applicable essential variables. Welders and welding operators who make fillet welds on pipe or tube less than 27/8 in.
(73 mm) O.D. must pass the pipe fillet weld test per
Table QW-452.4 or the required mechanical tests in
QW-304 and QW-305 as applicable.
QW-304.1 Examination. Welds made in test coupons
for performance qualification may be examined by visual
and mechanical examinations (QW-302.1, QW-302.4) or
by volumetric NDE (QW-302.2) for the process(es) and
mode of arc transfer specified in QW-304. Alternatively,
a minimum 6 in. (150 mm) length of the first production
weld(s) made by a welder using the process(es) and/or
mode of arc transfer specified in QW-304 may be examined by volumetric NDE.
(a) For pipe(s) welded in the 5G, 6G, or special positions, the entire production weld circumference made by
the welder shall be examined.
(b) For small diameter pipe where the required minimum length of weld cannot be obtained from a single
production pipe circumference, additional consecutive circumferences of the same pipe diameter made by the
welder shall be examined, except that the total number
of circumferences need not exceed four.
(c) The examination technique and acceptance criteria
for production welds shall be in accordance with QW-191.
QW-303.3 Special Positions. An organization who
does production welding in a special orientation may
make the tests for performance qualification in this specific orientation. Such qualifications are valid only for the
flat position and for the special positions actually tested,
except that an angular deviation of ±15 deg is permitted
in the inclination of the weld axis and the rotation of the
weld face, as defined in Figures QW-461.1 and QW-461.2.
QW-304.2 Failure to Meet Examination Standards. If
a production weld is selected for welder performance qualification and it does not meet the examination standards,
the welder has failed the test. In this event, the entire
production weld made by this welder shall be examined
and repaired by a qualified welder or welding operator.
Alternatively, retests may be made as permitted in
QW-320.
QW-303.4 Stud‐Weld Positions. Qualification in the
4S position also qualifies for the 1S position. Qualification
in the 4S and 2S positions qualifies for all positions.
QW-303.5 Tube‐to‐Tubesheet Welder and Welding
Operator Qualification. When the applicable Code Section
requires the use of QW-193 for tube‐to‐tubesheet demonstration mockup qualification tests, QW-193.2 shall apply.
If specific qualification test requirements are not specified
by the applicable Code Section, welders and welding operators shall be qualified with one of the following
methods:
(a) groove welds per the requirements of QW-303.1
(b) a demonstration mockup per the requirements of
QW-193.2
QW-305
WELDING OPERATORS
Except for the special requirements of QW-380, each
welding operator who welds under the rules of this Code
shall have passed the mechanical and visual examinations
prescribed in QW-302.1 and QW-302.4, respectively.
Alternatively, welding operators may be qualified by volumetric NDE per QW-191 when making a groove weld
75
2013 SECTION IX
using SMAW, SAW, GTAW, PAW, EGW, and GMAW (except
short‐circuiting mode for radiographic examination) or a
combination of these processes, except for P‐No. 21
through P‐No. 26, P‐No. 51 through P‐No. 53, and P‐No.
61 through P‐No. 62 metals. Welding operators making
groove welds in P‐No. 21 through P‐No. 26 and P‐No. 51
through P‐No. 53 metals with the GTAW process may also
be qualified by volumetric NDE. The volumetric NDE shall
be in accordance with QW-302.2.
A welding operator qualified to weld in accordance with
one qualified WPS is also qualified to weld in accordance
with other qualified WPSs within the limits of the essential
variables of QW-360.
operator for each welding process or whenever there is
a change in an essential variable. A welder or welding operator qualified in combination on a single test coupon is
qualified to weld in production using any of his processes
individually or in different combinations, provided he
welds within his limits of qualification with each specific
process.
Failure of any portion of a combination test in a single
test coupon constitutes failure of the entire combination.
QW-305.1 Examination. Welds made in test coupons
may be examined by volumetric NDE (QW-302.2) or by
visual and mechanical examinations ( QW-302.1,
QW-302.4). Alternatively, a minimum 3 ft (1 m) length
of the first production weld(s) made entirely by the
welding operator in accordance with a qualified WPS
may be examined by volumetric NDE.
(a) For pipe(s) welded in the 5G, 6G, or special positions, the entire production weld circumference made by
the welding operator shall be examined.
(b) For small diameter pipe where the required minimum length of weld cannot be obtained from a single production pipe circumference, additional consecutive
circumferences of the same pipe diameter made by the
welding operator shall be examined except that the total
number of circumferences need not exceed four.
(c) The examination technique and acceptance criteria
for production welds shall be in accordance with QW-191.
QW-310.1 Test Coupons. The test coupons may be
plate, pipe, or other product forms. When all position qualifications for pipe are accomplished by welding one pipe
assembly in both the 2G and 5G positions
(Figure QW-461.4), NPS 6 (DN 150), NPS 8 (DN 200),
NPS 10 (DN 250), or larger diameter pipe shall be employed to make up the test coupon as shown in
Figure QW-463.2(f) for NPS 10 (DN 250) or larger pipe
and in Figure QW-463.2(g) for NPS 6 (DN 150) or NPS 8
(DN 200) diameter pipe.
QW-310
QW-310.2 Welding Groove With Backing. The dimensions of the welding groove on the test coupon used in
making qualification tests for double‐welded groove
welds or single‐welded groove welds with backing shall
be the same as those for any Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) qualified by the organization, or shall be as
shown in Figure QW-469.1.
A single‐welded groove‐weld test coupon with backing
or a double‐welded groove‐weld test coupon shall be considered welding with backing. Partial penetration groove
welds and fillet welds are considered welding with
backing.
QW-305.2 Failure to Meet Examination Standards. If
a portion of a production weld is selected for welding operator performance qualification, and it does not meet the
examination standards, the welding operator has failed
the test. In this event, the entire production weld made
by this welding operator shall be examined completely
and repaired by a qualified welder or welding operator.
Alternatively, retests may be made as permitted in
QW-320.
QW-306
QUALIFICATION TEST COUPONS
QW-310.3 Welding Groove Without Backing. The dimensions of the welding groove of the test coupon used in
making qualification tests for single‐welded groove welds
without backing shall be the same as those for any WPS
qualified by the organization, or as shown in
Figure QW-469.2.
COMBINATION OF WELDING
PROCESSES
Each welder or welding operator shall be qualified within the limits given in QW-301 for the specific welding process(es) he will be required to use in production welding.
A welder or welding operator may be qualified by making
tests with each individual welding process in separate test
coupons, or with a combination of welding processes in a
single test coupon. Two or more welders or welding operators, each using the same or a different welding process, may be qualified in combination in a single test
coupon. For combination qualifications in a single test
coupon, the limits for thicknesses of deposited weld metal,
and bend and fillet testing are given in QW-452 and shall
be considered individually for each welder or welding
QW-320
QW-321
RETESTS AND RENEWAL OF
QUALIFICATION
RETESTS
A welder or welding operator who fails one or more of
the tests prescribed in QW-304 or QW-305, as applicable,
may be retested under the following provisions.
QW-321.1 Immediate Retest Using Visual Examination. When the qualification coupon has failed the visual
examination of QW-302.4, retesting shall be by visual
examination before conducting the mechanical testing.
76
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
When an immediate retest is made, the welder or welding operator shall make two consecutive test coupons for
each position which he has failed, all of which shall pass
the visual examination requirements.
QW-321.4 Further Training. When the welder or the
welding operator has had further training or practice, a
new test shall be made for each position on which he failed
to meet the requirements.
The examiner may select one of the successful test coupons from each set of retest coupons which pass the visual
examination for conducting the mechanical testing.
QW-322
QW-322.1 Expiration of Qualification. The perfor- ð13Þ
mance qualification of a welder or welding operator shall
be affected when one of the following occurs:
(a) When he has not welded with a process during a
period of 6 months or more, his qualifications for that process shall expire; unless, within the 6 month period, prior
to his expiration of qualification
(1) the welder has welded with that process using
manual or semiautomatic welding, under the supervision
and control of the qualifying organization(s) that will
extend his qualification for an additional 6 months
(2) the welding operator has welded with that process using machine or automatic welding, under the
supervision and control of the qualifying organization(s)
that will extend his qualification for an additional
6 months
(b) When there is a specific reason to question his ability to make welds that meet the specification, the qualifications that support the welding he is doing shall be
revoked. All other qualifications not questioned remain
in effect.
QW-321.2 Immediate Retest Using Mechanical Testing. When the qualification coupon has failed the mechanical testing of QW-302.1, retesting shall be by mechanical
testing.
When an immediate retest is made, the welder or welding operator shall make two consecutive test coupons for
each position which he has failed, all of which shall pass
the test requirements.
ð13Þ
EXPIRATION AND RENEWAL OF
QUALIFICATION
QW-321.3 Immediate Retest Using Volumetric NDE.
When the qualification coupon has failed the volumetric
NDE of QW-302.2, the immediate retest shall be by the
same examination method.
(a) For welders and welding operators the retest shall
be to examine two 6 in. (150 mm) plate coupons; for pipe,
to examine two or more pipe coupons of the same diameter for a total of 12 in. (300 mm) of weld, which shall
include the entire weld circumference for pipe or pipes
(for small diameter pipe the total number of consecutively
made test coupons need not exceed eight).
QW-322.2 Renewal of Qualification.
(a) R e n e w a l o f q u a l i f i c a t i o n e x p i r e d u n d e r
QW-322.1(a) may be made for any process by welding a
single test coupon of either plate or pipe, of any material,
thickness or diameter, in any position, and by testing of
that coupon as required by QW-301 and QW-302. A successful test renews the welder or welding operator’s previous qualifications for that process for those materials,
thicknesses, diameters, positions, and other variables for
which he was previously qualified.
Providing the requirements of QW-304 and QW-305
are satisfied, renewal of qualification under QW-322.1(a)
may be done on production work.
(b) Welders and welding operators whose qualifications have been revoked under QW-322.1(b) above shall
requalify. Qualification shall utilize a test coupon appropriate to the planned production work. The coupon shall
be welded and tested as required by QW-301 and
QW-302. Successful test restores the qualification.
(b) At the option of the organization, the welder who
has failed the production weld alternative test may be retested by examining additional weld areas equal to twice
the required length or number of pipe circumferences of
the same or consecutively made production weld(s) specified in QW-304.1. If this length of weld passes the test, the
welder is qualified and the area of weld on which he had
previously failed the test shall be repaired by him or another qualified welder. If this length does not meet the examination standards, the welder has failed the retest and
all of the production welds made by this welder shall be
examined completely and repaired by a qualified welder
or welding operator.
(c) At the option of the organization, the welding operator who has failed the production weld alternative test
may be retested by examining additional weld areas equal
to twice the required length or number of pipe circumferences of the same or consecutively made production weld
(s) specified in QW-305.1. If this length of weld passes the
test, the welding operator is qualified and the area of weld
on which he had previously failed the test shall be repaired by him or another qualified welder or welding operator. If this length does not meet the examination
standards, the welding operator has failed the retest and
all of the production welds made by this welding operator
shall be examined completely and repaired by a qualified
welder or welding operator.
QW-350
QW-351
WELDING VARIABLES FOR
WELDERS
GENERAL
A welder shall be requalified whenever a change is
made in one or more of the essential variables listed for
each welding process.
77
2013 SECTION IX
Where a combination of welding processes is required
to make a weldment, each welder shall be qualified for
the particular welding process or processes he will be required to use in production welding. A welder may be qualified by making tests with each individual welding
process, or with a combination of welding processes in a
single test coupon.
The limits of weld metal thickness for which he will be
qualified are dependent upon the approximate thickness
of the weld metal he deposits with each welding process,
exclusive of any weld reinforcement, this thickness shall
be considered the test coupon thickness as given in
QW-452.
In any given production weldment, welders may not deposit a thickness greater than that permitted by QW-452
for each welding process in which they are qualified.
Table QW-354
Semiautomatic Submerged‐Arc Welding
(SAW)
Essential Variables
Paragraph
.2
QW-403
Base Metals
ϕ P‐Number
QW-404
Filler Metals
ϕ F‐Number
.1
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
+ Backing
QW-403
Base Metals
Maximum qualified
.18
ϕ P‐Number
.14
± Filler
.15
ϕ F‐Number
.31
ϕ t Weld deposit
QW-405
Positions
.1
+ Position
QW-405
Positions
QW-408
Gas
.7
ϕ Type fuel gas
QW-404
Filler Metals
QW-404
Filler Metals
QW-403 Base Metals
QW-404
Filler Metals
QW-405
Positions
− Backing
.16
ϕ Pipe diameter
.18
ϕ F‐Number
.30
ϕ t Weld deposit
.1
.3
.4
− Backing
.16
ϕ Pipe diameter
.18
ϕ P‐Number
.15
ϕ F‐Number
.30
ϕ t Weld deposit
t Limit (S. Cir. Arc.)
+ Position
ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
QW-408
Gas
.8
− Inert backing
QW-409
Electrical
.2
ϕ Transfer mode
Table QW-356
Manual and Semiautomatic Gas
Tungsten‐Arc Welding (GTAW)
Essential Variables
Paragraph
ϕ P‐Number
.15
Position
.3
Brief of Variables
.4
+
.1
Essential Variables
QW-402
Joints
t Weld deposit
Brief of Variables
.32
Table QW-353
Shielded Metal‐Arc Welding (SMAW)
Paragraph
.30
[This Includes Flux‐Cored Arc Welding
(FCAW)] Essential Variables
Brief of Variables
.7
.18
.15
Table QW-355
Semiautomatic Gas Metal‐Arc Welding
(GMAW)
Essential Variables
QW-402
Joints
.16
QW-405
Positions
Table QW-352
Oxyfuel Gas Welding (OFW)
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
ϕ Pipe diameter
QW-403
Base Metals
.4
− Backing
QW-403
Base Metals
.16
ϕ Pipe diameter
.18
ϕ P‐Number
.14
± Filler
.15
ϕ F‐Number
QW-404
Filler Metals
+ Position
ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
78
Brief of Variables
QW-402
Joints
.22
± Inserts
.23
ϕ Filler metal product form
.30
ϕ t Weld deposit
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
QW-361.1 Essential Variables — Automatic Welding.
(a) A change from automatic to machine welding.
(b) A change in the welding process.
(c) For electron beam and laser welding, the addition
or deletion of filler metal.
(d) For laser welding and hybrid laser-GMAW, a change
in laser type (e.g., a change from CO2 to YAG).
(e) For friction welding, a change from continuous
drive to inertia welding or vice versa.
(f) For electron beam welding, a change from vacuum
to out‐of‐vacuum equipment, and vice versa.
Table QW-356
Manual and Semiautomatic Gas
Tungsten‐Arc Welding (GTAW)
Essential Variables (Cont'd)
Paragraph
Brief of Variables
QW-405
Positions
.1
+ Position
.3
ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
QW-408
Gas
.8
− Inert backing
QW-409
Electrical
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
QW-361.2 Essential Variables — Machine Welding.
(a) A change in the welding process.
(b) A change from direct visual control to remote visual
control and vice‐versa.
(c) The deletion of an automatic arc voltage control system for GTAW.
(d) The deletion of automatic joint tracking.
(e) The addition of welding positions other than those
already qualified (see QW-120, QW-130, and QW-303).
(f) The deletion of consumable inserts, except that qualification with consumable inserts shall also qualify for fillet welds and welds with backing.
(g) The deletion of backing. Double‐welded groove
welds are considered welding with backing.
(h) A change from single pass per side to multiple
passes per side but not the reverse.
(i) For hybrid plasma-GMAW welding, the essential
variable for welding operator qualification shall be in accordance with Table QW-357.
Legend:
ϕ Change
+ Addition
− Deletion
ð13Þ
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
Table QW-357
Manual and Semiautomatic Plasma‐Arc
Welding (PAW)
Essential Variables
Paragraph
QW-402
Joints
Brief of Variables
.4
QW-403
Base Metals
QW-404
Filler Metals
− Backing
.16
ϕ Pipe diameter
.18
ϕ P‐Number
.14
± Filler
.15
ϕ F‐Number
.22
± Inserts
.23
ϕ Filler metal product form
.30
ϕ t Weld deposit
QW-405
Positions
.1
+ Position
.3
ϕ ↑↓ Vertical welding
QW-408
Gas
.8
− Inert backing
QW-362
The performance qualification test coupon shall be production parts or test coupons that have joint designs permitted by any qualified WPS. The coupon shall be
mechanically tested in accordance with QW-452. Alternatively, when the part or coupon does not readily lend itself
to the preparation of bend test specimens, the part may be
cut so that at least two full‐thickness weld cross sections
are exposed. Those cross sections shall be smoothed and
etched with a suitable etchant (see QW-470) to give a clear
definition of the weld metal and heat affected zone. The
weld metal and heat affected zone shall exhibit complete
fusion and freedom from cracks. The essential variables
for welding operator qualification shall be in accordance
with QW-361.
Legend:
ϕ Change
+ Addition
− Deletion
QW-360
ð13Þ
QW-361
ELECTRON BEAM WELDING (EBW),
LASER BEAM WELDING (LBW), HYBRID
WELDING, AND FRICTION WELDING
(FRW)
↑ Uphill
↓ Downhill
WELDING VARIABLES FOR
WELDING OPERATORS
GENERAL
A welding operator shall be requalified whenever a
change is made in one of the following essential variables
(QW-361.1 and QW-361.2). There may be exceptions or
additional requirements for the processes of QW-362,
QW-363, and the special processes of QW-380.
QW-363
STUD WELDING
Stud welding operators shall be performance qualified
in accordance with the test requirements of QW-192.2
and the position requirements of QW-303.4.
79
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
QW-380
QW-381
SPECIAL PROCESSES
(d) Qualification with one AWS classification within an
SFA specification qualifies for all other AWS classifications
in that SFA specification.
(e) A change in welding process shall require welder
and welding operator requalification.
CORROSION‐RESISTANT WELD METAL
OVERLAY
QW-381.1 Qualification Test.
(a) The size of test coupons, limits of base metal thickness qualification, required examinations and tests, and
test specimens shall be as specified in Table QW-453.
(b) Welders or welding operators who pass the tests for
corrosion‐resistant weld metal overlay cladding shall only
be qualified to apply corrosion‐resistant weld metal overlay portion of a groove weld joining composite clad or
lined materials.
(c) The essential variables of QW-350 and QW-360
shall apply for welders and welding operators, respectively, except there is no limit on the maximum thickness
of corrosion‐resistant overlay that may be applied in production. When specified as essential variables, the limitations of position and diameter qualified for groove welds
shall apply to overlay welds, except the limitations on diameter qualified shall apply only to welds deposited in the
circumferential direction.
QW-383
QW-383.1 Clad Materials.
(a) Welders and welding operators who will join the
base material portion of clad materials shall be qualified
for groove welding in accordance with QW-301. Welders
and welding operators who will apply the cladding portion
of a weld between clad materials shall be qualified in accordance with QW-381. Welders and welding operators
need only be qualified for the portions of composite welds
that they will make in production.
(b) As an alternative to (a), welders and welding operators may be qualified using composite test coupons. The
test coupon shall be at least 3/8 in. (10 mm) thick and of
dimensions such that a groove weld can be made to join
the base materials and the corrosion‐resistant weld metal
overlay can be applied to the completed groove weld. Four
side bend test specimens shall be removed from the completed test coupon and tested. The groove weld portion
and the corrosion‐resistant weld metal overlay portion
of the test coupon shall be evaluated using the respective
criteria in QW-163. Welders and welding operators qualified using composite test coupons are qualified to join
base materials as provided by QW-301, and they are qualified to apply corrosion‐resistant weld metal overlay as
provided by QW-381.
QW-381.2 Qualification on Composite Welds. A
welder or welding operator who has qualified on composite welds in clad or lined material, as provided in
QW-383.1(b) is also qualified to deposit corrosion‐
resistant weld metal overlay.
QW-381.3 Alternative Qualification With Groove
Weld Tests. When a chemical composition is not specified
in the WPS, welders or welding operators who successfully complete a groove weld performance qualification
test meeting the corrosion‐resistant overlay bend test requirements of QW-163 may be considered qualified for
corrosion‐resistant overlay welding within the ranges defined in QW-350 or QW-360.
QW-382
JOINING OF CLAD MATERIALS AND
APPLIED LININGS
QW-383.2 Applied Linings.
(a) Welders and welding operators shall be qualified
following the rules for making groove or fillet welds in accordance with QW-301. Plug welds for attaching applied
linings shall be considered equivalent to fillet welds for
the purpose of performance qualification.
(b) An alternate test coupon shall consist of the geometry to be welded, except the base material need not exceed
1 in. (25 mm) in thickness. The welded test coupon
shall be sectioned and etched to reveal the weld and
heat‐affected zone. The weld shall show penetration into
the base metal.
HARD‐FACING WELD METAL OVERLAY
(WEAR RESISTANT)
(a) The size of the test coupons, limits of base metal
thickness qualification, required examinations and
tests, and test specimens shall be as specified in
Table QW-453. Base material test coupons may be as permitted in QW-423.
(b) Welders and welding operators who pass the tests
for hard‐facing weld metal overlay are qualified for hard‐
facing overlay only.
(c) The essential variable, of QW-350 and QW-360,
shall apply for welders and welding operators, respectively, except there is no limit on the maximum thickness
of hard‐facing overlay that may be applied in production.
When specified as essential variables, the limitations of
position and diameter qualified for groove welds shall apply to overlay welds except the limitations on diameter
qualified shall apply only to welds deposited in the circumferential direction.
QW-384
RESISTANCE WELDING OPERATOR
QUALIFICATION
Each welding operator shall be tested on each machine
type which he will use. Qualification testing on any P‐No.
21 through P‐No. 26 metal shall qualify the operator for
all metals. Qualification on any P‐No. 1 through P‐No.
15F or any P‐No. 41 through P‐No. 49 metals shall qualify
the operator for all P‐No. 1 through P‐No. 15F and P‐No.
41 through P‐No. 49 metals. Qualification testing on any
80
2013 SECTION IX
Production weld sampling tests required by other Sections may be used to qualify welding operators. The test
method, extent of tests, and acceptance criteria of the
other Sections and QW-199.2 shall be met when this is
done.
P‐No. 51 through P‐No. 53, P‐No. 61, or P‐No. 62 metal
shall qualify the operator for all P‐No. 51 through P‐No.
53, P‐No. 61, and P‐No. 62 metals.
(a) Qualification for spot and projection welding shall
consist of making a set of ten consecutive welds, five of
which shall be subjected to mechanical shear tests or peel
tests, and five to macro‐examination. Examination, testing,
and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with
QW-196.
(b) Qualification for seam welding shall consist of that
testing specified in QW-286.3, except that only one transverse cross section and one longitudinal cross section are
required.
QW-385
QW-386
DIFFUSION WELDING OPERATOR
QUALIFICATION
Each welding operator shall be tested by welding a procedure qualification test coupon in accordance with
QW-185.1. The coupon shall be metallographically examined in accordance with QW-185.3.
FLASH WELDING OPERATOR
QUALIFICATION
Each welding operator shall be tested by welding a test
coupon following any WPS. The test coupon shall be
welded and tested in accordance with QW-199. Qualification following any flash welding WPS qualifies the operator to follow all flash welding WPSs.
81
2013 SECTION IX
ARTICLE IV
WELDING DATA
QW-400
QW-401
VARIABLES
When essential variables are qualified by one or more
PQRs and supplementary essential variables are qualified
by other PQRs, the ranges of essential variables established by the former PQRs are only affected by the latter
to the extent specified in the applicable supplementary essential variable (e.g., essential variable QW-403.8 governs
the minimum and maximum thickness of base metal qualified. When supplementary essential variable QW-403.6
applies, it modifies only the minimum thickness qualified,
not the maximum).
GENERAL
Each welding variable described in this Article is applicable as an essential, supplementary essential, or nonessential variable for procedure qualification when referenced
in QW-250 for each specific welding process. Essential
variables for performance qualification are referenced in
QW-350 for each specific welding process. A change from
one welding process to another welding process is an essential variable and requires requalification.
QW-401.4 Nonessential Variable (Procedure). A
change in a welding condition which will n o t affect the
mechanical properties of a weldment (such as joint design,
method of back gouging or cleaning, etc.)
QW-401.1 Essential Variable (Procedure). A change
in a welding condition which will affect the mechanical
properties (other than notch toughness) of the weldment
(e.g., change in P‐Number, welding process, filler metal,
electrode, preheat or postweld heat treatment).
QW-401.5 The welding data includes the welding
variables grouped as joints, base metals, filler metals,
position, preheat, postweld heat treatment, gas,
electrical characteristics, and technique. For convenience,
variables for each welding process are summarized in
Table QW-416 for performance qualification.
QW-401.2 Essential Variable (Performance). A
change in a welding condition which will affect the ability
of a welder to deposit sound weld metal (such as a change
in welding process, deletion of backing, electrode,
F‐Number, technique, etc.).
QW-402
QW-401.3 Supplementary Essential Variable (Procedure). A change in a welding condition which will affect
the notch‐toughness properties of a weldment (for example, change in welding process, uphill or down vertical
welding, heat input, preheat or PWHT, etc.). Supplementary essential variables are in addition to the essential
variables for each welding process.
When a procedure has been previously qualified to
satisfy all requirements other than notch toughness, it is
then necessary only to prepare an additional test coupon
using the same procedure with the same essential variables, but additionally with all of the required supplementary essential variables, with the coupon long enough to
provide the necessary notch‐toughness specimens.
When a procedure has been previously qualified to
satisfy all requirements including notch toughness, but
one or more supplementary essential variable is changed,
then it is only necessary to prepare an additional test coupon using the same welding procedure and the new supplementary essential variable(s), with the coupon long
enough to provide the necessary notch‐toughness specimens. If a previously qualified weld procedure has satisfactory notch‐toughness values in the weld metal, then it
is necessary only to test notch‐toughness specimens from
the heat affected zone when such are required.
JOINTS
QW-402.1 A change in the type of groove (Vee‐groove,
U‐groove, single‐bevel, double‐bevel, etc.).
QW-402.2
QW-402.3
backing.
The addition or deletion of a backing.
A change in the nominal composition of the
QW-402.4 The deletion of the backing in single‐
welded groove welds. Double‐welded groove welds are
considered welding with backing.
QW-402.5 The addition of a backing or a change in its
nominal composition.
QW-402.6 An increase in the fit‐up gap, beyond that
initially qualified.
QW-402.7
The addition of backing.
QW-402.8 A change in nominal size or shape of the
stud at the section to be welded.
QW-402.9 In stud welding, a change in shielding as a
result of ferrule or flux type.
QW-402.10
A change in the specified root spacing.
QW-402.11 The addition or deletion of nonmetallic
retainers or nonfusing metal retainers.
82
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
QW-402.12 The welding procedure qualification test
shall duplicate the joint configuration to be used in
production within the limits listed, except that pipe or
tube to pipe or tube may be used for qualification of a pipe
or tube to other shapes, and solid round to solid round
may be used for qualification of a solid round to other
shapes
(a) any change exceeding ±10 deg in the angle measured for the plane of either face to be joined, to the axis
of rotation
(b) a change in cross‐sectional area of the weld joint
greater than 10%
(c) a change in the outside diameter of the cylindrical
weld interface of the assembly greater than ± 10%
(d) a change from solid to tubular cross section at the
joint or vice versa regardless of (b)
cooling medium on the back side of the weld qualifies base
metal thickness equal to or greater than the test coupon
thickness with and without coolant.
QW-402.24 Qualification with a cooling medium
(water, flowing gas, etc.) on the root side of a test coupon
weld that is welded from one side qualifies all thicknesses
of base metal with cooling medium down to the thickness
of the test coupon at the root or 1/2 in. (13 mm), whichever
is less.
QW-402.25 A change from lap joint to groove welding, and vice versa.
QW-402.26 A reduction of more than 5 deg in the
edge preparation bevel angle for groove welds.
QW-402.27 A change in material of fixed backing anvils (when used). A change in backing anvil design that
affects the weld cooling rate (e.g., a change from air-cooled
to water-cooled, and vice versa). This variable is not
applicable to tube-to-tubesheet or double-sided welds
with overlapping fusion zones, or welds completed using
self-reacting pins.
QW-402.13 A change in the method of joining from
spot to projection to seam or vice versa.
QW-402.14 An increase or decrease of more than
10% in the spacing of the welds when they are within
two diameters of each other.
QW-402.28 A change in joint design from that qualified, including edge preparation geometry (e.g., a change
from square butt edge to beveled edge), reductions in
the smallest joint path radius to less than the shoulder radius, or joint paths crossing themselves or another HAZ.
QW-402.15 A change in the size or shape of the projection in projection welding.
QW-402.16 A decrease in the distance between the
approximate weld interface and the final surface of the
production corrosion‐resistant or hard‐facing weld metal
overlay below the minimum thickness qualified as shown
in Figures QW-462.5(a) through QW-462.5(e). There is no
limit on the maximum thickness for corrosion‐resistant or
hard‐facing weld metal overlay that may be used in
production.
QW-402.29 A change in joint spacing greater than
±10% of the qualification test coupon thickness. For WPSs
qualified using intimate edge contact, the maximum allowable joint spacing is 1/16 in. (1.5 mm).
QW-402.30 A change from a groove weld to a fillet
weld, or vice versa, from that qualified. For groove welds,
a change in any of the following variables:
(a) backing to no backing, or vice versa
(b) a change of ±10% in the root face thickness
(c) a change of ±10% in the root gap
(d) a change in bevel angle > 5%
QW-402.17 An increase in the thickness of the production spray fuse hard‐facing deposit above the thickness
deposited on the procedure qualification test coupon.
QW-402.18 For lap joints,
(a) a decrease of more than 10% in the distance to the
edge of the material
(b) an increase in the number of layers of material
(c) a change in surface preparation or finish from that
qualified
QW-403
QW-403.1 A change from a base metal listed under
one P‐Number in Table QW/QB-422 to a metal listed under another P‐Number or to any other base metal. When
joints are made between two base metals that have different P‐Numbers, a procedure qualification shall be made
for the applicable combination of P‐Numbers, even though
qualification tests have been made for each of the two base
metals welded to itself.
QW-402.19 A change in the nominal diameter or nominal thickness for tubular cross sections, or an increase in
the total cross section area beyond that qualified for all
nontubular cross sections.
QW-402.20
A change in the joint configuration.
QW-403.2 The maximum thickness qualified is the
thickness of the test coupon.
QW-402.21 A change in the method or equipment
used to minimize internal flash.
QW-402.22
BASE METALS
QW-403.3 For full penetration single‐sided welds
without backing, where the measurement of penetration
can be made by visual or mechanical means, requalification is required when the base metal thickness is more
than 20% thicker than that qualified when the test coupon
thickness is 1 in. (25 mm) and under, and more than 10%
A change in the end preparation method.
QW-402.23 For test coupons less than 1 1/2 in.
(38 mm) thick, the addition of a cooling medium (water,
flowing gas, etc.) to the back side of the weld. Qualification
on test coupons less than 11/2 in. (38 mm) thick with a
83
2013 SECTION IX
QW-403.9 For single‐pass or multipass welding in
which any pass is greater than 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick, an increase in base metal thickness beyond 1.1 times that of the
qualification test coupon.
thicker when the test coupon thickness is over 1 in.
(25 mm). Where the measurement of penetration cannot
be made, requalification is required when the base metal
thickness is more than 10% thicker than that qualified
when the test coupon thickness is 1 in. (25 mm) and under, and more than 5% thicker when the test coupon
thickness is over 1 in. (25 mm).
QW-403.10 For the short‐circuiting transfer mode of
the gas metal‐arc process, when the qualification test
coupon thickness is less than 1/2 in. (13 mm), an increase
in thickness beyond 1.1 times that of the qualification test
coupon. For thicknesses of 1/2 in. (13 mm) and greater, use
Table QW-451.1 or Table QW-451.2, as applicable.
QW-403.4 Welding procedure qualifications shall be
made using a base metal of the same type or grade or
another base metal listed in the same group (see
Table QW/QB-422) as the base metal to be used in production welding. When joints are to be made between base
metals from two different groups, a procedure qualification must be made for the applicable combination of base
metals, even though procedure qualification tests have
been made for each of the two base metals welded to itself.
QW-403.11 Base metals specified in the WPS shall be
qualified by a procedure qualification test that was made
using base metals in accordance with QW-424.
QW-403.12 A change from a base metal listed under
one P‐Number of Table QW/QB-422 to a base metal listed
under another P‐Number. When joints are made between
two base metals that have different P‐Numbers, requalification is required even though the two base metals have
been independently qualified using the same procedure.
When the melt‐in technique is used for joining P‐No. 1,
P‐No. 3, P‐No. 4, and P‐No. 5A, a procedure qualification
test with one P‐Number metal shall also qualify for that
P‐Number metal welded to each of the lower P‐Number
metals, but not vice versa.
QW-403.5 Welding procedure specifications shall be
qualified using one of the following:
(a) the same base metal (including type or grade) to be
used in production welding
(b) for ferrous materials, a base metal listed in the same
P‐Number Group Number in Table QW/QB-422 as the
base metal to be used in production welding
(c) for nonferrous materials, a base metal listed with
the same P‐Number UNS Number in Table QW/QB-422
as the base metal to be used in production welding
QW-403.15 Welding procedure qualifications for electron beam welding shall be made using a base metal of the
same type or grade or another base metal listed in the
same P‐Number (and the same group where given —
see Table QW/QB-422) as the base metal to be used in
production welding. When joints are to be made between
base metals from two different P‐Numbers (or two different groups), a procedure qualification must be made for
the applicable combination of base metals even though
procedure qualification tests have been made for each of
the two base metals welded to itself.
For ferrous materials in Table QW/QB-422, a procedure
qualification shall be made for each P‐Number Group
Number combination of base metals, even though procedure qualification tests have been made for each of the
two base metals welded to itself. If, however, two or more
qualification records have the same essential and supplementary essential variables, except that the base metals
are assigned to different Group Numbers within the same
P‐Number, then the combination of base metals is also
qualified. In addition, when base metals of two different
P‐Number Group Number combinations are qualified
using a single test coupon, that coupon qualifies the welding of those two P‐Number Group Numbers to themselves
as well as to each other using the variables qualified.
QW-403.16 A change in the pipe diameter beyond the
range qualified in QW-452, except as otherwise permitted
in QW-303.1, QW-303.2, QW-381.1(c), or QW-382(c).
QW-403.17 In stud welding, a change in combination
of base metal listed under one P‐Number in
Table QW/QB-422 and stud metal P‐Number (as defined
in the following Note), or to any other base metal/stud
metal combination.
This variable does not apply when impact testing of the
heat‐affected zone is not required by other Sections.
QW-403.6 The minimum base metal thickness
qualified is the thickness of the test coupon T or 5/8 in.
(16 mm), whichever is less. However, where T is less than
1
/4 in. (6 mm), the minimum thickness qualified is 1/2T .
This variable does not apply when a WPS is qualified with
a PWHT above the upper transformation temperature or
when an austenitic or P-No. 10H material is solution annealed after welding.
NOTE: Stud metal shall be classified by nominal chemical composition
and can be assigned a P‐Number when it meets the nominal composition of any one of the P‐Number metals.
QW-403.18 A change from one P‐Number to any
other P‐Number or to a base metal not listed in
Table QW/QB-422, except as permitted in QW-423, and
in QW-420.
QW-403.19 A change to another base material type or
grade (type or grade are materials of the same nominal
chemical analysis and mechanical property range, even
though of different product form), or to any other base
QW-403.8 A change in base metal thickness beyond
the range qualified in QW-451, except as otherwise
permitted by QW-202.4(b).
84
2013 SECTION IX
material type or grade. When joints are made between two
different types or grades of base material, a procedure
qualification must be made for the applicable combinations of materials, even though procedure qualification
tests have been made for each of the two base materials
welded to itself.
where T is 1/4 in. (6 mm) or less, the maximum thickness
qualified is 2T . This limitation applies to fillet welds as
well as to groove welds.
QW-403.20 A change from a base metal, listed under
one P‐Number in Table QW/QB-422, to a metal listed
under another P‐Number or to any other base metal; from
a base metal of one subgroup to any other grouping in
P‐No. 10 or 11.
QW-403.29 A change in the surface finish as defined
by the material specification or established surface roughness range as measured in accordance with ASME
B46.1–2006.
QW-403.28 A change to another base metal type,
grade, or UNS number.
QW-403.30 A change in base metal thickness greater ð13Þ
than 20%
(a) of the test coupon thickness for fixed-pin and
retracting-pin rotating tools
(b) beyond the minimum and maximum thickness or
thickness transition slopes of the test coupon for selfreacting rotating tools
QW-403.21 The addition or deletion of a coating, plating or cladding, or a change in the nominal chemical
analysis or thickness range of the plating or cladding, or
a change in type of coating as specified in the WPS.
QW-403.22 A change in the base metal thickness
exceeding 10% of the thickness of the total joint from that
qualified.
QW-403.31
ð13Þ
(a) For full penetration groove welds made without
backing, the base metal thickness qualified is ±10% from
that of the test coupon when the test coupon thickness
is less than or equal to 1 in. (25 mm) and ±5% when the
test coupon thickness is greater than 1 in. (25 mm).
(b) For full penetration groove welds made with backing, partial penetration groove welds, and fillet welds,
the minimum base metal thickness qualified shall be equal
to that used for the PQR test coupon and the maximum
thickness is unlimited.
QW-403.23 A change in base metal thickness beyond
the range qualified in Table QW-453.
QW-403.24 A change in the specification, type, or
grade of the base metal. When joints are to be made
between two different base metals, a procedure qualification must be made for the applicable combination even
though procedure qualifications have been made for each
of the two base metals welded to themselves.
QW-403.25 Welding procedure qualifications shall be
made using a base metal of the same P‐Number and Group
Number as the base metal to be temper bead welded.
When joints are to be made between base metals from
two different P‐Number/Group Number combinations, a
temper bead procedure qualification must be made for
each base metal P‐Number/Group Number to be used in
production; this may be done in separate test coupons
or in combination on a single test coupon. When base metals of different P‐Number/Group Numbers are tested in
the same coupon, the welding variables utilized and test
results on each side of the coupon shall be documented independently but may be reported on the same qualification record. Where temper bead welding is to be applied
to only one side of a joint (e.g., on the P‐No. 1 side of a joint
between P‐No. 1 and P‐No. 8 metals) or where cladding is
being applied or repaired using temper bead techniques,
qualification in accordance with QW-290 is required only
for the portion of the WPS that applies to welding on the
material to be temper bead welded.
QW-404
FILLER METALS
QW-404.1 An increase of greater than 10% in the
cross‐sectional area of the filler metal added (excluding
buttering) or in the wire‐feed speed beyond that qualified.
QW-404.2 A decrease in the thickness or change in
nominal specified chemical analysis of weld metal buttering beyond that qualified. (Buttering or surfacing is the
deposition of weld metal on one or both faces of the joint
prior to preparation of the joint for final electron beam
welding.)
QW-404.3
A change in the size of the filler metal.
QW-404.4 A change from one F‐Number in
Table QW-432 to any other F‐Number or to any other filler
metal not listed in Table QW-432.
QW-404.5 (Applicable only to ferrous metals.) A
change in the chemical composition of the weld deposit
from one A‐Number to any other A‐Number in
Table QW-442. Qualification with A‐No. 1 shall qualify
for A‐No. 2 and vice versa.
The weld metal chemical composition may be determined by any of the following:
(a) For all welding processes — from the chemical
analysis of the weld deposit taken from the procedure
qualification test coupon.
QW-403.26 An increase in the base metal carbon
equivalent using the following equation:
QW-403.27 The maximum thickness qualified is the
thickness of the test coupon, T , or it is unlimited if the test
coupon is 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) thick or thicker. However,
85
2013 SECTION IX
(b) For SMAW, GTAW, LBW, and PAW — from the
chemical analysis of the weld deposit prepared according
to the filler metal specification, or from the chemical composition as reported either in the filler metal specification
or the manufacturer’s or supplier’s certificate of
compliance.
(c) For GMAW and EGW — from the chemical analysis
of the weld deposit prepared according to the filler metal
specification or the manufacturer’s or supplier’s certificate
of compliance when the shielding gas used was the same
as that used to weld the procedure qualification test
coupon.
(d) For SAW — from the chemical analysis of the weld
deposit prepared according to the filler metal specification
or the manufacturer’s or supplier’s certificate of compliance when the flux used was the same as that used to weld
the procedure qualification test coupon.
In lieu of an A‐Number designation, the nominal chemical composition of the weld deposit shall be indicated on
the WPS and on the PQR. Designation of nominal chemical
composition may also be by reference to the AWS classification except for the “G” suffix classification, the manufacturer’s trade designation, or other established
procurement documents.
specification, the authorized inspector may require that
a check be made on the chemical composition of the weld
metal. Such a check shall preferably be made on a production weld.
QW-404.12 A change in the filler metal classification
within an SFA specification, or for a filler metal not covered by an SFA specification or a filler metal with a “G” suffix within an SFA specification, a change in the trade
designation of the filler metal.
When a filler metal conforms to a filler metal classification, within an SFA specification, except for the “G” suffix
classification, requalification is not required if a change
is made in any of the following:
(a) f r o m a f i l l e r m e t a l t h a t i s d e s i g n a t e d a s
moisture‐resistant to one that is not designated as
moisture‐resistant and vice versa (i.e., from E7018R to
E7018)
(b) from one diffusible hydrogen level to another
(i.e., from E7018‐H8 to E7018‐H16)
(c) for carbon, low alloy, and stainless steel filler metals
having the same minimum tensile strength and the same
nominal chemical composition, a change from one low hydrogen coating type to another low hydrogen coating type
(i.e., a change among EXX15, 16, or 18 or EXXX15, 16, or
17 classifications)
(d) from one position‐usability designation to another
for flux‐cored electrodes (i.e., a change from E70T‐1 to
E71T‐1 or vice versa)
(e) from a classification that requires impact testing to
the same classification which has a suffix which indicates
that impact testing was performed at a lower temperature
or exhibited greater toughness at the required temperature or both, as compared to the classification which
was used during procedure qualification (i.e., a change
from E7018 to E7018‐1)
(f) from the classification qualified to another filler metal within the same SFA specification when the weld metal
is exempt from Impact Testing by other Sections
This exemption does not apply to hard‐facing and
corrosion‐resistant overlays
QW-404.6 A change in the nominal size of the electrode or electrodes specified in the WPS.
QW-404.7 A change in the nominal diameter of the
electrode to over 1/4 in. (6 mm). This variable does not
apply when a WPS is qualified with a PWHT above the
upper transformation temperature or when an austenitic
material is solution annealed after welding.
QW-404.8 Addition or deletion, or a change of more
than 10% in the nominal amount or composition of supplementary deoxidation material (in addition to filler metal) beyond that qualified.
QW-404.9
(a) A change in the indicator for minimum tensile
strength (e.g., the 7 in F7A2‐EM12K) when the flux wire
combination is classified in Section II, Part C.
(b) A change in either the flux trade name or wire trade
name when neither the flux nor the wire is classified in
Section II, Part C.
(c) A change in the flux trade name when the wire is
classified in Section II, Part C but the flux is not classified.
A change in the wire classification within the requirements of QW-404.5 does not require requalification.
(d) A change in the flux trade name for A‐No. 8 deposits.
QW-404.14
The deletion or addition of filler metal.
QW-4 04.15 A change fro m o ne F‐Number in
Table QW-432 to any other F‐Number or to any other filler
metal, except as permitted in QW-433.
QW-404.17 A change in the type of flux or composition of the flux.
QW-404.18 A change from wire to plate electrodes,
and vice versa.
QW-404.10 Where the alloy content of the weld metal
is largely dependent upon the composition of the flux
used, any change in any part of the welding procedure
which would result in the important alloying elements in
the weld metal being outside of the specification range
of chemistry given in the Welding Procedure Specification.
If there is evidence that the production welds are not
being made in accordance with the procedure
QW-404.19 A change from consumable guide to
nonconsumable guide, and vice versa.
QW-404.20 Any change in the method by which filler
metal is added, such as preplaced shim, top strip, wire,
wire feed, or prior weld metal buttering of one or both
joint faces.
86
2013 SECTION IX
QW-404.21 For filler metal additions, any change
from the nominal specified analysis of the filler metal
qualified.
impact testing (i.e., XXXX‐1 or EXXXXM), are specified on
the WPS, only filler metals which conform to the classification with the optional supplemental designator(s) specified on the WPS shall be used.
QW-404.22 The omission or addition of consumable
inserts. Qualification in a single‐welded butt joint, with
or without consumable inserts, qualifies for fillet welds
and single‐welded butt joints with backing or double‐
welded butt joints. Consumable inserts that conform to
SFA-5.30 , except that the chemical analysis of the insert
conforms to an analysis for any bare wire given in any
SFA specification or AWS Classification, shall be considered as having the same F‐Number as that bare wire as
given in Table QW-432.
ð13Þ
QW-404.34 A change in flux type (i.e., neutral to active or vice versa) for multilayer deposits in P‐No. 1
materials.
QW-404.35 A change in the flux/wire classification or
a change in either the electrode or flux trade name when
not classified in an SFA specification. Requalification is
not required when a wire/flux combination conforms to
an SFA specification and a change is made from one diffusible hydrogen level to another (i.e., a change from F7A2‐
EA1‐A1H4 to F7A2‐EA1‐A1H16). This variable does not
apply when the weld metal is exempt from impact testing
by other Sections. This exemption does not apply to hard
facing and corrosion‐resistant overlays.
QW-404.23 A change from one of the following filler
metal product forms to another:
(a) bare (solid or metal cored)
(b) flux cored
(c) flux coated (solid or metal cored)
(d) powder
QW-404.36 When flux from recrushed slag is used,
each batch or blend, as defined in SFA-5.01, shall be tested
in accordance with Section II, Part C by either the manufacturer or user, or qualified as an unclassified flux in accordance with QW-404.9.
QW-404.24 The addition, deletion, or change of more
than 10% in the volume of supplemental filler metal.
QW-404.27 Where the alloy content of the weld metal
is largely dependent upon the composition of the supplemental filler metal (including powder filler metal for
PAW), any change in any part of the welding procedure
that would result in the important alloying elements in
the weld metal being outside of the specification range
of chemistry given in the Welding Procedure Specification.
QW-404.29
designation.
ð13Þ
QW-404.37 A change in the composition of the deposited weld metal from one A‐Number in Table QW-442 to
any other A‐Number, or to an analysis not listed in the
table. A change in the UNS number for each AWS classification of A‐No. 8 or A‐No. 9 analysis of Table QW-442, or
each nonferrous alloy in Table QW-432, shall require separate WPS qualification. A‐Numbers may be determined
in accordance with QW-404.5.
A change in the flux trade name and
QW-404.38 A change in the nominal electrode diameter used for the first layer of deposit.
QW-404.30 A change in deposited weld metal thickness beyond that qualified in accordance with QW-451
for procedure qualification or QW-452 for performance
qualification, except as otherwise permitted in QW-303.1
and QW-303.2. When a welder is qualified using volumetric examination, the maximum thickness stated in
Table QW-452.1(b) applies.
QW-404.39 For submerged‐arc welding and electro‐
slag welding, a change in the nominal composition or type
of flux used. Requalification is not required for a change in
flux particle size.
QW-404.41 A change of more than 10% in the powdered metal feed rate recorded on the PQR.
QW-404.31 The maximum thickness qualified is the
thickness of the test coupon.
QW-404.42 A change of more than 5% in the particle
size range of the powder.
QW-404.32 For the low voltage short‐circuiting type
of gas metal‐arc process when the deposited weld metal
thickness is less than 1/2 in. (13 mm), an increase in deposited weld metal thickness beyond 1.1 times that of the
qualification test deposited weld metal thickness. For
weld metal thicknesses of 1/2 in. (13 mm) and greater,
use Table QW-451.1, Table QW-451.2, or Tables
QW-452.1(a) and QW-452.1(b), as applicable.
QW-404.43 A change in the powdered metal particle
size range recorded on the PQR.
QW-404.44 A change from a homogeneous powdered
metal to a mechanical mixed powdered metal or vice
versa.
QW-404.45 A change in the form of filler metal from
solid to fabricated wire, flux‐cored wire, powdered metal,
or vice versa.
QW-404.33 A change in the filler metal classification
within an SFA specification, or, if not conforming to a filler
metal classification within an SFA specification, a change
in the manufacturer’s trade name for the filler metal.
When optional supplemental designators, such as those
which indicate moisture resistance (i.e., XXXXR), diffusible
hydrogen (i.e., XXXX H16, H8, etc.), and supplemental
QW-404.46
qualified.
A change in the powder feed rate range
QW-404.47 A change of more than 10% in the filler
metal size and/or powder metal particle size.
87
2013 SECTION IX
QW-404.48 A change of more than 10% in the powder metal density.
that an angular deviation of ±15 deg is permitted in the
inclination of the weld axis and the rotation of the weld
face as defined in Figure QW-461.1. A test specimen shall
be taken from the test coupon in each special orientation.
(c) For hard‐facing and corrosion‐resistant weld metal
overlay, qualification in the 3G, 5G, or 6G positions,
where 5G or 6G pipe coupons include at least one
vertical segment completed utilizing the up‐hill progression or a 3G plate coupon is completed utilizing the
up‐hill progression, shall qualify for all positions. Chemical
analysis, hardness, macro‐etch, and at least two of the
bend tests, as required in Table QW-453, shall be removed
from the vertical uphill overlaid segment as shown in
Figure QW-462.5(b).
(d) A change from the vertical down to vertical up‐hill
progression shall require requalification.
QW-404.49 A change of more than 10% in the filler
metal or powder metal feed rate.
QW-404.50 The addition or deletion of flux to the
face of a weld joint for the purpose of affecting weld
penetration.
QW-404.51 The method of control of moisture pickup
during storage and distribution for SMAW and GMAW‐FC
electrodes and flux for SAW (e.g., purchasing in hermetically sealed containers and storage in heated ovens,
controlled distribution time, high‐temperature baking
prior to use).
QW-404.52 A change in the diffusible hydrogen level
(e.g., from E7018‐H8 to E7018‐H16 or to no controlled diffusible hydrogen).
QW-406
QW-404.53 The addition or deletion of filler metal
and, when used, a change in the filler metal nominal
composition.
ð13Þ
QW-406.1 A decrease of more than 100°F (55°C) in
the preheat temperature qualified. The minimum temperature for welding shall be specified in the WPS.
QW-404.54 An increase in the deposited weld metal
thickness qualified.
QW-405
QW-406.2 A change in the maintenance or reduction
of preheat upon completion of welding prior to any
required postweld heat treatment.
POSITIONS
QW-406.3 An increase of more than 100°F (55°C) in
the maximum interpass temperature recorded on the
PQR. This variable does not apply when a WPS is qualified
with a PWHT above the upper transformation temperature or when an austenitic or P-No. 10H material is solution annealed after welding.
QW-405.1 The addition of other welding positions
than those already qualified. see QW-120, QW-130,
QW-203, and QW-303.
QW-405.2 A change from any position to the vertical
position uphill progression. Vertical‐uphill progression
(e.g., 3G, 5G, or 6G position) qualifies for all positions. In
uphill progression, a change from stringer bead to weave
bead. This variable does not apply when a WPS is qualified
with a PWHT above the upper transformation temperature or when an austenitic material is solution annealed
after welding.
QW-406.4 A decrease of more than 100°F (55°C) in
the preheat temperature qualified or an increase in the
maximum interpass temperature recorded on the PQR.
The minimum temperature for welding shall be specifed
in the WPS.
QW-405.3 A change from upward to downward, or
from downward to upward, in the progression specified
for any pass of a vertical weld, except that the cover or
wash pass may be up or down. The root pass may also
be run either up or down when the root pass is removed
to sound weld metal in the preparation for welding the
second side.
ð13Þ
PREHEAT
QW-406.5 A change in the maintenance or reduction
of preheat upon completion of spraying and prior to
fusing.
QW-406.7 A change of more than 10% in the amplitude or number of preheating cycles from that qualified,
or if other preheating methods are employed, a change
in the preheating temperature of more than 25°F (15°C).
QW-405.4 Except as specified below, the addition of
other welding positions than already qualified.
(a) Qualification in the horizontal, vertical, or overhead
position shall also qualify for the flat position. Qualification in the horizontal fixed position, 5G, shall qualify for
the flat, vertical, and overhead positions. Qualification in
the horizontal, vertical, and overhead positions shall qualify for all positions. Qualification in the inclined fixed position, 6G, shall qualify for all positions.
(b) An organization who does production welding in a
particular orientation may make the tests for procedure
qualification in this particular orientation. Such qualifications are valid only for the positions actually tested, except
QW-406.8 An increase in the maximum interpass
temperature of more than 100°F (56°C) from that
achieved on the test coupon and recorded on the PQR.
The interpass temperature shall be measured and recorded separately for each tempering weld bead layer
and, if any, for the surface weld bead layer(s). The WPS
shall specify the maximum interpass temperature limits
for each tempering bead layer separately and for the surfacing weld bead layer(s), if any.
QW-406.9 A decrease in the preheat temperature
from that achieved on the test coupon and recorded on
the PQR. The preheat temperature shall be measured
88
2013 SECTION IX
QW-407.8 A separate PQR is required for each of the
following:
(a) no PWHT
(b) a change of more than 10% in the number of PWHT
heating current cycles following the welding cycle
(c) PWHT within a specified temperature and time
range if heat treatment is performed separately from the
welding operation
and recorded separately for each tempering weld bead
layer and, if any, for the surface weld bead layer(s). The
WPS shall specify the minimum preheat temperature limits for each tempering bead layer separately and for the
surfacing weld bead layer(s), if any.
QW-406.10 The minimum preheating soaking time
prior to the start of welding.
QW-406.11 The addition or deletion of a postweld hydrogen bakeout. When specified, the minimum soaking
temperature and time shall be specified.
QW-407
QW-407.9 A separate procedure qualification is required for each of the following:
(a) For weld corrosion‐resistant overlay of A‐No. 8 on
all base materials, a change in postweld heat treatment
condition in QW-407.1, or when the total time at postweld
heat treatment encountered in fabrication exceeds 20 hr,
an increase of 25% or more in total time at postweld heat
treating temperature.
(b) For weld corrosion‐resistant overlay of A‐No. 9 on
all base materials, a change in postweld heat treatment
condition in QW-407.1, or an increase of 25% or more
in total time at postweld heat treating temperature.
(c) For all other weld corrosion‐resistant overlays on
all base materials, a change in postweld heat treatment
condition in QW-407.1.
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT
QW-407.1 A separate procedure qualification is
required for each of the following:
(a) For P‐Numbers 1 through 6 and 9 through 15F materials, the following postweld heat treatment conditions
apply:
(1) no PWHT
(2) P W H T b e l o w t h e l o w e r t r a n s f o r m a t i o n
temperature
(3) PWHT above the upper transformation temperature (e.g., normalizing)
(4) PWHT above the upper transformation temperature followed by heat treatment below the lower transformation temperature (e.g., normalizing or quenching
followed by tempering)
(5) PWHT between the upper and lower transformation temperatures
(b) For all other materials, the following postweld heat
treatment conditions apply:
(1) no PWHT
(2) PWHT within a specified temperature range
QW-407.10 The addition or deletion of PWHT, or a
change of ±45°F (±25°C) in PWHT temperature or an
increase in the holding time by more than 25% or change
in the method of cooling (e.g., furnace, air, quench).
QW-408
GAS
QW-408.1 The addition or deletion of trailing shielding gas and/or a change in its composition.
QW-408.2 A separate procedure qualification is
required for each of the following:
(a) a change from a single shielding gas to any other
single shielding gas
(b) a change from a single shielding gas to a mixture of
shielding gasses, and vice versa
(c) a change in the specified percentage composition of
a shielding gas mixture
(d) the addition or omission of shielding gas
The AWS classification of SFA-5.32 may be used to
specify the shielding gas composition.
QW-407.2 A change in the postweld heat treatment
(see QW-407.1) temperature and time range
The procedure qualification test shall be subjected to
PWHT essentially equivalent to that encountered in the
fabrication of production welds, including at least 80%
of the aggregate times at temperature(s). The PWHT total
time(s) at temperature(s) may be applied in one heating
cycle.
QW-407.4 For ferrous base metals other than P‐No. 7,
P‐No. 8, and P‐No. 45, when a procedure qualification test
coupon receives a postweld heat treatment exceeding the
upper transformation temperature or a solution heat
treatment for P-No. 10H materials, the maximum qualified
base metal thickness, T , shall not exceed 1.1 times the
thickness of the test coupon.
QW-408.3 A change in the specified flow rate range of
the shielding gas or mixture of gases.
QW-408.4 A change in the composition of the orifice
or shielding gas.
QW-408.5 The addition or deletion of gas backing, a
change in backing gas composition, or a change in the
specified flow rate range of the backing gas.
QW-407.6 A change in postweld heat treatment condition in QW-407.1 or an increase of 25% or more in total
time at postweld heat treating temperature.
QW-408.6 A change of environment shielding such as
from vacuum to an inert gas, or vice versa.
QW-407.7 A change in the heat treatment temperature range qualified if heat treatment is applied after
fusing.
QW-408.7
89
A change in the type of fuel gas.
2013 SECTION IX
QW-408.23 For titanium, zirconium, and their alloys,
the deletion of one or more of the following:
(a) shielding gas
(b) trailing shielding gas
(c) backing gas
QW-408.8 The omission of inert gas backing except
that requalification is not required when welding a single‐
welded butt joint with a backing strip or a double‐welded
butt joint or a fillet weld. This exception does not apply to
P‐No. 51 through P‐No. 53, P‐No. 61 through P‐No. 62, and
P‐No. 10I metals.
QW-408.24 For gas‐shielded processes, the maximum
moisture content (dew point) of the shielding gas. Moisture control may be by specification of shielding gas classifications in SFA-5.32.
QW-408.9 For groove welds in P‐No. 41 through
P‐No. 49 and all welds of P‐No. 10I, P‐No. 10J, P‐No.
10K, P‐No. 51 through P‐No. 53, and P‐No. 61 through
P‐No. 62 metals, the deletion of backing gas or a change
in the nominal composition of the backing gas from an inert gas to a mixture including non‐inert gas(es).
QW-408.25
that qualified.
QW-408.10 For P‐No. 10I, P‐No. 10J, P‐No. 10K, P‐No.
51 through P‐No. 53, and P‐No. 61 through P‐No. 62 metals, the deletion of trailing shielding gas, or a change in
the nominal composition of the trailing gas from an inert
gas to a mixture including non‐inert gas(es), or a decrease
of 10% or more in the trailing gas flow rate.
QW-408.26 For friction stir welding of P-No. 6, P-No. ð13Þ
7, P-No. 8, P-No. 10H, P-No. 10I, P-No. 41 through P-No. 47,
P-No. 51 through P-No. 53, and P-No. 61 through P-No. 62,
the addition or deletion of trailing or tool shielding gas, or
a change in gas composition or flow rate.
QW-408.11 The addition or deletion of one or more of
the following:
(a) shielding gas
(b) trailing shielding gas
(c) backing gas
(d) plasma‐removing gas
QW-409
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
QW-409.1 An increase in heat input, or an increase in
volume of weld metal deposited per unit length of weld,
over that qualified. The increase shall be determined by
(a), (b), or (c) for nonwaveform controlled welding, or
by (b) or (c) for waveform controlled welding. See
Nonmandatory Appendix H.
(a) Heat input [J/in. (J/mm)]
QW-408.12 A decrease of more than 10% in the flow
rate of one or more of the following: shielding gas, trailing
shielding gas, backing gas, and plasma‐removing gas.
ð13Þ
A change in the furnace atmosphere from
QW-408.13
(b) Volume of weld metal measured by
(1) an increase in bead size (width × thickness), or
(2) a decrease in length of weld bead per unit length
of electrode
(c) Heat input determined using instantaneous energy
or power by
(1) for instantaneous energy measurements in joules
(J) Heat input [J/in. (J/mm)]
DELETED
QW-408.14 A change in the oxygen or fuel gas pressure beyond the range qualified.
QW-408.16 A change of more than 5% in the flow rate
of the plasma‐arc gas or powdered metal feed gas recorded on the PQR.
QW-408.17 A change in the plasma‐arc gas, shielding
gas, or powdered metal feed gas from a single gas to any
other single gas, or to a mixture of gases, or vice versa.
(2) for instantaneous power measurements in joules
per second (J/s) or Watts (W) Heat input [J/in. (J/mm)]
QW-408.18 A change of more than 10% in the gas
mixture composition of the plasma‐arc gas, shielding gas,
or powdered metal feed gas recorded on the PQR.
QW-408.19 A change in the nominal composition of
the powder feed gas or (plasma‐arc spray) plasma gas
qualified.
A change in the flow rate of the orifice or
The requirement for measuring the heat input or volume of deposited weld metal does not apply when the
WPS is qualified with a PWHT above the upper transformation temperature or when an austenitic or P-No. 10H
material is solution annealed after welding.
QW-408.22 A change in the shielding gas type, gas
pressure, or purging time.
QW-409.2 A change from globular, spray or pulsed
spray transfer welding to short circuiting transfer welding
or vice versa.
QW-408.20 A change of more than 5% in the plasma
gas flow rate range qualified.
QW-408.21
shielding gas.
90
2013 SECTION IX
QW-409.3 The addition or deletion of pulsing current
to dc power source.
(d) When using pulsing DC current, a change of more
than 5% in the pulse amplitude, frequency, or number of
pulses per cycle from that qualified.
(e) A change of more than 5% in the post‐heating current time duration from that qualified.
QW-409.4 A change from AC to DC, or vice versa; and
in DC welding, a change from electrode negative (straight
polarity) to electrode positive (reverse polarity), or vice
versa.
QW-409.17 A change in the power supply primary
voltage or frequency, or in the transformer turns ratio,
tap setting, choke position, secondary open circuit voltage
or phase control setting.
QW-409.5 A change of ±15% from the amperage or
voltage ranges in the qualified WPS.
QW-409.6 A change in the beam current of more
than ±5%, voltage of more than ±2%, welding speed of
more than ±2%, beam focus current of more than ±5%,
gun‐to‐work distance of more than ±5%, or a change in oscillation length or width of more than ±20% from those
previously qualified.
QW-409.18
tip cleaning.
QW-409.19 Any change of more than ±10% in the
beam pulsing frequency and pulse duration from that
qualified.
QW-409.7 Any change in the beam pulsing frequency
duration from that qualified.
QW-409.20 Any change in the following variables:
mode of operation (from pulsed to continuous and vice
versa), energy distribution across the beam (i.e., multimode or gaussian).
QW-409.8 A change in the range of amperage, or
except for SMAW, GTAW, or waveform controlled welding,
a change in the range of voltage. A change in the range of
electrode wire feed speed may be used as an alternative to
amperage. See Nonmandatory Appendix H:
QW-409.9
than ±1/10 sec.
QW-409.10
than ±10%.
QW-409.21 A decrease of more than 10% in the
power delivered to the work surface as measured by calorimeter or other suitable methods.
A change in the arc timing of more
QW-409.22 An increase of more than 10% in the
amperage used in application for the first layer.
A change in amperage of more
QW-409.23 A change of more than 10% in the ranges
of amperage or voltage qualified.
QW-409.11 A change in the power source from one
model to another.
QW-409.12
electrode.
A change in the procedure or frequency of
QW-409.24 A change of more than 10% in the filler
wire wattage recorded on the PQR. Wattage is a function
of current voltage, and stickout dimension.
A change in type or size of tungsten
QW-409.25 A change of more than 10% in the
plasma‐arc current or voltage recorded on the PQR.
QW-409.13 A change from one Resistance Welding
Manufacturer’s Association (RWMA) electrode class to another. In addition, a change in the following:
(a) for spot and projection welding, a change in the
nominal shape or more than 10% of the contact area of
the welding electrode
(b) for seam welding, a change of thickness, profile, orientation, or diameter of electrodes exceeding 10%
QW-409.26 For the first layer only, an increase in
heat input of more than 10% or an increase in volume
of weld metal deposited per unit length of weld of more
than 10% over that qualified. The increase shall be determined by the methods of QW-409.1.
QW-409.27
10%.
A change in the flashing time of more than
QW-409.14 Addition or deletion of upslope or downslope current control, or a change of more than 10% in the
slope current time or amplitude.
QW-409.28 A change in the upset current time by
more than 10%.
QW-409.15
(a) A change of more than 5% in any of the following
from that qualified:
(1) preheating current
(2) preheating current amplitude
(3) preheating current time duration
(4) electrode pressure
(5) welding current
(6) welding current time duration
(b) A change from AC to DC or vice versa.
(c) The addition or deletion of pulsing current to a DC
power source.
QW-409.29
(a) A change in heat input beyond the following (see
Figure QW-462.12):
(1) An increase or decrease in the ratio of heat input
between the first tempering bead layer and the weld beads
deposited against the base metal of more than 20% for
P‐No. 1 and P‐No. 3 metals and 10% for all other
P‐Number metals.
(2) An increase or decrease in the ratio of heat input
between the second tempering bead layer and the first
tempering bead layer of more than 20% for P‐No. 1 and
P‐No. 3 metals and 10% for all other P‐Number metals.
91
2013 SECTION IX
(3) The ratio of heat input between subsequent
layers shall be maintained until a minimum of 3/16 in.
(5 mm) of weld metal has been deposited over the base
metal.
(4) For qualifications where the basis for acceptance
is impact testing and the filler metal is exempt from temper bead qualification, the heat input may not exceed 50%
above the heat input qualified for the remaining fill passes.
(5) For qualifications where the basis for acceptance
is hardness testing, a decrease of more than 20% in heat
input for the remainder of the fill passes.
(b) Heat input shall be determined using the following
methods:
(1) For machine or automatic GTAW or PAW, an increase or decrease of 10% in the power ratio measured as:
QW-410.9 A change from multipass per side to single
pass per side. This variable does not apply when a WPS is
qualified with a PWHT above the upper transformation
temperature or when an austenitic or P-No. 10H material
is solution annealed after welding.
where
QW-410.14 For full penetration groove welds, a
change of more than ±10 deg in the relative angle between
the axis of the beam and the workpiece.
QW-410.10 A change from single electrode to multiple
electrode, or vice versa, for machine or automatic welding
only. This variable does not apply when a WPS is qualified
with a PWHT above the upper transformation temperature or when an austenitic or P-No. 10H material is solution annealed after welding.
QW-410.11 A change from closed chamber to out‐of‐
chamber conventional torch welding in P‐No. 51 through
P‐No. 53 metals, but not vice versa.
QW-410.12 A change from the melt‐in technique to
the keyhole technique of welding, or vice versa, or the inclusion of both techniques though each has been individually qualified.
A f = the cross‐section area of the filler metal wire
T S = the welding travel speed
W F S = the filler metal wire feed speed
QW-410.15 A change in the spacing of multiple electrodes for machine or automatic welding.
(2) For processes other than machine or automatic
GTAW or PAW, heat input shall be determined by the
method of QW-409.1.
(3) If manual GTAW or PAW is used for making in‐
process repairs in accordance with QW-290.5, a record
of bead size shall be made.
QW-410.17 A change in the type or model of the welding equipment.
QW-410.18 An increase in the absolute pressure of
the vacuum welding environment beyond that qualified.
QW-410.19
shape.
QW-410.20
ð13Þ
QW-410
TECHNIQUE
QW-410.22 A change in either of the following stud
welding parameters: a change of stud gun model; a change
in the lift more than ±1/32 in. (0.8 mm).
QW-410.2 A change in the nature of the flame, oxidizing to reducing, or vice versa.
QW-410.25 A change from manual or semiautomatic
to machine or automatic welding and vice versa.
A change in the orifice, cup, or nozzle size.
QW-410.26
QW-410.4 A change in the welding technique, forehand to backhand, or vice versa.
QW-410.28 A change in the thrust load greater
than ±10% of the thrust load qualified.
A change in the method of back gouging.
QW-410.7 For the machine or automatic welding process, a change of more than ±10% in width, frequency, or
dwell time of oscillation technique.
QW-410.8
distance.
The addition or deletion of peening.
QW-410.27 A change in the rotational speed producing a change in the outside surface velocity [ft/min
(m/min)] greater than ±10% of the outside surface velocity qualified.
QW-410.5 A change in the method of initial and interpass cleaning (brushing, grinding, etc.).
QW-410.6
The addition of a wash pass.
QW-410.21 For full penetration groove welds, a
change of welding from both sides to welding from one
side only, but not vice versa.
QW-410.1 For manual or semiautomatic welding, a
change from the stringer bead technique to the weave
bead technique, or vice versa.
QW-410.3
Any change in filament type, size, or
QW-410.29 A change in the rotational energy greater
than ±10% of the rotational energy qualified.
QW-410.30 Any change in upset dimension (overall
loss in length of parts being joined) greater than ±10%
of the upset qualified.
A change in the contact tube to work
92
2013 SECTION IX
QW-410.53 A change of more than 20% in the center‐
to‐center weld bead distance.
QW-410.31 A change in the method of preparing the
base metal prior to welding (e.g., changing from mechanical cleaning to chemical cleaning or to abrasive cleaning,
or vice versa).
QW-410.54 A change in the upset length or force of
more than 10%.
QW-410.32 A change of more than 10% in the holding
(forging) pressure prior to or after welding. A change of
more than 10% in the electrode holding time (electrode
duration sequence).
QW-410.55 A change in the distance between the
clamping dies of more than 10% or a change in the surface
preparation of the clamping area.
QW-410.56
than 10%.
QW-410.33 A change from one welding type to another, or modification of equipment, including Manufacturer, control panel, model number, electrical rating or
capacity, type of electrical energy source, or method of applying pressure.
A change in the clamping force by more
QW-410.57 A change in more than 10% of the forward or reverse speed.
QW-410.58 The deletion of surface temper beads (see
Figure QW-462.12) or a change from surface temper
beads that cover the weld surface to beads that are only
deposited along the toes of the weld.
QW-410.34 Addition or deletion of an electrode cooling medium and where it is used.
QW-410.35 A change in the distance between arms or
a change in the throat depth.
A change from single to multiple pass or
QW-410.59 A change from machine or automatic
welding to manual or semiautomatic welding.
QW-410.38 A change from multiple‐layer to single
layer cladding/hardsurfacing, or vice versa.
QW-410.60 The addition of thermal methods to prepare the surface to be welded unless the WPS requires
that the metal be ground to bright metal before welding.
QW-410.37
vice versa.
QW-410.39
A change in the torch type or tip size.
QW-410.61 The distance, S, from the toe of the weld
to the edge of any tempering bead shall be limited to the
d is t a n c e m ea s ur ed o n t h e t es t c o u po n ± 1/1 6 i n .
(±1.5 mm)(see Figure QW-462.12). Alternatively, a range
for S may be established by locating temper beads at various distances from the toe of the weld followed by hardness traverses or impact testing, as applicable. Temper
reinforcing beads shall not be permitted to touch the toe
of the weld. In addition, the ratios of heat input described
in QW-409.29 shall apply to temper beads.
QW-410.40 For submerged‐arc welding and electroslag welding, the deletion of a supplementary device for
controlling the magnetic field acting on the weld puddle.
QW-410.41 A change of more than 15% in the travel
speed range recorded on the PQR.
QW-410.43 For the torch or workpiece, a change of
more than 10% in the travel speed range qualified.
QW-410.44 A change of more than 15% in the spray‐
torch to workpiece distance qualified.
QW-410.62 The method of removal of surface temper
bead reinforcing layer when it will be removed, including
provisions to prevent overheating of the weld surface.
QW-410.45 A change in the method of surface
preparation of the base metal to be hard‐faced (example:
sandblasting versus chemical cleaning).
QW-410.46
orifice size.
QW-410.63 For weld beads against the base metal
and for each tempering bead layer, the range of bead
width, b , relative to overlap of the previous bead width,
a , as shown in Figure QW-462.13, shall be specified on
the WPS. Overlap between 25% and 75% does not require
qualification.
(a) Overlap greater than 75% shall be qualified by
welding a test coupon using the desired overlap. The overlap qualified shall be the maximum overlap permitted and
the minimum overlap shall be 50%.
(b) Overlap less than 25% shall be qualified by welding
a test coupon using the desired overlap. The overlap qualified shall be the minimum overlap permitted and the
maximum overlap shall be 50%.
A change in the spray‐torch model or tip
QW-410.47 A change of more than 10% in the fusing
temperature range qualified. A change in the rate of cooling from the fusing temperature of more than 50°F/hr
(28°C/hr), a change in the fusing method (e.g., torch,
furnace, induction).
QW-410.48 A change in the constricted arc from
transferable to nontransferable or vice versa.
QW-410.49 A change in the diameter of the plasma
torch‐arc constricting orifice.
QW-410.50 A change in the number of electrodes acting on the same welding puddle.
QW-410.64 For vessels or parts of vessels constructed with P‐No. 11A and P‐No. 11B base metals, weld
grooves for thickness less than 5/8 in. (16 mm) shall be
prepared by thermal processes when such processes are
to be employed durin g fab ri cation. This g roove
QW-410.52 A change in the method of delivering the
filler metal to the molten pool, such as from the leading or
trailing edge of the torch, the sides of the torch, or through
the torch.
93
2013 SECTION IX
(10) flat design resulting in a change of the total flat
surface area greater than 20%
(11) number of flats
(12) cooling characteristics of the rotating pin (e.g.,
change from water-cooled to air-cooled, and vice versa)
(c) pin material specification, nominal chemical composition, and minimum hardness
preparation shall also include back gouging, back grooving, or removal of unsound weld metal by thermal processes when these processes are to be employed during
fabrication.
QW-410.65 The addition or deletion of grinding
beyond that required to clean the surface or remove minor
surface flaws (i.e., use or nonuse of half‐bead technique or
similar technique).
QW-410.76 A change in the rotating tool operation
from that qualified b ey ond the following limits
(as applicable):
(a) decrease in rotation speed, or increase greater than
10%
(b) direction of rotation
(c) plunge force greater than 10% or plunge position
set point greater than 5% when controlling the plunge
direction (except during ramp-up and ramp-down when
starting and stopping)
(d) angular tilt greater than 1 deg in any direction
(e) travel force or travel speed greater than 10% when
controlling travel direction (except during ramp-up and
ramp-down when starting and stopping)
(f) range of relative motion between tool components
when using self-reacting or retractable-pin tools
(g) reduction in the smallest radius of travel path curvature that results in reversing the travel direction of the pin
or the shoulder
(h) manner or angle of intersection, or number of coincident intersections, within the same weld or between the
weld and the HAZ of other welds
QW-410.66 A change of more than ±10% in the travel
speed, the ratio of the beam diameter to focal length, or the
lens to work distance.
QW-410.67 A change in the optical technique used to
focus the welding energy from that qualified.
QW-410.68 A change in welding equipment type
(e.g., YAG, TAG, etc.).
QW-410.70 A change in the method of preparing the
base metal surface prior to insertion into the furnace.
QW-410.71 A decrease in the percentage of block
compression (original stack height compared to height
after welding) from that of the test coupon.
QW-410.72 A decrease in the welding temperature or
time from that used on the procedure qualification test
coupon.
QW-410.73 A change in joint restraint fixtures from
that qualified (e.g., fixed anvil to self-reacting, and vice versa) or from single-sided to two-sided welding, and vice
versa.
QW-410.74 A change in the welding control method
from that qualified (e.g., force control method to position
control method, or vice versa, in the plunge direction;
and force control method to travel control method, or vice
versa, in the travel direction).
QW-410.77 A change in the laser wavelength (e.g.,
CO2, Nd:YAG, fiber, disk, diode) from that qualified.
QW-410.78
that qualified.
QW-410.75 A change in the rotating tool
(a) type or design from the qualified “family” to another
(i.e., threaded pin, smooth pin, fluted, self-reacting,
retracting-pin, or other tool types)
(b) configuration or dimensions from that qualified beyond the following limits (as applicable):
(1) shoulder diameter greater than 10%
(2) shoulder scroll pitch greater than 10%
(3) shoulder profile (e.g., addition or deletion of
shoulder feature)
(4) pin diameter greater than 5%
(5) pin length greater than the lesser of 5% of qualified pin length or 1% of base metal thickness (not minimum pin length for retracting-pin tools, and not
applicable for self-reacting rotating tools)
(6) pin taper angle greater than 5 deg
(7) flute pitch greater than 5%
(8) pin tip geometry/shape
(9) thread pitch greater than 10% (as applicable)
A change in the process sequence from
QW-410.79 A change in the distance between the
laser beam and the welding arc of more than 10%.
QW-410.80 A change of ±5% in the diameter of the focused spot size.
QW-410.81 A change in the alignment of the plasma
torch and GMAW torch with respect to travel direction
by more than 10 deg, or a change from a leading or lagging
plasma or the addition/deletion of a leading or lagging
plasma.
QW-410.82 A change in the distance between the
plasma and the GMAW torches by more than 10%.
QW-410.83 A change in the height differential of the
plasma contact tip to the GMAW contact tip by more than
10%.
QW-410.84 A change in the angle between the leading
and/or trailing plasma and GMAW torches by more than
10 deg.
94
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
Table QW-416
Welding Variables
Welder Performance
Essential
Paragraph [Note (1)]
QW-402
Joints
.4
− Backing
.7
+ Backing
.2
QW-403
Base Metal
QW-404
Filler Metals
Brief of Variables
Maximum qualified
OFW
QW‐352
SAW
QW‐354
X
GMAW
[Note (2)]
QW‐355
GTAW
QW‐356
PAW
QW‐357
X
X
X
X
X
.16
ϕ Pipe diameter
.18
ϕ P‐Number
X
.14
± Filler
X
.15
ϕ F‐Number
X
.22
± Inserts
.23
ϕ Filler metal product form
.30
ϕ t Weld deposit
.31
ϕ t Weld deposit
.32
SMAW
QW‐353
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
t Limit (s. cir. arc)
X
.1
+ Position
.3
ϕ ↑↓ Vert. welding
QW-408
Gas
.7
ϕ Type fuel gas
.8
− Inert backing
X
QW-409
Electrical
.2
ϕ Transfer mode
X
.4
ϕ Current or polarity
Legend:
ϕ Change
+ Addition
− Deletion
X
X
X
QW-405
Positions
Welding Processes:
OFW
SMAW
SAW
GMAW
GTAW
PAW
X
X
X
X
X
Oxyfuel gas welding
Shielded metal-arc welding
Submerged-arc welding
Gas metal-arc welding
Gas tungsten-arc welding
Plasma-arc welding
t
↑
↓
Thickness
Uphill
Downhill
NOTES:
(1) For description, see Section IV.
(2) Flux‐cored arc welding as shown in QW‐355, with or without additional shielding from an externally supplied gas or gas mixture, is
included.
95
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
QW-420
BASE METAL GROUPINGS
for procedure qualification, the minimum tensile value of
the listed base metal shall apply for the tension test
specimens.
P‐Numbers are assigned to base metals for the purpose
of reducing the number of welding and brazing procedure
qualifications required.
P‐Numbers are alphanumeric designations: accordingly,
each P‐Number shall be considered a separate P‐Number
(e.g., base metals assigned P‐No. 5A are considered a separate P‐Number from those assigned P‐No. 5B or P‐No. 5C).
In addition, ferrous base metals have been assigned
Group Numbers creating subsets of P‐Numbers that are
used when WPSs are required to be qualified by impact
testing by other Sections or Codes. These assignments
are based essentially on comparable base metal characteristics, such as composition, weldability, brazeability, and
mechanical properties, where this can logically be done.
These assignments do not imply that base metals may
be indiscriminately substituted for a base metal that was
used in the qualification test without consideration of
compatibility from the standpoint of metallurgical properties, postweld heat treatment, design, mechanical properties, and service requirements. The following table shows
the assignment groups for various alloy systems:
Base Metal
Steel and steel alloys
Aluminum and
aluminum‐base
alloys
Copper and copper‐
base alloys
Nickel and nickel‐
base alloys
Titanium and
titanium‐ base
alloys
Zirconium and
zirconium‐base
alloys
Welding
Materials listed in Table QW/QB-422 without a minimum specified tensile value shall not be used for the purpose of groove weld procedure qualification.
Material produced under an ASTM specification shall
have the same P-Number or P-Number plus Group Number and minimum specified tensile strength value as that
of the corresponding ASME specification listed in
Table QW/QB-422 with prefix A/SA- or B/SB- (e.g., listed
under A/SA-240, SA-240 Type 304 is assigned P-No. 8,
Group No. 1; and A240 Type 304 is also P-No. 8, Group
No. 1).
The column “ISO/TR 15608 Group” in Table
QW/QB-422 is a listing of the assignments of materials
in accordance with the grouping criteria of ISO/TR
15608:2005, Welding — Guidelines for a metallic materials
grouping system, and it is consistent with the assignments
found in ISO/TR 20173:2008, Grouping systems for materials — American materials. While this listing is provided
as a convenience to users worldwide, it is provided for information only. Section IX does not refer to this grouping
as a basis for establishing the range of base metals qualified for either procedure or performance qualification.
Brazing
P‐No. 1 through
P‐No. 15F
P‐No. 21 through
P‐No. 26
P‐No. 101 through
P‐No. 103
P‐No. 104 and P‐No.
105
P‐No. 31 through
P‐No. 35
P‐No. 41 through
P‐No. 49
P‐No. 51 through
P‐No. 53
P‐No. 107 and P‐No.
108
P‐No. 110 through
P‐No. 112
P‐No. 115
P‐No. 61 and P‐No.
62
P‐No. 117
In 2009, S‐Numbers were removed from Table
QW/QB-422. S‐Numbers were assigned to materials that
were acceptable for use by the ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping, or by selected Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code Cases, but which were not included within ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Material Specifications
(Section II). Base metals previously assigned S‐Numbers
were reassigned the corresponding P‐Numbers or
P‐Numbers plus Group Numbers.
There are instances where materials assigned to one P‐
or S‐Number or Group Number have been reassigned to a
different P‐ or S‐Number or Group Number in later editions. Procedure and performance qualifications that were
qualified under the previous P‐ or S‐Numbers or Group
Number assignment may continue to be used under the
new P‐Number or Group Number assignment, see
QW-200.2(c), provided the WPS is revised to limit the materials qualified for welding to those assigned to the new
P‐ or S‐number(s) and Group number(s) for the specific
material(s) originally used for the procedure qualification
test coupon. Other materials from the original P‐ or
S‐Number and Group Number must be reassigned to the
same P‐ or S‐Number or Group Number to be considered
qualified for welding under the revised WPS.
The values given in the column heading “Minimum Specified Tensile” of Table QW/QB-422 are the acceptance values for the tensile tests of the welding or brazing
procedure qualification, except as otherwise allowed in
QW-153 or QB-153. Only base metals listed in
Table QW/QB-422 with minimum tensile strength values
may be used for procedure qualification except as modified by the following paragraph.
If an unlisted base metal has the same UNS number designation as a base metal listed in Table QW/QB-422, that
base metal is also assigned that P-Number or P-Number
plus Group Number. If the unlisted base metal is used
96
ð13Þ
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Group
No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous
...
K02600
58 (400)
1
1
101
11.1
C–Mn–Si
Plate, bar & shapes
A/SA-53
A/SA-53
A/SA-53
A/SA-53
A/SA-53
Type F
Type S, Gr. A
Type E, Gr. A
Type E, Gr. B
Type S, Gr. B
K03005
K02504
K02504
K03005
K03005
48
48
48
60
60
(330)
(330)
(330)
(415)
(415)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
11.1
1.1
1.1
11.1
11.1
C
C
C
C–Mn
C–Mn
Furnace welded pipe
Smls. pipe
Resistance welded pipe
Resistance welded pipe
Smls. pipe
A/SA-105
...
K03504
70 (485)
1
2
101
11.1
C
Flanges & fittings
A/SA-106
A/SA-106
A/SA-106
A
B
C
K02501
K03006
K03501
48 (330)
60 (415)
70 (485)
1
1
1
1
1
2
101
101
101
1.1
11.1
11.1
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
Smls. pipe
Smls. pipe
Smls. pipe
1015 CW
1018 CW
1020 CW
8620 CW
G10150
G10180
G10200
G86200
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
3
101
101
101
102
1.1
1.1
1.1
4.1
C
C
C
0.5Ni–0.5Cr–Mo
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
A/SA-134
A/SA-134
A/SA-134
A/SA-134
A/SA-134
SA283 Gr. A
SA283 Gr. B
SA283 Gr. C
SA283 Gr. D
SA285 Gr. A
K01400
K01702
K02401
K02702
K01700
45
50
55
60
45
(310)
(345)
(380)
(415)
(310)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
11.1
1.1
C
C
C
C
C
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
A/SA-134
A/SA-134
SA285 Gr. B
SA285 Gr. C
K02200
K02801
50 (345)
55 (380)
1
1
1
1
101
101
1.1
11.1
C
C
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
A/SA-135
A/SA-135
A
B
K02509
K03018
48 (330)
60 (415)
1
1
1
1
101
101
1.1
11.1
C
C
E.R.W. pipe
E.R.W. pipe
A139
A139
A139
A139
A139
A
B
C
D
E
K02508
K03003
K03004
K03010
K03012
48
60
60
60
66
(330)
(415)
(415)
(415)
(455)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
C
C
C
C
C
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
A167
A167
A167
Type 302B
Type 308
Type 309
S30215
S30800
S30900
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
8
8
8
1
2
2
102
102
102
8.1
8.2
8.2
18Cr–8Ni–2Si
20Cr–10Ni
23Cr–12Ni
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
A108
A108
A108
A108
...
...
...
...
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
97
A/SA-36
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
A167
Type 310
S31000
75 (515)
8
2
102
8.2
A/SA-178
A/SA-178
A/SA-178
A
C
D
K01200
K03503
K02709
47 (325)
60 (415)
70 (485)
1
1
1
1
1
2
101
101
101
1.1
11.1
11.1
A/SA-179
...
K01200
47 (325)
1
1
101
1.1
A/SA-181
A/SA-181
Cl. 60
Cl. 70
K03502
K03502
60 (415)
70 (485)
1
1
1
2
101
101
11.1
11.1
Plate, sheet & strip
C
C
C–Mn–Si
E.R.W. tube
E.R.W. tube
E.R.W. tube
C
Smls. tube
C–Si
C–Si
Pipe flange & fittings
Pipe flange & fittings
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F12,
F12,
F11,
F11,
F11,
1
2
2
3
1
K11562
K11564
K11572
K11572
K11597
60
70
70
75
60
(415)
(485)
(485)
(515)
(415)
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
1Cr–0.5Mo
1Cr–0.5Mo
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F2
F1
F22, Cl. 1
F22, Cl. 3
FR
K12122
K12822
K21590
K21590
K22035
70
70
60
75
63
(485)
(485)
(415)
(515)
(435)
3
3
5A
5A
9A
2
2
1
1
1
101
101
102
102
101
4.2
1.1
5.2
5.2
9.1
0.5Cr–0.5Mo
C–0.5Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2Ni–1Cu
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F21
F3V
F3VCb
F22V
F5
K31545
K31830
K31390
K31835
K41545
75 (515)
85 (585)
85 (585)
85 (585)
70 (485)
5A
5C
5C
5C
5B
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
5.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
5.3
3Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B
3Cr–1Mo–0.25V–Cb–Ca
2.25Cr–1Mo–V
5Cr–0.5Mo
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F5a
F9
F91
F92
F904L
F6a, Cl. 1
F6a, Cl. 2
K42544
K90941
K90901
K92460
N08904
S41000
S41000
90 (620)
85 (585)
85 (585)
90 (620)
71 (490)
70 (485)
85 (585)
5B
5B
15E
15E
45
6
6
1
1
1
1
…
1
3
102
102
102
102
111
102
102
5.3
5.4
6.4
6.4
8.2
7.2
7.2
5Cr–0.5Mo
9Cr–1Mo
9Cr–1Mo–V
9Cr–2W
44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo
13Cr
13Cr
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
FXM–19
FXM–11
F304
S20910
S21904
S30400
100 (690)
90 (620)
70 (485)
8
8
8
3
3
1
102
102
102
8.3
8.3
8.1
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
21Cr–6Ni–9Mn
18Cr–8Ni
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
2013 SECTION IX
98
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
25Cr–20Ni
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Welding
Brazing
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
A/SA-182
F304
S30400
75 (515)
8
1
102
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
Forgings
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F304L
F304L
F304H
F304H
F304N
F304LN
S30403
S30403
S30409
S30409
S30451
S30453
65
70
70
75
80
70
(450)
(485)
(485)
(515)
(550)
(485)
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F304LN
F46
F45
F310
F310
F310MoLN
S30453
S30600
S30815
S31000
S31000
S31050
75
78
87
70
75
78
(515)
(540)
(600)
(485)
(515)
(540)
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
2
2
2
2
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–15Ni–4Si
21Cr–11Ni–N
25Cr–20Ni
25Cr–20Ni
25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F50
F44
F316
F316
F316L
S31200
S31254
S31600
S31600
S31603
100
94
70
75
65
(690)
(650)
(485)
(515)
(450)
10H
8
8
8
8
1
4
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
10.2
8.2
8.1
8.1
8.1
25Cr–6Ni–Mo–N
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F316L
F316H
F316H
F316N
F316LN
S31603
S31609
S31609
S31651
S31653
70 (485)
70 (485)
75 (515)
80 (550)
70 (485)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F316LN
F317
F317
F317L
F317L
S31653
S31700
S31700
S31703
S31703
75
70
75
65
70
(515)
(485)
(515)
(450)
(485)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F51
...
...
F321
F321
S31803
S32053
S32202
S32100
S32100
90
93
94
70
75
(620)
(640)
(650)
(485)
(515)
10H
8
10H
8
8
1
4
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
10.1
8.2
10.1
8.1
8.1
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N
22Cr–2Ni–Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
P‐No.
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
2013 SECTION IX
99
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Welding
Brazing
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F321H
F321H
S32109
S32109
70 (485)
75 (515)
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F55
F10
F49
F347
F347
F347H
S32760
S33100
S34565
S34700
S34700
S34709
109
80
115
70
75
70
(750)
(550)
(795)
(485)
(515)
(485)
10H
8
8
8
8
8
1
2
4
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
10.1
8.1
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F347H
F348
F348
F348H
F348H
S34709
S34800
S34800
S34809
S34809
75
70
75
70
75
(515)
(485)
(515)
(485)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F6b
F6NM
F429
F430
FXM–27Cb
F53
F54
S41026
S41500
S42900
S43000
S44627
S32750
S39274
110
115
60
60
60
116
116
(760)
(795)
(415)
(415)
(415)
(800)
(800)
6
6
6
7
10I
10H
10H
3
4
2
2
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F60
F6a, Cl. 3
F6a, Cl. 4
S32205
S41000
S41000
95 (655)
110 (760)
130 (895)
10H
6
6
1
3
3
A/SA-192
A199
A199
A199
A199
A199
...
T11
T22
T21
T5
T9
K01201
K11597
K21590
K31545
K41545
K81590
47
60
60
60
60
60
1
4
5A
5A
5B
5B
A/SA-202
A/SA-202
A
B
K11742
K12542
75 (515)
85 (585)
A/SA-203
A/SA-203
A
B
K21703
K22103
65 (450)
70 (485)
P‐No.
Group
No.
8
8
1
1
102
102
8.1
8.1
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
25Cr–8Ni–3Mo–W–Cu–N
20Ni–8Cr
24Cr–17Ni–6Mn–4.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
Forgings > 5 in. (127 mm)
Forgings
7.2
7.2
7.2
7.1
7.1
10.2
10.2
13Cr–0.5Mo
13Cr–4.5Ni–Mo
15Cr
17Cr
27Cr–1Mo
25Cr–7Ni–4Mo–N
25Cr–7Ni–3Mo–2W–Cu–N
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
102
102
102
10.1
7.2
7.2
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
13Cr
13Cr
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
102
102
102
102
1.1
5.1
5.2
...
5.3
5.4
C–Si
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
2.25Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo
9Cr–1Mo
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
4
4
1
1
101
101
4.2
4.2
0.5Cr–1.25Mn–Si
0.5Cr–1.25Mn–Si
Plate
Plate
9A
9A
1
1
101
101
9.1
9.1
2.5Ni
2.5Ni
Plate
Plate
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
2013 SECTION IX
100
(325)
(415)
(415)
(415)
(415)
(415)
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
D
E
F
F
K31718
K32018
...
...
65 (450)
70 (485)
75 (515)
80 (550)
9B
9B
9B
9B
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
3.5Ni
3.5Ni
3.5Ni
3.5Ni
Plate
Plate
Plate > 2 in. (51 mm)
Plate, 2 in. (51 mm) & under
A/SA-204
A/SA-204
A/SA-204
A
B
C
K11820
K12020
K12320
65 (450)
70 (485)
75 (515)
3
3
3
1
2
2
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.2
C–0.5Mo
C–0.5Mo
C–0.5Mo
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-209
A/SA-209
A/SA-209
T1b
T1
T1a
K11422
K11522
K12023
53 (365)
55 (380)
60 (415)
3
3
3
1
1
1
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
C–0.5Mo
C–0.5Mo
C–0.5Mo
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
A/SA-210
A/SA-210
A–1
C
K02707
K03501
60 (415)
70 (485)
1
1
1
2
101
101
11.1
11.1
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
A570‐30
A570‐33
A570‐40
K02502
K02502
K02502
49 (340)
52 (360)
55 (380)
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
C
C
C
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
T2
T12
T11
T17
T22
T21
T5c
T5
T5b
T9
K11547
K11562
K11597
K12047
K21590
K31545
K41245
K41545
K51545
K90941
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
3
4
4
10B
5A
5A
5B
5B
5B
5B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
4.2
5.1
5.1
4.1
5.2
5.2
5.3
5.3
5.3
5.4
0.5Cr–0.5Mo
1Cr–0.5Mo
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
1Cr–V
2.25Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo–Ti
5Cr–0.5Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo–Si
9Cr–1Mo
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
T91
T92
TP201
TP202
XM–19
TP304
K90901
K92460
S20100
S20200
S20910
S30400
85 (585)
90 (620)
95 (655)
90 (620)
100 (690)
75 (515)
15E
15E
8
8
8
8
1
1
3
3
3
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
6.4
6.4
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.1
9Cr–1Mo–V
9Cr–2W
17Cr–4Ni–6Mn
18Cr–5Ni–9Mn
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
18Cr–8Ni
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
TP304L
TP304H
S30403
S30409
70 (485)
75 (515)
8
8
1
1
102
102
8.1
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
A211
A211
A211
2013 SECTION IX
101
A/SA-203
A/SA-203
A/SA-203
A/SA-203
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
TP304N
TP304LN
S30815
S30451
S30453
S30815
80 (550)
75 (515)
87 (600)
8
8
8
1
1
2
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.2
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
21Cr–11Ni–N
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
TP309S
TP309H
TP309Cb
TP309HCb
TP310S
S30908
S30909
S30940
S30941
S31008
75
75
75
75
75
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
23Cr–12Ni
23Cr–12Ni
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
TP310H
TP310Cb
TP310HCb
TP310HCbN
TP310MoLN
TP310MoLN
S31009
S31040
S31041
S31042
S31050
S31050
75
75
75
95
78
84
(515)
(515)
(515)
(655)
(540)
(580)
8
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
3
2
2
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
25Cr–20Ni
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni–Cb–N
25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N
25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube, t > 1/4 in. (6 mm)
tube, t ≤ 1/4 in. (6 mm)
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
TP316
TP316L
TP316H
TP316Ti
TP316N
S31600
S31603
S31609
S31635
S31651
75 (515)
70 (485)
75 (515)
75 (515)
80 (550)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–Ti
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
TP316LN
TP317
TP317L
TP317LM
TP317LMN
TP321
TP321H
S34565
S31653
S31700
S31703
S31725
S31726
S32100
S32109
S34565
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(550)
(515)
(515)
(795)
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
4
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.3
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
19Cr–15Ni–4Mo
19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
24Cr–17Ni–6Mn–4.5Mo–N
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
TP347
TP347H
TP347HFG
TP347LN
TP348
TP348H
S34700
S34709
S34710
S34751
S34800
S34809
75 (515)
75 (515)
80 (550)
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb–N
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
75
75
75
75
80
75
75
115
2013 SECTION IX
102
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
XM–15
S32615
S38100
S32615
75 (515)
80 (550)
8
8
1
1
102
102
8.1
8.1
18Cr–18Ni–2Si
18Cr–20Ni–5.5Si
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
...
K01807
47 (325)
1
1
101
1.1
C
E.R.W. tube
WCA
WCC
WCB
J02502
J02503
J03002
60 (415)
70 (485)
70 (485)
1
1
1
1
2
2
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Si
Castings
Castings
Castings
A/SA-217
A/SA-217
A/SA-217
A/SA-217
A/SA-217
WC6
WC4
WC1
WC9
WC5
J12072
J12082
J12524
J21890
J22000
70
70
65
70
70
(485)
(485)
(450)
(485)
(485)
4
4
3
5A
4
1
1
1
1
1
102
101
101
102
101
5.1
9.1
1.1
5.2
4.2
1.25Cr–0.5Mo
1Ni–0.5Cr–0.5Mo
C–0.5Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
0.75Ni–1Mo–0.75Cr
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
A/SA-217
A/SA-217
A/SA-217
A/SA-217
C5
C12
CA15
C12A
J42045
J82090
J91150
J84090
90 (620)
90 (620)
90 (620)
85 (585)
5B
5B
6
15E
1
1
3
1
102
102
102
102
5.3
5.4
7.2
6.4
5Cr–0.5Mo
9Cr–1Mo
13Cr
9Cr–1Mo–V
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
A/SA-225
A/SA-225
A/SA-225
D
D
C
K12004
K12004
K12524
75 (515)
80 (550)
105 (725)
10A
10A
10A
1
1
1
101
101
101
2.1
2.1
4.1
Mn–0.5Ni–V
Mn–0.5Ni–V
Mn–0.5Ni–V
Plate > 3 in. (76 mm)
Plate, 3 in. (76 mm) & under
Plate
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
WPB
WPC
WP11, Cl. 1
WP12, Cl. 1
WP1
K03006
K03501
...
K12062
K12821
60 (415)
70 (485)
60 (415)
60 (415)
55 (380)
1
1
4
4
3
1
2
1
1
1
101
101
102
101
101
11.1
11.1
5.1
5.1
11.2
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
1Cr–0.5Mo
C–0.5Mo
Piping
Piping
Piping
Piping
Piping
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
WP22, Cl. 1
WPR
WP5, Cl. 1
WP9, Cl. 1
WP91
WP11, Cl.3
WP12, Cl.2
WP22, Cl.3
WP5, Cl.3
K21590
K22035
K41545
K90941
K90901
...
K12062
K21590
K41545
60 (415)
63 (435)
60 (415)
60 (415)
85 (585)
75 (515)
70 (485)
75 (515)
75 (515)
5A
9A
5B
5B
15E
4
4
5A
5B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
101
102
102
102
102
101
102
102
5.2
9.1
5.3
5.4
6.4
5.1
5.1
5.2
5.3
2.25Cr–1Mo
2Ni–1Cu
5Cr–0.5Mo
9Cr–1Mo
9Cr–1Mo–V
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
1Cr–0.5Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo
Piping
Piping
Piping
Piping
Piping
Piping
Piping
Piping
Piping
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
2013 SECTION IX
103
A/SA-214
A/SA-216
A/SA-216
A/SA-216
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
WP9, Cl.3
…
…
Type 904L
K90941
N08367
N08367
N08904
75
95
100
71
(515)
(655)
(690)
(490)
5B
45
45
45
1
…
…
…
102
111
111
111
5.4
8.2
8.2
8.2
9Cr–1Mo
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo
Piping fittings
Plate ≥ 0.1875 in. (5 mm)
Sheet & strip < 0.1875 in. (5 mm)
Plate, sheet & strip
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 201‐1
Type 201‐2
Type 201LN
Type 202
...
Type XM–19
Type XM–19
S20100
S20100
S20153
S20200
S20400
S20910
S20910
75 (515)
95 (655)
95 (655)
90 (620)
95 (655)
100 (690)
105 (725)
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
102
102
...
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
17Cr–4Ni–6Mn
17Cr–4Ni–6Mn
16Cr–4Ni–6Mn
18Cr–5Ni–9Mn
16Cr–9Mn–2Ni–N
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate
Sheet
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type XM–17
Type XM–17
Type XM–18
Type XM–18
S21800
S21600
S21600
S21603
S21603
S21800
90
100
90
100
95
(620)
(690)
(620)
(690)
(655)
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
102
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.1
19Cr–8Mn–6Ni–Mo–N
19Cr–8Mn–6Ni–Mo–N
19Cr–8Mn–6Ni–Mo–N
19Cr–8Mn–6Ni–Mo–N
18Cr–8Ni–4Si–N
Plate
Sheet & strip
Plate
Sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type XM–29
Type 301
Type 302
Type 304
Type 304L
S24000
S30100
S30200
S30400
S30403
100
75
75
75
70
(690)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(485)
8
8
8
8
8
3
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–3Ni–12Mn
17Cr–7Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 304H
Type 304N
Type XM–21
Type XM–21
Type 304LN
S30409
S30451
S30452
S30452
S30453
75 (515)
80 (550)
85 (585)
90 (620)
75 (515)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
Plate,
Plate,
Plate
Sheet
Plate,
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 305
S30600
S30601
S30815
S32615
S30500
S30600
S30601
S30815
S32615
70
78
78
87
80
(485)
(540)
(540)
(600)
(550)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
2
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.1
18Cr–11Ni
18Cr–15Ni–4Si
17.5Cr–17.5Ni–5.3Si
21Cr–11Ni–N
18Cr–20Ni–5.5Si
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 309S
Type 309H
S30908
S30909
75 (515)
75 (515)
8
8
2
2
102
102
8.2
8.2
23Cr–12Ni
23Cr–12Ni
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
sheet & strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
2013 SECTION IX
104
A/SA-234
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
Type 309Cb
Type 309HCb
Type 310S
S30940
S30941
S31008
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
8
8
8
2
2
2
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.2
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 310H
Type 310Cb
Type 310HCb
TP310MoLN
TP310MoLN
S31200
S31009
S31040
S31041
S31050
S31050
S31200
75
75
75
78
84
100
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
S31254
S31254
S31260
S31277
Type 316
Type 316L
Type 316H
S31254
S31254
S31260
S31277
S31600
S31603
S31609
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 316Ti
Type 316Cb
Type 316N
Type 316LN
Type 317
S31635
S31640
S31651
S31653
S31700
75
75
80
75
75
(515)
(515)
(515)
(540)
(580)
(690)
8
8
8
8
8
10H
2
2
2
2
2
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
95 (655)
100 (690)
100 (690)
112 (770)
75 (515)
70 (485)
75 (515)
8
8
10H
45
8
8
8
4
4
1
...
1
1
1
8
8
8
8
8
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 317L
S31725
S31726
S31753
S31803
...
...
...
S31703
S31725
S31726
S31753
S31803
S32003
S32053
S32202
75 (515)
75 (515)
80 (550)
80 (550)
90 (620)
90 (620)
93 (640)
94 (650)
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 321
...
...
Type 321H
2205
S32100
S32101
S32101
S32109
S32205
75
95
101
75
95
(515)
(515)
(550)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(655)
(700)
(515)
(655)
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
10.2
25Cr–20Ni
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N
25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N
25Cr–6Ni–Mo–N
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
102
102
102
111
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
10.2
8.2
8.1
8.1
8.1
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
25Cr–6.5Ni–3Mo–N
27Ni–22Cr–7Mo–Mn–Cu
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
Plate
Sheet
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
& strip
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–Ti
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–Cb
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
8
8
8
8
10H
10H
8
10H
1
4
4
1
1
1
4
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
10.1
10.1
8.2
10.1
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
19Cr–15Ni–4Mo
19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo–N
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
21Cr–3.5Ni–Mo–N
23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N
22Cr–2Ni–Mo–N
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
sheet & strip
8
10H
10H
8
10H
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
10.1
10.1
8.1
10.1
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
21Cr–5Mn–1.5Ni–Cu–N
21Cr–5Mn–1.5Ni–Cu–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip, t > 1/4 in. (6 mm)
& strip, t ≤ 1/4 in. (6 mm)
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip > 0.25 in. (6 mm)
& strip ≤ 0.25 in. (6 mm)
& strip
& strip
2013 SECTION IX
105
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
S32550
S32750
S32760
S32550
S32750
S32760
110 (760)
116 (800)
108 (745)
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
102
102
102
10.2
10.2
10.2
25Cr–5Ni–3Mo–2Cu
25Cr–7Ni–4Mo–N
25Cr–8Ni–3Mo–W–Cu–N
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 329
S32906
S32906
S32950
S34565
Type 347
S32900
S32906
S32906
S32950
S34565
S34700
90
109
116
100
115
75
10H
10H
10H
10H
8
8
1
1
1
1
4
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
10.2
10.2
10.2
10.2
8.3
8.1
26Cr–4Ni–Mo
29Cr–6.5Ni–2Mo–N
29Cr–6.5Ni–2Mo–N
26Cr–4Ni–Mo–N
24Cr–17Ni–6Mn–4.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
& strip
& strip ≥ 0.40 in. (10 mm)
& strip < 0.40 in. (10 mm)
& strip
& strip
& strip
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 347H
Type 348
Type 348H
Type XM–15
Type 405
S34709
S34800
S34809
S38100
S40500
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
60 (415)
8
8
8
8
7
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
7.1
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–18Ni–2Si
12Cr–1Al
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 409
Type 409
Type 409
Type 410
Type 410S
S40910
S40920
S40930
S41000
S41008
55
55
55
65
60
(380)
(380)
(380)
(450)
(415)
7
7
7
6
7
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.2
7.2
11Cr–Ti
11Cr–Ti
11Cr–Ti
13Cr
13Cr
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
S41500
Type 429
Type 430
Type 439
S44400
Type XM–33
S41500
S42900
S43000
S43035
S44400
S44626
115
65
65
60
60
68
(795)
(450)
(450)
(415)
(415)
(470)
6
6
7
7
7
10I
4
2
2
2
2
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
7.2
7.2
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
13Cr–4.5Ni–Mo
15Cr
17Cr
18Cr–Ti
18Cr–2Mo
27Cr–1Mo–Ti
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
Type XM–27
S43932
S44635
S44660
S44700
S44800
…
…
S44627
S43932
S44635
S44660
S44700
S44800
N08367
N08367
65 (450)
60 (415)
90 (620)
85 (585)
80 (550)
80 (550)
95 (655)
100 (690)
10I
7
10I
10K
10J
10K
45
45
1
2
1
1
1
1
…
…
102
102
102
102
102
102
111
111
7.1
...
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
8.2
8.2
27Cr–1Mo
18Cr–Ti–Cb
25Cr–4Ni–4Mo–Ti
26Cr–3Ni–3Mo
29Cr–4Mo
29Cr–4Mo–2Ni
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Welded tube > 0.1875 in. (5 mm)
Welded tube ≤ 0.1875 in. (5 mm)
(620)
(750)
(800)
(690)
(795)
(515)
2013 SECTION IX
106
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
...
TP201
TP202
TPXM–19
TPXM–29
TP304
N08904
S20100
S20200
S20910
S24000
S30400
71 (490)
95 (655)
90 (620)
100 (690)
100 (690)
75 (515)
45
8
8
8
8
8
...
3
3
3
3
1
111
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.1
44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo
17Cr–4Ni–6Mn
18Cr–5Ni–9Mn
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
18Cr–3Ni–12Mn
18Cr–8Ni
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
TP304L
TP304H
TP304N
TP304LN
S30815
S30403
S30409
S30451
S30453
S30815
70
75
80
75
87
(485)
(515)
(550)
(515)
(600)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
2
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
21Cr–11Ni–N
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
TP309S
TP309H
TP309Cb
TP309HCb
TP310S
S30908
S30909
S30940
S30941
S31008
75
75
75
75
75
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
23Cr–12Ni
23Cr–12Ni
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
TP310H
TP310Cb
TP310HCb
TP310MoLN
TP310MoLN
S31009
S31040
S31041
S31050
S31050
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
78 (540)
84 (580)
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
25Cr–20Ni
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N
25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
tube
tube
tube
tube, t > 1/4 in. (6 mm)
tube, t ≤ 1/4 in. (6 mm)
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
S31254
S31254
TP316
TP316L
TP316H
TP316N
TP316LN
TP317
S31254
S31254
S31600
S31603
S31609
S31651
S31653
S31700
95
98
75
70
75
80
75
75
(655)
(675)
(515)
(485)
(515)
(550)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
tube, t > 3/16 in. (5 mm)
tube, t ≤ 3/16 in. (5 mm)
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
TP317L
S31725
S31726
...
S31703
S31725
S31726
S32053
75
75
80
93
(515)
(515)
(550)
(640)
8
8
8
8
1
4
4
4
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
19Cr–15Ni–4Mo
19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo
23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
2013 SECTION IX
107
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Welding
Brazing
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
TP321
TP321H
S32100
S32109
75 (515)
75 (515)
8
8
1
1
102
102
8.1
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
Welded tube
Welded tube
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
TP347
TP347H
TP348
TP348H
TPXM–15
S34700
S34709
S34800
S34809
S38100
75
75
75
75
75
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–18Ni–2Si
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
A/SA-250
A/SA-250
A/SA-250
A/SA-250
A/SA-250
T1b
T1
T2
T11
T1a
K11422
K11522
K11547
K11597
K12023
53
55
60
60
60
(365)
(380)
(415)
(415)
(415)
3
3
3
4
3
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
102
101
1.1
1.1
4.2
5.1
1.1
C–0.5Mo
C–0.5Mo
0.5Cr–0.5Mo
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
C–0.5Mo
E.R.W.
E.R.W.
E.R.W.
E.R.W.
E.R.W.
A/SA-250
A/SA-250
T12
T22
K11562
K21590
60 (415)
60 (415)
4
5A
1
1
102
102
5.1
5.2
1Cr–0.5Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
E.R.W. tube
E.R.W. tube
A254
A254
Cl.1
Cl.2
K01001
K01001
42 (290)
42 (290)
...
...
...
...
101
101
NA
NA
C
C
Cu brazed tube
Cu brazed tube
A/SA-266
A/SA-266
A/SA-266
A/SA-266
4
1
2
3
K03017
K03506
K03506
K05001
70
60
70
75
(485)
(415)
(485)
(515)
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
101
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.2
C–Mn–Si
C–Si
C–Si
C–Si
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
TP405
S40800
TP409
TP410
S41500
S40500
S40800
S40900
S41000
S41500
60 (415)
55 (380)
55 (380)
60 (415)
115 (795)
7
7
7
6
6
1
1
1
1
4
102
102
102
102
102
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.2
7.2
12Cr–1Al
12Cr–Ti
11Cr–Ti
13Cr
13Cr–4.5Ni–Mo
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
TP429
TP430
TP439
TP430Ti
18Cr–2Mo
TP446–2
TP446–1
TPXM–33
S42900
S43000
S43035
S43036
S44400
S44600
S44600
S44626
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
65 (450)
70 (485)
68 (470)
6
7
7
7
7
10I
10I
10I
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
7.2
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
15Cr
17Cr
18Cr–Ti
18Cr–Ti
18Cr–2Mo
27Cr
27Cr
27Cr–1Mo–Ti
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
P‐No.
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
2013 SECTION IX
108
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
S44627
S44635
S44660
S44700
S44735
S44800
65 (450)
90 (620)
85 (585)
80 (550)
75 (515)
80 (550)
10I
10I
10K
10J
10J
10K
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
27Cr–1Mo
25Cr–4Ni–4Mo–Ti
26Cr–3Ni–3Mo
29Cr–4Mo
29Cr–4Mo–Ti
29Cr–4Mo–2Ni
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A269
A269
A269
A269
TP316
TP316L
TP304
TP304L
S31600
S31603
S30400
S30403
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-276
A/SA-276
A/SA-276
A/SA-276
A/SA-276
A/SA-276
TP304
TP304L
TP316
TP316L
S32205
TP410
S30400
S30403
S31600
S31603
S32205
S41000
75
70
75
70
95
70
8
8
8
8
10H
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
10.1
7.2
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
13Cr
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
A/SA-283
A/SA-283
A/SA-283
A/SA-283
A
B
C
D
K01400
K01702
K02401
K02702
45 (310)
50 (345)
55 (380)
60 (415)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
C
C
C
C
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-285
A/SA-285
A/SA-285
A
B
C
K01700
K02200
K02801
45 (310)
50 (345)
55 (380)
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
11.1
C
C
C
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-299
A/SA-299
A
B
K02803
K02803
75 (515)
80 (550)
1
1
2
3
101
101
11.1
11.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
Plate
Plate
A/SA-302
A/SA-302
A/SA-302
A/SA-302
A/SA-312
A
B
C
D
N08367
K12021
K12022
K12039
K12054
N08367
75
80
80
80
95
(515)
(550)
(550)
(550)
(655)
3
3
3
3
45
2
3
3
3
…
101
101
101
101
111
1.1
1.2
...
...
8.2
Mn–0.5Mo
Mn–0.5Mo
Mn–0.5Mo–0.5Ni
Mn–0.5Mo–0.75Ni
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
A/SA-312
N08367
N08367
100 (690)
45
…
111
8.2
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Smls. & welded pipe > 0.1875 in.
(5 mm)
Smls. & welded pipe ≤ 0.1875 in.
(5 mm)
...
...
...
...
(515)
(485)
(515)
(485)
(655)
(485)
2013 SECTION IX
109
TPXM–27
25–4–4
26–3–3
29–4
S44735
29–4–2
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
…
N08904
71 (490)
45
…
111
8.2
44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo
Smls. & welded pipe
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
TPXM–19
TPXM–11
TPXM–29
TP304
TP304L
TP304H
TP304N
TP304LN
S20910
S21904
S24000
S30400
S30403
S30409
S30451
S30453
100 (690)
90 (620)
100 (690)
75 (515)
70 (485)
75 (515)
80 (550)
75 (515)
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
21Cr–6Ni–9Mn
18Cr–3Ni–12Mn
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
S30600
S30815
S32615
TP309S
S30600
S30815
S32615
S30908
78
87
80
75
(540)
(600)
(550)
(515)
8
8
8
8
1
2
1
2
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.2
8.1
8.2
18Cr–15Ni–4Si
21Cr–11Ni–N
18Cr–20Ni–5.5Si
23Cr–12Ni
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
TP309H
TP309Cb
TP309HCb
TP310S
TP310H
S30909
S30940
S30941
S31008
S31009
75
75
75
75
75
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
23Cr–12Ni
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni
25Cr–20Ni
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
TP310Cb
TP310HCb
TP310MoLN
TP310MoLN
S31254
S31040
S31041
S31050
S31050
S31254
75
75
78
84
95
(515)
(515)
(540)
(580)
(655)
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
4
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N
25Cr–22Ni–2Mo–N
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe, t > 1/4 in. (6 mm)
Smls. & welded pipe, t ≤ 1/4 in. (6 mm)
Smls. & welded pipe, t > 3/16 in. (5 mm)
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
S31254
TP316
TP316L
TP316H
TP316Ti
S31254
S31600
S31603
S31609
S31635
98
75
70
75
75
(675)
(515)
(485)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
4
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–Ti
Smls. & welded pipe, t ≤ 3/16 in. (5 mm)
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
TP316N
TP316LN
TP317
TP317L
S31725
S31651
S31653
S31700
S31703
S31725
80
75
75
75
75
(550)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
4
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
19Cr–15Ni–4Mo
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
110
A/SA-312
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
S31726
...
TP321
TP321
TP321
TP321H
S31726
S32053
S32100
S32100
S32100
S32109
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
TP321H
TP321H
S34565
TP347
TP347H
TP347LN
TP348
TP348H
A/SA-312
80
93
70
75
75
70
(550)
(640)
(485)
(515)
(515)
(485)
8
8
8
8
8
8
4
4
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.2
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo
23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. pipe > 3/8 in. (10 mm)
Smls. pipe ≤ 3/8 in. (10 mm)
Welded pipe
Smls. pipe > 3/8 in. (10 mm)
S32109
S32109
S34565
S34700
S34709
S34751
S34800
S34809
75 (515)
75 (515)
115 (795)
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
24Cr–17Ni–6Mn–4.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb–N
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Smls. pipe ≤ 3/8 in. (10 mm)
Welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
TPXM–15
S38100
75 (515)
8
1
102
8.1
18Cr–18Ni–2Si
Smls. & welded pipe
A/SA-333
A/SA-333
A/SA-333
A/SA-333
A/SA-333
6
1
10
4
7
K03006
K03008
...
K11267
K21903
60 (415)
55 (380)
80 (550)
60 (415)
65 (450)
1
1
1
4
9A
1
1
3
2
1
101
101
101
102
101
11.1
11.1
11.1
4.1
9.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn
C–Mn–Si
0.75Cr–0.75Ni–Cu–Al
2.5Ni
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
A/SA-333
A/SA-333
A/SA-333
9
3
8
K22035
K31918
K81340
63 (435)
65 (450)
100 (690)
9A
9B
11A
1
1
1
101
101
101
9.1
9.2
9.3
2Ni–1Cu
3.5Ni
9Ni
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
A/SA-334
A/SA-334
A/SA-334
A/SA-334
A/SA-334
A/SA-334
6
1
7
9
3
8
K03006
K03008
K21903
K22035
K31918
K81340
60
55
65
63
65
100
(415)
(380)
(450)
(435)
(450)
(690)
1
1
9A
9A
9B
11A
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
9.1
9.1
9.2
9.3
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn
2.5Ni
2Ni–1Cu
3.5Ni
9Ni
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
P1
P2
P12
P15
K11522
K11547
K11562
K11578
55
55
60
60
(380)
(380)
(415)
(415)
3
3
4
3
1
1
1
1
101
101
102
101
1.1
4.2
5.1
...
C–0.5Mo
0.5Cr–0.5Mo
1Cr–0.5Mo
1.5Si–0.5Mo
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
111
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
P11
K11597
60 (415)
4
1
102
5.1
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
Smls. pipe
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
P22
P21
P5c
P5
P5b
K21590
K31545
K41245
K41545
K51545
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
5A
5A
5B
5B
5B
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
5.2
5.2
5.3
5.3
5.3
2.25Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo–Ti
5Cr–0.5Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo–Si
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
P9
P91
P92
K90941
K90901
K92460
60 (415)
85 (585)
90 (620)
5B
15E
15E
1
1
1
102
102
102
5.4
6.4
6.4
9Cr–1Mo
9Cr–1Mo–V
9Cr–2W
Smls. pipe
Smls. pipe
Smls. pipe
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
F3VCb
F6
F12
F11, Cl. 1
F11, Cl. 2
F11, Cl. 3
F1
F22, Cl. 1
K31390
S41000
K11564
K11597
K11572
K11572
K12520
K21590
85 (585)
85 (585)
70 (485)
60 (415)
70 (485)
75 (515)
70 (485)
60 (415)
5C
6
4
4
4
4
3
5A
1
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
101
102
6.2
7.2
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
1.1
5.2
3Cr–1Mo–0.25V–Cb–Ca
13Cr
1Cr–0.5Mo
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
C–0.5Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
F22, Cl. 3
F21, Cl. 1
F21, Cl. 3
F3V
F22V
K21590
K31545
K31545
K31830
K31835
75 (515)
60 (415)
75 (515)
85 (585)
85 (585)
5A
5A
5A
5C
5C
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
5.2
5.2
5.2
6.2
6.2
2.25Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B
2.25Cr–1Mo–V
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
F5
F5A
F9
F91
K41545
K42544
K90941
K90901
60 (415)
80 (550)
85 (585)
85 (585)
5B
5B
5B
15E
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
5.3
5.3
5.4
6.4
5Cr–0.5Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo
9Cr–1Mo
9Cr–1Mo–V
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-350
A/SA-350
A/SA-350
A/SA-350
A/SA-350
A/SA-350
A/SA-350
LF1
LF2
LF6, Cl. 2
LF5, Cl. 1
LF5, Cl. 2
LF9
LF3
K03009
K03011
K12202
K13050
K13050
K22036
K32025
60 (415)
70 (485)
75 (515)
60 (415)
70 (485)
63 (435)
70 (485)
1
1
1
9A
9A
9A
9B
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
4.1
9.1
9.1
9.1
9.2
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si–V
1.5Ni
1.5Ni
2Ni–1Cu
3.5Ni
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
112
A/SA-335
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
CF3
CF3A
CF8
CF8A
CF8C
J92500
J92500
J92600
J92600
J92710
70
77
70
77
70
(485)
(530)
(485)
(530)
(485)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
CF3M
CF8M
CF10
CF10M
CG8M
J92800
J92900
J92590
J92901
J93000
70
70
70
70
75
(485)
(485)
(485)
(485)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo
19Cr–9Ni–0.5Mo
19Cr–9Ni–2Mo
19Cr–10Ni–3Mo
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
CK3MCuN
CD3MWCuN
CH8
CH20
CG6MMN
J93254
J93380
J93400
J93402
J93790
80
100
65
70
85
(550)
(690)
(450)
(485)
(585)
8
10H
8
8
8
4
1
2
2
3
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
10.2
8.2
8.2
8.3
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
25Cr–8Ni–3Mo–W–Cu–N
25Cr–12Ni
25Cr–12Ni
22Cr–12Ni–5Mn
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
CK20
CN7M
CT15C
CN3MN
J94202
N08007
N08151
J94651
65
62
63
80
(450)
(425)
(435)
(550)
8
45
45
45
2
...
...
...
102
111
111
111
8.2
8.2
45
8.2
25Cr–20Ni
28Ni–19Cr–Cu–Mo
32Ni–45Fe–20Cr–Cb
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
CE20N
CF10MC
CH10
HK30
J92802
J92971
J93401
J94203
80
70
70
65
(550)
(485)
(485)
(450)
8
8
8
8
2
1
2
2
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.1
8.2
8.2
25Cr–8Ni–N
16Cr–14Ni–2Mo
25Cr–12Ni
25Cr–20Ni–0.5Mo
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
HK40
HT30
J94204
N08603
62 (425)
65 (450)
8
45
2
...
102
111
8.2
45
25Cr–20Ni–0.5Mo
35Ni–15Cr–0.5Mo
Castings
Castings
A/SA-352
A/SA-352
A/SA-352
A/SA-352
A/SA-352
LCA
LCC
LCB
LC1
LC2
J02504
J02505
J03003
J12522
J22500
60
70
65
65
70
(415)
(485)
(450)
(450)
(485)
1
1
1
3
9A
1
2
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
1.1
1.1
9.1
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Si
C–0.5Mo
2.5Ni
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
A/SA-352
A/SA-352
LC3
LC4
J31550
J41500
70 (485)
70 (485)
9B
9C
1
1
101
101
9.3
9.3
3.5Ni
4.5Ni
Castings
Castings
2013 SECTION IX
113
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
A/SA-352
A/SA-352
A/SA-353
J42215
J91540
K81340
105 (725)
110 (760)
100 (690)
11A
6
11A
5
4
1
102
102
101
9.2
7.2
9.3
1
2
6
8
9
J03502
J12523
J12073
J11697
J21610
70 (485)
65 (450)
70 (485)
80 (550)
85 (585)
1
3
4
4
4
2
1
1
1
1
101
101
102
102
102
11.1
...
5.1
...
...
A356
A356
A/SA-358
10
12A
N08367
J22090
J84090
N08367
85 (585)
85 (585)
95 (655)
5A
15E
45
1
1
…
102
102
111
A/SA-358
N08367
N08367
100 (690)
45
…
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
XM–19
XM–29
304
304L
304H
S20910
S24000
S30400
S30403
S30409
100
100
75
70
75
(690)
(690)
(515)
(485)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
304N
304LN
S30815
309S
309Cb
310S
310Cb
S31254
316
S30451
S30453
S30815
S30908
S30940
S31008
S31040
S31254
S31600
80
75
87
75
75
75
75
94
75
(550)
(515)
(600)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(650)
(515)
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
316L
316H
316N
316LN
S31725
S31603
S31609
S31651
S31653
S31725
70
75
80
75
75
(485)
(515)
(550)
(515)
(515)
A356
A356
A356
A356
A356
114
3Ni–1.5Cr–0.5Mo
13Cr–4Ni
9Ni
Castings
Castings
Plate
C–Si
C–0.5Mo
1.25Cr–0.5Mo
1Cr–1Mo–V
1Cr–1Mo–V
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
5.2
6.4
8.2
2.25Cr–1Mo
9Cr–1Mo–V
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
111
8.2
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Castings
Castings
Fusion welded pipe > 0.1875 in.
(5 mm)
Fusion welded pipe ≤ 0.1875 in.
(5 mm)
3
3
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
18Cr–3Ni–12Mn
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.1
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
21Cr–11Ni–N
23Cr–12Ni
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
4
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
19Cr–15Ni–4Mo
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
LC2–1
CA6NM
...
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
S31726
...
321
347
348
S31726
S32053
S32100
S34700
S34800
80
93
75
75
75
(550)
(640)
(515)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
4
4
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.2
8.1
8.1
8.1
19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo
23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
FPA
FPB
FP1
FP2
FP12
K02501
K03006
K11522
K11547
K11562
48
60
55
55
60
(330)
(415)
(380)
(380)
(415)
1
1
3
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
102
1.1
1.1
1.1
4.2
5.1
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–0.5Mo
0.5Cr–0.5Mo
1Cr–0.5Mo
Forged
Forged
Forged
Forged
Forged
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
FP11
FP22
FP21
FP5
FP9
FP91
FP92
K11597
K21590
K31545
K41545
K90941
K90901
K92460
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
85 (585)
90 (620)
4
5A
5A
5B
5B
15E
15E
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
5.1
5.2
5.2
5.3
5.4
6.4
6.4
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
2.25Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo
9Cr–1Mo
9Cr–1Mo–V
9Cr–2W
Forged
Forged
Forged
Forged
Forged
Forged
Forged
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
A/SA-372
A/SA-372
A
B
K03002
K04001
60 (415)
75 (515)
1
1
1
2
101
101
11.1
11.1
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
16–8–2H
TP304
TP304
TP304H
TP304N
S16800
S30400
S30400
S30409
S30451
75 (515)
70 (485)
75 (515)
75 (515)
80 (550)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
16Cr–8Ni–2Mo
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni–N
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
pipe
pipe ≥ 0.812 in. (21 mm)
pipe < 0.812 in. (21 mm)
pipe
pipe
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
TP304LN
TP316
TP316H
TP316N
TP316LN
S31725
S31726
TP321
TP321
S30453
S31600
S31609
S31651
S31653
S31725
S31726
S32100
S32100
75
75
75
80
75
75
80
70
75
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–8Ni–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
19Cr–15Ni–4Mo
19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe > 3/8 in. (10 mm)
pipe ≤ 3/8 in. (10 mm)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(550)
(515)
(515)
(550)
(485)
(515)
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
115
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
S32109
S32109
S34565
S34700
S34709
S34800
70 (485)
75 (515)
115 (795)
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
4
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
A381
A381
A381
A381
A381
Y35
Y42
Y48
Y46
Y50
...
...
...
...
...
60
60
62
63
64
(415)
(415)
(425)
(435)
(440)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
A381
A381
A381
Y52
Y56
Y60
...
...
...
66 (455)
71 (490)
75 (515)
1
1
1
2
2
2
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
12, Cl. 1
12, Cl. 2
11, Cl. 1
11, Cl. 2
2, Cl. 1
K11757
K11757
K11789
K11789
K12143
55 (380)
65 (450)
60 (415)
75 (515)
55 (380)
4
4
4
4
3
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
2, Cl. 2
22, Cl. 1
22, Cl. 2
21, Cl. 1
21, Cl. 2
K12143
K21590
K21590
K31545
K31545
70
60
75
60
75
(485)
(415)
(515)
(415)
(515)
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
5, Cl. 1
5, Cl. 2
9, Cl. 1
9, Cl. 2
91, Cl. 2
K41545
K41545
K90941
K90941
K90901
60 (415)
75 (515)
60 (415)
75 (515)
85 (585)
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
WPXM–19
WP304
WP304L
WP304H
S20910
S30400
S30403
S30409
100
75
70
75
(690)
(515)
(485)
(515)
pipe > 3/8 in. (10 mm)
pipe ≤ 3/8 in. (10 mm)
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
24Cr–17Ni–6Mn–4.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
C
C
C
C
C
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
11.1
C
C
C
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
101
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
4.2
1Cr–0.5Mo
1Cr–0.5Mo
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
0.5Cr–0.5Mo
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
3
5A
5A
5A
5A
2
1
1
1
1
101
102
102
102
102
4.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
0.5Cr–0.5Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
5B
5B
5B
5B
15E
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
5.3
5.3
5.4
5.4
6.4
5Cr–0.5Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo
9Cr-1Mo
9Cr-1Mo
9Cr–1Mo–V
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
8
8
8
8
3
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
piping
piping
piping
piping
2013 SECTION IX
116
TP321H
TP321H
S34565
TP347
TP347H
TP348
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
WP304N
WP304LN
WP309
S30451
S30453
S30900
80 (550)
75 (515)
75 (515)
8
8
8
1
1
2
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.2
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
23Cr–12Ni
Wrought piping fittings
Wrought piping fittings
Wrought piping fittings
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
WP310S
WP316
WP316L
...
WP316H
S31008
S31600
S31603
S31254
S31609
75
75
70
94
75
(515)
(515)
(485)
(650)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
2
1
1
4
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.1
25Cr–20Ni
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
piping
piping
piping
piping
piping
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
WP316N
WP316LN
WP317
WP317L
...
WP321
S31651
S31653
S31700
S31703
S32053
S32100
80
75
75
75
93
75
(550)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(640)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
4
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
piping
piping
piping
piping
piping
piping
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
A/SA-403
WP321H
S32109
75 (515)
8
1
102
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
Wrought piping fittings
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
S34565
WP347
WP347H
WP348
WP348H
S34565
S34700
S34709
S34800
S34809
115
75
75
75
75
(795)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
4
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
24Cr–17Ni–6Mn–4.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
Wrought
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
TP304
TP304L
S30815
TP309S
TP309Cb
S30400
S30403
S30815
S30908
S30940
75
70
87
75
75
(515)
(485)
(600)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
2
2
2
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.2
8.2
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
21Cr–11Ni–N
23Cr–12Ni
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
TP310S
TP310Cb
S31254
TP316
TP316L
S31008
S31040
S31254
S31600
S31603
75
75
94
75
70
(515)
(515)
(650)
(515)
(485)
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
4
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.1
8.1
25Cr–20Ni
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
TP317
S31725
S31726
S31700
S31725
S31726
75 (515)
75 (515)
80 (550)
8
8
8
1
4
4
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
19Cr–15Ni–4Mo
19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
piping
piping
piping
piping
piping
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
2013 SECTION IX
117
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
...
TP321
TP347
S34565
TP348
S32053
S32100
S34700
S34565
S34800
93
75
75
115
75
A/SA-414
A/SA-414
A/SA-414
A/SA-414
A/SA-414
A
B
C
D
E
K01501
K02201
K02503
K02505
K02704
45
50
55
60
65
A/SA-414
A/SA-414
F
G
K03102
K03103
A/SA-420
A/SA-420
A/SA-420
A/SA-420
WPL6
WPL9
WPL3
WPL8
K03006
K22035
K31918
K81340
A/SA-423
A/SA-423
1
2
K11535
K11540
60 (415)
60 (415)
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
CP15
CP2
CP12
CP11
CP1
CP22
J11522
J11547
J11562
J12072
J12521
J21890
60
60
60
70
65
70
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
CP21
CP5
CP5b
CP9
CPCA15
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
CPF8
CPF8A
CPF8C
CPF8M
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
Group
No.
(640)
(515)
(515)
(795)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
4
1
1
4
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.1
8.1
8.3
8.1
(310)
(345)
(380)
(415)
(450)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
70 (485)
75 (515)
1
1
2
2
1
9A
9B
11A
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
11.1
C
C
C
C–Mn
C–Mn
Sheet
Sheet
Sheet
Sheet
Sheet
101
101
11.1
11.1
C–Mn
C–Mn
Sheet
Sheet
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
11.1
9.1
9.2
9.3
C–Mn–Si
2Ni–1Cu
3.5Ni
9Ni
Piping
Piping
Piping
Piping
4
4
2
2
102
102
5.1
5.1
0.75Cr–0.5Ni–Cu
0.75Ni–0.5Cu–Mo
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded tube
(415)
(415)
(415)
(485)
(450)
(485)
3
3
4
4
3
5A
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
102
102
101
102
1.1
4.2
5.1
5.1
1.1
5.2
C–0.5Mo–Si
0.5Cr–0.5Mo
1Cr–0.5Mo
1.25Cr–0.5Mo
C–0.5Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
cast
cast
cast
cast
cast
cast
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
J31545
J42045
J51545
J82090
J91150
60 (415)
90 (620)
60 (415)
90 (620)
90 (620)
5A
5B
5B
5B
6
1
1
1
1
3
102
102
102
102
102
5.2
5.3
5.3
5.4
7.2
3Cr–1Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo
5Cr–1.5Si–0.5Mo
9Cr–1Mo
13Cr
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
cast
cast
cast
cast
cast
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
J92600
J92600
J92710
J92900
70
77
70
70
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
cast
cast
cast
cast
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
60
63
65
100
(415)
(435)
(450)
(690)
(485)
(530)
(485)
(485)
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
118
23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
24Cr–17Ni–6Mn–4.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
fitting
fitting
fitting
fitting
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
CPF3
J92500
70 (485)
8
1
102
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
Centrifugal cast pipe
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
CPF3M
CPF3A
CPH8
CPH20
CPK20
J92800
J92500
J93400
J93402
J94202
70
77
65
70
65
(485)
(530)
(450)
(485)
(450)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
2
2
2
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.2
8.2
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
18Cr–8Ni
25Cr–12Ni
25Cr–12Ni
25Cr–20Ni
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
Centrifugal
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
CPF10MC
CPE20N
J92971
J92802
70 (485)
80 (550)
8
8
1
2
102
102
8.1
8.2
16Cr–14Ni–2Mo
25Cr–8Ni–N
Centrifugal cast pipe
Centrifugal cast pipe
A/SA-455
...
K03300
70 (485)
1
2
101
11.2
C–Mn–Si
Plate > 0.580 in. – 0.750 in. (15 mm
– 19 mm)
A/SA-455
...
K03300
73 (505)
1
2
101
11.2
C–Mn–Si
Plate > 0.375 in. – 0.580 in. (10 mm
– 15 mm)
A/SA-455
A479
...
904L
K03300
N08904
75 (515)
71 (490)
1
45
2
…
101
111
11.2
8.2
C–Mn–Si
44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo
Plate, up to 0.375 in. (10 mm)
Bars & shapes
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
XM–19
XM–17
XM–18
S21800
XM–11
S20910
S21600
S21603
S21800
S21904
100 (690)
90 (620)
90 (620)
95 (655)
90 (620)
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
102
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.1
8.3
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
19Cr–8Mn–6Ni–Mo–N
19Cr–8Mn–6Ni–Mo–N
18Cr–8Ni–4Si–N
21Cr–6Ni–9Mn
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
XM–29
302
304
304L
304H
S24000
S30200
S30400
S30403
S30409
100
75
75
70
75
(690)
(515)
(515)
(485)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
3
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–3Ni–12Mn
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
&
&
&
&
&
shapes
shapes
shapes
shapes
shapes
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
304N
304LN
S30600
S30815
S30451
S30453
S30600
S30815
80
75
78
87
(550)
(515)
(540)
(600)
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
2
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–15Ni–4Si
21Cr–11Ni–N
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
&
&
&
&
shapes
shapes
shapes
shapes
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
309S
309Cb
310S
S30908
S30940
S31008
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
8
8
8
2
2
2
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.2
23Cr–12Ni
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni
Bars & shapes
Bars & shapes
Bars & shapes
cast
cast
cast
cast
cast
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
119
A/SA-451
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Welding
Brazing
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
310Cb
S31254
S31040
S31254
75 (515)
95 (655)
8
8
2
4
102
102
8.2
8.2
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
Bars & shapes
Bars & shapes
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
316
316L
316H
316Ti
S31600
S31603
S31609
S31635
75
70
75
75
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–Ti
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
&
&
&
&
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
316Cb
316N
316LN
S31725
S31726
...
...
...
321
...
321H
2205
S32550
S32615
S32750
S32906
S34565
S31640
S31651
S31653
S31725
S31726
S31803
S32053
S32202
S32100
S32101
S32109
S32205
S32550
S32615
S32750
S32906
S34565
8
8
8
8
8
10H
8
10H
8
10H
8
10H
10H
8
10H
10H
8
1
1
1
4
4
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
10.1
8.2
10.1
8.1
10.1
8.1
10.1
10.2
8.1
10.2
10.2
8.3
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–Cb
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
19Cr–15Ni–4Mo
19Cr–15.5Ni–4Mo
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N
22Cr–2Ni–Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
21Cr–5Mn–1.5Ni–Cu–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
25Cr–5Ni–3Mo–2Cu
18Cr–20Ni–5.5Si
25Cr–7Ni–4Mo–N
29Cr–6.5Ni–2Mo–N
24Cr–17Ni–6Mn–4.5Mo–N
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
& shapes
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
347
347H
348
348H
403
S34700
S34709
S34800
S34809
S40300
75
75
75
75
70
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(485)
8
8
8
8
6
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
7.1
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
12Cr
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
&
&
&
&
&
shapes
shapes
shapes
shapes
shapes
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
405
410
414
S41500
430
S40500
S41000
S41400
S41500
S43000
60
70
115
115
70
(415)
(485)
(795)
(795)
(485)
7
6
6
6
7
1
1
4
4
2
102
102
102
102
102
7.1
7.2
7.2
7.2
7.1
12Cr–1Al
13Cr
12.5Cr–2Ni–Si
13Cr–4.5Ni–Mo
17Cr
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
&
&
&
&
&
shapes
shapes
shapes
shapes
shapes
A/SA-479
439
S43035
70 (485)
7
2
102
7.1
18Cr–Ti
Bars & shapes
P‐No.
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
(515)
(485)
(515)
(515)
2013 SECTION IX
120
75 (515)
80 (550)
75 (515)
75 (515)
80 (550)
90 (620)
93 (640)
94 (650)
75 (515)
94 (650)
75 (515)
95 (655)
110 (760)
80 (550)
116 (800)
109 (750)
115 (795)
shapes
shapes
shapes
shapes
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
Group
No.
(415)
(450)
(485)
(485)
7
10I
10J
10K
2
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
18Cr–2Mo
27Cr–1Mo
29Cr–4Mo
29Cr–4Mo–2Ni
Bars
Bars
Bars
Bars
70 (485)
85 (585)
90 (620)
85 (585)
90 (620)
1
10A
10A
3
3
2
1
1
3
3
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
Low C–Mn–Ni
Mn–V
Mn–V
Mn–0.25Mo–V
Mn–0.25Mo–V
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
(620)
(725)
(795)
(585)
(690)
3
11A
11A
5C
5C
3
3
3
1
4
101
101
101
102
102
3.1
3.1
3.1
5.2
5.2
0.5Ni–0.5Cr–0.25Mo–V
0.5Ni–0.5Cr–0.25Mo–V
0.5Ni–0.5Cr–0.25Mo–V
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
(725)
(620)
(620)
(620)
(690)
5C
6
6
6
6
4
3
3
3
3
102
102
102
102
102
5.2
7.2
7.2
7.2
7.2
2.25Cr–1Mo
13Cr–Mo
13Cr
13Cr
13Cr
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
J91540
J91540
100 (690)
110 (760)
6
6
4
4
102
102
7.2
7.2
13Cr–4Ni
13Cr–4Ni
Castings
Castings
M35-2
CY40
CU5MCuC
M30C
M35-1
CX2MW
CW2M
CW6MC
N7M
CW6M
N04020
N06040
N08826
N24130
N24135
N26022
N26455
N26625
N30007
N30107
65 (450)
70 (485)
75 (515)
65 (450)
65 (450)
80 (550)
72 (495)
70 (485)
76 (525)
72 (495)
42
43
45
42
42
43
43
43
44
44
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
110
111
111
110
110
111
111
111
112
112
42
43
45
42
42
44
43
43
44
44
67Ni–30Cu–Fe–Si
72Ni–15Cr–8Fe–Si
42Ni–21.5Cr–3Mo–2.3Cu
67Ni–30Cu–2Fe–Cb
67Ni–30Cu–2Fe–Cb
59Ni–22Cr–14Mo–4Fe–3W
66Ni–16Mo–16Cr–Fe–W
60Ni–21.5Cr–9Mo–4Cb–Fe
65Ni–31.5Mo–1.5Fe–Cr
56Ni–19Mo–18Cr–2Fe
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
C
B
K02705
K03000
62 (425)
58 (400)
1
1
1
1
101
101
1.2
11.1
C
C
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded tube
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
S44400
XM–27
S44700
S44800
S44400
S44627
S44700
S44800
60
65
70
70
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
Gr. 16, Cl. A
Gr. 1, Cl. A
Gr. 1, Cl. B
Gr. 2, Cl. A
Gr. 2, Cl. B
J31200
J13002
J13002
J13005
J13005
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
Gr. 4, Cl. A
Gr. 4, Cl. B
Gr. 4, Cl. E
Gr. 8, Cl. A
Gr. 8, Cl. C
J13047
J13047
J13047
J22091
J22091
90
105
115
85
100
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
Gr. 8, Cl. B
CA15M Cl. A
CA15 Cl. C
CA15 Cl. B
CA15 Cl. D
J22091
J91151
J91150
J91171
J91171
105
90
90
90
100
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
CA6NM Cl. B
CA6NM Cl. A
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
shapes
shapes
shapes
shapes
2013 SECTION IX
121
A500
A500
&
&
&
&
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
A501
A501
K03000
K03000
58 (400)
70 (485)
1
1
1
2
101
101
11.1
1.2
C
C
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded tube
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
3, Cl. 1
3, Cl. 2
2, Cl. 1
2, Cl. 2
1
K12042
K12042
K12766
K12766
K13502
80 (550)
90 (620)
80 (550)
90 (620)
70 (485)
3
3
3
3
1
3
3
3
3
2
101
102
101
101
101
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
11.1
0.75Ni–0.5Mo–Cr–V
0.75Ni–0.5Mo–Cr–V
0.75Ni–0.5Mo–0.3Cr–V
0.75Ni–0.5Mo–0.3Cr–V
C
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
1A
22, Cl. 3
4N, Cl. 3
4N, Cl. 1
4N, Cl. 2
K13502
K21590
K22375
K22375
K22375
70 (485)
85 (585)
90 (620)
105 (725)
115 (795)
1
5C
3
11A
11B
2
1
3
5
10
101
102
102
102
102
11.1
5.2
3.1
3.1
3.1
C
2.25Cr–1Mo
3.5Ni–1.75Cr–0.5Mo–V
3.5Ni–1.75Cr–0.5Mo–V
3.5Ni–1.75Cr–0.5Mo–V
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
3V
3VCb
5, Cl. 1
5, Cl. 2
K31830
K31390
K42365
K42365
85 (585)
85 (585)
105 (725)
115 (795)
5C
5C
11A
11B
1
1
5
10
102
102
102
102
6.2
6.2
3.1
3.1
3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B
3Cr–1Mo–0.25V–Cb–Ca
3.5Ni–1.75Cr–0.5Mo–V
3.5Ni–1.75Cr–0.5Mo–V
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-513
A/SA-513
A/SA-513
A513
A513
A513
A513
1008
1010
1015
1015 CW
1020 CW
1025 CW
1026 CW
G10080
G10100
G10150
G10150
G10200
G10250
G10260
42 (290)
45 (310)
48 (330)
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.2
11.1
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Tube
Tube
Tube
Tube
Tube
Tube
Tube
A514
A514
A514
A514
F
B
A
E
K11576
K11630
K11856
K21604
110 (760)
110 (760)
110 (760)
100 (690)
11B
11B
11B
11B
3
4
1
2
101
101
101
102
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
0.75Ni–0.5Cr–0.5Mo–V
0.5Cr–0.2Mo–V
0.5Cr–0.25Mo–Si
1.75Cr–0.5Mo–Cu
Plate, 21/2 in. (64 mm) max.
Plate, 11/4 in. (32 mm) max.
Plate, 11/4 in. (32 mm) max.
Plate > 21/2 in. – 6 in. (64 mm
– 152 mm), incl.
A514
E
K21604
110 (760)
11B
2
102
3.1
1.75Cr–0.5Mo–Cu
Plate, 21/2 in. (64 mm) max.
A514
P
K21650
100 (690)
11B
8
102
3.1
1.25Ni–1Cr–0.5Mo
A514
P
K21650
110 (760)
11B
8
102
3.1
1.25Ni–1Cr–0.5Mo
Plate > 21/2 in. – 6 in. (64 mm
– 152 mm), incl.
Plate, 21/2 in. (64 mm) max.
2013 SECTION IX
122
A
B
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
Q
...
100 (690)
11B
9
102
3.1
1.3Ni–1.3Cr–0.5Mo–V
Plate > 21/2 in. – 6 in. (64 mm
– 152 mm), incl.
A514
Q
...
110 (760)
11B
9
102
3.1
1.3Ni–1.3Cr–0.5Mo–V
Plate, 21/2 in. (64 mm) max.
A/SA-515
60
K02401
60 (415)
1
1
101
1.1
C
Plate ≤ 1 in. (25 mm)
A/SA-515
A/SA-515
A/SA-515
60
65
70
...
K02800
K03101
60 (415)
65 (450)
70 (485)
1
1
1
1
1
2
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
11.1
C–Si
C–Si
C–Si
Plate > 1 in. (25 mm)
Plate
Plate
A/SA-516
A/SA-516
A/SA-516
A/SA-516
55
60
65
70
K01800
K02100
K02403
K02700
55
60
65
70
(380)
(415)
(450)
(485)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
11.1
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-517
A/SA-517
A/SA-517
A/SA-517
F
B
A
E
K11576
K11630
K11856
K21604
115
115
115
105
(795)
(795)
(795)
(725)
11B
11B
11B
11B
3
4
1
2
101
101
101
102
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
0.75Ni–0.5Cr–0.5Mo–V
0.5Cr–0.2Mo–V
0.5Cr–0.25Mo–Si
1.75Cr–0.5Mo–Cu
Plate ≤ 21/2 in. (64 mm)
Plate ≤ 11/4 in. (32 mm)
Plate ≤ 11/4 in. (32 mm)
Plate > 21/2 in. – 6 in. (64 mm
– 152 mm), incl.
A/SA-517
A/SA-517
E
P
K21604
K21650
115 (795)
105 (725)
11B
11B
2
8
102
102
3.1
3.1
1.75Cr–0.5Mo–Cu
1.25Ni–1Cr–0.5Mo
P
K21650
115 (795)
11B
8
102
3.1
1.25Ni–1Cr–0.5Mo
Plate ≤ 21/2 in. (64 mm)
Plate > 21/2 in. – 4 in. (64 mm – 102
mm), incl.
Plate ≤ 21/2 in. (64 mm)
A519
A519
A519
A519
A519
1018 HR
1018 CW
1020 HR
1020 CW
1022 HR
G10180
G10180
G10200
G10200
G10220
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
C
C
C
C
C
Tube
Tube
Tube
Tube
Tube
A519
A519
A519
A519
A519
1022 CW
1025 HR
1025 CW
1026 HR
1026 CW
G10220
G10250
G10250
G10260
G10260
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.2
11.1
11.1
C
C
C
C
C
Tube
Tube
Tube
Tube
Tube
Type II
K71340
100 (690)
11A
1
101
9.3
8Ni
Forgings
A/SA-517
A/SA-522
2013 SECTION IX
123
A514
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
A/SA-522
Type I
K81340
A/SA-524
A/SA-524
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
II
I
Type A, Cl. 1
Type A, Cl. 2
Type A, Cl. 3
Type D, Cl. 1
Type D, Cl. 2
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
Group
No.
100 (690)
11A
1
101
9.3
9Ni
Forgings
K02104
K02104
K12521
K12521
K12521
K12529
K12529
55 (380)
60 (415)
80 (550)
90 (620)
100 (690)
80 (550)
90 (620)
1
1
3
3
11A
3
3
1
1
3
3
4
3
3
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
Mn–0.5Mo
Mn–0.5Mo
Mn–0.5Mo
Mn–0.5Mo–0.25Ni
Mn–0.5Mo–0.25Ni
Smls. pipe
Smls. pipe
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Type D, Cl. 3
Type B, Cl. 1
Type B, Cl. 2
Type B, Cl. 3
Type C, Cl. 1
K12529
K12539
K12539
K12539
K12554
100
80
90
100
80
(690)
(550)
(620)
(690)
(550)
11A
3
3
11A
3
4
3
3
4
3
101
101
101
101
101
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.2
3.1
Mn–0.5Mo–0.25Ni
Mn–0.5Mo–0.5Ni
Mn–0.5Mo–0.5Ni
Mn–0.5Mo–0.5Ni
Mn–0.5Mo–0.75Ni
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
Type C, Cl. 2
Type E, Cl. 1
Type E, Cl. 2
Type C, Cl. 3
K12554
K12554
K12554
K12554
90
80
90
100
(620)
(550)
(620)
(690)
3
3
3
11A
3
3
3
4
101
101
101
101
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.2
Mn–0.5Mo–0.75Ni
Mn–0.5Mo–0.75Ni
Mn–0.5Mo–0.75Ni
Mn–0.5Mo–0.75Ni
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-537
Cl. 1
K12437
65 (450)
1
2
101
1.2
C–Mn–Si
A/SA-537
A/SA-537
Cl. 1
Cl. 2
K12437
K12437
70 (485)
70 (485)
1
1
2
3
101
101
1.2
1.2
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
A/SA-537
Cl. 2
K12437
75 (515)
1
3
101
1.2
C–Mn–Si
Plate > 21/2 in. – 4 in. (64 mm
– 102 mm), incl.
Plate, 21/2 in. (64 mm) & under
Plate > 4 in. – 6 in. (102 mm – 152 mm),
incl.
Plate > 21/2 in. – 4 in. (64 mm
– 102 mm), incl.
A/SA-537
A/SA-537
A/SA-537
Cl. 2
Cl. 3
Cl. 3
K12437
K12437
K12437
80 (550)
70 (485)
75 (515)
1
1
1
3
3
3
101
101
101
1.2
1.2
1.2
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
Plate, 21/2 in. (64 mm) & under
Plate > 4 in. (102 mm)
Plate, 21/2 in. < t ≤ 4 in. (64 mm) < t ≤
102 mm)
A/SA-537
Cl. 3
K12437
80 (550)
1
3
101
1.2
C–Mn–Si
Plate ≤ 21/2 in. (64 mm)
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
1
1A
11, Cl. 4
3, Cl. 1
K03506
K03020
K11572
K12045
70
70
80
80
1
1
4
3
2
2
1
3
101
101
102
101
11.1
11.1
5.2
4.1
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
0.5Ni–0.5Mo–V
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
2013 SECTION IX
124
(485)
(485)
(550)
(550)
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
3, Cl. 2
K12045
90 (620)
3
3
101
4.1
0.5Ni–0.5Mo–V
Forgings
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
2, Cl. 1
2, Cl. 2
22, Cl. 3
22, Cl. 4
22, Cl. 5
K12765
K12765
K21390
K21390
K21390
80 (550)
90 (620)
85 (585)
105 (725)
115 (795)
3
3
5C
5C
5C
3
3
1
4
5
101
101
102
102
102
4.2
4.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
0.75Ni–0.5Mo–0.3Cr–V
0.75Ni–0.5Mo–0.3Cr–V
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
3V
3VCb
22V
B, Cl. 4a
B, Cl. 4
A, Cl. 4
A, Cl. 4a
A, Cl. 3
K31830
K31390
K31835
K21590
K21590
K21590
K21590
K21590
85 (585)
85 (585)
85 (585)
85 (585)
85 (585)
85 (585)
85 (585)
95 (655)
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
6.2
6.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B
3Cr–1Mo–0.25V–Cb–Ca
2.25Cr–1Mo–V
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
B, Cl.
A, Cl.
B, Cl.
B, Cl.
A, Cl.
3
1
1
2
2
K21590
K21590
K21590
K21590
K21590
95
105
105
115
115
(655)
(725)
(725)
(795)
(795)
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
3
4
4
5
5
102
102
102
102
102
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
C, Cl. 4
C, Cl. 4a
C, Cl. 3
C, Cl. 1
C, Cl. 2
K31830
K31830
K31830
K31830
K31830
85 (585)
85 (585)
95 (655)
105 (725)
115 (795)
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
1
1
3
4
5
102
102
102
102
102
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B
3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B
3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B
3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B
3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
D, Cl. 4a
E, Cl. 4a
K31835
K31390
85 (585)
85 (585)
5C
5C
1
1
102
102
6.3
6.2
2.25Cr–1Mo–V
3Cr–1Mo–0.25V–Cb–Ca
Plate
Plate
A/SA-543
A/SA-543
A/SA-543
A/SA-543
A/SA-543
A/SA-543
B, Cl. 3
B, Cl. 1
B, Cl. 2
C, Cl. 3
C, Cl. 1
C, Cl. 2
K42339
K42339
K42339
...
...
...
90
105
115
90
105
115
(620)
(725)
(795)
(620)
(725)
(795)
3
11A
11B
3
11A
11B
3
5
10
3
5
10
102
102
102
102
102
102
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3Ni–1.75Cr–0.5Mo
3Ni–1.75Cr–0.5Mo
3Ni–1.75Cr–0.5Mo
2.75Ni–1.5Cr–0.5Mo
2.75Ni–1.5Cr–0.5Mo
2.75Ni–1.5Cr–0.5Mo
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-553
II
K71340
100 (690)
11A
1
101
9.3
8Ni
Plate
2013 SECTION IX
125
A/SA-541
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
I
K81340
100 (690)
11A
1
101
9.3
9Ni
Plate
A/SA-556
A/SA-556
A/SA-556
A2
B2
C2
K01807
K02707
K03006
47 (325)
60 (415)
70 (485)
1
1
1
1
1
2
101
101
101
1.1
11.1
11.1
C
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
A/SA-557
A/SA-557
A/SA-557
A2
B2
C2
K01807
K03007
K03505
47 (325)
60 (415)
70 (485)
1
1
1
1
1
2
101
101
101
1.1
11.1
11.1
C
C
C–Mn
E.R.W. tube
E.R.W. tube
E.R.W. tube
A/SA-562
...
K11224
55 (380)
1
1
101
1.1
C–Mn–Ti
Plate
A/SA-572
A/SA-572
A/SA-572
A573
A573
A573
42
50
60
58
65
70
...
...
...
...
...
...
60 (415)
65 (450)
75 (515)
58 (400)
65 (450)
70 (485)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
101
101
101
101
101
101
1.2
1.2
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C
C
C
Plate & shapes
Plate & shapes
Plate & shapes
Plate
Plate
Plate
A575
A575
A575
A575
A575
M
M
M
M
M
1008
1010
1012
1015
1017
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
C
C
C
C
C
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
A575
A575
A575
M 1020
M 1023
M 1025
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
11.1
C
C
C
Bar
Bar
Bar
A576
A576
A576
A576
A576
G10080
G10100
G10120
G10150
G10160
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
C
C
C
C
C
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
A576
A576
A576
A576
A576
G10170
G10180
G10190
G10200
G10210
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
11.1
C
C
C
C
C
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
2013 SECTION IX
126
A/SA-553
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
A576
A576
A576
G10220
G10230
G10250
...
...
...
A/SA-587
...
K11500
A588
A
A588
...
...
...
1
1
1
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
11.1
C
C
C
Bar
Bar
Bar
48 (330)
1
1
101
1.1
C
E.R.W. pipe
K11430
63 (435)
3
1
101
1.4
Mn–0.5Cr–0.3Cu–Si–V
A
K11430
67 (460)
3
1
101
1.4
Mn–0.5Cr–0.3Cu–Si–V
A588
A588
A588
A
A
B
K11430
K11430
K12043
70 (485)
70 (485)
63 (435)
3
3
3
1
1
1
101
101
101
1.4
1.4
1.4
Mn–0.5Cr–0.3Cu–Si–V
Mn–0.5Cr–0.3Cu–Si-V
Mn–0.6Cr–0.3Cu–Si–V
A588
B
K12043
67 (460)
3
1
101
1.4
Mn–0.6Cr–0.3Cu–Si–V
A588
A588
B
B
K12043
K12043
70 (485)
70 (485)
3
3
1
1
101
101
1.4
1.4
Mn–0.6Cr–0.3Cu–Si–V
Mn–0.6Cr–0.3Cu–Si–V
Plate & bar > 5 in.
– 200 mm) incl.
Plate & bar > 4 in.
– 125 mm) incl.
Plate & bar ≤ 4 in.
Shapes
Plate & bar > 5 in.
– 200 mm) incl.
Plate & bar > 4 in.
– 125 mm) incl.
Plate & bar ≤ 4 in.
Shapes
A/SA-592
F
K11576
105 (725)
11B
3
101
3.1
0.75Ni–0.5Cr–0.5Mo–V
Forgings, 21/2 in. – 4 in. (64 mm
– 102 mm), incl.
A/SA-592
A/SA-592
F
E
K11576
K11695
115 (795)
105 (725)
11B
11B
3
2
101
102
3.1
3.1
0.75Ni–0.5Cr–0.5Mo–V
1.75Cr–0.5Mo–Cu
A/SA-592
E
K11695
115 (795)
11B
2
102
3.1
1.75Cr–0.5Mo–Cu
Forgings, 21/2 in. (64 mm) & under
Forgings, 21/2 in. – 4 in. (64 mm
– 102 mm), incl.
Forgings, 21/2 in. (64 mm) & under
A/SA-592
A
K11856
115 (795)
11B
1
101
3.1
0.5Cr–0.25Mo–Si
Forgings, 11/2 in. (38 mm) & under
A/SA-612
A/SA-612
...
...
K02900
K02900
81 (560)
83 (570)
10C
10C
1
1
101
101
1.3
1.3
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
Plate > 1/2 in. – 1 in. (13 mm – 25 mm)
Plate, 1/2 in. (13 mm) & under
A618
A618
A618
A618
A618
A618
A618
Ia
Ia
Ib
Ib
II
II
III
...
...
K02601
K02601
K12609
K12609
K12700
67 (460)
70 (485)
67 (460)
70 (485)
67 (460)
70 (485)
65 (450)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
...
...
...
...
1.2
1.2
1.2
Mn–Cu–V
Mn–Cu–V
Mn–Cu–V
Mn–Cu–V
Mn–Cu–V
Mn–Cu–V
Mn–V
Tube > 3/4 in. – 11/2 in. (19 mm – 38 mm)
Tube ≤ 3/4 in. (19 mm)
Tube > 3/4 in. – 11/2 in. (19 mm – 38 mm)
Tube ≤ 3/4 in. (19 mm)
Tube > 3/4 in. – 11/2 in. (19 mm – 38 mm)
Tube, 3/4 in. (19 mm) & under
Tube
– 8 in. (125 mm
– 5 in. (100 mm
(100 mm)
– 8 in. (125 mm
– 5 in. (100 mm
(100 mm)
2013 SECTION IX
127
1
1
1
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
A
C
K01802
K12000
63 (435)
65 (450)
1
1
1
1
101
101
1.1
1.1
Mn–Cb
Mn–Cb
Plate & shapes
Plate > 21/2 in. – 4 in. (64 mm
– 102 mm) incl., shapes
A633
A633
C
D
K12000
K12037
70 (485)
65 (450)
1
1
2
1
101
101
1.1
1.1
Mn–Cb
C–Mn–Si
Plate to 21/2 in. (64 mm), shapes
Plate > 21/2 in. – 4 in. (64 mm
– 102 mm) incl., shapes
A633
A633
A/SA-645
D
E
A
K12037
K12202
K41583
70 (485)
80 (550)
95 (655)
1
1
11A
2
3
2
101
101
101
1.1
4.1
9.2
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si–V
5Ni–0.25Mo
Plate to 21/2 in. (64 mm), shapes
Plate & shapes
Plate
128
A/SA-656
A/SA-656
A/SA-656
A/SA-656
T3, Gr.
T3, Gr.
T3, Gr.
T3, Gr.
50
60
70
80
...
...
...
...
60 (345)
70 (415)
80 (485)
90 (550)
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
101
101
101
101
...
...
...
...
C–Mn–Si–V–Cb
C–Mn–Si–V–Cb
C–Mn–Si–V–Cb
C–Mn–Si–V–Cb
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-656
A/SA-656
A/SA-656
A/SA-656
T7, Gr.
T7, Gr.
T7, Gr.
T7, Gr.
50
60
70
80
...
...
...
...
60 (345)
70 (415)
80 (485)
90 (550)
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
101
101
101
101
...
...
...
...
C–Mn–Si–V–Cb
C–Mn–Si–V–Cb
C–Mn–Si–V–Cb
C–Mn–Si–V–Cb
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
A/SA-660
A/SA-660
A/SA-660
WCA
WCC
WCB
J02504
J02505
J03003
60 (415)
70 (485)
70 (485)
1
1
1
1
2
2
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
1.1
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Si
Centrifugal cast pipe
Centrifugal cast pipe
Centrifugal cast pipe
A/SA-662
A/SA-662
A/SA-662
A663
A
C
B
...
K01701
K02007
K02203
...
58 (400)
70 (485)
65 (450)
...
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
...
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C
Plate
Plate
Plate
Bar
A/SA-666
A/SA-666
A/SA-666
A/SA-666
A/SA-666
A/SA-666
201‐1
201‐2
XM–11
302
304
304L
S20100
S20100
S21904
S30200
S30400
S30403
75
95
90
75
75
70
(515)
(655)
(620)
(515)
(515)
(485)
8
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
17Cr–4Ni–6Mn
17Cr–4Ni–6Mn
21Cr–6Ni–9Mn
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
A/SA-666
304N
S30451
80 (550)
8
1
102
8.1
18Cr–8Ni–N
Plate, sheet & strip
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
2013 SECTION IX
A633
A633
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
304LN
316
316L
316N
S30453
S31600
S31603
S31651
75
75
70
80
(515)
(515)
(485)
(550)
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–8Ni–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
CC60
CE55
CD70
CD80
CB60
K02100
K02202
K12437
K12437
K02401
60
55
70
80
60
(415)
(380)
(485)
(550)
(415)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
101
101
101
101
101
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
CE60
CC65
CC70
CB65
K02402
K02403
K02700
K02800
60
65
70
65
(415)
(450)
(485)
(450)
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
A/SA-671
CA55
K02801
55 (380)
1
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
CK75
CB70
K02803
K03101
75 (515)
70 (485)
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A45
C55
B55
C60
A50
K01700
K01800
K02001
K02100
K02200
45
55
55
60
50
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
E55
D70
D80
B60
E60
C65
C70
B65
A55
N75
K02202
K12437
K12437
K02401
K02402
K02403
K02700
K02800
K02801
K02803
55
70
80
60
60
65
70
65
55
75
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
B70
L65
K03101
K11820
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
& strip
& strip
& strip
& strip
1.1
11.1
1.2
1.2
1.1
C–Mn–Si
C
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
101
101
101
101
11.1
1.1
11.1
11.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Si
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
welded
welded
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
1
101
11.1
C
Fusion welded pipe
1
1
2
2
101
101
11.1
11.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Si
Fusion welded pipe
Fusion welded pipe
(310)
(380)
(380)
(415)
(345)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
C
C–Si
C–Si
C–Mn–Si
C
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
(380)
(485)
(550)
(415)
(415)
(450)
(485)
(450)
(380)
(515)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
11.1
1.2
1.2
1.1
11.1
1.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
C
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Si
C
C–Mn–Si
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
70 (485)
65 (450)
1
3
2
1
101
101
11.1
1.1
C–Si
C–0.5Mo
Fusion welded pipe
Fusion welded pipe
2013 SECTION IX
129
A/SA-666
A/SA-666
A/SA-666
A/SA-666
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
L70
H75
H80
K12020
K12021
K12022
70 (485)
75 (515)
80 (550)
3
3
3
2
2
3
101
101
101
1.2
1.1
1.2
C–0.5Mo
Mn–0.5Mo
Mn–0.5Mo
Fusion welded pipe
Fusion welded pipe
Fusion welded pipe
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
L75
J100
J80
J90
K12320
K12521
...
...
3
11A
3
3
2
4
3
3
101
101
101
101
1.2
3.2
3.1
3.1
C–0.5Mo
Mn–0.5Mo
Mn–0.5Mo–0.75Ni
Mn–0.5Mo–0.75Ni
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
A/SA-675
A/SA-675
A/SA-675
A/SA-675
A/SA-675
A/SA-675
45
50
55
60
65
70
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
101
101
101
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
C
C
C
C
C
C
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
Bar
A/SA-688
A/SA-688
A/SA-688
A/SA-688
XM–29
TP304
TP304L
TP304N
S24000
S30400
S30403
S30451
100
75
70
80
(690)
(515)
(485)
(550)
8
8
8
8
3
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–3Ni–12Mn
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni–N
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-688
A/SA-688
A/SA-688
A/SA-688
A/SA-688
TP304LN
TP316
TP316L
TP316N
TP316LN
S30453
S31600
S31603
S31651
S31653
75
75
70
80
75
(515)
(515)
(485)
(550)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–8Ni–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
A/SA-691
CMSH–70
K12437
65 (450)
1
2
101
1.2
C–Mn–Si
CMSH–70
CMSH–80
K12437
K12437
70 (485)
75 (515)
1
1
2
3
101
101
1.2
1.2
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
CMSH–80
CMS–75
1CR, Cl. 1
1CR, Cl. 2
1.25CR, Cl. 1
K12437
K02803
K11757
K11757
K11789
80 (550)
75 (515)
55 (380)
65 (450)
60 (415)
1
1
4
4
4
3
2
1
1
1
101
101
102
102
102
1.2
11.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
1Cr–0.5Mo
1Cr–0.5Mo
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
Fusion welded pipe > 21/2 in. – 4 in.
(64 mm – 102 mm)
Fusion welded pipe ≤ 21/2 in. (64 mm)
Fusion welded pipe > 21/2 in. – 4 in.
(64 mm – 102 mm)
Fusion welded pipe ≤ 21/2 in. (64 mm)
Fusion welded pipe
Fusion welded pipe
Fusion welded pipe
Fusion welded pipe
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
1.25CR, Cl. 2
K11789
75 (515)
4
1
102
5.1
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
Fusion welded pipe
75
100
80
90
(515)
(690)
(550)
(620)
45 (310)
50 (345)
55 (380)
60 (415)
65 (450)
70 (485)
welded
welded
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
130
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
CM–65
CM–70
0.5CR, Cl. 1
0.5CR, Cl. 2
K11820
K12020
K12143
K12143
65
70
55
70
(450)
(485)
(380)
(485)
3
3
3
3
1
2
1
2
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.2
4.2
4.2
C–0.5Mo
C–0.5Mo
0.5Cr–0.5Mo
0.5Cr–0.5Mo
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
welded
welded
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
CM–75
2.25CR, Cl. 1
2.25CR, Cl. 2
3CR, Cl. 1
3CR, Cl. 2
K12320
K21590
K21590
K31545
K31545
75
60
75
60
75
(515)
(415)
(515)
(415)
(515)
3
5A
5A
5A
5A
2
1
1
1
1
101
102
102
102
102
1.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
C–0.5Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo
3Cr–1Mo
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
Fusion
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
5CR, Cl. 1
5CR, Cl. 2
91
K41545
K41545
K91560
60 (415)
75 (515)
85 (585)
5B
5B
15E
1
1
1
102
102
102
5.3
5.3
6.4
5Cr–0.5Mo
5Cr–0.5Mo
9Cr–1Mo–V
Fusion welded pipe
Fusion welded pipe
Fusion welded pipe
F42
F46
F52
F56
F60
F65
F70
K03014
K03014
K03014
K03014
K03014
K03014
K03014
60
60
66
68
75
77
82
(415)
(415)
(455)
(470)
(515)
(530)
(565)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
B
C
K03200
K03200
60 (415)
70 (485)
1
1
1
2
101
101
11.1
11.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
Bar
Bar
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A694
A694
A694
A694
A694
A694
A694
A/SA-696
A/SA-696
A707
A707
A707
A707
A707
L1, Cl.
L1, Cl.
L2, Cl.
L2, Cl.
L2, Cl.
1
2
1
2
3
K02302
K02302
K03301
K03301
K03301
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
101
101
101
101
101
1.2
1.2
11.1
11.1
11.1
A707
A707
A707
L3, Cl. 1
L3, Cl. 2
L3, Cl. 3
K12510
K12510
K12510
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
2
101
101
101
1.2
1.2
1.3
C–Mn–V–N
C–Mn–V–N
C–Mn–V–N
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A714
A714
Gr. V, Tp. E
Gr. V
K22035
K22035
65 (450)
65 (450)
9A
9A
1
1
102
102
9.1
9.1
2Ni–1Cu
2Ni–1Cu
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
A
K11831
90 (620)
1
4
101
3.1
C–Mn–Si
Plate
A/SA-724
2013 SECTION IX
131
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
B
C
K12031
K12037
95 (655)
90 (620)
1
1
4
4
101
101
3.1
1.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
Plate
Plate
A/SA-727
...
K02506
60 (415)
1
1
101
11.1
C–Mn–Si
Forgings
A/SA-731
A/SA-731
A/SA-731
A/SA-731
A/SA-731
S41500
TP439
18Cr–2Mo
TPXM–33
TPXM–27
S41500
S43035
S44400
S44626
S44627
(795)
(415)
(415)
(450)
(450)
6
7
7
10I
10I
4
2
2
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
7.2
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
13Cr–4.5Ni–Mo
18Cr–Ti
18Cr–2Mo
27Cr–1Mo–Ti
27Cr–1Mo
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
A/SA-731
A/SA-731
A/SA-731
S44660
S44700
S44800
S44660
S44700
S44800
85 (585)
80 (550)
80 (550)
10K
10J
10K
1
1
1
102
102
102
7.1
7.1
7.1
26Cr–3Ni–3Mo
29Cr–4Mo
29Cr–4Mo–2Ni
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
A/SA-737
A/SA-737
B
C
K12001
K12202
70 (485)
80 (550)
1
1
2
3
101
101
11.1
4.1
C–Mn–Si–Cb
C–Mn–Si–V
Plate
Plate
A/SA-738
A/SA-738
A/SA-738
A
B
C
K12447
K12007
K02008
75 (515)
85 (585)
70 (485)
1
1
1
2
3
3
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
11.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si–Cb
C–Mn–Si
A/SA-738
C
K02008
75 (515)
1
3
101
11.1
C–Mn–Si
A/SA-738
C
K02008
80 (550)
1
3
101
11.1
C–Mn–Si
Plate
Plate
Plate > 4 in. – 6 in. (102 mm – 152 mm),
incl.
Plate > 21/2 in. – 4 in. (64 mm
– 102 mm), incl.
Plate, 21/2 in. (64 mm) & under
A/SA-739
A/SA-739
B11
B22
K11797
K21390
70 (485)
75 (515)
4
5A
1
1
102
102
5.1
5.2
1.25Cr–0.5Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
Bar
Bar
A/SA-765
A/SA-765
A/SA-765
A/SA-765
I
II
III
IV
K03046
K03047
K32026
K02009
60
70
70
80
1
1
9B
1
1
2
1
3
101
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
9.2
1.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
3.5Ni
C–Mn–Si
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
S31200
S31260
S31500
S31803
...
...
S31200
S31260
S31500
S31803
S32003
S32202
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
10.2
10.2
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.1
25Cr–6Ni–Mo–N
25Cr–6.5Ni–3Mo–N
18Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
21Cr–3.5Ni–Mo–N
22Cr–2Ni–Mo–N
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
115
60
60
65
65
(415)
(485)
(485)
(550)
100 (690)
100 (690)
92 (635)
90 (620)
100 (690)
94 (650)
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
& welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
2013 SECTION IX
132
A/SA-724
A/SA-724
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
...
...
S32205
S32304
S32304
S32550
S32750
S32900
S32906
S32101
S32101
S32205
S32304
S32304
S32550
S32750
S32900
S32906
94 (650)
101 (700)
95 (655)
87 (600)
100 (690)
110 (760)
116 (800)
90 (620)
109 (750)
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.2
10.2
10.2
10.2
21Cr–5Mn–1.5Ni–Cu–N
21Cr–5Mn–1.5Ni–Cu–N
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
23Cr–4Ni–Mo–Cu–N
23Cr–4Ni–Mo–Cu–N
25Cr–5Ni–3Mo–2Cu
25Cr–7Ni–4Mo–N
26Cr–4Ni–Mo
29Cr–6.5Ni–2Mo–N
Smls. & welded tube > 0.187 in. (5 mm)
Smls. & welded tube ≤ 0.187 in. (5 mm)
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded tube > 1 in. (25 mm)
Smls. & welded tube ≤ 1 in. (25 mm)
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded tube ≥ 0.40 in. (10 mm)
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
S32906
S32950
S32760
S39274
S32906
S32950
S32760
S39274
116 (800)
100 (690)
109 (750)
116 (800)
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
10.2
10.2
10.2
10.2
29Cr–6.5Ni–2Mo–N
26Cr–4Ni–Mo–N
25Cr–8Ni–3Mo–W–Cu–N
25Cr–7Ni–3Mo–2W–Cu–N
Smls. & welded tube < 0.40 in. (10 mm)
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded tube
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
S31200
S31260
S31500
S31803
...
...
...
...
S32205
S32304
S31200
S31260
S31500
S31803
S32003
S32202
S32101
S32101
S32205
S32304
100 (690)
100 (690)
92 (635)
90 (620)
90 (620)
94 (650)
94 (650)
101 (700)
95 (655)
87 (600)
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
10.2
10.2
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.1
10.1
25Cr–6Ni–Mo–N
25Cr–6.5Ni–3Mo–N
18Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
21Cr–3.5Ni–Mo–N
22Cr–2Ni–Mo–N
21Cr–5Mn–1.5Ni–Cu–N
21Cr–5Mn–1.5Ni–Cu–N
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
23Cr–4Ni–Mo–Cu–N
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe > 0.187 in. (5 mm)
Smls. & welded pipe ≤ 0.187 in. (5 mm)
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
S32550
S32750
S32900
S32906
S32906
S32550
S32750
S32900
S32906
S32906
110
116
90
109
116
(760)
(800)
(620)
(750)
(800)
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
10.2
10.2
10.2
10.2
10.2
25Cr–5Ni–3Mo–2Cu
25Cr–7Ni–4Mo–N
26Cr–4Ni–Mo
29Cr–6.5Ni–2Mo–N
29Cr–6.5Ni–2Mo–N
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe ≥ 0.40 in. (10 mm)
Smls. & welded pipe < 0.40 in. (10 mm)
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-803
A/SA-803
A/SA-813
S32950
S32760
S39274
TP439
26–3–3
N08367
S32950
S32760
S39274
S43035
S44660
N08367
100
109
116
60
85
95
(690)
(750)
(800)
(415)
(585)
(655)
10H
10H
10H
7
10K
45
1
1
1
2
1
…
102
102
102
102
102
111
10.2
10.2
10.2
7.1
7.1
8.2
26Cr–4Ni–Mo–N
25Cr–8Ni–3Mo–W–Cu–N
25Cr–7Ni–3Mo–2W–Cu–N
18Cr–Ti
26Cr–3Ni–3Mo
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded pipe > 0.1875 in. (5 mm)
2013 SECTION IX
133
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
A/SA-813
N08367
N08367
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
TPXM–19
TPXM–11
TPXM–29
TP304
TP304L
S20910
S21904
S24000
S30400
S30403
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
TP304H
TP304N
TP304LN
S30815
TP309S
TP309Cb
TP310S
TP310Cb
S31254
TP316
S30409
S30451
S30453
S30815
S30908
S30940
S31008
S31040
S31254
S31600
75
80
75
87
75
75
75
75
94
75
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
TP316L
TP316H
TP316N
TP316LN
TP317
TP317L
...
S31603
S31609
S31651
S31653
S31700
S31703
S32053
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
TP321
TP321H
TP347
TP347H
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
Group
No.
100 (690)
45
…
111
8.2
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Welded pipe ≤ 0.1875 in. (5 mm)
100 (690)
90 (620)
100 (690)
75 (515)
70 (485)
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.1
8.1
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
21Cr–6Ni–9Mn
18Cr–3Ni–12Mn
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
(515)
(550)
(515)
(600)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(650)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
4
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
21Cr–11Ni–N
23Cr–12Ni
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
70
75
80
75
75
75
93
(485)
(515)
(550)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(640)
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
S32100
S32109
S34700
S34709
75
75
75
75
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
TP348
TP348H
TPXM–15
N08367
S34800
S34809
S38100
N08367
75
75
75
95
(515)
(515)
(515)
(655)
8
8
8
45
1
1
1
…
102
102
102
111
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–18Ni–2Si
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
N08367
N08367
100 (690)
45
...
111
8.2
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Cold worked welded pipe > 0.1875 in.
(5 mm)
Cold worked welded pipe ≤ 0.1875 in.
(5 mm)
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
2013 SECTION IX
134
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
TPXM–19
TPXM–11
TPXM–29
TP304
TP304L
S20910
S21904
S24000
S30400
S30403
100 (690)
90 (620)
100 (690)
75 (515)
70 (485)
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.3
8.3
8.3
8.1
8.1
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
21Cr–6Ni–9Mn
18Cr–3Ni–12Mn
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
worked
worked
worked
worked
worked
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
TP304H
TP304N
TP304LN
S30815
TP309S
S30409
S30451
S30453
S30815
S30908
75
80
75
87
75
(515)
(550)
(515)
(600)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
2
2
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.2
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
21Cr–11Ni–N
23Cr–12Ni
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
worked
worked
worked
worked
worked
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
TP309Cb
TP310S
TP310Cb
S31254
TP316
S30940
S31008
S31040
S31254
S31600
75
75
75
94
75
(515)
(515)
(515)
(650)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
4
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.1
23Cr–12Ni–Cb
25Cr–20Ni
25Cr–20Ni–Cb
20Cr–18Ni–6Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
worked
worked
worked
worked
worked
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
TP316L
TP316H
TP316N
TP316LN
TP317
TP317L
...
TP321
TP321H
S31603
S31609
S31651
S31653
S31700
S31703
S32053
S32100
S32109
70 (485)
75 (515)
80 (550)
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
93 (640)
75 (515)
75 (515)
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
18Cr–13Ni–3Mo
23Cr–25Ni–5.5Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
worked
worked
worked
worked
worked
worked
worked
worked
worked
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
TP347
TP347H
TP348
TP348H
TPXM–15
S34700
S34709
S34800
S34809
S38100
75
75
75
75
75
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
(515)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–18Ni–2Si
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
Cold
worked
worked
worked
worked
worked
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
welded pipe
A/SA-815
A/SA-815
A/SA-815
A/SA-815
S31803
...
...
S41500
S31803
S32202
S32101
S41500
90
94
94
110
(620)
(650)
(650)
(760)
10H
10H
10H
6
1
1
1
4
102
102
102
102
10.1
10.1
10.1
7.2
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
22Cr–2Ni–Mo–N
21Cr–5Mn–1.5Ni–Cu–N
13Cr–4.5Ni–Mo
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
2013 SECTION IX
135
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
A/SA-815
A/SA-815
A815
A/SA-832
A/SA-832
A/SA-832
A/SA-836
A/SA-841
A/SA-841
A/SA-841
A/SA-841
A/SA-859
A/SA-859
S32760
S32205
2507
21V
22V
23V
...
A, Cl. 1
A, Cl. 1
B, Cl. 2
B, Cl. 2
A, Cl. 1
A, Cl. 2
S32760
S32205
S32750
K31830
K31835
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
A890
A890
6A
4A
A928
A928
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
Group
No.
109 (750)
95 (655)
116 (800)
85 (585)
85 (585)
85 (585)
55 (380)
65 (450)
70 (485)
75 (515)
80 (550)
65 (450)
75 (515)
10H
10H
10H
5C
5C
5C
1
1
1
1
1
11C
11C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
10.2
10.1
10.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.3
3.4
3.4
25Cr–8Ni–3Mo–W–Cu–N
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
25Cr–7Ni–4Mo–N
3Cr–1Mo–V–Ti–B
2.25Cr–1Mo–V
3Cr–1Mo–0.25V–Cb–Ca
C–Si–Ti
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
1Ni–1Cu–0.75Cr–Mo–Nb
1Ni–1Cu–0.75Cr–Mo–Nb
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Plate
Plate
Plate
Forgings
Plate > 2.5
Plate ≤ 2.5
Plate > 2.5
Plate ≤ 2.5
Forgings
Forgings
J93380
J92205
100 (690)
90 (620)
10H
10H
1
1
102
102
10.2
10.1
25Cr–8Ni–3Mo–W–Cu–N
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
Castings
Castings
...
2205
S32760
S32205
108 (745)
90 (620)
10H
10H
1
1
102
102
10.2
10.1
25Cr–8Ni–3Mo–W–Cu–N
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
F46
FXM–19
FXM–11
F304
F304L
S30600
S20910
S21904
S30400
S30403
78 (540)
100 (690)
90 (620)
70 (485)
65 (450)
8
8
8
8
8
1
3
3
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.3
8.3
8.1
8.1
18Cr–15Ni–4Si
22Cr–13Ni–5Mn
21Cr–6Ni–9Mn
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
F304H
F304N
F304LN
F310
F316
S30409
S30451
S30453
S31000
S31600
70
80
70
75
70
(485)
(550)
(485)
(515)
(485)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
2
1
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–8Ni–N
25Cr–20Ni
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
F316L
F316H
F316N
F316LN
F321
F321H
F347
S31603
S31609
S31651
S31653
S32100
S32109
S34700
65 (450)
70 (485)
80 (550)
70 (485)
70 (485)
70 (485)
70 (485)
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
(65
(65
(65
(65
mm)
mm)
mm)
mm)
136
2013 SECTION IX
in.
in.
in.
in.
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
F347H
F348
S34709
S34800
70 (485)
70 (485)
8
8
1
1
102
102
8.1
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-965
F348H
S34809
70 (485)
8
1
102
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Forgings
A992
...
...
65 (450)
1
1
101
1.1
C–Mn–Si
Shapes
A/SA-995
A/SA-995
A/SA-995
A/SA-995
2A
1B
6A
4A
J93345
J93372
J93380
J92205
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
10.2
10.2
10.2
10.1
24Cr–10Ni–4Mo–N
25Cr–5Ni–3Mo–2Cu
25Cr–8Ni–3Mo–W–Cu–N
22Cr–5Ni–3Mo–N
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
A/SA-1008
A/SA-1008
CS Type A
CS Type B
...
...
40 (275)
40 (275)
1
1
1
1
101
101
1.1
1.1
C
C
Sheet
Sheet
A/SA-1008
DS Type B
...
40 (275)
1
1
101
1.1
C
Sheet
A/SA-1010
A/SA-1010
40
50
S41003
S41003
66 (455)
70 (485)
7
7
1
1
102
102
...
...
12Cr–1Ni
12Cr–1Ni
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
A/SA-1011
A/SA-1011
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
CS Type B
DS Type B
A
A25
A25P
B
BM
BMO
BMS
BN
BNO
BNS
BQ
BQO
BQS
BR
X42
X42M
X42MO
X42MS
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
40 (275)
40 (275)
49 (330)
45 (310)
45 (310)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
11.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
11.1
1.2
1.2
1.2
C
C
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
Sheet & strip
Sheet & strip
Smls. & welded
Smls. & welded
Smls. & welded
Smls. & welded
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Smls. & welded
Smls. & welded
Smls. & welded
Smls. & welded
Smls. & welded
Smls. & welded
Smls. & welded
Smls. & welded
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
95
100
100
90
(655)
(690)
(690)
(620)
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
137
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
X42N
X42NO
X42NS
X42Q
X42QO
X42QS
X42R
X46
X46M
X46MO
X46MS
X46N
X46NO
X46NS
X46Q
X46QO
X46QS
X52
X52M
X52MO
X52MS
X52N
X52NO
X52NS
X52Q
X52QO
X52QS
X56
X56M
X56MO
X56MS
X56N
X56Q
X56QO
X56QS
X60
X60M
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
60 (415)
63 (435)
63 (435)
63 (435)
63 (435)
63 (435)
63 (435)
63 (435)
63 (435)
63 (435)
63 (435)
67 (455)
67 (455)
67 (455)
67 (455)
67 (455)
67 (455)
67 (455)
67 (455)
67 (455)
67 (455)
71 (490)
71 (490)
71 (490)
71 (490)
71 (490)
71 (490)
71 (490)
71 (490)
75 (515)
75 (515)
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
Group
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
11.1
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
11.1
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
11.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
1.3
3.1
3.1
3.1
11.1
2.1
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Welded pipe
2013 SECTION IX
138
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
X60MO
X60MS
X60N
X60Q
X60QO
X60QS
X65
X65M
X65MO
X65MS
X65Q
X65QO
X65QS
X70
X70M
X70MO
X70MS
X70Q
X70QO
X70QS
X80M
X80MO
X80Q
X80QO
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
75 (515)
78 (530)
78 (530)
78 (530)
78 (530)
78 (530)
78 (530)
78 (530)
83 (565)
83 (565)
83 (565)
83 (565)
83 (565)
83 (565)
83 (565)
91 (620)
91 (620)
91 (620)
91 (620)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
2.1
2.1
1.3
3.1
3.1
3.1
11.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
11.1
2.2
2.2
2.2
3.1
3.1
3.1
2.2
2.2
3.1
3.1
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
MSS SP–75
MSS SP–75
MSS SP–75
MSS SP–75
MSS SP–75
WPHY–42
WPHY–46
WPHY–52
WPHY–56
WPHY–60
...
...
...
...
...
60 (415)
63 (435)
66 (455)
71 (490)
75 (515)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
101
101
101
101
101
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn
Smls./welded fittings
Smls./welded fittings
Smls./welded fittings
Smls./welded fittings
Smls./welded fittings
MSS SP–75
MSS SP–75
SA/AS 1548
SA/AS 1548
SA/AS 1548
WPHY–65
WPHY–70
PT430
PT430
PT430
...
...
...
...
...
(530)
(565)
(430)
(460)
(490)
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
101
101
101
101
101
11.1
...
1.1
1.1
1.1
C–Mn
C–Mn
C
C
C
Smls./welded fittings
Smls./welded fittings
Plate
Plate
Plate
Gr. 38W
...
60 (415)
1
1
101
1.1
C–Mn–Si
Plate, bar & shapes
SA/CSA–G40.21
77
82
62.5
66.5
71
2013 SECTION IX
139
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
Group
No.
65 (450)
65 (450)
52 (360)
69.5 (480)
68.0 (470)
1
1
1
5A
5A
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
...
102
102
1.2
1.2
1.1
5.2
5.2
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
…
…
66.5 (460)
65.5 (450)
5A
5A
1
1
102
102
5.2
5.2
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
13CrMo4–5
…
61 (420)
4
1
102
5.1
1Cr–0.5Mo
13CrMo4–5
13CrMo4–5
…
…
62.5 (430)
64 (440)
4
4
1
1
102
102
5.1
5.1
1Cr–0.5Mo
1Cr–0.5Mo
13CrMo4–5
13CrMoSi5–5+QT
13CrMoSi5–5+QT
13CrMoSi5–5+QT
P235GH
P265GH
P295GH
…
...
...
...
...
...
...
65.5 (450)
71 (490)
72.5 (500)
74 (510)
52 (360)
59.5 (410)
64 (440)
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
102
102
102
102
101
101
101
5.1
5.1
5.1
5.1
1.1
1.1
1.2
1Cr–0.5Mo
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
1.25Cr–0.5Mo–Si
C–Mn
C–Mn
C–Mn–Si
SA/EN 10028‐2
SA/EN 10028‐2
P295GH
P295GH
...
...
66.5 (460)
62.5 (430)
1
1
1
1
101
101
1.2
1.2
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
10028-2
10028-2
10028-2
10028-2
10028-3
10028-3
P355GH
P355GH
P355GH
P355GH
P275NH
P275NH
...
...
...
...
...
...
68
69.5
71
74
51
52
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
101
101
101
101
101
101
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.1
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C
C–Mn–Si
Plate, bar & shapes
Plate, bar & shapes
Plate
Plate ≤ 2.4 in. (60 mm)
Plate > 2.4 in. ≤ 4 in. (60 mm
– 100 mm)
Plate > 4 in. ≤ 6 in. (100 mm – 150 mm)
Plate > 6 in. ≤ 10 in. (150 mm
– 250 mm)
Plate > 6 in. ≤ 10 in. (150 mm
– 250 mm)
Plate > 4 in. ≤ 6 in. (100 mm – 150 mm)
Plate > 2.4 in. ≤ 4 in. (60 mm
– 100 mm)
Plate ≤ 2.4 in. (60 mm)
Plate >4-10 in. (100mm–250mm) incl.
Plate >2.4-4 in. (60mm–100mm) incl.
Plate ≤ 2.4 in. (60 mm) incl.
Plate ≤ 2.4 in. (60 mm)
Plate ≤ 2.4 in. (60 mm)
Plate > 4 in. ≤ 6 in. ( > 100 mm
≤ 150 mm)
Plate ≤ 4 in. (100 mm)
Plate > 6 in. ≤ 10 in. ( > 150 mm
≤ 250 mm)
Plate > 6 in. ≤ 10 in. (150 mm–250 mm)
Plate > 4 in. ≤ 6 in. (100 mm–150 mm)
Plate > 2.4 in. ≤ 4 in. (60 mm–100 mm)
Plate ≤ 2.4 in. (60 mm)
Plate > 6 in. ≤ 10 in. (150 mm–250 mm)
Plate > 4 in. ≤ 6 in. (100 mm–150 mm)
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
10028‐3
10028‐3
10028-4
10028-4
P275NH
P275NH
X8Ni9
X7Ni9
...
...
...
...
53.5 (370)
56.5 (390)
93 (640)
98.5 (680)
1
1
11A
11A
1
1
1
1
101
101
...
...
1.1
1.1
9.3
9.3
C
C
9Ni
9Ni
Plate > 2 in. ≤ 4 in. (50 mm – 100 mm)
Plate ≤ 2 in. (50 mm)
Plate
Plate
X2CrNi18–9
…
72.5 (500)
8
1
102
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
Plate
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
SA/CSA–G40.21
SA/CSA-G40.21
SA/EN 10025-2
SA/EN 10028-2
SA/EN 10028-2
Gr. 44W
Gr. 50W
S235JR
10CrMo9–10
10CrMo9–10
...
...
...
...
…
SA/EN 10028-2
SA/EN 10028-2
10CrMo9–10
10CrMo9–10
SA/EN 10028-2
SA/EN 10028-2
SA/EN 10028-2
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
10028-2
10028-2
10028-2
10028-2
10028-2
10028-2
10028‐2
SA/EN 10028-7
(470)
(480)
(490)
(510)
(350)
(360)
2013 SECTION IX
140
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
10028-7
X2CrNiN18–10
10028-7 X2CrNiMo17–12–2
10028-7 X2CrNiMoN17–11–2
10028-7 X2CrNiMoN17–13–3
10028-7
X5CrNi18–10
10028-7 X5CrNiMo17–12–2
10028-7
X5CrNiN19–9
10028-7
X6CrNiTi18–10
10088-2 X6CrNiMoTi17–12–2
10216-2
P235GH
10216-2
P265GH
10216-2
16Mo3
10216-2
13CrMo4–5
10216-2
10CrMo9–10
10216-2
X10CrMoVNb9–1
10217-1
P235TR2
10222-2
P280GH
10222-2
P305GH
10222-2
13CrMo4–5
10222-2
13CrMo4–5
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
80 (550)
75.5 (520)
84 (580)
84 (580)
75.5 (520)
75.5 (520)
80 (550)
72.5 (500)
78.5 (540)
52 (360)
59.5 (410)
65.5 (450)
64 (440)
69.5 (480)
91.5 (630)
52 (360)
66.5 (460)
71 (490)
64 (440)
61 (420)
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
3
4
5A
15E
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
101
101
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
5.1
5.2
6.4
1.1
1.2
1.2
5.1
5.1
18Cr–8Ni–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–N
18Cr–8Ni
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
18Cr–8Ni–N
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo–Ti
C
C
C–0.5Mo
1Cr–0.5Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
9Cr–1Mo–V
C
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
1Cr–0.5Mo
1Cr–0.5Mo
SA/EN 10222-2
SA/EN 10222-2
11CrMo9–10
11CrMo9–10
...
...
75.5 (520)
65.5 (450)
5A
5A
1
1
102
102
5.2
5.2
2.25Cr–1Mo
2.25Cr–1Mo
SA/EN 10222-2
X10CrMoVNb9–1
...
91.5 (630)
15E
1
102
6.4
9Cr–1Mo–V
SA/GB 713
Q345R
…
68 (470)
1
1
101
1.1
C–Mn
SA/GB 713
Q345R
…
69.5 (480)
1
1
101
1.2
C–Mn
SA/GB 713
Q345R
…
71 (490)
1
2
101
1.2
C–Mn
SA/GB 713
Q345R
…
71 (490)
1
2
101
1.2
C–Mn
SA/GB 713
Q345R
…
72.5 (500)
1
2
101
1.2
C–Mn
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate
Plate, sheet, and strip
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
E.R.W. tube
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings ≤ 10 in. (≤ 250 mm)
Forgings > 10 in. ≤ 20 in. (> 250 mm ≤
500 mm)
Forgings ≤ 8 in. (≤ 200 mm)
Forgings > 8 in. ≤ 20 in. (> 200 mm ≤
500 mm)
Forgings
Plate > 6 in. (150 mm) ≤ 10 in.
(250 mm)
Plate > 4 in. (100 mm) ≤ 6 in.
(150 mm)
Plate > 2.4 in. (60 mm) ≤ 4 in.
(100 mm)
Plate > 1.5 in. (36 mm) ≤ 2.4 in.
(60 mm)
Plate > 0.65 in. (16 mm) ≤ 1.5 in.
(36 mm)
2013 SECTION IX
141
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
Type or Grade
UNS No.
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
Group
No.
P‐No.
ISO 15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ferrous (Cont'd)
Q345R
…
74 (510)
1
2
101
1.2
C–Mn
SA/GB 713
Q370R
…
75.5 (520)
1
2
101
1.2
C
SA/GB 713
Q370R
…
77 (530)
1
2
101
1.2
C
SA/GB 713
Q370R
…
77 (530)
1
2
101
1.3
C
SA/GB 713
15CrMoR
…
64 (440)
4
1
101
5.1
1Cr–0.5Mo
SA/GB 713
15CrMoR
…
65 (450)
4
1
101
5.1
1Cr–0.5Mo
SA/GB 713
15CrMoR
…
65 (450)
4
1
101
5.1
1Cr–0.5Mo
SA/IS 2062
SA/IS 2062
SA/IS 2062
E250 A
E250 B
E250 C
...
...
...
59.5 (410)
59.5 (410)
59.5 (410)
1
1
1
1
1
1
101
101
101
1.3
1.3
1.3
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
C–Mn–Si
Plate > 0.125 in. (3 mm) ≤ 0.65 in.
(16 mm)
Plate > 1.4 in. (36 mm) ≤ 2.4 in.
(60 mm)
Plate > 0.65 in. (16 mm) ≤ 1.4 in.
(36 mm)
Plate > 0.375 in. (10 mm) ≤ 0.65 in.
(16 mm)
Plate > 4 in. (100 mm) ≤ 6 in.
(150 mm)
Plate > 2.4 in. (60 mm) ≤ 4 in.
(100 mm)
Plate > 0.25 in. (6 mm) ≤ 2.4 in.
(60 mm)
Plate, bars & shapes
Plate, bars & shapes
Plate, bars & shapes
SA/JIS G3118
SGV480
...
70 (485)
1
2
101
1.2
C–Mn–Si
Plate
SA/JIS G4303
SA/JIS G4303
SA/JIS G4303
SUS 302
SUS 304
SUS 304L
S30200
S30400
S30403
75 (515)
75 (515)
70 (485)
8
8
8
1
1
1
102
102
102
8.1
8.1
8.1
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
18Cr–8Ni
Bars & shapes
Bars & shapes
Bars & shapes
SA/JIS G4303
SUS 309S
S30908
75 (515)
8
2
102
8.2
23Cr–12Ni
Bars & shapes
SA/JIS G4303
SUS 310S
S31008
75 (515)
8
2
102
8.2
25Cr–20Ni
Bars & shapes
SA/JIS G4303
SA/JIS G4303
SUS 316
SUS 316L
S31600
S31603
75 (515)
70 (485)
8
8
1
1
102
102
8.1
8.1
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
16Cr–12Ni–2Mo
Bars & shapes
Bars & shapes
SA/JIS G4303
SUS 321
S32100
75 (515)
8
1
102
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Ti
Bars & shapes
SA/JIS G4303
SUS 347
S34700
75 (515)
8
1
102
8.1
18Cr–10Ni–Cb
Bars & shapes
SA/JIS G4303
SUS 405
S40500
60 (415)
7
1
102
7.1
12Cr–1Al
Bars & shapes
P440 NJ4
...
10A
1
101
4.1
Mn–0.5Ni–V
Plate
SA/NF A 36-215
91.5 (630)
2013 SECTION IX
142
SA/GB 713
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
65Cu–Zn–3Pb
65Cu–Zn–3Pb
65Cu–Zn–3Pb
65Cu–Zn–3Pb
65Cu–Zn–3Pb
Rod ≤ 1 in. (25 mm)
Rod > 1 in. – 2 in. (25 mm – 51 mm), incl.
Rod > 2 in. (51 mm)
Bar ≤ 1 in. (25 mm)
Bar > 1 in. (25 mm)
Al–Si
Al–Si–Mg
Al–Si–Mg
99.95Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
Castings
Castings
Castings
Smls. pipe
Smls. pipe
Smls. pipe
Nonferrous
C36000
C36000
C36000
C36000
C36000
...
...
...
...
...
48 (330)
44 (305)
40 (275)
44 (305)
40 (275)
...
...
...
...
...
107
107
107
107
107
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
B/SB-26
B/SB-26
B/SB-26
B/SB-42
B/SB-42
B/SB-42
A24430
A03560
A03560
C10200
C12000
C12200
...
T71
T6
...
...
...
17 (115)
25 (170)
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
26
26
26
31
31
31
...
...
...
107
107
107
24.1
24.2
24.2
31
31
31
B/SB-43
B/SB-61
C23000
C92200
...
...
40 (275)
30 (205)
32
...
107
107
32.1
NA
85Cu–15Zn
88Cu–Sn–Zn–Pb
Smls. pipe
Castings
B/SB-62
B68
B68
B68
C83600
C10200
C12000
C12200
...
...
...
...
30
30
30
30
(205)
(205)
(205)
(205)
...
31
31
31
107
107
107
107
NA
31
31
31
85Cu–5Sn–5Zn–5Pb
99.95Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
Castings
Tube
Tube
Tube
B/SB-75
B/SB-75
B/SB-75
C10200
C12000
C12200
...
...
...
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
31
31
31
107
107
107
31
31
31
99.95Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
B88
B88
B88
C10200
C12000
C12200
...
...
...
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
31
31
31
107
107
107
31
31
31
99.95Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
Tube
Tube
Tube
B/SB-96
B/SB-98
B/SB-98
B/SB-98
C65500
C65100
C65500
C66100
...
...
...
...
50
40
52
52
(345)
(275)
(360)
(360)
33
33
33
33
107
107
107
107
37
37
37
37
97Cu–3Si
98.5Cu–1.5Si
97Cu–3Si
94Cu–3Si
Plate, sht, strip & bar
Rod, bar & shapes
Rod, bar & shapes
Rod, bar & shapes
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
C10200
C12000
C12200
C14200
C19200
C23000
...
...
...
...
...
...
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
38 (260)
40 (275)
31
31
31
31
31
32
107
107
107
107
107
107
31
31
31
31
31
32.1
99.95Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.4Cu–As–P
99.7Cu–Fe–P
85Cu–15Zn
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
2013 SECTION IX
143
B16
B16
B16
B16
B16
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
C28000
C44300
C44400
C44500
C60800
C68700
...
...
...
...
...
...
50
45
45
45
50
50
(345)
(310)
(310)
(310)
(345)
(345)
32
32
32
32
35
32
107
107
107
107
108
108
32.1
32.2
32.2
32.2
35
32.2
60Cu–40Zn
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06As
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06Sb
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06P
95Cu–5Al
78Cu–20Zn–2Al
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
C70400
C70600
C71000
C71500
C72200
...
...
...
...
...
38
40
45
52
45
(260)
(275)
(310)
(360)
(310)
34
34
34
34
34
107
107
107
107
107
34
34
34
34
34
95Cu–5Ni
90Cu–10Ni
80Cu–20Ni
70Cu–30Ni
80Cu–16Ni–0.75Fe–0.5Cr
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
B/SB-127
N04400
...
70 (485)
42
110
42
67Ni–30Cu
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-135
C23000
...
40 (275)
32
107
32.1
85Cu–15Zn
Smls. tube
B/SB-148
B/SB-148
C95200
C95400
...
...
65 (450)
75 (515)
35
35
108
108
35
35
88Cu–9Al–3Fe
85Cu–11Al–4Fe
Castings
Castings
B/SB-148
B/SB-148
B/SB-148
C95300
C95500
C95600
...
...
...
65 (450)
90 (620)
60 (415)
35
35
35
108
108
108
35
35
35
89Cu–10Al–1Fe
82Cu–11Al–4Fe–3Mn
90Cu–7Al–3Si
Castings
Castings
Castings
B/SB-150
B/SB-150
B/SB-150
B/SB-150
C61400
C62300
C63000
C64200
...
...
...
...
70 (485)
75 (515)
85 (585)
70 (485)
35
35
35
35
108
108
108
108
35
35
35
35
90Cu–7Al–3Fe
88Cu–9Al–3Fe
81Cu–10Al–5Ni–3Fe
91Cu–7Al–2Si
Rod & bar
Rod (round)
Rod & bar
Rod & bar
B/SB-151
C70600
...
38 (260)
34
107
34
90Cu–10Ni
Rod & bar
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
C10200
C10400
C10500
C10700
C11000
...
...
...
...
...
30
30
30
30
30
(205)
(205)
(205)
(205)
(205)
31
31
31
31
31
107
107
107
107
107
31
31
31
31
31
99.95Cu–P
99.95Cu + Ag
99.95Cu + Ag
99.95Cu + Ag
99.90Cu
Plt,
Plt,
Plt,
Plt,
Plt,
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
C12200
C12300
C14200
...
...
...
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
31
31
31
107
107
107
31
31
31
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.4Cu–As–P
Plt, sht, strip & bar
Plt, sht, strip & bar
Plt, sht, strip & bar
sht,
sht,
sht,
sht,
sht,
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
& bar
& bar
& bar
& bar
& bar
2013 SECTION IX
144
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
N02200
N02201
...
...
55 (380)
50 (345)
41
41
110
110
41
41
99.0Ni
99.0Ni–Low C
Rod & bar
Rod & bar
B/SB-161
B/SB-161
N02200
N02201
...
...
55 (380)
50 (345)
41
41
110
110
41
41
99.0Ni
99.0Ni–Low C
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-162
B/SB-162
N02200
N02201
...
...
55 (380)
50 (345)
41
41
110
110
41
41
99.0Ni
99.0Ni–Low C
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
N02200
N02201
N04400
N06600
N06601
...
...
...
...
...
55 (380)
50 (345)
70 (485)
80 (550)
80 (550)
41
41
42
43
43
110
110
110
111
111
41
41
42
43
43
99.0Ni
99.0Ni–Low C
67Ni–30Cu
72Ni–15Cr–8Fe
60Ni–23Cr–12Fe–Al
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
N06690
N08120
N08800
N08801
N08810
...
...
...
...
...
85 (585)
90 (620)
75 (515)
65 (450)
65 (450)
43
45
45
45
45
111
111
111
111
111
43
45
45
45
45
58Ni–29Cr–9Fe
37Ni–33Fe–25Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
32Ni–45Fe–20.5Cr–Ti
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
N08811
N08825
...
...
65 (450)
85 (585)
45
45
111
111
45
45
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr–Al–Ti
42Ni–21.5Cr–3Mo–2.3Cu
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
B/SB-164
B/SB-164
N04400
N04405
...
...
70 (485)
70 (485)
42
42
110
110
42
42
67Ni–30Cu
67Ni–30Cu
Rod, bar & wire
Rod, bar & wire
B/SB-165
N04400
...
70 (485)
42
110
42
67Ni–30Cu
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-166
B/SB-166
B/SB-166
B/SB-166
B/SB-166
N06045
N06600
N06601
N06617
N06690
...
...
...
...
...
90 (620)
80 (550)
80 (550)
95 (655)
85 (585)
46
43
43
43
43
111
111
111
111
111
45
43
43
46
43
46Ni–27Cr–23Fe–2.75Si
72Ni–15Cr–8Fe
60Ni–23Cr–12Fe–Al
52Ni–22Cr–13Co–9Mo
58Ni–29Cr–9Fe
Rod, bar
Rod, bar
Rod, bar
Rod, bar
Rod, bar
B/SB-167
B/SB-167
B/SB-167
B/SB-167
B/SB-167
N06045
N06600
N06601
N06617
N06690
...
...
...
...
...
90 (620)
75 (515)
80 (550)
95 (655)
75 (515)
46
43
43
43
43
111
111
111
111
111
45
43
43
46
43
46Ni–27Cr–23Fe–2.75Si
72Ni–15Cr–8Fe
60Ni–23Cr–12Fe–Al
52Ni–22Cr–13Co–9Mo
58Ni–29Cr–9Fe
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
& wire
& wire
& wire
& wire
& wire
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
2013 SECTION IX
145
B/SB-160
B/SB-160
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet, strip & bar ≤ 1/2 in (13 mm)
Plate, sheet, strip & bar > 1/2 in. - 2 in. (13 mm-51
mm) incl.
Plate, sheet, strip & bar > 2 in. - 5 in. (51 mm-127
mm) incl.
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
N06045
N06600
N06601
N06617
N06690
C61400
C61400
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
90 (620)
80 (550)
80 (550)
95 (655)
85 (585)
72 (495)
70 (485)
46
43
43
43
43
35
35
111
111
111
111
111
108
108
45
43
43
46
43
35
35
46Ni–27Cr–23Fe–2.75Si
72Ni–15Cr–8Fe
60Ni–23Cr–12Fe–Al
52Ni–22Cr–13Co–9Mo
58Ni–29Cr–9Fe
90Cu–7Al–3Fe
90Cu–7Al–3Fe
B/SB-169
C61400
...
65 (450)
35
108
35
90Cu–7Al–3Fe
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
C36500
C44300
C44400
C44500
C46400
C46500
C61400
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
40
45
45
45
50
50
65
(275)
(310)
(310)
(310)
(345)
(345)
(450)
32
32
32
32
32
32
35
107
107
107
107
107
107
108
32.2
32.2
32.2
32.2
32.2
32.2
35
60Cu–39Zn–Pb
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06As
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06Sb
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06P
60Cu–39Zn–Sn
60Cu–39Zn–As
90Cu–7Al–3Fe
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet > 2 in. – 5 in. (51 mm – 127 mm),
incl.
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
C61400
C63000
...
...
70 (485)
80 (550)
35
35
108
108
35
35
90Cu–7Al–3Fe
81Cu–10Al–5Ni–3Fe
B/SB-171
C63000
...
85 (585)
35
108
35
81Cu–10Al–5Ni–3Fe
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
C63000
C70600
...
...
90 (620)
40 (275)
35
34
108
107
35
34
81Cu–10Al–5Ni–3Fe
90Cu–10Ni
Plate & sheet ≤ 2 in. (51 mm)
Plate & sheet > 31/2 in. – 5 in. (89 mm – 127 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 2 in. – 3.5 in. (51 mm – 89 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet ≤ 2 in. (51 mm)
Plate & sheet
B/SB-171
C71500
...
45 (310)
34
107
34
70Cu–30Ni
B/SB-171
C71500
...
50 (345)
34
107
34
70Cu–30Ni
Plate & sheet > 2.5 in. – 5 in. (64 mm – 127 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet ≤ 2.5 in. (64 mm)
B/SB-187
B/SB-187
C10200
C11000
O60
O60
28 (195)
28 (195)
31
31
107
107
31
31
99.95Cu–P
99.9Cu
Rod & bar
Rod & bar
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
A91060
A91100
A93003
1060
1100
3003
8 (55)
11 (76)
14 (97)
21
21
21
104
104
104
21
21
22.1
99.60Al
99.0Al–Cu
Al–Mn–Cu
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
2013 SECTION IX
146
B/SB-168
B/SB-168
B/SB-168
B/SB-168
B/SB-168
B/SB-169
B/SB-169
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
A93004
A95052
3004
5052
B/SB-209
A95083
B/SB-209
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
P‐No.
22 (150)
25 (170)
22
22
104
105
5083
36 (250)
25
A95083
5083
37 (255)
B/SB-209
A95083
5083
B/SB-209
A95083
B/SB-209
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
22.2
22.3
Al–Mn–Mg
Al–2.5Mg
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
105
22.4
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
25
105
22.4
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
38 (260)
25
105
22.4
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
5083
39 (270)
25
105
22.4
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
A95083
5083
40 (275)
25
105
22.4
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
A95086
A95154
A95254
A95454
5086
5154
5254
5454
35 (240)
30 (205)
30 (205)
31 (215)
25
22
22
22
105
105
105
105
22.4
22.4
22.4
22.3
Al–4.0Mg–Mn
Al–3.5Mg
Al–3.5Mg
Al–2.7Mg–Mn
Plate & sheet > 7 in. – 8 in. (178 mm – 203 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 5 in. – 7 in. (127 mm – 178 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 3 in. – 5 in. (76 mm – 127 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 1.5 in. – 3 in. (38 mm – 76 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 0.05 in. – 1.5 in. (1.3 mm
– 38 mm), incl.
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
B/SB-209
A95456
5456
38 (260)
25
105
22.4
Al–5.1Mg–Mn
B/SB-209
A95456
5456
39 (270)
25
105
22.4
Al–5.1Mg–Mn
B/SB-209
A95456
5456
40 (275)
25
105
22.4
Al–5.1Mg–Mn
B/SB-209
A95456
5456
41 (285)
25
105
22.4
Al–5.1Mg–Mn
B/SB-209
A95456
5456
42 (290)
25
105
22.4
Al–5.1Mg–Mn
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
A95652
A96061
...
5652
6061
Alclad 3003
25 (170)
24 (165)
13 (90)
22
23
21
105
105
104
22.3
23.1
...
Al–2.5Mg
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Al–Mn–Cu
B/SB-209
...
Alclad 3003
14 (97)
21
104
...
Al–Mn–Cu
B/SB-209
...
Alclad 3004
21 (145)
22
104
...
Al–Mn–Mg
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet
Plate & sheet > 0.05 in. < 0.5 in. ( > 1.3 mm
< 13 mm)
Plate & sheet ≥ 0.5 in. – 3 in. (13 mm – 76 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 0.05 in. < 0.5 in. ( > 1.3 mm
< 13 mm)
2013 SECTION IX
147
Plate & sheet > 7 in. – 8 in. (178 mm – 203 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 5 in. – 7 in. (127 mm – 178 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 3 in. – 5 in. (76 mm – 127 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 1.5 in. – 3 in. (38 mm – 76 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 0.05 in. – 1.5 in. (1.3 mm
– 38 mm), incl.
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
...
Alclad 3004
22 (150)
22
104
...
Al–Mn–Mg
B/SB-209
...
Alclad 6061
24 (165)
23
105
...
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Plate & sheet ≥ 0.5 in. – 3 in. (13 mm – 76 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet
B/SB-209
A95050
5050
18 (125)
21
105
22.2
Al–1.5Mg
Plate & sheet
B/SB-210
B/SB-210
B/SB-210
B/SB-210
B/SB-210
A91060
...
A93003
A95052
A95154
1060
Alclad 3003
3003
5052
5154
8.5 (59)
13 (90)
14 (97)
25 (170)
30 (205)
21
21
21
22
22
104
104
104
105
105
21
...
22.1
22.3
22.4
99.60Al
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–2.5Mg
Al–3.5Mg
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
B/SB-210
B/SB-210
A96061
A96063
6061
6063
24 (165)
17 (115)
23
23
105
105
23.1
23.1
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Al–Mg–Si
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
B210
B210
B210
A95083
A95086
A95456
5083
5086
5456
39 (270)
35 (240)
41 (285)
25
25
25
105
105
105
22.4
22.4
22.4
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
Al–4.0Mg–Mn
Al–5.1Mg–Mn
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
B/SB-211
A96061
6061
24 (165)
23
105
23.1
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Bar, rod & wire
B/SB-221
B/SB-221
B/SB-221
B/SB-221
B/SB-221
A91060
A91100
A93003
A95083
A95154
1060
1100
3003
5083
5154
8.5 (59)
11 (76)
14 (97)
39 (270)
30 (205)
21
21
21
25
22
104
104
104
105
105
21
21
22.1
22.4
22.4
99.60Al
99.0Al–Cu
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
Al–3.5Mg
Bar, rod & shapes
Bar, rod & shapes
Bar, rod & shapes
Bar, rod & shapes
Bar, rod & shapes
B/SB-221
B/SB-221
B/SB-221
B/SB-221
A95454
A95456
A96061
A96063
5454
5456
6061
6063
31 (215)
41 (285)
24 (165)
17 (115)
22
25
23
23
105
105
105
105
22.3
22.4
23.1
23.1
Al–2.7Mg–Mn
Al–5.1Mg–Mn
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Al–Mg–Si
Bar,
Bar,
Bar,
Bar,
B/SB-234
B/SB-234
B/SB-234
B/SB-234
B/SB-234
B/SB-234
A91060
...
A93003
A95052
A95454
A96061
1060
Alclad 3003
3003
5052
5454
6061
8.5 (59)
13 (90)
14 (97)
25 (170)
31 (215)
24 (165)
21
21
21
22
22
23
104
104
104
105
105
105
21
99.60Al
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–2.5Mg
Al–2.7Mg–Mn
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
A/SA-240
S31277
...
112 (770)
45
111
27Ni–22Cr–7Mo–Mn–Cu
Plate, sheet & strip
...
22.1
22.3
22.3
23.1
8.2
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
rod &
rod &
rod &
rod &
2013 SECTION IX
148
B/SB-209
shapes
shapes
shapes
shapes
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
A91060
A91100
...
A93003
A95052
A95083
1060
1100
Alclad 3003
3003
5052
5083
8.5 (59)
11 (76)
13 (90)
14 (97)
25 (170)
39 (270)
21
21
21
21
22
25
104
104
104
104
105
105
21
21
...
22.1
22.3
22.4
99.60Al
99.0Al–Cu
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–2.5Mg
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
A95086
A95454
A95456
A96061
A96063
5086
5454
5456
6061
6063
35 (240)
31 (215)
41 (285)
24 (165)
17 (115)
25
22
25
23
23
105
105
105
105
105
22.4
22.3
22.4
23.1
23.1
Al–4.0Mg–Mn
Al–2.7Mg–Mn
Al–5.1Mg–Mn
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Al–Mg–Si
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
B/SB-247
B/SB-247
B/SB-247
A93003
A95083
A96061
3003
5083
6061
14 (97)
38 (260)
24 (165)
21
25
23
104
105
105
22.1
22.4
23.1
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
R50250
R50400
R50400
R50550
R52250
R52252
1
2
2H
3
11
17
35
50
58
65
35
35
(240)
(345)
(400)
(450)
(240)
(240)
51
51
51
52
51
51
115
115
115
115
115
...
51
51
...
52
51
51
Ti
Ti
Ti
Ti
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
R52254
R52400
R52400
R52402
27
7
7H
16
35
50
58
50
(240)
(345)
(400)
(345)
51
51
51
51
115
115
115
115
51
51
...
51
Ti–Ru
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
R52402
R52404
R52404
R53400
R56320
R56323
16H
26
26H
12
9
28
58 (400)
50 (345)
58 (400)
70 (485)
90 (620)
90 (620)
51
51
51
52
53
53
115
115
115
115
115
115
...
51
...
52
53
53
Ti–Pd
Ti–Ru
Ti–Ru
Ti–0.3Mo–0.8Ni
Ti–3Al–2.5V
Ti–3Al–2.5V–0.1Ru
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
B/SB-271
B/SB-271
C95200
C95400
...
...
65 (450)
75 (515)
35
35
108
108
35
35
88Cu–9Al–3Fe
85Cu–11Al–4Fe
Castings
Castings
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
2013 SECTION IX
149
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
99.95Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
99.9Cu
60Cu–38Zn–2Pb
60Cu–38Zn–2Pb
60Cu–39Zn–Sn
97Cu–3Si
59Cu–39Zn–Fe–Sn
Forgings
Forgings > 1.5 in. (38 mm)
Forgings ≤ 1.5 in. (38 mm)
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
C10200
C12000
C12200
102
120
122
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
31
31
31
107
107
107
31
31
31
B/SB-283
B/SB-283
B/SB-283
B/SB-283
B/SB-283
B/SB-283
C11000
C37700
C37700
C46400
C65500
C67500
Cu
Forging brass
Forging brass
Naval brass
High Si bronze
Mn bronze
33
46
50
64
52
72
(230)
(315)
(345)
(440)
(360)
(495)
31
...
...
32
33
32
107
107
107
107
107
107
31
NA
NA
32.2
31
32.2
B302
B302
C12000
C12200
...
...
30 (205)
30 (205)
31
31
107
107
31
31
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
Pipe
Pipe
B/SB-308
A96061
6061
24 (165)
23
105
23.1
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Shapes
B/SB-315
C65500
...
50 (345)
33
107
33
97Cu–3Si
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-333
N10001
...
100 (690)
44
112
44
62Ni–28Mo–5Fe
B/SB-333
B/SB-333
B/SB-333
B/SB-333
N10001
N10629
N10665
N10675
...
...
...
...
115 (795)
110 (760)
110 (760)
110 (760)
44
44
44
44
112
112
112
112
44
44
44
44
62Ni–28Mo–5Fe
66Ni–28Mo–3Fe–1.3Cr–0.25Al
65Ni–28Mo–2Fe
65Ni–29.5Mo–2Fe–2Cr
Plate, sheet & strip ≥ 0.1875 in. – 2.5 in. (5 mm
– 64 mm), incl.
Plate, sheet & strip < 0.1875 in. (5 mm)
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-335
B/SB-335
B/SB-335
B/SB-335
B/SB-335
N10001
N10001
N10629
N10665
N10675
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
115 (795)
110 (760)
110 (760)
110 (760)
44
44
44
44
44
112
112
112
112
112
44
44
44
44
44
62Ni–28Mo–5Fe
62Ni–28Mo–5Fe
66Ni–28Mo–3Fe–1.3Cr–0.25Al
65Ni–28Mo–2Fe
65Ni–29.5Mo–2Fe–2Cr
Rod > 1.5 in. – 3.5 in. (38 mm – 89 mm), incl.
Rod ≥ 0.3125 in. – 1.5 in. (8 mm – 38 mm), incl.
Rod
Rod
Rod
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
R50250
R50400
R50400
R50550
R52400
R52400
R52402
R52402
1
2
2H
3
7
7H
16
16H
51
51
51
52
51
51
51
51
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
51
51
...
52
51
...
51
...
Ti
Ti
Ti
Ti
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
35
50
58
65
50
58
50
58
(240)
(345)
(400)
(450)
(345)
(400)
(345)
(400)
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
welded tube
welded tube
welded tube
welded tube
welded tube
welded tube
welded tube
welded tube
2013 SECTION IX
150
B280
B280
B280
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Ti–Ru
Ti–Ru
Ti–0.3Mo–0.8Ni
Ti–3Al–2.5V
Ti–3Al–2.5V–0.1Ru
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
99.60Al
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
Al–4.0Mg–Mn
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Al–Mg–Si
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
R52404
R52404
R53400
R56320
R56323
26
26H
12
9
28
50
58
70
90
90
(345)
(400)
(485)
(620)
(620)
51
51
52
53
53
115
115
115
115
115
B345
B345
B345
B345
B345
B345
A91060
A93003
A95083
A95086
A96061
A96063
1060
3003
5083
5086
6061
6063
8.5 (59)
14 (97)
39 (270)
35 (240)
24 (165)
17 (115)
21
21
25
25
23
23
104
104
105
105
105
105
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
R50250
R50400
R50400
R50550
1
2
2H
3
35
50
58
65
(240)
(345)
(400)
(450)
51
51
51
52
115
115
115
115
51
51
...
52
Ti
Ti
Ti
Ti
Bars &
Bars &
Bars &
Bars &
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
R52400
R52400
R52402
R52404
R52404
7
7H
16H
26
26H
50 (345)
58 (400)
58 (400)
50 (345)
58 (400)
51
51
51
51
51
115
115
115
115
115
51
...
...
51
...
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Ru
Ti–Ru
Bars & billets
Bars & billets
Bars & billets
Bars & billets
Bars & billets
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
R53400
R52402
R56320
R56323
12
16
9
28
70
50
90
90
(485)
(345)
(620)
(620)
52
51
53
53
115
115
115
115
52
51
53
53
Ti–0.3Mo–0.8Ni
Ti–Pd
Ti–3Al–2.5V
Ti–3Al–2.5V–0.1Ru
Bars & billets
Bars & billets
Bars & billets
Bars & billets
A/SA-351
N08603
HT30
65 (450)
45
111
45
35Ni–15Cr–0.5Mo
Castings
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
J94651
N08007
N08151
CN3MN
CN7M
CT15C
80 (550)
62 (425)
63 (435)
45
45
45
111
111
111
8.2
8.2
45
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
28Ni–19Cr–Cu–Mo
32Ni–45Fe–20Cr–Cb
Castings
Castings
Castings
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
C12200
C44300
C44400
C44500
...
...
...
...
30
45
45
45
31
32
32
32
107
107
107
107
31
32.2
32.2
32.2
99.9Cu–P
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06As
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06Sb
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06P
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
(205)
(310)
(310)
(310)
51
...
52
53
53
21
22.1
22.4
22.4
23.1
23.1
&
&
&
&
&
welded tube
welded tube
welded tube
welded tube
welded tube
billets
billets
billets
billets
tube
tube
tube
tube
2013 SECTION IX
151
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
C70600
C71000
C71500
...
...
...
B361
B361
B361
B361
A91060
A91100
A83003
A93003
B361
B361
B361
B361
A95083
A95154
A96061
A96063
5083
5154
WP6061
WP6063
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
R50250
R50400
R50550
R52400
R52400
R52402
R52402
R52404
R52404
WPT 1
WPT 2
WPT 3
WPT 7
WPT 7H
WPT 16
WPT 16H
WPT 26
WPT 26H
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
R53400
R56320
R56323
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
40 (275)
45 (310)
52 (360)
34
34
34
107
107
107
34
34
34
90Cu–10Ni
80Cu–20Ni
70Cu–30Ni
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
Smls. tube
21
21
21
21
104
104
104
104
21
21
...
22.1
99.60Al
99.0Al–Cu
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–Mn–Cu
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
39 (270)
30 (205)
24 (165)
17 (115)
25
22
23
23
105
105
105
105
22.4
22.3
23.1
23.1
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
Al–3.5Mg
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Al–Mg–Si
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
35
50
65
50
58
50
58
50
58
(240)
(345)
(450)
(345)
(400)
(345)
(400)
(345)
(400)
51
51
52
51
51
51
51
51
51
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
51
51
52
51
...
...
...
51
...
Ti
Ti
Ti
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Ru
Ti–Ru
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
WPT 12
WPT 9
WPT28
70 (485)
90 (620)
90 (620)
52
53
53
115
115
115
52
53
53
Ti–0.3Mo–0.8Ni
Ti–3Al–2.5V
Ti–3Al–2.5V–0.1Ru
Smls. & welded fittings
Smls. & welded fittings
Smls. & welded fittings
N02200
N02201
N04400
N06002
N06007
...
...
...
...
...
55 (380)
50 (345)
70 (485)
100 (690)
90 (620)
41
41
42
43
45
110
110
110
111
111
41
41
42
43
43
99.0Ni
99.0Ni–Low C
67Ni–30Cu
47Ni–22Cr–18Fe–9Mo
47Ni–22Cr–19Fe–6Mo
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
N06022
N06030
N06035
N06045
N06059
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
85 (585)
85 (585)
90 (620)
100 (690)
43
45
43
46
43
111
111
111
111
111
44
45
...
45
43
55Ni–21Cr–13.5Mo
40Ni–29Cr–15Fe–5Mo
58Ni–33Cr–8Mo
46Ni–27Cr–23Fe–2.75Si
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
WP1060
8.5 (59)
WP1100
11 (76)
WP Alclad 3003 13 (90)
WP3003
14 (97)
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
welded
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
2013 SECTION IX
152
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo–1.6Cu
60Ni–19Cr–19Mo–1.8Ta
53Ni–22Cr–14W–Co–Fe–Mo
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
N06200
N06210
N06230
...
...
...
100 (690)
100 (690)
110 (760)
43
43
43
111
111
111
43
...
43
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
N06455
N06600
N06625
N06985
N08020
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
80 (550)
110 (760)
90 (620)
80 (550)
43
43
43
45
45
111
111
111
111
111
43
43
43
45
45
61Ni–15Mo–16Cr
72Ni–15Cr–8Fe
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
47Ni–22Cr–20Fe–7Mo
35Ni–35Fe–20Cr–Cb
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
N08031
N08120
N08330
N08367
...
...
...
...
94 (650)
90 (620)
70 (485)
95 (655)
45
45
46
45
111
111
111
111
45
45
45
8.2
31Ni–31Fe–27Cr–7Mo
37Ni–33Fe–25Cr
35Ni–19Cr–1.25Si
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings > 3/16 in. (5 mm)
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
N08367
N08800
N08825
N08925
N10001
N10003
...
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
75 (515)
85 (585)
87 (600)
100 (690)
100 (690)
45
45
45
45
44
44
111
111
111
111
112
112
8.2
45
45
8.2
44
44
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
42Ni–21.5Cr–3Mo–2.3Cu
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
62Ni–28Mo–5Fe
70Ni–16Mo–7Cr–5Fe
Fittings ≤ 3/16 in. (5 mm)
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
N10242
N10276
N10629
N10665
N10675
...
...
...
...
...
105 (725)
100 (690)
110 (760)
110 (760)
110 (760)
44
43
44
44
44
112
111
112
112
112
44
43
44
44
44
62Ni–25Mo–8Cr–2Fe
54Ni–16Mo–15Cr
66Ni–28Mo–3Fe–1.3Cr–0.25Al
65Ni–28Mo–2Fe
65Ni–29.5Mo–2Fe–2Cr
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
N12160
R20033
R30556
...
...
...
90 (620)
109 (750)
100 (690)
46
45
45
...
111
111
46
45
45
37Ni–30Co–28Cr–2.7Si
33Cr–31Ni–32Fe–1.5Mo–0.6Cu–N
21Ni–30Fe–22Cr–18Co–3Mo–3W
Fittings
Fittings
Fittings
B/SB-366
N08926
...
94 (650)
45
111
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Fittings
B/SB-367
B/SB-367
R50400
R50550
Gr. C–2
Gr. C–3
50 (345)
65 (450)
51
52
115
115
51
52
Ti
Ti
Castings
Castings
B/SB-369
C96200
...
45 (310)
34
107
34
87.5Cu–10Ni–Fe–Mn
Castings
B/SB-381
R50250
F–1
35 (240)
51
115
51
Ti
Forgings
8.2
2013 SECTION IX
153
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
R50400
R50400
R50550
R52400
F–2
F–2H
F–3
F–7
50
58
65
50
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
R52400
R52402
R52402
R52404
R52404
F–7H
F–16
F–16H
F–26
F–26H
58
50
58
50
58
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
R53400
R56320
R56323
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
P‐No.
(345)
(400)
(450)
(345)
51
51
52
51
115
115
115
115
(400)
(345)
(400)
(345)
(400)
51
51
51
51
51
F–12
F–9
F–28
70 (485)
90 (620)
90 (620)
C10200
C12000
C12200
C14200
C19200
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
C23000
C44300
C44400
C44500
C60800
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
51
...
52
51
Ti
Ti
Ti
Ti–Pd
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
115
115
115
115
115
...
51
...
51
...
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Ru
Ti–Ru
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
52
53
53
115
115
115
52
53
53
Ti–0.3Mo–0.8Ni
Ti–3Al–2.5V
Ti–3Al–2.5V–0.1Ru
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
38 (260)
31
31
31
31
31
107
107
107
107
107
31
31
31
31
31
99.95Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.4Cu–As–P
99.7Cu–Fe–P
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
...
...
...
...
...
40 (275)
45 (310)
45 (310)
45 (310)
50 (345)
32
32
32
32
35
107
107
107
107
108
32.1
32.2
32.2
32.2
35
85Cu–15Zn
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06As
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06Sb
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06P
95Cu–5Al
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
C68700
C70600
C71000
C71500
...
...
...
...
50
40
45
52
(345)
(275)
(310)
(360)
32
34
34
34
108
107
107
107
32.2
34
34
34
78Cu–20Zn–2Al
90Cu–10Ni
80Cu–20Ni
70Cu–30Ni
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
tube
tube
tube
tube
B/SB-407
B/SB-407
B/SB-407
B/SB-407
B/SB-407
N08120
N08800
N08801
N08810
N08811
...
...
...
...
...
90 (620)
75 (515)
65 (450)
65 (450)
65 (450)
45
45
45
45
45
111
111
111
111
111
45
45
45
45
45
37Ni–33Fe–25Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
32Ni–45Fe–20.5Cr–Ti
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr–Al–Ti
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
B/SB-408
B/SB-408
N08120
N08800
...
...
90 (620)
75 (515)
45
45
111
111
45
45
37Ni–33Fe–25Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
Rod & bar
Rod & bar
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
2013 SECTION IX
154
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
N08810
N08811
...
...
65 (450)
65 (450)
45
45
111
111
45
45
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr–Al–Ti
Rod & bar
Rod & bar
B/SB-409
B/SB-409
B/SB-409
B/SB-409
N08120
N08800
N08810
N08811
...
...
...
...
90 (620)
75 (515)
65 (450)
65 (450)
45
45
45
45
111
111
111
111
45
45
45
45
37Ni–33Fe–25Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr–Al–Ti
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
B/SB-423
N08825
...
75 (515)
45
111
45
42Ni–21.5Cr–3Mo–2.3Cu
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-424
N08825
...
85 (585)
45
111
45
42Ni–21.5Cr–3Mo–2.3Cu
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-425
N08825
...
85 (585)
45
111
45
42Ni–21.5Cr–3Mo–2.3Cu
Rod & bar
B/SB-434
B/SB-434
N10003
N10242
...
...
100 (690)
105 (725)
44
44
112
112
44
44
70Ni–16Mo–7Cr–5Fe
62Ni–25Mo–8Cr–2Fe
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-435
B/SB-435
B/SB-435
B/SB-435
N06002
N06230
N12160
R30556
...
...
...
...
95 (655)
110 (760)
90 (620)
100 (690)
43
43
46
45
111
111
...
111
43
43
46
45
47Ni–22Cr–9Mo–18Fe
53Ni–22Cr–14W–Co–Fe–Mo
37Ni–30Co–28Cr–2.7Si
21Ni–30Fe–22Cr–18Co–3Mo–3W
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet, & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-443
B/SB-443
N06625
N06625
2
1
100 (690)
110 (760)
43
43
111
111
43
43
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-444
B/SB-444
N06625
N06625
1
2
120 (825)
100 (690)
43
43
111
111
43
43
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-446
B/SB-446
N06625
N06625
1
2
120 (825)
100 (690)
43
43
111
111
43
43
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
Rod & bar
Rod & bar
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
N06022
N06030
N06035
N06045
N06059
N06200
N06686
N08020
N08031
N08367
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
85 (585)
85 (585)
90 (620)
100 (690)
100 (690)
100 (690)
80 (550)
94 (650)
95 (655)
43
45
43
46
43
43
43
45
45
45
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
44
45
...
45
43
43
43
45
45
8.2
55Ni–21Cr–13.5Mo
40Ni–29Cr–15Fe–5Mo
58Ni–33Cr–8Mo
46Ni–27Cr–23Fe–2.75Si
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo–1.6Cu
58Ni–21Cr–16Mo–3.5N
35Ni–35Fe–20Cr–Cb
31Ni–33Fe–22Cr–6.5Mo–Cu–N
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
&
&
&
&
strip
strip
strip
strip
2013 SECTION IX
155
B/SB-408
B/SB-408
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
B/SB-462
N10276
...
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
N10629
N10665
N10675
R20033
B/SB-463
B/SB-463
B/SB-463
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
P‐No.
100 (690)
43
111
...
...
...
...
110 (760)
110 (760)
110 (760)
109 (750)
44
44
44
45
N08020
N08024
N08026
...
...
...
80 (550)
80 (550)
80 (550)
B/SB-464
B/SB-464
B/SB-464
N08020
N08024
N08026
...
...
...
B/SB-466
B/SB-466
B/SB-466
C70600
C71000
C71500
B/SB-467
B/SB-467
B/SB-467
B/SB-467
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
43
54Ni–16Mo–15Cr
Forgings
112
112
112
111
44
44
44
45
66Ni–28Mo–3Fe–1.3Cr–0.25Al
65Ni–28Mo–2Fe
65Ni–29.5Mo–2Fe–2Cr
33Cr–31Ni–32Fe–1.5Mo–0.6Cu–N
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
45
45
45
111
111
111
45
45
45
35Ni–35Fe–20Cr–Cb
37Ni–33Fe–23Cr–4Mo
35Ni–30Fe–24Cr–6Mo–3Cu
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
80 (550)
80 (550)
80 (550)
45
45
45
111
111
111
45
45
45
35Ni–35Fe–20Cr–Cb
37Ni–33Fe–23Cr–4Mo
35Ni–30Fe–24Cr–6Mo–3Cu
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
...
...
...
38 (260)
45 (310)
52 (360)
34
34
34
107
107
107
34
34
34
90Cu–10Ni
80Cu–20Ni
70Cu–30Ni
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
C70600
C70600
C71500
C71500
...
...
...
...
38
40
45
50
(260)
(275)
(310)
(345)
34
34
34
34
107
107
107
107
34
34
34
34
90Cu–10Ni
90Cu–10Ni
70Cu–30Ni
70Cu–30Ni
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
B/SB-468
B/SB-468
B/SB-468
N08020
N08024
N08026
...
...
...
80 (550)
80 (550)
80 (550)
45
45
45
111
111
111
45
45
45
35Ni–35Fe–20Cr–Cb
37Ni–33Fe–23Cr–4Mo
35Ni–30Fe–24Cr–6Mo–3Cu
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
B/SB-473
N08020
...
80 (550)
45
111
45
35Ni–35Fe–20Cr–Cb
Bar
B491
A93003
3003
14 (97)
21
104
22.1
Al–Mn–Cu
Extruded tubes
B/SB-493
B/SB-493
R60702
R60705
R60702
R60705
55 (380)
70 (485)
61
62
117
117
61
62
99.2Zr
95.5Zr + 2.5Cb
Forgings
Forgings
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
N04020
N06040
N08826
N24130
N24135
N26022
M35-2
CY40
CU5MCuC
M30C
M35-1
CX2MW
65 (450)
70 (485)
75 (515)
65 (450)
65 (450)
80 (550)
42
43
45
42
42
43
110
111
111
110
110
111
42
43
45
42
42
44
67Ni–30Cu–Fe–Si
72Ni–15Cr–8Fe–Si
42Ni–21.5Cr–3Mo–2.3Cu
67Ni–30Cu–2Fe–Cb
67Ni–30Cu–2Fe–Cb
59Ni–22Cr–14Mo–4Fe–3W
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
>
≤
>
≤
4.5 in.
4.5 in.
4.5 in.
4.5 in.
2013 SECTION IX
156
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
(114 mm)
(114 mm)
(114 mm)
(114 mm)
O.D.
O.D.
O.D.
O.D.
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
N26455
N26625
N30007
N30107
CW2M
CW6MC
N7M
CW6M
B/SB-505
C95200
B/SB-511
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
P‐No.
72 (495)
70 (485)
76 (525)
72 (495)
43
43
44
44
111
111
112
112
...
68 (470)
35
N08330
...
70 (485)
B/SB-514
B/SB-514
B/SB-514
N08120
N08800
N08810
...
...
...
B/SB-515
B/SB-515
B/SB-515
B/SB-515
N08120
N08800
N08810
N08811
B/SB-516
B/SB-516
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
43
43
44
44
66Ni–16Mo–16Cr–Fe–W
60Ni–21.5Cr–9Mo–4Cb–Fe
65Ni–31.5Mo–1.5Fe–Cr
56Ni–19Mo–18Cr–2Fe
Castings
Castings
Castings
Castings
108
35
88Cu–9Al–3Fe
Castings
46
111
45
35Ni–19Cr–1.25Si
Bars & shapes
90 (620)
75 (515)
65 (450)
45
45
45
111
111
111
45
45
45
37Ni–33Fe–25Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
...
...
...
...
90 (620)
75 (515)
65 (450)
65 (450)
45
45
45
45
111
111
111
111
45
45
45
45
37Ni–33Fe–25Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr–Al–Ti
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
N06045
N06600
...
...
90 (620)
80 (550)
46
43
111
111
45
43
46Ni–27Cr–23Fe–2.75Si
72Ni–15Cr–8Fe
Welded tube
Welded tube
B/SB-517
B/SB-517
N06045
N06600
...
...
90 (620)
80 (550)
46
43
111
111
45
43
46Ni–27Cr–23Fe–2.75Si
72Ni–15Cr–8Fe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
B/SB-523
B/SB-523
R60702
R60705
R60702
R60705
55 (380)
80 (550)
61
62
117
117
61
62
99.2Zr
95.5Zr + 2.5Cb
Smls. & welded tube
Smls. & welded tube
B/SB-535
N08330
...
70 (485)
46
111
45
35Ni–19Cr–1.25Si
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-536
N08330
...
70 (485)
46
111
45
35Ni–19Cr–1.25Si
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
C12200
C19400
C23000
C44300
C44400
...
...
...
...
...
30
45
40
45
45
(205)
(310)
(275)
(310)
(310)
31
31
32
32
32
107
107
107
107
107
31
31
32.1
32.2
32.2
99.9Cu–P
97.5Cu–P
85Cu–15Zn
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06As
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06Sb
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
C44500
C68700
C70400
C70600
...
...
...
...
45
50
38
40
(310)
(345)
(260)
(275)
32
32
34
34
107
108
107
107
32.2
32.2
34
34
71Cu–28Zn–1Sn–0.06P
78Cu–20Zn–2Al
95Cu–5Ni
90Cu–10Ni
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
tube
tube
tube
tube
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
2013 SECTION IX
157
tube
tube
tube
tube
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
B/SB-543
C71500
...
B547
B547
B547
B547
B547
A83003
A93003
A95083
A95454
A96061
B/SB-550
B/SB-550
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
Brazing
P‐No.
P‐No.
52 (360)
34
107
Alclad 3003
3003
5083
5454
6061
13 (90)
14 (97)
40 (275)
31 (215)
24 (165)
21
21
25
22
23
R60702
R60705
R60702
R60705
55 (380)
80 (550)
B/SB-551
B/SB-551
R60702
R60705
R60702
R60705
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
N04400
N06022
N06035
N06045
N06059
N06200
N06210
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
34
70Cu–30Ni
Welded tube
104
104
105
105
105
...
22.1
22.4
22.3
23.1
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–Mn–Cu
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
Al–2.7Mg–Mn
Al–Mg–Si–Cu
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
61
62
117
117
61
62
99.2Zr
95.5Zr + 2.5Cb
Bar & wire
Bar & wire
55 (380)
80 (550)
61
62
117
117
61
62
99.2Zr
95.5Zr + 2.5Cb
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
70 (485)
100 (690)
85 (585)
90 (620)
100 (690)
100 (690)
100 (690)
42
43
43
46
43
43
43
110
111
111
111
111
111
111
42
44
...
45
43
43
...
67Ni–30Cu
55Ni–21Cr–13.5Mo
58Ni–33Cr–8Mo
46Ni–27Cr–23Fe–2.75Si
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo–1.6Cu
60Ni–19Cr–19Mo–1.8Ta
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
N06230
N06600
N06617
N06625
N06686
...
...
...
...
...
110 (760)
80 (550)
95 (655)
110 (760)
100 (690)
43
43
43
43
43
111
111
111
111
111
43
43
46
43
43
53Ni–22Cr–14W–Co–Fe–Mo
72Ni–15Cr–8Fe
52Ni–22Cr–13Co–9Mo
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
58Ni–21Cr–16Mo–3.5W
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings > 4 in. – 10 in. (102 mm – 254 mm), incl.
Forgings
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
N06625
N06690
N08031
N08120
N08367
N08800
...
...
...
...
...
...
120 (825)
85 (585)
94 (650)
90 (620)
95 (655)
75 (515)
43
43
45
45
45
45
111
111
111
111
111
111
43
43
45
45
8.2
45
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
58Ni–29Cr–9Fe
31Ni–31Fe–27Cr–7Mo
37Ni–33Fe–25Cr
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
Forgings ≤ 4 in. (102 mm)
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
N08810
N08811
N08825
N10242
N10276
...
...
...
...
...
65 (450)
65 (450)
85 (585)
105 (725)
100 (690)
45
45
45
44
43
111
111
111
112
111
45
44
45
44
43
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr
33Ni–42Fe–21Cr–Al–Ti
42Ni–21.5Cr–3Mo–2.3Cu
62Ni–25Mo–8Cr–2Fe
54Ni–16Mo–15Cr
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
2013 SECTION IX
158
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
N10629
N10665
N10675
R20033
N12160
...
...
...
...
...
110
110
110
109
90
(760)
(760)
(760)
(750)
(620)
44
44
44
45
46
112
112
112
111
...
44
...
44
45
46
66Ni–28Mo–3Fe–1.3Cr–0.25Al
65Ni–28Mo–2Fe
65Ni–29.5Mo–2Fe–2Cr
33Cr–31Ni–32Fe–1.5Mo–0.6Cu–N
37Ni–30Co–28Cr–2.7Si
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
Forgings
B/SB-572
B/SB-572
B/SB-572
B/SB-572
N06002
N06230
N12160
R30556
...
...
...
...
95
110
90
100
(655)
(760)
(620)
(690)
43
43
46
45
111
111
...
111
43
43
46
45
47Ni–22Cr–9Mo–18Fe
53Ni–22Cr–14W–Co–Fe–Mo
37Ni–30Co–28Cr–2.7Si
21Ni–30Fe–22Cr–18Co–3Mo–3W
Rod
Rod
Rod
Rod
B/SB-573
B/SB-573
N10003
N10242
...
...
100 (690)
105 (725)
44
44
112
112
44
44
70Ni–16Mo–7Cr–5Fe
62Ni–25Mo–8Cr–2Fe
Rod
Rod
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
N06022
N06035
N06059
N06200
N06210
N06455
N06686
N10276
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
100
85
100
100
100
100
100
100
(690)
(585)
(690)
(690)
(690)
(690)
(690)
(690)
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
44
...
43
43
...
43
43
43
55Ni–21Cr–13.5Mo
58Ni–33Cr–8Mo
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo–1.6Cu
60Ni–19Cr–19Mo–1.8Ta
61Ni–16Mo–16Cr
58Ni–21Cr–16Mo–3.5W
54Ni–16Mo–15Cr
Rod
Rod
Rod
Rod
Rod
Rod
Rod
Rod
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
N06022
N06035
N06059
N06200
N06210
N06455
N06686
N10276
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
100
85
100
100
100
100
100
100
(690)
(585)
(690)
(690)
(690)
(690)
(690)
(690)
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
44
...
43
43
...
43
43
43
55Ni–21Cr–13.5Mo
58Ni–33Cr–8Mo
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo–1.6Cu
60Ni–19Cr–19Mo–1.8Ta
61Ni–16Mo–16Cr
58Ni–21Cr–16Mo–3.5W
54Ni–16Mo–15Cr
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
Plate,
B/SB-581
B/SB-581
B/SB-581
B/SB-581
B/SB-581
B/SB-581
N06007
N06007
N06030
N06975
N06985
N06985
...
...
...
...
...
...
85
90
85
85
85
90
(585)
(620)
(585)
(585)
(585)
(620)
45
45
45
45
45
45
111
111
111
111
111
111
43
43
45
45
45
45
47Ni–22Cr–19Fe–6Mo
47Ni–22Cr–19Fe–6Mo
40Ni–29Cr–15Fe–5Mo
49Ni–25Cr–18Fe–6Mo
47Ni–22Cr–20Fe–7Mo
47Ni–22Cr–20Fe–7Mo
Rod > 0.75 in. – 3.5 in. (19 mm – 89 mm), incl.
Rod, 0.3125 in. – 0.75 in. (8 mm – 19 mm), incl.
Rod
Rod
Rod > 0.75 in. – 3.5 in. (19 mm – 89 mm), incl.
Rod, 0.3125 in. – 0.75 in. (8 mm – 19 mm), incl.
2013 SECTION IX
159
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
strip
Copyrighted material licensed to ABS by Thomson Scientific, Inc. (www.techstreet.com). This copy downloaded on 2013-08-20 02:07:55 -0500 by authorized user ABS AB
No further reproduction or distribution is permitted.
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
N08031
...
94 (650)
45
111
45
31Ni–31Fe–27Cr–7Mo
Rod
B/SB-582
N06007
...
85 (585)
45
111
43
47Ni–22Cr–19Fe–6Mo
B/SB-582
B/SB-582
B/SB-582
B/SB-582
N06007
N06030
N06975
N06985
...
...
...
...
90 (620)
85 (585)
85 (585)
85 (585)
45
45
45
45
111
111
111
111
43
45
45
45
47Ni–22Cr–19Fe–6Mo
40Ni–29Cr–15Fe–5Mo
49Ni–25Cr–18Fe–6Mo
47Ni–22Cr–20Fe–7Mo
B/SB-582
N06985
...
90 (620)
45
111
45
47Ni–22Cr–20Fe–7Mo
Plate, sheet & strip > 0.75 in. – 2.5 in. (19 mm
– 64 mm), incl.
Plate, sheet & strip ≤ 0.75 in. (19 mm)
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip > 0.75 in. – 2.5 in. (19 mm
– 64 mm), incl.
Plate, sheet & strip ≤ 0.75 in. (19 mm)
B/SB-599
N08700
...
80 (550)
45
111
25Ni–47Fe–21Cr–5Mo
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
N06002
N06007
N06022
N06030
N06035
N06059
...
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
90 (620)
100 (690)
85 (585)
85 (585)
100 (690)
43
45
43
45
43
43
111
111
111
111
111
111
43
43
44
45
...
43
47Ni–22Cr–9Mo–18Fe
47Ni–22Cr–19Fe–6Mo
55Ni–21Cr–13.5Mo
40Ni–29Cr–15Fe–5Mo
58Ni–33Cr–8Mo
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
N06200
N06210
N06230
N06455
N06686
N06975
N06985
N08031
N08320
N10001
N10242
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
100 (690)
110 (760)
100 (690)
100 (690)
85 (585)
90 (620)
94 (650)
75 (515)
100 (690)
105 (725)
43
43
43
43
43
45
45
45
45
44
44
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
112
112
43
...
43
43
43
45
45
45
8.2
44
44
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo–1.6Cu
60Ni–19Cr–19Mo–1.8Ta
53Ni–22Cr–14W–Co–Fe–Mo
61Ni–16Mo–16Cr
58Ni–21Cr–16Mo–3.5W
49Ni–25Cr–18Fe–6Mo
47Ni–22Cr–20Fe–7Mo
31Ni–31Fe–27Cr–7Mo
26Ni–22Cr–5Mo–Ti
62Ni–28Mo–5Fe
62Ni–25Mo–8Cr–2Fe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
N10276
N10629
N10665
N10675
N12160
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
110 (760)
110 (760)
110 (760)
90 (620)
43
44
44
44
46
111
112
112
112
...
43
44
44
44
46
54Ni–16Mo–15Cr
66Ni–28Mo–3Fe–1.3Cr–0.25Al
65Ni–28Mo–2Fe
65Ni–29.5Mo–2Fe–2Cr
37Ni–30Co–28Cr–2.7Si
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
B/SB-619
R20033
...
109 (750)
45
111
45
33Cr–31Ni–32Fe–1.5Mo–0.6Cu–N
Welded pipe
8.2
2013 SECTION IX
160
B/SB-581
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
21Ni–30Fe–22Cr–18Co–3Mo–3W
Welded pipe
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
R30556
...
100 (690)
45
111
45
B/SB-620
N08320
...
75 (515)
45
111
8.2
26Ni–22Cr–5Mo–Ti
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-621
N08320
...
75 (515)
45
111
8.2
26Ni–22Cr–5Mo–Ti
Rod
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
N06002
N06007
N06022
N06030
N06035
N06059
...
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
90 (620)
100 (690)
85 (585)
85 (585)
100 (690)
43
45
43
45
43
43
111
111
111
111
111
111
43
43
44
45
...
43
47Ni–22Cr–9Mo–18Fe
47Ni–22Cr–19Fe–6Mo
55Ni–21Cr–13.5Mo
40Ni–29Cr–15Fe–5Mo
58Ni–33Cr–8Mo
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
N06200
N06210
N06230
N06455
N06686
N06975
...
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
100 (690)
110 (760)
100 (690)
100 (690)
85 (585)
43
43
43
43
43
45
111
111
111
111
111
111
43
...
43
43
43
45
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo–1.6Cu
60Ni–19Cr–19Mo–1.8Ta
53Ni–22Cr–14W–Co–Fe–Mo
61Ni–16Mo–16Cr
58Ni–21Cr–16Mo–3.5W
49Ni–25Cr–18Fe–6Mo
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
N06985
N08031
N08320
N10001
N10242
...
...
...
...
...
90 (620)
94 (650)
75 (515)
100 (690)
105 (725)
45
45
45
44
44
111
111
111
112
112
45
45
8.2
44
44
47Ni–22Cr–20Fe–7Mo
31Ni–31Fe–27Cr–7Mo
26Ni–22Cr–5Mo–Ti
62Ni–28Mo–5Fe
62Ni–25Mo–8Cr–2Fe
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
N10276
N10629
N10665
R20033
R30556
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
110 (760)
110 (760)
109 (750)
100 (690)
43
44
44
45
45
111
112
112
111
111
43
44
44
45
45
54Ni–16Mo–15Cr
66Ni–28Mo–3Fe–1.3Cr–0.25Al
65Ni–28Mo–2Fe
33Cr–31Ni–32Fe–1.5Mo–0.6Cu–N
21Ni–30Fe–22Cr–18Co–3Mo–3W
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
pipe & tube
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
N10675
N12160
...
...
110 (760)
90 (620)
44
46
112
...
44
46
65Ni–29.5Mo–2Fe–2Cr
37Ni–30Co–28Cr–2.7Si
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-625
N08926
...
94 (650)
45
111
8.2
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Co–N
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-625
B/SB-625
B/SB-625
N08031
N08904
N08925
...
...
...
94 (650)
71 (490)
87 (600)
45
45
45
111
111
111
45
8.2
8.2
31Ni–31Fe–27Cr–7Mo
44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
Plate, sheet & strip
2013 SECTION IX
161
B/SB-619
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
33Cr–31Ni–32Fe–1.5Mo–0.6Cu–N
Plate, sheet & strip
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
R20033
...
109 (750)
45
111
45
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
N06002
N06007
N06022
N06030
N06035
N06059
...
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
90 (620)
100 (690)
85 (585)
85 (585)
100 (690)
43
45
43
45
43
43
111
111
111
111
111
111
43
43
44
45
...
43
47Ni–22Cr–9Mo–18Fe
47Ni–22Cr–19Fe–6Mo
55Ni–21Cr–13.5Mo
40Ni–29Cr–15Fe–5Mo
58Ni–33Cr–8Mo
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
N06200
N06210
N06230
N06455
N06686
N06975
...
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
100 (690)
110 (760)
100 (690)
100 (690)
85 (585)
43
43
43
43
43
45
111
111
111
111
111
111
43
...
43
43
43
45
59Ni–23Cr–16Mo–1.6Cu
60Ni–19Cr–19Mo–1.8Ta
53Ni–22Cr–14W–Co–Fe–Mo
61Ni–16Mo–16Cr
58Ni–21Cr–16Mo–3.5W
49Ni–25Cr–18Fe–6Mo
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
N06985
N08031
N08320
N10001
N10242
...
...
...
...
...
90 (620)
94 (650)
75 (515)
100 (690)
105 (725)
45
45
45
44
44
111
111
111
112
112
45
45
8.2
44
44
47Ni–22Cr–20Fe–7Mo
31Ni–31Fe–27Cr–7Mo
26Ni–22Cr–5Mo–Ti
62Ni–28Mo–5Fe
62Ni–25Mo–8Cr–2Fe
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
Welded tube
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
N10276
N10629
N10665
R20033
R30556
N10675
N12160
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
100 (690)
110 (760)
110 (760)
109 (750)
100 (690)
110 (760)
90 (620)
43
44
44
45
45
44
46
111
112
112
111
111
112
...
43
44
44
45
45
44
46
54Ni–16Mo–15Cr
66Ni–28Mo–3Fe–1.3Cr–0.25Al
65Ni–28Mo–2Fe
33Cr–31Ni–32Fe–1.5Mo–0.6Cu–N
21Ni–30Fe–22Cr–18Co–3Mo–3W
65Ni–29.5Mo–2Fe–2Cr
37Ni–30Co–28Cr–2.7Si
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
B/SB-649
N08926
...
94 (650)
45
111
8.2
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Bar & wire
B/SB-649
B/SB-649
B/SB-649
N08904
N08925
R20033
...
...
...
71 (490)
87 (600)
109 (750)
45
45
45
111
111
111
8.2
8.2
45
44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
33Cr–31Ni–32Fe–1.5Mo–0.6Cu–N
Bar & wire
Bar & wire
Bar & wire
B/SB-653
R60702
R60702
55 (380)
61
117
99.2Zr
Seamless & welded fittings
B/SB-658
B/SB-658
R60702
R60705
R60702
R60705
55 (380)
80 (550)
61
62
117
117
99.2Zr
95.5Zr + 2.5Cb
Smls. & welded pipe
Smls. & welded pipe
...
61
62
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
tube
2013 SECTION IX
162
B/SB-625
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
31Ni–31Fe–29Cr–Mo
Smls. tube
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
N08028
...
73 (505)
45
111
45
B/SB-672
N08700
...
80 (550)
45
111
8.2
25Ni–47Fe–21Cr–5Mo
Bar & wire
B/SB-673
N08926
...
94 (650)
45
111
8.2
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Welded pipe
B/SB-673
B/SB-673
N08904
N08925
...
...
71 (490)
87 (600)
45
45
111
111
8.2
8.2
44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
B/SB-674
B/SB-674
N08904
N08925
...
...
71 (490)
87 (600)
45
45
111
111
8.2
8.2
44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Welded tube
Welded tube
B/SB-674
N08926
...
94 (650)
45
111
8.2
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Welded tube
B/SB-675
B/SB-675
N08367
N08367
...
...
95 (655)
100 (690)
45
45
111
111
8.2
8.2
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Welded pipe > 3/16 in. (5 mm)
Welded pipe ≤ 3/16 in. (5 mm)
B/SB-676
B/SB-676
N08367
N08367
...
...
95 (655)
100 (690)
45
45
111
111
8.2
8.2
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Welded tube > 3/16 in. (5 mm)
Welded tube ≤ 3/16 in. (5 mm)
B/SB-677
N08926
...
94 (650)
45
111
8.2
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-677
B/SB-677
N08904
N08925
...
...
71 (490)
87 (600)
45
45
111
111
8.2
8.2
44Fe–25Ni–21Cr–Mo
25Ni–20Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Smls. pipe & tube
Smls. pipe & tube
B/SB-688
B/SB-688
N08367
N08367
...
...
95 (655)
100 (690)
45
45
111
111
8.2
8.2
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Plate, sheet & strip > 3/16 in. (4.8 mm)
Plate, sheet & strip ≤ 3/16 in. (4.8 mm)
B/SB-690
B/SB-690
N08367
N08367
...
...
95 (655)
100 (690)
45
45
111
111
8.2
8.2
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Smls. pipe & tube > 3/16 in. (4.8 mm)
Smls. pipe & tube ≤ 3/16 in. (4.8 mm)
B/SB-691
N08367
...
95 (655)
45
111
8.2
46Fe–24Ni–21Cr–6Mo–Cu–N
Rod, bar & wire
B/SB-704
B/SB-704
N06625
N08825
...
...
120 (825)
85 (585)
43
45
111
111
43
45
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
42Ni–21.5Cr–3Mo–2.3Cu
Welded tube
Welded tube
B/SB-705
B/SB-705
N06625
N08825
...
...
120 (825)
85 (585)
43
45
111
111
43
45
60Ni–22Cr–9Mo–3.5Cb
42Ni–21.5Cr–3Mo–2.3Cu
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
B/SB-709
N08028
...
73 (505)
45
111
45
31Ni–31Fe–29Cr–Mo
Plate, sheet & strip
B/SB-710
N08330
...
70 (485)
46
111
45
35Ni–19Cr–1.25Si
Welded pipe
2013 SECTION IX
163
B/SB-668
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
N08020
...
80 (550)
45
111
45
35Ni–35Fe–20Cr–Cb
Smls. pipe & tube
B725
N02200
...
55 (380)
41
110
41
99.0Ni
Welded pipe
B/SB-815
R31233
...
120 (825)
49
...
...
Co–26Cr–9Ni–5Mo–3Fe–2W
Rod
B/SB-818
R31233
...
120 (825)
49
...
...
Co–26Cr–9Ni–5Mo–3Fe–2W
Plate, sheet & strip
B819
C12200
C12200
30 (205)
...
107
NA
99.9Cu–P
Wrought pipe
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
R50250
R50400
R50400
R50550
R52400
1
2
2H
3
7
35
50
58
65
50
(240)
(345)
(400)
(450)
(345)
51
51
51
52
51
115
115
115
115
115
51
51
...
52
51
Ti
Ti
Ti
Ti
Ti–Pd
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
R52400
R52402
R52402
R52404
R52404
7H
16
16H
26
26H
58
50
58
50
58
(400)
(345)
(400)
(345)
(400)
51
51
51
51
51
115
115
115
115
115
...
...
...
51
...
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Ru
Ti–Ru
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
Smls.
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
R53400
R56320
R56323
12
9
28
70 (485)
90 (620)
90 (620)
52
53
53
115
115
115
52
53
53
Ti–0.3Mo–0.8Ni
Ti–3Al–2.5V
Ti–3Al–2.5V–0.1Ru
Smls. pipe
Smls. pipe
Smls. pipe
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
R50250
R50400
R50400
R50550
1
2
2H
3
35
50
58
65
(240)
(345)
(400)
(450)
51
51
51
52
115
115
115
115
51
51
...
52
Ti
Ti
Ti
Ti
Welded
Welded
Welded
Welded
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
R52400
R52400
R52402
R52402
R52404
R52404
R53400
R56320
R56323
7
7H
16
16H
26
26H
12
9
28
50 (345)
58 (400)
50 (345)
58 (400)
50 (345)
58 (400)
70 (485)
90 (620)
90 (620)
51
51
51
51
51
51
52
53
53
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
115
51
...
...
...
51
...
52
53
53
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Pd
Ti–Ru
Ti–Ru
Ti–0.3Mo–0.8Ni
Ti–3Al–2.5V
Ti–3Al–2.5V–0.1Ru
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
Welded pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
2013 SECTION IX
164
B/SB-729
Table QW/QB-422
Ferrous/Nonferrous P‐Numbers
Grouping of Base Metals for Qualification (Cont'd)
Spec. No.
UNS No.
Alloy, Type, or
Grade
Minimum
Specified
Tensile, ksi
(MPa)
Welding
P‐No.
Brazing
P‐No.
ISO
15608
Group
Nominal Composition
Product Form
Nonferrous (Cont'd)
A95083
5083
39 (270)
25
105
22.4
Al–4.4Mg–Mn
B/SB-928
A95086
5086
35 (240)
25
105
22.4
Al–4.0Mg–Mn
B/SB-928
A95456
5456
41 (285)
25
105
22.4
Al–5.1Mg–Mn
B/SB-956
B/SB-956
C70600
C71500
...
...
40 (275)
52 (360)
34
34
107
107
...
...
90Cu–10Ni
70Cu–30Ni
Plate & sheet > 1.5 in. – 3 in. (38 mm – 76 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 0.05 in. – 2 in. (1.3 mm – 51 mm),
incl.
Plate & sheet > 1.5 in. – 3 in. (38 mm – 76 mm),
incl.
Finned welded tube
Finned welded tube
...
EN AC 43000
22 (150)
26
104
...
Al–10Si–Mg
Casting
B16.18
B16.18
B16.18
C83600
C83800
C84400
...
...
...
30 (205)
30 (205)
29 (200)
...
...
...
107
107
107
NA
NA
NA
5Sn–5Zn–5Pb
4Sn–6.5Zn–6Pb
2.5Sn–8.5Zn–7Pb
Cast fittings
Cast fittings
Cast fittings
B16.22
B16.22
B16.22
B16.22
B16.50
B16.50
B16.50
B16.50
C10200
C12000
C12200
C23000
C10200
C12000
C12200
C23000
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
40 (275)
30 (205)
30 (205)
30 (205)
40 (275)
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
NA
NA
NA
NA
...
...
...
...
99.95Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
85Cu–15Zn
99.95Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
99.9Cu–P
85Cu–15Zn
Wrought pipe
Wrought pipe
Wrought pipe
Wrought pipe
Wrought pipe
Wrought pipe
Wrought pipe
Wrought pipe
SB/EN 1706
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
fittings
2013 SECTION IX
165
B/SB-928
2013 SECTION IX
QW-423
ð13Þ
ALTERNATE BASE MATERIALS FOR
WELDER QUALIFICATION
Table continued
Base Metal(s) Used for
Procedure Qualification
Coupon
QW-423.1 Base metal used for welder qualification
may be substituted for the metal specified in the WPS in
accordance with the following table. When a base metal
shown in the left column is used for welder qualification,
the welder is qualified to weld all combinations of base
metals shown in the right column, including unassigned
metals of similar chemical composition to these metals.
Base Metals for Welder
Qualification
Qualified Production Base
Metals
P‐No. 1 through P‐No. 15F,
P‐No. 34, or P‐No. 41
through P‐No. 49
P‐No. 1 through P‐No. 15F,
P‐No. 34, and P‐No. 41
through P‐No. 49
P‐No. 21 through P‐No. 26
P‐No. 21 through P‐No. 26
P‐No. 51 through P‐No. 53 or
P‐No. 61 or P‐No. 62
P‐No. 51 through P‐No. 53 and
P‐No. 61 and P‐No. 62
QW-423.2 Metals used for welder qualification conforming to national or international standards or specifications may be considered as having the same P‐Number
as an assigned metal provided it meets the mechanical
and chemical requirements of the assigned metal. The
base metal specification and corresponding P‐Number
shall be recorded on the qualification record.
QW-424
BASE METALS USED FOR PROCEDURE
QUALIFICATION
QW-424.2 For welds joining base metals to weld me- ð13Þ
tal buildup or corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay, the
buildup or overlay portion of the joint may be substituted
in the test coupon by any P-Number base material that
nominally matches the chemical analysis of the buildup
or overlay.
QW-424.1 Base metals are assigned P‐Numbers in
Table QW/QB-422; metals that do not appear in
Table QW/QB-422 are considered to be unassigned metals
except as otherwise defined for base metals having the
same UNS numbers. Unassigned metals shall be identified
in the WPS and on the PQR by specification, type and
grade, or by chemical analysis and mechanical properties.
The minimum tensile strength shall be defined by the organization that specified the unassigned metal if the tensile strength of that metal is not defined by the material
specification.
Base Metal(s) Used for
Procedure Qualification
Coupon
Base Metals Qualified
Any P‐No. 15E or 5B metal to
any metal assigned the
second P‐Number
Any P‐No. 3 metal to any metal
assigned P‐No. 3 or 1
Any P‐No. 4 metal to any metal
assigned P‐No. 4, 3, or 1
Any P‐No. 5A metal to any
metal assigned P‐No. 5A, 4,
3, or 1
One metal from P‐No. 5A to a Any P‐No. 5A metal to any
metal from P‐No. 4, or P‐No.
metal assigned to P‐No. 4, 3,
3, or P‐No. 1
or 1
One metal from P‐No. 4 to a
Any P‐No. 4 metal to any metal
metal from P‐No. 3 or P‐No.
assigned to P‐No. 3 or 1
1
Any unassigned metal to the
The unassigned metal to itself
same unassigned metal
Any unassigned metal to any The unassigned metal to any
P‐Number metal
metal assigned to the same
P‐Number as the qualified
metal
Any unassigned metal to any The unassigned metal to any
metal from P‐No. 15E
metal assigned P‐No. 15E or
5B
Any unassigned metal to any The first unassigned metal to
other unassigned metal
the second unassigned
metal
One metal from P‐No. 15E to
any metal from any other
P‐Number
One metal from P‐No. 3 to any
metal from P‐No. 3
One metal from P‐No. 4 to any
metal from P‐No. 4
One metal from P‐No. 5A to
any metal from P‐No. 5A
QW-430
QW-431
F‐NUMBERS
GENERAL
The following F‐Number grouping of electrodes and
welding rods in Table QW-432 is based essentially on their
usability characteristics, which fundamentally determine
the ability of welders to make satisfactory welds with a given filler metal. This grouping is made to reduce the number of welding procedure and performance qualifications,
where this can logically be done. The grouping does not
imply that base metals or filler metals within a group
may be indiscriminately substituted for a metal that was
used in the qualification test without consideration of
the compatibility of the base and filler metals from the
standpoint of metallurgical properties, postweld heat
treatment design and service requirements, and mechanical properties.
Base Metals Qualified
One metal from a P‐Number to Any metals assigned that
any metal from the same
P‐Number
P‐Number
One metal from P‐No. 15E to Any P‐No. 15E or 5B metal to
any metal from P‐No. 15E
any metal assigned P‐No.
15E or 5B
One metal from a P‐Number to Any metal assigned the first
any metal from any other
P‐Number to any metal
P‐ Number
assigned the second
P‐Number
166
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
Table QW-432
F‐Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification
F‐No.
ASME Specification
AWS Classification
UNS No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
1
1
1
1
1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
EXX20
EXX22
EXX24
EXX27
EXX28
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
SFA-5.4
SFA-5.5
SFA-5.5
EXXX(X)‐26
EXX20‐X
EXX27‐X
...
...
...
2
2
2
2
2
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.5
EXX12
EXX13
EXX14
EXX19
E(X)XX13‐X
...
...
...
...
...
3
3
3
3
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.5
SFA-5.5
EXX10
EXX11
E(X)XX10‐X
E(X)XX11‐X
...
...
...
...
4
4
4
4
4
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
SFA-5.1
EXX15
EXX16
EXX18
EXX18M
EXX48
...
...
...
...
...
4
4
4
4
4
SFA-5.4 other than austenitic and duplex
SFA-5.4 other than austenitic and duplex
SFA-5.4 other than austenitic and duplex
SFA-5.5
SFA-5.5
EXXX(X)‐15
EXXX(X)‐16
EXXX(X)‐17
E(X)XX15‐X
E(X)XX16‐X
...
...
...
...
...
4
4
4
4
SFA-5.5
SFA-5.5
SFA-5.5
SFA-5.5
E(X)XX18‐X
E(X)XX18M
E(X)XX18M1
E(X)XX45
...
...
...
...
5
5
5
SFA-5.4 austenitic and duplex
SFA-5.4 austenitic and duplex
SFA-5.4 austenitic and duplex
EXXX(X)‐15
EXXX(X)‐16
EXXX(X)‐17
...
...
...
6
6
6
6
6
SFA-5.2
SFA-5.9
SFA-5.17
SFA-5.18
SFA-5.20
All
All
All
All
All
classifications
classifications
classifications
classifications
classifications
...
...
...
...
...
6
6
6
6
6
SFA-5.22
SFA-5.23
SFA-5.25
SFA-5.26
SFA-5.28
All
All
All
All
All
classifications
classifications
classifications
classifications
classifications
...
...
...
...
...
6
6
6
6
SFA-5.29
SFA-5.30
SFA-5.30
SFA-5.30
All classifications
INMs‐X
IN5XX
IN3XX(X)
...
...
...
...
167
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-432
F‐Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification (Cont'd)
F‐No.
ASME Specification
AWS Classification
UNS No.
Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys
21
21
21
21
21
21
SFA-5.3
SFA-5.3
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
E1100
E3003
ER1100
ER1188
R1100
R1188
A91100
A93003
A91100
A91188
A91100
A91188
22
22
22
22
22
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
ER5183
ER5356
ER5554
ER5556
ER5654
A95183
A95356
A95554
A95556
A95654
22
22
22
22
22
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
R5183
R5356
R5554
R5556
R5654
A95183
A95356
A95554
A95556
A95654
23
23
23
23
23
SFA-5.3
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
E4043
ER4009
ER4010
ER4043
ER4047
A94043
A94009
A94010
A94043
A94047
23
23
23
23
23
23
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
ER4145
ER4643
ER4943
R4009
R4010
R4011
A94145
A94643
A94943
A94009
A94010
A94011
23
23
23
23
23
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
R4043
R4047
R4145
R4643
R4943
A94043
A94047
A94145
A94643
A94943
24
24
24
24
24
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
R‐A356.0
R‐A357.0
R‐C355.0
R206.0
R357.0
A13560
A13570
A33550
A02060
A03570
25
25
SFA-5.10
SFA-5.10
ER2319
R2319
A92319
A92319
Copper and Copper Alloys
31
31
SFA-5.6
SFA-5.7
ECu
ERCu
W60189
C18980
32
32
SFA-5.6
SFA-5.7
ECuSi
ERCuSi‐A
W60656
C65600
33
33
33
33
SFA-5.6
SFA-5.6
SFA-5.7
SFA-5.7
ECuSn‐A
ECuSn‐C
ERCuSn‐A
ERCuSn‐C
W60518
W60521
WC51800
C52100
168
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-432
F‐Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification (Cont'd)
F‐No.
ASME Specification
AWS Classification
UNS No.
Copper and Copper Alloys (Cont'd)
34
34
34
SFA-5.6
SFA-5.7
SFA-5.30
ECuNi
ERCuNi
IN67
W60715
C71580
C71581
35
35
35
35
SFA-5.8
SFA-5.8
SFA-5.8
SFA-5.8
RBCuZn‐A
RBCuZn‐B
RBCuZn‐C
RBCuZn‐D
C47000
C68000
C68100
C77300
36
36
36
36
36
SFA-5.6
SFA-5.6
SFA-5.7
SFA-5.7
SFA-5.7
ECuAl‐A2
ECuAl‐B
ERCuAl‐A1
ERCuAl‐A2
ERCuAl‐A3
W60614
W60619
C61000
C61800
C62400
37
37
37
37
SFA-5.6
SFA-5.6
SFA-5.7
SFA-5.7
ECuMnNiAl
ECuNiAl
ERCuMnNiAl
ERCuNiAl
C60633
C60632
C63380
C63280
Nickel and Nickel Alloys
41
41
41
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.30
ENi‐1
ERNi‐1
IN61
W82141
N02061
N02061
42
42
42
42
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.30
ENiCu‐7
ERNiCu‐7
ERNiCu‐8
IN60
W84190
N04060
N05504
N04060
43
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
ENiCr‐4
ENiCrCoMo‐1
ENiCrFe‐1
ENiCrFe‐2
ENiCrFe‐3
W86172
W86117
W86132
W86133
W86182
43
43
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
ENiCrFe‐4
ENiCrFe‐7
ENiCrFe‐9
ENiCrFe‐10
ENiCrFe‐12
ENiCrMo‐2
W86134
W86152
W86094
W86095
W86025
W86002
43
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
ENiCrMo‐3
ENiCrMo‐4
ENiCrMo‐5
ENiCrMo‐6
ENiCrMo‐7
W86112
W80276
W80002
W86620
W86455
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
ENiCrMo‐10
ENiCrMo‐12
ENiCrMo‐13
ENiCrMo‐14
W86022
W86032
W86059
W86026
43
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.14
ENiCrMo‐17
ENiCrMo‐18
ENiCrMo‐19
ENiCrWMo‐1
ERNiCr‐3
W86200
W86650
W86058
W86231
N06082
169
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-432
F‐Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification (Cont'd)
F‐No.
ASME Specification
AWS Classification
UNS No.
Nickel and Nickel Alloys (Cont'd)
43
43
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
ERNiCr‐4
ERNiCr‐6
ERNiCr‐7
ERNiCrCoMo‐1
ERNiCrFe‐5
ERNiCrFe‐6
N06072
N06076
N06073
N06617
N06062
N07092
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
ERNiCrFe‐7
ERNiCrFe‐7A
ERNiCrFe‐8
ERNiCrFe‐11
ERNiCrFe‐12
ERNiCrFe‐13
ERNiCrFe-14
N06052
N06054
N07069
N06601
N06025
N06055
N06043
43
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
ERNiCrFeAl‐1
ERNiCrMo‐2
ERNiCrMo‐3
ERNiCrMo‐4
ERNiCrMo‐7
N06693
N06002
N06625
N10276
N06455
43
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
ERNiCrMo‐10
ERNiCrMo‐13
ERNiCrMo‐14
ERNiCrMo‐16
ERNiCrMo‐17
N06022
N06059
N06686
N06057
N06200
43
43
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
ERNiCrMo‐18
ERNiCrMo‐19
ERNiCrMo‐20
ERNiCrMo‐21
ERNiCrMo‐22
ERNiCrWMo‐1
N06650
N07058
N06660
N06205
N06035
N06231
43
43
43
43
43
SFA-5.30
SFA-5.30
SFA-5.30
SFA-5.30
SFA-5.34
IN52
IN62
IN6A
IN82
All classifications
N06052
N06062
N07092
N06082
...
44
44
44
44
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
ENiMo‐1
ENiMo‐3
ENiMo‐7
ENiMo‐8
W80001
W80004
W80665
W80008
44
44
44
44
44
44
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
ENiMo‐9
ENiMo‐10
ENiMo‐11
ERNiMo‐1
ERNiMo‐2
ERNiMo‐3
W80009
W80675
W80675
N10001
N10003
N10004
44
44
44
44
44
44
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
ERNiMo‐7
ERNiMo‐8
ERNiMo‐9
ERNiMo‐10
ERNiMo‐11
ERNiMo‐12
N10665
N10008
N10009
N10675
N10629
N10242
170
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-432
F‐Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification (Cont'd)
F‐No.
ASME Specification
AWS Classification
UNS No.
Nickel and Nickel Alloys (Cont'd)
45
45
45
45
45
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
ENiCrMo‐1
ENiCrMo‐9
ENiCrMo‐11
ERNiCrMo‐1
ERNiCrMo‐8
W86007
W86985
W86030
N06007
N06975
45
45
45
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
ERNiCrMo‐9
ERNiCrMo‐11
ERNiFeCr‐1
N06985
N06030
N08065
46
46
46
SFA-5.11
SFA-5.14
SFA-5.14
ENiCrFeSi‐1
ERNiCrFeSi‐1
ERNiCoCrSi‐1
W86045
N06045
N12160
Titanium and Titanium Alloys
51
51
51
51
51
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
ERTi‐1
ERTi‐11
ERTi‐13
ERTi‐17
ERTi‐27
R50100
R52251
R53423
R52253
R52255
51
51
51
51
51
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
ERTi‐2
ERTi‐7
ERTi‐14
ERTi‐16
ERTi‐26
R50120
R52401
R53424
R52403
R52405
51
51
51
51
51
51
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
ERTi‐30
ERTi‐33
ERTi‐3
ERTi‐15A
ERTi‐31
ERTi‐34
R53531
R53443
R50125
R53416
R53533
R53444
52
SFA-5.16
ERTi‐4
R50130
53
53
53
53
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
ERTi‐9
ERTi‐9ELI
ERTi‐18
ERTi‐28
R56320
R56321
R56326
R56324
54
SFA-5.16
ERTi‐12
R53400
55
55
55
55
55
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
SFA-5.16
ERTi‐5
ERTi‐23
ERTi‐29
ERTi‐24
ERTi‐25
R56400
R56408
R56414
R56415
R56413
56
SFA-5.16
ERTi‐32
R55112
Zirconium and Zirconium Alloys
61
61
61
SFA-5.24
SFA-5.24
SFA-5.24
ERZr2
ERZr3
ERZr4
R60702
R60704
R60705
Hard-Facing Weld Metal Overlay
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
ECoCr‐A
ECoCr‐B
171
W73006
W73012
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-432
F‐Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification (Cont'd)
F‐No.
ASME Specification
AWS Classification
Hard-Facing Weld Metal Overlay (Cont'd)
ECoCr‐C
ECoCr‐E
ECuAl‐A2
UNS No.
71
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
71
71
71
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
ECuAl‐B
ECuAl‐C
ECuAl‐D
ECuAl‐E
ECuMnNiAl
W60619
W60625
W61625
W62625
W60633
71
71
71
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
ECuNi
ECuNiAl
ECuSi
ECuSn‐A
ECuSn‐C
W60715
W60632
W60656
W60518
W60521
71
71
71
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
EFe1
EFe2
EFe3
EFe4
EFe5
W74001
W74002
W74003
W74004
W75110
71
71
71
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
EFe6
EFe7
EFeCr‐A1A
EFeCr‐A2
EFeCr‐A3
W77510
W77610
W74011
W74012
W74013
71
71
71
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
EFeCr‐A4
EFeCr‐A5
EFeCr‐A6
EFeCr‐A7
EFeCr‐A8
W74014
W74015
W74016
W74017
W74018
71
71
71
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
EFeCr‐E1
EFeCr‐E2
EFeCr‐E3
EFeCr‐E4
EFeMn‐A
W74211
W74212
W74213
W74214
W79110
71
71
71
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
EFeMn‐B
EFeMn‐C
EFeMn‐D
EFeMn‐E
EFeMn‐F
W79310
W79210
W79410
W79510
W79610
71
SFA-5.13
EFeMnCr
W79710
71
71
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
ENiCr‐C
ENiCrFeCo
ENiCrMo‐5A
EWCX‐12/30
W89606
W83002
W80002
...
71
71
71
71
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
SFA-5.13
EWCX‐20/30
EWCX‐30/40
EWCX‐40
EWCX‐40/120
...
...
...
...
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCCoCr‐A
ERCCoCr‐B
ERCCoCr‐C
172
W73001
W73021
W60617
W73036
W73042
W73031
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-432
F‐Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification (Cont'd)
F‐No.
ASME Specification
AWS Classification
Hard-Facing Weld Metal Overlay (Cont'd)
ERCCoCr‐E
ERCCoCr‐G
UNS No.
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCCuAl‐A2
ERCCuAl‐A3
ERCCuAl‐C
ERCCuAl‐D
ERCCuAl‐E
W60618
W60624
W60626
W61626
W62626
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCCuSi‐A
ERCCuSn‐A
ERCCuSn‐D
ERCFe‐1
ERCFe‐1A
W60657
W60518
W60524
W74030
W74031
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCFe‐2
ERCFe‐3
ERCFe‐5
ERCFe‐6
ERCFe‐8
W74032
W74033
W74035
W77530
W77538
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCFeCr‐A
ERCFeCr‐A1A
ERCFeCr‐A3A
ERCFeCr‐A4
ERCFeCr‐A5
W74531
W74530
W74533
W74534
W74535
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCFeCr‐A9
ERCFeCr‐A10
ERCFeMn‐C
ERCFeMn‐F
ERCFeMn‐G
W74539
W74540
W79230
W79630
W79231
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCFeMn‐H
ERCFeMnCr
ERCNiCr‐A
ERCNiCr‐B
ERCNiCr‐C
W79232
W79730
W89634
W89635
W89636
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCNiCrFeCo
ERCNiCrMo‐5A
ERCoCr‐A
ERCoCr‐B
ERCoCr‐C
W83032
W80036
R30006
R30012
R30001
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCoCr‐E
ERCoCr‐F
ERCoCr‐G
ERCuAl‐A2
ERCuAl‐A3
R30021
R30002
R30014
C61800
C62400
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCuAl‐C
ERCuAl‐D
ERCuAl‐E
ERCuSi‐A
ERCuSn‐A
C62580
C62581
C62582
C65600
C51800
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERCuSn‐D
ERFe‐1
ERFe‐1A
C52400
T74000
T74001
173
W73041
W73032
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-432
F‐Numbers
Grouping of Electrodes and Welding Rods for Qualification (Cont'd)
F‐No.
ASME Specification
AWS Classification
Hard-Facing Weld Metal Overlay (Cont'd)
ERFe‐2
ERFe‐3
UNS No.
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERFe‐5
ERFe‐6
ERFe‐8
ERFeCr‐A
ERFeCr‐A1A
T74005
T74006
T74008
...
...
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERFeCr‐A3A
ERFeCr‐A4
ERFeCr‐A5
ERFeCr‐A9
ERFeCr‐A10
...
...
...
...
...
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERFeMn‐C
ERFeMn‐F
ERFeMn‐G
ERFeMn‐H
ERFeMnCr
...
...
...
...
...
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERNiCr‐A
ERNiCr‐B
ERNiCr‐C
ERNiCr‐D
ERNiCr‐E
N99644
N99645
N99646
N99647
N99648
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERNiCrFeCo
ERNiCrMo‐5A
ERWCX‐20/30
ERWCX‐30/40
ERWCX‐40
F46100
N10006
...
...
...
72
72
72
72
72
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
SFA-5.21
ERWCX‐40/120
RWCX‐20/30
RWCX‐30/40
RWCX‐40
RWCX‐40/120
...
...
...
...
...
174
T74002
T74003
2013 SECTION IX
QW-433
ALTERNATE F‐NUMBERS FOR WELDER PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION
The following tables identify the filler metal or electrode that the welder used during qualification testing as “Qualified
With,” and the electrodes or filler metals that the welder is qualified to use in production welding as “Qualified For.” See
Table QW-432 for the F‐Number assignments.
Qualified With →
Qualified For ↓
F‐No. 1
With
Backing
F‐No. 1
Without
Backing
F‐No. 2
With
Backing
F‐No. 2
Without
Backing
F‐No. 3
With
Backing
F‐No. 3
Without
Backing
F‐No. 4
With
Backing
F‐No. 4
Without
Backing
F‐No. 5
With
Backing
F‐No. 5
Without
Backing
F‐No. 1 With Backing
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
F‐No. 1 Without
Backing
X
F‐No. 2 With Backing
F‐No. 2 Without
Backing
X
F‐No. 3 With Backing
F‐No. 3 Without
Backing
X
F‐No. 4 With Backing
F‐No. 4 Without
Backing
X
F‐No. 5 With Backing
F‐No. 5 Without
Backing
X
Qualified With
Qualified For
Any F‐No. 6
All F‐No. 6 [Note (1)]
Any F‐No. 21 through F‐No. 25
All F‐No. 21 through F‐No. 25
Any F‐No. 31, F‐No. 32, F‐No. 33,
F‐No. 35, F‐No. 36, or F‐No. 37
Only the same F‐Number as was
used during the qualification
test
F‐No. 34 or any F‐No. 41 through
F‐No. 46
F‐No. 34 and all F‐No. 41 through
F‐No. 46
Any F‐No. 51 through F‐No. 55
All F‐No. 51 through F‐No. 55
Any F‐No. 61
All F‐No. 61
Any F‐No. 71 through F‐No. 72
Only the same F‐Number as was
used during the qualification
test
NOTE:
(1) Deposited weld metal made using a bare rod not covered by an
SFA Specification but which conforms to an analysis listed in
QW‐442 shall be considered to be classified as F‐No. 6.
175
2013 SECTION IX
QW-440
QW-441
WELD METAL CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
GENERAL
Identification of weld metal chemical composition designated on the PQR and WPS shall be as given in QW-404.5.
ð13Þ
Table QW-442
A‐Numbers
Classification of Ferrous Weld Metal Analysis for Procedure Qualification
Analysis, % [Note (1)] and [Note (2)]
A‐No.
Types of Weld Deposit
C
Cr
Mo
Ni
Mn
Si
1
Mild Steel
0.20
0.20
0.30
0.50
1.60
1.00
2
Carbon‐Molybdenum
0.15
0.50
0.40–0.65
0.50
1.60
1.00
3
4
5
Chrome (0.4% to 2%)‐Molybdenum
Chrome (2% to 4%)‐Molybdenum
Chrome (4% to 10.5%)‐Molybdenum
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.40–2.00
2.00–4.00
4.00–10.50
0.40–0.65
0.40–1.50
0.40–1.50
0.50
0.50
0.80
1.60
1.60
1.20
1.00
2.00
2.00
6
Chrome‐Martensitic
0.15
11.00–15.00
0.70
0.80
2.00
1.00
7
Chrome‐Ferritic
0.15
11.00–30.00
1.00
0.80
1.00
3.00
8
9
Chromium‐Nickel
Chromium‐Nickel
0.15
0.30
14.50–30.00
19.00–30.00
4.00
6.00
7.50–15.00
15.00–37.00
2.50
2.50
1.00
1.00
10
Nickel to 4%
0.15
0.50
0.55
0.80–4.00
1.70
1.00
11
Manganese‐Molybdenum
0.17
0.50
0.25–0.75
0.85
1.25–2.25
1.00
12
Nickel–Chrome—Molybdenum
0.15
1.50
0.25–0.80
1.25–2.80
0.75–2.25
1.00
NOTES:
(1) Single values shown above are maximum.
(2) Only listed elements are used to determine A-numbers.
176
2013 SECTION IX
QW-450
QW-451
SPECIMENS
PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION THICKNESS LIMITS AND TEST SPECIMENS
ð13Þ
Table QW-451.1
Groove‐Weld Tension Tests and Transverse‐Bend Tests
Range of Thickness T of
Base Metal, Qualified, in.
(mm)
[Note (1)] and [Note (2)]
Thickness T of Test
Coupon, Welded,
in. (mm)
Min.
Max.
Type and Number of Tests Required (Tension
and Guided‐Bend Tests) [Note (2)]
Maximum Thickness t of
Deposited Weld Metal,
Qualified, in. (mm) [Note
(1)] and [Note (2)]
Tension,
QW-150
Side
Bend,
QW-160
Face
Bend,
QW-160
Root
Bend,
QW-160
Less than 1/16 (1.5)
T
2T
2t
2
...
2
2
1
/16 to 3/8 (1.5 to 10), incl.
1
/16 (1.5)
2T
2t
2
[Note
(5)]
2
2
Over 3/8 (10), but less than
3
/4 (19)
3
/16 (5)
2T
2t
2
[Note
(5)]
2
2
3
/4 (19) to less than 11/2 (38)
3
/16 (5)
2T
2t when t < 3/4 (19)
4
...
...
3
/4 (19) to less than 11/2 (38)
3
2T
2T when t ≥ 3/4 (19)
2 [Note
(4)]
2 [Note
(4)]
4
...
...
11/2 (38) to 6 (150), incl.
3
2t when t < 3/4 (19)
4
...
...
11/2 (38) to 6 (150), incl.
3
8 (200) [Note
(3)]
8 (200) [Note
(3)]
4
...
...
Over 6 (150) [Note (6)]
3
/16 (5)
1.33T
2t when t < 3/4(19)
4
...
...
Over 6 (150) [Note (6)]
3
1.33T
1.33T when t ≥ 3/4 (19)
4
...
...
/16 (5)
/16 (5)
/16 (5)
/16 (5)
8 (200) [Note (3)] when
t ≥ 3/4 (19)
2 [Note
(4)]
2 [Note
(4)]
2 [Note
(4)]
2 [Note
(4)]
NOTES:
(1) The following variables further restrict the limits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under
consideration: QW-403.9, QW-403.10, QW-404.32, and QW-407.4. Also, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions
that supersede the limits of this table.
(2) For combination of welding procedures, see QW-200.4.
(3) For the SMAW, SAW, GMAW, PAW, and GTAW welding processes only; otherwise per Note (1) or 2T, or 2t , whichever is applicable.
(4) see QW-151.1, QW-151.2, and QW-151.3 for details on multiple specimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm).
(5) Four side‐bend tests may be substituted for the required face‐ and root‐bend tests, when thickness T is 3/8 in. (10 mm) and over.
(6) For test coupons over 6 in. (150 mm) thick, the full thickness of the test coupon shall be welded.
177
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-451.2
Groove‐Weld Tension Tests and Longitudinal‐Bend Tests
Thickness t of
Range of Thickness T of Deposited Weld Metal
Qualified, in. (mm)
Base Metal Qualified, in.
[Note (1)] and [Note
(mm) [Note (1)] and
(2)]
[Note (2)]
Thickness T of Test
Coupon Welded, in. (mm)
Less than 1/16 (1.5)
1
/16 to 3/8 (1.5 to 10), incl.
Over 3/8 (10)
Min.
T
1
/16 (1.5)
3
/16 (5)
Type and Number of Tests Required (Tension and
Guided‐Bend Tests) [Note (2)]
Max.
Max.
Tension,
QW-150
Face Bend,
QW-160
Root Bend,
QW-160
2T
2T
2T
2t
2t
2t
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
NOTES:
(1) The following variables further restrict the limits shown in this table when they are referenced in QW-250 for the process under
consideration: QW-403.9, QW-403.10, QW-404.32, and QW-407.4. Also, QW-202.2, QW-202.3, and QW-202.4 provide exemptions
that supersede the limits of this table.
(2) For combination of welding procedures, see QW-200.4.
Table QW-451.3
Fillet‐Weld Tests
Type of
Joint
Thickness of Test
Coupons as Welded, in.
Fillet
Per QW‐462.4(a)
Fillet
Per QW‐462.4(d)
Range Qualified
Type and Number of Tests Required
[QW‐462.4(a) or QW‐462.4(d)] Macro
All fillet sizes on all base metal
thicknesses and all diameters
5
4
GENERAL NOTE: A production assembly mockup may be substituted in accordance with QW-181.1.1. When a production assembly mockup is used, the range qualified shall be limited to the fillet weld size, base metal thickness, and configuration of the mockup. Alternatively,
multiple production assembly mockups may be qualified. The range of thickness of the base metal qualified shall be no less than the thickness of the thinner member tested and no greater than the thickness of the thicker member tested. The range for fillet weld sizes qualified
shall be limited to no less than the smallest fillet weld tested and no greater than the largest fillet weld tested. The configuration of production assemblies shall be the same as that used in the production assembly mockup.
ð13Þ
Table QW-451.4
Fillet Welds Qualified by Groove‐Weld Tests
Thickness T of Test Coupon
(Plate or Pipe) as Welded
All groove tests
Range Qualified
All fillet sizes on all base metal
thicknesses and all diameters
Type and Number of Tests Required
Fillet welds are qualified when the groove
weld is qualified in accordance with
either QW‐451.1 or QW‐451.2 (see
QW-202.2)
GENERAL NOTE: Supplementary essential variables apply when notch toughness is required by other Sections.
178
2013 SECTION IX
QW-452
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION THICKNESS LIMITS AND TEST SPECIMENS
QW-452.1 Groove‐Weld Test. The following tables identify the required type and number of tests and the thickness
of weld metal qualified.
Table QW-452.1(a)
Test Specimens
Type and Number of Examinations and Test Specimens Required
Thickness of Weld Metal, in.
(mm)
Less than 3/8 (10)
3
/8 (10) to less than 3/4 (19)
3
/4 (19) and over
Visual
Examination
per QW-302.4
Side Bend
QW‐462.2
[Note (1)]
Face Bend
QW‐462.3(a) or
QW‐462.3(b)
[Note (1)],
[Note (2)]
X
X
X
...
2 [Note (3)]
2
1
[Note (3)]
...
Root Bend
QW‐462.3(a) or
QW‐462.3(b)
[Note (1)],
[Note (2)]
1
[Note (3)]
...
GENERAL NOTE: The “Thickness of Weld Metal” is the total weld metal thickness deposited by all welders and all
processes in the test coupon exclusive of the weld reinforcement.
NOTES:
(1) To qualify using positions 5G or 6G, a total of four bend specimens are required. To qualify using a combination
of 2G and 5G in a single test coupon, a total of six bend specimens are required. see QW-302.3. The type of bend
test shall be based on weld metal thickness.
(2) Coupons tested by face and root bends shall be limited to weld deposit made by one welder with one or two
processes or two welders with one process each. Weld deposit by each welder and each process shall be present on the convex surface of the appropriate bent specimen.
(3) One face and root bend may be substituted for the two side bends.
Table QW-452.1(b)
Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified
Thickness, t, of Weld Metal in
the Coupon, in. (mm)
[Note (1)] and [Note (2)]
Thickness of Weld
Metal Qualified
[Note (3)]
All
1
/2 (13) and over with a
minimum of three layers
2t
Maximum to be
welded
NOTES:
(1) When more than one welder and/or more than one process and
more than one filler metal F‐Number is used to deposit weld
metal in a coupon, the thickness, t, of the weld metal in the coupon deposited by each welder with each process and each filler
metal F‐Number in accordance with the applicable variables
under QW-404 shall be determined and used individually in
the “Thickness, t , of Weld Metal in the Coupon” column to determine the “Thickness of Weld Metal Qualified.”
(2) Two or more pipe test coupons with different weld metal thickness may be used to determine the weld metal thickness qualified and that thickness may be applied to production welds to
the smallest diameter for which the welder is qualified in accordance with QW‐452.3.
(3) Thickness of test coupon of 3/4 in. (19 mm) or over shall be used
for qualifying a combination of three or more welders each of
whom may use the same or a different welding process.
179
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-452.3
Groove‐Weld Diameter Limits
Outside Diameter of Test
Coupon, in. (mm)
Less than 1 (25)
1 (25) to 27/8 (73)
Over 27/8 (73)
Outside Diameter Qualified, in.
(mm)
Min.
Size welded
1 (25)
27/8 (73)
Max.
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Type and number of tests required shall be in accordance with
QW-452.1.
(b) 27/8 in. (73 mm) O.D. is the equivalent of NPS 21/2 (DN 65).
Table QW-452.4
Small Diameter Fillet‐Weld Test
Outside Diameter of Test Coupon,
in. (mm)
Less than 1 (25)
1 (25) to 27/8 (73)
Over 27/8 (73)
Qualified
Thickness
Minimum Outside Diameter,
Qualified, in. (mm)
Size welded
1 (25)
27/8 (73)
All
All
All
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Type and number of tests required shall be in accordance with QW‐452.5.
(b) 27/8 in. (73 mm) O.D. is considered the equivalent of NPS 21/2 (DN 65).
Table QW-452.5
Fillet‐Weld Test
Type of Joint
Tee fillet [Note
(1)]
Thickness of Test
Coupon as Welded,
in. (mm)
Type and Number of Tests
Required [QW‐462.4(b) or
QW‐462.4(c)]
Qualified Range
Macro
Fracture
3
/16 (5) or greater
All base material thicknesses, fillet sizes, and
diameters 27/8 (73) O.D. and over [Note (1)]
1
1
Less than 3/16 (5)
T to 2 T base material thickness, T maximum
fillet size, and all diameters 27/8 (73) O.D. and
over [Note (1)]
1
1
GENERAL NOTE: Production assembly mockups may be substituted in accordance with QW-181.2.1. When production assembly mockups are used, range qualified shall be limited to the fillet sizes, base metal thicknesses, and configuration of the
mockup.
NOTES:
(1) Test coupon prepared as shown in QW-462.4(b) for plate or QW-462.4(c) for pipe.
(2) 27/8 in. (73 mm) O.D. is considered the equivalent of NPS 21/2 (DN 65). For smaller diameter qualifications, refer to
QW‐452.4 or QW‐452.6.
180
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-452.6
Fillet Qualification by Groove‐Weld Tests
Type of Joint
Thickness of Test Coupon as Welded,
in. (mm)
Any groove
All thicknesses
Type and Number of Tests
Required
Qualified Range
All base material thicknesses, fillet
sizes, and diameters
Fillet welds are qualified when a
welder/welding operator qualifies
on a groove weld test
Table QW-453
Procedure/Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hard‐Facing
(Wear‐Resistant) and Corrosion‐Resistant Overlays
Corrosion‐Resistant Overlay [Note (1)]
Thickness of Test Coupon
(T)
Nominal Base Metal
Thickness Qualified (T)
Type and Number of Tests
Required
Hard‐facing Overlay (Wear‐Resistant) [Note (2)]
Nominal Base Metal
Thickness Qualified (T )
Type and Number of Tests
Required
Procedure Qualification Testing
Less than 1 in. (25 mm) T
T qualified to unlimited
1 in. (25 mm) and over T
1 in. (25 mm) to unlimited
Notes [Note (4)], [Note (5)], T qualified up to 1 in. (25 mm) Notes [Note (3)], [Note (7)],
[Note (8)], and [Note (9)]
and [Note (9)]
1 in. (25 mm) to unlimited
Performance Qualification Testing
Less than 1 in. (25 mm) T
T qualified to unlimited
1 in. (25 mm) and over T
1 in. (25 mm) to unlimited
T qualified to unlimited
[Note (6)]
1 in. (25 mm) to unlimited
Notes [Note (8)] and [Note
(10)]
NOTES:
(1) The qualification test coupon shall consist of base metal not less than 6 in. (150 mm) × 6 in. (150 mm). The weld overlay cladding shall be
a minimum of 11/2 in. (38 mm) wide by approximately 6 in. (150 mm) long. For qualification on pipe, the pipe length shall be a minimum
of 6 in. (150 mm), and a minimum diameter to allow the required number of test specimens. The weld overlay shall be continuous around
the circumference of the test coupon. For processes (performance qualification only) depositing a weld bead width greater than 1/2 in.
(13 mm) wide, the weld overlay shall consist of a minimum of three weld beads in the first layer.
(2) The test base metal coupon shall have minimum dimensions of 6 in. (150 mm) wide × approximately 6 in. (150 mm) long with a hard‐
faced layer a minimum of 11/2 in. (38 mm) wide × 6 in. (150 mm) long. The minimum hard‐faced thickness shall be as specified in the
Welding Procedures Specification. Alternatively, the qualification may be performed on a test base metal coupon that represents the size
of the production part. For qualification on pipe, the pipe lenth shall be 6 in. (150 mm) minimum, and of a minimum diameter to allow the
required number of test specimens. The weld overlay shall be continuous around the circumference of the test coupon.
(3) The hard‐facing surface shall be examined by the liquid penetrant method and shall meet the acceptance standards in QW-195.2 or as
specified in the WPS. Surface conditioning prior to liquid penetrant examination is permitted.
(4) The corrosion‐resistant surface shall be examined by the liquid penetrant method and shall meet the acceptance standards as specified in
QW-195.
(5) Following the liquid penetrant examination, four guided side‐bend tests shall be made from the test coupon in accordance with QW-161.
The test specimens shall be cut so that there are either two specimens parallel and two specimens perpendicular to the direction of the
welding, or four specimens perpendicular to the direction of the welding. For coupons that are less than 3/8 in. (10 mm) thick, the width of
the side‐bend specimens may be reduced to the thickness of the test coupon. The side‐bend specimens shall be removed from locations
specified in QW‐462.5(c) or QW‐462.5(d).
(6) The test coupon shall be sectioned to make side‐bend test specimens perpendicular to the direction of the welding in accordance with
QW-161. Test specimens shall be removed at locations specified in QW‐462.5(c) or QW‐462.5(d).
(7) After surface conditioning to the minimum thickness specified in the WPS, a minimum of three hardness readings shall be made on each
of the specimens from the locations shown in QW‐462.5(b) or QW‐462.5(e). All readings shall meet the requirements of the WPS.
(8) The base metal shall be sectioned transversely to the direction of the hard‐facing overlay. The two faces of the hard‐facing exposed by
sectioning shall be polished and etched with a suitable etchant and shall be visually examined with × 5 magnification for cracks in the
base metal or the heat‐affected zone, lack of fusion, or other linear defects. The overlay and the base metal shall meet the requirements
specified in the WPS. All exposed faces shall be examined. See QW‐462.5(b) for pipe and QW‐462.5(e) for plate.
(9) When a chemical composition is specified in thw WPS, chemical analysis specimens shall be removed at locations specified in QW‐462.5
(b) or QW‐462.5(e). The chemical analysis shall be performed in accordance with QW‐462.5(a) and shall be within the range specified in
the WPS. This chemical analysis is not required when a chemical composition is not specified on the WPS.
181
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-453
Procedure/Performance Qualification Thickness Limits and Test Specimens for Hard‐Facing
(Wear‐Resistant) and Corrosion‐Resistant Overlays (Cont'd)
NOTES (CONT'D):
(10) At a thickness greater than or equal to the minimum thickness specified in the WPS, the weld surface shall be examined by the liquid
penetrant method and shall meet the acceptance standards in QW-195.2 or as specified in the WPS. Surface conditioning prior to liquid
penetrant examination is permitted.
182
2013 SECTION IX
QW-460
QW-461
GRAPHICS
POSITIONS
Figure QW-461.1
Positions of Welds — Groove Welds
GENERAL NOTE: The horizontal reference plane is taken to lie always below the weld under consideration.
Inclination of axis is measured from the horizontal reference plane toward the vertical.
Angle of rotation of face is measured from a line perpendicular to the axis of the weld and lying in a vertical plane containing this axis. The
reference position (0 deg) of rotation of the face invariably points in the direction opposite to that in which the axis angle increases. The angle
of rotation of the face of weld is measured in a clockwise direction from this reference position (0 deg) when looking at point P.
183
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-461.2
Positions of Welds — Fillet Welds
184
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-461.3
Groove Welds in Plate — Test Positions
Figure QW-461.4
Groove Welds in Pipe — Test Positions
185
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-461.5
Fillet Welds in Plate — Test Positions
186
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-461.6
Fillet Welds in Pipe — Test Positions
187
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-461.7
Stud Welds — Test Positions
Figure QW-461.8
Stud Welds — Welding Positions
188
2013 SECTION IX
Table QW-461.9
Performance Qualification — Position and Diameter Limitations
(Within the Other Limitations of QW-303)
Position and Type Weld Qualified [Note (1)]
Qualification Test
Groove
Fillet
Position
Plate and Pipe Over 24
in. (610 mm) O.D.
Pipe ≤ 24 in. (610 mm)
O.D.
Plate and Pipe
Plate — Groove
1G
2G
3G
4G
3G and 4G
2G, 3G, and 4G
Special Positions (SP)
F
F,H
F,V
F,O
F,V,O
All
SP,F
F [Note (2)]
F,H [Note (2)]
F [Note (2)]
F [Note (2)]
F [Note (2)]
F,H [Note (2)]
SP,F
F
F,H
F,H,V
F,H,O
All
All
SP,F
Plate — Fillet
1F
2F
3F
4F
3F and 4F
Special Positions (SP)
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
F [Note (2)]
F,H [Note (2)]
F,H,V [Note (2)]
F,H,O [Note (2)]
All [Note (2)]
SP,F [Note (2)]
Pipe — Groove [Note (3)]
1G
2G
5G
6G
2G and 5G
Special Positions (SP)
F
F,H
F,V,O
All
All
SP,F
F
F,H
F,V,O
All
All
SP,F
F
F,H
All
All
All
SP,F
Pipe — Fillet [Note (3)]
1F
2F
2FR
4F
5F
Special Positions (SP)
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
F
F,H
F,H
F,H,O
All
SP,F
Weld
NOTES:
(1) Positions of welding as shown in QW-461.1 and QW-461.2.
F
H
V
O
=
=
=
=
Flat
Horizontal
Vertical
Overhead
(2) Pipe 27/8 in. (73 mm) O.D. and over.
(3) See diameter restrictions in QW-452.3, QW-452.4, and QW-452.6.
189
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
ð13Þ
Figure QW-461.10
Rotating Tool Design Characteristics (FSW) Referenced in QW-410
QW-462
the dimensions are to be considered approximate. All
welding processes and filler material to be qualified must
be included in the test specimen.
TEST SPECIMENS
The purpose of the QW-462 figures is to give the organization guidance in dimensioning test specimens for tests
required for procedure and performance qualifications.
Unless a minimum, maximum, or tolerance is given in
the figures (or as QW-150, QW-160, or QW-180 requires),
T
W
x
y
190
=
=
=
=
coupon thickness excluding reinforcement
specimen width, 3/4 in. (19 mm)
coupon thickness including reinforcement
specimen thickness
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.1(a)
Tension — Reduced Section — Plate
Weld reinforcement shall be
machined flush with base
metal. Machine minimum
amount to obtain approx.
parallel surfaces.
y
Distortion
Cold straightening
of the test coupon
is permitted prior
to removal of weld
reinforcement
1/ in.
4
(6 mm)
Length sufficient
to extend into grip
equal to two-thirds
grip length
These edges may
be thermally cut
W
x
10 in. (250 mm) or as required
1/ in.
4
Edge of widest
face of weld
1/ in.
4
1/ in.
4
(6 mm)
(6 mm)
(6 mm)
1i
)
mm
(25
n. in.
Rm
Parallel length equals
widest width of weld
plus 1/2 in. (13 mm)
added length
This section machined
preferably by milling
Figure QW-462.1(b)
Tension — Reduced Section — Pipe
1 in
.(
R m 25 mm
in.
)
Grind or machine the minimum
amount needed to obtain plane
parallel faces over the reduced
section W. No more material
than is needed to perform the
test shall be removed.
y
10 in. (250 mm) or
as required
1/ in.
4
(6 mm)
Edge of widest
face of weld
W
x
On ferrous material
these edges may
be thermally cut
1/ in.
4
(6 mm)
1/ in.
4
(6 mm)
191
1/ in.
4
This section machined
preferably by milling
(6 mm)
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.1(c)
Tension — Reduced Section Alternate for Pipe
T [Note (1)]
x
3 in. (75 mm) min.
Reduced section
[Note (2)]
1/ in.
2
(13 mm)
y
Rad. 1 in. (25 mm) min.
11/16 in. (27 mm)
Edge of widest face of weld
NOTES:
(1) The weld reinforcement shall be ground or machined so that
the weld thickness does not exceed the base metal thickness
T. Machine minimum amount to obtain approximately parallel
surfaces.
(2) The reduced section shall not be less than the width of the
weld plus 2y.
ð13Þ
Figure QW-462.1(d)
Tension — Reduced Section — Turned Specimens
D
R
C
Weld
B
A
B
Standard Dimensions, in. (mm)
(a) 0.505 Specimen
A – Length of reduced
section
D – Diameter
R – Radius of fillet
B – Length of end section
C – Diameter of end
section
(b) 0.353 Specimen
(c) 0.252 Specimen
(d) 0.188 Specimen
[Note (1)]
[Note (1)]
[Note (1)]
[Note (1)]
0.500 ± 0.010
(12.7 ± 0.25)
0.350 ± 0.007
(8.89 ± 0.18)
0.250 ± 0.005
(6.35 ± 0.13)
0.188 ± 0.003
(4.78 ± 0.08)
3
/8 (10) min.
13/8 (35) approx.
3
/4 (19)
1
/4 (6) min.
11/8 (29) approx.
1
/2 (13)
3
1
7
1
/16 (5) min.
/8 (22) approx.
3
/8 (10)
/8 (3) min.
/2 (13) approx.
1
/4 (6)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Use maximum diameter specimen (a), (b), (c), or (d) that can be cut from the section.
(b) Weld should be in center of reduced section.
(c) Where only a single coupon is required, the center of the specimen should be midway between the surfaces.
(d) The ends may be of any shape to fit the holders of the testing machine in such a way that the load is applied axially.
(e) When the diameter, D, of the reduced section is measured and the actual value is used to calculate the tensile stress, specimens
of nominal diameters other than those shown above may be used.
NOTE:
(1) Reduced section A should not be less than width of weld plus 2D.
192
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.1(e)
Tension — Full Section — Small Diameter Pipe
193
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.2
Side Bend
(1a) For procedure qualification of materials other than P-No. 1 in QW-422,
if the surfaces of the side bend test specimens are gas cut, removal by
machining or grinding of not less than 1/8 in. (3 mm) from the surface
shall be required.
(1b) Such removal is not required for P-No. 1 materials, but any resulting
roughness shall be dressed by machining or grinding.
(2) For performance qualification of all materials in QW-422, if the surfaces of
side bend tests are gas cut, any resulting roughness shall be dressed by
machining or grinding.
1/
8 in.
(3 mm) min.
R1 = 1/8 in.
(3 mm) max.
6 in. (150 mm) or as required
w
T, in. (mm)
w, in. (mm)
y, in. (mm)
T
[Note (1)]
Notes (1)
and (2)
x
P-No. 23,
All other
F-No. 23, or
metals
P-No. 35
1/ (3)
8
3/
8 (10)
1/ (3)
8
3/
8 (10)
y
T
GENERAL NOTE: Weld reinforcement and backing strip or backing ring, if any, may be removed flush with the surface of the specimen. Thermal cutting, machining, or grinding may be employed. Cold straightening is permitted prior to removal of the reinforcement.
NOTES:
(1) When weld deposit t is less than coupon thickness T, side‐bend specimen thickness may be t .
(2) When coupon thickness T equals or exceeds 11/2 in. (38 mm), use one of the following:
(a) Cut specimen into multiple test specimens of thickness y of approximately equal dimensions 3/4 in. to 11/2 in. (19 mm to 38 mm).
y = tested specimen thickness when multiple specimens are taken from one coupon.
(b) The specimen may be bent at full width. See requirements on jig width in QW-466.1.
194
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.3(a)
Face and Root Bends — Transverse
6 in. (150 mm) or
as required
11/2 in. (38 mm)
R = 1/8 in. (3 mm)
max.
y
y
T
T
(Plate)
T
y
(Pipe)
Face-Bend Specimen — Plate and Pipe
6 in. (150 mm) or
as required
11/2 in. (38 mm)
R = 1/8 in. (3 mm)
max.
y
T
y T (Plate)
T
y
(Pipe)
Root-Bend Specimen — Plate and Pipe
Y , in. (mm)
T , in. (mm)
P‐No. 23, F‐No. 23, All Other
or P‐No. 35
Metals
1
/16 < 1/8 (1.5 < 3)
T
T
/8 (3)
T
1
/8 – 3/8 (3 – 10)
1
>3/8 (10)
1
/8 (3)
3
/8 (10)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Weld reinforcement and backing strip or backing ring, if any, may be removed flush with the surface of the specimen. If a recessed ring is
used, this surface of the specimen may be machined to a depth not exceeding the depth of the recess to remove the ring, except that in
such cases the thickness of the finished specimen shall be that specified above. Do not flame‐cut nonferrous material.
(b) If the pipe being tested has a diameter of NPS 4 (DN 100) or less, the width of the bend specimen may be 3/4 in. (19 mm) for pipe diameters NPS 2 (DN 50) to and including NPS 4 (DN 100). The bend specimen width may be 3/8 in. (10 mm) for pipe diameters less than
NPS 2 (DN 50) down to and including NPS 3/8 (DN 10) and as an alternative, if the pipe being tested is equal to or less than NPS 1 (DN 25)
pipe size, the width of the bend specimens may be that obtained by cutting the pipe into quarter sections, less an allowance for saw cuts
or machine cutting. These specimens cut into quarter sections are not required to have one surface machined flat as shown in
QW-462.3(a). Bend specimens taken from tubing of comparable sizes may be handled in a similar manner.
195
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.3(b)
Face and Root Bends — Longitudinal
6 in. (150 mm) or
as required
11/2 in. (38 mm)
R = 1/8 in. (3 mm) max.
y
y
T
Face
Bend
T
Root
Bend
Y , in. (mm)
T , in. (mm)
P‐No. 23, F‐No. 23,
or P‐No. 35
All Other
Metals
T
T
1
/16 < 1/8 (1.5 < 3)
1
/8 – 3/8 (3 – 10)
1
>3/8 (10)
1
/8 (3)
T
3
/8 (3)
/8 (10)
GENERAL NOTE: Weld reinforcements and backing strip or backing ring, if any, shall be removed essentially flush with the undisturbed surface of the base material. If a recessed strip is used, this surface of the specimen may be machined to a depth not exceeding the depth of the
recess to remove the strip, except that in such cases the thickness of the finished specimen shall be that specified above.
Figure QW-462.4(a)
Fillet Welds in Plate — Procedure
1/
8
T1
T2
in. (3 mm) and less
T1
Over 1/8 in. (3 mm)
Equal to or less than T1, but
not less than 1/8 in. (3 mm)
T2
Size of fillet = thickness
of T2 not greater than
3/ in. (19 mm)
4
Discard 1 in. (25 mm)
.
Discard 1 in. (25 mm)
in
)m
m
0
30
6 in. (150 mm)
min.
m
.(
12
T1
in
Macro-Test Specimen
6 in. (150 mm) min.
GENERAL NOTE: Macro-test — the fillet shall show fusion at the root of the
weld but not necessarily beyond the root. The weld metal and heat-affected
zone shall be free of cracks.
196
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.4(b)
Fillet Welds in Plate — Performance
Direction of bending
T
Stop and restart
weld near the
center
3 in. (75 mm)
min.
Base metal thickness ≥
)
mm
m)
0
.
0m
(10 rox
5
.
1
p
n
(
4i
ap
n.
6 i min.
Max. fillet size = T
4 in. (100 mm)
min.
T
Macro-Test Specimen
GENERAL NOTE: Refer to QW-452.5 for T thickness/qualification ranges.
Figure QW-462.4(c)
Fillet Welds in Pipe — Performance
Direction of bend
Quarter section: Macro specimen
T = wall thickness
Quarter section:
Fracture specimen
3 in. (75 mm)
min.
Start and stop of weld
near center of bend
2 in. (50 mm)
min.
Max. fillet size = T
Wall thickness ≥ T
Base metal thickness ≥ T
GENERAL NOTE: Either pipe-to-plate or pipe-to-pipe may be used as shown.
197
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.4(d)
Fillet Welds in Pipe — Procedure
T = wall thickness
Quarter section:
Macro specimen
(four required)
3 in. (75 mm)
min.
Start and stop of weld
near center of specimen
2 in. (50 mm)
min.
Max. fillet size = T
Base metal thickness ≥ T
Wall thickness ≥ T
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Either pipe-to-plate or pipe-to-pipe may be used as shown.
(b) Macro test:
(1) The fillet shall show fusion at the root of the weld but not necessarily beyond the root.
(2) The weld metal and the heat-affected zone shall be free of cracks.
198
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.5(a)
Chemical Analysis and Hardness Specimen Corrosion‐Resistant and Hard‐Facing Weld Metal Overlay
Chemistry samples
As welded surface
Prepared surface
Note (1)
Note (2)
Note (3)
Fusion face
Approximate weld interface
Original test coupon thickness
NOTES:
(1) When a chemical analysis or hardness test is conducted on the as welded surface, the distance from the
approximate weld interface to the final as welded surface shall become the minimum qualified overlay thickness.
The chemical analysis may be performed directly on the as welded surface or on chips of material taken from the
as welded surface.
(2) When a chemical analysis or hardness test is conducted after material has been removed from the as welded surface,
the distance from the approximate weld interface to the prepared surface shall become the minimum qualified
overlay thickness. The chemical analysis may be made directly on the prepared surface or from chips removed from
the prepared surface.
(3) When a chemical analysis test is conducted on material removed by a horizontal drilled sample, the distance from the
approximate weld interface to the uppermost side of the drilled cavity shall become the minimum qualified overlay
thickness. The chemical analysis shall be performed on chips of material removed from the drilled cavity.
199
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.5(b)
Chemical Analysis Specimen, Hard‐Facing Overlay Hardness, and Macro Test Location(s) for
Corrosion‐Resistant and Hard‐Facing Weld Metal Overlay
GENERAL NOTE: Overlay may be on the inside or outside of pipe.
NOTES:
(1) Location of required test specimen removal (QW-453). Refer to QW-462.5(a) for chemical analysis and hardness test surface locations
and minimum qualified thickness.
(2) Testing of circumferential hard‐facing weld metal on pipe procedure qualification coupons may be limited to a single segment (completed
utilizing the vertical, up‐hill progression) for the chemical analysis, hardness, and macro‐etch tests required in QW-453. Removal is required for a change from vertical down to vertical up‐hill progression (but not vice‐versa).
(3) Location of test specimens shall be in accordance with the angular position limitations of QW-120.
(4) When overlay welding is performed using machine or automatic welding and the vertical travel direction of adjacent weld beads is reversed on alternate passes, only one chemical analysis or hardness specimen is required to represent the vertical portion. Qualification is
then restricted in production to require alternate pass reversal of rotation direction method.
200
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.5(c)
Pipe Bend Specimen — Corrosion‐Resistant Weld Metal Overlay
GENERAL NOTE: Overlay may be on the inside or outside of pipe.
NOTES:
(1) Location for required test specimen removal — Procedure (QW-453).
(2) Location for required test specimen removal — Performance (QW-453).
201
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.5(d)
Plate Bend Specimens — Corrosion‐Resistant Weld Metal Overlay
6 in. (150 mm) min.
Discard
Longitudinal
side bends
[Note (1)]
Transverse
side bends
[Notes (1), (2)]
Transverse
side bends
[Note (1)]
6 in. (150 mm) min.
As required 6 in. (150 mm) min.
Discard
6 in. (150 mm) min.
Discard
Discard
NOTES:
(1) Location for required test specimen removal — Procedure (QW-453). Four-side-bend test specimens are required
for each position.
(2) Location for required test specimen removal — Performance (QW-453). Two-side-bend test specimens are
required for each position.
202
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.5(e)
Plate Macro, Hardness, and Chemical Analysis Specimens — Corrosion‐Resistant and Hard‐Facing Weld
Metal Overlay
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Location of required test specimen removal (QW-453). One required for each position. Refer to QW-462.5(a) for chemical analysis and
hardness test surface locations and minimum qualified thickness.
(b) Removal required for a change from vertical up to vertical down and vice versa.
Figure QW-462.7.1
Resistance Seam Weld Test Coupon
6 in. (150 mm)
Resistance
seam weld
6 in. (150 mm)
Weld or Braze
203
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.7.2
Seam Weld Section Specimen Removal
Transverse specimens
Discard
D-1
T-1
T-2
T-3
Longitudinal specimens
T-4
L-1
L-2
L-3
L-4
D-2
Discard
10 in. (250 mm) min.
GENERAL NOTE: Mark the coupon into ten equal length specimens, label one end of the coupon D‐1 the other end D‐2. Cut the 10 in.
(250 mm) coupon (transverse to the weld length) into pieces 5 in. (125 mm) long each.
(1) Transverse Weld Cross Section Instructions
(a) Cut five specimens each approximately 1 in. (25 mm) in length from the coupon labeled D‐1 and discard the piece marked D‐1.
(b) Mark the remaining four specimens T‐1 through T‐4, prepare the specimens as detailed in (b)(2)(a) below for examination, adjacent
faces at the cut shall not be used.
(2) Longitudinal Weld Cross Section Instructions
(a) Cut five specimens each approximately 1in. (25mm) in length from the coupon labeled D‐2 and discard the piece marked D‐2.
(b) Mark the remaining four specimens L‐1 through L‐4, cut the specimens at approximately 1/3 of the weld width from the weld centerline through the length of each specimen in the longitudinal weld direction. Discard the four specimens containing approximately the 1/3 weld
width, the remaining four specimens containing approximately the 2/3 weld width shall be prepared as detailed in (a) below for examination.
(-1) The specimens shall be smoothed and etched with a suitable etchant (see QW-470) to give a clear definition to the weld metal and
heat‐affected zone.
Figure QW-462.7.3
Resistance Weld Nugget Section Test Specimens
1.50 in.–2.00 in.
(38 mm–
50 mm)
Transverse weld cross section
specimen, smoothed and etched
in preparation for 10 magnification
inspection
Cut line
1 in. (25 mm)
Longitudinal weld cross section
specimen, smoothed and etched
in preparation for 10 magnification
inspection
204
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.8.1
Spot Welds in Sheets
205
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.8.2
Seam Weld Peel Test Specimen and Method
10 in. (250 mm) min.
Coupon Top View
Coupon End View
Not welded
Coupon Side View
Prior to Peel Test
Slot 1/4 2 in. (6 50 mm) in a
round bar 11/4 in. (30 mm) to 11/2 in.
(38 mm) diameter
Step 1
Test Peel Tool
Step 2
Step 3
Peel Test
Step 1 — Separate coupon plies in nonwelded end.
Step 2 — Grip in vise or other suitable device, bend specimen.
Step 3 — Peel pieces apart with pincers or other suitable tool.
206
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.9
Spot Welds in Sheet
L [Note (1)]
W
L
W
W
W
5 in. (125 mm) min.
(a) Single Spot
Shear Specimen
(b) Multiple Spot
Shear Specimen
[Note (2)]
Nominal Thickness of Thinner
Sheet, in. (mm)
W , in.
(mm) Min.
Over 0.008 to 0.030 (0.20 to 0.8)
0.68 (17)
Over 0.030 to 0.100 (0.8 to 2.5)
1.00 (25)
Over 0.100 to 0.130 (2.5 to 3)
1.25 (30)
Over 0.130 (3)
1.50 (38)
NOTES:
(1) L shall be not less than 4W.
(2) Sketch (b) shall be made of 5 specimens or more.
207
ð13Þ
Table QW-462.10(a)
Shear Strength Requirements for Spot or Projection Weld Specimens
Customary Units
SI Units
P‐No. 1 Through P‐No. 11 and P‐No. 41 Through P‐No. 49 Metals
P‐No. 1 Through P‐No. 15F and P‐No. 41 Through P‐No. 49 Metals
Ultimate Strength
90,000 to 149,000 psi
Ultimate Strength Below
90,000 psi
Min.
Min. Avg.
Min.
Min. Avg.
0.009
0.010
0.012
0.016
0.018
0.020
0.022
0.025
0.028
0.032
0.036
0.040
0.045
0.050
0.056
0.063
0.071
0.080
0.090
0.100
0.112
0.125
130
160
200
295
340
390
450
530
635
775
920
1,065
1,285
1,505
1,770
2,110
2,535
3,005
3,515
4,000
4,545
5,065
160
195
245
365
415
480
550
655
785
955
1,140
1,310
1,585
1,855
2,185
2,595
3,125
3,705
4,335
4,935
5,610
6,250
100
115
150
215
250
280
330
400
465
565
690
815
1,005
1,195
1,460
1,760
2,080
2,455
2,885
3,300
3,795
4,300
125
140
185
260
305
345
405
495
575
695
860
1,000
1,240
1,475
1,800
2,170
2,560
3,025
3,560
4,070
4,675
5,310
0.23
0.25
0.30
0.41
0.46
0.51
0.56
0.64
0.71
0.81
0.91
1.02
1.14
1.27
1.42
1.60
1.80
2.03
2.29
2.54
2.84
3.18
lbf per Spot
lbf per Spot
Ultimate Strength 620
MPa to 1 027 MPa
Ultimate Strength Below
620 MPa
N per Spot
N per Spot
Min.
Min. Avg.
Min.
Min. Avg.
580
710
890
1 310
1 510
1 730
2 000
2 360
2 820
3 450
4 090
4 740
5 720
6 690
7 870
9 390
11 280
13 370
15 640
17 790
20 220
22 530
710
870
1 090
1 620
1 850
2 140
2 450
2 910
3 490
4 250
5 070
5 830
7 050
8 250
9 720
11 540
13 900
16 480
19 280
21 950
24 950
27 800
440
510
670
960
1 110
1 250
1 470
1 780
2 070
2 510
3 070
3 630
4 470
5 320
6 490
7 830
9 250
10 920
12 830
14 680
16 880
19 130
560
620
820
1 160
1 360
1 530
1 800
2 200
2 560
3 090
3 830
4 450
5 520
6 560
8 010
9 650
11 390
13 460
15 840
18 100
20 800
23 620
2013 SECTION IX
208
Nominal
Thickness of
Thinner Sheet, in.
Nominal
Thickness of
Thinner Sheet,
mm
ð13Þ
Table QW-462.10(b)
Shear Strength Requirements for Spot or Projection Weld Specimens
Nominal
Thickness of
Thinner Sheet,
in.
U.S. Customary Units
SI Units
P‐No. 21 Through P‐No. 25 Aluminum Alloys
P‐No. 21 Through P‐No. 26 Aluminum Alloys
Ultimate Strength
35,000 to 55,999
psi, lbf per Spot
Ultimate
Strength Below
19,500 psi, lbf
per Spot
Ultimate Strength
19,500 to 34,999
psi, lbf per Spot
Min.
Avg.
Min.
Avg.
Min.
0.010
0.012
0.016
0.018
50
65
100
115
65
85
125
145
30
70
85
40
90
110
20
50
65
25
65
85
0.25
0.30
0.41
0.46
220
290
440
510
0.020
0.022
0.025
0.028
135
155
175
205
170
195
200
260
100
120
145
175
125
150
185
220
80
95
110
135
100
120
140
170
0.51
0.56
0.64
0.71
0.032
0.036
0.040
0.045
235
275
310
370
295
345
390
465
210
255
300
350
265
320
375
440
165
195
225
260
210
245
285
325
0.050
0.057
0.063
0.071
430
515
610
720
540
645
765
900
400
475
570
645
500
595
715
810
295
340
395
450
0.080
0.090
0.100
0.112
855
1,000
1,170
1,340
1,070
1,250
1,465
1,675
765
870
940
1,000
960
1,090
1,175
1,255
0.125
0.140
0.160
0.180
1,625
1,920
2,440
3,000
2,035
2,400
3,050
3,750
1,050
...
...
...
1,315
0.190
0.250
3,240
6,400
4,050
8,000
...
...
Ultimate
Strength Below
134 MPa, N per
Spot
Min.
Min.
Avg.
Min.
Min.
Avg.
290
380
560
640
…
130
310
380
…
180
400
490
…
90
220
290
…
110
290
380
600
690
780
910
760
870
890
1 160
440
530
640
780
560
670
820
980
360
420
490
600
440
530
620
760
0.81
0.91
1.02
1.14
1 050
1 220
1 380
1 650
1 310
1 530
1 730
2 070
930
1 130
1 330
1 560
1 180
1 420
1 670
1 960
730
870
1 000
1 160
930
1 090
1 270
1 450
370
425
495
565
1.27
1.45
1.60
1.80
1 910
2 290
2 710
3 200
2 400
2 870
3 400
4 000
1 780
2 110
2 540
2 870
2 220
2 650
3 180
3 600
1 310
1 510
1 760
2 000
1 650
1 890
2 200
2 510
525
595
675
735
660
745
845
920
2.03
2.29
2.54
2.84
3 800
4 450
5 200
5 960
4 760
5 560
6 520
7 450
3 400
3 870
4 180
4 450
4 270
4 850
5 230
5 580
2 340
2 650
3 000
3 270
2 940
3 310
3 760
4 090
...
...
...
785
...
...
...
985
...
...
...
3.18
3.56
4.06
4.57
7 230
8 540
10 850
13 340
9 050
10 680
13 570
16 680
4 670
…
…
…
5 850
…
…
…
3 490
…
…
…
4 380
…
…
…
...
...
...
...
...
...
4.83
6.35
14 410
28 470
18 020
35 590
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
...
...
...
...
Min.
Min.
Avg.
Ultimate
Strength 134
MPa to 241
MPa, N per Spot
2013 SECTION IX
209
Min.
Min.
Min.
Avg.
Nominal
Thickness of
Thinner Sheet,
mm
Ultimate Strength
241 MPa to 386
MPa, N per Spot
ð13Þ
Table QW-462.10(c)
Shear Strength Requirements for Spot or Projection Weld Specimens
Nominal
Thickness of
Thinner Sheet, in.
SI Units
Titanium Alloys
Titanium Alloys
Ultimate Strength Above
100,000 psi
Ultimate Strength
100,000 psi and Below
Min.
Min. Avg.
Min.
Min. Avg.
Nominal
Thickness of
Thinner Sheet,
mm
205
275
400
490
530
610
725
855
1,045
1,255
1,460
1,795
2,125
2,550
3,000
3,380
3,810
4,290
4,760
5,320
5,950
265
360
520
635
690
795
945
1,110
1,360
1,630
1,900
2,340
2,760
3,320
3,900
4,400
4,960
5,570
6,170
6,800
7,700
160
200
295
340
390
450
530
635
775
920
1,065
1,285
1,505
1,770
2,110
2,395
2,700
3,040
3,380
3,785
4,220
210
260
385
445
510
585
690
825
1,000
1,200
1,385
1,670
1,910
2,300
2,730
3,115
3,510
3,955
4,395
4,925
5,490
0.25
0.30
0.41
0.46
0.51
0.56
0.64
0.71
0.81
0.91
1.02
1.14
1.27
1.42
1.60
1.80
2.03
2.29
2.54
2.84
3.18
lbf per Spot
lbf per Spot
Ultimate Strength 690
MPa and Above
Ultimate Strength Below
690 MPa
N per Spot
N per Spot
Min.
Min. Avg.
Min.
Min. Avg.
910
1 220
1 780
2 180
2 360
2 710
3 220
3 800
4 650
5 580
6 490
7 980
9 450
11 340
13 340
15 030
16 950
19 080
21 170
23 660
26 470
1 180
1 600
2 310
2 820
3 070
3 540
4 200
4 940
6 050
7 250
8 450
10 410
12 280
14 770
17 350
19 570
22 060
24 780
27 450
30 250
34 250
710
890
1 310
1 510
1 730
2 000
2 360
2 820
3 450
4 090
4 740
5 720
6 690
7 870
9 390
10 650
12 010
13 520
15 030
16 840
18 770
930
1 160
1 710
1 980
2 270
2 600
3 070
3 670
4 450
5 340
6 160
7 430
8 500
10 230
12 140
13 860
15 610
17 590
19 550
21 910
24 420
2013 SECTION IX
210
0.01
0.012
0.016
0.018
0.02
0.022
0.025
0.028
0.032
0.036
0.04
0.045
0.05
0.056
0.063
0.071
0.08
0.09
0.1
0.112
0.125
U.S. Customary Units
Figure QW-462.12
Nomenclature for Temper Bead Welding
Approx. 0.040 in. (1 mm)
S [Note (1)]
Also showing location of
hardness traverses when
hardness testing is used.
Partially Completed Partial-Penetration Weld
Approx. 0.040 in. (1 mm)
Typical Groove Weld
Approx. 0.040 in. (1 mm)
S [Note (1)]
S [Note (1)])
2013 SECTION IX
211
Also showing location of hardness traverses when hardness testing is used.
Completed Partial-Penetration Weld
Weld Beads against Base Metal
First Layer Tempering Beads
LEGEND
See Note (2)
Typical Fillet Weld
Approx.
0.040 in. (1 mm)
S [Note (1)]
Second Layer Tempering Beads
Approx.
0.040 in.
(1 mm)
Fill Weld Beads
Also showing permissible locations and orientations of hardness traverses.
Surface Temper Weld Reinforcing Beads
Overlay Weld
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Weld beads shown above may be deposited in any sequence that will result in placement of the beads as shown.
(b) Surface temper reinforcing beads may cover the entire weld surface, or may only be placed at the toe of the weld; they may or may not be mechanically removed.
NOTES:
(1) The distance, S , is measured from the toe of the weld to the edge of the temper beads. Measurements shall be made parallel to the base metal surface.
(2) Beads near the finished surface may be both tempering beads and surface temper reinforcing beads.
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-462.13
Measurement of Temper Bead Overlap
Direction of
bead sequence
a
b
Overlap length
GENERAL NOTE: Measurement of bead overlap – % overlap length = (a−b)/a × 100%. In this figure, the shaded bead overlaps previous bead
by 30% to 40%. The distance a is measured before the next bead is deposited.
Figure QW-463.1(b)
Plates — 3/4 in. (19 mm) and Over Thickness
and Alternate From 3/8 in. (10 mm) but Less
Than 3/4 in. (19 mm) Thickness Procedure
Qualification
Figure QW-463.1(a)
Plates — Less Than 3/4 in. (19 mm)
Thickness Procedure Qualification
212
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-463.1(c)
Plates — Longitudinal Procedure Qualification
Figure QW-463.1(d)
Procedure Qualification
213
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-463.1(e)
Procedure Qualification
Figure QW-463.1(f)
Notch‐Toughness Test Specimen Location
214
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-463.2(a)
Plates — Less Than 3/4 in. (19 mm) Thickness Performance Qualification
Figure QW-463.2(b)
Plates — 3/4 in. (19 mm) and Over Thickness and Alternate From 3/8 in. (10 mm) but Less Than 3/4 in.
(19 mm) Thickness Performance Qualification
215
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW--463.2(c)
Plates — Longitudinal Performance Qualification
Figure QW-463.2(d)
Performance Qualification
216
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-463.2(e)
Performance Qualification
Figure QW-463.2(f)
Pipe — NPS 10 (DN 250) Assembly Performance Qualification
217
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-463.2(g)
NPS 6 (DN 150) or NPS 8 (DN 200) Assembly Performance Qualification
GENERAL NOTE: When side bend tests are made in accordance with QW-452.1 and QW-452.3, they shall be removed as shown in
QW-463.2(g) in place of the face and root bends.
218
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-463.2(h)
Performance Qualification
219
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-464.1
Procedure Qualification Test Coupon and Test Specimens
Discard
1 in. (25 mm) min.
Transverse metal specimen
Tension shear specimen
Longitudinal metal specimen
Tension shear specimen
3/4
in. (19 mm) min.
Transverse metal specimen
Tension shear specimen
Longitudinal metal specimen
Tension shear specimen
W
Transverse metal specimen
Tension shear specimen
1 in. (25 mm) min.
Longitudinal metal specimen
Tension shear specimen
Transverse metal specimen
Longitudinal metal specimen
Discard
T
W
L
Thickness of Thinner, Sheet, T ,
in. (mm)
Up to 0.029 (0.74)
0.031 to 0.050 (0.79 to 1.2)
0.051 to 0.100 (1.3 to 2.54)
0.101 to 0.130 (2.57 to 3.30)
0.131 to 0.190 (3.33 to 4.83)
0.191 (4.85) and over
Specimen Width, W ,
in. (mm)
5
/8 (16)
/4 (19)
1 (25)
11/4 (32)
11/2 (38)
2 (50)
3
220
Recommended
Length, L, in. (mm)
3
3
4
5
5
6
(75)
(75)
(100)
(125)
(125)
(150)
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-464.2
Performance Qualification Test Coupons and Test Specimens
Discard
1 in. (25 mm) min.
Discard
1 in. (25 mm)
min.
4
Peel test specimen
in. (19 mm) min.
W
Cut into 6 strips
of equal width
3/
6 in. (152 mm) min.
Peel test specimen
Discard
Discard
L
1/
2
T
11/2 in. (38 mm) min.
in. (13 mm)
(a) Peel Test Coupon and Specimens
(b) Metallurgical Examination
Coupon and Transverse Specimens
221
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
Figure QW-466.1
Test Jig Dimensions
Tapped hole to suit
testing machine
Hardened rollers 11/2 in. (38 mm)
may be substituted for jig shoulders
As required
As required
3/
4
in. (19 mm)
Shoulders hardened
and greased
in. (19 mm)
3/
4
A
in. (19 mm)
6 3/4 in.
(170 mm)
3/
4
1/ in. (13 mm)
2
11/8 in. (29 mm)
1/
4
in. (6 mm)
Plunger
3 in. min.
(75 mm)
2 in. min.
(50 mm)
11/8 in. (29 mm)
3/
4
in. R
(19 mm)
1/
8
in. (3 mm)
B R
3/
4
in. (19 mm)
3/
4
in. (19 mm)
2 in. (50 mm)
D R
C
71/2 in. (190 mm)
9 in. (225 mm)
Yoke
3 7/8 in. (97 mm)
Customary Units
Thickness of
Specimen, in.
A, in.
B , in.
P‐No. 23 to P‐No. 21 through P‐No 25; P‐No. 21
through P‐No. 25 with F‐No. 23; P‐No. 35; any P‐No.
metal with F‐No. 33, 36, or 37
/8
t = 1/8 or less
21/16
161/2 t
11/32
81/4 t
23/8
181/2 t + 1/16
13/16
91/4 t + 1/32
P-No. 11A, P-No. 11B; P‐No. 25 to P‐No. 21 or P‐No. 22
or P‐No. 25
3
/8
t = 3/8 or less
21/2
62/3 t
11/4
31/3 t
33/8
82/3 t + 1/8
111/16
41/3 t + 1/16
P‐No. 51; P‐No. 49
/8
t = /8 or less
3
8t
11/2
4t
37/8
10t + 1/8
115/16
5t + 1/16
P‐No. 52; P‐No. 53; P‐No. 61; P‐No. 62
3
/8
t = 3/8 or less
33/4
10t
17/8
5t
45/8
12t + 1/8
25/16
6t + 1/16
All others with greater than or equal to 20%
elongation
/8
t = /8 or less
23/8
6t + 1/8
13/16
3t + 1/16
Material
1
3
3
Materials with 3% to less than 20% elongation
3
3
t = [see Note (1)]
11/2
4t
327/8 t
max.
3
/4
2t
167/16 t
max.
C , in.
A + 2t + 1/16
max.
D , in.
1
/2 C + 1/32
max.
SI Units
Thickness of
Specimen, mm
C , mm
D , mm
t = 3 or less
50
161/2 t
25
81/4 t
57
181/2 t + 1.6
29
91/4 t + 0.8
P-No. 11A, P-No. 11B; P‐No.25 to P‐No. 21 or P‐No. 22
or P‐No. 25
10
t = 10 or less
67
62/3 t
33
31/3 t
90
82/3 t + 3.2
45
41/3 t + 1.6
P‐No. 51; P‐No. 49
10
t = 10 or less
80
8t
40
4t
103
10t + 3.2
52
5t + 1.6
P‐No. 52; P‐No. 53; P‐No. 61; P‐No. 62
10
t = 10 or less
100
10t
50
5t
123
12t + 3.2
62
6t + 1.6
Material
P‐No. 23 to P‐No. 21 through P‐No. 25; P‐No. 21
through P‐No. 25 with F‐No. 23; P‐No. 35; any P‐No.
metal with F‐No. 33, 36, or 37
3
222
A, mm
B , mm
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-466.1
Test Jig Dimensions (Cont'd)
Table continued
SI Units
Material
Thickness of
Specimen, mm
A, mm
B , mm
C , mm
D , mm
All others with greater than or equal to 20%
elongation
10
t = 10 or less
40
4t
20
2t
63
6t + 3.2
32
3t + 1.6
Materials with 3% to less than 20% elongation
t = [see Note (1)]
327/8
t max.
167/16 t
max.
A + 2t + 1.6
max.
1
/2 C + 0.8
max.
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) For P‐Numbers, see QW/QB-422; for F‐Numbers, see QW-432.
(b) For guided‐bend jig configuration, see QW-466.2, QW-466.3, and QW-466.4.
(c) The weld and heat‐affected zone, in the case of a transverse weld bend specimen, shall be completely within the bend portion of the
specimen after testing.
(d) For materials with less than 3% elongation, a macro‐etch specimen shall be used in lieu of bend test at each bend test location. Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with QW-183(a).
NOTE:
(1) The dimensions of the test jig shall be such as to give the bend test specimen a calculated percent outer fiber elongation equal to at least
that of the base material with the lower minimum elongation as specified in the base material specification.
The following equation is provided for convenience in calculating the bend specimen thickness:
223
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-466.2
Guided‐Bend Roller Jig
A
Note (3)
B = 1/2 A
Notes (1), (2)
R min. = 3/4 in. (19 mm)
C
Notes (4), (5)
R min.
GENERAL NOTE: See QW-466.1 for jig dimensions and general notes.
NOTES:
(1) Either hardened and greased shoulders or hardened rollers free to rotate shall be used.
(2) The shoulders or rollers shall have a minimum bearing surface of 2 in. (50 mm) for placement
of the specimen. The rollers shall be high enough above the bottom of the jig so that the
specimens will clear the rollers when the ram is in the low position.
(3) The ram shall be fitted with an appropriate base and provision made for attachment to
the testing machine, and shall be of a sufficiently rigid design to prevent deflection and
misalignment while making the bend test. The body of the ram may be less than the dimensions shown in column A of QW-466.1.
(4) If desired, either the rollers or the roller supports may be made adjustable in the horizontal
direction so that specimens of t thickness may be tested on the same jig.
(5) The roller supports shall be fitted with an appropriate base designed to safeguard against
deflection and misalignment and equipped with means for maintaining the rollers centered
midpoint and aligned with respect to the ram.
Figure QW-466.3
Guided‐Bend Wrap Around Jig
T
Roller
T + 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) max.
A
B = 1/2 A
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) See QW-466.1 for jig dimensions and other general notes.
(b) Dimensions not shown are the option of the designer. The essential consideration is to have
adequate rigidity so that the jig parts will not spring.
(c) The specimen shall be firmly clamped on one end so that there is no sliding of the specimen
during the bending operation.
(d) Test specimens shall be removed from the jig when the outer roll has been removed 180 deg
from the starting point.
224
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-466.4
Stud‐Weld Bend Jig
Bend adapter
Max. diameter of stud + 1/64 in. (0.40 mm)
12 in. (300 mm)
15 deg min.
11/4 in. (32 mm)
A
Weld
For Stud Diameter,
in. (mm)
Use Adapter Gap,
A, in. (mm)
1
/8 (3)
/16 (5)
1
/4 (6)
3
/8 (10)
1
/2 (13)
5
/8 (16)
3
/4 (19)
7
/8 (22)
1 (25)
1
/8 (3)
/8 (3)
3
/16 (5)
7
/32 (5.5)
5
/16 (8)
11
/32 (9)
15
/32 (12)
15
/32 (12)
19
/32 (15)
3
1
225
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-466.5
Torque Testing Arrangement for Stud Welds
226
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QW-466.6
Suggested Type Tensile Test Figure for Stud Welds
Figure QW-469.2
Alternative Butt Joint
Figure QW-469.1
Butt Joint
371/2 deg max.
T
T /2 max.
227
T /3 max. but not greater
than 1/8 in. (3 mm)
2013 SECTION IX
QW-470
ð13Þ
QW-471
ETCHING — PROCESSES AND
REAGENTS
QW-473
The following etching reagents and directions for their
use are suggested for revealing the macrostructure.
GENERAL
QW-473.1
The surfaces to be etched should be prepared by filing,
machining, grinding, or polishing to delineate the macrofeatures of the specimen's weld and HAZ after etching.
With different alloys and tempers, the etching period will
vary from a few seconds to several minutes, and should be
continued until the desired contrast is obtained. As a protection from the fumes liberated during the etching process, this work should be done under a hood. After
etching, the specimens should be thoroughly rinsed and
then dried with a blast of warm air. Coating the surface
with a thin clear lacquer will preserve the appearance.
(Reference ASTM E340, Standard Test Method for Macroetching Metals and Alloys, or other industry-accepted
standards.)
QW-472
FOR NONFERROUS METALS
Aluminum and Aluminum‐Base Alloys.
Solution
Volume
Hydrochloric acid (concentrated)
15 ml
Hydrofluoric acid (48%)
10 ml
Water
85 ml
This solution is to be used at room temperature, and
etching is accomplished by either swabbing or immersing
the specimen.
QW-473.2 For Copper and Copper‐Base Alloys: Cold
Concentrated Nitric Acid. Etching is accomplished by
either flooding or immersing the specimen for several seconds under a hood. After rinsing with a flood of water, the
process is repeated with a 50‐50 solution of concentrated
nitric acid and water.
In the case of the silicon bronze alloys, it may be necessary to swab the surface to remove a white (SiO2) deposit.
FOR FERROUS METALS
Etching solutions suitable for carbon and low alloy
steels, together with directions for their use, are suggested
in QW-472.1 through QW-472.4.
QW-473.3
QW-472.1 Hydrochloric Acid. Hydrochloric (muriatic) acid and water, equal parts, by volume. The solution
should be kept at or near the boiling temperature during
the etching process. The specimens are to be immersed
in the solution for a sufficient period of time to reveal all
lack of soundness that might exist at their cross‐sectional
surfaces.
For Nickel and Nickel‐Base Alloys.
Material
Nickel
QW-472.2 Ammonium Persulfate. One part of ammonium persulfate to nine parts of water, by weight. The solution should be used at room temperature, and should be
applied by vigorously rubbing the surface to be etched
with a piece of cotton saturated with the solution. The
etching process should be continued until there is a clear
definition of the structure in the weld.
Formula
Nitric Acid or Lepito’s Etch
Low Carbon Nickel
Nitric Acid or Lepito’s Etch
Nickel–Copper (400)
Nitric Acid or Lepito’s Etch
Nickel–Chromium–Iron
(600 and 800)
Aqua Regia or Lepito’s Etch
Table QW-473.3-1
Makeup of Equations for Aqua Regia and
Lepito’s Etch
QW-472.3 Iodine and Potassium Iodide. One part of
powdered iodine (solid form), two parts of powdered potassium iodide, and ten parts of water, all by weight. The
solution should be used at room temperature, and
brushed on the surface to be etched until there is a clear
definition or outline of the weld
Solution
Nitric Acid, Concentrated — HNO3
Hydrochloric Acid, Concentrated —
HCL
Ammonium Sulfate – (NH4)2 (SO4)
Ferric Chloride – FeCl3
Water
QW-472.4 Nitric Acid. One part of nitric acid and
three parts of water, by volume.
Aqua Regia
[Note (1)],
[Note (2)]
Lepito’s Etch
[Note (2)],
[Note (3)]
1 part
2 parts
3 ml
10 ml
...
...
...
1.5 g
2.5 g
7.5 ml
NOTES:
(1) Warm the parts for faster action.
(2) Etching is accomplished by either swabbing or immersing the
specimen.
(3) Mix solution as follows:
(a) Dissolve (NH4)2 (SO4) in H2O.
(b) Dissolve powdered FeCl3 in warm HCl.
(c) Mix (a) and (b) above and add HNO3.
CAUTION: Always pour the acid into the water. Nitric acid causes
bad stains and severe burns.
The solution may be used at room temperature and applied to the surface to be etched with a glass stirring rod.
The specimens may also be placed in a boiling solution of
the acid, but the work should be done in a well‐ventilated
room. The etching process should be continued for a sufficient period of time to reveal all lack of soundness that
might exist at the cross‐sectional surfaces of the weld.
228
2013 SECTION IX
QW-473.4
For Titanium.
Solution
Kroll’s Etch
Hydrofluoric acid (48%)
Nitric acid
(concentrated)
Hydrochloric Acid
(concentrated)
Water
1 to 3 ml
QW-473.5
Apply by swab and rinse in cold water.
These are general purpose etchants which are applied
at room temperature by swabbing or immersion of the
specimen.
Keller’s Etch
1
/2 ml
2 to 6 ml
21/2 ml
...
To make 100 ml
11/2 ml
To make 100 ml
QW-490
For Zirconium.
Solution
Volume
Hydrofluoric acid
Nitric acid (concentrated)
Water
3 ml
22 ml
22 ml
229
REDESIGNATED AS QG-109
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
ARTICLE V
STANDARD WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (SWPSS)
QW-500
GENERAL
(11) if more than one process or electrode type is
used, the approximate weld metal deposit thickness for
each process or electrode type
(12) maximum interpass temperature
(13) post weld heat treatment used, including holding time and temperature range
(14) visual inspection and mechanical testing results
(15) the results of volumetric examination when permitted as an alternative to mechanical testing by QW-304
(e) The coupon shall be visually examined in accordance with QW-302.4 and mechanically tested in accordance with QW-302.1 or volumetrically examined in
accordance with QW-302.2. If visual examination, volumetric examination, or any test specimen fails to meet
the required acceptance criteria, the test coupon shall be
considered as failed and a new test coupon shall be
welded before the organization may use the SWPS.
The SWPSs listed in Mandatory Appendix E are acceptable for construction in which the requirements of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX are specified. Any requirements of the applicable Construction
Code Section regarding SWPS take precedence over the requirements of Section IX. These SWPSs are not permitted
for construction where impact testing of the WPS is required by the Construction Code.
Only SWPSs (including edition) that have been accepted
in Mandatory Appendix E within the 1998 Edition or any
later edition of Section IX may be used in accordance with
this Article. Adoption of SWPSs (including edition) shall be
in accordance with the current edition (see Foreword) and
addenda of Section IX.
ð13Þ
QW-510
ADOPTION OF SWPSS
QW-511
Prior to use, the organization that will be responsible
for and provide operational control over production welding shall comply with the following for each SWPS that it
intends to use, except as noted in QW-520.
(a) Enter the name of the organization on the SWPS.
(b) An employee of that organization shall sign and date
the SWPS.
(c) The applicable Code Section(s) (Section VIII, B31.1,
etc.) and/or any other fabrication document (contract,
specification, etc.) that must be followed during welding
shall be listed on the SWPS.
(d) The organization shall weld and test one groove
weld test coupon following that SWPS. The following information shall be recorded:
(1) the specification, type, and grade of the base metal welded
(2) groove design
(3) initial cleaning method
(4) presence or absence of backing
(5) The ASME or AWS specification and AWS classification of electrode or filler metal used and manufacturer’s
trade name
(6) size and classification of tungsten electrode for
GTAW
(7) size of consumable electrode or filler metal
(8) shielding gas and flow rate for GTAW and GMAW
(9) preheat temperature
(10) position of the groove weld and, if applicable,
the progression
USE OF DEMONSTRATED SWPSS
Code Sections or fabrication documents that are required to be referenced by QW-510(c) may be added or
deleted from a demonstrated SWPS without further
demonstrations.
QW-520
USE OF SWPSS WITHOUT DISCRETE
DEMONSTRATION
Once an SWPS has been demonstrated, additional
SWPSs that are similar to the SWPS that was demonstrated may be used without further demonstration. Such
additional SWPSs shall be compared to the SWPS that was
used for the demonstration, and the following limitations
shall not be exceeded:
(a) a change in the welding process.
(b) a change in the P‐Number.
(c) a change from the as‐welded condition to the heattreated condition. This limitation also applies for SWPSs
that allow use in both conditions (e.g., SWPS B2.1‐021 allows production welding with or without heat treatment;
if the demonstration was performed without heat treatment, production welding with heat treatment is not permitted). Once heat treatment has been demonstrated for
any SWPS, this limitation no longer applies.
(d) a change from a gas‐shielded flux‐cored wire or solid wire to a self-shielded flux‐cored wire or vice versa.
(e) a change from globular, spray or pulsed spray transfer welding to short circuiting transfer welding or vice
versa.
230
2013 SECTION IX
(f)
(g)
(h)
metal
(c) Only the welding processes shown on an SWPS shall
be used in given production joint. When a multi-process
SWPS is selected, the processes shown on the SWPS shall
be used in the order and manner specified on the SWPS.
(d) SWPSs shall not be used in the same production
joint together with WPSs qualified by the organization.
(e) The organization may supplement an SWPS by attaching additional instructions to provide the welder with
further direction for making production welds to Code or
other requirements. When SWPSs are supplemented with
instructions that address any condition shown on the
SWPS, such instructions shall be within the limits of the
SWPS. For example, when an SWPS permits use of several
electrode sizes, supplemental instructions may direct the
welder to use only one electrode size out of those permitted by the SWPS; however, the supplemental instructions may not permit the welder to use a size other than
one or more of those permitted by the SWPS.
(f) SWPSs may not be used until the demonstration of
QW-510 has been satisfactorily welded, tested, and
certified.
(g) The identification number of the Supporting Demonstration shall be noted on each SWPS that it supports
prior to using the SWPS.
(h) The certified Supporting Demonstration Record
shall be available for review by Authorized Inspector.
a change in the F‐Number of the welding electrode.
the addition of preheat above ambient temperature.
a change from an SWPS that is identified as for sheet
to one that is not and vice versa.
QW-530
FORMS
A suggested Form QW-485 for documenting the welding variables and test results of the demonstration is provided in Nonmandatory Appendix B.
ð13Þ
QW-540
PRODUCTION USE OF SWPSS
As with any WPS, welding that is done following an
SWPS shall be done in strict accordance with the SWPS.
In addition, the following requirements apply to the use
of SWPSs:
(a) The organization may not deviate from the welding
conditions specified on the SWPS.
(b) SWPSs may not be supplemented with PQRs or revised in any manner except for reference to the applicable
Code Section or other fabrication documents as provided
by QW-511.
231
2013 SECTION IX
PART QB
BRAZING
ARTICLE XI
BRAZING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ð13Þ
QB-100
SCOPE
The maximum permitted angular deviation from the
specified flow plane is ±45 deg.
The rules in this Part apply to the preparation of brazing
procedure specifications, and the qualification of brazing
procedures, brazers, and brazing operators for all types
of manual and machine brazing processes permitted in
this Section. These rules may also be applied, insofar as
they are applicable, to other manual or machine brazing
processes, permitted in other Sections.
QB-120
Brazed joints may be made in test coupons oriented in
any of the positions in Figure QB-461.2 and as described
in the following paragraphs, except that angular deviation
from the specified horizontal and vertical flow planes in
accordance with column 1 of Figure QB-461.2 is permitted
during brazing.
QB-101
In performance qualification, the basic criterion established for brazer qualification is to determine the brazer’s
ability to make a sound brazed joint. The purpose of the
performance qualification test for the brazing operator is
to determine the operator’s mechanical ability to operate
the brazing equipment to make a sound braze joint.
QB-103
QB-121
FLAT‐FLOW POSITION
The test coupon joints in position suitable for applying
brazing filler metal in rod, strip, or other suitable form under the flat‐flow conditions are shown in illustrations (1)
through (5) of Line A in Figure QB-461.2. The maximum
permitted angular deviation from the specified flow plane
is ±15 deg.
RESPONSIBILITY
QB-103.1 Brazing. Each organization shall conduct
the tests required in this Section to qualify the brazing
procedures used in the construction of the brazed assemblies built under this Code and the performance of brazers
and brazing operators who apply these procedures.
QB-122
VERTICAL‐DOWNFLOW POSITION
The test coupon joints in a position suitable for applying
brazing filler metal in rod, strip, or other suitable form under the vertical‐downflow conditions are shown in illustrations (1) through (4) of Line B in Figure QB-461.2.
The brazing filler metal flows by capillary action with
the aid of gravity downward into the joint. The maximum
permitted angular deviation from the specified flow plane
is ±15 deg.
QB-103.2 Records. Each organization shall maintain a
record of the results obtained in brazing procedure and
brazer or brazing operator performance qualifications. Refer to recommended Forms in Nonmandatory Appendix B.
QB-110
TEST POSITIONS FOR LAP, BUTT,
SCARF, OR RABBET JOINTS
BRAZE ORIENTATION
QB-123
NOTE: In the following paragraphs the word position is synonymous
with flow position.
VERTICAL‐UPFLOW POSITION
The test coupon joints in position suitable for applying
brazing filler metal in rod, strip, or other suitable form under the vertical‐upflow conditions are shown in illustrations (1) through (4) of Line C in Figure QB-461.2. The
brazing filler metal flows by capillary action through the
joint. The maximum permitted angular deviation from
the specified flow plane is ±15 deg.
The orientations of brazes with respect to planes of reference are classified in accordance with Figure QB-461.1
into four positions (A, B, C, and D in column 1), based on
the basic flow of brazing filler metal through joints. These
positions are flat flow, vertical downflow, vertical upflow,
and horizontal flow.
232
2013 SECTION IX
QB-124
HORIZONTAL‐FLOW POSITION
tension tests on all thicknesses of plate. The specimens
may be tested in a support fixture in substantial accordance with Figure QB-462.1(f).
(a) For thicknesses up to and including 1 in. (25 mm), a
full thickness specimen shall be used for each required
tension test.
(b) For plate thicknesses greater than 1 in. (25 mm),
full thickness specimens or multiple specimens may be
used, provided (c) and (d) are complied with.
(c) When multiple specimens are used in lieu of full
thickness specimens, each set shall represent a single tension test of the full plate thickness. Collectively, all of the
specimens required to represent the full thickness of the
brazed joint at one location shall comprise a set.
(d) When multiple specimens are necessary, the entire
thickness shall be mechanically cut into a minimum number of approximately equal strips of a size that can be
tested in the available equipment. Each specimen of the
set shall be tested and meet the requirements of QB-153.
The test coupon joints in a position suitable for applying
brazing filler metal in rod, strip, or other suitable form under the horizontal‐flow conditions are shown in illustrations (1) and (2) of Line D of Figure QB-461.2. The
brazing filler metal flows horizontally by capillary action
through the joint. The maximum permitted angular deviation from the specified flow plane is ±15 deg.
QB-140
QB-141
TYPES AND PURPOSES OF TESTS
AND EXAMINATIONS
TESTS
Tests used in brazing procedure and performance qualifications are specified in QB-141.1 through QB-141.6.
QB-141.1 Tension Tests. Tension tests, as described
in QB-150, are used to determine the ultimate strength
of brazed butt, scarf, lap, and rabbet joints.
QB-151.2 Reduced Section — Pipe. Reduced‐section
specimens conforming to the requirements given in
Figure QB-462.1(b) may be used for tension tests on all
thicknesses of pipe or tube having an outside diameter
greater than 3 in. (75 mm). The specimens may be tested
in a support fixture in substantial accordance with
Figure QB-462.1(f).
(a) For thicknesses up to and including 1 in. (25 mm), a
full thickness specimen shall be used for each required
tension test.
(b) For pipe thicknesses greater than 1 in. (25 mm), full
thickness specimens or multiple specimens may be used,
provided (c) and (d) are complied with.
(c) When multiple specimens are used in lieu of full
thickness specimens, each set shall represent a single tension test of the full pipe thickness. Collectively, all of the
specimens required to represent the full thickness of the
brazed joint at one location shall comprise a set.
(d) When multiple specimens are necessary, the entire
thickness shall be mechanically cut into a minimum number of approximately equal strips of a size that can be
tested in the available equipment. Each specimen of the
set shall be tested and meet the requirements of QB-153.
QB-141.2 Guided‐Bend Tests. Guided‐bend tests, as
described in QB-160, are used to determine the degree
of soundness and ductility of butt and scarf joints.
QB-141.3 Peel Tests. Peel tests, as described in
QB-170, are used to determine the quality of the bond
and the amount of defects in lap joints.
ð13Þ
QB-141.4 Sectioning Tests. Sectioning tests, i.e., the
sectioning of test coupons, as described in QB-180, are
used to determine the soundness of workmanship coupons or test specimens. Sectioning tests are also a substitute for the peel test when the peel test is impractical to
perform.
QB-141.5 Workmanship Coupons. Workmanship
coupons, as described in QB-182, are used to determine
the soundness of joints other than the standard butt, scarf,
lap, and rabbet joints.
QB-141.6 Visual Examination. Visual examination of
brazed joints is used for estimating the soundness by external appearance, such as continuity of the brazing filler
metal, size, contour, and wetting of fillet along the joint
and, where appropriate, to determine if filler metal flowed
through the joint from the side of application to the opposite side.
QB-150
QB-151
QB-151.3 Full‐Section Specimens for Pipe. Tension
specimens conforming to the dimensions given in
Figure QB-462.1(e) may be used for testing pipe with an
outside diameter of 3 in. (75 mm) or less.
TENSION TESTS
SPECIMENS
QB-152
Tension test specimens shall conform to one of the
types illustrated in Figures QB-462.1(a) through
QB-462.1(f), and shall meet the requirements of QB-153.
TENSION TEST PROCEDURE
The tension test specimen shall be ruptured under tensile load. The tensile strength shall be computed by dividing the ultimate total load by the least cross‐sectional area
of the specimen as measured before the load is applied.
QB-151.1 Reduced Section — Plate. Reduced‐section
specimens conforming to the requirements given in Figures QB-462.1(a) and QB-462.1(c) may be used for
233
2013 SECTION IX
QB-153
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA — TENSION
TESTS
which the brazing filler metal is placed or fed, but definitely is the surface opposite to that designated as the first
surface, irrespective of how the brazing filler metal is fed.
Transverse second surface bend specimens shall conform
to the dimensions shown in Figure QB-462.2(a). For subsize first surface bends, see QB-161.3.
QB-153.1 Tensile Strength. Minimum values for procedure qualification are provided under the column heading “Minimum Specified Tensile” of Table QW/QB-422. In
order to pass the tension test, the specimen shall have a
tensile strength that is not less than
(a) the specified minimum tensile strength of the base
metal in the annealed condition; or
(b) the specified minimum tensile strength of the weaker of the two in the annealed condition, if base metals of
different specified minimum tensile strengths are used; or
(c) if the specimen breaks in the base metal outside of
the braze, the test shall be accepted as meeting the requirements, provided the strength is not more than 5%
below the minimum specified tensile strength of the base
metal in the annealed condition.
(d) the specified minimum tensile strength is for full
thickness specimens including cladding for Aluminum Alclad materials (P‐No. 104 and P‐No. 105) less than 1/2 in.
(13 mm). For Aluminum Alclad materials 1/2 in. (13 mm)
and greater, the specified minimum tensile strength is
for both full thickness specimens that include cladding
and specimens taken from the core.
QB-160
QB-161
QB-161.3 Subsize Transverse Bend. In those cases
where the wall thickness of the tube or pipe is less than
3
/8 in. (10 mm) and the diameter‐to‐thickness ratio does
not permit the preparation of full‐size rectangular
guided‐bend specimens, the 11/2 in. (38 mm) wide standard guided‐bend specimen shown in
Figure QB-462.2(a) may be replaced by three subsize specimens having a width of 3/8 in. (10 mm) or 4t, whichever
is less.
QB-161.4 Longitudinal‐Bend Tests. Longitudinal‐
bend tests may be used in lieu of the transverse‐bend tests
for testing braze metal or base metal combinations, which
differ markedly in bending properties between
(a) the two base metals; or
(b) the braze metal and the base metal.
QB-161.5 Longitudinal First Surface Bend. The joint
is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which is
bent so that the first surface becomes the convex surface
of the bent specimen. The definition of first surface is as
given in QB-161.1. Longitudinal first surface bend specim e n s sh a l l c o n fo r m to t h e d i m e ns i o n s g i v e n i n
Figure QB-462.2(b).
GUIDED‐BEND TESTS
SPECIMENS
Guided‐bend test specimens shall be prepared by cutting the test plate or pipe to form specimens of approximately rectangular cross section. The cut surfaces shall
be designated the sides of the specimen. The other two
surfaces shall be designated the first and second surfaces.
The specimen thickness and bend radius are shown in
Figures QB-466.1, QB-466.2, and QB-466.3. Guided‐bend
specimens are of five types, depending on whether the axis
of the joint is transverse or parallel to the longitudinal axis
of the specimen, and which surface (first or second) is on
the convex (outer) side of the bent specimen. The five
types are defined as follows ( QB-161.1 through
QB-161.6).
QB-161.6 Longitudinal Second Surface Bend. The
joint is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the specimen,
which is bent so that the second surface becomes the convex surface of the specimen. The definition of the second
surface is given in QB-161.2. Longitudinal second surface
bend specimens shall conform to the dimensions given in
Figure QB-462.2(b).
QB-162
GUIDED‐BEND TEST PROCEDURE
QB-162.1 Jigs. Guided‐bend specimens shall be bent
in test jigs that are in substantial accordance with
QB-466. When using the jigs in accordance with Figure
QB-466.1 or Figure QB-466.2, the side of the specimen
turned toward the gap of the jig shall be the first surface
for first surface bend specimens (defined in QB-161.1),
and the second surface for second surface bend specimens
(defined in QB-161.2). The specimen shall be forced into
the die by applying load on the plunger until the curvature
of the specimen is such that a 1/8 in. (3 mm) diameter wire
cannot be inserted between the specimen and the die of
Figure QB-466.1, or the specimen is bottom ejected, if
the roller type of jig (Figure QB-466.2) is used.
When using the wrap around jig (Figure QB-466.3) the
side of the specimen turned toward the roller shall be the
first surface for first surface bend specimens, and the second surface for second surface bend specimens.
QB-161.1 Transverse First Surface Bend. The joint is
transverse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen, which
is bent so that the first surface becomes the convex surface
of the bent specimen. In general, the first surface is defined
as that surface from which the brazing filler metal is applied and is fed by capillary attraction into the joint. Transverse first surface bend specimens shall conform to the
dimensions shown in Figure QB-462.2(a). For subsize first
surface bends, see QB-161.3.
QB-161.2 Transverse Second Surface Bend. The joint
is transverse to the longitudinal axis of the specimen,
which is bent so that the second surface becomes the convex surface of the bent specimen. In general, the second
surface is defined as the surface opposite to that from
234
2013 SECTION IX
QB-163
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA — BEND TESTS
(a) The total area of discontinuities (unbrazed areas,
flux inclusions, etc.) shall not exceed 25% of the total area
of any individual faying surface.
(b) The sum of the lengths of the discontinuities measured on any one line in the direction of the lap shall
not exceed 25% of the lap.
(c) No discontinuity shall extend continuously from
one edge of the joint to the other edge, irrespective of its
direction.
The joint of a transverse‐bend specimen shall be completely within the bent portion of the specimen after
testing.
The guided‐bend specimens shall have no open discontinuities exceeding 1/8 in. (3 mm), measured in any direction on the convex surface of the specimen after
bending. Cracks occurring on the corners of the specimen
during testing shall not be considered, unless there is definite evidence that they result from flux inclusions, voids,
or other internal discontinuities.
QB-170
QB-171
PEEL TESTS
SPECIMENS
SECTIONING TESTS AND
WORKMANSHIP COUPONS
QB-181
SECTIONING TEST SPECIMENS
The dimensions and configuration of the sectioning test
specimens shall conform to the requirements of
Figure QB-462.4. Each side of the specimen shall be polished and examined with at least a four‐power magnifying glass. The sum of the length of unbrazed areas on
either side, considered individually, shall not exceed
20% of the length of the joint overlap.
The dimensions and preparation of the peel test
s pe cim e n sh al l c o n fo r m t o th e r eq u ir e m en t s o f
Figure QB-462.3.
QB-172
QB-180
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA — PEEL TEST
In order to pass the peel test, the specimens shall show
evidence of brazing filler metal along each edge of the
joint. Specimens shall be separated or peeled either by
clamping Section A and striking Section B with a suitable
tool such that the bending occurs at the fulcrum point
(see Figure QB-462.3), or by clamping Section A and Section B in a machine suitable for separating the sections under tension. The separated faying surfaces of joints shall
meet the following criteria:
QB-182
WORKMANSHIP COUPONS
The dimensions and configuration of the workmanship
coupon shall conform to the nearest approximation of
the actual application. Some typical workmanship coupons are shown in Figure QB-462.5. Each side of the specimen shall be polished and examined with at least a
four‐power magnifying glass. The sum of the length of unbrazed areas on either side, considered individually, shall
not exceed 20% of the length of the joint overlap.
235
2013 SECTION IX
ARTICLE XII
BRAZING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATIONS
ð13Þ
QB-200
GENERAL
specimens. Recorded variables normally fall within a small
range of the actual variables that will be used in production brazing.
(b) Contents of the PQR. The completed PQR shall document all essential variables of QB-250 for each brazing
process used during the brazing of the test coupon. Nonessential or other variables used during the brazing of the
test coupon may be recorded at the organization’s option.
All variables, if recorded, shall be the actual variables (including ranges) used during the brazing of the test coupon.
If variables are not monitored during brazing, they shall
not be recorded. It is not intended that the full range or
the extreme of a given range of variables to be used in production be used during qualification unless required due
to a specific essential variable.
The PQR shall be certified accurate by the organization.
The organization may not subcontract the certification
function. This certification is intended to be the organization’s verification that the information in the PQR is a true
record of the variables that were used during the brazing
of the test coupon and that the resulting tensile, bend,
peel, or section (as required) test results are in compliance
with Section IX.
(c) Changes to the PQR. Changes to the PQR are not permitted, except as described below. It is a record of what
happened during a particular brazing test. Editorial corrections or addenda to the PQR are permitted. An example
of an editorial correction is an incorrect P‐Number or
F‐Number that was assigned to a particular base material
or filler metal. An example of an addendum would be a
change resulting from a Code change. For example, Section
IX may assign a new F‐Number to a filler material or adopt
a new filler material under an established F‐Number. This
may permit, depending on the particular construction
Code requirements, an organization to use other filler metals that fall within that particular F‐Number where, prior
to the Code revision, the organization was limited to the
particular filler metal classification that was used during
qualification. Additional information can be incorporated
into a PQR at a later date provided the information is substantiated as having been part of the original qualification
condition by lab record or similar data.
All changes to a PQR require recertification (including
date) by the organization.
(d) F o r m a t o f t h e P Q R . F o r m Q B - 4 8 3 ( s e e
Nonmandatory Appendix B) has been provided as a guide
for the PQR. The information required to be in the PQR
may be in any format, to fit the needs of each organization,
QB-200.1 Each organization shall prepare written
Brazing Procedure Specifications, which are defined as
follows.
(a) Brazing Procedure Specification (BPS). A BPS is a
written qualified brazing procedure prepared to provide
direction for making production brazes to Code requirements. The BPS or other documents [see (e)] may be used
to provide direction to the brazer or brazing operator to
assure compliance with the Code requirements.
(b) Contents of the BPS. The completed BPS shall describe all of the essential and nonessential variables for
each brazing process used in the BPS. These variables
are listed in QB-250 and are defined in Article XIV, Brazing
Data.
The BPS shall reference the supporting Procedure Qualification Record(s) (PQR) described in QB-200.2. The organization may include any other information in the BPS
that may be helpful in making a Code braze.
(c) Changes to the BPS. Changes may be made in the
nonessential variables of a BPS to suit production requirements without requalification provided such changes are
documented with respect to the essential and nonessential
variables for each process. This may be by amendment to
the BPS or by use of a new BPS.
Changes in essential variables require requalification of
the BPS [new or additional PQRs to support the change in
essential variable(s)].
(d) Format of the BPS. The information required to be in
the BPS may be in any format, written or tabular, to fit the
needs of each organization, as long as every essential and
nonessential variable outlined in QB-250 is included or
referenced.
Form QB-482 (see Nonmandatory Appendix B) has
been provided as a guide for the BPS. It is only a guide
and does not list all required data for all brazing
processes.
(e) Availability of the BPS. A BPS used for Code production brazing shall be available for reference and review by
the Authorized Inspector (AI) at the fabrication site.
QB-200.2 Each organization shall be required to prepare a procedure qualification record, which is defined as
follows.
(a) Procedure Qualification Record (PQR). The PQR is a
record of variables recorded during the brazing of the test
coupons. It also contains the test results of the tested
236
2013 SECTION IX
exists, additional test specimens may be removed as close
as practicable to the original specimen location to replace
the failed test specimens.
When it has been determined that the test failure was
caused by an essential variable, a new test coupon may
be brazed with appropriate changes to the variable(s) that
were determined to cause the test failure. If the new test
passes, the essential variables shall be documented on
the PQR.
When it is determined that the test failure was caused
by one or more brazing related factors other than essential
variables, a new test coupon may be brazed with the appropriate changes to brazing related factors that were determined to cause the test failure. If the new test passes,
the brazing related factors that were determined to cause
the previous test failure shall be addressed by the organization to assure that the required properties are achieved
in the production brazement.
as long as every essential variable, required by QB-250, is
included. Also the type of tests, number of tests, and test
results shall be listed in the PQR. Additional sketches or information may be attached or referenced to record the required variables.
(e) Availability of the PQR. PQRs used to support BPSs
shall be available, upon request, for review by the Authorized Inspector (AI). The PQR need not be available to the
brazer or brazing operator.
(f) Multiple BPSs With One PQR/Multiple PQRs With One
BPS. Several BPSs may be prepared from the data on a single PQR (e.g., a vertical‐upflow pipe PQR may support
BPSs for the vertical‐upflow and downflow positions on
pipe within all other essential variables). A single BPS
may cover several essential variable changes as long as a
supporting PQR exists for each essential variable.
QB-200.3 To reduce the number of brazing procedure
qualifications required, P‐Numbers are assigned to base
metals dependent on characteristics such as composition,
brazability, and mechanical properties, where this can logically be done, and for ferrous and nonferrous metals.
The assignments do not imply that base metals may be
indiscriminately substituted for a base metal which was
used in the qualification test without consideration of
the compatibility from the standpoint of metallurgical
properties, postbraze heat treatment, design, mechanical
properties, and service requirements.
QB-202.2 Base Metals. The procedure qualification
shall encompass the thickness ranges to be used in production for the base metals to be joined or repaired. The
range of thickness qualified is given in QB-451.
QB-203
QB-203.1 For plate, qualification in the flat‐flow,
vertical‐upflow, or horizontal‐flow position shall qualify
for the vertical‐downflow position. For pipe, qualification
in the horizontal‐flow or vertical‐upflow position shall
qualify for the vertical‐downflow position.
Qualification in pipe shall qualify for plate, but not vice
versa. Horizontal‐flow in pipe shall also qualify for flat‐
flow in plate.
QB-200.4 Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses. A BPS
qualified on test coupons of equal thickness shall be applicable for production brazements between dissimilar
base metal thicknesses provided the thickness of both
base metals are within the qualified thickness range permitted by QB-451. A BPS qualified on test coupons of different thicknesses shall be applicable for production
brazements between dissimilar base metal thicknesses
provided the thickness of each base metal is within the
qualified range of thickness (based on each test coupon
thickness) permitted by QB-451.
QB-201
QB-203.2 Special Flow Positions. An organization
who does production brazing in a special orientation
may make the tests for procedure qualification in this specific orientation. Such qualifications are valid only for the
flow positions actually tested, except that an angular deviation of ±15 deg is permitted in the inclination of the
braze plane, as defined in Figures QB-461.1 and QB-461.2.
ORGANIZATIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
The organization shall certify that they have qualified
each Brazing Procedure Specification, performed the procedure qualification test, and documented it with the necessary Procedure Qualification Record (PQR).
QB-202
LIMITS OF QUALIFIED FLOW POSITIONS
FOR PROCEDURES (SEE FIGURES
QB-461.1 AND QB-461.2)
QB-203.3 The brazing process must be compatible,
and the brazing filler metals, such as defined in the specifications of Section II, Part C, must be suitable for their use
in specific flow positions. A brazer or brazing operator
making and passing the BPS qualification test is thereby
qualified for the flow position tested (see QB-301.2).
TYPE OF TESTS REQUIRED
QB-202.1 Tests. The type and number of test specimens which shall be tested to qualify a brazing procedure
are given in QB-451, and shall be removed in a manner similar to that shown in QB-463. If any test specimen required by QB-451 fails to meet the applicable acceptance
criteria, the test coupon shall be considered as failed.
When it can be determined that the cause of failure is
not related to brazing parameters, another test coupon
may be brazed using identical brazing parameters. Alternatively, if adequate material of the original test coupon
QB-210
QB-211
PREPARATION OF TEST COUPON
BASE METAL AND FILLER METAL
The base metals and filler metals shall be one or more of
those listed in the BPS. The dimensions of the test assembly shall be sufficient to provide the required test
specimens.
237
2013 SECTION IX
QB-251.2 Essential Variables. Essential variables are
those in which a change, as described in the specific variables, is considered to affect the mechanical properties of
the brazement, and shall require requalification of the
BPS.
The base metals may consist of either plate, pipe, or
other product forms. Qualification in pipe also qualifies
for plate brazing, but not vice versa.
QB-212
TYPE AND DIMENSION OF JOINTS
The test coupon shall be brazed using a type of joint design proposed in the BPS for use in construction.
QB-250
QB-251
QB-251.3 Nonessential Variables. Nonessential variables are those in which a change, as described in the specific variables, may be made in the BPS without
requalification.
BRAZING VARIABLES
GENERAL
QB-251.1 Types of Variables for Brazing Procedure
Specification (BPS). Brazing variables (listed for each
brazing process in Tables QB-252 through QB-257) are
subdivided into essential and nonessential variables
(QB-401).
Table QB-252
Torch Brazing (TB)
252.1 Essential Variables
252.2 Nonessential Variables
QB-402 Base Metal
Paragraph
QB-402.1
QB-402.3
...
...
QB-403 Brazing Filler Metal
QB-403.1
QB-403.2
...
...
QB-406 Brazing Flux, Gas, or
Atmosphere
QB-406.1
QB-406.3
QB-407 Flow Position
QB-407.1
...
QB-408 Joint Design
QB-408.2
QB-408.4
...
...
QB-409 Postbraze Heat Treatment
QB-409.1
QB-409.2
QB-409.3
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
QB-410.1
QB-410.2
QB-410.3
QB-410.4
QB-410.5
QB-410 Technique
238
2013 SECTION IX
Table QB-253
Furnace Brazing (FB)
253.1 Essential Variables
253.2 Nonessential Variables
QB-402 Base Metal
Paragraph
QB-402.1
QB-402.3
...
...
QB-403 Brazing Filler Metal
QB-403.1
QB-403.2
...
...
QB-404 Brazing Temperature
QB-404.1
...
QB-406 Brazing Flux, Gas, or
Atmosphere
QB-406.1
QB-406.2
...
...
QB-407 Flow Position
QB-407.1
...
QB-408 Joint Design
QB-408.2
QB-408.4
...
...
QB-409 Postbraze Heat Treatment
QB-409.1
QB-409.2
QB-409.3
...
...
...
...
...
QB-410.1
QB-410.2
QB-410 Technique
Table QB-254
Induction Brazing (IB)
254.1 Essential Variables
254.2 Nonessential Variables
QB-402 Base Metal
Paragraph
QB-402.1
QB-402.3
...
...
QB-403 Brazing Filler Metal
QB-403.1
QB-403.2
...
...
QB-404 Brazing Temperature
QB-404.1
...
QB-406 Brazing Flux, Gas, or
Atmosphere
QB-406.1
...
QB-407 Flow Position
QB-407.1
...
QB-408 Joint Design
QB-408.2
QB-408.4
...
...
QB-409 Postbraze Heat Treatment
QB-409.1
QB-409.2
QB-409.3
...
...
...
...
...
QB-410.1
QB-410.2
QB-410 Technique
239
2013 SECTION IX
Table QB-255
Resistance Brazing (RB)
255.1 Essential Variables
255.2 Nonessential Variables
QB-402 Base Metal
Paragraph
QB-402.1
QB-402.3
...
...
QB-403 Brazing Filler Metal
QB-403.1
QB-403.2
...
...
QB-404 Brazing Temperature
QB-404.1
...
QB-406 Brazing Flux, Gas, or
Atmosphere
QB-406.1
...
QB-407 Flow Position
QB-407.1
...
QB-408 Joint Design
QB-408.2
...
QB-408.4
...
QB-409.1
...
QB-409.2
...
QB-409.3
...
...
...
QB-410.1
QB-410.2
QB-409 Postbraze Heat Treatment
QB-410 Technique
Table QB-256
Dip Brazing — Salt or Flux Bath (DB)
256.1 Essential Variables
256.2 Nonessential Variables
QB-402 Base Metal
Paragraph
QB-402.1
QB-402.3
...
...
QB-403 Brazing Filler Metal
QB-403.1
QB-403.2
...
...
QB-404 Brazing Temperature
QB-404.1
...
QB-406 Brazing Flux, Gas, or
Atmosphere
QB-406.1
...
QB-407 Flow Position
QB-407.1
...
QB-408 Joint Design
QB-408.2
QB-408.4
...
...
QB-409 Postbraze Heat Treatment
QB-409.1
QB-409.2
QB-409.3
...
...
...
...
...
QB-410.1
QB-410.2
QB-410 Technique
240
2013 SECTION IX
Table QB-257
Dip Brazing — Molten Metal Bath (DB)
257.1 Essential Variables
257.2 Nonessential Variables
QB-402 Base Metal
Paragraph
QB-402.1
QB-402.3
...
...
QB-403 Brazing Filler Metal
QB-403.1
QB-403.2
...
...
QB-404 Brazing Temperature
QB-404.1
...
QB-406 Brazing Flux, Gas, or
Atmosphere
QB-406.1
...
QB-407 Flow Position
QB-407.1
...
QB-408 Joint Design
QB-408.2
QB-408.4
...
...
QB-409 Postbraze Heat Treatment
QB-409.1
QB-409.2
QB-409.3
...
...
...
...
...
QB-410.1
QB-410.2
QB-410 Technique
241
2013 SECTION IX
ARTICLE XIII
BRAZING PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATIONS
ð13Þ
QB-300
GENERAL
All test specimens shall meet the requirements prescribed in QB-170 or QB-180, as applicable. Tests for brazing operators shall meet the requirements of QB-305.
QB-300.1 This Article lists the brazing processes separately, with the essential variables which apply to brazer and brazing operator performance qualifications.
The brazer qualification is limited by the essential variables given for each brazing process. These variables are
listed in QB-350, and are defined in Article XIV, Brazing
Data. The brazing operator qualification is limited by the
essential variables given in QB-350 for each brazing
process.
QB-301
QB-302.2 Test Coupons in Pipe. For test coupons
made in pipe, specimens shall be removed as shown in
Figure QB-463.2(c) at approximately 180 deg apart.
QB-302.3 Combination of Base Metal Thicknesses.
When joints are brazed between two base metals of different thicknesses, a performance qualification shall be made
for the applicable combination of thicknesses, even though
qualification tests have been made for each of the individual base metals brazed to itself. The range of thickness
of each of the base metals shall be determined individually
per QB-452.
TESTS
QB-301.1 Intent of Tests. The performance qualification tests are intended to determine the ability of brazers
and brazing operators to make sound braze joints.
QB-303
QB-301.2 Qualification Tests. Each organization
shall qualify each brazer or brazing operator for each brazing process to be used in production brazing. The performance qualification test shall be brazed in accordance
with one of any of his qualified Brazing Procedure Specifications (BPS).
The brazer or brazing operator who prepares the BPS
qualification test coupons is also qualified within the limits of the performance qualifications, listed in QB-304 for
brazers and in QB-305 for brazing operators. He is qualified only for the positions tested in the procedure qualification in accordance with QB-407.
(See Figures QB-461.1 and QB-461.2)
QB-303.1 For plate, qualification in the flat‐flow,
vertical‐upflow, or horizontal‐flow positions shall qualify
for the vertical‐downflow position.
QB-303.2 For pipe, qualification in either the
horizontal‐flow or vertical‐upflow position shall qualify
for the vertical‐downflow position.
QB-303.3 Qualification in pipe shall qualify for plate,
but not vice versa. Horizontal‐flow in pipe shall qualify for
flat‐flow in plate.
QB-303.4 Special Positions. An organization who
does production brazing in a special orientation may make
the tests for performance qualification in this specific orientation. Such qualifications are valid only for the flow
positions actually tested, except that an angular deviation
of ±15 deg is permitted in the inclination of the braze
plane, as defined in Figures QB-461.1 and QB-461.2.
QB-301.3 Identification of Brazers and Brazing Operators. Each qualified brazer and brazing operator shall
be assigned an identifying number, letter, or symbol by
the organization, which shall be used to identify the work
of that brazer or brazing operator.
QB-301.4 Record of Tests. The record of Brazer or
Brazing Operator Performance Qualification (BPQ) tests
shall include the essential variables (QB-350), the type
of tests and the test results, and the ranges qualified in accordance with QB-452 for each brazer and brazing operator. A suggested form for these records is given in
Form QB-484 (see Nonmandatory Appendix B).
QB-302
LIMITS OF QUALIFIED POSITIONS
QB-304
BRAZERS
Each brazer who brazes under the rules of this Code
shall have passed the tests prescribed in QB-302 for performance qualifications.
A brazer qualified to braze in accordance with one qualified BPS is also qualified to braze in accordance with
other qualified BPSs, using the same brazing process,
within the limits of the essential variables of QB-350.
TYPE OF TEST REQUIRED
QB-302.1 Test Specimens. The type and number of
test specimens required shall be in accordance with
QB-452, and shall be removed in a manner similar to that
shown in QB-463.
242
2013 SECTION IX
QB-305
BRAZING OPERATORS
QB-322
RENEWAL OF QUALIFICATION
The brazing operator who prepares brazing procedure
qualification test specimens meeting requirements of
QB-451 is thereby qualified. Alternatively, each brazing
operator who brazes on vessels constructed under the
rules of this Code shall be qualified for each combination
of essential variables under which brazing is performed
using semiautomatic or automatic processes (such as the
resistance, induction, or furnace processes) as follows:
(a) A typical joint or workmanship coupon embodying
the requirements of a qualified brazing procedure shall be
brazed and sectioned. Typical joints are shown in
Figure QB-462.5.
(b) In order to ensure that the operator can carry out
the provisions of the brazing procedure, the test sections
required in (a) shall meet the requirements of QB-452.
Renewal of qualification of a performance qualification
is required
(a) when a brazer or brazing operator has not used the
specific brazing process for a period of 6 months or more,
or
(b) when there is a specific reason to question his ability to make brazes that meet the specification. Renewal of
qualification for a specific brazing process under (a) may
be made with specific brazing process by making only
one test joint (plate or pipe) with all the essential variables
used on any one of the brazer’s or brazing operator’s previous qualification test joints. This will reestablish the brazer’s or brazing operator’s qualification for all variables
for which he had previously qualified with the specific
brazing process.
QB-310
QB-350
QUALIFICATION TEST COUPONS
QB-310.1 Test Coupons. The test coupons may be
plate, pipe, or other product forms. The dimensions of
the test coupon and length of braze shall be sufficient to
provide the required test specimens.
QB-351
QB-310.3 Base Metals. When a brazer or brazing operator is to be qualified, the test coupon shall be base metal of the P‐Number or P‐Numbers to be joined in
production brazing.
QB-321
GENERAL
A brazer or brazing operator shall be requalified whenever a change is made in one or more of the essential variables for each brazing process, as follows:
(a) Torch Brazing (TB)
(b) Furnace Brazing (FB)
(c) Induction Brazing (IB)
(d) Resistance Brazing (RB)
(e) Dip Brazing (DB)
QB-310.2 Braze Joint. The dimensions of the braze
joint at the test coupon used in making qualification tests
shall be the same as those in the Brazing Procedure Specification (BPS).
QB-320
BRAZING VARIABLES FOR BRAZERS
AND BRAZING OPERATORS
QB-351.1 Essential Variables — Manual, Semiautomatic, and Machine Brazing.
(a) QB-402 Base Metal
(1) QB-402.2
(2) QB-402.3
(b) QB-403 Brazing Filler Metal
(1) QB-403.1
(2) QB-403.2
(c) QB-407 Flow Position
(1) QB-407.1
(d) QB-408 Joint Design
(1) QB-408.1
(2) QB-408.3
(e) QB-410 Technique
(1) QB-410.5
RETESTS AND RENEWAL OF
QUALIFICATION
RETESTS
A brazer or brazing operator who fails to meet the requirements for one or more of the test specimens prescribed in QB-452 may be retested under the following
conditions.
QB-321.1 Immediate Retest. When an immediate retest is made, the brazer or brazing operator shall make two
consecutive test coupons for each position which he has
failed, all of which shall pass the test requirements.
QB-351.2 Essential Variables — Automatic.
(a) A change from automatic to machine brazing.
(b) A change in brazing process.
QB-321.2 Further Training. When the brazer or brazing operator has had further training or practice, a complete retest shall be made for each position on which he
failed to meet the requirements.
243
2013 SECTION IX
ARTICLE XIV
BRAZING DATA
QB-400
QB-401
VARIABLES
QB-403.2 A change in filler metal from one product
form to another (for example, from preformed ring to
paste).
GENERAL
QB-401.1 Each brazing variable described in this Article is applicable as an essential or nonessential variable
for procedure qualification when referenced in QB-250
for each specific process. Essential variables for performance qualification are referenced in QB-350 for each specific brazing process. A change from one brazing process
to another brazing process is an essential variable and requires requalification.
QB-402
QB-404
QB-406
BRAZING FLUX, FUEL GAS, OR
ATMOSPHERE
QB-406.1 The addition or deletion of brazing flux or a
change in AWS classification of the flux. Nominal chemical
composition or the trade name of the flux may be used as
an alternative to the AWS classification.
BASE METAL
QB-402.1 A change from a base metal listed under
one P‐Number in Table QW/QB-422 to any of the
following:
(a) a metal listed under another P‐Number
(b) a n y o t h e r b a s e m e t a l n o t l i s t e d i n
Table QW/QB-422
The brazing of dissimilar metals need not be requalified
if each base metal involved is qualified individually for the
same brazing filler metal, flux, atmosphere, and process.
Similarly, the brazing of dissimilar metals qualifies for
the individual base metal brazed to itself and for the same
brazing filler metal, flux, atmosphere, and process, provided the requirements of QB-153.1(a) are met.
QB-406.2 A change in the furnace atmosphere from
one basic type to another type. For example
(a) reducing to inert
(b) carburizing to decarburizing
(c) hydrogen to disassociated ammonia
QB-406.3
QB-407
A change in the type of fuel gas(es).
FLOW POSITION
QB-407.1 The addition of other brazing positions than
those already qualified (see QB-120 through QB-124,
QB-203 for procedure, and QB-303 for performance).
(a) If the brazing filler metal is preplaced or facefed
from outside the joint, then requalification is required in
accordance with the positions defined in Figures
QB-461.1 and QB-461.2 under the conditions of QB-120
through QB-124.
(b) If the brazing filler metal is preplaced in a joint in a
manner that major flow does occur, then requalification is
required in accordance with the positions defined in Figures QB-461.1 and QB-461.2 under the conditions of
QB-120 through QB-124.
(c) If the brazing filler metal is preplaced in a joint so
that there is no major flow, then the joint may be brazed
in any position without requalification.
QB-402.2 A change from a base metal listed under
one P‐Number in Table QW/QB-422 to any of the
following:
(a) a metal listed under another P‐Number
(b) any other metal not listed in Table QW/QB-422
The brazing of dissimilar metals need not be requalified
if each base metal involved is qualified individually for the
same brazing filler metal, flux, atmosphere, and process.
Similarly, the brazing of dissimilar metals qualifies for
the individual base metal brazed to itself and for the same
brazing filler metal, flux, atmosphere, and process.
QB-402.3 A change in base metal thickness beyond
the range qualified in QB-451 for procedure qualification,
or QB-452 for performance qualification.
QB-403
BRAZING TEMPERATURE
QB-404.1 A change in brazing temperature to a value
outside the range specified in the BPS.
QB-408
JOINT DESIGN
QB-408.1 A change in the joint type, i.e., from a butt to
a lap or socket, from that qualified. For lap or socket joints,
an increase in lap length of more than 25% from the overlap used on the brazer performance qualification test coupon (a decrease in overlap is permitted without
requalification).
BRAZING FILLER METAL
QB-403.1 A change from one F‐Number in
Table QB-432 to any other F‐Number, or to any other filler
metal not listed in Table QB-432.
244
2013 SECTION IX
QB-409.3 For a procedure qualification test coupon
receiving a postbraze heat treatment in which the upper
transformation temperature is exceeded, the maximum
qualified thickness for production brazements is 1.1 times
the thickness of the test coupon.
QB-408.2 A change in the joint clearances to a value
outside the range specified in the BPS and as recorded
in the PQR.
QB-408.3 A change in the joint clearances to a value
outside the range specified in the BPS.
QB-408.4 A change in the joint type, e.g., from a butt
to a lap or socket, from that qualified. For lap and socket
joints, a decrease in overlap length from the overlap used
on the procedure qualification test coupon (an increase in
overlap is permitted without requalification).
QB-409
QB-410
TECHNIQUE
QB-410.1 A change in the method of preparing the
base metal, i.e., method of precleaning the joints (for example, from chemical cleaning to cleaning by abrasive or
mechanical means).
POSTBRAZE HEAT TREATMENT
QB-409.1 A separate procedure qualification is required for each of the following:
(a) For P‐Nos. 101 and 102 materials, the following
postbraze heat treatment conditions apply:
(1) no postbraze heat treatment
(2) postbraze heat treatment below the lower transformation temperature
(3) postbraze heat treatment above the upper transformation temperature (e.g., normalizing)
(4) postbraze heat treatment above the upper transformation temperature followed by heat treatment below
the lower transformation temperature (e.g., normalizing
or quenching followed by tempering)
(5) postbraze heat treatment between the upper and
lower transformation temperatures
(b) For all other materials, the following post weld heat
treatment conditions apply:
(1) no postbraze heat treatment
(2) postbraze heat treatment within a specified temperature range
QB-410.2 A change in the method of postbraze cleaning (for example, from chemical cleaning to cleaning by
wire brushing or wiping with a wet rag).
QB-410.3 A change in the nature of the flame (for example, a change from neutral or slightly reducing).
QB-410.4
A change in the brazing tip sizes.
QB-410.5 A change from manual to machine or semi- ð13Þ
automatic torch brazing, and vice versa.
QB-420
P‐NUMBERS
(See Part QW, Welding — QW-420)
QB-430
QB-431
F‐NUMBERS
GENERAL
The following F‐Number grouping of brazing filler metals in Table QB-432 is based essentially on their usability
characteristics, which fundamentally determine the ability
of brazers and brazing operators to make satisfactory
brazements with a given filler metal. This grouping is
made to reduce the number of brazing procedure and performance qualifications, where this can logically be done.
The grouping does not imply that filler metals within a
group may be indiscriminately substituted for a filler metal which was used in the qualification test without consideration of the compatibility from the standpoint of
metallurgical properties, design, mechanical properties,
postbraze heat treatment, and service requirements.
QB-409.2 A change in the postbraze heat treatment
(see QB-409.1) temperature and time range requires a
PQR.
The procedure qualification test shall be subjected to
postbraze heat treatment essentially equivalent to that encountered in the fabrication of production brazements, including at least 80% of the aggregate time at temperature
(s). The postbraze heat treatment total time(s) at temperature(s) may be applied in one heating cycle.
245
2013 SECTION IX
Table QB-432
F‐Numbers
Grouping of Brazing Filler Metals for Procedure and Performance Qualification SFA-5.8
QB
F‐No.
432.1
101
BAg‐1
BAg‐1a
BAg‐8
BAg‐8a
BAg‐22
BAg‐23
BVAg‐0
BVAg‐8
BVAg‐8b
BVAg‐30
432.2
102
BAg‐2
BAg‐2a
BAg‐3
BAg‐4
BAg‐5
BAg‐6
BAg‐7
BAg‐9
BAg‐10
BAg‐13
BAg‐13a
BAg‐18
BAg‐19
BAg‐20
BAg‐21
BAg‐24
BAg‐26
BAg‐27
BAg‐28
BAg‐33
BAg‐34
BAg‐35
BAg‐36
BAg‐37
BVAg‐6b
BVAg‐8
BVAg‐8a
BVAg‐18
BVAg‐29
BVAg‐31
BVAg‐32
432.3
103
BCuP‐2
BCuP‐3
BCuP‐4
BCuP‐5
BCuP‐6
BCuP‐7
BCuP‐8
BCuP‐9
432.4
104
BAlSi‐2
BAlSi‐3
BAlSi‐4
BAlSi‐5
BAlSi‐7
BAlSi‐9
BAlSi‐11
246
AWS Classification No.
2013 SECTION IX
Table QB-432
F‐Numbers
Grouping of Brazing Filler Metals for Procedure and Performance Qualification SFA-5.8 (Cont'd)
QB
F‐No.
432.5
105
BCu‐1
BCu‐1a
BCu‐2
BCu‐3
BVCu‐1a
BVCu‐1b
432.6
106
RBCuZn‐A
RBCuZn‐B
RBCuZn‐C
RBCuZn‐D
432.7
107
BNi‐1
BNi‐1a
BNi‐2
BNi‐3
BNi‐4
BNi‐5
BNi‐5a
BNi‐5b
BNi‐6
BNi‐7
BNi‐8
BNi‐9
BNi‐10
BNi‐11
BNi‐12
BNi‐13
432.8
108
BAu‐1
BAu‐2
BAu‐3
BAu‐4
BAu‐5
BAu‐6
BVAu‐2
BVAu‐3
BVAu‐4
BVAu‐7
BVAu‐8
BVAu‐9
BVAu‐10
432.9
109
BMg‐1
432.10
110
BCo‐1
432.11
111
BVPd‐1
247
AWS Classification No.
2013 SECTION IX
QB-450
QB-451
SPECIMENS
PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION SPECIMENS
Table QB-451.1
Tension Tests and Transverse‐Bend Tests — Butt and Scarf Joints
Range of Thickness of
Materials Qualified by
Test Plate or Pipe, in.
(mm)
Thickness T of Test Coupon as
Brazed, in. (mm)
Less than 1/8 (3)
/8 to 3/8 (3 to 10), incl.
Over 3/8 (10)
1
Min.
Max.
0.5T
1
/16 (1.5)
3
/16 (5)
2T
2T
2T
Type and Number of Test Specimens
Required
Tension
[Note (1)]
2
2
2 [Note (3)]
First
Surface
Bend
[Note
(2)]
Second
Surface
Bend
[Note
(2)]
2
2
2
2
2
2
NOTES:
(1) For specimen dimensions, see Figure QB-462.1(a) for plate specimens, or Figure QB-462.1(b)for pipe specimens.
For pipe specimens not greater than NPS 3 (DN 75), full section testing may be substituted; see
Figure QB-462.1(e).
(2) For specimen dimensions, see Figure QB-462.2(a). For specimen removal, see Figure QB-463.1(a) for plate coupons, or Figure QB-463.1(e) for pipe coupons.
(3) See QB-151 for details on multiple specimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm).
Table QB-451.2
Tension Tests and Longitudinal Bend Tests — Butt and Scarf Joints
Range of Thickness of
Materials Qualified by
Test Plate or Pipe, in.
(mm)
Thickness T of Test Coupon as
Brazed, in. (mm)
Less than 1/8 (3)
/8 to 3/8 (3 to 10), incl.
Over 3/8 (10)
1
Min.
Max.
0.5T
1
/16 (1.5)
3
/16 (5)
2T
2T
2T
Type and Number of Test Specimens
Required
Tension
[Note (1)]
2
2
2 [Note (3)]
First
Surface
Bend
[Note
(2)]
Second
Surface
Bend
[Note
(2)]
2
2
2
2
2
2
NOTES:
(1) For specimen dimensions, see Figure QB-462.1(a) for plate specimens, or Figure QB-462.1(b)for pipe specimens.
For pipe specimens not greater than NPS 3 (DN 75), full section testing may be substituted; see
Figure QB-462.1(e).
(2) For specimen dimensions, see Figures QB-462.2(b) and QB-463.1(b) for specimen removal.
(3) See QB-151 for details on multiple specimens when coupon thicknesses are over 1 in. (25 mm).
248
2013 SECTION IX
Table QB-451.3
Tension Tests and Peel Tests — LAP Joints
Thickness T of Test
Coupon as Brazed, in.
(mm)
Less than 1/8 (3)
1
/8 to 3/8 (3 to 10), incl.
Over 3/8 (10)
Range of Thickness of
Materials Qualified by Test
Plate or Pipe, in. (mm)
Min.
Type and Number of Test
Specimens Required [Note (1)]
Max.
Tension
[Note (2)]
Peel [Note
(3)] and [Note
(4)]
2T
2T
2T
2
2
2
2
2
2
0.5T
1
/16 (1.5)
3
/16 (5)
NOTES:
(1) When materials of a representative geometry and thickness are not available to prepare butt or lap
joint test coupons, workmanship coupons may be prepared and examined per QB-451.5 to establish
the range of thickness of base metal qualified. When this is done, the properties of the joint shall be
validated using butt or lap joint test coupons of any thickness.
(2) For specimen dimensions, see Figure QB-462.1(c). For pipe specimens not greater than NPS 3 (DN 75),
full section testing may be substituted; see Figure QB-462.1(e).
(3) For peel specimens, see Figure QB-462.3 for specimen dimensions, and Figure QB-463.1(d) for specimen removal.
(4) Sectioning tests may be substituted for peel tests. For section specimens, see Figure QB-462.4 for specimen dimensions, and Figure QB-463.1(c) for specimen removal.
Table QB-451.4
Tension Tests and Section Tests — Rabbet Joints
Thickness T of Test
Coupon as Brazed, in.
(mm)
Less than 1/8 (3)
/8 to 3/8 (3 to 10), incl.
Over 3/8 (10)
1
Range of Thickness of
Materials Qualified by Test
Plate or Pipe, in. (mm)
Type and Number of Test
Specimens Required
Min.
Max.
Tension
[Note (1)]
Tension [Note
(2)]
0.5T
1
/16 (1.5)
3
/16 (5)
2T
2T
2T
2
2
2
2
2
2
NOTES:
(1) For specimen dimensions, see Figure QB-462.1(c). For pipe specimens not greater than NPS 3 (DN
75), full section testing may be substituted; see Figure QB-462.1(e).
(2) For specimen dimensions, see Figures QB-462.4 and QB-463.1(c) for specimen removal.
249
2013 SECTION IX
Table QB-451.5
Section Tests — Workmanship Coupon Joints
Range of Thickness of Materials
Qualified by Test Plate or Pipe, in.
(mm)
Thickness T of Test
Coupon as Brazed, in.
(mm)
Less than 1/8 (3)
/8 to 3/8 (3 to 10), incl.
Over 3/8 (10)
1
Type and Number of
Test Specimens
Required
Min.
Max.
Section, QB‐462.5
[Note (1)]
0.5T
/16 (1.5)
3
/16 (5)
2T
2T
2T
2
2
2
1
NOTE:
(1) This test in itself does not constitute procedure qualification but must be validated by conductance of
tests of butt or lap joints as appropriate. For joints connecting tension members, such as the stay or partition type in QB‐462.5, the validation data may be based upon butt joints; for joints connecting members
in shear, such as saddle or spud joints, the validation data may be based on lap joints.
250
2013 SECTION IX
QB-452
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION SPECIMENS
Table QB-452.1
Peel or Section Tests — Butt, Scarf, Lap, Rabbet Joints
Range of Thickness of Materials
Qualified by Test Plate or Pipe, in.
(mm)
Min.
Max.
Peel, QB‐462.3 or
section, QB-462.4 [Note
(1)], [Note (2)], and
[Note (3)]
0.5T
1
/16 (1.5)
3
/16 (5)
2T
2T
2T
2
2
2
Thickness T of Test
Coupon as Brazed, in.
(mm)
Less than 1/8 (3)
1
/8 to 3/8 (3 to 10), incl.
Over 3/8 (10)
Type and Number of
Test Specimens
Required
NOTES:
(1) Sectioning tests may be substituted for the peel test when the peel test is impractieal to perform (e.g.,
when the strength of the brazing filler metal is equal to or greater than the strength of the base metals).
(2) For specimen dimensions, see Figure QB-462.3 for peel test specimens or Figure QB-462.4 for section
specimens.
(3) For specimen removal, see Figure QB-463.2(a) for section specimens or Figure QB-463.2(b) for peel specimens from plate coupons, or Figure QB-463.2(c) for pipe coupons.
Table QB-452.2
Section Tests — Workmanship Specimen Joints
Range of Thickness of Materials
Qualified by Test Plate or Pipe, in.
(mm)
Thickness T of Test
Coupon as Brazed, in.
(mm)
1
Less than /8 (3)
/8 to 3/8 (3 to 10), incl.
Over 3/8 (10)
1
Type and Number of
Test Specimens
Required
Min.
Max.
Section, QB‐462.5
0.5T
/16 (1.5)
3
/16 (5)
2T
2T
2T
1
1
1
1
251
2013 SECTION IX
QB-460
GRAPHICS
Figure QB-461.1
Flow Positions
A
45 deg
(1)
(3)
C
C
C
Flat Flow
L
C
(2)
(4)
(5)
Flat Flow
B
45 deg
(3)
(1)
C
Flow
L
(2)
(4)
C
C
Vertical Downflow
C
C
(3)
(1)
C
L
Flow
(2)
C
(4)
45 deg
Vertical Upflow
D
45 deg
(2)
(1)
C
45 deg
Flow
C
L
C
Horizontal Flow
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) C = joint clearance
(b) L = length of lap or thickness
252
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-461.2
Test Flow Positions
A
15 deg
(1)
(3)
C
C
C
Flat Flow
L
C
(2)
(4)
(5)
Flat Flow
B
15 deg
(3)
(1)
C
Flow
L
(2)
C
(4)
C
Vertical Downflow
C
C
(3)
(1)
C
L
Flow
(2)
C
(4)
15 deg
Vertical Upflow
D
15 deg
(1)
(2)
C
15 deg
Flow
C
L
C
Horizontal Flow
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) C = joint clearance
(b) L = length of lap or thickness
253
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-462.1(a)
Tension — Reduced Section for Butt and Scarf Joints — Plate
2 in.
(50 mm) R
10 in. (250 mm)
approx. [Note (1)]
1/ in. (6 mm)
4
1/ in. (6 mm)
4
Edge of joint
3/ in. (19 mm)
4
1/ in. (6 mm)
4
This section machined,
preferably by milling
10 in. (250 mm) approx. [Note (1)]
21/4 in.
2 in. (50 mm) R
(57 mm)
A, min.
A, min.
min.
[Note (2)]
[Note (2)]
0.5 in.
(13 mm)
diameter
1 in.
(25 mm)
1/
4
3/
This section machined,
preferably by milling
2 in. (50 mm)
approx. [Note (1)]
Alternate Pin-Loaded Specimen
NOTES:
(1) Length may vary to fit testing machine.
(2) A = greater of 1/4 in. (6 mm) or 2T
254
in. (6 mm)
in. (19 mm)
4
1/
4
in. (6 mm)
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-462.1(b)
Tension — Reduced Section for Butt, Lap, and Scarf Joints — Pipe
2 in.
(50 mm) R
10 in. (250 mm)
approx. [Note (1)]
1/ in. (6 mm)
4
1/ in. (6 mm)
4
Edge of joint
3/ in. (19 mm)
4
1/ in. (6 mm)
4
This section machined,
preferably by milling
10 in. (250 mm) approx. [Note (1)]
21/4 in.
2 in. (50 mm) R
(57 mm)
A, min.
A, min.
min.
[Note (2)]
[Note (2)]
0.5 in.
(13 mm)
diameter
1 in.
(25 mm)
1/
4
3/
in. (19 mm)
4
This section machined,
preferably by milling
1/
4
2 in. (50 mm)
approx. [Note (1)]
Alternate Pin-Loaded Specimen
X
[Note (3)]
As specified
by design
T
T
For Lap Joints
NOTES:
(1) Length may vary to fit testing machine.
(2) A = greater of 1/4 in. (6 mm) or 2T
(3) X = test specimen overlap
255
in. (6 mm)
in. (6 mm)
Machine the minimum amount
needed to obtain plane parallel
faces over the 3/4 in. (19 mm)
wide reduced section
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-462.1(c)
Tension — Reduced Section for Lap and Rabbet Joints — Plate
10 in. (250 mm) approx. [Note (1)]
21/4 in.
2 in. (50 mm) R
(57 mm)
A, min.
A, min.
min.
[Note (2)]
[Note (2)]
As specified
by design
1/
4
in. (6 mm)
X
X
T min.
T
3/
in. (19 mm)
4
For Rabbet Joints
As specified
by design X
X
This section machined,
preferably by milling
1/
4
in. (6 mm)
T min.
T
10 in. (250 mm) approx. [Note (1)]
21/4 in.
2 in. (50 mm) R
(57 mm)
A, min.
A, min.
min.
[Note (2)]
[Note (2)]
0.5 in.
(13 mm)
diameter
1 in.
(25 mm)
1/
4
T
T
3/
in. (19 mm)
4
This section machined,
preferably by milling
1/
4
in. (6 mm)
2 in. (50 mm)
approx. [Note (1)]
Alternate Pin-Loaded Specimen
X
[Note (3)]
X
in. (6 mm)
As specified
by design
T
T
For Lap Joints
NOTES:
(1) Length may vary to fit testing machine.
(2) A = greater of 1/4 in. (6 mm) or 2T
(3) X = test specimen overlap
256
Alternate Designs
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-462.1(e)
Tension — Full Section for Lap, Scarf, and Butt Joints — Small Diameter Pipe
257
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-462.1(f)
Support Fixture for Reduced‐Section Tension Specimens
Jaws of testing machine
2
3
1
1
4
5
6
4
2
3
3
Front View
1
Restrainer Bars
2
Spacers
3
Reduced-Section Tension Specimen
4
Bolts, Body-Bound
5
4 Locknuts
6
4 Nuts
Side View
GENERAL NOTE: The restraining fixture is intended to provide a snug
fit between the fixture and the contour of the tension specimen. The
fixture shall be tightened, but only to the point where a minimum of
0.001 in. (0.03 mm) clearance exists between the sides of the fixture
and the tension specimen.
258
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-462.2(a)
Transverse First and Second Surface Bends — Plate and Pipe
6 in. (150 mm) min.
y
y
11/2 in. (38 mm)
T
y
y
y, in. (mm)
T, in. (mm)
1/ – 3/ (1.5–10)
16
8
>3/8 ( >10)
T
T
Plate
Pipe
T
GENERAL NOTE: For the first surface bend specimens,
machine from the second surface as necessary until the
required thickness is obtained. For second surface bend
specimens, machine from the first surface as necessary
until the required thickness is obtained.
All ferrous and nonferrous materials
T
3/ (10)
8
Figure QB-462.2(b)
Longitudinal First and Second Surface Bends — Plate
T
y
6 in. (150 mm) min.
R
T
y
R = 1/8 in.
(3 mm) max.
11/2 in.
(38 mm)
y
T
T, in. (mm)
1/ – 3/ (1.5–10)
16
8
>3/8 ( >10)
y
T
GENERAL NOTE: For the first surface bend specimens,
machine from the second surface as necessary until the
required thickness is obtained. For second surface bend
specimens, machine from the first surface as necessary
until the required thickness is obtained.
y, in. (mm)
All ferrous and nonferrous materials
T
3/ (10)
8
259
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-462.3
Lap Joint Peel Specimen
10 in. (250 mm) approx.
[Note (1)]
11/2 in. (38 mm)
X
X = 4T min. or as
required by design
Section A
Z
Section B
T
Y
Fulcrum point
Approximately, or sufficient
for peeling purposes
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Flange Y may be omitted from Section B when “peeling” is to be accomplished in a
suitable tension machine.
(b) Specimen shall be brazed from side marked Z.
NOTE:
(1) Length may vary to fit testing machine.
ð13Þ
Figure QB-462.4
Lap Joint Section Specimen (see QB-181)
11/2
W=
in.
(38 mm)
Discard
this piece
1/
3
W
Section
specimen
1/
3
W
Discard
this piece
1/
3
W
X
Section A
Section B
T
11/2 in. (38 mm)
X = 4T min. or as required by design
Alternate for Rabbet Joint
GENERAL NOTE: Lap or socket joint specimens in the pipe and tube shall be sectioned by cutting the pipe or tube specimen in half lengthwise, and the cut edges of at least one-half prepared and examined.
260
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-462.5
Workmanship Coupons
NOTES:
(1) Workmanship coupons shall be 10 in. (250 mm) in length or represent one‐half the typical joint, whichever is less.
(2) Circular coupons shall be sectioned in half, and one‐half shall be used as the test specimen.
261
2013 SECTION IX
QB-463
ORDER OF REMOVAL
Figure QB-463.1(b)
Plates Procedure Qualification
Figure QB-463.1(a)
Plates Procedure Qualification
262
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-463.1(c)
Plates Procedure Qualification
Discard
this piece
Reduced section
tensile
specimen
Sectioning
specimen
Reduced section
tensile
specimen
Sectioning
specimen
Discard
this piece
Alternate Lap Joint
[Note (2)]
Alternate Lap Joint
[Note (2)]
Alternate Lap Joint
[Note (2)]
NOTES:
(1) Required for rabbet joints.
(2) The sectioning specimen in this view may be used as
an alternate to sectioning the peel test specimens of
QB-463.1(d) when the peel test cannot be used. This
section test specimen should be approximately 1/2 in.
(13 mm) wide.
Rabbet Joint
[Note (1)]
263
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-463.1(d)
Plates Procedure Qualification
264
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-463.1(e)
Pipe — Procedure Qualification
Top
Reduced section tensile
Specimen location No. 1
First surface bend
(if required)
Horizontal plane
Plane of cut
for halfsection
specimens
First surface bend
(if required)
Specimen location No. 2
Bottom
Reduced section tensile
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Figure shown is for coupons over 3 in. (75 mm) O.D. Locations No. 1 and 2 are for:
(1) second surface specimens for butt and scarf joints
(2) peel or section specimens for lap joints
(3) section specimens for rabbet joints
(b) For coupons 3 in. (75 mm) O.D. and smaller, two coupons shall be brazed and one specimen shall be removed from each coupon. If
brazed in the horizontal flow position, the specimen shall be taken at specimen location No. 1. Alternatively, each coupon shall be
cut longitudinally and the specimen shall consist of both sides of one half‐section of each coupon.
(c) When coupon is brazed in the horizontal flow position, specimens locations shall be as shown relative to the horizontal plane of the
coupon, and for half‐section specimens, plane of cut shall be oriented as shown relative to the horizontal plane of the coupon.
(d) When both ends of a coupling are brazed, each end is considered a separate test coupon.
265
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-463.2(a)
Plates Performance Qualification
Discard
this piece
Sectioning
specimen
Discard
this piece
Sectioning
specimen
Discard
this piece
Alternate Lap Joint
[Note (2)]
Alternate Lap Joint
[Note (2)]
Rabbet Joint
[Note (1)]
Alternate Lap Joint
[Note (2)]
Alternate Scarf Joint
[Note (2)]
NOTES:
(1) Required for rabbet joints.
(2) The sectioning specimen in this view may be used as
an alternate to sectioning the peel test specimens of
QB-463.2 (b) when the peel test cannot be used. This
section test specimen should be approximately 1/2 in.
(13 mm) wide.
Alternate Butt Joint
[Note (2)]
266
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-463.2(b)
Plates Performance Qualification
267
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-463.2(c)
Pipe Performance Qualification
Top
Specimen
location No. 1
Horizontal plane
Plane of
cut for
half-section
specimens
Specimen location No. 2
Bottom
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) For coupons over 3 in. (75 mm) O.D., one specimen
shall be removed from each location shown.
(b) For coupons 3 in. (75 mm) O.D. and smaller, two
coupons shall be brazed and one specimen
shall be removed from each coupon. If brazed in
the horizontal flow position, the specimen shall
be taken at specimen location No. 1. Alternatively,
each coupon shall be cut longitudinally and the
specimen shall be both sides of one half-section
of each coupon.
(c) When the coupon is brazed in the horizontal flow position,
specimen locations shall be as shown relative to the
horizontal plane of the coupon. For half-section
specimens, plane of cut shall be oriented as shown
relative to the horizontal plane of the coupon.
(d) When both ends of a coupling are brazed, each end
is considered a separate test coupon.
268
2013 SECTION IX
QB-466
TEST JIGS
Figure QB-466.1
Guided‐Bend Jig
Tapped hole to suit
testing machine
Hardened rollers 11/2 in. (38 mm) diameter
may be substituted for jig shoulders
As required
As required
3/
4
in. (19 mm)
Shoulders hardened
and greased
11/8
1/
4
3/
4
A
in. (19 mm)
6 3/4 in.
(170 mm)
in. (19 mm)
in. (29 mm)
in. (6 mm)
Plunger
3 in. min.
(75 mm)
2 in. min.
(50 mm)
3/
4
1/ in. (13 mm)
2
11/8 in. (28 mm)
3/ in. R
4
(19 mm)
1/
8
in. (3 mm)
B R
3/
4
in. (19 mm)
3/
4
in. (19 mm)
2 in. (50 mm)
C
Yoke
3 7/8 in. (97 mm)
Thickness of Specimen,
in. (mm)
3
/8 (10)
t
A,
in. (mm)
11/2 (38)
4t
B,
in. (mm)
3
/4 (19)
2t
269
D R
71/2 in. (190 mm)
9 in. (225 mm)
C,
in. (mm)
23/8 (60)
6t + 3.2
D,
in. (mm)
13/16 (30)
3t + 1.6
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QB-466.2
Guided‐Bend Roller Jig
Figure QB-466.3
Guided‐Bend Wrap Around Jig
T
A
Roller
Note (3)
T + 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) max.
B = 1/2 A
Notes (1), (2)
R min. = 3/4 in. (19 mm)
A
C
Notes (4), (5)
B = 1/2 A
R min.
Thickness of
Specimen,
in. (mm)
3
/8 (10)
t
A,
in. (mm)
1
1 /2 (38)
4t
B,
in. (mm)
3
/4 (19)
2t
Thickness of Specimen,
in. (mm)
C,
in. (mm)
3
/8 (10)
t
3
2 /8 (60)
6t + 1/8 (3)
A,
in. (mm)
11/2 (38)
4t
B,
in. (mm)
3
/4 (19)
2t
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Dimensions not shown are the option of the designer. The essential consideration is to have adequate rigidity so that the
jig parts will not spring.
(b) The specimen shall be firmly clamped on one end so that
there is no sliding of the specimen during the bending
operation.
(c) Test specimens shall be removed from the jig when the outer
roll has been removed 180 deg from the starting point.
GENERAL NOTE: The braze joint in the case of a transverse bend
specimen shall be completely within the bend portion of the specimen after testing.
NOTES:
(1) Either hardened and greased shoulders or hardened rollers
free to rotate shall be used.
(2) The shoulders of rollers shall have a minimum bearing surface
of 2 in. (50 mm) for placement of the specimen. The rollers
shall be high enough above the bottom of the jig so that the
specimens will clear the rollers when the ram is in the low
position.
(3) The ram shall be fitted with an appropriate base and provision
made for attachment to the testing machine, and shall be of a
sufficiently rigid design to prevent deflection and misalignment while making the bend test. The body of the ram may
be less than the dimensions shown in column A.
(4) If desired, either the rollers or the roller supports may be
made adjustable in the horizontal direction so that specimens
of t thickness may be tested on the same jig.
(5) The roller supports shall be fitted with an appropriate base designed to safeguard against deflection or misalignment and
equipped with means for maintaining the rollers centered
midpoint and aligned with respect to the ram.
270
PART QF
PLASTIC FUSING
ð13Þ
ARTICLE XXI
PLASTIC FUSING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
QF-100
SCOPE
organization shall perform and document the tests required by this Article to qualify the performance of fusing
machine operators for fusing operations.
The rules in this Part apply to the preparation and qualification of the fusing procedure specification (FPS), and
the performance qualification of fusing machine
operators.
QF-101
QF-103.2 Records. Each organization shall maintain a
record of the results of the mechanical testing performed
to satisfy the requirements for FPS and fusing machine operator performance qualifications.
FUSING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
(FPS)
A fusing procedure specification (FPS) used by an organization that will have responsible operational control of
production fusing shall be an FPS that has been qualified
by that organization in accordance with Article XXII, or it
shall be a standard fusing procedure specification (SFPS)
as defined in QF-201.2.
The FPS or SFPS specify the “variables” (including
ranges, if any) under which fusing must be performed.
The FPS prepared by the organization and the SFPS shall
address the applicable fusing process variables, both essential and nonessential, as provided in Article XXII for
production fusing.
QF-102
QF-110
Orientation categories for fused joints are illustrated in
Figure QF-461.1.
QF-120
TEST POSITIONS
Fused joints may be made in test coupons oriented in
any of the positions shown in Figure QF-461.2.
FUSING PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION
(FPQ)
Fusing machine operator performance qualification is
intended to verify the ability of the fusing machine operator to produce a soundly fused joint when following a qualified FPS. The fusing machine operator performance
qualification record (FPQ) documents the performance
test of the fusing machine operator, and the results of
the required mechanical tests.
QF-103
FUSED JOINT ORIENTATION
QF-130
DATA ACQUISITION AND
EVALUATION
QF-131
DATA ACQUISITION RECORD
REQUIREMENTS
The following fusing variables shall be recorded for
each fused test joint:
(a) heater surface temperature immediately before inserting the heater plate
(b) gauge pressure during the initial heat cycle
(c) gauge pressure and elapsed time during the heatsoak cycle
(d) heater removal (dwell) time
(e) gauge pressure and elapsed time during the fusing/
cool cycle
(f) drag pressure
(g) joint configuration
(h) pipe diameter and wall thickness
(i) type of HDPE material (specification and classification) and manufacturer
RESPONSIBILITY
QF-103.1 Fusing. Each organization shall conduct the
tests required in this Section to qualify the FPS and the
performance of the fusing machine operators who apply
these procedures. Alternatively, an organization may use
a n S F P S u nd e r t h e p r o v i si o ns o f Q F - 2 0 1 . 2. T h e
271
Copyrighted material licensed to ABS by Thomson Scientific, Inc. (www.techstreet.com). This copy downloaded on 2013-08-20 02:07:55 -0500 by authorized user ABS ABS.
No further reproduction or distribution is permitted.
2013 SECTION IX
2013 SECTION IX
(j) FPS used, operator identification, time, date, and fusing machine identification
(c) Visual examination results shall be recorded on the
PQR or FPQ.
QF-132
QF-142
DATA ACQUISITION RECORD REVIEW
The data acquisition record for each fused test joint
shall be compared to the FPS after completion. QF-485
provides a suggested format to document the data acquisition record review. The reviewer shall verify the
following:
(a) all data required by QF-131 was recorded
(b) interfacial fusing pressure was within the FPS range
(c) heater surface temperature recorded was within the
FPS range
(d) butt-fusing pressure applied during the fusing/cool
cycle was correctly calculated to include the drag pressure, fell within the FPS range for the applicable size
(e.g., pipe diameter), and agrees with the recorded hydraulic fusing pressure
(e) butt-fusing pressure was reduced to a value less
than or equal to the drag pressure at the beginning of
the heat soak cycle
(f) fusing machine was opened at the end of the heat
soak cycle, the heater was removed, and the ends brought
together at the fusing pressure within the time frame specified by the FPS
(g) cooling time at butt-fusing pressure met the minimum time specified by the FPS
If the recorded data is outside the limits of the FPS, the
joint is unacceptable.
QF-140
QF-141
ELEVATED TEMPERATURE SUSTAINED
PRESSURE TESTS FOR PIPE
Elevated temperature sustained pressure tests shall be
performed in accordance with ASTM D3035-08.
QF-143
BEND TESTS
These tests are designed to impart bending stresses to a
butt-fused plastic specimen to evaluate the soundness of
the fused joint.
QF-143.1
Reverse-Bend Test (RBT)
(a) Reverse-bend test specimens shall be cut to a minimum width of 1.5 times the test coupon thickness for testing and removed as shown in Figure QF-463(a).
(b) One test specimen shall be bent to place the inside
surface of the joint in tension, and the other test specimen
shall be bent to place the outside surface of the joint in
tension.
(c) The bending process shall ensure the ends of the
specimens are brought into contact with one another.
(d) Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM F2620-09,
Appendix X4.
(e) Test results shall be recorded on the PQR.
QF-143.2
Guided Side-Bend Test (GSBT)
QF-143.2.1 Significance and Use. This test is designed to impart a bending load on a specimen from a butt
fusion joint to evaluate its soundness. It is intended for
butt fusion joints of HDPE pipe with a wall thickness greater than 1.0 in. (25 mm).
EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS
VISUAL EXAMINATION
(a) All fused joints shall receive a visual examination of
all accessible surfaces of the fused joint.
(b) Acceptance Criteria (see Figure QF-462 for evaluation examples)
(1) There shall be no evidence of cracks or incomplete
fusing.
(2) J o i n t s s h a l l e x h i b i t p r o p e r f u s e d b e a d
configuration.
(3) Variations in upset bead heights on opposite sides
of the cleavage and around the circumference of fused
pipe joints are acceptable.
(4) The apex of the cleavage between the upset beads
of the fused joint shall remain above the base material
surface.
(5) The data record for the FPS or fusing machine operator performance qualification test shall be reviewed
and compared to the FPS to verify observance of the specified variables applied when completing the fused test
joint.
(6) Fused joints shall not display visible angular misalignment, and outside diameter mismatch shall be less
than 10% of the nominal wall thickness.
QF-143.2.2
Test Specimens
(a) Test specimens shall be removed from the fused test
coupon with the upset bead remaining on the outside and
inside surfaces. A strip having the full thickness of the test
coupon and measuring approximately 1 in. (25 mm) wide
and 18 in. (450 mm) long shall be removed along the longitudinal axis of the test coupon, with the joint located in
the approximate center of the strip. See Figure QF-463(b).
(b) Plane or machine the width down to 0.50 in. ± 03 in.
(13 mm ± 0.75 mm) with a smooth finish on both sides.
See Figure QF-463(c).
QF-143.2.3
Test Conditions
(a) Test Temperature. Conduct the GSBT at a temperature 60°F to 80°F (16°C to 27°C).
(b) Test speed. The elapsed time of the test shall be between 30 sec and 60 sec.
QF-143.2.4
Guided Side-Bend Test Procedure
QF-143.2.4.1 Jigs. Test specimens shall be bent in a
test jig consisting of a fixed member with two cross bars
to support the specimen while force is applied. The
272
2013 SECTION IX
hydraulic ram, used to supply the bending force, is also attached to the jig and has a ram attached to the end of the
cylinder. See Figure QF-463(d).
(e) Condition the test specimens at 73°F ± 4°F (23°C
± 2°C) for not less than 1 hr just prior to conducting the
test.
QF-143.2.4.2 Bend Procedure. Position the side-bend
test specimen with the butt fusion joint in the center of the
jig between the support mandrels. Position the ram in the
center of the fusion bead on the test specimen. Move the
ram slowly until it makes contact with the test specimen
and is positioned in line with the fusion bead. Begin to
apply the bending force and deflect the side-bend test
specimen. The test is complete when the test specimen
is bent to an angle of 60 deg ± 10 deg between the inside
surfaces of the specimen or until failure occurs. See
Figure QF-463(d).
QF-144.2
(a) Test Temperature. Conduct the high speed impact
test at a temperature of 73°F ± 4°F (23°C ± 2°C) unless
otherwise specified.
(b) Test Speed. The speed of testing shall be in accordance with Table QF-144.2 with a testing speed tolerance
of +0.5 in./sec to −1 in./sec (+13 mm/sec to −25 mm/sec).
Table QF-144.2
Testing Speed Requirements
QF-143.3 Acceptance Criteria. The test specimen
shall not break or exhibit cracking or fractures on the convex (outer) surface at the fusion interface during this test.
QF-144
Wall Thickness
HIGH-SPEED TENSILE IMPACT TEST
(HSTIT)
Testing Speed
≤ 1.25 in. (32 mm)
6 in./sec (150 mm/sec)
> 1.25 in. (32 mm)
4 in./sec (100 mm/sec)
QF-144.3
This test method is designed to impart tensile impact
energy to a butt-fused PE pipe specimen to evaluate its
ductility.
QF-144.1
Test Conditions
Test Procedure
(a) Set up the machine and set the speed of testing to
the rate specified in QF-144.2(b).
(b) Pin each specimen in the clevis tooling of the testing
machine, aligning the long axis of the specimen and the
tooling with the pulling direction of the test machine.
(c) Testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM
F2634.
(d) Evaluate the test specimen fracture to determine the
mode of failure, and note the results in the test record and
on the PQR.
Test Specimens
(a) Test specimens shall be removed from the fused test
coupon with the upset bead remaining on the outside diameter and inside diameter surfaces. Specimens for test
coupon thicknesses less than or equal to 2 in. (50 mm)
shall include the full wall thickness of the fused joint. Specimens for test coupon thicknesses 2 in. (50 mm) and
greater may be cut into approximately equal strips between 1 in. (25 mm) and 2.5 in. (64 mm) wide for testing
with each segment tested individually such that the full
cross section is tested.
(b) Test specimens shall be prepared by machining to
achieve the dimensions given in Figure QF-464, with the
upset beads remaining intact.
(c) A smooth surface free of visible flaws, scratches, or
imperfections shall remain on all faces of the reduced area
with no notches, gouges, or undercuts exceeding the dimensional tolerances given in ASTM F2634-07. Marks left
by coarse machining operations shall be removed, and the
surfaces shall be smoothed with abrasive paper (600 grit
or finer) with the sanding strokes applied parallel to the
longitudinal axis of the test specimen.
(d) Mark the test specimens in the area outside the hole
with the applicable specimen identification using a permanent indelible marker of a contrasting color, or an etching
tool.
QF-144.4 Test Record. The HSTIT shall be documented by preparing a test record that includes the following
information:
(a) testing speed applied
(b) testing temperature observed
(c) specimen dimension verification
(d) test machine calibration data
(e) test specimen identification
(f) test date
(g) test operator identification
(h) testing failure mode and acceptance/rejection
(i) test equipment identification
QF-144.5 Acceptance Criteria. Failure mode shall be
ductile, with no evidence of brittle failure at the fusion interface. See Figure QF-465, illustrations (a) through (d),
for evaluation examples.
273
2013 SECTION IX
ARTICLE XXII
FUSING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATIONS
QF-200
GENERAL
QF-201.4 Availability of the FPS or SFPS. The FPS or
SFPS used for production fusing shall be available for reference and reviewed by the Inspector when fused joints
are made.
Each organization shall prepare a written FPS as defined in QF-201.1, or assume responsibility for an SFPS
as defined in QF-201.2.
QF-201.5 Each organization who qualifies a FPS shall
prepare a procedure qualification record (PQR) that is defined as follows:
(a) Procedure Qualification Record (PQR). A record of
the range of essential variables documented during the
fusing of the test coupon(s) and the results of the required
visual and mechanical tests performed.
(b) Contents of the PQR. The completed PQR shall document the ranges for all essential variables listed in QF-250
during the fusing of the test coupon(s). Nonessential variables observed during the fusing of the test coupon may be
recorded at the organization’s option.
The PQR shall be certified by the organization to be a
true and accurate record of the variables recorded during
the fusing of the test coupon(s) and the required examinations and tests specified in QF-140.
(c) Changes to the PQR. Changes to the PQR are not permitted except for documented editorial corrections or
those utilizing addenda. An organization may be permitted
to fuse materials other than those used in the FPS qualification, when the alternative materials are assigned to a
material grouping in QF-420 whose fusing properties are
considered essentially identical. Additional information
may be incorporated into a PQR at a later date, provided
the information is substantiated as having been associated
with the original qualification conditions by lab records or
similar documented evidence. All changes to a PQR require recertification (including date) by the organization.
(d) Format of the PQR. The information required to be in
the PQR may be in any format, written or tabular, to fit the
needs of each organization, provided all essential variables outlined in QF-250 are included. The types and number of tests, and their results shall be reported on the PQR.
Form QF-483 has been provided as a guide for preparing
the PQR. When required, additional sketches or information may be attached or referenced to record the required
variables.
(e) Availability of the PQR. PQRs supporting an FPS to be
used in production fusing operations shall be available for
review by the inspector.
(f) Multiple FPSs with One PQR/Multiple PQRs with One
FPS. Several FPSs may be prepared from the qualification
test data recorded on a single PQR. A single FPS may
QF-201 PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
QF-201.1 Fusing Procedure Specification (FPS)
(a) Fusing Procedure Specification (FPS). A FPS is a written qualified fusing procedure prepared to provide direction to the fusing machine operator for making production
fused joints.
(b) Contents of the FPS. The completed FPS shall address
all of the essential and nonessential variables for each fusing process used in the FPS. The essential and nonessential
variables for fusing are listed in Table QF-254. The organization may include any other information in the FPS that
may be helpful in making a fused joint.
(c) Changes in the documented essential variables require requalification of the FPS.
QF-201.2
Standard Fusing Procedure
Specification (SFPS)
(a) Standard Fusing Procedure Specification (SFPS). A
fusing procedure specification that contains acceptable
polyethylene fusing variables based on standard industry
practice and testing as reported in the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI), Report TR-33-06, or ASTM F2620-09, Standard
Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyethylene Pipe and
Fittings. A SFPS may be used for production fusing by organizations without further qualification.
(b) Contents of the SFPS. The SFPS shall address all of
the essential and nonessential variables listed in QF-220.
The organization may include any additional information
in the SFPS that may be helpful in making a fused joint.
(c) Changes in the documented parameters of a SFPS
beyond the limits specified in QF-220 shall require the
qualification of an FPS.
QF-201.3 Format of the FPS or SFPS. The information required to be included in the FPS or SFPS may be
in any format, written or tabular, to fit the needs of each
organization, provided all essential and nonessential variables outlined in QF-250, or the parameters specified in
QF-220 as applicable, are addressed. Form QF-482 has
been provided as a guide for preparing the FPS or SFPS.
274
2013 SECTION IX
(b) For pipe having wall thickness greater than 2 in.
(50 mm), one set of test coupons shall be prepared using
pipe of at least 2 in. (50 mm) thickness but not less than
one-half the maximum thickness to be fused in production.
(c) Butt-fusing joint coupons shall be prepared in accordance with the FPS using the following combinations of
heater temperature ranges and interfacial pressure
ranges:
(1) high heater surface temperature and high interfacial pressure, five joints
(2) high heater surface temperature and low interfacial pressure, five joints
(3) low heater surface temperature and high interfacial pressure, five joints
(4) low heater surface temperature and low interfacial pressure, five joints
(d) Each fused joint shall be subject to visual examination per QF-141.
(e) Two fused joints of each combination shall be evaluated using the elevated temperature sustained pressure
tests for pipe specified in QF-142.
(f) Three fused joints of each combination described in
(c) shall be evaluated using the high speed tensile impact
test (HSTIT) specified in QF-144.
encompass the range of qualified essential variables represented by multiple PQRs supporting the qualified combination and range of essential variables.
QF-202 TYPE OF TESTS REQUIRED
QF-202.1 Mechanical Tests
QF-202.1.1 High-speed tensile impact test specimens
(HSTIT) shall be prepared in accordance with
Figure QF-464 and tested in accordance with QF-144.1.
The minimum number of specimens required to be tested
shall be as follows:
(a) for pipe specimens less than 4 NPS (100 mm): not
less than two specimens removed from fused pipe test
coupons at intervals of approximately 180 deg apart
(b) for pipe specimens 4 NPS (100 mm) and greater: not
less than four specimens removed from fused pipe test
coupons at intervals approximately 90 deg apart
(c) other product forms: not less than two specimens
removed from fused test coupons
QF-202.1.2 Elevated temperature sustained pressure
tests shall be conducted in accordance with QF-142.
QF-202.1.3 If any test specimen required by QF-202.1
fails to meet the applicable acceptance criteria, the test
coupon shall be considered unacceptable.
(a) When it can be determined that the cause of failure
is not related to incorrectly selected or applied fusing variables, additional test specimens may be removed as close
as practicable to the original specimen location to replace
the failed test specimens. If sufficient material is not available, another test coupon may be fused utilizing the original fusing parameters.
(b) When it has been determined that the test failure
was caused by one or more incorrectly selected or applied
essential variable(s), a new test coupon may be fused with
appropriate changes to the variable(s) that were determined to be the cause for test failure.
(c) When it is determined that the test failure was
caused by one or more fusing conditions other than essential variables, a new set of test coupons may be fused with
the appropriate changes to the fusing conditions that were
determined to be the cause for test failure. If the new test
passes, the fusing conditions that were determined to be
the cause for the previous test failure shall be addressed
by the organization to ensure that the required properties
are achieved in all fused production joints.
QF-202.2
QF-202.2.1
QF-203
LIMITS OF QUALIFIED POSITIONS FOR
PROCEDURES
Unless otherwise specified by the fusing variables
(QF-250), a procedure qualified in any position shown in
Figure QF-461.2 qualifies for all positions. A fusing machine operator making and passing the FPS qualification
test is qualified only for the position tested (See
QF-301.2).
QF-220
QF-221
STANDARD FUSING PROCEDURE
SPECIFICATION (SFPS)
SFPS FOR POLYETHYLENE FUSING
QF-221.1 Pipe Butt Fusing of Polyethylene. When
the fusing procedure is limited to the following parameters, procedure qualification testing is not required. If
the organization deviates from the conditions listed below,
procedure qualification testing in accordance with
QF-202.2 is required.
(a) The pipe material is limited to PE 2708, PE 3608,
and PE 4710.
(b) The axis of the pipe is limited to the horizontal position ±45 deg.
(c) The pipe ends shall be faced to establish clean, parallel mating surfaces that are perpendicular to the pipe
centerline on each pipe end, except for mitered joints.
When the ends are brought together at the drag pressure,
there shall be no visible gap.
Testing Procedure to Qualify the FPS
Polyethylene Pipe Butt Fusing
(a) For pipe having a wall thickness less than or equal to
2 in. (50 mm), one set of test coupons shall be prepared
using any thickness of pipe less than or equal to 2 in.
(50 mm) but not less than one-half the thickness of the
pipe to be fused in production.
275
2013 SECTION IX
(i) The ends shall be held in place until the minimum
bead size is formed between the heater faces and the pipe
ends, as shown in Figure QF-221.1. For 14 NPS (350 mm)
and larger pipe sizes, the minimum heat soak time of
4.5 min per inch (25 mm) of pipe wall thickness shall be
obtained.
(j) After the proper bead size is formed, the machine
shall be opened and the heater removed. The pipe end surfaces shall be smooth, flat, and free of contamination. The
pipe ends shall be brought together and the butt-fusing
pressure reapplied.
(k) The maximum time from separating the pipe ends
from the heater until the pipe ends are pushed together
shall not exceed the time given in Table QF-221.2.
(l) The butt-fusing pressure shall be maintained until
the joint has cooled, after which the pipe may be removed
from the joining machine. The minimum cool time at the
butt-fusing pressure shall be 11 min per inch
(26 sec per millimeter) of pipe wall thickness of the thicker member.
(d) For mitered butt fusion joints, the pipe faces shall be
at the specific angle to produce the mitered joint. When
the ends are brought together at the drag pressure, there
shall be no visible gap.
(e) The external surfaces of the pipe are aligned to within 10% of the pipe wall thickness.
(f) The drag pressure shall be measured and recorded.
The theoretical fusing pressure shall be calculated so that
an interfacial pressure of 60 psi to 90 psi (0.41 MPa
to 0.62 MPa) is applied to the pipe ends. The butt-fusing
gauge pressure set on the fusing machine shall be the theoretical fusing pressure plus drag pressure.
(g) The heater surface temperature shall be 400°F
to 450°F (200°C to 230°C).
(h) The initial heating shall begin by inserting the heater
into the gap between the pipe ends and applying the buttfusing pressure until an indication of melt is observed
around the circumference of the pipe. When observed,
the pressure shall be reduced to drag pressure and the fixture shall be locked in position so that no outside force is
applied to the joint during the heat soak cycle.
Figure QF-221.1
Required Minimum Melt Bead Size
“A” minimum melt bead size is
required prior to heater removal
Pipe or fitting
H
e
a
t
e
r
Pipe or fitting
“A” Minimum Melt Bead Size,
in. (mm)
Pipe (O.D.), in. (mm)
1
/32 (1)
1
/16 (1.5)
3
/16 (5)
1
/4 (6)
3
/8 (10)
7
/16 (11)
9
/16 (14)
< 2.37 (60)
≥ 2.37 (60) to ≤ 3.5 (89)
> 3.5 (89) to ≤ 8.63 (219)
> 8.63 (219) to ≤ 12.75 (324)
> 12.75 (324) to ≤ 24 (610)
> 24 (610) to ≤ 36 (900)
> 36 (900) to ≤ 65 (1625)
276
2013 SECTION IX
Table QF-221.2
Maximum Heater Plate Removal Time for Pipe-to-Pipe Fusing
Field Applications
Pipe Wall Thickness, in. (mm)
Maximum Heater Plate
Removal Time, sec
0.17 to 0.36 (4 to 9)
8
> 0.36 to 0.55 (> 9 to 14)
10
> 0.55 to 1.18 (> 14 to 30)
15
> 1.18 to 2.5 (> 30 to 64)
20
> 2.5 to 4.5 (> 64 to 114)
25
> 4.5 (> 114)
30
Fabrication Shop
QF-250
QF-251
1.18 to 2.5 (30 to 64)
40
> 2.5 to 4.5 (> 64 to 114)
50
> 4.5 (> 114)
60
requalification of the FPS when any change exceeds the
specified limits of the values recorded in the FPS for that
variable.
FUSING VARIABLES
TYPES OF VARIABLES FOR FUSING
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (FPS)
QF-253
These variables (listed for each fusing process starting
in Table QF-254) are categorized as essential or nonessential variables. The “Brief of Variables” listed in the tables
are for reference only. See the complete variable description in Article XXIV, QF-400.
QF-252
NONESSENTIAL VARIABLES
Nonessential variables are those that will not affect the
mechanical properties of the fused joint, if changed, and do
not require requalification of the FPS when changed.
ESSENTIAL VARIABLES
Essential variables are those that will affect the mechanical properties of the fused joint, if changed, and require
277
2013 SECTION IX
Table QF-254
Fusing Variables Procedure Specification
Polyethylene Pipe Butt Fusing
Paragraph
QF-402
Joints
QF-403
Material
QF-404
Position
QF-405
Thermal
Conditions
Brief of Variables
.1
ϕ Joint type
Essential
.2
ϕ Pipe surface alignment
X
.1
ϕ PE
X
X
.3
ϕ Wall thickness
.4
ϕ Cross-sectional area
.1
ϕ Position
Nonessential
X
X
X
.1
ϕ Heater surface temperature
X
.2
ϕ Interfacial pressure
X
.3
Decrease in melt bead width
X
.4
Increase in heater removal time
X
.5
Decrease in cool-down time
X
QF-406
Equipment
.1
ϕ Fusing machine manufacturer
X
QF-407
Technique
.1
ϕ Shop to field, or vice versa
X
GENERAL NOTE: Table QF-254 is applicable to fusing procedure specifications (FPSs) only.
278
2013 SECTION IX
ARTICLE XXIII
PLASTIC FUSING PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATIONS
QF-300
GENERAL
QF-302.2 Mechanical Tests. For pipe coupons, two
bend test specimens shall be removed from the fused test
joint at intervals of approximately 180 deg. Each specimen
shall be tested by one of the following methods:
(a) Reverse-Bend Test. The specimens shall be removed
as shown in Figure QF-463, illustration (a), and tested in
accordance with QF-143.1.
(b) Guided Side-Bend Test. Each specimen shall be removed as shown in Figure QF-463, illustration (b), and
prepared and tested in accordance with QF-143.2.
This Article lists the essential variables that apply to fusing machine operator performance qualifications. The fusing machine operator qualification is limited by the
essential variables given for the fusing process. These variables are listed in Table QF-362.
QF-301
TESTS
QF-301.1 Intent of Tests. The fusing machine operator performance qualification tests are intended to determine the ability of fusing machine operators to make
sound fused joints when following a qualified FPS or SFPS.
QF-303
QF-301.2 Qualification Tests. Each organization shall
qualify each fusing machine operator for the fusing process(es) to be used in production. The performance qualification tests shall be completed using a qualified FPS. A
fusing machine operator qualified for fusing in accordance
with one qualified FPS or SFPS is also qualified for fusing
in accordance with other qualified FPSs or SFPSs within
the limits of the fusing operator essential performance
variables given in Table QF-362. Visual and mechanical examination requirements are described in QF-302. Retests
and renewal of qualification are given in QF-320.
The fusing machine operator responsible for fusing FPS
qualification test coupons successfully qualifying the FPS
is also qualified as a fusing machine operator within the
limits of the essential performance qualification variables
given in Table QF-362.
QF-303.1 Pipe Positions. Fusing machine operators
who pass the required tests for fusing in the test positions
shown in Figures QF-461.1 and QF-461.2 shall be qualified
for fusing within the following limits:
(a) The 5G test position qualifies for the horizontal position ±45 deg.
(b) Test positions other than 5G qualify for the orientation tested ±20 deg.
QF-303.2 Pipe Diameters. Pipe sizes within the
ranges listed in Table QF-452.3 shall be used for test coupons to qualify within the ranges listed in Table QF-452.3.
QF-305
FUSING MACHINE OPERATORS
Each fusing machine operator shall have passed the mechanical and visual examinations prescribed in QF-301
and QF-302.
QF-301.3 Identification of Fusing Machine Operators. Each qualified fusing machine operator shall be assigned an identifying number, letter, or symbol by the
organization, which shall be used to identify production
fused joints completed by the fusing machine operator.
QF-305.1 Testing. Qualification testing shall be performed on test coupons in accordance with QF-311 and
the following requirements:
(a) The data required by QF-130 shall be recorded for
each fusing machine operator.
(b) The supervisor conducting the test shall observe the
making of the fused joint and verify that the FPS or SFPS
was followed.
QF-301.4 Record of Tests. The record of fusing machine operator performance qualification (FPQ) tests shall
include the qualified ranges of essential performance variables, the type of tests performed, and test results for each
fusing machine operator. Suggested forms for these records are given in Form QF-484.
QF-302
LIMITS OF QUALIFIED POSITIONS AND
DIAMETERS (SEE QF-461)
QF-305.2 Examination. Test coupons fused in accordance with QF-305.1 shall be evaluated as follows:
(a) The completed joint shall be visually examined in accordance with QF-302.1.
(b) After the joint is complete, the data required by
QF-130 shall be reviewed for compliance with the requirements of the FPS or SFPS used for the qualification test.
(c) Bend test specimens shall be removed and tested
and in accordance with QF-302.2.
TYPE OF TEST REQUIRED
QF-302.1 Visual Examination. For pipe coupons, all
surfaces shall be examined visually per QF-141 before cutting specimens. Pipe test coupons shall be visually examined per QF-141 over the entire circumference.
279
2013 SECTION IX
QF-310
QF-311
QUALIFICATION TEST COUPONS
(b) When there is a specific reason to question the ability of the fusing machine operator to make fused joints
meeting the requirements of this Section, the qualifications of the fusing machine operator shall be revoked.
TEST COUPONS
The test coupons shall consist of fusing one pipe joint
assembly in at least one of the positions shown in
Figure QF-461.2.
QF-320
QF-321
QF-322.2
(a) Performance qualifications that have expired under
the provisions of QF-322.1(a) may be renewed by having
the fusing machine operator fuse a single test coupon
and subjecting the test coupon to the testing required by
QF-302. A successful test shall renew all of the fusing machine operator’s previous qualifications.
(b) Fusing machine operators whose qualifications have
been revoked under the provisions of QF-322.1(b) may be
requalified by fusing a test coupon representative of the
planned production work. The fused test coupon shall be
tested as required by QF-302. A successful test shall restore the fusing machine operator’s qualification within
the qualified range of essential performance variables
listed in Table QF-362.
RETESTS AND RENEWAL OF
QUALIFICATION
RETESTS
A fusing machine operator who fails one or more of the
tests prescribed in QF-302, as applicable, may be retested
under the following conditions.
QF-321.1 Immediate Retest Using Visual Examination. When the qualification coupon has failed the visual
examination of QF-302.1, retests shall be accepted by visual examination before conducting the mechanical
testing.
When an immediate retest is made, the fusing machine
operator shall make two consecutive test coupons. If both
additional coupons pass the visual examination requirements, the examiner shall select one of the acceptable test
coupons for specimen removal to facilitate conducting the
required mechanical testing.
QF-360
QF-361
QF-321.2 Immediate Retest Using Mechanical Testing. When the qualification coupon has failed the mechanical testing of QF-302.2, and an immediate retest is
conducted, the fusing machine operator shall make two
consecutive test coupons. If both additional coupons pass
the mechanical test requirements, the fusing machine operator is qualified.
ESSENTIAL VARIABLES FOR
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION OF
FUSING MACHINE OPERATORS
GENERAL
A fusing machine operator shall be requalified whenever a change is made in one or more of the essential variables listed in Table QF-362.
Table QF-362
Essential Variables Applicable to Fusing
Machine Operators
QF-321.3 Further Training. When the fusing machine
operator has undergone additional training or completed
additional fusing practice joints, a new test shall be made
for each fusion test joint that failed to meet the
requirements.
QF-322
Renewal of Qualification
Paragraph
.1
ϕ Pipe material
.2
ϕ Pipe diameter
QF-404
Position
.1
+ Position
QF-406
Equipment
.1
ϕ Equipment manufacturer
QF-403
Material
EXPIRATION AND RENEWAL OF
QUALIFICATION
QF-322.1 Expiration of Qualification. The performance qualification of a fusing machine operator shall
be affected when one of the following conditions occurs:
(a) When a fusing machine operator has not completed
a fused joint using a qualified FPS or SFPS for a time period of 6 months or more, their qualification shall expire.
280
Brief of Variables
2013 SECTION IX
ARTICLE XXIV
PLASTIC FUSING DATA
QF-400
QF-401
QF-404
VARIABLES
POSITION
QF-404.1 The addition of other fusing positions beyond that qualified. See QF-303.1.
GENERAL
Each fusing variable described in this Article is applicable for procedure qualification when referenced in
QF-250 for each specific fusing process. Essential variables for performance qualification are referenced in
QF-360 for each specific fusing process. A change from
one fusing process to another fusing process requires requalification (e.g., a change fro m butt-fusing to
electro-fusing).
QF-405
THERMAL CONDITIONS
QF-405.1 A change in the heater surface temperature
to a value beyond the range qualified.
QF-405.2 A change in the interfacial pressure to a value beyond the range qualified.
QF-405.3
qualified.
QF-401.1 Essential Variable (Procedure). A fusing
condition that, if changed, will affect the mechanical properties of the joint (e.g., a change in pipe wall thickness).
A decrease in melt bead size from that
QF-405.4 An increase in heater plate removal time
from that qualified.
QF-401.2 Essential Variable (Performance). A fusing
condition that, if changed, will affect the ability of a fusing
machine operator to make a sound fused joint [e.g., a
change in pipe size (diameter) or pipe position].
QF-405.5 A decrease in the cool time at butt-fusing
pressure from that qualified.
QF-401.3 Nonessential Variable (Procedure). A fusing condition that, if changed, will not affect the mechanical properties of a fused joint [e.g., a change in pipe size
(diameter)].
QF-406.1
manufacturer.
QF-401.4 Fusing Data. The fusing data includes the
fusing variables grouped as joints, pipe material, position,
thermal conditions, equipment, and technique.
QF-407.1 A change in fabrication location from the
fabrication shop to field applications or vice versa.
QF-402
QF-420
QF-406
QF-407
JOINTS
EQUIPMENT
A change in the fusing machine
TECHNIQUE
MATERIAL GROUPINGS
High-density polyethylene pipe listed in Table QF-422
may be fused in accordance with Section IX.
QF-402.1 A change in the type of joint from that qualified, except that a square butt joint qualifies a mitered
joint.
QF-402.2 A change in the pipe O.D. surface misalignment of more than 10% of the wall thickness of the thinner member to be fused.
Table QF-422
Material Grouping
Specification
QF-403
MATERIAL
D3035
QF-403.1 A change to any pipe material other than
those listed in Table QF-422.
F714
Classification
Product Form
PE 2708
PE 3608
Pipe
PE 4710
PE 2708
QF-403.2 A change in the pipe diameter beyond the
range qualified in Table QF-452.3.
D3261
PE 3608
PE 4710
QF-403.3 A change in the pipe wall thickness beyond
the range qualified. See QF-202.2.1.
QF-403.4 A change in the cross-sectional area to be
fused beyond the range specified.
281
Fittings
2013 SECTION IX
QF-450
PIPE FUSING LIMITS
Table QF-452.3
Pipe Fusing Diameter Limits
Size Qualified — IPS [in. (mm)]
Maximum
None
Size tested
6 to less than 8 [6.625 (168) to less than
8.625 (219)]
None
Less than 8 [less than 8.625 (219)]
8 to 20 [8.625 (219) to 20 (508)]
8 [8.625 (219)]
20 [20 (508)]
Greater than 20 [greater than 20 (508)]
Greater than 20 [greater
than 20 (508)]
Unlimited
GRAPHICS
POSITIONS
Figure QF-461.1
Fusing Positions
90 deg
or C
ts f
imi
70 deg
sl
Axi
B +20 deg
C
Ax
is
lim
its
fo
Vertical plane
rB
45 deg
B –20 deg
its for A
QF-461
Minimum
Less than 6 [6.625 (168)]
Axis lim
QF-460
Size of Test Coupon — IPS [in. (mm)]
B
A
0 deg
l
onta
Horiz
282
e
plan
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QF-461.1
Fusing Positions (Cont'd)
Table continued
Tabulation of Positions in Joints
Position
Horizontal
Intermediate
Vertical
Diagram Reference
Inclination of Axis,
deg
A
B
C
0 ± 45
B ± 20
90 ± 20
GENERAL NOTE: Inclination of the axis is measured from the horizontal reference plane toward the vertical.
Figure QF-461.2
Fusing Test Positions
(a) Horizontal (5G)
V
(c) Vertical (2G)
H
(b) Intermediate
283
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QF-462
Cross Section of Upset Beads for Butt-Fused PE Pipe
(a) Visually Acceptable — Uniform Bead Around Pipe
(b) Visually Acceptable — Non-Uniform Bead Around Pipe,
But Localized Diameter Mismatch Less Than 10%
of the Nominal Wall Thickness
(c) Visually Unacceptable — V-Groove Too Deep at Pipe Tangent
for Both Uniform and Non-Uniform Beads
284
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QF-463
Bend Test Specimen Removal, Configuration, and Testing
15t
15t
[6.0 in. (150 mm) min.] [6.0 in. (150 mm) min.]
t
1½t [1.0 in. (25 mm) min.]
Test strap
Butt fusion
(a) Reverse-Bend Test Specimen Removal [for tmax 1 in. (25 mm)]
9.0 in. (225 mm)
9.0 in. (225 mm)
t
1 in. (25 mm)
Test strap
Butt fusion
(b) Guided Side-Bend Test Specimen Removal [for tmax > 1 in. (25 mm)]
285
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QF-463
Bend Test Specimen Removal, Configuration, and Testing (Cont'd)
t = 0.25 in. to 0.50 in. (6 mm to 13 mm)
Length of test specimen
12.0 in. to 17.0 in. (300 mm to 430 mm)
6.0 in. to 8.5 in.
(150 mm to 215 mm)
Width = wall thickness
(c) Guided Side-Bend Test Specimen
60 deg ±10 deg
t = 0.25 in. to 0.50 in.
(6 mm to 13 mm)
Ø 0.75 in. (19 mm)
R = 0.50 in. to 1.00 in.
(13 mm to 25 mm)
3.06 in. (77.7 mm)
Centerline of butt fusion
(d) Guided Side-Bend Test Machine Dimensions
286
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QF-464
HSTIT Specimen Configuration and Dimensions
1.38 in. (35 mm)
1¾ in.
(44 mm)
Ø 1.03 in. (26.2 mm)
through (2) PLCS
60 deg TYP.
A
2.00 in.
(50 mm)
1.00 in.
(25 mm)
0.20 in. (5.1 mm)
0.40 in. (10.2 mm)
CL SYM
0.40 in. (10.2 mm)
A
t
2.25 in.
(57 mm)
CL of Fusion
in. (23.5 mm)
4.50 (113 mm)
in. (23.5 mm)
6
in. (160 mm) Ref.
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) All machined surfaces 125 RMS or better.
(b) 3 place dimensions ±0.005 in. (±0.13 mm).
(c) 2 place dimensions ±0.010 in. (±0.25 mm).
(d) Fractional dimensions ±1/32 in. (±0.80 mm).
(e) All internal radii R1/2 in. (±0.13 mm).
(f) All external radii R3/8 in. (10 mm).
(g) Bead remains on after machining.
287
2013 SECTION IX
Figure QF-465
HSTIT Specimen Failure Examples
288
2013 SECTION IX
QF-480
FORMS
FORM QF-482 Suggested Format for Fusing Procedure Specifications (FPS)
(See QF-201.3, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
Company Name
By
Fusing Procedure Specification No.
Date
Revision No.
FPS Qualification
Date
By testing
SFPS
If qualified by testing, supporting PQR No.(s)
Fusing Process Type
Details
Joints (QF-402)
Joint Type
Pipe End Preparation
Miter Joint Angle
Pipe Surface Alignment
Sketches, production drawings, weld symbols, or written description
should show the general arrangement of the parts to be fused. Where
applicable, the details of the joint groove may be specified.
Sketches may be attached to illustrate joint design.
Materials (QF-403)
Classification
Specification
Pipe Size (Diameter)
to Specification
Classification
Pipe Wall Thickness
Other
Position (QF-404)
Pipe Position
Other
Thermal Conditions (QF-405)
Heater Surface Temperature Range
Fusing Interfacial Pressure Range
Drag Pressure Range
Butt-Fusing Pressure Range
Melt Bead Size Range
Heater Plate Removal Time Range
Cool-Down Time at Butt-Fusing Pressure Range
Equipment (QF-406)
Fusing Machine Manufacturer
Data Acquisition Used
Yes
No
Data Acquisition Machine Manufacturer
Hydraulic Hose Length
Technique (QF-407)
Location
Fabrication Shop
Field
289
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QF-483 Suggested Format for Fusing Procedure Qualification Records (PQR)
(See QF-201.5(d), Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
Company Name
Procedure Qualification Record No.
Date
FPS No.
Fusing Process(es)
Joints (QF-402)
Pipe Surface Alignment
Pipe End Preparation of Test Coupon
Material (QF-403)
Specification
Equipment (QF-406)
Fusing Machine Manufacturer
Classification
to Specification
Classification
Pipe Size (Diameter)
Data Acquisition Used
Pipe Wall Thickness
Data Acquisition System Manufacturer
Other
Hydraulic Hose Length
Position (QF-404)
Yes
No
Technique (QF-407)
Position of Pipe
Location
Other
Thermal Conditions (QF-405)
Heater Surface Temperature
Fusing Interfacial Pressure
Drag Pressure
Other
Butt-Fusing Pressure
Melt Bead Size
Heater Plate Removal Time
Cool-Down Time at Butt-Fusing Pressure
Other
290
Fabrication Shop
Field
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QF-483 (Back)
PQR No.
Visual Examination (QF-141)
Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure Tests (QF-142)
Joint
No.
Heater
Temperature
Interfacial
Pressure
Result
Joint
No.
Heater
Temperature
Interfacial
Pressure
Result
High-Speed Tensile Impact Tests (QF-144)
Joint
No.
Spec.
Heater
Interfacial Type of Location
No. Temperature Pressure Failure of Failure
Joint
No.
Spec.
Heater
Interfacial Type of Location
No. Temperature Pressure Failure of Failure
Attach additional sheet(s) for high-speed tensile test impact test data for pipe larger than NPS 4 (DN 100).
Fusing Machine Operator's Name
Identification No.
Tes ts Conducted B y
Laboratory Test No.
Stamp No.
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test joints were prepared, fused, and tested
in accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Organization
Date
Certified By
(Detail of record of tests are illustrative only and may be modified to conform to the type and number of tests
required by the Code.)
291
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QF-484 Suggested Format for Fusing Machine Operator Performance Qualifications (FPQ)
(See QF-301.4, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
Fusing Machine Operator's Name
Identification No.
Test Description (Information Only)
Type of Test:
Original qualification
Requalification
Identification of FPS Followed
Pipe Specification
Classification
Pipe Size (Diameter)
to Specification
Classification
Pipe Wall Thickness
Testing Conditions and Qualification Limits
Fusing Variables (QF-360)
Actual Values
Range Qualified
Pipe Material
Pipe Size (Diameter)
Pipe Position
Fusing Machine Manufacturer
RESULTS
Visual Examination of Completed Joint [QF-305.2(a)]
Examination of Data Acquisition Output [QF-305.2(b)]
Bend Tests (QF-302.2)
Specimen No.
Type of Bend
Result
Specimen No.
Bend Specimens Evaluated By
Type of Bend
Result
Company
Mechanical Tests Conducted By
Laboratory Test No.
Fusing Supervised By
Data Acquisition Output Examined By
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test coupons were prepared, fused, and
tested in accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Organization
Date
Certified by
292
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QF-485 Suggested Format for Plastic Pipe Fusing Data Acquisition Log Review
(See QF-131 Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
Job Information
Job Number
Fusing Machine Operator Name
Fusing Machine Operator Identification
FPS or SFPS Used
Date
Fusing Machine Identification
Pipe Specification
Time
Fusing Machine Manufacturer
Classification
to Specification
Pipe Wall Thickness
Pipe Size (Diameter)
Joint Number
Classification
Joint Configuration
FUSING VARIABLES
Heater Surface Temperature
Within Qualification Range
Interfacial Fusing Pressure
Yes
No
Yes
Within Qualification Range
No
Drag Pressure
Butt-Fusing Pressure:
Within Qualification Range
Yes
Recorded Hydraulic-Fusing Pressure
Calculated Value
Butt-Fusing Pressure Drop to Less Than Drag Pressure?
Yes
No
Acceptable
Yes
No
Gauge Pressure During Initial Heat Cycle
Elapsed Time During Initial Heat Cycle
Gauge Pressure During Heat-Soak Cycle
Elapsed Time During Heat-Soak Cycle
Gauge Pressure During Fusing/Cool Cycle
Within Qualification Range
Elapsed Time During Fusing/Cool Cycle
Within Qualification Range
Melt Bead Size
Heater Plate Removal Time
Yes
Within Qualification Range
Data Logger Probe
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
External Probe
Data Acquisition System Manufacturer
Review of the Recorded Pressure/Time Diagram
Acceptable
Yes
Data Acquisition Acceptable
Examiner name
No
Yes
No
Examiner signature
Date
QF-490
QF-491
QF-492
DEFINITIONS
DEFINITIONS
Definitions relocated to QG-109.
GENERAL
Terms relating to fusing used in Section IX are listed in
QG-109. Other common terms relating to fusing are defined in ASTM F 412, Standard Terminology Relating to
Plastic Piping Systems.
293
No
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
MANDATORY APPENDIX A
DELETED
294
2013 SECTION IX
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX B
WELDING AND BRAZING FORMS
B-100
FORMS
Form QW‐484 is a suggested format for Welder/Welding Operator/Performance Qualification (WPQ) for groove
or fillet welds.
Form QW-485 is a suggested format for Demonstration
of Standard Welding Procedure Specifications.
This Nonmandatory Appendix illustrates sample formats for Welding and Brazing Procedure Specifications,
Procedure Qualification Records, and Performance
Qualification.
B-101
B-102
WELDING
BRAZING
Form QB-482 is a suggested format for Brazing Procedure Specifications (BPS); Form QB-483 is a suggested format for Procedure Qualifications Records (PQR). These
forms are for torch brazing (TB), furnace brazing (FB), induction brazing (IB), resistance brazing (RB), and dip
brazing (DB) processes.
Forms for other brazing processes may follow the general format of Forms QB-482 and QB-483, as applicable.
Form QB-484 is a suggested format for Brazer/Brazing
Operator/Performance Qualification (BPQ).
Form QW-482 is a suggested format for Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS); Form QW-483 is a suggested
format for Procedure Qualification Records (PQR). These
forms are for the shielded metal‐arc (SMAW),
submerged‐arc (SAW), gas metal‐arc (GMAW), and gas
tungsten‐arc (GTAW) welding processes, or a combination
of these processes.
Forms for other welding processes may follow the general format of Forms QW-482 and QW-483, as applicable.
295
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QW-482 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPS)
(See QW-200.1, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
ð13Þ
Organization Name
By
Welding Procedure Specification No.
Date
Revision No.
Supporting PQR No.(s)
Date
Welding Process(es)
Type(s)
(Automatic, Manual, Machine, or Semi-Automatic)
JOINTS (QW-402)
Details
Joint Design
Root Spacing
Backing:
Yes
No
Backing Material (Type)
(Refer to both backing and retainers)
Metal
Nonfusing Metal
Nonmetallic
Other
Sketches, Production Drawings, Weld Symbols, or Written Description
should show the general arrangement of the parts to be welded. Where
applicable, the details of weld groove may be specified.
Sketches may be attached to illustrate joint design, weld layers, and bead
sequence (e.g., for notch toughness procedures, for multiple process
procedures, etc.)]
*BASE METALS (QW-403)
Group No.
P-No.
to P-No.
Group No.
OR
Specification and type/grade or UNS Number
to Specification and type/grade or UNS Number
OR
Chem. Analysis and Mech. Prop.
to Chem. Analysis and Mech. Prop.
Thickness Range:
Base Metal:
Groove
Maximum Pass Thickness 1/2 in. (13 mm)
Fillet
(Yes)
(No)
Other
*FILLER METALS (QW-404)
1
Spec. No. (SFA)
AWS No. (Class)
F-No.
A-No.
Size of Filler Metals
Filler Metal Product Form
Supplemental Filler Metal
Weld Metal
Deposited Thickness:
Groove
Fillet
Electrode-Flux (Class)
Flux Type
Flux Trade Name
Consumable Insert
Other
*Each base metal-filler metal combination should be recorded individually.
(07/13)
296
2
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QW-482 (Back)
WPS No.
POSITIONS (QW-405)
Rev.
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (QW-407)
Temperature Range
Position(s) of Groove
Down
Welding Progression: Up
Time Range
Other
Position(s) of Fillet
Other
GAS (QW-408)
Percent Composition
PREHEAT (QW-406)
Gas(es)
Preheat Temperature, Minimum
Interpass Temperature, Maximim
Preheat Maintenance
(Mixture)
Flow Rate
Shielding
Other
(Continuous or special heating, where applicable, should be recorded)
Trailing
Backing
Other
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (QW-409)
Filler Metal
Weld
Pass(es)
Process
Classification
Diameter
Current
Type and
Polarity
Amps
(Range)
Wire Feed Energy or
Speed
Power
(Range)
(Range)
Volts
(Range)
Travel
Speed
(Range)
Amps and volts, or power or energy range, should be recorded for each electrode size, position, and thickness, etc.
Pulsing Current
Heat Input (max.)
Tungsten Electrode Size and Type
(Pure Tungsten, 2% Thoriated, etc.)
Mode of Metal Transfer for GMAW (FCAW)
(Spray Arc, Short Circuiting Arc, etc.)
Other
TECHNIQUE (QW-410)
String or Weave Bead
Orifice, Nozzle, or Gas Cup Size
Initial and Interpass Cleaning (Brushing, Grinding, etc.)
Method of Back Gouging
Oscillation
Contact Tube to Work Distance
Multiple or Single Pass (Per Side)
Multiple or Single Electrodes
Electrode Spacing
Peening
Other
(07/10)
297
Other
(e.g., Remarks, Comments, Hot Wire
Addition, Technique,
Torch Angle, etc.)
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QW-483 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORDS (PQR)
(See QW-200.2, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
Record Actual Variables Used to Weld Test Coupon
ð13Þ
Organization Name
Procedure Qualification Record No.
WPS No.
Welding Process(es)
Types (Manual, Automatic, Semi-Automatic)
Date
JOINTS (QW-402)
Groove Design of Test Coupon
(For combination qualifications, the deposited weld metal thickness shall be recorded for each filler metal and process used.)
BASE METALS (QW-403)
Material Spec.
Type/Grade, or UNS Number
P-No.
Group No.
to P-No.
Thickness of Test Coupon
Diameter of Test Coupon
Maximum Pass Thickness
Other
Group No.
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (QW-407)
Temperature
Time
Other
GAS (QW-408)
Gas(es)
FILLER METALS (QW-404)
SFA Specification
AWS Classification
Filler Metal F-No.
Weld Metal Analysis A-No.
Size of Filler Metal
Filler Metal Product Form
Supplemental Filler Metal
Electrode Flux Classification
Flux Type
Flux Trade Name
1
Weld Metal Thickness
Other
POSITION (QW-405)
Position of Groove
Weld Progression (Uphill, Downhill)
Other
PREHEAT (QW-406)
Preheat Temperature
Interpass Temperature
Other
Percent Composition
(Mixture)
Flow Rate
Shielding
Trailing
Backing
Other
2
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (QW-409)
Current
Polarity
Amps.
Volts
Tungsten Electrode Size
Mode of Metal Transfer for GMAW (FCAW)
Heat Input
Other
TECHNIQUE (QW-410)
Travel Speed
String or Weave Bead
Oscillation
Multipass or Single Pass (Per Side)
Single or Multiple Electrodes
Other
(07/13)
298
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QW-483 (Back)
PQR No.
Tensile Test (QW-150)
Specimen
No.
Width
Thickness
Ultimate
Total Load
Area
Ultimate
Unit Stress,
(psi or MPa)
Type of
Failure and
Location
Guided-Bend Tests (QW-160)
Type and Figure No.
Result
Toughness Tests (QW-170)
Specimen
No.
Notch
Location
Specimen
Size
Test
Temperature
Impact Values
ft-lb or J
% Shear
Mils (in.) or mm
Drop Weight Break (Y/N)
Comments
Fillet-Weld Test (QW-180)
Result — Satisfactory: Yes
No
Penetration into Parent Metal: Yes
No
Macro — Results
Other Tests
Type of Test
Deposit Analysis
Other
Welder’s Name
Clock No.
Stamp No.
Tests Conducted by
Laboratory Test No.
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared, welded, and tested in accordance with the
requirements of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Organization
Date
Certified by
(Detail of record of tests are illustrative only and may be modified to conform to the type and number of tests required by the Code.)
(07/13)
299
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QW-484A SUGGESTED FORMAT A FOR WELDER PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATIONS (WPQ)
(See QW-301, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
ð13Þ
Welder’s name
Identification no.
Test Description
Test coupon
Identification of WPS followed
Specification and type/grade or UNS Number of base metal(s)
Production weld
Thickness
Testing Variables and Qualification Limits
Welding Variables (QW-350)
Actual Values
Range Qualified
Welding process(es)
Type (i.e.; manual, semi-automatic) used
Backing (with/without)
Plate
Pipe (enter diameter if pipe or tube)
Base metal P-Number to P-Number
Filler metal or electrode specification(s) (SFA) (info. only)
Filler metal or electrode classification(s) (info. only)
FIller metal F-Number(s)
Consumable insert (GTAW or PAW)
Filler Metal Product Form (solid/metal or flux cored/powder) (GTAW or PAW)
Deposit thickness for each process
Process 1
3 layers minimum
Process 2
3 layers minimum
No
No
Yes
Yes
Position qualified (2G, 6G, 3F, etc.)
Vertical progression (uphill or downhill)
Type of fuel gas (OFW)
Inert gas backing (GTAW, PAW, GMAW)
Transfer mode (spray/globular or pulse to short circuit-GMAW)
GTAW current type/polarity (AC, DCEP, DCEN)
RESULTS
Visual examination of completed weld (QW-302.4)
Transverse face and root bends [QW-462.3(a)]
Longitudinal bends [QW-462.3(b)]
Side bends (QW-462.2)
Pipe bend specimen, corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay [QW-462.5(c)]
Plate bend specimen, corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay [QW-462.5(d)]
Pipe specimen, macro test for fusion [QW-462.5(b)]
Type
Result
Type
Fillet welds in plate [QW-462.4(b)]
Result
RT
Alternative Volumetric Examination Results (QW-191):
Fillet weld — fracture test (QW-181.2)
Macro examination (QW-184)
Plate specimen, macro test for fusion [QW-462.5(e)]
Type
or UT
Result
(check one)
Length and percent of defects
Fillet welds in pipe [QW-462.4(c)]
Fillet size (in.)
Concavity/convexity (in.)
Other tests
Film or specimens evaluated by
Company
Mechanical tests conducted by
Laboratory test no.
Welding supervised by
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test coupons were prepared, welded, and tested in accordance with the
requirements of Section IX of the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE.
Organization
Date
Certified by
(07/13)
300
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QW-484B SUGGESTED FORMAT B FOR WELDING OPERATOR PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATIONS (WOPQ)
(See QW-301, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
Welding operator’s name
Identification no.
Test Description (Information Only)
Test coupon
Identification of WPS followed
Specification and type/grade or UNS Number of base metal(s)
Base metal P-Number
to P-Number
Production weld
Thickness
Position (2G, 6G, 3F, etc.)
Plate
Pipe (enter diameter, if pipe or tube)
Filler metal (SFA) specification
Filler metal or electrode classification
Testing Variables and Qualification Limits When Using Automatic Welding Equipment
Welding Variables (QW-361.1)
Actual Values
Range Qualified
Type of welding (automatic)
Welding process
FIller metal used (Yes/No) (EBW or LBW)
Type of laser for LBW (CO2 to YAG, etc.)
Continuous drive or inertia welding (FW)
Vacuum or out of vacuum (EBW)
Testing Variables and Qualification Limits When Using Machine Welding Equipment
Welding Variables (QW-361.2)
Actual Values
Range Qualified
Type of welding (Machine)
Welding process
Direct or remote visual control
Automatic arc voltage control (GTAW)
Automatic joint tracking
Position qualified (2G, 6G, 3F, etc.)
Consumable inserts (GTAW or PAW)
Backing (with/without)
Single or multiple passes per side
RESULTS
Visual examination of completed weld (QW-302.4)
Transverse face and root bends [QW-462.3(a)]
Longitudinal bends [QW-462.3(b)]
Side bends (QW-462.2)
Pipe bend specimen, corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay [QW-462.5(c)]
Plate bend specimen, corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay [QW-462.5(d)]
Pipe specimen, macro test for fusion [QW-462.5(b)]
Type
Result
Plate specimen, macro test for fusion [QW-462.5(e)]
Type
Result
RT
Alternative Volumetric Examination Results (QW-191):
Fillet weld — fracture test (QW-181.2)
Result
(check one)
Length and percent of defects
Fillet welds in plate [QW-462.4(b)]
Macro examination (QW-184)
or UT
Type
Fillet size (in.)
Fillet welds in pipe [QW-462.4(c)]
Concavity/convexity (in.)
Other tests
Film or specimens evaluated by
Company
Mechanical tests conducted by
Laboratory test no.
Welding supervised by
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test coupons were prepared, welded, and tested in accordance with the
requirements of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Organization
Date
Certified by
(07/13)
301
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QW-485 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR DEMONSTRATION OF STANDARD WELDING
PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (SWPS)
(See Article V)
ð13Þ
Identification of Standard Welding Procedure Specification Demonstrated
Demonstration Welding Variables
Specification and type/grade or UNS Number of Base Metal(s)
to Specification and type/grade or UNS Number of Base Metal(s)
Base Metal P-Number
to Base Metal P-Number
Thickness
Welding Process(es) used
Plate
Pipe (Enter Diameter of Pipe or Tube)
Groove Design (Single V, Double V, Single U, etc.)
Initial Cleaning Method
Backing (with/without)
Filler Metal Specification
Filler Metal or Electrode Classification
Filler Metal or Electrode Trade Name
Size of Consumable Electrode or Filler Metal
Tungsten Electrode Classification and Size for GTAW
Consumable Insert Class and Size for GTAW
Shielding Gas Composition and Flow Rate for GTAW or GMAW (FCAW)
Preheat Temperature
Position (1G, 2G, etc.) of Weld
Progression (Uphill or Downhill)
Interpass Cleaning Method
Measured Maximum Interpass Temperature
Approximate Deposit Thickness for Each Process or Electrode Type
Current Type/Polarity (AC, DCEP, DCEN)
Postweld Heat Treatment Time and Temperature
Visual Examination of Completed Weld (QW-302.4)
Bend Test (QW-302.1)
Type
Date of Test
Transverse Face and Root [QW-462.3(a)]
Result
Type
Side (QW-462.2)
Result
Alternative Radiographic Examination Results (QW-302.2)
Specimens Evaluated By
Type
Result
Company
Title
Title
Company
Welding Supervised By
Welder's Name
Stamp No.
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the weld described above was prepared, welded, and tested in accordance with
the requirements of Section IX of the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE.
Organization
Signature
Date
Demonstration Number
(07/13)
302
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QB-482 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR A BRAZING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION (BPS)
(See QB-200.1, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
Organization Name
By
BPS Number
Revision
Date Issued
Supporting PQRs
Brazing Process(es)
Type(s)
(Automatic, Manual, Machine, or
Semi-Automatic)
Joint Design (QB-408)
Joint Design:
Type
Joint Clearance
Overlap:
Minimum
Maximum
Base Metal (QB-402)
P-Number
to P-Number
Other
Brazing Filler Metal (QB-403)
Specification Number
AWS Classification
F-Number
Filler Metal Product Form
Base Metal Thickness
Minimum
Maximum
Brazing Temperature (QB-404)
Brazing Temperature Range
Postbraze Heat Treatment (QB-409)
Temperature Range
Time Range
Flow Position (QB-407)
Positions Permitted
Flow Direction
Brazing Flux, Fuel Gas, or Atmosphere (QB-406)
Flux (AWS Class, Composition, or Trade Name)
Fuel Gas
Furnace Temperature
Atmosphere Type
Other
Technique (QB-410) and Other Information
Initial Cleaning
Flux Application
Nature of Flame (Oxidizing, Neutral, Reducing)
Torch Tip Sizes
Postbraze Cleaning
Inspection
(07/13)
303
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QB-483 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR A BRAZING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD (PQR)
(See QB-200.2, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
Record of Actual Variables Used to Braze Test Coupon
ð13Þ
Organization Name
BPS Followed During Brazing of Test Coupon
PQR No.
Brazing Process(es) Used
Date Coupon Was Brazed
Base Metal (QB-402)
Base Metal Specification
to Base Metal Specification
P-Number
to P-Number
Base Metal Thickness
Plate or Pipe/Tube
to Base Metal Thickness
Brazing Filler Metal (QB-403)
Filler Metal Specification: AWS Classification
F-No.
Filler Metal Product Form
Joint Design (QB-408)
Overlap
Joint Type
Joint Clearance
Brazing Temperature (QB-404)
Brazing Temperature Range
Brazing Flux, Fuel Gas, or Atmosphere (QB-406)
Flux (AWS Class., Compostion, Trade Name, or None)
Fuel Gas
Furnace Temperature
Atmosphere Type
Other
Flow Position (QB-407)
Position
Flow Direction
Postbraze Heat Treatment (QB-409)
Temperature
Time
Technique (QB-410)
Cleaning Prior to Brazing
Postbraze Cleaning
Nature of Flame (Oxidizing, Neutral, Reducing)
Other
Tensile Tests (QB-150)
Width/
Diameter
Specimen
Thickness
Area
Ultimate Load
UTS (psi or MPa)
Failure Location
Bend Tests (QB-160)
Type
Results
Type
Results
Results
Type
Results
Peel Tests (QB-170) or Section Tests (QB-180)
Type
Other Tests
ID No.
Brazer’s/Brazing Operator’s Name
Brazing of Test Coupon Supervised by
Test Specimens Evaluated by
Company
Laboratory Test Number
We hereby certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test coupons were prepared, brazed, and tested in accordance with the
requirements of Section IX of the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE.
Organization
Certified by
(07/13)
304
Date
2013 SECTION IX
FORM QB-484 SUGGESTED FORMAT FOR A BRAZER/BRAZING OPERATOR PERFORMANCE
QUALIFICATION (BPQ)
(See QB-301, Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code)
Identification No.
Brazer’s/Brazing Operator’s Name
Testing Variables and Ranges Qualified
Identification of BPS Followed During Brazing of Test Coupon
Specification of First Test Coupon Base Metal
Specification of Second Test Coupon Base Metal
Brazing Variables (QB-350)
Actual Values
Range Qualified
Brazing Process(es)
Type of Brazing (Manual, Semi-Automatic, Automatic,
Machine)
Torch Brazing: Manual or Mechanical
Base Metal P-Number
to P-Number
Plate
Pipe (enter diameter if pipe or tube)
Base Metal Thickness
to Base Metal Thickness
Joint Type (Butt, Lap, Scarf, Socket, etc.)
If Lap or Socket, Overlap Length
Joint Clearance
Filler Metal (SFA) Specification(s) (info. only)
Filler Metal Classification(s) (info. only)
Filler Metal/F-Number
Filler Metal Product Form
Brazing Flow Positions
Testing and Results
Visual Examination of Completed Joint (QB-141.6)
Mechanical Test
Date of Test
Peel (QB-462.3)
Section (QB-462.4)
Transverse Bends [QB-462.2(a)]
Position
Result
Position
Tension (QB-462.1)
Longitudinal Bends [QB-462.2(b)]
Result
Mechanical Tests Conducted by
Specimens Evaluated by
Position
Result
Company
Company
Lab Test No.
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test coupons were prepared, brazed, and tested in accordance with the
requirements of Section IX of the ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE.
Organization
Certified by
Date
(07/13)
305
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX D
P‐NUMBER LISTING
ð13Þ
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
1
1
A/SA-36
1
1
A/SA-53
1
1
A/SA-53
1
1
A/SA-53
1
1
A/SA-53
1
1
A/SA-53
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
...
Type E, Gr. A
Type E, Gr. B
Type F
Type S, Gr. A
Type S, Gr. B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-106
A/SA-106
A108
A108
A108
A/SA-134
A/SA-135
A/SA-135
A
B
1015CW
1018CW
1020CW
...
A
B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A139
A139
A139
A139
A139
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-178
A/SA-178
A/SA-179
A/SA-181
A/SA-192
A
C
...
Cl. 60
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-210
A211
A211
A211
A‐1
A570‐30
A570‐33
A570‐40
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-214
A/SA-216
A/SA-234
A/SA-266
A/SA-283
...
WCA
WPB
1
A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-283
A/SA-283
A/SA-283
A/SA-285
A/SA-285
B
C
D
A
B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-285
A/SA-333
A/SA-333
A/SA-334
A/SA-334
C
1
6
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-350
A/SA-352
A/SA-352
LF1
LCA
LCB
A
B
C
D
E
306
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
(Cont'd)
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-372
FPA
FPB
A
1
1
1
1
A381
A381
Y35
Y42
1
1
A381
Y46
1
1
A381
Y48
1
1
A381
Y50
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-414
A/SA-414
A/SA-414
A/SA-414
A
B
C
D
1
1
1
1
A/SA-414
A/SA-420
E
WPL6
1
1
1
1
A500
A500
B
C
1
1
A501
A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-513
A/SA-513
A/SA-513
A513
1008
1010
1015
1015CW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-515
A/SA-515
A/SA-516
A/SA-516
A/SA-516
A519
A519
A519
A519
A519
60
65
55
60
65
1018 HR
1020 HR
1022 HR
1025 HR
1026 HR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-524
A/SA-524
A/SA-556
A/SA-556
A/SA-557
I
II
A2
B2
A2
1
1
1
1
A/SA-557
A/SA-562
B2
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-572
A/SA-572
A573
A573
42
50
58
65
1
1
A575
M1008
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
1
1
A575
1
1
A575
1
1
A575
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
1
1
1
1
A575
A575
A575
A575
M1017
M1020
M1023
M1025
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A576
A576
A576
A576
A576
A576
G10080
G10100
G10120
G10150
G10160
G10170
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A576
A576
A576
A576
A576
A576
A576
G10180
G10190
G10200
G10210
G10220
G10230
G10250
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-587
A/SA-618
A633
A633
A633
A/SA-656
A/SA-656
A/SA-660
...
III
A
C
D
Type 3, Gr. 50
Type 7, Gr. 50
WCA
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-662
A/SA-662
A/SA-663
A/SA-668
A/SA-668
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
A
B
...
Cl. B
Cl. C
CA55
CB60
1
1
1
1
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
CB65
CC60
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
CC65
CE55
CE60
A45
A50
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A55
B55
B60
B65
C55
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-675
C60
C65
E55
E60
45
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-675
A/SA-675
A/SA-675
50
55
60
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
1
1
A/SA-675
M1010
M1012
M1015
1
1
1
1
Grp.
No.
307
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
65
1
1
1
1
A694
A694
F42
F46
1
1
A694
F52
1
1
A/SA-696
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A707
A707
A707
A707
A707
A707
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-727
A/SA-765
A/SA-836
A992
A/SA-1008
A/SA-1008
A/SA-1008
A/SA-1011
A/SA-1011
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
5L
5L
5L
5L
5L
5L
5L
A (all grades)
A25 (all grades)
A25P (all grades)
B (all grades)
X42 (all grades)
X46 (all grades)
X52 (all grades)
1
1
1
1
1
1
MSS SP‐75
MSS SP‐75
MSS SP‐75
WPHY‐42
WPHY‐46
WPHY‐52
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SA/AS 1548
SA/AS 1548
SA/CSA G40.21
SA/CSA G40.21
SA/CSA G40.21
SA/EN 10028‐2
SA/EN 10028‐2
SA/EN 10028‐2
SA/EN 10028‐3
SA/EN 10216‐2
SA/EN 10216‐2
SA/EN 10222‐2
SA/EN 10025‐2
SA/EN 10217‐1
SA/GB 713
SA/IS 2062
SA/IS 2062
SA/IS 2062
PT430
PT460
Gr. 38W
Gr. 44W
Gr. 50W
P235GH
P265GH
P295GH
P275NH
P235GH
P265GH
P280GH
S235JR
P235TR2
Q345R
E250 A
E250 B
E250 C
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-105
A/SA-106
A/SA-178
A/SA-181
A/SA-210
...
C
D
Cl. 70
C
1
1
2
2
A/SA-216
A/SA-216
WCB
WCC
B
L1,
L1,
L2,
L2,
L3,
L3,
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
1
2
1
2
1
2
...
I
...
...
CS Type A
CS Type B
DS Type B
CS Type B
DS Type B
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
1
2
A/SA-234
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
WPC
1
1
2
2
A/SA-266
A/SA-266
2
3
1
1
2
2
A/SA-266
A/SA-299
4
A
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
A/SA-350
A/SA-352
A356
A/SA-372
LF2
LCC
1
B
1
1
1
2
2
2
A381
A381
A381
Y52
Y56
Y60
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-414
A/SA-414
A/SA-455
A/SA-487
A501
A/SA-508
F
G
...
Gr. 16, Cl. A
B
1
1
2
A/SA-508
1A
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
A513
A513
A/SA-515
A/SA-516
1020 CW
1025 CW
70
70
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
A519
A519
A519
A519
A519
A521
A/SA-537
A/SA-541
1018 CW
1020 CW
1022 CW
1025 CW
1026 CW
Cl. CE
Cl. 1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
A/SA-541
A/SA-556
A/SA-557
1A
C2
C2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-572
A573
A618
A633
A633
60
70
11
C
D
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
A/SA-656
A/SA-656
A/SA-660
A/SA-660
Type 3, Gr. 60
Type 7, Gr. 60
WCB
WCC
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-662
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
A/SA-671
C
CB70
CC70
CD70
CK75
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-675
B70
C70
D70
N75
70
308
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
(Cont'd)
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A694
A694
A694
CMS‐75
CMSH‐70
F56
F60
F65
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
A/SA-696
A707
A707
A/SA-737
C
L2, Cl. 3
L3, Cl. 3
B
1
1
2
2
A/SA-738
A/SA-765
A
II
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
API 5L
API 5L
API 5L
MSS SP‐75
MSS SP‐75
MSS SP‐75
X56 (all grades)
X60 (all grades)
X65 (all grades)
WPHY‐56
WPHY‐60
WPHY‐65
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
SA/AS 1548
SA/EN 10028-2
SA/EN 10222-2
SA/GB 713
SA/GB 713
SA/JIS G3118
PT490
P355GH
P305GH
Q345R
Q370R
SGV480
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-841
A/SA-299
A/SA-333
A/SA-350
A513
A/SA-537
A/SA-537
A, Cl. 1
B
10
LF6, Cl. 2
1026 CW
Cl. 2
Cl. 3
1
3
A633
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
A/SA-656
A/SA-656
A/SA-671
A/SA-672
Type 3, Gr. 70
Type 7, Gr. 70
CD80
D80
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-691
A694
A/SA-737
A/SA-738
A/SA-738
A/SA-765
A/SA-812
CMSH‐80
F70
C
B
C
IV
65
1
3
A/SA-841
B, Cl. 2
1
1
1
1
3
3
4
4
API 5L
MSS SP‐75
A/SA-656
A/SA-656
X70 (all grades)
WPHY‐70
Type 3, Gr. 80
Type 7, Gr. 80
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
A/SA-724
A/SA-724
A/SA-724
A/SA-812
API 5L
A
B
C
80
X80 (all grades)
3
3
1
1
A/SA-204
A/SA-209
A
T1
E
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
3
1
A/SA-209
3
1
A/SA-209
3
1
A/SA-213
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
T1a
T1b
T2
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-217
A/SA-234
A/SA-250
A/SA-250
A/SA-250
WC1
WP1
T1
T1a
T1b
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-250
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-352
A356
T2
P1
P2
P15
LC1
2
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-387
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
FP1
FP2
Gr. 2, Cl. 1
CP1
CP2
3
1
A/SA-426
CP15
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
A588
A588
A/SA-672
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
SA/EN 10216-2
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-204
A/SA-204
A/SA-302
F1
F2
B
C
A
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-336
A/SA-387
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
F1
Gr. 2, Cl. 2
H75
L70
L75
3
3
3
2
2
2
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A108
A/SA-302
A/SA-302
A/SA-302
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
8620 CW
B
C
D
Gr. 2, Cl. A
Gr. 2, Cl. B
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-487
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
Gr. 4, Cl. A
2, Cl. 1
2, Cl. 2
3, Cl. 1
3, Cl. 2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-508
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
K11430
K12043
L65
1
/2CR
CM‐65
16Mo3
/2CR, Cl. 2
CM‐70
CM‐75
4N, Cl. 3
Type A, Cl.
Type A, Cl.
Type B, Cl.
Type B, Cl.
1
2
1
2
309
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
(Cont'd)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-541
Type C, Cl. 1
Type C, Cl. 2
Type D, Cl. 1
Type D, Cl. 2
Type E, Cl. 1
Type E, Cl. 2
2, Cl. 1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-543
A/SA-543
2, Cl. 2
3, Cl. 1
3, Cl. 2
B Cl. 3
C Cl. 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
A/SA-672
H80
J80
J90
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
4
1
A199
T11
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-202
A/SA-202
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-217
A
B
T11
T12
WC4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-217
A/SA-217
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-250
A/SA-250
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
P11
P12
F11, Cl. 2
F11, Cl. 3
F11, Cl. 1
4
1
A/SA-336
F12
4
4
4
1
1
1
A356
A356
A356
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
FP11
FP12
11, Cl. 1
11, Cl. 2
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-541
12, Cl. 1
12, Cl. 2
CP11
CP12
11, Cl. 4
4
4
1
1
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
1CR
11/4 CR
F11,
F11,
F11,
F12,
F12,
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
Cl.
1
2
3
1
2
WC5
WC6
WP11, Cl.
WP12, Cl.
WP11, Cl.
WP12, Cl.
T11
T12
6
8
9
1
1
3
2
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
4
1
A/SA-739
4
1
SA/EN 10028-2
4
1
SA/EN 10028-2
4
1
SA/EN 10216-2
4
1
SA/EN 10222-2
4
1
SA/GB 713
4
2
A/SA-333
4
2
A/SA-423
4
2
A/SA-423
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
B11
13CrMo4-5
13CrMoSi5-5+QT
13CrMo4-5
13CrMo4-5
15CrMoR
4
1
2
F21
F22, Cl. 1
F22, Cl. 3
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
(Cont'd)
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-234
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
WP9
WP5, cl.3
WP9, cl.3
P5
P5b
P5c
P9
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
F5
F5A
F9
FP5
FP9
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-691
5, Cl. 1
5, Cl. 2
9, Cl. 1
9, Cl. 2
CP5
CP5b
CP9
5CR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-487
F3V
F3VCb
F22V
F3V
F3VCb
F22V
Gr. 8 Cl. A
5A
5A
5A
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
5A
1
A199
T21
5A
5A
5A
1
1
1
A199
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
T22
T21
T22
5A
5A
1
1
A/SA-217
A/SA-234
WC9
WP22, Cl. 1
5A
5A
5A
5A
1
1
1
1
A/SA-234
A/SA-250
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
WP22, Cl. 3
T22
P21
P22
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A/SA-336
A356
A/SA-369
F21, Cl.
F21, Cl.
F22, Cl.
F22, Cl.
10
FP21
3
1
3
1
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-369
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
A/SA-387
FP22
21, Cl. 1
21, Cl. 2
22, Cl. 1
22, Cl. 2
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
A/SA-541
3V
3VCb
22, Cl. 3
3V
3VCb
22V
22, Cl. 3
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-426
A/SA-426
A/SA-691
A/SA-691
A/SA-739
SA/EN 10028-2
CP21
CP22
21/4CR
3CR
B22
10CrMo9-10
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A, Cl. 4
A, Cl. 4a
B, Cl. 4
B, Cl. 4a
C, Cl. 4
5A
1
SA/EN 10216-2
10CrMo9-10
5A
1
SA/EN 10222-2
11CrMo9-10
5B
5B
5B
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F5
F5a
F9
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-832
A/SA-832
A/SA-832
C, Cl. 4a
D, Cl. 4a
E, Cl. 4a
21V
22V
23V
5B
1
A199
T5
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
5B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A199
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-217
A/SA-217
A/SA-234
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-541
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A/SA-542
A, Cl. 3
B, Cl. 3
C, Cl. 3
Gr. 8 Cl. B
Gr. 8 Cl. C
22, Cl. 4
A, Cl. 1
B, Cl. 1
C, Cl. 1
5C
5C
5
5
A/SA-541
A/SA-542
22, Cl. 5
A, Cl. 2
T9
T5
T5b
T5c
T9
C5
C12
WP5
310
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
5C
5
A/SA-542
5C
5
A/SA-542
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-240
A/SA-268
A/SA-276
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
F6a, Cl. 1
410
TP410
TP410
403
410
6
6
6
2
2
2
A/SA-182
A/SA-240
A/SA-268
F429
429
TP429
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-217
A/SA-336
A/SA-426
F6a, Cl. 2
F6b
F6a, Cl. 3
F6a, Cl. 4
CA15
F6
CPCA15
6
6
6
6
3
3
3
3
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
CA15 Cl. B
CA15 Cl. C
CA15 Cl. D
CA15M Cl. A
6
4
A/SA-182
F6NM
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
A/SA-240
A/SA-268
A/SA-352
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
A/SA-731
A/SA-815
S41500
S41500
CA6NM
414
S41500
CA6NM Cl. A
CA6NM Cl. B
S41500
S41500
7
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
Type 405
Type 409
Type 410S
S40800
TP405
7
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-268
A/SA-479
A/SA-1010
A/SA-1010
SA/JIS G4303
7
7
7
7
7
7
2
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-182
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-268
F430
S44400
Type 430
Type 439
S43932
18Cr–2Mo
7
7
7
7
7
7
2
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
TP430Ti
TP430
TP439
430
439
S44400
7
2
A/SA-731
18Cr–2Mo
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
7
2
A/SA-731
7
2
A/SA-803
8
1
A167
B, Cl. 2
C, Cl. 2
6
6
6
6
6
6
Grp.
No.
TP409
405
40
50
SUS405
311
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
TP439
TP439
Type 302B
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
S30600
F304
F304H
F304L
F304LN
F304N
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F316
F316H
F316L
F316LN
F316N
8
1
A/SA-182
F317
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F317L
F321
F321H
F347
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
F347H
F348
F348H
TP304
TP304H
8
8
8
1
1
1
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
TP304L
TP304LN
TP304N
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
S32615
TP316
TP316H
TP316Ti
TP316L
TP316LN
TP316N
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
TP321
TP321H
TP347
TP347H
TP347HFG
TP347LN
TP317
TP317L
8
8
8
1
1
1
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
TP348
TP348H
XM‐15
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
A269
A269
A269
A269
TP304
TP304L
TP316
TP316L
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-276
A/SA-276
A/SA-276
A/SA-276
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
TP304
TP304L
TP316
TP316L
S30500
S30600
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
(Cont'd)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
S30601
S31753
S32615
Type 301
Type 302
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 304
Type 304H
Type 304L
Type 304LN
Type 304N
Type 316
Type 316Cb
Type 316H
Type 316L
Type 316LN
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 316N
Type 316Ti
Type 317
Type 317L
Type 321
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
Type 321H
Type 347
Type 347H
Type 348
Type 348H
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
Type XM‐15
Type XM‐21
TP304
TP304H
TP304L
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
TP304LN
TP304N
TP316
TP316H
TP316L
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A269
A269
A269
A269
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
A276
A276
A276
A276
TP304
TP304L
TP316
TP316L
8
1
A/SA-312
S30600
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
8
1
A/SA-312
8
1
A/SA-312
8
1
A/SA-312
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
S32615
TP304
TP304H
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A312
TP304L
TP304LN
TP304N
TP316
TP316H
S31635
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
TP316L
TP316LN
TP316N
TP317
TP317L
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
TP321
TP321H
TP347
TP347H
TP347LN
TP348
TP348H
TP XM‐15
CF3
CF3A
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
CF3M
CF8
CF8A
CF8C
CF8M
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
CF10
CF10M
CG8M
CF10MC
8
8
1
1
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
304
304H
TP316LN
TP316N
TP317
TP317L
TP321
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
304L
304LN
304N
316
316H
TP321H
TP347
TP347H
TP348
TP348H
TP XM‐15
TP304
TP304L
TP316
TP316L
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
316L
316LN
316N
321
347
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-358
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
348
16‐8‐2H
TP304
TP304H
TP304LN
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
TP304N
TP316
TP316H
TP316LN
TP316N
312
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
(Cont'd)
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
TP321
TP321H
TP347
TP347H
TP348
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-376
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
16‐8‐2H
WP304
WP304H
WP304L
WP304LN
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
WP304N
WP316
WP316H
WP316L
WP316LN
WP316N
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
WP317
WP317L
WP321
WP321H
WP347
WP347H
WP348
WP348H
TP304
TP304L
TP316
TP316L
TP317
TP321
TP347
TP348
CPF3
CPF3A
CPF3M
CPF8
CPF8A
CPF8C
CPF8M
CPF10MC
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
302
304
304H
304L
304LN
304N
316
316Cb
316H
316L
316LN
316N
316Ti
321
321H
347
347H
348
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
8
1
A/SA-479
8
1
A/SA-479
8
1
A/SA-479
8
1
A/SA-666
8
1
A/SA-666
8
1
A/SA-666
8
1
A/SA-666
8
1
A/SA-666
8
1
A/SA-666
8
1
A/SA-666
8
1
A/SA-666
8
1
A/SA-688
8
1
A/SA-688
8
1
A/SA-688
8
1
A/SA-688
8
1
A/SA-688
8
1
A/SA-688
8
1
A/SA-688
8
1
A/SA-688
8
1
A/SA-813
313
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
348H
S30600
S32615
302
304
304L
304LN
304N
316
316L
316N
TP304
TP304L
TP304LN
TP304N
TP316
TP316L
TP316LN
TP316N
TP304
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
TP304H
TP304L
TP304LN
TP304N
TP316
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
TP316H
TP316L
TP316LN
TP316N
TP317
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
TP317L
TP321
TP321H
TP347
TP347H
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
TP348
TP348H
TPXM‐15
TP304
TP304H
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
TP304L
TP304LN
TP304N
TP316
TP316H
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
TP316L
TP316LN
TP316N
TP317
TP317L
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
TP321
TP321H
TP347
TP347H
TP348
8
8
1
1
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
TP348H
TPXM‐15
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
8
1
A/SA-965
8
1
A/SA-965
8
1
A/SA-965
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
F304LN
F304N
F316
F316H
F316L
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
F316LN
F316N
F321
F321H
F347
F347H
F348
F348H
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
SA/EN
10028‐7
10028‐7
10028-7
10028-7
10028-7
10028-7
10028-7
10028-7
10028-7
X5CrNi18‐10
X5CrNiMo17‐12‐2
X2CrNi18-9
X5CrNiN19-9
X2CrNiN18-10
X2CrNiMo17-12-2
X2CrNiMoN17-11-2
X2CrNiMoN17-13-3
X6CrNiTi18-10
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SA/EN 10088-2
SA/JIS G4303
SA/JIS G4303
SA/JIS G4303
SA/JIS G4303
SA/JIS G4303
SA/JIS G4303
SA/JIS G4303
X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2
SUS302
SUS304
SUS304L
SUS316
SUS316L
SUS321
SUS347
8
8
8
2
2
2
A167
A167
A167
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F10
F45
F310
F310MoLN
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
S30815
TP309Cb
TP309H
TP309S
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
TP310Cb
TP310S
TP309HCb
TP310H
TP310MoLN
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-213
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
TP310HCb
S30815
Type 309Cb
Type 309H
Type 309HCb
8
2
A/SA-240
Type 309S
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
8
2
A/SA-240
8
2
A/SA-240
8
2
A/SA-240
8
2
A/SA-240
F304
F304H
F304L
8
8
8
8
8
Grp.
No.
Type 308
Type 309
Type 310
314
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
Type 310Cb
Type 310HCb
Type 310MoLN
Type 310S
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
S30815
TP309Cb
TP309H
TP309HCb
TP309S
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-312
TP310Cb
TP310H
TP310S
TP310MoLN
S30815
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
TP309Cb
TP309H
TP309HCb
TP309S
TP310Cb
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
TP310H
TP310HCb
TP310S
TP310MoLN
8
8
8
2
2
2
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
CH8
CH20
CK20
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
CE20N
CH10
HK30
HK40
8
8
2
2
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
309
309Cb
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
309S
310Cb
310S
S30815
WP309
WP310S
S30815
TP309Cb
TP309S
TP310Cb
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-409
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
A/SA-451
TP310S
CPH8
CPH20
CPK20
CPE20N
8
2
SA-479
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-479
SA/JIS G4303
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
SA/JIS G4303
A/SA-479
A/SA-813
309Cb
309S
SUS3095
310Cb
310S
SUS3105
S30815
S30815
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
(Cont'd)
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-814
TP309Cb
TP309S
TP310Cb
TP310S
S30815
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-965
TP309Cb
TP309S
TP310Cb
TP310S
F310
8
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
FXM‐11
FXM‐19
TP201
TP202
XM‐19
S31042
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
S20100
S21800
S20153
Type 202
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
S20400
Type XM‐17
Type XM‐18
Type XM‐19
Type XM‐29
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-312
TP201
TP202
TPXM‐19
TPXM‐29
TPXM‐11
8
8
8
3
3
3
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-351
TPXM‐19
TPXM‐29
CG6MMN
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-403
A/SA-479
XM‐19
XM‐29
WPXM‐19
S21800
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-666
A/SA-666
A/SA-688
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
XM‐11
XM‐17
XM‐18
XM‐19
XM‐29
201
XM‐11
XM‐29
TPXM‐11
TPXM‐19
TPXM‐29
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
A/SA-965
A/SA-965
TPXM‐11
TPXM‐19
TPXM‐29
FXM‐11
FXM‐19
8
8
4
4
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F44
S32053
315
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
(Cont'd)
8
8
8
4
4
4
A/SA-182
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
S34565
S31725
S31726
8
4
A/SA-213
S34565
8
8
4
4
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
S31254
S31725
8
8
4
4
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
S31726
S32053
8
4
A/SA-240
S34565
8
8
8
8
4
4
4
4
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
A/SA-249
S31254
S31725
S31726
S32053
8
4
A/SA-249
S34565
8
8
8
8
8
4
4
4
4
4
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
S31254
S31725
S31726
S32053
S34565
8
4
A/SA-351
J93254
8
4
A/SA-358
S31254
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-358
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-376
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-403
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-409
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
S31725
S31726
S32053
S31725
S31726
S34565
S31254
S32053
S34565
S31254
S31725
S31726
S32053
S34565
S31254
S31725
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-813
A/SA-813
A/SA-814
A/SA-814
SA-965
S31726
S32053
S34565
S31254
S32053
S31254
S32053
F46
9A
9A
9A
9A
9A
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-203
A/SA-203
A/SA-234
A/SA-333
FR
A
B
WPR
7
9A
9A
9A
1
1
1
A/SA-333
A/SA-334
A/SA-334
9
7
9
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
9A
1
A/SA-350
9A
1
A/SA-350
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
1
1
1
A/SA-350
A/SA-352
A/SA-420
9A
9A
1
1
A714
A714
9B
9B
9B
9B
9B
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-203
A/SA-203
A/SA-203
A/SA-333
A/SA-334
D
E
F
3
3
9B
9B
9B
9B
1
1
1
1
A/SA-350
A/SA-352
A/SA-420
A/SA-765
LF3, Cl. 2
LC3
WPL3
III
9C
1
A/SA-352
LC4
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-225
A/SA-225
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
SA/NF A 36-215
10B
1
A/SA-213
T17
10C
1
A/SA-612
...
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
A/SA-182
F53
F50
F51
F54
F55
S32202
F60
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
S31200
S31260
S31803
S32003
S32101
S32202
S32205
S32550
S32750
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
S32760
S32906
S32950
Type 329
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-276
A/SA-351
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
A/SA-479
S32205
CD3MWCuN
S31803
S32202
S32101
S32205
S32550
S32750
S32906
10H
1
A/SA-789
S31200
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
10H
1
A/SA-789
10H
1
A/SA-789
10H
1
A/SA-789
10H
1
A/SA-789
10H
1
A/SA-789
10H
1
A/SA-789
10H
1
A/SA-789
10H
1
A/SA-789
LF5, Cl. 1
LF5, Cl. 2
9A
9A
9A
Grp.
No.
LF9
LC2
WPL9
Gr. V
Gr. V, Tp. E
C
D
Gr. 1, Cl. A
Gr. 1, Cl. B
NJ4
316
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
S31260
S31500
S31803
S32003
S32101
S32202
S32205
S32304
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
A/SA-789
S32550
S32750
S32760
S32900
S32906
S32950
S39274
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
S31200
S31260
S31500
S31803
S32003
S32101
S32202
S32205
S32304
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
A/SA-790
S32550
S32750
S32760
S32900
S32906
S32950
S39274
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-815
A/SA-815
A/SA-815
A/SA-815
A815
A/SA-815
A890
A890
S31803
S32202
S32101
S32205
S32750
S32760
J93380
J92205
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
1
1
1
1
1
1
A928
A928
A/SA-995
A/SA-995
A/SA-995
A/SA-995
S32760
S32205
J93345
J93372
J93380
J92205
10I
10I
10I
10I
10I
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-268
FXM‐27Cb
S44635
Type XM‐27
Type XM‐33
25‐4‐4
10I
10I
10I
10I
10I
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-336
TP446‐1
TP446‐2
TPXM‐27
TPXM‐33
FXM‐27Cb
10I
10I
1
1
A/SA-479
A/SA-731
XM‐27
TPXM‐27
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
10I
1
A/SA-731
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-240
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-479
A/SA-731
S44700
S44700
S44735
S44700
S44700
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-268
A/SA-268
A/SA-479
S44660
S44800
S44660
S44800
S44800
10K
10K
10K
1
1
1
A/SA-731
A/SA-731
A/SA-803
S44660
S44800
S44660
11A
11A
11A
11A
11A
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-333
A/SA-334
A/SA-353
A/SA-420
A/SA-522
8
8
...
WPL8
Type I
11A
11A
11A
1
1
1
A/SA-522
A/SA-553
A/SA-553
Type II
Type I
Type II
11A
2
A/SA-645
A
11A
11A
3
3
A/SA-487
A/SA-487
Gr. 4, Cl. B
Gr. 4, Cl. E
11A
11A
11A
11A
11A
4
4
4
4
4
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-533
A/SA-672
Type A, Cl. 3
Type B, Cl. 3
Type C, Cl. 3
Type D, Cl. 3
J100
11A
11A
11A
11A
11A
11A
11A
5
5
5
5
5
1
1
A/SA-352
A/SA-508
A/SA-508
A/SA-543
A/SA-543
SA/EN 10028-4
SA/EN 10028-4
11B
11B
11B
1
1
1
A514
A/SA-517
A/SA-592
A
A
A
11B
11B
11B
2
2
2
A514
A/SA-517
A/SA-592
E
E
E
11B
11B
11B
3
3
3
A514
A/SA-517
A/SA-592
F
F
F
11B
11B
4
4
A514
A/SA-517
B
B
11B
11B
8
8
A514
A/SA-517
P
P
11B
9
A514
Q
11B
10
A/SA-508
Spec. No.
Steel and Steel Alloys (Cont'd)
11B
10
A/SA-508
11B
10
A/SA-543
11B
10
A/SA-543
11C
1
A/SA-859
TPXM‐33
10J
10J
10J
10J
10J
Grp.
No.
15E
1
A/SA-182
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
15E
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A/SA-182
A/SA-213
A/SA-213
A/SA-217
A/SA-234
A/SA-335
A/SA-335
A/SA-336
A356
A/SA-369
A/SA-369
A/SA-691
A/SA-387
SA/EN 10222-2
SA/EN 10216-2
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
5, Cl. 2
B Cl. 2
C Cl. 2
A
F91
F92
T91
T92
C12A
WP91
P91
P92
F91
12A
FP91
FP92
91
Gr. 91, Cl. 2
X10CrMoVNb9-1
X10CrMoVNb9-1
Aluminum and Aluminum‐Base Alloys
LC2‐1
4N, Cl. 1
5, Cl. 1
B Cl. 1
C Cl. 1
X8Ni9
X7Ni9
4N, Cl. 2
317
21
21
21
21
21
21
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-26
B/SB-26
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
A03560
A24430
A91060
A91100
A93003
A95050
21
21
...
...
B/SB-210
B/SB-210
A91060
A93003
21
21
21
21
21
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-221
B/SB-221
B/SB-221
B/SB-234
B/SB-234
A91060
A91100
A93003
A91060
A93003
21
21
21
21
...
...
...
...
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-247
A91060
A91100
A93003
A93003
21
21
21
21
21
21
...
...
...
...
...
...
B345
B345
B361
B361
B361
B361
A91060
A93003
A83003
A91060
A91100
A93003
21
21
21
...
...
...
B491
B547
B547
A93003
A93003
A83003
22
22
22
22
22
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
A93004
A95052
A95154
A95254
A95454
22
22
22
...
...
...
B/SB-209
B/SB-210
B/SB-210
A95652
A95052
A95154
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Aluminum and Aluminum‐Base Alloys
22
...
B/SB-221
22
...
B/SB-221
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
(Cont'd)
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-234
B/SB-234
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B361
B547
A95052
A95454
A95052
A95454
A95154
A95454
23
23
...
...
B/SB-209
B/SB-210
A96061
A96061
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-210
B/SB-211
B/SB-221
B/SB-221
B/SB-234
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-247
A96063
A96061
A96061
A96063
A96061
A96061
A96063
A96061
23
...
B/SB-308
A96061
23
23
23
23
23
...
...
...
...
...
B345
B345
B361
B361
B547
A96061
A96063
A96061
A96063
A96061
25
25
25
...
...
...
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
B/SB-209
A95083
A95086
A95456
25
25
25
...
...
...
B210
B210
B210
A95083
A95086
A95456
25
...
B/SB-221
25
25
25
25
25
...
...
...
...
...
25
25
25
25
Spec. No.
Copper and Copper‐Base Alloys
31
...
B68
31
...
B/SB-75
31
...
B/SB-75
A95154
A95454
22
22
22
22
22
22
Grp.
No.
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
(Cont'd)
C12200
C10200
C12000
31
31
...
...
B/SB-75
B/SB-75
C12200
C14200
31
31
31
31
31
31
...
...
...
...
...
...
B88
B88
B88
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
C10200
C12000
C12200
C10200
C12000
C12200
31
31
31
31
...
...
...
...
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
C14200
C19200
C10200
C10400
31
31
31
31
31
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
B/SB-152
C10500
C10700
C11000
C12200
C12300
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-152
B/SB-187
B/SB-187
B280
B280
B280
B/SB-283
B302
C14200
C10200
C11000
C10200
C12000
C12200
C11000
C12000
A95083
31
31
31
31
...
...
...
...
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
C10200
C12000
C12200
C14200
B/SB-221
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-241
B/SB-247
A95456
A95083
A95086
A95456
A95083
31
31
31
31
31
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-359
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
C19200
C10200
C12000
C12200
C14200
...
...
...
...
B345
B345
B361
B547
A95083
A95086
A95083
A95083
31
31
31
...
...
...
B/SB-395
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
C19200
C12200
C19400
25
25
25
...
...
...
B/SB-928
B/SB-928
B/SB-928
A95083
A95086
A95456
32
32
32
32
32
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-43
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
C23000
C23000
C28000
C44300
C44400
26
26
26
...
...
...
B/SB-26
B/SB-26
SB/EN 1706
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-135
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
C44500
C68700
C23000
C36500
C44300
C44400
C44500
32
32
...
...
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
C46400
C46500
A24430
A03560
EN AC 43000
Copper and Copper‐Base Alloys
31
31
31
...
...
...
B/SB-42
B/SB-42
B/SB-42
C10200
C12000
C12200
31
31
...
...
B68
B68
C10200
C12000
318
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Copper and Copper‐Base Alloys
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
(Cont'd)
32
32
...
...
B/SB-283
B/SB-283
C67500
C46400
32
...
B/SB-359
C23000
32
32
32
32
32
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
B/SB-395
C44300
C44400
C44500
C68700
C23000
32
32
32
32
32
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-543
C44300
C44400
C44500
C68700
C23000
32
32
32
32
...
...
...
...
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
C44300
C44400
C44500
C68700
33
33
33
33
33
33
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-96
B/SB-98
B/SB-98
B/SB-98
B/SB-283
B/SB-315
C65500
C65100
C65500
C66100
C65500
C65500
34
34
34
34
34
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
B/SB-111
C70400
C70600
C71000
C71500
C71640
34
34
34
34
34
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-111
B/SB-151
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
B/SB-359
C72200
C70600
C70600
C71500
C70400
34
...
B/SB-359
C70600
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-359
B/SB-359
B/SB-369
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-395
B/SB-466
B/SB-466
B/SB-466
C71000
C71500
C96200
C70600
C71000
C71500
C70600
C71000
C71500
34
34
34
34
34
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-467
B/SB-467
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
B/SB-543
C70600
C71500
C70400
C70600
C71500
34
...
B/SB-543
C71640
34
34
35
35
...
...
...
...
B/SB-956
B/SB-956
B/SB-111
B/SB-148
C70600
C71500
C60800
C95200
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Copper and Copper‐Base Alloys
35
...
B/SB-148
35
...
B/SB-148
35
...
B/SB-148
35
...
B/SB-148
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
(Cont'd)
C95400
C95300
C95500
C95600
35
35
...
...
B/SB-150
B/SB-150
C61400
C62300
35
35
35
35
35
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-150
B/SB-150
B/SB-169
B/SB-171
B/SB-171
C63000
C64200
C61400
C61400
C63000
35
35
35
35
35
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-271
B/SB-271
B/SB-359
B/SB-395
B/SB-505
C95200
C95400
C60800
C60800
C95200
Nickel and Nickel‐Base Alloys
319
41
41
41
41
41
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-160
B/SB-160
B/SB-161
B/SB-161
B/SB-162
N02200
N02201
N02200
N02201
N02200
41
41
41
41
41
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-162
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
N02201
N02200
N02201
N02200
N02201
41
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B725
B/SB-127
B/SB-163
B/SB-164
B/SB-164
B/SB-165
B/SB-366
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
B/SB-564
N02200
N04400
N04400
N04400
N04405
N04400
N04400
N04020
N24130
N24135
N04400
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-166
B/SB-166
B/SB-166
B/SB-166
N06600
N06601
N06690
N06600
N06601
N06617
N06690
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
B/SB-167
B/SB-167
B/SB-167
B/SB-167
N06600
N06601
N06617
N06690
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
B/SB-168
B/SB-168
B/SB-168
B/SB-168
N06600
N06601
N06617
N06690
43
...
B/SB-366
N06002
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Nickel and Nickel‐Base Alloys (Cont'd)
43
...
B/SB-366
43
...
B/SB-366
43
...
B/SB-366
43
...
B/SB-366
43
...
B/SB-366
43
...
B/SB-366
43
...
B/SB-366
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-435
B/SB-435
N06600
N06625
N10276
N06002
N06230
43
43
43
...
...
...
B/SB-443
B/SB-444
B/SB-446
N06625
N06625
N06625
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
A/SA-494
N06022
N06035
N06059
N06200
N06686
N10276
N06040
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
A/SA-494
B/SB-516
B/SB-517
N26022
N26455
N26625
N06600
N06600
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
N06022
N06035
N06059
N06200
N06210
N06230
N06600
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
N06617
N06625
N06686
N06690
N10276
43
43
...
...
B/SB-572
B/SB-572
N06002
N06230
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
B/SB-574
N06022
N06035
N06059
N06200
N06210
N06455
N06686
N10276
43
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
B/SB-575
N06022
N06035
N06059
N06200
N06210
N06455
Spec. No.
Nickel and Nickel‐Base Alloys (Cont'd)
43
...
B/SB-575
43
...
B/SB-575
N06022
N06035
N06059
N06200
N06210
N06230
N06455
43
43
43
43
43
Grp.
No.
320
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
N06686
N10276
43
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
N06002
N06022
N06035
N06059
N06200
N06210
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
N06230
N06455
N06686
N10276
43
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
N06002
N06022
N06035
N06059
N06200
N06210
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
N06230
N06455
N06686
N10276
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
N06002
N06022
N06035
N06059
N06200
43
43
...
...
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
N06210
N06230
43
43
43
43
43
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-704
B/SB-705
N06455
N06686
N10276
N06625
N06625
44
44
44
44
...
...
...
...
B/SB-333
B/SB-333
B/SB-333
B/SB-333
N10001
N10629
N10665
N10675
44
44
44
44
...
...
...
...
B/SB-335
B/SB-335
B/SB-335
B/SB-335
N10001
N10629
N10665
N10675
44
44
44
44
44
44
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
N10001
N10003
N10242
N10629
N10665
N10675
44
44
...
...
B/SB-434
B/SB-434
N10003
N10242
44
44
44
44
...
...
...
...
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
A/SA-494
N10629
N10665
N10675
N30007
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Nickel and Nickel‐Base Alloys (Cont'd)
44
...
A/SA-494
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
...
...
...
...
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
N10242
N10629
N10665
N10675
44
44
...
...
B/SB-573
B/SB-573
N10003
N10242
44
44
44
44
44
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
N10001
N10242
N10629
N10665
N10675
44
44
44
44
44
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
N10001
N10242
N10629
N10665
N10675
44
44
44
44
44
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
N10001
N10242
N10629
N10665
N10675
45
...
A/SA-240
S31277
45
...
A/SA-249
N08904
45
45
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
B/SB-163
N08120
N08800
N08801
N08810
N08811
N08825
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
A/SA-351
CN3MN
N08007
N08151
N08603
45
45
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
N06007
N06030
N06985
N08020
N08031
N08120
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
N08367
N08800
N08825
N08925
R20033
R30556
N08926
45
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-407
B/SB-407
B/SB-407
B/SB-407
B/SB-407
N08120
N08800
N08801
N08810
N08811
45
...
B/SB-408
N08120
Spec. No.
Nickel and Nickel‐Base Alloys (Cont'd)
45
...
B/SB-408
45
...
B/SB-408
45
...
B/SB-408
N30107
44
44
44
44
Grp.
No.
321
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
N08800
N08810
N08811
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-409
B/SB-409
B/SB-409
B/SB-409
N08120
N08800
N08810
N08811
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-423
B/SB-424
B/SB-425
B/SB-435
N08825
N08825
N08825
R30556
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
A/SA-182
A/SA-240
A/SA-240
A/SA-249
A/SA-312
A/SA-312
A/SA-358
A479
A/SA-813
A/SA-814
B/SB-462
B/SB-462
N06030
N08020
N08031
N08904
N08367
N08904
N08367
N08367
N08904
N08367
N08904
N08367
N08367
N08367
R20033
45
45
45
...
...
...
B/SB-463
B/SB-463
B/SB-463
N08020
N08024
N08026
45
45
45
...
...
...
B/SB-464
B/SB-464
B/SB-464
N08020
N08024
N08026
45
45
45
...
...
...
B/SB-468
B/SB-468
B/SB-468
N08020
N08024
N08026
45
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-473
A/SA-494
B/SB-514
B/SB-514
B/SB-514
N08020
N08826
N08120
N08800
N08810
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-515
B/SB-515
B/SB-515
B/SB-515
N08120
N08800
N08810
N08811
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
N08031
N08120
N08367
N08800
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
N08810
N08811
N08825
R20033
45
45
...
...
B/SB-572
B/SB-581
R30556
N06007
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Spec. No.
Nickel and Nickel‐Base Alloys (Cont'd)
45
...
B/SB-581
45
...
B/SB-581
45
...
B/SB-581
45
...
B/SB-581
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-582
B/SB-582
B/SB-582
B/SB-582
B/SB-599
N06007
N06030
N06975
N06985
N08700
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
N06007
N06030
N06975
N06985
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
B/SB-619
N08031
N08320
R20033
R30556
45
45
...
...
B/SB-620
B/SB-621
N08320
N08320
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
N06007
N06030
N06975
N06985
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
B/SB-622
N08031
N08320
R20033
R30556
45
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-625
B/SB-625
B/SB-625
B/SB-625
B/SB-625
N08031
N08904
N08925
R20033
N08926
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
N06007
N06030
N06975
N06985
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
B/SB-626
N08031
N08320
R20033
R30556
45
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-649
B/SB-649
B/SB-649
B/SB-649
B/SB-668
N08904
N08925
R20033
N08926
N08028
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-672
B/SB-673
B/SB-673
B/SB-673
B/SB-674
B/SB-674
B/SB-674
N08700
N08904
N08925
N08926
N08904
N08925
N08926
45
45
...
...
B/SB-675
B/SB-676
N08367
N08367
Spec. No.
Nickel and Nickel‐Base Alloys (Cont'd)
45
...
B/SB-677
45
...
B/SB-677
45
...
B/SB-677
45
...
B/SB-688
N06030
N06975
N06985
N08031
45
45
45
45
45
Grp.
No.
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
N08904
N08925
N08926
N08367
45
45
45
45
45
45
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-690
B/SB-691
B/SB-704
B/SB-705
B/SB-709
B/SB-729
N08367
N08367
N08825
N08825
N08028
N08020
46
46
46
...
...
...
B/SB-166
B/SB-167
B/SB-168
N06045
N06045
N06045
46
46
46
...
...
...
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
B/SB-366
N06045
N08330
N12160
46
46
46
46
46
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-435
B/SB-462
B/SB-511
B/SB-516
B/SB-517
N12160
N06045
N08330
N06045
N06045
46
46
46
46
46
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-535
B/SB-536
B/SB-564
B/SB-564
B/SB-572
N08330
N08330
N06045
N12160
N12160
46
46
46
46
...
...
...
...
B/SB-619
B/SB-622
B/SB-626
B/SB-710
N12160
N12160
N12160
N08330
49
49
...
...
B/SB-815
B/SB-818
R31233
R31233
Titanium and ‐Base Alloys
322
51
51
51
51
51
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
R50250
R50400
R52250
R52252
R52254
51
51
51
...
...
...
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
R52400
R52402
R52404
51
51
51
51
51
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
R50250
R50400
R52400
R52402
R52404
51
51
51
51
51
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
R50250
R50400
R50402
R52400
R52404
51
51
...
...
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
R50250
R50400
2013 SECTION IX
P‐No.
Grp.
No.
Titanium and ‐Base
51
...
51
...
51
...
Spec. No.
Alloys (Cont'd)
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
B/SB-367
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
P‐No.
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
B/SB-381
R50250
R50400
R50402
R52400
R52404
51
51
51
51
...
...
...
...
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
R50250
R50400
R52400
R52404
51
51
51
51
...
...
...
...
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
B/SB-862
R50250
R50400
R52400
R52404
52
52
52
52
...
...
...
...
B/SB-265
B/SB-265
B/SB-338
B/SB-338
R50550
R53400
R50550
R53400
52
52
52
52
52
52
...
...
...
...
...
…
B/SB-348
B/SB-348
B/SB-363
B/SB-363
B/SB-367
B/SB-381
R50550
R53400
R50550
R53400
R50550
R50550
52
52
52
...
...
...
B/SB-381
B/SB-861
B/SB-861
R53400
R50550
R53400
Spec. No.
Titanium and ‐Base Alloys (Cont'd)
52
...
B/SB-862
52
...
B/SB-862
R52400
R52404
R50400
51
51
51
51
51
Grp.
No.
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-265
B/SB-338
B/SB-348
B/SB-363
B/SB-381
B/SB-861
B/SB-862
B/SB-265
B/SB-338
B/SB-348
B/SB-363
B/SB-381
B/SB-861
B/SB-862
Type, Grade, or UNS
No.
R50550
R53400
R56320
R56320
R56320
R56320
R56320
R56320
R56320
R56323
R56323
R56323
R56323
R56323
R56323
R56323
Zirconium and Zirconium‐Base Alloys
323
61
61
61
61
61
61
...
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-493
B/SB-523
B/SB-550
B/SB-551
B/SB-653
B/SB-658
R60702
R60702
R60702
R60702
R60702
R60702
62
62
62
62
62
...
...
...
...
...
B/SB-493
B/SB-523
B/SB-550
B/SB-551
B/SB-658
R60705
R60705
R60705
R60705
R60705
2013 SECTION IX
MANDATORY APPENDIX E
PERMITTED SWPSS
ð13Þ
The following AWS Standard Welding Procedure Specifications may be used under the requirements given in Article V.
Specification
Designation
Carbon Steel
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group
through 11/2 inch Thick, E7018, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition
Standard Welding Procedure Specification for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group
through 11/2 inch Thick, E6010, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition
Standard Welding Procedure Specification for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group
through 11/2 inch Thick, E6010 (Vertical Uphill) Followed by E7018, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition
Standard Welding Procedure Specification for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group
through 11/2 inch Thick, E6010 (Vertical Downhill) Followed by E7018, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition
1 or 2), 1/8
1 or 2), 1/8
1 or 2), 1/8
1 or 2), 1/8
B2.1‐1‐016‐94
(R05)
B2.1‐1‐017‐94
(R05)
B2.1‐1‐022‐94
(R05)
B2.1‐1‐026‐94
(R05)
Combination GTAW and SMAW
Standard Welding Procedure Specification for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding Followed by Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon
Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or 2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, ER70S‐2 and E7018, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition
B2.1‐1‐021‐94
(R05)
Flux Cored Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) for CO2 Shielded Flux Cored Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/ P‐1/S‐1,
Group 1 or 2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, E70T‐1 and E71T‐1, As‐Welded Condition
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) for 75% Ar/25% CO2 Shielded Flux Cored Arc Welding of Carbon Steel
(M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or 2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, E70T‐1 and E71T‐1, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition
B2.1‐1‐019‐94
(R05)
B2.1‐1‐020‐94
(R05)
Carbon Steel — Primarily Pipe Applications
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or
2), 1/8 through 3/4 inch Thick, E6010 (Vertical Uphill) Followed by E7018 (Vertical Uphill), As‐ Welded Condition, Primarily
Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or
2), 1/8 through 3/4 inch Thick, E6010 (Vertical Downhill) Followed by E7018 (Vertical Uphill), As‐ Welded Condition,
Primarily Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or
2), 1/8 through 3/4 inch Thick, E6010 (Vertical Uphill), As‐Welded Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or
2), 1/8 through 3/4 inch Thick, E6010 (Vertical Downhill Root with the Balance Vertical Uphill), As‐ Welded Condition,
Primarily Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or
2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, E6010 (Vertical Uphill) Followed by E7018 (Vertical Uphill), As‐ Welded or PWHT Condition,
Primarily Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or
2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, E6010 (Vertical Downhill) Followed by E7018 (Vertical Uphill), As‐ Welded or PWHT
Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or
2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, E7018, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
B2.1‐1‐201‐96
(R07)
B2.1‐1‐202‐96
(R07)
B2.1‐1‐203‐96
(R07)
B2.1‐1‐204‐96
(R07)
B2.1‐1‐205‐96
(R07)
B2.1‐1‐206‐96
(R07)
B2.1‐1‐208‐96
(R07)
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or 2),
1
/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, ER70S‐2, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding with Consumable Insert Root of Carbon
Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or 2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, INMs‐1 and ER70S‐2, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition,
Primarily Pipe Applications
324
B2.1‐1‐207‐96
(R07)
B2.1‐1‐210:
2001 (R11)
2013 SECTION IX
Table continued
Specification
Designation
Carbon Steel — Primarily Pipe Applications (Cont'd)
Flux Cored Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Argon plus 25% Carbon Dioxide Shielded Flux Cored Arc Welding of
Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Groups 1 and 2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, E7XT‐X, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition, Primarily
Pipe Applications
B2.1‐1‐234:
2006
Gas Metal Arc Welding — Spray Transfer
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Argon plus 2% Oxygen Shielded Gas Metal Arc Welding (Spray Transfer
Mode) of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Groups 1 and 2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, E70S‐3, Flat Position Only, As‐Welded or
PWHT Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
B2.1‐1‐235:
2006
Combination GTAW and SMAW
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding Followed by Shielded Metal Arc Welding of
Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or 2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, ER70S‐2 and E7018, As‐ Welded or PWHT Condition,
Primarily Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding with Consumable Insert Root followed by
Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Group 1 or 2), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, INMs‐1, ER70S‐2, and
E7018, As‐Welded or PWHT Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
B2.1‐1‐209‐96
(R07)
B2.1‐1‐211:
2001 (R11)
Austenitic Stainless Steel Plate and Pipe
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Austenitic Stainless Steel (M‐8/P‐8/S‐8,
Group 1), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, As‐Welded Condition
B2.1‐8‐023‐94
(R05)
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding of Austenitic Stainless Steel (M‐8/P‐8/S‐8,
Group 1), 1/16 through 11/2 inch Thick, ER3XX, As‐Welded Condition, Primarily Plate and Structural Applications
B2.1‐8‐024:
2001 (R11)
Combination GTAW and SMAW
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding Followed by Shielded Metal Arc Welding of
Austenitic Stainless Steel (M‐8/P‐8/S‐8, Group 1), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, ER3XX and 3XX‐XX, As‐Welded Condition,
Primarily Plate and Structural Applications
B2.1‐8‐025:
2001 (R11)
Austenitic Stainless Steel Primarily Pipe Applications
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Austenitic Stainless Steel (M‐8/P‐8/S‐8,
Group 1), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, E3XX‐XX, As‐Welded Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
B2.1‐8‐213‐97
(R11)
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding of Austenitic Stainless Steel (M‐8/P‐8/S‐8,
Group 1), 1/16 through 11/2 inch Thick, ER3XX, As‐Welded Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding with Consumable Insert of Austenitic
Stainless Steel (M‐8/P‐8/S‐8, Group 1), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, IN3XX and ER3XX, As‐Welded Condition, Primarily Pipe
Applications
B2.1‐8‐212:
2001 (R11)
B2.1‐8‐215:
2001 (R11)
Combination GTAW and SMAW
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding Followed by Shielded Metal Arc Welding of
Austenitic Stainless Steel (M‐8/P‐8/S‐8, Group 1), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, ER3XX and E3XX‐XX, As‐Welded Condition,
Primarily Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding with Consumable Insert Root followed by
Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Austenitic Stainless Steel (M‐8/P‐8/S‐8, Group 1), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, IN3XX, ER3XXX,
and E3XX‐XX, As‐Welded Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
B2.1‐8‐214:
2001 (R11)
B2.1‐8‐216:
2001 (R11)
Carbon Steel to Austenitic Stainless Steel
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding of Carbon Steel to Austenitic Stainless Steel
(M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Groups 1 and 2 Welded to M‐8/P‐8/S‐8, Group 1), 1/16 through 11/2 inch Thick, ER309(L), As‐Welded
Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
325
B2.1‐1/8‐ 227:
2002
2013 SECTION IX
Table continued
Specification
Designation
Carbon Steel to Austenitic Stainless Steel (Cont'd)
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (Cont'd)
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding with Consumable Insert Root of Carbon
Steel to Austenitic Stainless Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Groups 1 and 2 Welded to M‐8/P‐8/S‐8, Group 1), 1/16 through 11/2 inch
Thick, IN309 and R309(L), As‐Welded Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
B2.1‐1/8‐ 230:
2002
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel to Austenitic Stainless Steel
(M‐1/P‐1/S‐1, Groups 1 and 2 Welded to M‐8/P‐8/S‐8, Group 1), 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, E309(L)‐15, ‐16, or ‐17,
As‐Welded Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
B2.1‐1/8‐ 228:
2002
Combination GTAW and SMAW
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding Followed by Shielded Metal Arc Welding of
Carbon Steel to Austenitic Stainless Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1 Groups 1 and 2 Welded to M‐8/P‐8/S‐8, Group 1), 1/8 through 11/2
inch Thick, ER309(L) and E309(L)‐15, ‐16, or ‐17, As‐Welded Condition, Primarily Pipe Applications
Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding with Consumable Insert Root, Followed by
Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel to Austenitic Stainless Steel (M‐1/P‐1/S‐1 Groups 1 and 2 Welded to M‐8/P‐8/
S‐8, Group 1) 1/8 through 11/2 inch Thick, IN309, ER309(L), and E309(L)‐15, ‐16, ‐17, As‐Welded Condition, Primarily Pipe
Applications
326
B2.1‐1/8‐ 229:
2002
B2.1‐1/8‐ 231:
2002
2013 SECTION IX
MANDATORY APPENDIX F
STANDARD UNITS FOR USE IN EQUATIONS
Table F-100
Standard Units for Use in Equations
Quantity
U.S. Customary Units
SI Units
Linear dimensions (e.g., length, height, thickness, radius, diameter)
Area
Volume
Section modulus
Moment of inertia of section
Mass (weight)
Force (load)
Bending moment
Pressure, stress, stress intensity, and modulus of elasticity
Energy (e.g., Charpy impact values)
Temperature
Absolute temperature
inches (in.)
square inches (in.2)
cubic inches (in.3)
cubic inches (in.3)
inches4 (in.4)
pounds mass (lbm)
pounds force (lbf)
inch‐pounds (in.‐lb)
pounds per square inch (psi)
foot‐pounds (ft‐lb)
degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Rankine (R)
millimeters (mm)
square millimeters (mm2)
cubic millimeters (mm3)
cubic millimeters (mm3)
millimeters4 (mm4)
kilograms (kg)
newtons (N)
newton‐millimeters (N·mm)
megapascals (MPa)
joules (J)
degrees Celsius (°C)
kelvin (K)
degrees or radians
Btu/hr
degrees or radians
watts (W)
Fracture toughness
Angle
Boiler capacity
327
2013 SECTION IX
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX G
GUIDANCE FOR THE USE OF U.S. CUSTOMARY AND SI UNITS IN
THE ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
G-100
USE OF UNITS IN EQUATIONS
in the SI equivalent if there was any question. The values
of allowable stress in Section II, Part D generally include
three significant figures.
(e) Minimum thickness and radius values that are expressed in fractions of an inch were generally converted
according to the following table:
The equations in this Nonmandatory Appendix are suitable for use with either the U.S. Customary or the SI units
provided in Mandatory Appendix F, or with the units provided in the nomenclature associated with that equation.
It is the responsibility of the individual and organization
performing the calculations to ensure that appropriate
units are used. Either U.S. Customary or SI units may be
used as a consistent set. When necessary to convert from
one system of units to another, the units shall be converted to at least three significant figures for use in calculations and other aspects of construction.
G-200
Fraction,
in.
Proposed SI
Conversion, mm
1
/32
/64
1
/16
3
/32
1
/8
5
/32
3
/16
7
/32
1
/4
5
/16
3
/8
7
/16
1
/2
9
/16
5
/8
11
/16
3
/4
7
/8
1
The following guidelines were used to develop SI
equivalents:
(a) SI units are placed in parentheses after the U.S. Customary units in the text.
(b) In general, separate SI tables are provided if interpolation is expected. The table designation (e.g., table
number) is the same for both the U.S. Customary and SI
tables, with the addition of suffix “M” to the designator
for the SI table, if a separate table is provided. In the text,
references to a table use only the primary table number
(i.e., without the “M”). For some small tables, where interpolation is not required, SI units are placed in parentheses
after the U.S. Customary unit.
(c) Separate SI versions of graphical information
(charts) are provided, except that if both axes are dimensionless, a single figure (chart) is used.
(d) In most cases, conversions of units in the text were
done using hard SI conversion practices, with some soft
conversions on a case‐by‐case basis, as appropriate. This
was implemented by rounding the SI values to the number
of significant figures of implied precision in the existing
U.S. Customary units. For example, 3,000 psi has an implied precision of one significant figure. Therefore, the
conversion to SI units would typically be to 20 000 kPa.
This is a difference of about 3% from the “exact” or soft
conversion of 20 684.27 kPa. However, the precision of
the conversion was determined by the Committee on a
case‐by‐case basis. More significant digits were included
− 0.8
− 0.8
5.5
− 5.0
5.5
− 0.8
− 5.0
1.0
5.5
− 0.8
− 5.0
1.0
− 2.4
2.0
− 0.8
2.6
0.3
1.0
1.6
0.8
1.2
1.5
2.5
3
4
5
5.5
6
8
10
11
13
14
16
17
19
22
25
3
GUIDELINES USED TO DEVELOP SI
EQUIVALENTS
Difference,
%
(f) For nominal sizes that are in even increments of
inches, even multiples of 25 mm were generally used. Intermediate values were interpolated rather than converting and rounding to the nearest mm. See examples in the
following table. [Note that this table does not apply to
nominal pipe sizes (NPS), which are covered below.]
Size, in.
1
11/8
11/4
11/2
2
21/4
21/2
3
31/2
4
41/2
5
6
8
328
Size, mm
25
29
32
38
50
57
64
75
89
100
114
125
150
200
2013 SECTION IX
(i) Volumes in cubic inches (in.3) were converted to cubic mm (mm3) and volumes in cubic feet (ft3) were converted to cubic meters (m 3 ). See examples in the
following table:
Table continued
Size, in.
Size, mm
12
18
20
24
36
40
54
60
72
1
1
1
1
300
450
500
600
900
000
350
500
800
Size or
Length, ft
Size or
Length, m
3
5
200
1
1.5
60
Volume
(U.S. Customary)
1
6
10
5
NPS 1/8
NPS 1/4
NPS 3/8
NPS 1/2
NPS 3/4
NPS 1
NPS 11/4
NPS 11/2
NPS 2
NPS 21/2
NPS 3
NPS 31/2
NPS 4
NPS 5
NPS 6
NPS 8
NPS 10
NPS 12
NPS 14
NPS 16
NPS 18
SI
Practice
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
6
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
90
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
U.S.
Customary
Practice
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
NPS
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
SI
Practice
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
DN
500
550
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
950
1000
1050
1100
1150
1200
1250
1300
1350
1400
1450
1500
1
6
10
5
in.2
in.2
in.2
ft2
Pressure
(U.S. Customary)
Pressure
(SI)
0.5 psi
2 psi
3 psi
10 psi
14.7 psi
15 psi
30 psi
50 psi
100 psi
150 psi
200 psi
250 psi
300 psi
350 psi
400 psi
500 psi
600 psi
1,200 psi
1,500 psi
3 kPa
15 kPa
20 kPa
70 kPa
101 kPa
100 kPa
200 kPa
350 kPa
700 kPa
1 MPa
1.5 MPa
1.7 MPa
2 MPa
2.5 MPa
3 MPa
3.5 MPa
4 MPa
8 MPa
10 MPa
(k) Material properties that are expressed in psi or ksi
(e.g., allowable stress, yield and tensile strength, elastic
modulus) were generally converted to MPa to three significant figures. See example in the following table:
(h) Areas in square inches (in. 2) were converted to
square mm (mm2) and areas in square feet (ft2) were converted to square meters (m2). See examples in the following table:
Area
(U.S. Customary)
16 000 mm3
100 000 mm3
160 000 mm3
0.14 m3
(j) Although the pressure should always be in MPa for
calculations, there are cases where other units are used in
the text. For example, kPa is used for small pressures. Also,
rounding was to one significant figure (two at the most) in
most cases. See examples in the following table. (Note that
14.7 psi converts to 101 kPa, while 15 psi converts to
100 kPa. While this may seem at first glance to be an
anomaly, it is consistent with the rounding philosophy.)
(g) For nominal pipe sizes, the following relationships
were used:
U.S.
Customary
Practice
in.3
in.3
in.3
ft3
Volume
(SI)
Area
(SI)
Strength
(U.S. Customary)
Strength
(SI)
95,000 psi
655 MPa
(l) In most cases, temperatures (e.g., for PWHT) were
rounded to the nearest 5°C. Depending on the implied precision of the temperature, some were rounded to the nearest 1°C or 10°C or even 25°C. Temperatures colder than
650 mm2
4 000 mm2
6 500 mm2
0.5 m2
329
2013 SECTION IX
the SI value by the factor given to obtain the U.S. Customary value. In most cases it is appropriate to round the answer to three significant figures.
0°F (negative values) were generally rounded to the nearest 1°C. The examples in the table below were created by
rounding to the nearest 5°C, with one exception:
G-300
Temperature,
°F
Temperature,
°C
70
100
120
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
925
950
1,000
1,050
1,100
1,150
1,200
1,250
1,800
1,900
2,000
2,050
20
38
50
65
95
120
150
175
205
230
260
290
315
345
370
400
425
455
480
495
510
540
565
595
620
650
675
980
1 040
1 095
1 120
U.S.
Customary
SOFT CONVERSION FACTORS
The following table of “soft” conversion factors is provided for convenience. Multiply the U.S. Customary value
by the factor given to obtain the SI value. Similarly, divide
330
SI
Factor
in.
ft
in.2
ft2
in.3
ft3
U.S. gal
U.S. gal
psi
mm
m
mm2
m2
mm3
m3
m3
liters
MPa (N/mm2)
25.4
0.3048
645.16
0.09290304
16,387.064
0.02831685
0.003785412
3.785412
0.0068948
psi
kPa
6.894757
psi
ft‐lb
°F
bar
J
°C
0.06894757
1.355818
5
/9 × (°F − 32)
°F
°C
5
R
K
5
lbm
lbf
in.‐lb
kg
N
N·mm
0.4535924
4.448222
112.98484
ft‐lb
N·m
1.3558181
1.0988434
Btu/hr
W
0.2930711
lb/ft3
kg/m3
16.018463
/9
/9
Notes
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Used exclusively in
equations
Used only in text
and for
nameplate
...
...
Not for
temperature
difference
For temperature
differences only
Absolute
temperature
...
...
Use exclusively in
equations
Use only in text
...
Use for boiler
rating and heat
transfer
...
2013 SECTION IX
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX H
WAVEFORM CONTROLLED WELDING
H-100
BACKGROUND
waveform control features of the equipment are not used,
the heat input determination methods of either
QW-409.1(a), QW-409.1(b), or QW-409.1(c) are used.
When the welding equipment does not display instantaneous energy or power, an external meter with high frequency sampling capable of displaying instantaneous
energy or power is typically used, or the welding equipment is upgraded or modified to display instantaneous energy or power.
The equation shown in QW-409.1(c)(1) uses the unit of
joules (J) for energy. Other conveniently obtained units of
energy such as calories or British thermal units (Btu) may
be used with the appropriate conversion factors. The
equation shown in QW-409.1(c)(2) uses the unit of
joules/second(J/s) or watts (W) for power. One J/s is
equal to 1 W. Other conveniently obtained units of power,
such as horsepower (HP or kilowatts (kW) may be used
with the appropriate conversion factors.
Advances in microprocessor controls and welding
power source technology have resulted in the ability to develop waveforms for welding that improve the control of
droplet shape, penetration, bead shape and wetting. Some
welding characteristics that were previously controlled by
the welder or welding operator are controlled by software
or firmware internal to the power source. It is recognized
that the use of controlled waveforms in welding can result
in improvements in productivity and quality. The intention of this Code is to enable their use with both new
and existing procedure qualifications.
The ASME Section IX heat input measurement methods
in QW-409.1(a) and QW-409.1(b), were developed at a
time when welding power source output was relatively
constant. The heat input of welds made using waveform
controlled power sources is not accurately represented
by QW-409.1(a) due to the rapidly-changing outputs,
phase shifts, and synergic changes, but is correctly represented by QW-409.1(b) or QW-409.1(c). During waveform
controlled welding, current and voltage and values observed on the equipment meters no longer are valid for
heat input determination, and must be replaced by instantaneous energy (joules) or power (joules/second or watts)
to correctly calculate heat input. QW-409.1(c) more accurately reflects heat input changes when performing waveform controlled welding, but is also suitable for
nonwaveform controlled (conventional) welding.
H-200
H-300
NEW PROCEDURES QUALIFICATIONS
When qualifying a new procedure using waveform controlled welding, the instantaneous energy or power range
is used in lieu of the current (amperage) and voltage
ranges to determine the heat input per QW-409.1(c).
When qualifying a new procedure using nonwaveform
controlled welding, either the current and voltage is recorded and heat input determined using the methods of
QW-409.1(a) or QW-409.1(b), as previously required, or
the instantaneous energy or power is recorded and the
heat input determined by the method in QW-409.1(c).
WAVEFORM CONTROLLED WELDING
AND HEAT INPUT DETERMINATION
H-400
Power sources that support rapidly pulsing processes
(e.g., GMAW-P) are the most common waveform controlled power sources. Power sources that are marketed
as synergic, programmable, or microprocessor controlled
are generally capable of waveform controlled welding. In
these cases, heat input is calculated by the methods outlined in either QW-409.1(b) or QW-409.1(c) when performing procedure qualification or to determine
compliance with a qualified procedure. If any doubt exists
on whether waveform controlled welding is being performed, the welding equipment manufacturer should be
consulted. It is recognized that waveform controls may
not be active for all of the welding processes or equipment
settings for a particular power source. When the
EXISTING QUALIFIED PROCEDURES
Welding procedures previously qualified using nonwaveform controlled welding and heat input determined by
QW-409.1(a) may continue to be used for waveform controlled welding, provided they are amended to require
heat input determination for production welds using the
methods of QW-409.1(c). Welding procedures previously
qualified using nonwaveform controlled welding and heat
input determined by QW-409.1(b) continue to be applicable for waveform controlled welding without changes
to the heat input determination method.
331
2013 SECTION IX
H-500
(a) To determine if the heat input of a waveform controlled production weld meets the heat input range of a
welding procedure qualified with nonwaveform controlled welding with heat input determined using
QW-409.1(a)
(1) the heat input of the production weld is determined using instantaneous power or energy per the method of QW-409.1(c)
(2) the heat input of the production weld is compared to the heat input range of the welding procedure
specification
(b) to determine if the heat input of a nonwaveform
controlled production weld meets the heat input range
of a welding procedure qualified with waveform controlled welding with heat input determined using
QW-409.1(c)
(1) the heat input of the production weld is determined using QW-409.1(a) or QW-409.1(c)
(2) the heat input of the production weld is compared to the heat input range of the welding procedure
specification
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATIONS
Separate performance qualifications are not required
for waveform controlled welding. However, it is recognized that a welder or welding operator may require instruction on proper use of the equipment. The extent of
such instruction is best determined by the organization,
as needed to understand how to properly set up and adjust the equipment for welding and conformance to the
WPS requirements.
Power sources capable of waveform controlled welding
often have additional operator settings that are typically
not used during nonwaveform controlled welding. It is important for a welder to be familiar with other equipment
parameters that can influence the overall welding performance. These can include the mode, arc control, program,
cable length, wire feed speed, trim, and other machine and
software settings.
332
ð13Þ
2013 SECTION IX
MANDATORY APPENDIX J
GUIDELINE FOR REQUESTING P-NUMBER ASSIGNMENTS FOR
BASE METALS NOT LISTED IN TABLE QW/QB-422
J-100
INTRODUCTION
(d) welding or brazing data, such as comparable
P-Numbers; published welding or brazing data; welding
procedure specifications and procedure qualification data;
or brazing procedure specifications and procedure qualification data
(e) properties of welded or brazed base metal joints, if
less than the minimum specified in the applicable
specification
This Mandatory Appendix provides requirements to
Code users for submitting requests for P-Number assignments to base metals not listed in Table QW/QB-422. Such
requests shall be limited to base metals that are listed in
ASME Code Section II, Parts A or B; ASTM; or other recognized national or international specifications. QW-420
should be referenced before requesting a P-Number, to
see if the base metal can be considered a P-Number under
existing rules. For new materials, users shall reference the
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Committee in this Section and the Guideline on the
Approval of New Materials, under ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code in Section II, Part D. P-Number assignment does not constitute approval of a base metal for
ASME Code construction. The applicable Construction
Code shall be consulted for base metals that are acceptable
for use.
J-200
J-300
SUBMITTALS
Submittals to and responses from the Committee shall
meet the following:
(a) Submittal. Requests for P-Number assignments
shall be in English and preferably in the type-written form.
However, legible handwritten requests will also be considered. They shall include the name, address, telephone
number, fax number, and e-mail address, if available, of
the requester and be mailed to The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers, Attn: Secretary, BPV IX Committee,
Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016–5990. As an alternative, requests may be submitted via e-mail to
secretaryBPV@asme.org.
(b) Response. The Secretary of the ASME BPV IX Committee shall acknowledge receipt of each properly prepared request and shall provide written response to the
requester upon completion of the requested action by
the Code Committee.
REQUEST FORMAT
A request for a P-Number shall include the following:
(a) product application or use
(b) the material specification, grade, class, and type as
applicable
(c) the mechanical properties and chemical analysis
requirements
333
2013 SECTION IX
ð13Þ
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX K
GUIDANCE ON INVOKING SECTION IX REQUIREMENTS IN OTHER
CODES, STANDARDS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS
K-100
BACKGROUND AND PURPOSE
referencing construction Codes that invoke Section IX,
these requirements take precedence over those of Section
IX, and the manufacturer or contractor is required to comply with them.
Specifications or contract documents that are required
to follow Section IX may add additional requirements,
and the manufacturer or contractor shall comply with
both sets of requirements.
When the reference to Section IX is not the result of
mandatory requirements, such as laws, but is a matter of
choice, the specification or contract document may impose
additional or different requirements than those in Section
IX, and the manufacturer or contractor shall comply with
them. Material specifications are an example of this.
Most standards that refer to Section IX consider the requirements of Section IX to be adequate to cover the basic
needs for the content of welding, brazing, and fusing procedures and for qualification of those WPSs, as well as for
the qualification of the personnel who use them. However,
for some applications, additional information may be required from the invoking party, as noted in K-300.
ASME Section IX provides rules for the qualification of
welding, brazing, and fusing personnel and the procedures
that they follow in welding, brazing and fusing. While the
historical application of Section IX has been in service to
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and the ASME
B31 Codes for Pressure Piping, Section IX is invoked by
many other standards without the benefit of members of
the Section IX Committee participating in those committees. In addition, Section IX is invoked in specifications
and related contract documents. The purpose of this Nonmandatory Appendix is to provide guidance on invoking
Section IX in other documents in a clear, concise, and accurate manner.
K-200
SCOPE OF SECTION IX AND WHAT
REFERENCING DOCUMENTS MUST
ADDRESS
Section IX addresses only the mandatory content of
welding, brazing, and fusing procedures; the qualification
of those procedures; and the qualification of personnel
who follow those procedures in the manufacture, fabrication, assembly, and installation of welded and fused products. Accordingly, to ensure construction of suitable
products, the requirements for the service conditions, materials used, the design of welds, preheating, postweld
heat treatment, and metallurgical effects of welding; and
the acceptance criteria for weld quality matters such as
penetration, undercut, reinforcement, porosity, surface
condition, and related examinations must be addressed
in the codes, standards, specifications, or contract documents that invoke Section IX since Section IX is not a fabrication code and it does not contain requirements for
welded, brazed, or fused products.
Further, construction codes may specify different requirements than those specified by Section IX; for example, ASME Section III has requirements for PWHT of
procedure qualification test coupons that are more restrictive than those of Section IX, and ASME B31.1 allows fabricators and contractors to use WPSs qualified by a
technically competent group or agency, whereas Section
IX requires each fabricator or contractor to qualify WPSs
themselves. When such requirements are specified in the
K-300
RECOMMENDED WORDING —
GENERAL
When invoking Section IX in general, the following
wording is recommended:
“Welding, brazing, and fusing shall be performed using
procedures and personnel qualified in accordance with
the requirements of ASME BPVC Section IX.”
When the above is specified, qualification for the following are automatically included:
(a) all welding processes that are listed in QW-250 for
groove and fillet welding
(b) use of standard welding procedures specifications
(SWPSs) listed in Mandatory Appendix E
(c) application of hard-facing weld metal overlay (hardness values shall be a matter of agreement between the
supplier and the purchaser)
(d) application of corrosion-resistant weld metal overlay (chemical composition of the weld overlay surface
shall be a matter of agreement between the supplier and
the purchaser)
(e) laser beam lap joints
334
2013 SECTION IX
“Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators
shall be qualified using mock-ups in accordance with Section IX.”
Note that if qualification using mock-ups is not specified
but qualification to Section IX is, tube-to-tubesheet welding procedures and personnel may also be qualified following the standard groove welding rules.
(f) joining of composite (clad) materials
(g) attachment of applied linings
K-301
RECOMMENDED WORDING FOR
TOUGHNESS — QUALIFIED
APPLICATIONS
When invoking Section IX and qualification of the WPS
for toughness applications is required, the following wording is recommended:
“Welding procedures shall be qualified for toughness,
and the supplementary essential variables of Section IX
shall apply.”
The referencing construction code shall also be
specified.
K-302
K-303
RECOMMENDED WORDING — TEMPER
BEAD WELDING
When invoking Section IX for qualification of temper
bead welding procedures, the following wording is
recommended:
“Welding procedures shall be prepared and qualified in
accordance with Section IX.”
RECOMMENDED WORDING — TUBETO-TUBESHEET WELDING
When invoking Section IX for qualification of tube-totubesheet welding procedures and personnel, and qualification by use of mock-ups is desired, the following wording is recommended:
335
2013 SECTION IX
INDEX
Essential variables (performance), QW-401.2
procedure, QW-251.2, QW-401.1
Etching, QW-470
PART QW
A-Numbers (listing), QW-442
Acceptance criteria
tension tests, QW-153
bend tests, QW-163
notch toughness, QW-171.2, QW-172.2
bend and hammer tests, QW-192.2
torque test, QW-192.3
Addenda (issuance of), QW-100.3
requalification of procedures, QW-100.3
Aluminum alloys, QW/QB-422
Austenitic stainless steels, QW/QB-422
AWS (reference to), QW-102
Filler metals (pertaining to procedure qualification), QW-211, QW-404
Fillet-weld tests, QW-180
Flat position (definition), QW-121.1, QW-122.1, QW-131.1, QW-132.1
Flux, QW-404.9
F-Numbers (listing), QW-430
Forms (suggested), Appendix B
Fracture tests, QW-182
Full-section specimens, QW-151.4
Backing (pertaining to performance qualification), QW-303.2, QW-303.3,
QW-310.2, QW-310.3
Part IV — data, QW-402.2, QW-402.3, QW-402.4, QW-402.5, QW-402.7
definition, QW-492
Backing gas, QW-408.5, QW-408.8
Base metals (definition), QW-492
corrosion-resistance overlay cladding (pertaining to procedure
qualification), QW-214.1
groove and fillet welds (pertaining to procedure qualification), QW-202.2,
QW-211
stud welding, QW-202.3
variable, QW-403
Carbon steels, QW/QB-422
Combination of welding processes or procedures pertaining to performance
qualification, QW-306
Consumable inserts, QW-404.22
Copper (copper-base alloys), QW/QB-422
Corrosion-resistant overlay cladding (pertaining to procedure qualification),
QW-381
pertaining to performance qualification, QW-381
Definitions, QW-102, QW-490
Description of Section IX, QW-100
Dimensions
of welding groove with backing for performance qualification, QW-310.2
of welding groove without backing for performance qualification,
QW-310.3
of tension test specimen, QW-462.1
of bend test specimen, QW-462.2
of test jigs, QW-466
of groove welds for procedure qualification, QW-212
Drawings (see Graphics)
Electrical characteristics, QW-409
Electrogas welding (definition), QW-492
variables for procedure qualifications, QW-259
Electron beaming (pertaining to procedure qualification), QW-215
definition, QW-492
variables for procedure qualification, QW-260
variables for performance qualification, QW-362
Electroslag welding (definition), QW-492
variables for procedure qualification, QW-258
336
Gas, QW-408
Gas tungsten-arc welding (definition), QW-492
variables for procedure qualification, QW-256
variables for performance qualification, QW-356
Gas welding (definition), QW-492
variables for procedure qualification, QW-256
variables for performance qualification, QW-356
Graphics, QW-460
test positions, QW-461
groove welds in plate, QW-461.3
groove welds in pipe, QW-451.4
fillet welds in plate, QW-461.5
fillet welds in pipe, QW-461.6
stud welds, QW-461.7
test specimens, QW-462
tension — reduced section — plate, QW-462.1(a)
tension — reduced section — pipe, QW-462.1(b)
tension — reduced section — pipe alternate, QW-462.1(c)
tension — reduced section — turned specimen, QW-462.1(d)
tension — full section — small diameter pipe, QW-462.1(e)
side bend, QW-462.2
face and root bends transverse, QW-462.3(a)
face and root bends longitudinal, QW-462.3(b)
fillet welds — procedure, QW-462.4(a)
fillet welds — performance, QW-462.4(b)
fillet welds in pipe — performance, QW-462.4(c)
fillet welds in pipe — procedure, QW-462.4(d)
corrosion-resistant overlay, QW-462.5
composite test plates, QW-462.6
spot welds, QW-462.8–QW-462.11
order of removal, QW-463
plates — procedure qualification, QW-463.1(a)
plates — procedure qualification alternate, QW-463.1(b)
plates — procedure qualification longitudinal, QW-463.1(c)
pipe — procedure qualification, QW-463.1(d)
pipe — procedure qualification alternate, QW-463.1(e)
pipe — notch toughness specimen location, QW-463.1(f)
plate — procedure qualification, QW-463.2(a)
plate — procedure qualification alternate, QW-463.2(b)
plate — procedure qualification longitudinal, QW-463.2(c)
pipe — performance qualification, QW-463.2(d)
pipe — performance qualification alternate, QW-463.2(e)
pipe — performance qualification 10 in. diameter, QW-463.2(f)
pipe — performance qualification 6 in. or 8 in. diameter, QW-463.2(g)
2013 SECTION IX
pipe — performance qualification fillet weld, QW-463.2(h)
test jigs, QW-466
guided-bend, QW-466.1
guided-bend roller jig, QW-466.2
guided-bend wrap-around, QW-466.3
stud weld bend jig, QW-466.4
torque testing arrangement, QW-466.5
tensile test for studs, QW-466.6
typical test joints, QW-469
butt joint, QW-469.1
alternative butt joint, QW-469.2
Groove welds (pertaining to performance qualification), QW-303.1
with backing, QW-310.2
without backing, QW-310.3
Guided-bend jig, QW-466.1
Guided-bend roller jig, QW-466.2
Guided-bend test (see Tests)
Guided-bend wrap-around jig, QW-466.3
PQR, QW-201.2
Preheat, QW-406
Procedure qualification, QW-200
Procedure qualification record, QW-201, QW-483
Procedure qualification specimens, QW-451
Processes, combination of, QW-200.4, QW-306
Processes, special, QW-251.4
Radiography, QW-142, QW-143, QW-191
acceptance criteria, QW-191.1.2
for performance qualification, QW-302.2, QW-304
retests and renewal of qualification, QW-320
Records, QW-103.2
Record of welder or welding operator qualification tests, QW-301.4, QW-484
Reduced-section specimens, QW-151.1, QW-151.2
Renewal of qualification, QW-322
Requalification, QW-350
Responsibility of records, QW-103.2
Responsibility of welding, QW-103.1, QW-201
Retests, QW-321
Hard-facing overlay (pertaining to procedure qualification), QW-216
Horizontal position, QW-121.2, QW-122.2, QW-131.2, QW-132.2
Scope of Section IX, QW-101
Shielding gas, QW-408.1, QW-408.2, QW-408.3, QW-408.4, QW-408.6
Shielded metal-arc welding
variables for procedure, QW-253
variables, QW-353
Sketches (see Graphics)
S-Numbers, QW-420
Specimens, QW-450
Stud-weld bend jig, QW-466.4
Stud welding
performance qualification specimens, QW-193
positions, QW-123.1, QW-461.6, QW-461.7, QW-461.8
procedure qualification specimens, QW-192
variables for procedure, QW-261
variables for performance, QW-361
Submerged-arc welding
variables for procedure, QW-254
variables for performance, QW-354
Supplementary essential variables, QW-251.2, QW-401.3
Identification of welders and welding operators, QW-301.3
Joints, QW-402
Limits of qualified positions
procedures, QW-203
performance, QW-303, QW-461.9
Longitudinal-bend tests, QW-161.5–QW-161.7
Macro-examination, QW-183, QW-184
Mechanical tests, QW-141, QW-202.1, QW-302.1
Multiple positions, QW-122.3, QW-122.4, QW-132.4
Nickel and nickel-base alloys, QW/QB-422
Nonessential variables, QW-251.3
Notch-toughness test, QW-170
Order of removal, QW-463
Orientation of welds, QW-110, QW-461.1
Overhead position, QW-121.4, QW-131.4, QW-132.3
Tables
Welding variables, QW-415, QW-416
P-Numbers, QW/QB-422
F-Numbers, QW-432
A-Numbers, QW-442
Procedure qualification specimens, QW-451
Performance qualification specimens, QW-452
Performance qualification limitations, QW-461.9
Technique, QW-410
Tension test, QW-150
Terms and definitions, QW-102, QW-492
Test assemblies, QW-301.1
Test jigs, QW-466
Test joints, QW-469.1, QW-469.2
Tests
acceptance criteria
bend and hammer, QW-192.2
fracture tests, QW-182
guided bend, QW-163
macro-examination, QW-183, QW-184, QW-192.1.4
notch-toughness tests
Charpy V-notch, QW-171.2
drop weight, QW-172.2
radiography, QW-191.1.2
Performance qualification, QW-300
Performance qualification specimens, QW-452
Performance variables, QW-405
Pipe, test welds in, QW-302.3
Pipe positions, QW-132
Plasma-arc welding
variables for procedure, QW-257
variables for performance, QW-357
Plate and pipe performance, QW-303.1–QW-303.4
Plate and pipe procedure, QW-211
P-Numbers, QW-200.3, QW/QB-422, Appendix D
Positions of welds
plate and pipe groove welds
descriptions, QW-120–QW-123
sketches and graphics, QW-460–QW-461
plate and pipe fillet welds
descriptions, QW-130–QW-132
sketches and graphics, QW-460–QW-461
limits of qualified positions
for procedures, QW-203
for performance, QW-303
Postweld heat treatment, QW-407
337
2013 SECTION IX
Vertical position, QW-121.3, QW-131.3
tension, QW-153
torque test, QW-192.3
ultrasonic, QW-191.2.3
description and procedure
fillet weld, QW-180
guided bend, QW-160
notch toughness, QW-170
Charpy V-notch, QW-171
drop weight, QW-172
radiographic, QW-191
stud weld, QW-192
tension, QW-150, QW-152
tensile strength, QW-153.1
for performance qualification, QW-100.2, QW-301
mechanical tests, QW-302.1
qualification tests, QW-301.2
for procedure qualification, QW-100.1, QW-202
mechanical tests, QW-202.1
test-joint preparation, QW-210
test positions for groove welds, QW-120
test positions for fillet welds, QW-130
test positions for stud welds, QW-123
types and purposes
fillet weld, QW-141.3
guided bend, QW-141.2, QW-160, QW-162, QW-451, QW-452,
QW-462
mechanical, QW-141
notch toughness, QW-141.4
drop weight, QW-172.1
radiographic, QW-142, QW-143
special examination for welders, QW-142
stud weld, QW-141.5
tension, QW-141.1, QW-451, QW-462
visual, QW-302.4
Thickness, QW-310.1, QW-351, QW-451, QW-452
Titanium, QW/QB-422
Torque testing for stud welds, QW-466.5
Transverse bend tests, QW-161.1–QW-161.4
Turned specimens, QW-151.3
Welders and welding operators, QW-304, QW-305
Welding Procedure
Specification, QW-200.1(a), QW-482
WPS qualification tests, QW-202.2
PART QB
Acceptance criteria
tension test, QB-153
bend tests, QB-163
peel test, QB-172
Addenda (issuance of), QB-100.3
requalification of procedures, QB-100.3
AWS, QB-102
Base metal, QB-211
Base metal — variables, QB-402
BPS, QB-482
Brazers, QB-304
Brazing operators, QB-305
Definitions, QB-102, QB-490
F-Numbers, QB-430
Filler flow position, QB-121
Filler metal — variable, QB-403
Flow direction — variables, QB-407
Flow positions, QB-461
Flux and atmospheres (variables), QB-406
Forms, Appendix B
Graphics, QB-460
Guided bend test, QB-141.2, QB-160
Horizontal flow position, QB-124
Variables, QW-250, QW-350
base metals, QW-403
electrical characteristics, QW-409
electrogas welding (EGW), QW-259
electron beam welding (EBW), QW-260
electroslag welding (ESW), QW-258, QW-258.1
filler metals, QW-404
for welding operator, QW-360
gas, QW-408
gas metal-arc welding (GMAW) (MIG), QW-255, QW-255.1, QW-355
gas tungsten-arc welding (GTAW) (TIG), QW-256, QW-256.1, QW-356
general, QW-251, QW-351, QW-401
joints, QW-402
oxyfuel gas welding (OFW), QW-252, QW-252.1, QW-352
performance essential variable table, QW-416
plasma-arc welding (PAW), QW-257, QW-257.1, QW-359
positions, QW-405
postweld heat treatment (PWHT), QW-407
preheat, QW-406
procedure essential variable table, QW-415
shielded metal-arc welding (SMAW) (STICK), QW-253, QW-253.1,
QW-353
stud welding, QW-261, QW-361
submerged-arc welding (SAW), QW-254, QW-254.1, QW-354
technique, QW-410
338
Jigs, QB-162.1
Jigs — graphics, QB-466
Joint design — variables, QB-408
Joints, QB-210, QB-310
Longitudinal-bend test, QB-161.3, QB-161.4
Manufacturer’s responsibility, QB-201
Order of removal — graphics, QB-463
Orientation, QB-110, QB-461
P-Numbers, QB-420
Peel test, QB-141.3, QB-170
Performance qualifications, Article XIII, QB-100.2
Performance qualification tests, QB-301.1
Position, QB-120
Position — graphics, QB-460
PQR, QB-201.2, QB-483
Preparation of test joints, QB-210
Procedure qualifications, Article XII, QB-100.1
Records, QB-103.2, QB-301.4
Reduced section, QB-151.1, QB-151.2, QB-151.3
Renewal of qualification, QB-322
Responsibility, QB-103, QB-201
Scope, QB-101
2013 SECTION IX
horizontal-flow positions, QB-124
vertical-downflow, QB-122
vertical-upflow, QB-123
Transverse bend tests, QB-161.1, QB-161.2
Sectioning test, QB-141.4, QB-181
Shear test, QB-141.1
Specimens
tension test, QB-151
guided-bend test, QB-161
peel test, QB-171
sectioning test, QB-181
workmanship sample, QB-182
for procedure qualification, QB-451
for performance qualification, QB-452
graphics, QB-462, QB-463
Variables
base metal, QB-402
brazing filler metal, QB-403
brazing flux, fuel gas or atmosphere, QB-406
brazing process, QB-405
brazing temperature, QB-404
data, QB-400
flow position, QB-407
joint design, QB-408
Vertical downfall position, QB-122
Vertical uphill position, QB-123
Temperature — variable, QB-404
Tension test, QB-141.1, QB-150
Test, QB-141
for procedure qualification, QB-202.1, QB-451
for performance qualification, QB-2-2.1, QB-451
positions, QB-120
flat-flow positions, QB-121
Workmanship samples, QB-141.5
339
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
340
ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
SECTION IX
INTERPRETATIONS
Volume 62
Interpretations of the Code will be posted in January and July of 2014 and January of 2015 at http://cstools.asme.org/
interpretations.cfm. Interpretations of Section III, Divisions 1 and 2, are part of the update service to Section III, Subsection NCA.
Interpretations Volumes 60 and 61 were included with the update service to the 2010 Edition of the Code; Volume 62 is
the first Interpretations volume to be included with the update service to the 2013 Edition.
Section
I
II-A
II-B
II-C
II-D (Customary)
II-D (Metric)
III-NCA
III-3
III-5
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII-1
VIII-2
VIII-3
IX
X
XI
XII
Vol. 62
7/13
7/13
…
…
7/13
7/13
7/13
7/13
7/13
7/13
7/13
…
…
7/13
7/13
7/13
7/13
7/13
7/13
…
Copyright © 2013 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
INTERPRETATIONS VOLUME 62 — SECTION IX
Replies to Technical Inquiries January 1, 2011 through December 31, 2012
FOREWORD
GENERAL INFORMATION
This publication includes all written interpretations issued between the indicated dates by the ASME Staff on behalf of
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee in response to inquiries concerning interpretations of the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code. A contents is also included that lists subjects specific to the interpretations covered in the individual volume.
These interpretations are taken verbatim from the original letters, except for a few typographical and editorial corrections made for the purpose of improved clarity. In some instances, a review of the interpretation revealed a need for corrections of a technical nature. In these cases, a revised interpretation is presented bearing the original interpretation
number with the suffix R and the original file number with an asterisk. Following these revised interpretations, new interpretations and revisions to them issued during the indicated dates are assigned interpretation numbers in chronological order. Interpretations applying to more than one Code Section appear with the interpretations for each affected
Section.
ASME procedures provide for reconsideration of these interpretations when or if additional information is available
that the inquirer believes might affect the interpretation. Further, persons aggrieved by an interpretation may appeal
to the cognizant ASME committee or subcommittee. As stated in the Statement of Policy in the Code documents, ASME
does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
An interpretation applies either to the Edition and Addenda in effect on the date of issuance of the interpretation or the
Edition and Addenda stated in the interpretation. Subsequent revisions to the Code may supersede the interpretation.
For detailed instructions, see "Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees" in the front matter.
SUBJECT AND NUMERICAL INDEXES
Subject and numerical indexes (if applicable) have been prepared to assist the user in locating interpretations by subject matter or by location in the Code. They cover interpretations issued from Volume 12 up to and including the present
volume, and will be updated with each volume.
507
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
Subject
Interpretation
QW-103.2, Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-151.3, Tensile Tests — Turned Specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-181.2, Sectioning of Pipe-to-Pipe Quarter Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-182, Fracture Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-193, Macro Examination for the Mockup Test of Tube-to-Tubesheet Joint . . .
QW-200.1(b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-200.2, Use of Preliminary WPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-200.4(b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-201, Manufacturer’s or Contractor’s Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-202.4, Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-288, Tube-to-Tubesheet Welder Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-300.3, Simultaneous Performance Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-304, Volumetric Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-361.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-402 and QW-404 Through QW-410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-403.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-404.23, Filler Metal Product Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-404.5, A-Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-404.5, A-Number Essential Variable for GMAW Weld Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-407.1(b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-409.2, Combination of Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-420, ASTM Materials’ P-Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-424.1, Base Metal Used for Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-433 and QW-452.1(b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-452.1(b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-452.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QW-462.4(a) and (b), Fillet Weld Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
508
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
IX-13-06
IX-10-37
IX-13-04
IX-10-32
IX-13-05
IX-13-03
IX-10-22
IX-10-34
IX-10-25
IX-13-09
IX-10-28
IX-13-02
IX-10-29
IX-10-26
IX-13-08
IX-10-21
IX-13-01
IX-10-38
IX-10-31
IX-10-33
IX-13-07
IX-10-24
IX-10-30
IX-10-39
IX-10-23
IX-10-35
IX-10-27
IX-10-36
File No.
12-7
11-2029
12-120
11-939
12-1563
11-1476
10-1158
10-1966
11-44
12-1833
09-558
12-752
10-339
09-744
12-1501
10-496
12-635
12-47
11-918
11-1339
12-1230
11-216
10-1189
12-178
10-1918
11-2030
08-210
11-896
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
Interpretation: IX-10-21
Subject: QW-402 and QW-404 Through QW-410
Date Issued: March 11, 2011
File: 10-496
Question: When impacts are waived by a book section for the base metal (HAZ notch toughness is not required), but are
required for the weld metal, do the supplementary essential variables of QW-402 and QW-404 through QW-410 apply per
the applicable tables QW-252 through QW-265?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-10-22
Subject: QW-200.2, Use of Preliminary WPS
Date Issued: March 14, 2011
File: 10-1158
Question: Does ASME Section IX require a preliminary WPS be used during procedure qualification testing, or that a
WPS number be recorded on the PQR?
Reply: No.
Interpretation: IX-10-23
Subject: QW-433 and QW-452.1(b)
Date Issued: March 14, 2011
File: 10-1918
Background: A welder tests on an NPS 6 Sch. 80 (0.432 in. wall) coupon, depositing 0.100 in. of E6010 and the balance
of 0.332 in. using E7018.
Question (1): Using E6010, is the welder qualified to deposit 0.864 in. maximum of weld metal?
Reply (1): Yes.
Question (2): Using E7018, is the welder qualified to deposit 0.664 in. maximum of weld metal?
Reply (2): Yes.
Question (3): Is the welder qualified to deposit 0.864 in. of weld metal using E6010 plus 0.664 in. of E7018 weld metal
deposit thickness for a total of 1.528 in. in the same groove?
Reply (3): No. See QW-452.1(b).
509
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
Interpretation: IX-10-24
Subject: QW-409.2, Combination of Processes
Date Issued: March 14, 2011
File: 11-216
Background: A welder was tested on an SA-516 Gr. 70 plate, using the GMAW process. Short arc mode was used for
depositing the root, and spray arc mode was used for depositing the balance of the weld in a single coupon.
Question: Is it permissible, according to ASME Section IX, QW-409.2, to use two modes of metal transfer in a single test
coupon?
Reply: Yes; the deposit thickness for each transfer mode shall be recorded as required by QW-306.
Interpretation: IX-10-25
Subject: QW-201, Manufacturer’s or Contractor’s Responsibility
Date Issued: May 23, 2011
File: 11-44
Question: May an organization with more than one ASME Certificate of Authorization, under different names and in
different locations, describe in its quality assurance programs the operational control of procedure qualifications and
the use of welding procedures properly qualified under one certificate holder, under another certificate holder within
the organization, but without separate qualification, as permitted by Section IX, QW-201?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-10-26
Subject: QW-304, Volumetric Examination
Date Issued: June 13, 2011
File: 09-744
Question: Does Section IX require a welder to qualify for small diameter butt welds by preparing more than one small
diameter pipe coupon to provide a minimum circumferential weld length when qualified by volumetric examination under the provisions of QW-304?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-10-27
Subject: QW-452.5
Date Issued: August 1, 2011
File: 08-210
Question: Is it the intent of QW-452.5 to permit welder or welding operator fillet weld performance qualification testing
to be conducted using test coupon thicknesses greater than 3/8 in. thick?
Reply: Yes.
510
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
Interpretation: IX-10-28
Subject: QW-250
Date Issued: August 1, 2011
File: 09-558
Question (1): Is it the intent of the Code that Variables QW-403.6, QW-406.3, QW-409.1, QW-410.9, and QW-410.10
apply when specified in QW-250 for P-No. 10H materials?
Reply (1): No.
Question (2): Is it the intent of the Code that Variable QW-407.4 apply when specified in QW-250 for P-No. 10H
materials?
Reply (2): Yes.
Interpretation: IX-10-29
Subject: QW-300.3, Simultaneous Performance Qualifications
Date Issued: August 1, 2011
File: 10-339
Question: Is it the intent of Section IX, QW-300.3 to permit an AWS standard welding procedure specification adopted
by a contractor to be used in lieu of a PQR to support the range of variables for a single WPS proposed for use in conducting simultaneous welder performance qualification testing?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-10-30
Subject: QW-420, ASTM Materials’ P-Number Assignment
Date Issued: August 1, 2011
File: 10-1189
Question: Is it the intent that material produced under an ASTM specification shall be considered to have the same
P-Number or P-Number plus Group Number as that of the P-Number or P-Number plus Group Number assigned to
the same grade or type material in the corresponding ASME specification (e.g., SA-240 Type 304 is assigned P-No. 8,
Group No. 1; therefore, A 240 Type 304 is considered P-No. 8, Group No. 1)?
Reply: Yes.
511
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
Interpretation: IX-10-31
Subject: QW-404.5, A-Number
Date Issued: August 25, 2011
File: 11-918
A procedure qualification test coupon was prepared and tested, which included a chemical analysis of the weld metal.
The chemical analysis results were as follows: C: 0.08%, Cr: 0.044%, Mo: 0.14%, Ni: 1.48%, Mn: 1.45%, Si: 0.19%.
Question (1): Does this chemistry meet an A-1 classification?
Reply (1): No.
Question (2): Does this chemistry meet an A-10 classification?
Reply (2): Yes.
Interpretation: IX-10-32
Subject: QW-182, Fracture Tests
Date Issued: August 25, 2011
File: 11-939
Question (1): Is it required by QW-182 that the sum of all rounded indications (regardless of diameter) be considered in
addition to the sum of the lengths of inclusions in determining the 3/8 in. (10 mm) maximum allowed for acceptance?
Reply (1): Yes.
Question (2): Is it permissible to apply the porosity size limitation of 1/32 in. or greater as specified in QW-191.1.2.2 (b)
(3) to a 1/2 in. (12 mm) welded coupon to the fracture test acceptance criteria of QW-182?
Reply (2): No.
Interpretation: IX-10-33
Subject: QW-404.5, A-Number Essential Variable for GMAW Weld Metal
Date Issued: November 14, 2011
File: 11-1339
Question (1): According to QW-404.5, may the A-Number of GMAW weld metal be established from the chemical analysis of a weld deposit prepared according to the filler metal specification when the shielding gas used for the chemical
analysis was different from that used in the procedure qualification?
Reply (1): No.
Question (2): According to QW-404.5, may the A-Number of GMAW weld metal be established from the chemical analysis of a weld deposit prepared according to the filler metal specification provided the shielding gas used for the chemical
analysis was the same as that used in the procedure qualification?
Reply (2): Yes.
Question (3): Are the GMAW rules in QW-404.5 for establishing A-Numbers also applicable to FCAW?
Reply (3): Yes.
512
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
Interpretation: IX-10-34
Subject: QW-200.4(b)
Date Issued: December 8, 2011
File: 10-1966
Background: PQR A is welded with SMAW to join 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick plates with 5/8 in. (16 mm) of SMAW deposit. PQR
B is welded with GTAW and SMAW to join 5/16 in. (8 mm) thick plates with 1/8 in. (3 mm) of GTAW and 3/16 in. (5 mm) of
SMAW deposit. PQR C is welded with GTAW to join 3/16 in. (5 mm) thick plates with 3/16 in. (5 mm) of GTAW deposit.
Question (1): Do PQRs A and B qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) to 11/4
in. (32 mm) when impact testing is not required?
Reply (1): No.
Question (2): Do PQRs A and B qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 1/16 in. (5 mm) to 11/2
(38 mm) when impact testing is not required?
Reply (2): No.
Question (3): Do PQRs A and B qualify the combination WPS for a maximum deposit weld metal thickness range of 1/4 in.
(6 mm) for the GTAW process and 11/4 in. (32 mm) for the SMAW process?
Reply (3): No.
Question (4): Do PQRs A and C qualify the combination WPS for a maximum deposit weld metal thickness range of 3/8 in.
(10 mm) for the GTAW process and 11/4 in. (32 mm) for the SMAW process?
Reply (4): No.
Question (5): Do PQRs A and C qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) to 11/4
in. (32 mm) when impact testing is not required?
Reply (5): No.
Question (6): Do PQRs A and C qualify the combination WPS for a base metal thickness range of 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) to 11/2
in. (38 mm) when impact testing is not required?
Reply (6): No.
Question (7): Do the provisions in QW-200.4(b) affect the responses to the above questions?
Reply (7): No.
Interpretation: IX-10-35
Subject: QW-452.1(b)
Date Issued: December 8, 2011
File: 11-2030
Question: Regarding QW-452.1(b) for performance qualification, is “Maximum to be welded” equivalent to “Unlimited”?
Reply: Yes.
513
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
Interpretation: IX-10-36
Subject: QW-462.4(a) and (b), Fillet Weld Test
Date Issued: February 16, 2012
File: 11-896
Question (1): May a WPS qualified with a fillet weld using a plate tee-joint configuration as shown in QW-462.4(a) be
used to join a plate to a pipe with fillet welds made parallel to the axis of the pipe for nonpressure-retaining applications?
Reply (1): Yes.
Question (2): May a welder qualified with a fillet weld using a plate tee-joint configuration as shown in QW-462.4(b) be
used to weld a plate to a pipe with fillet welds made parallel to the axis of the pipe?
Reply (2): Yes.
Interpretation: IX-10-37
Subject: QW-151.3, Tensile Tests — Turned Specimens
Date Issued: February 16, 2012
File: 11-2029
Question: For a 1-in. (25-mm) deep groove weld deposited in a 2-in. (50-mm) thick plate test coupon, may a singleturned 0.505-tensile specimen conforming to QW-462.1(d) be used for each tension test required by QW-451?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-10-38
Subject: QW-404.23, Filler Metal Product Form
Date Issued: February 16, 2012
File: 12-47
Question: May stranded filler metal be considered the same as bare (solid or metal cored) filler metal in QW-404.23?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-10-39
Subject: QW-424.1, Base Metal Used for Procedure Qualification
Date Issued: February 16, 2012
File: 12-178
Question: Does a PQR recording a P-No. 5B base metal welded to itself support a WPS for welding P-No. 5B metal to any
metal assigned P-No. 4, 3, or 1?
Reply: No.
514
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
Interpretation: IX-13-01
Subject: QW-403.6
Date Issued: July 2, 2012
File: 12-635
Question: Does QW-403.6 apply when the HAZ is not subject to impact testing such as when qualifying a P-8 material?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-13-02
Subject: QW-288, Tube-to-Tubesheet Welder Qualification
Date Issued: August 23, 2012
File: 12-752
Question: When a demonstration mock-up for tube-to-tubesheet welder or welding operator qualification is required,
are all of the variables specified in QW-288 required to be followed during the performance qualification test?
Reply: Yes, see QW-193.2.
Interpretation: IX-13-03
Subject: QW-200.1(b)
Date Issued: September 13, 2012
File: 11-1476
Background: QW-200.1(b) says: “The completed WPS shall describe all of the essential, nonessential, and, when required, supplementary essential variables for each welding process used in the WPS.”
Question (1): If a WPS is written and qualified for welding P-No.1 material to itself, is it necessary to specifically mention on the WPS or on the PQR anything regarding QW-410.64, which addresses the use of thermal processes for cutting
or backgouging when welding on P-No.11A and P-No.11B materials?
Reply (1): No. The fact that the WPS and PQR are for welding on P-No.1 materials precludes the need to specifically
describe the use of thermal cutting or backgouging for P-No.11A or P-No. 11B materials on either the WPS or the PQR.
Question (2): If a WPS specifies the use of ER70S-6 filler metal, is it necessary to specifically mention in the WPS anything regarding QW-404.23, which addresses filler metal product form by specifying that the filler metal has to be solid?
Reply (2): No. The designation ER70S-6 specifies that the filler metal be solid wire, and that is sufficient for describing
the variable QW-404.23.
Question (3): If a WPS is written and qualified for welding P-No. 5A material to itself, is it necessary to specifically mention on a WPS or on the PQRs for submerged arc welding anything regarding QW-404.34 that addresses, when welding on
P-No.1 materials, the use of active or neutral flux?
Reply (3): No. The use of active or neutral fluxes only needs to be specified on the WPS and documented on the PQR
when the base metal is P-No.1.
515
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
Interpretation: IX-13-04
Subject: QW-181.2, Sectioning of Pipe-to-Pipe Quarter Sections
Date Issued: September 13, 2012
File: 12-120
Question: If the resultant size from a pipe-to-pipe quarter section, per QW-462.4(c), is too large to bend as specified in
QW-181.2, can the fracture test quarter section specimen be cut into multiple specimens and tested in lieu of one full
quarter specimen?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-13-05
Subject: QW-193, Macro Examination for the Mockup Test of Tube-to-Tubesheet Joint
Date Issued: November 14, 2012
File: 12-1563
Question: When performing a tube-to-tubesheet test in accordance with QW-193, is it required to section a total of 10
tubes and perform a macroetch of the 40 surfaces exposed by sectioning?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-13-06
Subject: QW-103.2, Records
Date Issued: December 6, 2012
File: 12-7
Background: In the 2006 Addenda to Section IX, it became mandatory to certify qualification records “by signature or
other means as described in the manufacturer’s or contractor’s Quality Control System.”
Question: Prior to the 2006 Addenda, is a typed signature or means other than a written signature on a procedure qualification or performance qualification record considered certified as required in QW/QB-103.2?
Reply: Prior to the 2006 Addenda, the method of certification for procedure and performance qualification records was
not addressed by Section IX.
516
SECTION IX — INTERPRETATIONS VOL. 62
Interpretation: IX-13-07
Subject: QW-407.1(b)
Date Issued: December 6, 2012
File: 12-1230
Background:
(a) P-No. 8 plate is welded, heated to 780°C (1,436°F), then formed, followed by a solution heat treatment at 1 060°C
(1,940°F).
(b) P-No. 8 plate is welded, then cold formed, followed by a solution heat treatment at 1 060°C (1,940°F).
Question: Is WPS supported by a PQR with 1 060°C (1,940°F) solution heat treatment qualified to weld P-No. 8 base
material as described in (a) and (b) of the Background?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-13-08
Subject: QW-361.2
Date Issued: December 6, 2012
File: 12-1501
Question: A welding operator (machine) successfully qualifies in accordance with QW-300, using an open root, singlewelded, Vee-groove joint configuration, without backing and without a consumable insert. Is the welding operator (machine) qualified to perform machine welding with a consumable insert?
Reply: Yes.
Interpretation: IX-13-09
Subject: QW-202.4, Dissimilar Base Metal Thicknesses
Date Issued: December 6, 2012
File: 12-1833
Question: Does QW-202.4 allow a WPS qualified on groove weld, with specified P-No. 1 base metal thickness range of 1/2
in. (13 mm) through 1 in. (25 mm), to be used in production to weld a 1/2 in. (13 mm) thick base metal to a 3/8 in. (10 mm)
thick base metal?
Reply: No.
517
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
518
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
NUMERIC INDEX
Location
Interpretation
IX-92-98
IX-92-82
IX-01-16
IX-01-16
IX-83-02
BC94-236
BC93-434
BC01-338
BC01-338
BC81-704
Page
No.
327
317
433
433
6
BC82-796
28
27
250
273
304
326
IX-01-25
IX-01-29
IX-01-38
BC82-794
BC90-873
BC91-471
BC92-422
BC93-754
BC93-762,
BC93-769
BC01-815
BC02-2692
BC03-274
IX-86-73
IX-92-86
IX-92-86
IX-83-76
IX-98-01
IX-89-74
IX-83-76
IX-89-103
IX-86-21
IX-86-02
IX-01-34
IX-01-34
IX-92-74
IX-92-93
IX-83-136
IX-83-49
IX-83-118
IX-83-118
IX-01-34
IX-86-11
IX-86-22
IX-01-34
IX-92-83
IX-04-06
IX-10-09
IX-98-01
IX-10-09
IX-83-76
IX-86-02
IX-89-49
IX-89-49
IX-89-81
IX-04-06
IX-83-76
IX-86-38
IX-89-93
BC86-332
BC93-655
BC93-655
BC83-248
BC97-304
BC90-429
BC83-248
BC91-096
BC86-058
BC85-292
BC02-3541
BC02-3541
BC93-474
BC93-752
BC84-398
BC82-871
BC84-183
BC84-183
BC02-3541
BC85-420
BC85-531
BC02-3541
BC93-527
BC03-1664
09-883
BC97-304
09-883
BC83-248
BC85-292
BC89-372
BC89-372
BC90-537
BC03-1664
BC83-248
BC86-298
BC90-783
159
318
318
44
383
234
44
253
126
113
451
451
313
325
87
33
78
78
451
116
126
451
317
459
501
383
501
44
113
218
218
237
459
44
140
249
Appendix C
Code Case 2141
Code Case 2142-1
Code Case 2143-1
Q-11, 1971 Edition
Q-11(b)(3), 1971 Edtion,
Winter 1973 Addenda
IX-83-41
Q-11(5), 1971 Edition, Winter
1973 Addenda
IX-83-40
Section II, Part C
IX-89-97
IX-92-27
IX-92-61
IX-92-94
IX-92-99
Part QB
Part QB
QB-121
QB-123
QB-141.4
QB-172
QB-181
QB-200.4
QB-201.3
QB-203.1
QB-303.3
QB-402.1
QB-402.2
QB-402.3
QB-406.1
QB-406.3
QB-408.1
QB-408.2
QB-408.4
QB-415
QB-451.3
QB-451.3 [Note (1)]
QB-451.5
QB-452.1 [Note (1)]
QB-461
QB-462.1(a)
QB-462.1(b)
QB-462.1(c)
QB-462.1(e)
QB-463
QB-466.3
QB-482
File No.
Location
Part QB (Cont'd)
QB-484
Part QW
QW-100.1
QW-100.3
QW-103
327
441
445
452
QW-103.1
QW-103.2
QW-144
QW-150
QW-151
QW-151.1
QW-151.1(d)
QW-151.2
QW-151.2(d)
QW-151.3
QW-153.1
QW-153.1(d)
QW-160
QW-162.1
QW-163
QW-180
QW-181.1
(a)
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-89-93
BC90-783
249
IX-83-17
IX-89-03
IX-83-99
IX-92-86
IX-01-22
IX-01-22R
BC82-422
BC88-166A
BC83-472
BC93-658
BC01-679
BC01-679*,
BC04-600
BC01-826
BC04-601
BC04-600
09-490
BC91-260
BC93-584
BC92-306
BC91-314
BC92-307
12-7
BC01-073
BC83-692
BC82-771
BC91-390
BC92-097
BC89-099
BC90-532
BC90-532
BC93-583
BC84-253
BC01-035
BC83-474
BC83-301
BC91-473
BC92-452
BC02-3586
BC05-1404
11-2029
BC88-167
BC94-542
BC01-772
BC94-570
BC84-697
BC91-261
BC95-094
BC83-279
BC86-297
BC82-749
BC83-474
BC86-331
BC86-515
09-2140
BC91-263
BC86-329
10-13
13
182
63
318
440
IX-01-26
IX-04-10
IX-07-05
IX-10-04
IX-92-09
IX-92-80
IX-92-81
IX-92-16
IX-92-55
IX-13-06
IX-01-10
IX-83-110
IX-83-38
IX-92-19
IX-92-37
IX-89-25
IX-89-83
IX-89-90
IX-92-79
IX-83-119
IX-01-21
IX-83-120
IX-83-95
IX-92-29
IX-92-63
IX-04-01
IX-04-25
IX-10-37
IX-89-04
IX-95-06
IX-01-18
IX-95-09
IX-83-156
IX-92-10
IX-95-15
IX-83-115
IX-86-37
IX-83-60
IX-83-120
IX-86-42
IX-86-61
IX-10-10
IX-92-11
IX-86-40
IX-10-12
481
441
464
482
495
265
316
316
268
295
516
428
69
26
269
282
197
243
247
315
79
439
79
61
279
304
457
474
514
182
336
435
344
98
265
346
77
139
38
79
141
153
502
266
141
502
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Location
Part QW (Cont'd)
QW-181.2
QW-181.2.1
QW-182
QW-183
QW-184
QW-191
QW-191.2.2
QW-191.2.2(b)(1)
QW-191.2.2(b)(3)
QW-193
QW-194
QW-194.1
QW-195
QW-200
QW-200.1
QW-200.1(b)
QW-200.1(c)
QW-200.2
QW-200.2(b)
QW-200.2(c)
QW-200.2(f)
QW-200.3
QW-200.4
QW-200.4(a)
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-13-04
IX-10-05
IX-10-32
IX-92-24
IX-92-24
IX-04-21
IX-83-52
IX-83-142
IX-83-157
IX-83-174
IX-86-62
IX-83-173
IX-83-173
IX-13-05
IX-01-03
IX-01-10
IX-86-18
IX-92-13
IX-86-42
IX-89-17
IX-92-38
IX-83-03
IX-89-03
IX-92-30
IX-98-13
IX-89-85
IX-95-01
IX-13-03
IX-83-54
IX-83-111
IX-83-03
IX-83-72
IX-86-70
IX-86-87
IX-92-78
IX-98-04
IX-01-05
IX-04-10
IX-04-14
IX-10-22
IX-83-164
IX-92-16
IX-92-25
IX-83-171
IX-07-08
IX-86-06
IX-04-05
IX-83-115
IX-89-37
IX-89-66
IX-83-80
IX-83-83
IX-86-06
IX-86-08
IX-86-23
IX-86-33
IX-92-77
IX-95-10
IX-01-24
IX-04-08
IX-10-14
IX-86-01
12-120
09-1956
11-939
BC91-280
BC91-280
BC05-528
BC83-001
BC84-548
BC84-700
BC84-557
BC86-517
BC85-013
BC85-013
12-1563
BC00-519
BC01-073
BC85-585
BC91-278
BC86-331
BC88-473
BC91-630
BC82-056
BC88-166A
BC91-587
BC98-239
BC90-671
BC94-104
11-1476
BC83-042
BC84-001
BC82-056
BC83-269
BC87-089
BC87-490A
BC93-561
BC97-481
BC00-654
BC04-601
BC04-1592
10-1158
BC85-023
BC91-314
BC91-415
BC85-132
08-209
BC85-328
BC03-1583
BC83-279
BC89-358
BC90-281
BC83-388
BC83-394
BC85-328
BC85-134
BC85-553
BC86-262
BC93-518
BC94-662
BC01-814
BC03-1770
09-2144
BC85-036
516
495
512
272
272
473
34
89
98
107
153
106
106
516
420
428
125
267
141
193
283
7
182
279
396
244
333
515
35
70
7
43
157
175
318
384
420
464
466
509
103
268
272
105
488
115
458
77
212
226
50
53
115
116
127
138
314
344
440
464
503
113
Location
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-92-42
IX-92-97
IX-89-43
IX-92-75
IX-01-21
IX-01-32
IX-04-18
IX-10-34
IX-83-03
IX-83-12
IX-83-25
IX-83-39
IX-83-68
IX-83-151
IX-86-49
IX-89-73
IX-92-07
IX-92-66
IX-92-67
IX-92-80
IX-92-81
IX-92-92
IX-95-25
IX-95-26
IX-95-27
IX-95-29
IX-95-40
BC92-011
BC94-167
BC89-365
BC93-490
BC01-035
BC02-3449
BC05-25
10-1966
BC82-056
BC82-341
BC81-160
BC83-792
BC83-040
BC84-620
BC86-367
BC90-319
BC91-156
BC93-377
BC93-391
BC93-584
BC92-306
BC93-678
BC95-252
BC95-303
BC95-482
BC95-302
BC93-431,
BC95-222
BC97-309
BC00-553
BC03-740
BC05-1196
06-912
11-44
BC99-025
BC03-740
08-1002
BC91-315
BC83-237
BC87-134
BC91-263
BC94-235
BC01-615
BC90-745
BC90-663
BC90-663*
BC83-531
BC84-070
BC84-219
BC86-429
BC88-401
BC96-060
10-359
BC01-615
BC84-092
BC86-280
BC86-337
BC88-089
BC91-263
BC95-027
BC01-789
BC04-599
291
327
215
313
439
447
472
513
7
11
16
26
41
96
144
234
264
305
306
316
316
325
359
359
360
360
Part QW (Cont'd)
QW-200.4(a)(2)
QW-200.4(b)
QW-201
QW-201.1
QW-202
QW-202.2
QW-202.2(b)
QW-202.2(c)
QW-202.3
QW-202.3(b)
QW-202.4
(b)
IX-98-02
IX-01-02
IX-01-40
IX-04-26
IX-07-02
IX-10-25
IX-98-18
IX-01-40
IX-07-10
IX-92-17
IX-83-103
IX-86-74
IX-92-11
IX-95-03
IX-01-17
IX-89-87
IX-89-100
IX-89-100R
IX-83-93
IX-83-114
IX-83-160
IX-86-56
IX-89-12
IX-95-34
IX-10-15
IX-01-17
IX-83-123
IX-86-36
IX-86-43
IX-86-89
IX-92-11
IX-95-12
IX-01-23
IX-04-11
376
383
419
453
477
481
510
403
453
488
268
65
165
266
334
434
245
252
261
56
71
100
146
187
368
503
434
80
139
142
176
266
345
440
465
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Location
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-13-09
IX-98-20R
IX-01-19
IX-95-13
IX-89-67
IX-83-15
IX-89-105
IX-04-23
IX-86-71
IX-92-06
IX-92-60
IX-95-34
IX-10-19
IX-83-48
IX-89-77
IX-92-54
IX-89-29
IX-92-03
IX-95-34
IX-89-32
IX-89-39
IX-89-77
IX-89-31
IX-92-20
IX-89-11
IX-89-85
IX-10-07
IX-10-28
IX-83-79
IX-92-44
IX-92-57
IX-83-27
IX-95-16
IX-07-03
IX-86-26
IX-92-57
IX-04-17
IX-10-18
IX-04-02
IX-89-92
IX-92-44
12-1833
BC99-539*
BC01-811
BC94-035
BC90-335
BC82-388
BC91-119
BC05-784
BC87-090
BC91-054
BC92-421
BC96-060
09-2143
BC82-870
BC90-492
BC92-305
BC89-178
BC90-523
BC96-060
BC89-287
BC89-361
BC90-492
BC89-178
BC91-396
BC88-399
BC90-671
09-588
09-558
BC83-358
BC92-168
BC92-354
BC82-713
BC95-095
07-1041
BC86-059
BC92-354
BC05-24
09-994
BC03-1029
BC90-681
BC92-168,
BC90-691
BC90-430
BC86-458
BC84-251
BC89-366
BC84-151
BC89-367
BC90-250
BC82-279
BC89-094
BC02-3896
BC97-044
12-752
BC82-499
BC86-018
BC89-360
BC93-755
BC94-008
BC95-302
BC96-314
BC98-133
517
426
435
345
226
13
254
474
157
264
303
368
506
32
236
295
204
262
368
205
213
236
204
270
186
244
496
511
50
291
296
17
346
481
129
296
471
505
457
248
Location
QW-203
QW-204
QW-211
QW-214
QW-214.1
QW-214.3
QW-216
QW-216.1
QW-216.2(d)
QW-218
QW-250
QW-251.2
QW-251.4
QW-253
QW-254
QW-255
QW-256
QW-256.1
QW-258.1
QW-280
QW-281.2(b)
QW-281.2(c)
QW-281.2(e)
QW-281.5(a)
QW-282
QW-282.4(h)
QW-282.6(m)
QW-283
QW-284
QW-288
QW-300
File No.
Page
No.
IX-98-14
IX-86-05
IX-86-24
IX-86-25
IX-95-35
IX-83-133
IX-83-151
IX-86-64
IX-89-10
IX-92-25
IX-95-32
IX-01-08
IX-01-15
IX-10-02
IX-92-39
IX-95-14
IX-95-19
IX-10-29
IX-83-103
IX-86-69
IX-89-79
IX-92-17
IX-92-23
IX-83-153
IX-83-31
IX-83-149
IX-07-11
IX-83-32
IX-83-163
IX-86-13
IX-86-90
IX-89-30
IX-01-36
IX-10-01
IX-86-34
IX-86-79
IX-10-01
IX-89-64
IX-92-71
IX-95-17
IX-89-98
IX-92-15
IX-83-98
IX-83-155
IX-86-74
IX-92-45
IX-92-46
IX-83-19
IX-83-57
IX-83-91
IX-83-108
IX-86-85
IX-95-39
IX-10-03
IX-10-26
IX-83-128
IX-01-04
IX-89-108
IX-83-83
IX-83-107
IX-86-23
IX-92-26
BC98-447
BC85-306
BC86-001
BC86-018
BC96-287
BC84-370
BC84-620
BC86-395
BC88-398
BC91-415
BC95-302
BC01-030
BC01-641
09-747
BC92-121
BC95-040
BC95-221
10-339
BC83-237
BC87-088
BC90-531
BC91-315
BC90-494
BC84-664
BC82-395
BC84-558
08-1607
BC82-598
BC85-022
BC85-507
BC88-091
BC89-177
BC02-4198
09-567
BC86-265
BC87-140
09-567
BC90-297
BC93-365
BC95-035
BC91-003
BC91-293
BC83-450
BC84-692
BC87-134
BC92-238
BC92-265
BC82-440
BC83-079
BC83-528
BC83-639
BC87-492
BC96-331
09-1012
09-744
BC84-226
BC00-653
BC91-157
BC83-394
BC83-550
BC85-553
BC91-470
397
114
128
128
368
86
96
154
186
272
367
427
433
493
283
345
352
511
65
156
237
268
271
97
19
95
489
19
102
118
176
204
452
493
138
167
493
225
312
351
251
267
63
98
165
292
292
14
37
56
68
174
375
494
510
83
420
256
53
67
127
273
Part QW (Cont'd)
Part QW (Cont'd)
QW-202.4(b)
Interpretation
IX-89-70
IX-86-59
IX-83-129
IX-89-44
IX-83-125
IX-89-54
IX-89-59
IX-83-09
IX-89-22
IX-01-33
IX-95-42
IX-13-02
IX-83-21
IX-86-25
IX-89-48
IX-92-91
IX-92-95
IX-95-20
IX-95-36
IX-98-11
QW-300.1
QW-300.2
QW-300.3
QW-301
QW-301.1
QW-301.2
QW-301.4
QW-302.1
QW-302.2
QW-302.3
QW-302.4
QW-303
291
227
152
84
215
81
220
222
10
195
447
377
515
15
128
217
324
326
352
369
395
QW-303.1
QW-303.2
QW-303.3
QW-304
QW-304.1
QW-305
QW-306
(c)
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Location
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-92-59
IX-92-68
IX-92-31
IX-86-35
IX-04-07
IX-89-89
IX-04-23
IX-83-42
IX-83-70
IX-83-101
IX-83-121
IX-83-132
IX-83-162
IX-86-27
IX-83-101
IX-83-134
IX-86-24
IX-83-13
IX-86-79
IX-92-73
IX-83-58
IX-83-113
IX-83-117
IX-83-124
IX-83-128
IX-83-154
IX-83-166
IX-83-167
IX-83-170
IX-86-07
IX-86-19
IX-86-50
IX-89-38
IX-89-54
IX-89-63
IX-92-12
IX-92-22
IX-92-64
IX-95-38
IX-01-21
IX-83-150
IX-83-159
IX-83-164
IX-86-52
IX-86-81
IX-86-82
IX-89-27
IX-89-38
IX-89-54
IX-04-21
IX-10-17
IX-95-19
IX-92-47
IX-04-13
IX-01-12
IX-86-51
IX-95-30
IX-83-55
IX-83-77
IX-83-143
IX-89-02
IX-92-32
BC92-206
BC92-011A
BC91-613
BC86-266
BC03-1686
BC90-769
BC05-784
BC83-803
BC83-270
BC83-529
BC84-134
BC84-366
BC84-663
BC86-061
BC83-529
BC84-396
BC86-001
BC82-346
BC87-140
BC93-468
BC83-086
BC84-055
BC84-133
BC84-149
BC84-226
BC84-689
BC85-030
BC85-031
BC85-091
BC85-560
BC85-587
BC86-389
BC89-359
BC89-367
BC90-254
BC91-264
BC91-425
BC92-464
BC96-132
BC01-035
BC84-617
BC84-690
BC85-023
BC86-394
BC87-242
BC87-252
BC89-100
BC89-359
BC89-367
BC05-528
10-1161
BC95-221
BC92-266
BC04-1457
BC01-201
BC86-390
BC96-073
BC83-059
BC83-253
BC84-581
BC88-090
BC91-631
303
306
280
139
459
246
474
28
42
64
80
85
102
129
64
86
128
12
167
313
37
71
78
81
83
97
104
104
105
115
129
144
213
220
224
266
271
305
375
439
96
99
103
145
173
173
203
213
220
473
504
352
292
466
430
145
361
36
49
89
181
280
Location
Part QW (Cont'd)
QW-355
Part QW (Cont'd)
QW-310
QW-310.1
QW-310.2
QW-310.4
QW-310.5(c)
QW-311
(New QW-381)
QW-311(a)
QW-312(a)
QW-320
QW-321
QW-321.2(a)
QW-321.3
QW-322
QW-322(a)
QW-322.1
QW-322.1(a)
QW-322.1(b)
QW-322.2
QW-322.2(a)
QW-350
QW-351
QW-356
QW-360
QW-361.2
QW-364
QW-380
QW-381
QW-382
QW-383
QW-400
QW-401.3
QW-401.15
QW-402
QW-402.3
QW-402.4
QW-402.5
QW-402.6
QW-402.10
QW-402.11
QW-402.12
QW-402.14
QW-403
QW-403.1
QW-403.5
(d)
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-86-12
IX-86-46
IX-10-03
IX-79-52R
IX-83-116
IX-86-68
IX-92-01
IX-89-51
IX-01-09
IX-86-68
IX-95-31
IX-98-14
IX-13-08
IX-92-58
IX-89-71
IX-89-92
BC85-482
BC86-219
09-1012
BC79-046*
BC84-054
BC87-039
BC90-501
BC90-038
BC01-032
BC87-039
BC96-141
BC98-447
12-1501
BC92-357
BC90-039
BC90-681,
BC90-691
BC86-061
BC86-457
BC87-036
BC87-090
BC93-392
BC98-447
BC90-518
BC90-530
BC86-222
BC91-085
BC83-303
BC03-469
BC03-1246
08-576
BC89-174
BC90-045
10-496
BC86-400
BC89-174
BC86-400
BC82-098
BC82-098
BC83-230
BC89-364
BC87-253
BC98-009
BC98-009
BC82-496
BC84-054
BC82-385
BC88-403
BC95-194
BC83-530
BC84-397
BC85-532
BC87-136
BC87-139
BC89-096
BC89-103
BC90-443
BC90-515
BC92-450
BC00-470
BC95-318
BC02-2693
117
143
494
49
77
156
285
219
428
156
361
397
517
296
233
IX-86-27
IX-86-58
IX-86-66
IX-86-71
IX-92-72
IX-98-14
IX-92-02
IX-92-04
IX-86-32
IX-89-101
IX-83-82
IX-01-39
IX-04-04
IX-07-09
IX-89-28
IX-89-53
IX-10-21
IX-86-54
IX-89-28
IX-86-54
IX-83-04
IX-83-04
IX-83-71
IX-89-42
IX-86-80
IX-98-06
IX-98-06
IX-83-20
IX-83-116
IX-83-45
IX-89-14
IX-95-24
IX-83-92
IX-83-135
IX-86-15
IX-86-75
IX-86-78
IX-89-23
IX-89-26
IX-89-75
IX-89-78
IX-92-70
IX-92-70R
IX-95-21
IX-01-30
248
129
152
155
157
312
397
262
263
138
252
52
453
458
488
203
219
509
146
203
146
8
8
43
215
167
389
389
14
77
30
187
359
56
87
123
165
166
196
197
235
236
311
425
353
446
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Location
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-04-16
IX-83-148
IX-89-07
IX-89-86
IX-89-96
IX-92-50
IX-92-87
IX-04-04
IX-04-15
IX-07-09
IX-13-01
IX-83-97
IX-83-127
IX-83-152
IX-04-09
IX-95-28
IX-95-33
IX-01-01
IX-83-11
IX-83-35
IX-83-56
IX-86-75
IX-89-75
IX-89-84
IX-89-88
IX-89-61
IX-89-20
IX-89-82
IX-89-91
IX-83-106
IX-83-137
IX-86-41
IX-83-37
IX-86-03
IX-86-65
IX-86-76
IX-89-105
IX-98-19
IX-10-21
IX-83-10
IX-83-87
IX-83-176
IX-83-140R
IX-86-57
IX-86-84
IX-89-34
IX-89-55
IX-89-58
IX-10-31
IX-10-33
IX-10-13
IX-83-46
IX-83-59
IX-83-61
IX-83-84
IX-83-96
IX-83-169
IX-95-37
IX-92-21
IX-83-06
IX-83-47
IX-83-97
BC04-1418
BC84-417
BC88-171
BC90-734
BC90-872
BC92-217
BC93-151
BC03-1246
BC04-1595
08-576
12-635
BC83-444
BC84-224
BC84-648
BC04-065
BC96-002
BC96-001
BC00-514
BC82-300
BC82-599
BC83-078
BC87-136
BC90-443
BC90-664
BC90-768
BC90-252
BC88-478
BC90-531
BC90-680
BC83-630
BC84-399
BC86-330
BC82-770
BC85-293
BC87-031A
BC87-137
BC91-119
BC99-409
10-496
BC82-299
BC83-340
BC85-088
BC84-250*
BC86-263
BC87-491
BC89-172
BC89-371
BC90-249
11-918
11-1339
09-1368
BC82-751
BC82-614
BC82-831
BC83-398
BC83-442
BC85-089
BC96-315
BC91-397
BC82-245
BC82-790
BC83-444
471
95
184
245
250
293
323
458
467
488
515
62
83
96
464
360
367
419
11
25
36
165
235
244
246
223
194
243
247
67
87
141
26
114
155
166
254
409
509
10
54
107
137
151
174
211
220
221
512
512
503
31
37
39
53
62
105
369
270
9
32
62
Location
QW-403.8
QW-403.9
QW-403.10
QW-403.11
QW-403.12
QW-403.16
QW-403.18
QW-404
QW-404.4
QW-404.5
QW-404.5(b)
QW-404.9
QW-404.12
QW-404.13
File No.
Page
No.
IX-83-100
IX-83-89
IX-89-68
IX-89-47
IX-83-22
IX-89-91
IX-07-07E
IX-07-04
IX-10-38
IX-10-16
IX-89-80
IX-89-80
IX-10-16
IX-83-100
IX-89-61
IX-89-20
IX-89-24
IX-89-56
IX-83-112
IX-01-01
IX-01-37
IX-04-19
IX-89-20
IX-89-24
IX-83-50
IX-04-28
IX-83-177
IX-86-86
IX-92-01
IX-98-15
IX-10-20
IX-83-161
IX-83-165
IX-83-161
IX-92-57
IX-83-130
IX-86-04
IX-86-20
IX-86-76
IX-83-29
IX-83-30
IX-98-10
BC83-563
BC83-402
BC90-349
BC89-370
BC82-516
BC90-680
08-40
BC07-1343
12-47
10-1159
BC90-536
BC90-536
10-1159
BC83-563
BC90-252
BC88-478
BC89-097
BC90-036
BC84-038
BC00-514
BC03-263
BC05-26
BC88-478
BC89-097
BC82-872
BC06-323
BC85-092
BC87-494
BC90-501
BC98-448
10-1487
BC84-618
BC85-024
BC84-618
BC92-354
BC84-252
BC85-304
BC86-010
BC87-137
BC82-763
BC82-243
BC97-306,
BC97-308
BC01-813
BC03-1212
BC05-293
BC07-1708
BC82-097*
BC86-223
BC06-462
BC06-285
12-1230
BC82-763
BC83-294
BC84-584
BC93-586
BC04-1595
BC07-1708
09-513
BC82-300
BC82-599
BC85-553
63
55
227
217
15
247
497
482
514
504
237
237
504
63
223
194
196
221
70
419
452
472
194
196
33
478
108
175
285
397
506
101
103
101
296
84
114
125
166
18
18
Part QW (Cont'd)
Part QW (Cont'd)
QW-403.6
Interpretation
QW-404.14
QW-404.15
QW-404.22
QW-404.23
QW-404.24
QW-404.25
QW-404.26
QW-404.27
QW-404.28
QW-404.30
QW-404.31
QW-404.32
QW-404.33
QW-404.36
QW-405.1
QW-405.2
QW-405.3
QW-406.1
QW-406.2
QW-406.3
QW-407
QW-407.1
QW-407.1(b)
QW-407.2
QW-407.4
(e)
IX-01-20
IX-04-03
IX-04-20
IX-07-06
IX-81-31R
IX-86-47
IX-04-29
IX-07-01
IX-13-07
IX-83-29
IX-83-86
IX-83-145
IX-92-84
IX-04-15
IX-07-06
IX-10-08
IX-83-11
IX-83-35
IX-86-23
395
435
458
472
483
5
143
478
481
517
18
54
90
318
467
483
501
11
25
127
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Location
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-92-33
IX-01-17
IX-04-22
IX-89-16
IX-95-11
IX-92-62
IX-95-16
IX-86-67
IX-83-168
IX-83-146
IX-86-67
IX-83-26
IX-83-33
IX-83-175
IX-92-40
IX-92-87
IX-92-88
IX-04-12
IX-04-14
IX-07-03
IX-10-24
IX-01-28
IX-89-19
IX-89-36
IX-92-88
IX-95-18
IX-04-17
IX-10-21
IX-86-55
IX-86-60
IX-86-44
IX-86-63
IX-83-69
IX-86-26
IX-04-02
IX-98-07
IX-01-06R
IX-89-79
IX-89-82
IX-86-72
IX-86-86
IX-10-30
IX-07-05
IX-95-07
IX-01-07
IX-83-34
IX-83-131
IX-86-88
IX-89-14
IX-89-36
IX-89-88
IX-92-08
IX-92-18
IX-95-05
IX-07-14
IX-86-17
IX-89-15
IX-92-18
IX-01-31
IX-89-58
IX-92-65
IX-89-05
BC91-614
BC01-615
BC04-1301
BC88-405
BC95-002
BC92-425
BC95-095
BC87-038
BC85-059
BC84-619
BC87-038
BC82-182
BC82-617
BC85-038
BC92-110
BC93-151
BC93-593
BC04-1013
BC04-1592
BC07-1041
11-216
BC02-2691
BC88-476
BC89-357
BC93-593
BC95-220
BC05-24
10-496
BC86-426
BC86-514A
BC86-365
BC86-520
BC82-233
BC86-059
BC03-1029
BC98-009
BC98-240*
BC90-531
BC90-531
BC87-091
BC87-494
10-1189
BC04-600
BC94-522
BC01-029
BC82-514
BC84-365
BC88-041
BC88-403
BC89-357
BC90-768
BC91-257
BC91-389
BC94-365
09-486
BC85-554
BC88-404
BC91-389
BC02-2694
BC90-249
BC93-148
BC88-168
280
434
473
188
344
304
346
155
104
90
155
17
19
107
284
323
323
466
466
481
510
445
194
212
323
351
471
509
146
152
142
154
42
129
457
390
426
237
243
158
175
511
482
343
427
25
85
176
187
212
246
265
297
336
493
124
183
297
446
221
305
188
Location
QW-408.2
QW-408.3
QW-408.8
QW-408.9
QW-409
QW-409.1
QW-409.2
QW-409.4
QW-409.8
QW-410
QW-410.7
QW-410.9
QW-410.15
QW-410.25
QW-410.26
QW-410.38
QW-410.42
QW-410.51
QW-415
QW-416
QW-420
QW-420.1
QW-420.2
QW-422
QW-423
QW-423.1
QW-424
File No.
Page
No.
IX-89-26
IX-89-41
IX-89-75
IX-89-88
IX-95-22
IX-89-58
IX-10-12
IX-10-39
IX-83-24
IX-80-52R
IX-92-99
BC89-103
BC89-363
BC90-443
BC90-768
BC95-251
BC90-249
10-13
12-178
BC82-588
BC80-435*
BC93-762,
BC93-769
BC98-131
10-1918
BC89-369
BC82-302
BC83-300
BC81-702
BC82-237
BC82-265
BC82-757
BC83-222
BC83-349
BC83-471
BC84-434
BC85-092
BC86-101
BC88-171
BC90-253
BC90-532
BC91-022
BC91-390
BC91-586
BC92-097
BC92-011A
BC97-479
BC98-237,
BC98-238
BC03-1246
BC03-1583
BC82-423
BC82-822
BC83-395
BC83-396
BC83-284
BC83-551
BC83-645
BC86-280
BC86-281
BC88-474
BC91-124
BC02-4075
BC04-599
BC86-329
BC92-276
BC92-308
BC05-1404
BC82-246
BC82-396
BC83-123
BC83-349
BC86-104
197
214
235
246
353
221
502
514
16
49
Part QW (Cont'd)
Part QW (Cont'd)
QW-408
Interpretation
QW-424.1
QW-432
QW-433
QW-442
QW-450
QW-450 vs QW-461
QW-451
QW-451.1
QW-451.3
QW-452
(f)
IX-98-08
IX-10-23
IX-89-46
IX-83-14
IX-83-78
IX-83-01
IX-83-05
IX-83-08
IX-83-36
IX-83-64
IX-83-104
IX-83-105
IX-83-141
IX-83-177
IX-86-31
IX-89-07
IX-89-62
IX-89-83
IX-89-99
IX-92-19
IX-92-34
IX-92-37
IX-92-68
IX-98-03
IX-98-12
IX-04-04
IX-04-05
IX-83-18
IX-83-43
IX-83-81
IX-83-88
IX-83-94
IX-83-102
IX-83-122
IX-86-36
IX-86-48
IX-89-18
IX-89-107
IX-01-35
IX-04-11
IX-86-40
IX-92-51
IX-92-56
IX-04-25
IX-83-07
IX-83-16
IX-83-67
IX-83-104
IX-86-30
327
390
509
216
12
50
5
8
10
25
40
66
66
89
108
137
184
224
243
251
269
281
282
306
383
396
458
458
14
29
51
54
61
65
80
139
143
193
255
451
465
141
294
295
474
9
13
41
66
131
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Location
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-86-39
IX-89-02
IX-83-66
IX-83-88
IX-83-90
IX-89-06
IX-89-21
IX-89-52
IX-89-64
IX-89-95
IX-89-107
IX-92-35
IX-92-36
IX-92-53
IX-92-59
IX-92-89
IX-01-27
IX-10-23
IX-10-35
IX-83-22
IX-83-23
IX-83-66
IX-83-158
IX-86-29
IX-89-09
IX-89-69
IX-89-94
IX-89-104
IX-89-106
IX-92-59
IX-92-89
IX-95-04
IX-04-07
IX-92-45
IX-92-51
IX-10-06
IX-10-27
IX-89-57
IX-92-05
IX-92-72
IX-95-23
IX-95-41
IX-98-05
IX-98-17
IX-10-11
IX-83-65
IX-83-28
IX-83-44
IX-83-53
IX-83-134
IX-86-29
IX-89-98
IX-92-15
IX-92-41
IX-92-46
BC86-299
BC88-090
BC83-058
BC83-396
BC83-407
BC88-169
BC89-031
BC90-044
BC90-297
BC90-869
BC91-124
BC91-277
BC91-616
BC92-254
BC92-206
BC93-653
BC02-111
10-1918
11-2030
BC82-516
BC82-530
BC83-058
BC84-368
BC86-103
BC88-397
BC90-401
BC90-785
BC91-097
BC91-120
BC92-206
BC93-653
BC94-296
BC03-1686
BC92-238
BC92-276
08-210
08-210
BC90-040
BC90-632
BC93-392
BC95-428
BC97-028
BC98-009
BC98-055
09-2141
BC83-225
BC82-748
BC82-838
BC83-002
BC84-396
BC86-103
BC91-003
BC91-293
BC92-035
BC92-265
140
181
41
54
55
183
195
219
225
250
255
281
282
294
303
324
441
509
513
15
15
41
99
130
185
227
249
253
254
303
324
335
459
292
294
496
510
221
263
312
353
376
389
403
502
40
18
29
35
86
130
251
267
284
292
Location
QW-452.1(b)
QW-452.3
QW-452.4
QW-452.5
QW-452.6
QW-453
QW-461.1(a)
QW-461.9
File No.
Page
No.
IX-92-72
IX-92-90
IX-04-07
IX-04-24
IX-86-09
IX-89-102
IX-92-76
IX-95-02
IX-83-110
IX-92-29
IX-98-09
IX-86-45
IX-89-25
IX-83-139
IX-89-89
IX-83-95
IX-83-144
IX-89-72
IX-83-144
IX-92-51
IX-95-08
IX-10-36
IX-89-45
IX-10-36
IX-92-05
IX-92-52
IX-98-16
IX-83-15
IX-83-75
IX-83-51
IX-92-48
IX-92-49
IX-95-15
IX-83-73
IX-83-74
IX-83-115
IX-89-37
IX-07-12
IX-10-10
IX-83-109
IX-86-37
IX-86-14
IX-89-01
IX-86-14
IX-86-70
IX-83-53
IX-07-13
IX-86-16
IX-89-62
IX-92-43
IX-98-15
IX-01-14
IX-01-11
IX-01-11
BC93-392
BC93-753
BC03-1686
BC05-1195
BC85-200
BC91-086
BC93-515
BC94-181
BC83-692
BC91-473
BC97-302
BC86-366
BC89-099
BC83-629
BC90-769
BC83-301
BC84-583
BC90-042
BC84-583
BC92-276
BC94-543
11-896
BC89-368
11-896
BC90-632
BC92-252
BC98-453
BC82-388
BC83-149
BC83-881
BC92-267
BC92-268
BC95-094
BC82-866
BC82-867
BC83-279
BC89-358
08-1161
09-2140
BC83-689
BC86-297
BC85-483
BC88-042
BC85-483
BC87-089
BC83-002
08-1464
BC85-533
BC90-253
BC92-100
BC98-448
BC01-332
BC01-089
BC01-089
312
324
459
474
116
253
312
333
69
279
395
142
197
88
246
61
90
233
90
294
343
514
216
514
263
294
398
13
44
34
293
293
346
43
44
77
212
489
502
68
139
123
181
123
157
35
489
124
224
291
397
433
429
429
Part QW (Cont'd)
Part QW (Cont'd)
QW-452.1
Interpretation
QW-462
QW-462.1
QW-462.1(a)
QW-462.1(d)
QW-462.1(e)
QW-462.3(a)
QW-462.3(b)
QW-462.4
QW-462.4(a)
QW-462.4(b)
QW-462.5
QW-462.5(a)
QW-463.1(b)
QW-463.2(g)
QW-466
QW-466.1
QW-466.3
QW-482
QW-483
QW-484
QW-492
QW-500
QW-510
QW-540
(g)
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
(h)
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
SUBJECT INDEX
Subject
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-01-22
IX-01-22R
440
IX-07-05
IX-10-04
P-Number substitution
IX-83-20
IX-83-56
IX-83-96
IX-86-17
IX-86-18
IX-89-29
IX-89-61
IX-89-75
IX-95-21
IX-95-22
IX-95-24
qualifying for notch toughness IX-83-92
IX-86-48
IX-89-75
IX-89-84
IX-89-96
IX-92-70
IX-92-70R
IX-92-87
qualifying for test specimens IX-89-37
IX-89-88
IX-01-30
IX-13-01
thickness
IX-01-01
IX-01-19
IX-04-09
IX-04-11
IX-13-01
use of as filler metal
IX-83-87
BC01-679
01-679*,
04-600
04-600
09-490
BC82-496
BC83-078
BC83-442
BC85-554
BC85-585
BC89-176
BC90-252
BC90-443
BC95-318
BC95-251
BC95-194
BC83-530
BC86-281
BC90-443
BC90-664
BC90-872
BC92-450
BC00-470
BC93-151
BC89-358
BC90-768
BC02-2693
12-635
BC00-514
BC01-811
BC04-065
BC04-599
12-635
BC83-340
Brazing Base Metals
P-Number substitution
BC93-474
313
Base Metals
P-Number reassignment
IX-92-74
Brazing Performance Qualification
limits of qualified positions
IX-01-34
Brazing Procedure Qualification
by Part QW welding
qualification
IX-92-83
electrode classification
IX-95-13
for attaching small
penetrations
IX-86-73
joint design
IX-01-34
qualification by proof test
IX-86-53
S-Number substitution
IX-92-93
Brazing Procedure Specification
combination of thicknesses
IX-89-104
qualification of hard-facing
IX-92-83
BC02-3541
Subject
Interpretation
Brazing Procedure Specification (Cont'd)
recording information on BPS IX-89-93
recording information on the
Brazer or Brazing Operator
Qualification Test
IX-89-94
requalification of
IX-86-22
481
482
495
14
36
62
124
125
204
223
235
353
353
359
54
143
235
244
250
311
425
323
212
246
446
515
419
435
464
465
515
56
File No.
Page
No.
BC90-783
249
BC90-785
BC85-531
249
126
IX-89-49
IX-92-85
IX-04-06
IX-10-09
BC89-372
BC93-655
BC03-1664
09-883
218
318
459
501
Certification
of the PQR
of the WPS
IX-83-03
IX-83-03
BC82-056
BC82-056
7
7
Clad Materials
joining of
IX-10-18
09-994
505
qualifying viewing windows
IX-89-91
IX-83-06
IX-83-22
IX-83-104
BC90-680
BC82-245
BC82-516
BC83-349
247
9
15
66
Cover Pass
remelting of
IX-83-89
BC83-402
55
IX-83-55
IX-83-44
IX-89-82
BC83-059
BC82-838
BC90-531
29
36
243
IX-83-09
BC82-279
10
IX-01-13
BC01-570
430
IX-01-26
BC01-826
441
Filler Materials (see also SFA Specifications)
change in electrode
classification
IX-83-84
BC83-303
IX-89-61
BC90-252
IX-92-21
BC91-397
IX-98-19
BC99-409
change in product forms
IX-07-04
07-1343
change in wire classification IX-83-84
BC83-398
IX-83-169
BC85-089
IX-95-37
BC96-315
IX-98-19
BC99-409
53
223
270
409
482
53
105
369
409
Brazing Test Specimens
butt and scarf joints
positions
tension tests
Consumable Inserts
addition/deletion
performance qualification
Diameters, Pipe
performance qualification
ranges listed on the WPS
Dust
amount in powdered filler
metal
Edition of Code
the use of the referenced
edition of the Code
451
Essential Variables (see Variables)
BC93-527
BC94-035
317
345
BC86-332
BC02-3541
BC86-399
BC93-752
159
451
145
325
BC91-097
BC93-527
253
317
(i)
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Subject
InterpretaFile No.
tion
Filler Materials (see also SFA Specifications) (Cont'd)
chemical analysis of weld
deposit
IX-86-57
BC86-263
electrode spacing
IX-86-44
BC86-365
flux-cored consumable
IX-89-105
BC91-119
nonferrous
IX-83-176
BC85-088
qualifying as a welded
buildup
IX-83-114
BC84-070
recrushed slag
IX-04-19
BC05-26
stranded
IX-10-38
12-47
supplementary powder,
addition, deletion or
increase
IX-89-80
BC90-536
without SFA specification
IX-86-03
BC85-293
Flux
active/neutral
flux-cored arc welding
F-Numbers
change in
classification
classification of martensitic
materials
use of electrodes to conform
F-No.
Interpass Temperatures
listing of on the WPS
qualification of
Machine Welding
definition of
Multiprocess Welds
qualified thickness range for
performance qualification
qualified thickness range for
procedure qualification
required test specimens for
procedure qualification
root pass without backing
with notch-toughness
requirements
Subject
Page
No.
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-83-25
IX-83-68
IX-83-03
IX-83-151
IX-86-64
IX-07-02
IX-07-10
BC81-160
BC83-040
BC82-056
BC84-620
BC86-395
06-912
08-1002
16
41
7
96
154
481
488
BC82-792
26
IX-89-74
IX-98-01
BC90-429
BC97-304
234
383
IX-92-18
IX-92-65
IX-01-31
IX-86-84
IX-89-29
IX-92-18
IX-89-101
BC91-389
BC93-148
BC02-2694
BC87-491
BC89-176
BC91-389
BC91-085
297
305
446
174
204
297
252
IX-86-25
IX-86-81
IX-95-32
IX-86-69
IX-92-01
BC86-018
BC87-242
BC95-302
BC87-088
BC90-501
128
173
367
156
285
IX-92-01
IX-92-26
IX-83-06
IX-83-22
IX-07-07E
IX-13-08
IX-10-17
BC90-501
BC91-470
BC82-245
BC82-516
08-40
12-1501
10-1161
285
273
9
15
497
517
504
IV-86-32
IX-86-58
IX-86-66
IX-89-79
IX-89-71
IX-92-72
IX-95-23
IX-95-30
IX-98-14
IX-89-09
IX-89-69
IX-89-98
IX-89-104
IX-89-106
IX-92-15
IX-92-41
IX-92-90
IX-95-04
IX-92-96
IX-89-10
IX-95-20
IX-95-32
BC86-222
BC86-457
BC87-036
BC90-531
BC90-039
BC93-392
BC95-428
BC96-073
BC98-447
BC88-397
BC90-401
BC91-003
BC91-097
BC91-120
BC91-263
BC92-035
BC93-753
BC94-296
BC93-755
BC88-398
BC95-302
BC95-302
138
152
155
237
233
312
353
361
397
185
227
251
253
254
267
284
324
335
326
186
352
367
Nozzle Joint Design (Cont'd)
Operational Control
change in company name
contractor’s associations
of welding procedures
151
142
254
107
71
472
514
organizations not involved in
Code applications
IX-83-39
237
114
Peel Test, Brazing
acceptance criteria
IX-86-16
IX-10-03
BC85-533
09-1012
124
494
IX-83-10
IX-89-28
IX-89-46
IX-92-99
BC82-299
BC89-174
BC89-369
BC93-762
BC93-769
10
203
216
327
327
A-number substitution
IX-83-24
BC82-588
16
applied lining or clad plate
by several contractors
simultaneously
IX-89-29
IX-01-16
BC89-176
BC01-338
204
433
IX-83-41
IX-83-161
IX-83-41
IX-83-129
BC82-796
BC84-618
BC82-796
BC84-251
28
101
28
84
IX-92-43
BC92-100
291
Performance Qualification
alternate base materials for
welder qualification
change in angle groove
change in vertical welding
combination of welding
processes
consumable inserts
continuity
corrosion-resistant weld
metal overlay
IX-83-14
IX-89-35
BC83-302
BC89-307
12
211
IX-83-83
IX-95-33
BC83-394
BC96-001
53
367
IX-83-01
IX-89-01
BC81-702
BC88-042
5
181
IX-83-33
BC82-617
19
diameter limitation
Nonessential Variables (see also Variables)
addressing
IX-98-13
BC98-239
ranges for
IX-83-04
BC82-098
396
8
Normalized Materials
qualified by non-normalized
materials
IX-83-86
BC83-294
54
Nozzle Joint Design
base metal thickness
IX-86-31
BC86-101
137
editorial correction to WPQ
effective operational control
of
(j)
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Subject
Interpretation
Performance Qualification (Cont'd)
electrodes
IX-95-30
employer’s responsibility
IX-01-15
fillet welds
IX-83-04
IX-83-103
IX-86-28
IX-92-45
IX-10-06
fillet welds qualified by
groove welds
IX-83-16
IX-83-98
IX-86-74
IX-89-31
IX-89-87
F-Number qualification
IX-79-52R
IX-80-52R
IX-98-08
further training
IX-83-13
groove welds
IX-83-16
IX-89-20
IX-89-89
IX-89-94
IX-95-04
IX-04-23
hard facing weld metal
overlay
IX-92-02
IX-95-23
machine welding
IX-95-31
macro examination
IX-92-24
maintenance of
IX-86-82
manual/machine welding
substitution
IX-86-68
IX-89-38
manual/semiautomatic
welding substitution
IX-95-36
multiprocess
IX-83-14
IX-83-107
IX-86-13
IX-86-23
IX-86-39
operator variables
IX-83-163
IX-86-05
partial-penetration groove
welds
IX-83-155
P-Number substitutions
IX-83-40
IX-83-42
IX-83-63
IX-83-70
IX-83-116
IX-83-137
IX-86-17
IX-86-18
IX-86-41
IX-86-51
IX-86-72
IX-89-15
IX-89-33
position
IX-83-28
IX-83-108
IX-83-162
IX-83-170
IX-83-177
IX-86-29
File No.
Page
No.
BC96-073
BC01-641
BC82-098
BC83-237
BC86-062
BC92-238
08-210
361
433
8
65
130
292
496
BC82-396
BC84-450
BC87-134
BC89-178
BC90-745
BC79-046*
BC80-435*
BC98-131
BC82-346
BC82-396
BC88-478
BC90-769
BC90-785
BC94-296
BC05-784
13
63
165
204
245
49
49
390
12
13
194
246
249
335
474
BC90-518
BC95-428
BC96-141
BC91-280
BC87-252
262
353
361
272
173
BC87-039
BC89-359
156
213
BC96-314
BC82-302
BC83-550
BC85-507
BC85-553
BC86-299
BC85-022
BC85-306
369
12
67
118
127
140
102
114
BC84-692
BC82-794
BC82-803
BC83-122
BC83-270
BC84-054
BC84-399
BC85-554
BC85-585
BC86-330
BC86-390
BC87-091
BC88-404
BC89-175
BC82-748
BC83-639
BC84-663
BC85-091
BC85-092
BC86-103
98
27
28
40
42
77
87
124
125
141
145
158
188
205
18
68
102
105
108
130
Subject
Interpretation
Performance Qualification (Cont'd)
IX-86-30
IX-86-35
IX-89-24
IX-89-40
IX-89-98
IX-92-15
IX-92-41
IX-92-46
IX-92-90
IX-04-24
process substitution
IX-86-46
production assembly mock-up IX-10-05
IX-10-12
qualification with and without
backing
IX-92-96
IX-01-09
questioning of ability
IX-86-24
recording information on
WPQ
IX-86-13
IX-86-72
IX-89-30
IX-89-47
records
IX-95-38
IX-01-36
renewal of
IX-83-154
IX-83-159
IX-83-164
IX-83-166
IX-83-167
IX-86-07
IX-86-19
IX-86-50
IX-86-52
IX-89-32
IX-92-12
IX-92-22
IX-92-47
IX-92-64
IX-01-21
IX-04-13
requalification after failure
IX-92-56
requalification after failure
and further training
IX-92-73
requalification for friction
weld operator
IX-92-58
requalifying for Addenda
changes
IX-83-112
responsibility of
IX-83-21
IX-83-100
IX-83-101
IX-83-106
IX-83-113
IX-83-117
IX-83-121
IX-83-124
IX-83-128
IX-83-131
IX-83-132
IX-83-133
IX-83-134
IX-92-25
IX-98-14
(k)
File No.
Page
No.
BC86-104
BC86-266
BC89-097
BC89-362
BC91-003
BC91-263
BC92-035
BC92-265
BC93-753
BC05-1195
BC86-219
09-1596
10-13
131
139
196
214
251
267
284
292
324
474
143
495
502
BC94-102
BC01-032
BC86-001
326
428
128
BC85-507
BC87-091
BC89-177
BC89-370
BC96-132
BC02-4198
BC84-689
BC84-690
BC85-023
BC85-030
BC85-031
BC85-560
BC85-587
BC86-389
BC86-394
BC89-100
BC91-264
BC91-425
BC92-266
BC92-464
BC01-035
BC04-1457
BC92-308
118
158
204
217
375
452
97
99
103
104
104
115
125
144
145
203
266
271
292
305
439
466
295
BC93-468
313
BC92-357
296
BC84-038
BC82-499
BC83-563
BC83-529
BC83-630
BC83-055
BC84-133
BC84-134
BC84-149
BC84-226
BC84-365
BC84-366
BC84-370
BC84-396
BC91-415
BC98-447
70
15
63
64
67
71
78
80
81
83
85
85
86
86
272
397
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Subject
Interpretation
Performance Qualification (Cont'd)
IX-10-02
revoking of qualification
IX-95-19
IX-04-21
simultaneous qualification of
welders
IX-92-39
IX-95-14
IX-10-29
special process
IX-89-92
strip electrodes
test coupon qualification
test specimen movement
thickness limitation
type of tests required
ultrasonic examination
units of measurement
using radiography
visual examination
visual inspection
volumetric examination
welder/operator
welder/operator
identification
File No.
Page
No.
09-747
BC95-221
BC05-528
493
352
473
283
345
511
IX-95-30
IX-92-31
IX-86-77
IX-83-90
IX-83-158
IX-89-02
IX-89-24
IX-89-32
IX-89-64
IX-89-83
IX-89-95
IX-89-96
IX-92-36
IX-92-35
IX-92-32
IX-92-51
IX-92-59
IX-95-23
IX-95-28
IX-98-05
IX-98-17
IX-10-35
IX-92-17
IX-92-23
IX-95-35
IX-04-27
IX-83-19
IX-83-52
IX-83-57
IX-83-91
IX-83-142
IX-83-173
IX-83-174
IX-86-34
IX-86-79
IX-86-85
IX-89-21
IX-92-71
IX-95-17
IX-01-03
IX-89-50
IX-10-26
IX-89-48
IX-89-51
IX-89-57
IX-89-63
IX-89-108
IX-95-39
IX-98-11
IX-98-14
IX-07-11
BC92-121
BC95-040
10-339
BC90-681,
BC90-691
BC96-073
BC91-613
BC87-138
BC83-407
BC84-368
BC88-090
BC89-097
BC89-287
BC90-297
BC90-532
BC90-869
BC90-872
BC91-616
BC91-277
BC91-631
BC92-276
BC92-206
BC95-428
BC96-002
BC98-009
BC98-055
11-2030
BC91-315
BC90-494
BC96-287
BC05-1215
BC82-440
BC83-001
BC83-079
BC83-528
BC84-548
BC85-013
BC84-557
BC86-265
BC87-140
BC87-492
BC89-031
BC93-365
BC95-035
BC00-519
BC90-035
09-744
BC89-360
BC90-038
BC90-040
BC90-254
BC91-157
BC96-331
BC98-133
BC98-447
08-1607
248
361
280
166
55
99
181
196
205
225
243
250
250
282
281
280
294
303
353
360
389
403
513
268
270
368
477
14
34
36
56
89
106
107
138
167
174
195
312
351
420
218
510
217
219
221
224
256
375
395
397
489
IX-83-138
NI84-058
88
Subject
Interpretation
Performance Qualification (Cont'd)
welding of joint by more than
one welder
IX-89-06
when welding PQR coupon
IX-83-31
IX-86-90
IX-89-48
IX-10-01
with a tube end gun
IX-83-67
with/without backing
IX-83-168
IX-86-23
File No.
Page
No.
BC88-169
BC82-395
BC88-091
BC89-360
09-567
BC83-123
BC85-059
BC85-553
183
19
176
217
493
41
104
127
Plasma Arc Welding
IX-89-40
BC89-362
214
IX-07-14
IX-10-30
09-486
10-1189
493
511
BC88-041
BC84-697
BC91-257
BC94-365
176
98
265
336
BC88-168
183
BC85-292
113
IX-83-82
IX-83-44
IX-83-75
IX-04-07
BC83-303
BC82-830
BC83-149
BC03-1686
52
29
44
459
IX-83-53
IX-04-28
IX-10-20
IX-83-50
IX-86-86
BC83-002
BC06-323
10-1489
BC82-872
BC87-494
35
478
506
33
175
IX-86-47
IX-07-01
BC86-223
06-285
143
481
IX-92-33
IX-04-15
IX-83-130
IX-83-145
IX-04-03
IX-13-07
IX-98-10
BC91-614
BC04-1595
BC84-252
BC84-584
BC03-1212
12-1230
BC97-306,
BC97-308
BC82-097*
BC82-243
BC06-462
BC82-300
BC85-553
BC87-137
BC01-813
07-1708
BC82-763
BC86-010
280
467
84
90
458
517
P-Numbers
assignments
chemical analysis/mechanical
properties of
IX-86-88
classification of
IX-83-156
IX-92-08
IX-95-05
welding of non-pressure
retaining attachments
IX-89-05
Positions, Brazing
qualification of flow positions IX-86-02
Positions, Welding
fillet welds in vertical-up
progression
listing on the WPS
qualification of 2G position
qualification of 6G position
recording welder qualification
for
stud welding
vertical-down progression
vertical-up progression
Postweld Heat Treatment
addition of
change in base metal
thickness
change in soaking time
limit on maximum time
P8 material
reporting results
temperature ranges
IX-81-30R
IX-83-30
IX-04-29
transformation temperatures IX-83-11
IX-86-23
IX-86-76
IX-01-20
IX-07-06
versus post heating
IX-83-29
IX-86-20
(l)
395
5
18
478
11
127
166
435
483
18
125
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Subject
Interpretation
Postweld Heat Treatment (Cont'd)
when lower critical
temperature has been
exceeded
IX-83-35
Preheat Temperature
maintenance of
Procedure Qualification
acceptance criteria
equipment
essential variables
File No.
BC82-599
BC83-303
BC84-618
52
101
IX-01-18
IX-95-42
IX-89-54
IX-89-59
IX-01-06
IX-89-23
IX-98-06
BC01-772
BC97-044
BC89-367
BC90-250
BC98-240
BC89-096
BC98-009
435
377
220
222
421
196
389
BC94-035
BC91-278
BC95-428
BC98-239
BC00-654
345
267
353
396
420
BC90-253
BC94-235
BC02-3449
BC98-448
09-513
BC93-561
BC96-060
BC94-570
BC02-4075
BC90-531
BC92-110
BC94-235
BC02-3896
224
334
447
397
501
315
368
344
451
237
284
334
447
BC85-132
08-209
BC91-396
BC82-056
08-1464
BC82-790
BC85-532
BC89-362
BC92-011
BC92-206
BC92-011A
BC94-008
BC05-25
10-1966
105
488
270
7
489
32
123
214
291
303
306
326
472
513
BC90-492
BC90-039
BC90-632
BC91-054
BC91-472
BC92-252
BC92-305
BC97-028
233
236
263
264
273
294
295
376
Procedure Qualification Record
additions/corrections to
IX-83-171
IX-07-08
applied lining
IX-92-20
certification of
IX-83-03
IX-07-13
combining PQRs
IX-83-47
IX-86-15
IX-89-40
IX-92-42
IX-92-59
IX-92-68
IX-92-95
IX-04-18
IX-10-34
corrosion-resistant weld
metal overlay, chemical
analysis
IX-89-77
IX-89-71
IX-92-05
IX-92-06
IX-92-28
IX-92-52
IX-92-54
IX-95-41
Interpretation
Procedure Qualification Record (Cont'd)
IX-98-16
IX-10-11
dissimilar base metal
thicknesses
IX-92-11
IX-95-12
IX-98-20R
IX-01-23
IX-04-11
IX-04-16
electrical characteristics
IX-92-88
IX-01-28
IX-04-12
IX-04-14
groove and fillet welds
IX-92-11
IX-92-37
IX-92-34
IX-95-28
hardfacing overlay,
IX-89-77
examination
IX-92-03
IX-92-04
IX-95-23
IX-95-34
IX-98-16
information on
IX-86-70
IX-89-16
listing of backing
IX-86-33
listing of preheat temperature IX-83-165
listing of shielding gas purity IX-95-11
macro examination
IX-92-24
manufacturer’s or
contractor’s responsibility IX-89-73
IX-92-07
IX-92-09
IX-92-16
IX-92-25
IX-92-66
IX-92-67
IX-92-80
IX-92-81
IX-92-92
IX-95-25
IX-95-26
IX-95-27
IX-95-29
IX-95-40
25
IX-83-82
IX-83-161
impact testing
joints
limits of qualified positions
for procedures
IX-95-13
liquid penetrant examination IX-92-13
IX-95-23
nonessential variables
IX-98-13
IX-01-05
partial penetration groove
welds
IX-89-62
IX-95-03
root pass
IX-01-32
seal welds
IX-98-15
solution annealing
IX-10-08
subcontracting
IX-92-78
substrate deposit
IX-95-34
tension tests
IX-95-09
thickness limits
IX-01-35
variables
IX-89-79
IX-92-40
weld repair and buildup tests IX-95-03
welds with buttering
IX-01-33
Subject
Page
No.
meeting requirements of
older editions
notch toughness testing
oscillation
P-Number reassignment
recording test results
(m)
File No.
Page
No.
BC98-453
09-2141
398
502
BC91-263
BC95-027
BC99-539*
BC01-789
BC04-599
BC04-1418
BC93-593
BC02-2691
BC04-1013
BC04-1592
BC91-263
BC92-097
BC91-586
BC96-002
BC90-492
BC90-523
BC90-530
BC95-428
BC96-060
BC98-453
BC87-089
BC88-405
BC82-262
BC85-024
BC95-002
BC91-280
266
345
426
440
465
471
325
445
466
466
266
282
281
360
236
262
263
353
368
398
157
188
138
103
344
272
234
264
265
268
272
305
306
316
316
325
359
359
360
360
IX-98-18
IX-04-26
IX-07-02
BC90-319
BC91-156
BC91-260
BC91-314
BC91-415
BC93-377
BC93-391
BC92-584
BC92-306
BC93-678
BC95-252
BC95-303
BC95-482
BC95-302
BC93-431,
BC95-222
BC99-025
BC05-1196
06-912
376
403
477
481
IX-83-99
IX-83-148
IX-92-86
IX-86-75
IX-86-78
IX-92-50
IX-04-04
IX-98-07
IX-01-22
IX-83-26
IX-83-139
IX-83-172
BC83-472
BC84-417
BC93-658
BC87-136
BC87-139
BC92-217
BC03-1246
BC98-009
BC01-679
BC82-182
BC83-629
BC85-135
63
95
318
165
166
293
458
390
440
12
88
106
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Subject
Interpretation
Procedure Qualification Record (Cont'd)
IX-83-175
requalifying
IX-89-56
IX-89-58
IX-92-62
IX-92-97
revising WPSs
IX-92-57
special process
IX-89-92
File No.
Page
No.
107
221
221
304
327
296
IX-92-44
IX-10-16
IX-92-84
IX-95-21
IX-95-22
IX-98-04
IX-01-17
IX-04-10
IX-10-39
BC85-038
BC90-036
BC90-249
BC92-425
BC94-167
BC92-354
BC90-681,
BC90-691
BC92-168
10-1159
BC93-586
BC95-318
BC95-251
BC97-481
BC01-615
BC04-601
12-178
types of test required
visual examination
IX-92-19
IX-92-53
IX-92-89
IX-95-23
IX-98-03
IX-98-05
IX-98-07
IX-98-17
IX-01-01
IX-04-11
IX-92-17
IX-01-10
BC91-390
BC92-254
BC93-653
BC95-428
BC97-479
BC98-009
BC98-009
BC98-055
BC00-514
BC04-599
BC91-315
BC01-073
269
294
324
353
383
389
390
403
419
465
268
428
Process
definition of
performance qualification
variables for
IX-83-58
IX-83-69
IX-86-12
BC83-086
BC83-233
BC85-482
37
42
117
Production Welds
liquid penetrant examination IX-92-13
BC91-278
267
Supplemental Filler Metal
supporting WPSs
thickness limits and test
specimens
Qualified Thickness Range
performance
for different positions
for dissimilar base metal
thicknesses
for hardfacing overlay
for pipe
for weld overlays
weld reinforcement
procedure
changes in later editions
effect of PWHT
for brazed laps
for cladding
Subject
248
291
504
318
353
353
384
434
464
514
Interpretation
Qualified Thickness Range (Cont'd)
IX-98-16
for dissimilar base metal
thickness
IX-86-89
for double-bevel groove welds IX-83-90
File No.
Page
No.
BC98-453
398
BC88-089
BC83-407
176
55
for groove welds
IX-89-100
IX-89-100R
IX-98-03
IX-92-05
IX-98-05
IX-98-16
IX-83-83
IX-83-126
IX-89-86
IX-83-93
IX-83-126
IX-83-141
IX-86-28
IX-83-81
IX-07-09
BC90-663
BC90-663*
BC97-479
BC90-632
BC98-009
BC98-453
BC83-394
BC84-221
BC90-734
BC83-531
BC84-221
BC84-434
BC86-062
BC83-395
08-576
252
261
383
263
389
398
53
82
245
56
82
89
130
51
488
IX-83-18
IX-95-33
IX-95-28
BC82-423
BC96-001
BC96-002
14
367
360
IX-83-80
IX-95-33
IX-83-102
IX-83-152
IX-86-36
IX-89-83
IX-83-81
IX-89-39
IX-83-36
IX-83-64
IX-89-11
IX-01-12
BC83-388
BC96-001
BC83-551
BC84-648
BC86-280
BC90-532
BC83-395
BC89-361
BC82-757
BC83-222
BC88-399
BC01-201
50
367
65
96
139
243
51
213
25
40
186
430
IX-83-05
IX-83-08
BC82-237
BC82-265
8
10
IX-83-94
IX-86-43
IX-89-18
IX-01-27
IX-04-09
BC83-284
BC86-337
BC88-474
BC02-111
BC04-065
61
142
193
441
464
Records (see also Procedure Qualification Record)
maintenance of performance
qualification
IX-83-32
BC82-598
IX-92-55
BC92-307
IX-01-08
BC01-030
IX-13-06
12-7
19
295
427
516
Root Gap
qualification of
use of term
for hardfacing overlay
for multiprocess procedures
for notch toughness
for weld repair
impact testing
limitation when using
GMAW-S
limitations for combined
procedures
limitations of QW-451
minimum for weld metal
IX-83-23
IX-86-30
BC82-530
BC86-104
15
131
IX-83-123
IX-89-37
IX-01-23
IX-92-05
IX-98-05
IX-83-66
IX-86-29
IX-83-101
IX-86-27
BC84-092
BC89-358
BC01-789
BC90-632
BC98-009
BC83-058
BC86-103
BC83-529
BC86-061
80
212
440
263
389
41
130
64
129
IX-83-07
IX-83-143
IX-83-88
IX-83-11
IX-04-22
IX-83-49
IX-86-21
IX-83-48
BC82-246
BC84-581
BC83-396
BC82-300
BC04-1301
BC82-871
BC86-058
BC82-870
9
89
54
11
473
33
126
32
ranges qualified by PQR
thickness for determining
weld reinforcement
thickness used to determine
range
SFA Specifications
AWS classification change
change in SFA specification
filler metal classification
(n)
IX-83-71
IX-83-04
BC83-230
BC82-098
43
8
IX-83-147
BC84-249
95
IX-01-37
BC03-263
452
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Subject
SFA Specifications (Cont'd)
change of designations in a
classification
change of electrode
classification
Interpretation
File No.
IX-83-59
BC82-614
37
IX-83-61
IX-89-13
IX-92-21
IX-89-08
BC82-831
BC88-402
BC91-397
BC88-172
39
187
270
185
IX-92-94
IX-04-17
IX-89-76
IX-95-13
IX-86-63
IX-83-46
IX-01-29
IX-89-97
IX-83-27
IX-01-25
IX-01-38
BC93-754
BC05-24
BC90-466
BC94-035
BC86-520
BC82-751
BC02-2692
BC90-873
BC82-713
BC01-815
BC03-274
326
471
235
345
154
31
445
251
17
441
452
IX-86-65
IX-01-38
IX-92-61
BC87-031A
BC03-274
BC92-422
155
452
304
Shielding Gases
procedure qualification using IX-83-02
IX-92-62
purity
IX-95-11
BC81-704
BC92-425
BC95-002
6
304
344
SI Units
use of
IX-83-85
BC83-003
53
IX-92-98
IX-95-07
BC94-236
BC94-522
327
343
Standard Welding Procedure Specifications (SWPSs)
use of
IX-01-11
BC01-089
IX-01-14
BC01-332
429
433
Supplementary Essential Variables (see also Variables)
qualifying changes in
IX-83-79
BC83-358
IX-83-122
BC83-645
IX-83-135
BC84-397
use of
IX-01-39
BC03-469
IX-10-21
10-496
50
80
87
453
509
chemistry deviation
classification listed in AWS
specification
electrode characteristics
electrode classification
electrode spacing
heat treatment conditions
marking of packages
mechanical tests
use of
use of different electrode
brands
use of powdered filler metal
S-Numbers
qualification
Test Specimens
acceptance criteria for bend
specimens
IX-83-60
IX-83-115
IX-86-61
IX-89-52
IX-95-15
acceptance criteria for
fracture test
IX-10-32
acceptance criteria for section
test
IX-83-76
IX-83-120
bending of
IX-83-51
IX-10-10
brazing joint clearance
IX-86-11
Subject
Page
No.
38
77
153
219
346
11-939
512
BC83-248
BC83-474
BC82-881
09-2140
BC85-420
44
79
34
502
117
File No.
Page
No.
BC83-689
BC82-749
BC90-632
BC92-421
BC83-253
BC83-300
BC84-581
BC82-182
BC84-583
68
38
263
303
49
50
89
17
90
BC90-042
BC03-1583
BC84-664
BC85-200
BC94-543
08-210
11-896
233
458
97
116
343
510
514
440
29
44
38
265
346
IX-89-107
IX-83-74
IX-86-71
IX-86-37
IX-86-38
BC01-814
BC82-822
BC83-248
BC82-749
BC91-261
BC95-094
BC98-237,
BC98-238
BC91-124
BC82-867
BC87-090
BC86-297
BC86-298
396
255
44
157
139
140
IX-92-68
IX-86-83
BC92-011
BC87-489A
306
174
IX-92-37
IX-89-99
IX-86-40
IX-89-07
IX-89-45
IX-92-29
IX-13-04
IX-83-65
IX-89-25
IX-89-90
IX-92-76
IX-92-79
IX-01-21
IX-83-15
IX-83-119
IX-92-79
IX-86-26
IX-83-38
IX-83-73
IX-86-45
BC92-097
BC91-022
BC86-329
BC88-171
BC89-368
BC91-473
12-120
BC83-225
BC89-099
BC90-532
BC93-515
BC93-583
BC01-035
BC82-388
BC84-253
BC93-583
BC86-059
BC82-771
BC82-866
BC86-366
282
251
141
184
216
279
516
40
197
247
314
315
439
13
79
315
129
26
43
142
BC91-096
253
BC90-537
237
Test Specimens (Cont'd)
calibration of testing
machines
cold straightening of
corrosion-resistant overlay
IX-83-109
IX-83-60
IX-92-05
IX-92-60
determining coupon thickness IX-83-77
IX-83-78
IX-83-143
dimensions recorded on PQR IX-83-26
IX-83-144
face and root bends,
transverse
IX-89-72
IX-04-05
failure of
IX-83-153
IX-86-09
fillet welds
IX-95-08
IX-10-27
IX-10-36
for impact testing for
multiprocess welds
IX-01-24
for multiprocess welds
IX-83-43
for peel or section tests
IX-83-76
grinding of overlay specimens IX-83-60
guided-bend tests
IX-92-10
IX-95-15
IX-98-12
longitudinal bend
mandrel size
method of restraint
minimum weld metal deposit
thickness
nondestructive testing of
number of tension test
specimens
partial penetration
product form
qualification of
BC82-749
BC83-279
BC86-515
BC90-044
BC95-094
Interpretation
quarter section
reduced section
removal
roll planishing
size of specimen required
tension, full section for small
diameter pipe
IX-89-103
tension, reduced section for
lap and rabbet joints, plate IX-89-81
(o)
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Subject
Test Specimens (Cont'd)
tension test
tension test results
test jig dimensions for bend
tests
tolerances
transverse bend
tube-to-tubesheet
turned tensile specimen
using radiography
visual requirements
Interpretation
File No.
Page
No.
IX-04-01
IX-04-25
IX-07-12
IX-92-14
IX-92-63
IX-95-06
IX-95-09
IX-98-09
BC02-3586
BC05-1404
08-1161
BC91-279
BC92-452
BC94-542
BC94-570
BC97-302
457
474
489
267
304
336
344
395
IX-92-48
IX-92-49
IX-95-02
IX-89-107
IX-13-02
IX-13-05
IX-10-37
IX-83-157
IX-86-62
IX-01-04
IX-83-149
IX-01-04
BC92-267
BC92-268
BC94-181
BC91-124
12-752
12-1563
11-2029
BC84-700
BC86-517
BC00-653
BC84-558
BC00-653
293
293
333
255
515
516
514
98
153
420
95
420
BC84-250*
BC89-369
BC89-371
11-918
11-1339
137
216
220
512
512
BC90-289
BC82-514
NI83-004
BC83-279
BC84-365
BC82-385
BC84-398
BC95-318
BC95-251
BC82-751
BC81-160
BC87-137
225
25
39
77
85
30
87
353
353
31
16
166
BC83-042
BC90-430
BC87-253
BC82-056
BC85-483
BC90-531
BC90-671
09-588
35
227
167
7
126
243
244
496
BC82-794
BC82-182
09-558
27
17
511
Unlisted Materials (Non-Code Material)
A-Number classification
IX-83-140R
IX-89-46
IX-89-55
IX-10-31
IX-10-33
identifying welding electrodes
in cartons
IX-89-65
P-Numbers for
IX-83-34
IX-83-62
IX-83-115
IX-83-131
qualification of
IX-83-45
IX-83-136
IX-95-21
IX-95-22
SAW flux/wire combinations IX-83-46
use of filler metals
IX-83-25
IX-86-76
Variables
changes to the WPS
IX-83-54
IX-89-70
flexible welding back-up tape IX-86-80
listing on the WPS
IX-83-03
IX-86-14
IX-89-82
IX-89-85
IX-10-07
ranges demonstrated on the
PQR
IX-83-40
recording on the PQR
IX-83-26
IX-10-28
Subject
Interpretation
Welding Procedure Specification (Cont'd)
IX-13-09
certification
IX-83-03
IX-89-43
changes in
IX-83-37
IX-83-118
IX-83-125
IX-83-150
IX-86-67
IX-92-30
IX-10-13
combination of processes
IX-83-164
IX-86-01
IX-86-06
IX-86-23
IX-86-56
IX-86-60
IX-86-87
IX-89-26
IX-89-67
IX-95-10
IX-04-08
IX-10-24
combining of
IX-86-08
IX-92-75
IX-92-77
contents of
IX-13-03
electrical characteristics
IX-95-18
IX-07-03
for corrosion-resistant weld
metal overlay
IX-86-59
IX-89-12
IX-95-41
IX-10-19
for weld repair / buildup
IX-83-160
IX-10-15
information recorded on
IX-83-127
IX-86-04
IX-86-10
IX-86-14
IX-86-54
IX-89-03
IX-89-16
IX-89-19
IX-95-11
manufacturer’s and
contractor’s responsibility IX-89-73
IX-92-07
IX-92-80
IX-92-81
IX-95-25
IX-95-26
IX-95-27
IX-95-29
IX-95-40
Welder Qualification (see Performance Qualification)
Welding Operator Qualification (see Performance Qualification)
Welding Procedure Specification
base metal thickness
IX-04-09
BC04-65
meeting requirements of
older editions
464
(p)
File No.
Page
No.
12-1833
BC82-056
BC89-365
BC82-770
BC84-183
BC84-151
BC84-617
BC87-038
BC91-587
09-1368
BC85-023
BC85-036
BC85-328
BC85-553
BC86-429
BC86-514A
BC87-490A
BC89-103
BC90-335
BC94-662
BC03-1770
11-216
BC85-134
BC93-490
BC93-518
11-1476
BC95-220
07-1041
517
7
215
26
78
81
96
155
279
503
103
113
115
127
146
152
175
197
226
344
464
510
116
313
314
515
351
481
BC86-458
BC88-401
BC97-028
09-2143
BC84-219
10-359
BC84-224
BC85-304
BC85-307
BC85-483
BC86-400
BC88-166A
BC88-405
BC88-476
BC95-002
152
187
376
506
100
503
83
114
117
123
146
182
188
194
344
234
264
316
316
359
359
360
360
IX-01-02
IX-98-02
IX-01-40
IX-07-02
IX-10-25
BC90-319
BC91-156
BC93-584
BC92-306
BC95-252
BC95-303
BC95-482
BC95-302
BC93-431,
BC95-222
BC00-553
BC97-309
BC03-740
06-912
11-44
376
419
383
453
481
510
IX-92-86
BC93-158
318
SECTION IX — CUMULATIVE INDEX — INTERPRETATIONS VOLS. 12-62
Subject
Interpretation
Welding Procedure Specification (Cont'd)
multiple layers
IX-04-02
P-Number
IX-89-36
IX-89-58
P-Number reassignment
IX-07-05
preliminary
IX-10-22
qualification
IX-89-04
IX-89-35
IX-89-66
IX-95-01
requalification of
IX-89-14
IX-89-42
IX-89-17
IX-89-41
IX-89-54
IX-92-38
IX-95-04
IX-95-16
IX-04-20
IX-07-05
short circuiting mode
IX-95-28
File No.
Page
No.
BC03-1029
BC89-357
BC90-249
04-600
10-1158
BC88-167
BC89-307
BC90-281
BC94-104
BC88-403
BC89-364
BC88-473
BC89-363
BC89-367
BC91-630
BC94-296
BC95-095
BC05-293
04-600
BC96-002
457
212
221
482
509
182
211
226
333
187
215
193
214
220
283
335
346
472
482
360
Subject
Interpretation
Welding Procedure Specification (Cont'd)
IX-95-33
supplemental filler metal
IX-10-16
supplied to welder
IX-83-17
support of
IX-83-146
IX-86-42
IX-86-55
IX-89-26
IX-89-68
transfer mode
IX-07-03
units of measurement
IX-04-27
use for an unassigned
material
IX-89-41
IX-01-07
IX-10-14
use of at job sites
IX-83-12
use of by subcontractor
IX-86-49
weld joint
IX-89-53
IX-95-01
(q)
File No.
Page
No.
BC96-001
10-1159
BC82-422
BC84-619
BC86-331
BC86-426
BC89-103
BC90-349
07-1041
BC05-1215
367
504
13
90
141
146
197
227
481
477
BC89-363
BC01-029
09-2144
BC82-341
BC86-367
BC90-045
BC94-104
214
427
503
11
144
219
333
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
(r)
Boiler and
2013 ASME
Pressure Vessel Code
AN INTERNATIONAL CODE
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) is “An International Historic Mechanical
Engineering Landmark,” widely recognized as a model for codes and standards worldwide.
Its development process remains open and transparent throughout, yielding “living
documents” that have improved public safety and facilitated trade across global markets
and jurisdictions for nearly a century.
ASME also provides BPVC users with integrated suites of related offerings:
• referenced standards
• training and development courses
• related standards and guidelines
• ASME Press books and journals
• conformity assessment programs
• conferences and proceedings
You gain unrivaled insight direct from the BPVC source, along with the professional
quality and real-world solutions you have come to expect from ASME.
For additional information and to order:
Phone:
1.800.THE.ASME (1.800.843.2763)
Email:
customercare@asme.org
Website: go.asme.org/bpvc13
600090
27. 2013 ASME FINAL Covers_IX Qual Std MECH 5.9.indd 2
5/15/13 5:10 PM